JP7060129B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines , gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, a variable display of a symbol is performed on a display device, and a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed, so that a winning game advantageous to the player is given. In addition to the symbols, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device, and a wide variety of hobby effects are performed to improve the hobby of the game .

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886

However, further improvement of interest is required.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a predetermined specific discrimination result. A first effect executing means capable of executing a first effect for showing a determination result of the determination means, and a first effect executing means, which has a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the above. A second effect executing means for executing a second effect configured to include at least a predetermined specific aspect in a predetermined first effect period included in the effect execution period, and a predetermined first effect. Based on the condition that the condition is satisfied, the first specific effect executing means for executing the first specific effect during the execution of the second effect, and the effect of the first specific effect executed by the first specific effect executing means. As an aspect, a first effect aspect that determines one of a plurality of effect modes including at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode that can be suggested to be more advantageous to the player than the first effect mode. The determination means and the second effect period, which is a period included in the execution period of the first effect and later than the first effect period, are configured to include at least the specific aspect. A third effect executing means for executing the three effects, a second specific effect executing means for executing the second specific effect during the execution of the third effect based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition, and a second specific effect executing means. As an effect mode of the second specific effect executed by the second specific effect execution means, a second effect mode is determined which includes at least one of the first effect mode and the second effect mode. The third effect executing means includes the effect mode determining means, and the third effect executing means is the case where the first specific effect executed during the execution period of the first effect of 1 is the first effect mode. The third effect can be executed in the second effect period included in the execution period of the first effect of 1, and the gaming machine executes the first effect for showing the specific determination result. In this case, the first situation in which the second effect is executed but the third effect is not executed by the end of the first effect, and the second effect by the end of the first effect. It is a configuration in which one of a plurality of situations including at least a second situation in which both of the third effect and the third effect are executed can be established, and is the first effect for showing the specific determination result. The ratio at which the second effect mode is determined by the first effect mode determining means in the first effect in which the first situation is established is the previous. In the first effect for showing a specific determination result and the second situation is satisfied, the ratio is higher than the rate at which the second effect mode is determined by the first effect mode determining means. The first effect executing means is specified to execute a pseudo-dynamic display mode in which a predetermined symbol is dynamically displayed and then temporarily stopped during the effect period of the first effect of 1. The configuration is such that the specific first effect including at least the effect mode can be executed, and the second effect and the third effect can be executed in a predetermined period before the new pseudo-dynamic display mode is executed. The first specific effect and the second specific effect are effects that can suggest that the new pseudo-dynamic display mode is executed .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the discriminating means that executes the discriminant based on the establishment of the discriminant condition and the discriminant result of the discriminating means become a predetermined specific discriminant result. In the first effect executing means capable of executing the first effect for showing the determination result of the determination means, and the execution period of the first effect. The second effect executing means for executing the second effect configured to include at least a predetermined specific mode in the included predetermined first effect period, and the predetermined first condition are satisfied. Based on the above, as a first specific effect executing means for executing the first specific effect during the execution of the second effect, and as an effect mode of the first specific effect executed by the first specific effect executing means, the first A first effect mode determining means for determining one of a plurality of effect modes including at least one effect mode and a second effect mode that can be suggested to be more advantageous to the player than the first effect mode, and the above-mentioned. In the second effect period, which is a period included in the execution period of the first effect and is a period after the first effect period, the third effect configured including at least the specific aspect is executed. The second specific effect execution means for executing the second specific effect during the execution of the third effect and the second specific effect based on the establishment of the third effect execution means and the predetermined second condition. As an effect mode of the second specific effect executed by the executing means, a second effect mode determining means for determining one of a plurality of effect modes including at least the first effect mode and the second effect mode. , And the third effect executing means is the first effect in the case where the first specific effect executed during the execution period of the first effect of 1 is the first effect mode. When the third effect can be executed in the second effect period included in the execution period of the first effect, and the gaming machine executes the first effect for showing the specific determination result, the gaming machine can execute the first effect. The first situation in which the second effect is executed but the third effect is not executed by the end of the first effect, and the second effect and the third effect by the end of the first effect. A second situation in which both of the above are executed, and a configuration in which one of a plurality of situations including at least one can be established, and the first effect for showing the specific determination result and the first situation. The ratio at which the second effect mode is determined by the first effect mode determining means in the first effect is determined by the specific determination result. It is the first effect for showing, and the ratio is higher than the ratio at which the second effect mode is determined by the first effect mode determining means in the first effect in which the second situation is satisfied . The first effect executing means is specified to include at least a specific effect mode in which a pseudo-dynamic display mode in which a predetermined symbol is dynamically displayed and then temporarily stopped during the effect period of the first effect is executed a plurality of times. The first effect is a configuration in which the first effect can be executed, and the second effect and the third effect are effects that can be executed in a predetermined period before the new pseudo-dynamic display mode is executed, and the first effect. The specific effect and the second specific effect are effects that can suggest that the new pseudo-dynamic display mode is executed .

This has the effect of improving the player's interest in the game .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a front perspective view of the right variable winning device when the opening / closing door is closed, and (b) is a front perspective view of the right variable winning device when the opening / closing door is open. It is a top view of the right variable winning apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the standby state effect executed in the jackpot standby state. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control unit in the first embodiment, and (b) is a random number table per first set in the ROM of the main control unit in the first embodiment. It is a figure which showed the regulation contents schematically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the first type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is the main control in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the rule contents of the 2nd random number table set in the ROM of the apparatus. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is the definition of the variation pattern table for jackpot in the first embodiment. It is a figure which showed the contents schematically, (c) is a figure which showed the specified contents of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table in the 1st Embodiment schematically, and (d) is the figure which showed the 1st embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed the defined contents of the variation pattern table for deviation (probability variation) in a form. It is a figure which showed schematically the structure of various counters in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment. .. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface B. It is a figure which showed the example of the display data table in 1st Embodiment schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the transfer data table in 1st Embodiment schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the drawing list in 1st Embodiment schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead process which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through-gate passage processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit-related processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop type command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the standby state command processing executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a round executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the numerical command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ending command processing which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the rule contents of the 1st type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot start process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the hit-related process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the standby state command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case where a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol during the probability change state in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the case of a small hit in the third embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in a hit state. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first random number table, and (b) is the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of. It is a flowchart which showed the main process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the hit-related command process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a standby state effect while the left actuated winning opening is in a state where a ball can be entered in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the standby state effect, and (b) is a diagram showing the fourth embodiment. In the form, it is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the standby state effect while the right actuating winning opening is in a state which can enter a ball. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot start process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the hit | related process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM of the main control unit in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is the first type selection table set in the ROM of the main control unit in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the rule contents schematically, and (c) is a figure which shows typically the rule contents of the period length selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the interval setting process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit in 5th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a top view of the right variable winning apparatus in the sixth embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode when a right-handed expectation suggestion effect is set as an effect mode during super reach in the sixth embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode when a right-handed expectation suggestion effect is set as an effect mode during super reach in the sixth embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the change over time in the effect mode when the special symbol lottery is a big hit and the right-handed expectation suggestion effect is set in the sixth embodiment. ) Is a diagram schematically showing the change with time of the effect mode when the special symbol lottery is missed and the right-handed expectation suggestion effect is set in the sixth embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the sixth embodiment. be. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the effect mode selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the effect update process 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a notification start determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the effect mode selection process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 7th Embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, it is a figure schematically showing the time-dependent change of the effect mode in the case of a left-triggered jackpot. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the opening effect of the left-triggered jackpot in the seventh embodiment, and (b) shows an example of the display mode after the opening effect of the left-triggered jackpot is completed. It is a figure. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pseudo normal state effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the hit | related process 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the standby state command process 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 1st control example. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display mode in the probability change state in the first control example, and (b) is the display when the music selection menu screen is displayed during the probability change state in the first control example. It is a figure which showed an example of an aspect. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen displayed when the music selection mode in the first control example is entered, and (b) is a diagram showing an example in the music selection mode in the first control example. , Is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when an operation for an operation button is detected. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. .. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the item arrangement storage area set in the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is the figure showing the voice lamp control in the first control example. It is a figure which schematically showed the defined content of the music selection number storage area set in the RAM of the apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the audio output device in the 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio output device in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio output device in the first control example. It is a figure which schematically showed the defined content of the audio file storage area set in the ROM of the audio output device in the 1st control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the structure of the music data group in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the operation detection process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the state command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the hit | related process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the MPU in the voice output device in the first control example, and (b) is a command executed by the MPU in the voice output device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the interrupt process. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process which is executed by the MPU in the voice output device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the audio setting process executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the 1st control example. It is a figure which showed the correspondence relation with the transition of the state of a big hit in the 2nd control example, and the transition of a voice mode. It is a figure which showed an example of the correspondence relationship between the transition of the jackpot state and the transition of the music part when it is determined that the reproduction order is rearranged at the rearrangement determination timing 1 set for the jackpot in the second control example. .. It is a figure which showed an example of the correspondence relationship between the transition of the jackpot state and the transition of the music part when it is determined that the reproduction order is rearranged in the rearrangement determination timing 2 set for the jackpot in the second control example. .. In the jackpot in the second control example, it is a figure schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the transition of the jackpot state and the transition of the part of the music when it is determined that the start timing of the ending effect is delayed. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the second control example. .. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the rearrangement determination table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a figure which schematically showed the regulation contents of the ending effect selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the audio output device in the 2nd control example. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the audio output device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the operation detection process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the ending effect start determination process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the hit-related process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the music selection period setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the interval command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the music command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process 9 executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice output device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot music-related processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the voice setting process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice output device in the 2nd control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a music selection menu screen in the third control example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode during execution of a jackpot in which a pseudo-small round effect is set in the third control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the third control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the third control example. .. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the random music selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the operation detection process 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the music | music determination process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the hit | related process 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the pseudo small round lottery processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the round number command process 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the interval command processing 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. .. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the pseudo small round lottery table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. It is a figure which shows schematically the regulation contents of the priority rule table set in the ROM of. It is a figure which shows typically the regulation contents of the chorus loop discrimination table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the audio output device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process 11 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the operation detection process 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the music | music determination process 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the rust partial loop processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the hit | related process 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the pseudo small round lottery process 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the round number command process 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the music selection period setting process 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the history area setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the interval command processing 11 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the selected music setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process 11 executed by MPU in the voice output control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 11 executed by the MPU in the voice output control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the provisional music selection command processing executed by MPU in the voice output control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the process during the provisional music selection period executed by the MPU in the audio output control device in 4th control example. It is a figure which showed an example of the contents of the play count storage area during production set in the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the modification of the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the history area setting process 12 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of the 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 12 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of the 4th control example. It is a front view of the gaming board of the pachinko machine in the eighth embodiment. (A) is a figure showing the case where the game ball reaches the gate induction valve in the closed state in the eighth embodiment from above, and (b) is the figure which showed the case of the gate induction valve in the eighth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the case which the gate induction valve was opened with the game ball stopped on the upper surface, and (c) is the figure which the gate induction valve in 8th Embodiment was opened and the game ball which was stopped fell. It is a figure which showed the case which the gate induction valve was closed immediately after that. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which the game ball in the eighth embodiment is rolling on the inner wall of the three-hole crune, and (b) is a diagram in which the game ball enters the MAX operation winning opening and the like. It is a figure which showed the state which the non-electric accessory was opened in conjunction with. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of an ending effect when a big hit ends in a state where the special MAX operation winning opening in the eighth embodiment is open, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the ending effect. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode (stand-by state effect) in the jackpot standby state when the jackpot is won during the MAX zone in the form. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device when the number of time reductions is completed during the MAX zone in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device, and (b) is a diagram showing the MAX zone in the eighth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device when the MAX zone ends by entering the special MAX operation winning opening. It is a figure which shows typically the rule contents of the 1st type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot start process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the hit | related process 12 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the winning opening type command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 9th Embodiment. It is an enlarged front view of the lottery apparatus in 9th Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing the case where a plurality of game balls enter the inside of the lottery device in a state where both the ball discharge door and the ball stop portion in the ninth embodiment are closed, and (b). Is a figure showing a state in which the ball discharge door is opened while the game ball that has entered the inside of the lottery device according to the ninth embodiment is stopped. (A) and (b) are top views of the distribution rotating body in the ninth embodiment. It is a figure which shows schematically the operation pattern of each part of the lottery apparatus in the case of a small hit in the lottery of the 2nd special symbol in 9th Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the special small hit effect for low expectation in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is the figure which showed the special small hit effect for high expectation in the ninth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control unit according to the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a random number table per first set in the ROM of the main control unit according to the ninth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the regulation contents schematically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the first type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first type selection table, and (b) is the main control in the ninth embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed the regulation contents of the small hit type selection table set in the ROM of a device. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 9th Embodiment. a) is a block diagram showing the structure of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is the expectation degree selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the regulation contents schematically. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control apparatus in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation process 13 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process 13 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 9th Embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a small hit start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process 13 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 9th Embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing the main process 13 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the ninth embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a jackpot control process 13 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a small hit control process 13 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a V-passage detection process executed by the MPU in the main control unit according to the ninth embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing a hit-related process 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device according to the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the expectation degree suggestion setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the V winning opening command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the V passage detection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the modification of 9th Embodiment. It is a front view of the gaming board of the pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment. It is an enlarged front view around the lottery apparatus in 10th Embodiment. (A) is an enlarged front view around the guide flow path in a state where both the upper opening / closing door and the lower opening / closing door in the tenth embodiment are closed, and (b) is the upper opening / closing in the tenth embodiment. It is an enlarged front view around the guide flow path in a state where the door is opened and the lower opening / closing door is closed, and in (c), both the upper opening / closing door and the lower opening / closing door in the tenth embodiment are opened. It is an enlarged front view around the induction flow path in a state. It is a top view of the distribution rotating body in the tenth embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed the operation pattern of each part in the lottery apparatus during execution of a small hit game in tenth embodiment. (A) to (d) are diagrams showing an opening pattern set for a small hit attacker when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol in the tenth embodiment. (A) to (c) are diagrams showing an opening pattern set for a small hit attacker when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol in the tenth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the selection effect which is executed when the lottery of the 1st special symbol in 10th Embodiment becomes a small hit. (A) is a diagram showing the time course of the display mode when the V challenge small hit is won in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is the effect when the normal small hit is won in the tenth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the time-dependent change of an aspect. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the first random number table, and (b) is the main control device in the tenth embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the small hit type selection table set in the ROM of. FIG. 1 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special figure 1 small hit table set in the ROM of the main control device in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special figure 2 small hit table set in the ROM of the main control device in the tenth embodiment. It is an enlarged front view around the guide flow path of the lottery apparatus in the 1st modification of the 10th Embodiment. It is a figure which showed the special opening pattern which is set when the special small hit of the 2nd special symbol is won in the 1st modification of the 10th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are top views showing the portion on the right side of the ball discharge door in the induction flow path of the lottery device in the second modification of the tenth embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the operation support effect in the eleventh embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a character image of a character mode with low expectation is displayed during execution of the operation support effect in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the case where the character image of the character mode with high expectation of development is displayed during the execution of the operation support effect in an embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, it is a figure which showed the effect period when the operation support effect is set for the fluctuation pattern of super reach. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode when the first action of the mini character notice effect in the eleventh embodiment is executed. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the second action of the mini character notice effect in the eleventh embodiment is executed, and (b) is the third of the mini character notice effect in the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode when an action is executed. It is a figure which showed the time-dependent change of the production mode of the mini character notice production in the eleventh embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the fluctuation time and the action timing of the mini character when the mini character notice effect is set for the fluctuation pattern of the long deviation in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing. , (C) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the fluctuation time and the action timing of the mini character when the mini character notice effect with a low expectation is set for the fluctuation pattern out of the normal reach in the eleventh embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, it is a diagram showing the correspondence between the fluctuation time and the action timing of the mini character when the mini character notice effect with a low expectation is set for the fluctuation pattern of the hit normal reach. (A) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the fluctuation time and the action timing of the mini character when the mini character notice effect of the medium expectation degree is set for the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach deviation in the eleventh embodiment. (B) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the fluctuation time and the action timing of the mini character when the mini character notice effect of the medium expectation degree is set for the fluctuation pattern of the hit normal reach in the eleventh embodiment. (C) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the fluctuation time and the action timing of the mini character when the mini character notice effect with high expectation is set for the fluctuation pattern out of the normal reach in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 1D is a diagram showing the correspondence between the fluctuation time and the action timing of the mini character when the mini character notice effect with high expectation is set for the fluctuation pattern of the hit normal reach in the eleventh embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode in the case where a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol during the time saving state of the normal symbol in the eleventh embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the eleventh embodiment. .. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the character mode selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a hit (development) of the character mode selection table in the eleventh embodiment. It is the figure which showed the rule contents of the table for (before completion) schematically, and (c) is the figure which showed the rule contents of the table for hit (after the completion of development) of the character mode selection table in the eleventh embodiment schematically. Is. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the table for deviation (before completion of development) of the character mode selection table in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the deviation of the character mode selection table in the eleventh embodiment. It is the figure which showed the rule contents of the table (after the development completion) schematically. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the mini character effect selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a small V challenge of the mini character effect selection table in the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure which showed the regulation contents of the hit table schematically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the normal small hit table of the mini character effect selection table in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is the non-small hit of the mini character effect selection table in the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure which showed the rule contents of a table schematically. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the small hit time effect selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is the small hit time effect selection table in the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows the ruled content of the table for small hit H14 to J14 schematically, and (c) is the figure which schematically shows the ruled content of the table for small hit K14 to M14 of the small hit time effect selection table in eleventh embodiment. It is a figure shown in. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit start process 14 executed by the MPU in the main control device in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit control process 14 executed by the MPU in the main control device in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process 14 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 14 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the operation support effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the development determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the character mode setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the mini character setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the various setting button input monitoring processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the limited period setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing a hit-related process 14 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit type command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the operation content command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display setting process 14 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the support effect setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the action timing determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in eleventh embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 14 executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the action command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in eleventh embodiment. It is a top view of the guide flow path of the lottery apparatus in the twelfth embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode during execution of the operation support effect in the twelfth embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode when a volume setting item is selected during execution of the operation support effect in the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure which schematically showed the operation pattern of each part in the lottery apparatus during execution of a small hit game in 12th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device according to the twelfth embodiment. .. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the button mode selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the button mode selection table in the twelfth embodiment. It is the figure which showed the ruled content of the hit (non-operation) table schematically, and (c) is the figure which showed the ruled content of the hit (operation) table of the button mode selection table in the twelfth embodiment schematically. Is. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the table for removing (non-operation) of the button mode selection table in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is the figure showing the deviation of the button mode selection table in the twelfth embodiment (b). It is the figure which showed the rule contents of the table for operation) schematically. 12 is a flowchart showing various setting button input monitoring processes 15 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing various setting button input monitoring processes 15 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of pressing the up / down button executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of pressing the left-right button executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the light intensity setting in the twelfth embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and entry ports 64, 640, 67, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by the game ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 guides the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that launches the game ball to the front region of the game board 13 and the game ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. A launch rail (not shown) is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing game balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the game ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which will be described later, is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, a game ball is operated according to the operation. Is lent out. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine, a so-called cash machine, in which a game ball is directly lent to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit is not required. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion of the 40 to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. ing. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the game ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and the ball launching unit 112a is allowed to be driven inside the operation handle 51. A touch sensor 51a for pressing, a push button type stop switch 51b that stops the firing of the game ball during the pressing operation, and a variable that detects the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the change in electric resistance. It has a built-in resistor (not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the game ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

In this embodiment, the configuration is not limited to the above, but the configuration is such that the main control device 110 and other control devices detect the game ball launched by the ball launching unit 112a, and the solenoid of the ball launching unit 112a. May be configured to detect that has fired a game ball. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until a process such as RAM clear is executed.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the game ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the game ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The game ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the game balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, general winning openings 63, and the first. 1 ball entry port 64, a second ball entry port 640, a variable winning device 65, an operating winning opening 660, a variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled and configured, and a peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the operating winning opening 660, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is installed and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of the ball. The game area is a substantially circular area (a starting port or the like is arranged and fired from a game ball) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. Is the area where Further, the game area includes all areas in which the game ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out opening 66 and the winning opening.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the game ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 8) to the upper part of the game board 13. At the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper left portion in FIG. 2), an actuating winning opening 660 into which a game ball can enter is provided. The operation winning opening 660 shifts to a jackpot state (special game state), which is an advantageous state for the player when the game ball enters. More specifically, when a big hit is determined in the lottery of the special symbol (first symbol), it is set to a state (big hit standby state) in which the entry into the operation winning opening 660 is valid. In the normal state, even if the game ball enters the operation winning opening 660, it does not affect the game at all. In the jackpot standby state, the player fires the game ball toward the actuated winning opening 660, so that the game ball enters the actuated winning opening (winning) and the jackpot is started. As shown in FIG. 2, a rotating member 670a that rotates at a constant rotational speed is arranged in the left direction of the front view of the operating winning opening 660. The rotating member 670a can be arranged to prevent the game ball launched toward the operating winning opening 660 from moving toward the operating winning opening 660 according to its rotation position, or to prevent the game ball from moving toward the operating winning opening 660. Unless the game ball is launched aiming at the timing at which the moving member 670a does not interfere with the game ball, the game ball cannot be entered into the operation winning opening 660 (the jackpot can be started). Therefore, when it is determined as a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol, the game ball can be launched in consideration of the arrangement of the rotating member 670a, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 2, the actuated winning opening 660 is provided at the end of a flow path (flow path for actuating winning opening) having a width wider than one game ball and narrower than two. A game ball launched with a predetermined range of firing intensity (for example, a firing intensity in the range of 95% to 100%) including at least the maximum momentum (launching intensity) reaches (flows into) this flow path for the operating winning opening. It is configured as follows. Therefore, if it is determined as a big hit by a lottery of a special symbol and the big hit standby state is reached, when aiming at the operation winning opening 660, it is easy to simply rotate the handle 51 to the maximum range in which it can be moved. A game ball can be entered into the activated winning opening 660.

A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61. The game ball launched at a predetermined firing intensity (for example, the firing intensity is in the range of 90% to 95%) hits the return rubber 69 and is repelled toward the central portion while the momentum is attenuated. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base between the lower right tip portion of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip portion of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, when a game ball enters either the first entry slot 64 or the second entry slot 640, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and the game ball is normally entered. When the ball mouth 67 is passed, a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640, it is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit or not, and it is judged as a special symbol big hit. If so, the jackpot type is also determined. When the special symbol becomes a big hit, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the specified winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, wins a predetermined number of winning balls until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses). (Up to) is released, and the opening is repeated the number of times (number of rounds) according to the jackpot type. As a result, a large amount of game balls are won in the specific prize opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls is paid out than usual. There are 6 types of special symbols, "Big hit A" to "Big hit F", and after the end of the special game state, as added value after the end of the big hit, the game according to the result of the big hit game. Value (game value) is given to the player. The three types of "big hits A to C" are the big hit types that can be determined when a big hit is obtained in a special symbol lottery executed when the game ball enters the first entrance 64. The three types of "big hits D to F" are big hits that can be determined when a special symbol lottery is executed when the game ball enters the second entrance 640. It is a type. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of the explanation, the lottery of the special symbol executed when the game ball enters the first entrance 64 is referred to as the first special symbol lottery, and the game ball is the first. 2 The lottery of special symbols executed when the ball enters the entrance 640 is called the second special symbol lottery.

When the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts variable display of the special symbol, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 90 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result is obtained. The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When a game ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry times is determined for each type of entry opening. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed and the lottery is performed. , The variable display according to the lottery is started.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the game ball at the normal entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is determined. When it hits a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is changed to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), so that the second ball entry port 640 is opened. Be released. Since the electric accessory 640a is normally arranged at the closed position, the second entry port 640 is closed. Therefore, it becomes impossible (difficult) for the ball that has flowed down from above the front view toward the second entrance 640 to enter the second entrance 640 because it is blocked by the electric accessory 640a. .. On the other hand, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a is opened, so that the ball flowing down toward the second entry port 640 can easily enter the second entry port 640. As a result, the lottery of the second special symbol becomes easy to be performed.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, the normal symbol is displayed. The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the game ball passes through the normal entry port 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the first symbol display device 37. It is also indicated by the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entry port 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is displayed. It will be started.

As described above, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, six types of "big hit A" to "big hit F" are provided.

When it becomes "big hit A", it becomes a special game state (8 rounds big hit) in which the number of rounds is 8 rounds. On the other hand, when it becomes "big hit B" or "big hit C", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 5 rounds (5 rounds big hit), and when it becomes "big hit D", the number of rounds becomes 16 rounds of a special game state (16 rounds). When it becomes "big hit E" and "big hit F", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 10 rounds (10 round big hit). Furthermore, when the result is "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit D", or "big hit E", the game shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol) after the big hit ends. In addition, when the high probability state of the special symbol is given, the hit probability of the normal symbol is also increased (the time saving state of the normal symbol is given). The high-probability state of the special symbol and the time-saving state of the normal symbol continue from the end of the big hit until the next big hit. On the other hand, when it becomes "big hit C" or "big hit F", the time saving state of the normal symbol is given after the big hit ends, but the high probability state of the special symbol is not given. The time saving state of the normal symbol given after the end of this "big hit C" or "big hit F" ends when the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called "high probability state of the special symbol" (probability change state of the special symbol), in other words, a special gaming state. It is a state of the game where it is easy to shift to (big hit). On the other hand, the case where it is not the "high probability state of the special symbol" is called the "low probability state of the special symbol", which means that the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates a state (low probability state of a special symbol). In addition, the "time saving state of the normal symbol" (high probability state of the normal symbol) means a gaming state in which the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased and the game ball can easily enter the second entrance 640. .. On the other hand, when it is not the "normal state of the normal symbol", it is called the "normal state of the normal symbol" (low probability state of the normal symbol). Indicates a state in which the probability of winning is low.

As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot is different depending on the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be the same for all jackpot types (for example, all 5 rounds). Further, in the present embodiment, the "probability change state of the special symbol" given after the big hit is continued until the next big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the period in which the "probability change state of the special symbol" continues may be limited to the period until the number of lottery of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). In this case, the number of lottery that is in the "probability change state of the special symbol" and the number of lottery that is in the "time saving state of the normal symbol" may be different. Further, the number of lottery may be changed according to the type of big hit.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the "low probability state of the special symbol" and the "normal state of the normal symbol". Then, when it becomes any of "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit D", and "big hit E", it shifts from "low probability state of special symbol" to "probability change state of special symbol". , Shift from "normal state of normal symbol" to "time saving state of normal symbol". In this case, the set "probability change state of special symbol" and "time reduction state of normal symbol" continue until the next big hit. On the other hand, when it becomes "big hit C" or "big hit F", it shifts to "a low probability state of a special symbol" and "a time saving state of a normal symbol". Hereafter, for the sake of simplification of the explanation, a jackpot (“big hit A”, “big hit B”, “big hit D”, which is given a “probability change state of a special symbol” and a “time saving state of a normal symbol” after the end of the jackpot, "Big hit E") is called "probability change big hit". On the other hand, a jackpot (“big hit C”, “big hit F”) in which only 100 “normal symbol time reduction states” are given after the end of the jackpot is referred to as a “normal jackpot”.

A first, a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, are provided on the lower left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). A symbol display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display or fluctuate by indicating whether or not the lottery of the special symbol performed in association with the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a game in which a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by a lighting state, or a ball is entered into the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of game balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed among the balls, is indicated by the lighting state.

If the game ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry is made. The number of balls is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the balls entering the first ball opening 64 and the second ball opening 640 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of holdings is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of a normal pattern). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, the jackpot type (special symbol according to the jackpot A to F). (1st symbol) is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a game ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (starting prize), the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37 using this as a trigger. Is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle, and right are used. The column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 6A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 6B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of nine types of main symbols with numbers from "1" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by imitating the numbers "1" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "1" to "9", of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmets, etc., which are almost full on the front of the wooden box. Even numbers are small in green on the lower right side of, and are added so that they are displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 8) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a probabilistic jackpot (either "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit D", or "big hit E"), one of "1" to "9" is added. A variable display is performed in which the main symbols are aligned. Further, in the case of a normal jackpot (“big hit C” or “big hit F”), a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers “0, 2, 4, 6, 8” are added are aligned. That is, the variable display in which the main symbols to which the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are added may be executed only in the probabilistic jackpot. Even in the case of a probabilistic jackpot, even if the main symbols with even numbers are aligned, the variable display may be performed so that the main symbols with even numbers are aligned. It is possible to play a game during a big hit with the expectation that it will be. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols having the same number are not aligned. In the probability variation jackpot, the ratio of variable display in which the main symbols with even numbers are aligned is set to, for example, 60%. In addition, when a probabilistic jackpot is started by a variable display in which the main symbols with even numbers are aligned, it is notified that the probabilistic jackpot was a probabilistic jackpot during a predetermined period of the jackpot (for example, during a round period of 5 rounds). The production to be performed is executed.

As shown in FIG. 6A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of the above is the sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. This stop display state is held for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped 3rd symbol for a certain period (1 second or more), whether or not the player is a combination of the 3rd symbols corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot). It is possible to prevent overlooking (whether or not there is). Further, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot is confirmed and the standby state effect indicating the jackpot standby state is displayed. To. The details of this standby state effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 7. Further, by making the game ball enter (win) the operating winning opening 660 while the big hit standby state, the big hit is started and the big hit moving image (opening effect) is displayed.

Further, if the combination of the third symbols displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the disconnection and the reserved ball exists, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started after the stopped display for 1 second. .. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the state where the reserved ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new game ball enters the first entry port 64. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demo effect indicating that the game has not been executed is displayed. It is rare that the player does not enter the first entry port 64 even though the player has continuously fired the gaming ball for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), and the third symbol is stopped. In many cases where the displayed state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), the player has quit the game, and the pachinko machine 10 has not played the game at all. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new game ball enters the first entry port 64 before a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the new entry is displayed. Will be executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is the number of reserved balls, which is the number of game balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the game balls entered in the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the preview effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, the moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (a boy with a headband in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined motion, and sometimes a special motion different from the predetermined motion is performed, or another character performs a predetermined motion. A notice production will be performed by appearing.

On the other hand, when the game ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37). The number of balls entered is reserved up to 4 times for each type of entry opening, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number symbol, and the reserved ball number is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates that it is 4 balls. Further, when the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, the reserved ball does not exist. In the small area Ds1, the left half displays a reserved ball number symbol indicating the number of reserved balls based on the entry into the first ball entry port 64, and the right half of the small area Ds2 is the third. 2 The configuration is such that a reserved ball number symbol indicating the number of reserved balls based on the entry into the entry port 640 is displayed. In the example of FIG. 6B, four reserved ball number symbols are displayed in the left half of the small area Ds1, while no reserved ball number symbols are displayed in the right half, so that the first special There are four reserved balls with the symbol, but the number of reserved balls with the second special symbol is zero.

In the present embodiment, the balls entering the first ball opening 64 and the second ball opening 640 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of held balls is four times. The number of times is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the reserved ball number is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display by indicating whether or not the lottery of the normal symbol performed when the game ball passes through the normal entry port 67 is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is shown by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the game ball passes through either the left or right normal entry port 67, the symbol “○” and the “×” as the normal symbol (second symbol) A variable display is performed in which the symbols of are lit alternately. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is used for a predetermined time only. It is configured to be in an operating state (opened), and as a result, a game ball can easily enter the second entry port 640. The number of times the game ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also lit and displayed by the second symbol holding lamp 84. To. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

It should be noted that the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. And a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, and the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, as in the case of the 1st ball entrance 64 and the 2nd ball entrance 640. Alternatively, it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a game ball can enter is arranged. When a game ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the first ball entry port switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by the turning on of the first ball entry port switch. The main control device 110 draws a lottery for the first special symbol, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first entry opening 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters. In the first ball entry port 64, the game ball (the left-struck game ball) flowing down the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 flows down the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. Nails and the like are arranged so that the ball can be easily entered as compared with the game ball (a game ball hit to the right).

On the lower right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front, a second entry port 640 into which a game ball can enter is arranged. When a game ball enters the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by the on of the second entrance switch. The second special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. The second entry slot 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters. As shown in FIG. 2, since the second entrance 640 is provided on the right side of the game board 13, basically only the game ball flowing down the flow path provided in the right direction of the variable display device unit 80. Enters the ball.

A right variable winning device 65 is arranged in the lower left direction of the front view of the second ball opening 640, and a horizontally long rectangular right specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. Further, a left variable winning device 650 is arranged in the lower left direction of the front view of the right variable winning device 65. The left variable winning device 650 has a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the left specific winning opening 650a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. I have. The opening / closing plate is normally closed so that the game ball cannot win a prize. In the closed state of the opening / closing plate, the opening / closing plate and the game board 13 are closed so as to be on the same plane, so that the game ball can pass through the front side of the opening / closing plate. Further, by tilting the opening / closing plate to the lower side of the front surface, an open state in which the game ball can easily win a prize in the left specific winning opening 650a is temporarily formed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate that the jackpot is confirmed (the right of the jackpot has been obtained). Then, in the jackpot standby state that has shifted due to the confirmation of the jackpot, the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state in which a larger amount of prize balls is paid out than usual by letting the game ball enter the operating winning opening 660. do. As this special gaming state, the right specific winning opening 65a and the left specific winning opening 650a, which are normally closed, are opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until a predetermined number of game balls are won). To. That is, the opening / closing door 65f1 that normally closes the right specific winning opening 65a is opened by the first round of the big hit (special game state), and the ball can enter the right specific winning opening 65a. Become. Every time one game ball enters the right specific prize opening 65a, 10 prize balls are given. In addition, in each round after the second round of the big hit (special game state), the left specific winning opening 650a is opened and the ball can be entered. As with the right specific winning opening 65a, the left specific winning opening 650a is also awarded 10 prize balls for each game ball entered.

The right specific winning opening 65a, the left specific winning opening 650a, and the above-mentioned second entry opening 640 contain a game ball (a game ball hit to the right) that has flowed down the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. It is placed in a position where it is possible to ball (easy to enter). In other words, the game ball flowing down the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 is arranged at a position where it cannot enter (difficult to enter). Therefore, in order for the player to receive the prize ball from being paid out (profit) during the big hit, the player should hit the game ball to the right. Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the right variable winning device 65 is arranged in a state of being slightly inclined downward in the lower left direction in the front view. As a result, when the player strikes right with the opening / closing door 65f1 closed and the game ball reaches the upper surface of the right variable winning device 65, the reached game ball is tilted to the right variable winning device 65. Along the ball, the ball can flow down in the lower left direction of the front view and enter the out port 66. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game ball launched by right-handed hitting from staying in the upper part of the right variable winning device 65 (the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1). As shown in FIG. 2, since the left variable winning device 650 is arranged at the lower left of the right variable winning device 65, when the left specific winning opening 650a is open, the right variable winning device 65 A game ball that has flowed down in the lower left direction of the front view along the inclination of the ball enters the left specific winning opening 650a.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the condition that each round of the jackpot ends (the opened right specific winning opening 65a or the left specific winning opening 650a is closed again) is set as the jackpot round (opened). It is different depending on the type of specific winning slot). Specifically, in the first round (the round in which the right specific winning opening 65a is opened), 30 seconds have passed since the opening / closing door 65f1 was opened, or two or more game balls are in the right specific winning opening. When a prize (ball) is won in 65a, the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed and the first round is completed. On the other hand, in each round after the second round of the jackpot (the round in which the left specific winning opening 650a is opened), 30 seconds have passed since the left specific winning opening 650a was opened, or 10 or more games are played. When the ball wins in the left specific winning opening 650a, the left specific winning opening 650a is closed and the round ends.

In the right variable winning device 65, a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the right specific winning opening 65a is provided inside the right variable winning device 65. Therefore, there is a time lag between the time when the game ball wins (wins) in the right specific winning opening 65a and the time when the winning ball is detected. More specifically, it takes about 0.5 seconds from when the game ball enters the right specific winning opening 65a until the number of winning balls is actually counted. That is, it takes about 0.5 seconds from the time when the number of game balls for which the end condition of the round is satisfied enters the right specific winning opening 65a until the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed. Therefore, if additional game balls can be added during this 0.5 second, more prize balls can be obtained than usual (when only the number of pieces for which the upper limit of the end of the round is satisfied is won). .. In the first embodiment, in one round (a round in which the right specific winning opening 65a is opened), the player intentionally enters more game balls into the right specific winning opening 65a, which is the end condition of the round. It is configured so that it can be made into a ball. Hereafter, for the sake of simplification of the explanation, it is referred to as "over winning" that the number of game balls exceeding the upper limit winning number (number of winning balls) specified in each round wins (wins) in the specific winning opening 65a. It is called.

Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5, but in the first embodiment, in order to facilitate over-winning, the opening / closing door is opened after the game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. The upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured so that the period until the door passes through the upper surface of the 65f1 is long. With this configuration, it becomes easy to add a plurality of game balls to reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 while one game ball is flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. Therefore, in the jackpot standby state, at the timing when more game balls are flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, the game balls are entered into the operating winning opening 660 to start the jackpot (opening / closing door 65f1). ) Thereby, all the game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 can be entered into the opened right specific winning opening 65a. As described above, the first round of the jackpot ends when two or more winnings (winning balls) for the specific winning opening 65a are detected. However, if the first round of the jackpot can be started with three or more game balls reaching the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 before the start of the jackpot, the three or more game balls can be moved to the right specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to win more prize balls than originally (a prize ball for two prizes). Therefore, it is possible to provide a game property that affects the number of prize balls that the player can obtain in the first round of the jackpot according to the timing at which the game ball is inserted into the operating winning opening 660. You can enjoy the game more while in the state. In order to allow the game ball to reach the opening / closing door 65f1 during the jackpot standby state, the game ball does not enter the operating winning opening 660 (the game ball enters the flow path for the operating winning opening (see FIG. 2). It suffices to hit right with a firing intensity (launching intensity of less than 95%) that does not allow the ball to flow in.

Next, the structure of the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. First, FIG. 4A is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 in a state where the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and FIG. 4B is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 in a state where the opening / closing door 65f1 is open. It is a front perspective view.

As shown in FIG. 4A, convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c provided for preventing the flow of the game ball are provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. Since the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is prevented from flowing down by the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c, it flows down on the opening / closing door 65f1 along the outer circumference of each convex portion 65f1a to 65f1c. That is, on the opening / closing door 65f1, a zigzag-shaped flow path is formed by the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c. Therefore, as compared with the case where the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c are not provided (that is, the game ball can flow linearly on the opening / closing door 65f1 from the right direction to the left direction in the front view), the opening / closing door The period required for the upper surface of 65f1 to flow down can be lengthened. This makes it easier to add a plurality of game balls to reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 while the game ball 1 is flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. Therefore, in the jackpot standby state, at the timing when more game balls are flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, the game balls are entered into the operating winning opening 660 to start the jackpot (opening / closing door 65f1). ) By doing so, more game balls can be over-winned.

FIG. 4B is a diagram showing a state in which the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened. As shown in FIG. 4B, the opening / closing door 65f1 slides from the front side of the front view toward the back side of the front view, and enters the inside of the game board 13 through the opening provided in the game board 13. It is stored. As a result, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened. When the right specific winning opening 65a is opened, the game ball flowing down from the right direction of the right variable winning device 65 can enter the right specific winning opening 65a. Further, since the height of the opening for accommodating the opening / closing door 65f1 is sufficiently lower than the diameter of the game ball, the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is flowing down when the sliding movement of the opening / closing door 65f1 is started. It is possible to prevent the existing game ball from being stored inside the game board 13 together with the opening / closing door 65f1. Therefore, when the opening / closing door 65f1 slides into the inside of the game board 13, the game ball on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 can be dropped to the specific winning opening 65a.

Here, in the first embodiment, the period required for one game ball to completely pass through the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured to be about 4 seconds. The firing interval of the game balls (the interval from the firing of one game ball to the firing of the next game ball) is configured to be 0.6 seconds at the shortest. As a result, about 6 additional game balls can be fired while one game ball is flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. Therefore, in the jackpot standby state, about 7 game balls are continuously fired toward the variable winning device 65, and then the game balls are inserted into the activated winning opening 660 to play about 7 games. The first round can be started with the ball flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. That is, the opening / closing door 65f1 can be opened so that all the game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 can be awarded to the specific winning opening 65a. As a result, it is possible to obtain more prize balls than originally (the prize balls for two prizes), so that the winning opening is operated with more game balls reaching the opening / closing door 65f1 in the jackpot standby state. It is possible to make the player devise to let the game ball enter the 660. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game in the jackpot standby state of the player. As a result, in the jackpot standby state, by allowing the game ball to enter the operating winning opening 660 while the game ball is flowing down the opening / closing door 65f1, over-winning can be intentionally generated. Can be provided.

In the first embodiment, by providing three convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, the game balls bypass the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c, and the game balls pass through the opening / closing door 65f1. It was configured to have a longer transit period, but it is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to providing the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c, the material of the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 has a friction coefficient higher than that of other parts (the surface of the game board 13, the inner surface of the variable winning device 65, etc.). It may be made of a large material (for example, an elastic body or the like), or may be processed to prevent the game ball from rolling (for example, the surface may be provided with irregularities).

In the first embodiment, when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of one round, or when two or more game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a before 30 seconds have elapsed, the first round is performed. It was configured to be terminated. That is, if a right-handed hit is made, the end condition is set so that the upper limit number (2) of game balls is almost certainly entered into the specific winning opening 65a and the first round is completed. It is not limited to this. For example, even if a right-handed hit is made aiming at the right specific winning opening 65a after the first round is started, the first round may be completed in a period of a length that makes it difficult to enter the game ball. .. Specifically, for example, when 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of one round, or when 10 or more game balls have won a prize in the specific winning opening 65a before 0.5 seconds have elapsed, the first round is performed. It may be configured to end. In this configuration, if the game ball is not passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 at the timing when the game ball enters the operating winning opening 660, even one game ball enters the right specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to provide playability that increases the possibility that the first round will end without making the ball. Therefore, the player who wants to win the prize ball in the first round is made to launch the game ball toward the opening / closing door 65f1 before the game ball is put into the operating winning opening 660 in the jackpot standby state. It is possible to enjoy the playability of aiming at the operation winning opening 660 later. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game in the jackpot standby state of the player.

FIG. 5 is a top view of the open / close door 65f1 as viewed from the vertical upper surface side. As shown in FIG. 5, passage detection sensors 228a to 228f capable of detecting the passage of the game ball are embedded in a zigzag path on which the game ball can roll (easily) on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. .. These passage detection sensors 228a to 228f are arranged at a distance exceeding at least the diameter of the game ball from each other in the path formed on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. These pass detection sensors 228a to 228f are known to have an output of H (high) when a game ball is arranged above them, and an output of L (low) when there is nothing obstructing the upper part. It consists of an optical sensor. In the first embodiment, the combination of the outputs of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f is monitored on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Then, during the jackpot standby state, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests a guideline for the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 according to the combination of the outputs of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f. .. That is, it is configured to be able to execute an effect suggesting the degree of advantage when the game ball is inserted into the actuating winning opening 660. As a result, a larger number of game balls can be inserted into the operating winning opening 660 at the timing suggested that more game balls are flowing down on the opening / closing door 65f1 according to the content of the production. The game ball can be over-winned more easily. Therefore, the player can more easily aim for the over prize. The details of the standby state effect executed during the jackpot standby state will be described with reference to FIG. 7.

7 (a) and 7 (b) are diagrams showing a display mode during the standby state effect executed in the jackpot standby state. As shown in FIG. 7A, in the jackpot standby state, a display area HR1 in which the characters "Big hit confirmed!" Is displayed is formed on the upper side of the front view on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The display content of the display area HR1 makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the jackpot has been confirmed (the right of the jackpot has been obtained). Further, below the display area HR1, a combination of the third symbols (final stop symbol) that is finally stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in the variable display effect that was executed before the jackpot standby state is displayed is displayed. .. By displaying the final stop symbol even during the jackpot standby state, the player can easily confirm whether the jackpot this time is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot at any time.

On the right side of the front view with respect to the final stop symbol, a chance meter CM that is vertically long and is divided into six small areas in the vertical direction is displayed. Each area constituting the chance meter CM is variably configured to have a mode in which the light is turned off and a mode in which the light is emitted. It is configured to suggest the degree of advantage when a game ball is inserted into the mouth 660. More specifically, the number of small regions is in order (priority) from the lower small region according to the number of sensors having an output of H (high) among the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f. It is configured to be set to the appearance (lighting mode) of light emission. That is, in the chance meter CM, at least as many game balls as the number of small areas having the appearance (lighting mode) of light emission are passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 (when the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened). It is suggested that the right specific winning opening 65a can be won). Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of the explanation, the small area of the appearance of light emission is referred to as "gauge", and the number of small areas of appearance of light emission is referred to as "number of gauges" in the chance meter CM. The variable appearance of the light emitted is referred to as "the gauge is accumulated".

Below the final stop symbol, aim for "GO!" And charge the meter! !! A display area HR2 is formed in which the characters "Aim at the upper right corner at the same timing !!" and the image suggesting that the operation winning opening 660 is aimed at are displayed. According to the display content of this display area HR2, by aiming at the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) with the characters “GO!” Attached to the player, the player can see on the right side of the front view on the display screen. It is easy to understand that the gauge number of the displayed chance meter CM can be increased. As described above, the number of gauges of this chance meter CM is variable in conjunction with the detection content of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f arranged on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. By launching the game ball with a rate of fire (rate of fire) sufficient to enter the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, the game ball reaches the variable winning device 65 arranged downstream thereof. Can be made to. Therefore, by continuously firing the game balls in the direction in which the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is arranged, the game balls continuously reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65. do. In this state, by firing a game ball aiming at the operating winning opening 660 according to the display content of the display area HR2 (that is, with a firing intensity of 95% to 100%), a big hit is started and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened. The door. As a result, the game ball flowing down the opening / closing door 65f1 can be made to win (win) in the right specific winning opening 65a. As described above, a rotating member 670a that performs a rotational operation at a constant rotational speed is provided on the left side of the front view with respect to the operation winning opening 660. Since the rotating member 670a can prevent the game ball from entering the actuating winning opening 660 according to the rotation position, the player can rotate not only the gauge number of the chance meter CM but also the rotation member 670a. The game ball can be launched at the firing timing in consideration of the rotation position of the member 670a. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game in the jackpot standby state.

FIG. 7B is a diagram showing a state in which three gauges of the chance meter CM are stored. As shown in FIG. 7B, when the game ball is passing above the three sensors of the passage detection sensors 228c to 228e, the outputs of these three sensors are H (high). The voice lamp control device 113 detects the number of sensors having H output and reflects them in the mode of the chance meter CM. In the example of FIG. 7B, since the outputs of the three sensors (passage detection sensors 228c to 228e) are H, the display is in a state where three gauges of the chance meter CM are accumulated. In this way, the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is detected by the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f, and the number of passing game balls is estimated as the number of gauges of the chance meter CM according to the detection result. By setting the display with, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the timing at which the operation winning opening 660 should be aimed. Therefore, even a player who has little experience in playing a game with the pachinko machine 10 can intuitively understand the timing of aiming at the operation winning opening 660. As a result, even a player who plays a game for the first time can easily play the game, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 in the jackpot standby state is suggested by the gauge number of the chance meter CM, so that the game balls can be reached to the operating winning opening 660. It was designed to suggest the degree of advantage when the ball is inserted, but it is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may indicate the degree of advantage of the jackpot by the number of gauges of the chance meter CM. Specifically, for example, by suggesting the jackpot type by the number of gauges of the chance meter CM, the player may be informed of the degree of advantage when the game ball is inserted into the operating winning opening 660. Further, for example, the number of rounds of the jackpot may be set to be indefinite when the jackpot is confirmed, and the number of rounds of the jackpot may be drawn at the timing when the operating winning opening 660 is passed. Then, by suggesting the number of rounds determined by the lottery executed when the game ball is entered into the actuated winning opening 660 by the number of gauges, the case where the game ball is entered into the actuated winning opening 660 It may be configured to suggest the degree of advantage to the player.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. In the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided. The certificate stamp or the like attached to the attachment space K1 can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning openings is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out a game ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). I have. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of game balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 12) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 12, a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, drawing the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

To set the display of the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first hit type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol. , The stop type counter C3 used to select the stop type, the fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select the fluctuation pattern, and the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first random number counter C1. And are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 30). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a composed of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has an entrance to the first ball entry port 64. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored according to the ball timing. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b composed of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a second entry port 640. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored according to the entry timing of the ball. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with an execution area 203c, and stores the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3, which are the targets for executing the lottery. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203d consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and a game ball is provided in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the normal entry port (through gate) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399) and then 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 30).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when the game ball enters the first entry port 64, the value is set. Is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b.

As described above, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 9B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and is set by the first random number counter. When the value of C1 matches the value of the random number that is the big hit set by the first random number table, it is determined to be the big hit of the special symbol. Further, the first random number table 202a is used for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special) in which the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is higher than that of the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for the period in which the symbol is in a probabilistic state), and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots included in each is set differently (see FIG. 9B). In this way, by making the number of random numbers that become big hits different, the probability of becoming a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when the game ball enters the first entry slot 64, the value thereof is changed. The value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (execution area 203c when the special symbol lottery is not being executed) of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is set in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (execution area 203c if the special symbol lottery is not being executed). Stored.

Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 203c is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 203c is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is. It will be the one at the time of the big hit of the special design. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. It becomes a display mode.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first random number counter C1, there are two random numbers that become big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random number value "0,1" is the first random number for the low probability. It is stored in a table (see 202a1 in FIG. 9B). As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random random values is 2 while the total number of random numbers is 400, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1/200". The random number value (counter value) that becomes a big hit is common to the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 20 random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol, and the values "0 to 19" are stored in the first random number table for the high probability (1st random number table). See 202a2 in FIG. 9B). As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 20 while the total number of random numbers is 400, so the probability of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is "1/20".

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 10A, when the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 4", the big hit type is "big hit A" ( 8 rounds probability change jackpot). In addition, the jackpot type when the value is "5 to 64" is "big hit B" (5 round probability variation jackpot), and the jackpot type when the value is "65 to 99" is "big hit C". (5 rounds usually a big hit).

On the other hand, when the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 4", the big hit type is "big hit D" (16 round probability variation big hit). The jackpot type when the value is "5 to 64" is "big hit E" (10 round probability variation jackpot), and the jackpot type when the value is "65 to 99" is "big hit F". (10 rounds usually a big hit).

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that six types of hit types (big hits A to F) are determined by the type of the special symbol and the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. Has been done.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 99, reach the maximum value (that is, 99), and then return to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach other than front and back" (for example, 98,99), and "reach other than front and back" (for example, range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns with "complete deviation" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where reach does not occur are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when a game ball enters the first entry port 64, the value is RAM 203. 1st special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (execution area 203c when the special symbol lottery is not being executed). Further, when the game ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b (execution area 203c if the special symbol lottery is not being executed) of the RAM 203. To.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high-probability time and a special symbol for low-probability time, and a range of random value values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times where the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is wide, 0 to 89, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. In this table, the "reach outside the front and rear" is narrowed to 98,99 and the "reach other than the front and rear" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "reach outside the front and back" or "reach other than the front and rear". Further, in the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the entry time of the game ball into the first entry port 64. The table for time is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely off".

In this stop type selection table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front and rear deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than front and rear deviation" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long effect time, so that it is possible to secure the entry time of the game ball into the first entry opening 64, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 30) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 11A), which stores a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, is in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided in.

Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 (a) to 11 (d). As shown in FIG. 11 (a), the variation pattern table 202d is a table for selecting a variation pattern based on the lottery of the first special symbol, and is a table for selecting the variation pattern for jackpot 202d1 (see FIG. 11 (b)). , The out-of-order (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 11 (c)) and the out-of-order (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 11 (d)) are at least specified.

First, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 11 (b). FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is defined when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot, various normal reach (30 seconds), various super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are defined respectively. In the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, each variation pattern is associated with each value of the variation type counter CS1.

Specifically, as a judgment value of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, various normal reach (30 seconds) fluctuation patterns are associated with the range of "0 to 50", and various super reach are associated with the range of "51 to 179". Fluctuation patterns of (60 seconds) are associated, and variation patterns of various special reach (90 seconds) are associated with the range of "180 to 198". The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a fluctuation pattern in which a determination value corresponding to the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is set when selecting a fluctuation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. Select from the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern table 202d2 for deviation (normal). The out-of-order (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order in the low probability state of the special symbol is defined. .. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, as described above, the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common to reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, in the low probability state of a special symbol, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", the deviation reach is set. Set (reach out of front and back, reach other than out of front and back).

Here, when the fluctuation pattern type is a complete deviation, either a short deviation (7 seconds) in which the fluctuation time is relatively short or a long deviation (10 seconds) in which the fluctuation time is relatively long is set. For a short deviation (7 seconds), "0 to 98" is set as a determination value, and for a long deviation (10 seconds), "99 to 198" is set as a determination value of the variation type counter CS1.

In addition, for the out-of-reach, various out-of-normal reach (30 seconds) are in the range where the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 149", and various out-of-range super reach are in the range of "150 to 197". (60 seconds), but "198" is set with various special reach (90 seconds).

As described above, in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order in the normal gaming state, the stop type is determined, and the variation acquired from the out-of-order (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. A fluctuation pattern is selected from the deviation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type counter CS1.

FIG. 11D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern table 202d3 for deviation (probability variation). The deviation pattern table 202d3 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery of the special symbol is out of order in the probability variation state of the special symbol is defined. In this deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3, the value of the variation type counter CS1 set is different from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 described above.

As described above, when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete deviation is determined. , If it is in the range of "90 to 99", the out-of-bounds reach (front-back out-of-front reach, non-front-back out-of-reach reach) is determined.

As described above, in the case of the probabilistic gaming state than in the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching is set lower when the game is out of the game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the fluctuation time of the deviation becomes long at the time of the probability change and the period until the big hit becomes long. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player feels bored because the game is delayed in the probabilistic game state where a big hit is likely to occur.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, at each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the through gate 67, and is a normal symbol of the RAM 203. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203d.

The value of the random number that is a hit of the normal symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 10B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and is the value of the second hit random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the second hit random number table, it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this second random number table is for a low probability time of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and a high probability time (of a normal symbol) in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol is higher than that of the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for (a period in which the time is shortened) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are big hits included in each is set differently (see FIG. 10 (b)). In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be hit different, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability time of the normal symbol and the high probability time of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 10B, there are 24 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol at the low probability of the normal symbol, and the values are "5 to 28". As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that become a jackpot is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the game ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device is displayed. At 83, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second) As a symbol), a symbol of “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened only “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is released only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits, but it is opened. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random random values is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol and the game ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device is displayed. At 83, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be a normal symbol hit. In this case, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 640a is opened "1 second x 2 times". Will be done. In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is further shortened. Since it becomes very long as "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the second entry port 640. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 64a is released only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits, but the opening time and the like. The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 2 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 21). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 30).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 8, the explanation will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 12, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and an I / O. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 30) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 29) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 28) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Next, the specific contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. 9A. FIG. 9A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the present embodiment. The ROM 202 of the main controller 110 stores at least a first random number table 202a, a first type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d as a part of the above-mentioned fixed value data. ing.

The first random number table 202a (see FIG. 9B) is a data table in which the correspondence between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the lottery result is defined. Specifically, in the low probability state of the special symbol, "0,1" is defined as the range of the judgment value determined to be a big hit (see 202a1 in FIG. 9B), and the high probability state of the special symbol (probability change). In the state), “0 to 19” is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be a big hit (see 202a2 in FIG. 9B). When the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on the start winning matches with any of the determination values corresponding to the jackpot specified in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 9B). , It is determined that it is a big hit of a special symbol.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 10A) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each type of special symbol, and the determination of the first hit type counter C2. The value is specified in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 10A, "big hit A" is associated with the first special symbol in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 4". (See 202b1 in FIG. 10 (a)). This "big hit A" has 8 rounds, and is a big hit to which a "probability change state of a special symbol" and a "time saving state of a normal symbol" that continue until the next big hit is given after the big hit is completed. .. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes "big hit A" is five, so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit A" is determined. The ratio is 5% (5/100). This "big hit A" has the largest number of rounds among the big hits of the first special symbol, and is given an advantageous "probability change state of special symbol" and "time saving state of normal symbol" after the end of the jackpot. , The most advantageous jackpot type among the jackpots of the first special symbol.

A "big hit B" is associated with the first special symbol in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "5 to 64" (see 202b2 in FIG. 10A). .. This "big hit B" has 5 rounds, and is a big hit to which a "probability change state of a special symbol" and a "time saving state of a normal symbol" that continue until the next big hit is given after the big hit is completed. .. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes "big hit B" is 60, so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit B" is determined. The ratio is 60% (60/100). Although the number of rounds is small, this "big hit B" is given an advantageous "probability change state of special symbol" and "time saving state of normal symbol" after the end of the big hit, so that the game is played. It is a big hit type that is relatively advantageous for people.

A "big hit C" is associated with the first special symbol in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "65 to 99" (see 202b3 in FIG. 10A). .. This "big hit C" is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 5, and after the big hit is completed, a "normal symbol time saving state" that continues until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times is given. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes "big hit C" is 35, so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit C" is determined. The ratio is 35% (35/100). This "big hit C" has a small number of rounds, and the game state after the big hit is also disadvantageous as compared with "big hit A" and "big hit B", so that it is a disadvantageous jackpot type for the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10A, "big hit D" is associated with the second special symbol in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 4". (See 202b4 in FIG. 10 (a)). This "big hit D" has 16 rounds, and is a big hit to which a "probability change state of a special symbol" and a "time saving state of a normal symbol" that continue until the next big hit is given after the big hit is completed. .. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, five counter values are "big hit D", so if a big hit is obtained in the second special symbol lottery, "big hit D" is determined. The ratio is 5% (5/100). This "big hit D" is the most advantageous big hit type for the player because the number of rounds is the largest and the gaming state after the big hit is also advantageous.

A "big hit E" is associated with the second special symbol in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "5 to 64" (see 202b5 in FIG. 10A). .. This "big hit E" is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 10 and a "probability change state of a special symbol" and a "time saving state of a normal symbol" that continue until the next big hit is given after the big hit is completed. .. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes "big hit E" is 60, so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit E" is determined. The ratio is 60% (60/100). Although the number of rounds of this "big hit E" is smaller than that of "big hit D", the gaming state after the big hit is as advantageous as "big hit A", "big hit B", and "big hit D". Is set, so it is a kind of jackpot type that is advantageous for players.

A "big hit F" is associated with the second special symbol in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "65 to 99" (see 202b6 in FIG. 10A). .. This "big hit F" has 10 rounds, and is a big hit to which a "normal symbol time saving state" that continues until the lottery of special symbols is completed 100 times after the end of the jackpot is given. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes "big hit F" is 35, so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit F" is determined. The ratio is 35% (35/100). Although the number of rounds of this "big hit F" is larger than that of the big hit of the first special symbol ("big hit A" to "big hit C"), the gaming state after the big hit is disadvantageous, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is a big hit type.

In this way, if a big hit is made in the lottery of the 2nd special symbol, it will be a big hit type with more rounds than the lottery of the 1st special symbol, so the lottery of the 2nd special symbol is better than the lottery of the 1st special symbol. Is advantageous for the player. The ratio of the probability variation jackpot to the normal jackpot is configured to be the same in both the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol (probability variation jackpot is 65%, normal jackpot is 35%).

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 10B) is a data table in which the hit determination value of the normal symbol is defined (stored). Specifically, "5 to 28" is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 10 (b)). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "5 to 204" is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 10 (b)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, refer to the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired based on the passage of the game ball through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 and the second random number table 202c. However, it is judged whether or not it is a hit of a normal symbol.

The variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 11) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. Since the details of the fluctuation pattern table 202d are as described above in the description of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing a configuration of RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 13, the RAM 203 has a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, an execution area 203c, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203d, and a first special symbol holding ball number counter. 203e, 2nd special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g, probability variation flag 203h, time saving medium counter 203i, ball entry waiting flag 203j, big hit start flag 203k, big hit medium flag 203m, other memory area 203z I have at least.

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first random number counter C1 and a first hit type. Each value of the counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the game ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding). Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th area on hold), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are set to the execution area 203c. It is shifted (moved) to (see FIG. 12), and a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area 203c, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data shift is performed only for the holding area (holding second area to holding fourth area) in which the winning data is stored.

The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b has four holding areas like the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the start winning prize to the second ball entry port 640 is stored. Since the method of storing the counter value is the same as that of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The execution area 203c is a storage area in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 for using the special symbol lottery for execution are stored. The values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area 203c are compared with the above-mentioned first random number table 202a, first type selection table 202b, and the like, and a special symbol lottery is executed.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203d has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas. More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the game ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203d is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty, so that it is the same as in the case of the 1st special symbol hold ball storage area 203a and the 2nd special symbol hold ball storage area 203b. In addition, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding area is packed in the holding area one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display (variation display performed by the symbol display device 81) up to four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and the maximum value is obtained each time a game ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Up to 4 is added by 1 (see S404 in FIG. 24). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S210 in FIG. 22).

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reserved balls N1 of the variation display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 22 and FIG. 24). See S405). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203e is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 displays the variation held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203e is changed. The value of the number of reserved balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is reserved in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of balls deviates from the number of balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f displays fluctuations (third) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the second entry port 640. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and the maximum value is obtained each time a game ball enters the second entry port 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Up to 4 is added by 1 (see S410 in FIG. 24). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 22). The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203 g is a reserved ball number (2nd symbol) of the normal symbol (second symbol) variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the game ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67. It is a counter that counts the number of times of waiting) up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203 g is set to zero, and each time the game ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4. (See S704 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 26).

When the game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g (the number of holdings M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203d (S705 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203d (S703: FIG. 27: No).

The probability change flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol. If the probability change flag 203h is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol. If the flag 203h is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of a special symbol. Further, as described above, during the probabilistic state of the special symbol, the time is shortened for the normal symbol. Therefore, when the probability change flag 203h is on, it is shown that the special symbol is in the probability change state and the normal symbol is in the time saving state.

When the initial value of the probability change flag 203h is set to off and a probability change jackpot (either "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit D", or "big hit E") occurs, the jackpot is hit. It is set to on at the end (see S1215 in FIG. 32). Further, the probability change flag 203h is reset and set to off when the jackpot game is started (see S219 in FIG. 22).

The probability change flag 203h is referred to in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is the probability change state in the special symbol change start processing (see S302 in FIG. 23). Specifically, when the special symbol change start process (FIG. 23, S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol change start processing (FIG. 23, S213), the probability variation flag 203h is referred to, and if it is on, the first random number table 202a for high probability (see 202a2 in FIG. 9B) is used as a reference. A special design lottery will be held. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203h is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a for low probability (see 202a1 in FIG. 9B).

Further, the probability variation flag 203h is also referred to in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state in the normal symbol variation processing (S608, S614, S620 in FIG. 26). Specifically, if the probability variation flag 203h and the time reduction / medium counter 203i described later are referred to in the normal symbol variation processing and the probability variation flag 203h is on or the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203i is 1 or more, It is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state, and a lottery of the normal symbol is performed based on the second random number table 202c for high probability (see 202c2 in FIG. 10B) (see S609 in FIG. 26). .. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203h is off and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203i is 0, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state, and the second random number table 202c for low probability time (FIG. 10 (FIG. 10). A lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on b) (see 202c1 in FIG. 26) (see S610 in FIG. 26). Further, in the normal symbol variation processing, the probability variation flag 203h is also referred to when determining the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol hits (S614, FIG. 26). See S620).

The time saving medium counter 203i is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203i is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203i is 0 and the probability variation flag 203h is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction / medium counter 203i is set to zero, a special symbol is drawn in the main control device 110, and each time a normal jackpot is reached, the value is set to 100 at the end of the normal jackpot. (See S1214 in FIG. 32). Further, regardless of the jackpot type, when a jackpot is obtained by lottery of a special symbol, the value is set to 0 while setting the start of the jackpot (see S219 in FIG. 22).

When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203i and the state of the probability-changing flag 203h are referred to, and the value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203i is 1 or more, or the probability-changing flag 203h is on. For example, it is determined that the time is shortened for a normal symbol. In this case, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on the second random number table for high probability (see S609 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203i is 0 and the probability variation flag 203h is off, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state, and the normal symbol is determined based on the second random number table for low probability time. (See S610 in FIG. 26).

The ball entry standby flag 203j is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot standby state is such that the start of the jackpot is waited until the game ball enters the operation winning opening 660. If the ball entry waiting flag 203j is on, it means that it is in the jackpot waiting state, and if it is off, it means that it is not in the jackpot waiting state. This ball entry waiting flag 203j becomes a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol, and is set to be turned on when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the big hit has elapsed (see S220 in FIG. 22). Further, the ball entry standby flag 203j is set to off when the game ball enters the operation winning opening 660 during the jackpot standby state (see S1104 in FIG. 31). While the ball entry waiting flag 203j is on, entry into the activated winning opening 660 is treated as valid (a big hit is started when a entry is detected).

The jackpot start flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not to start the jackpot. If this jackpot start flag 203k is on, it means that it is time to start the jackpot (the game ball enters the operation winning opening 660 and the jackpot standby state ends), and if it is off, it means that the jackpot wait state is finished. It means that it is not the time to start. The jackpot start flag 203k is set to ON when the game ball enters the operating winning opening 660 during the jackpot standby state (see S1103 in FIG. 31). Further, the jackpot start flag 203k is set to off when the jackpot start is set (see S1203 in FIG. 32).

The jackpot middle flag 203m is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot (special game state) is in progress. If the jackpot flag 203m is on, it means that the jackpot is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the jackpot is not in progress. The jackpot middle flag 203m becomes a jackpot by a lottery of a special symbol, and is set to on when the jackpot (special game state) is started (see S1203 in FIG. 32). Further, it is set to off at the end of the jackpot (special game state) (see S1217 in FIG. 32). In the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 22), the jackpot hit flag 203m is referred to to determine whether or not the jackpot is hit (see S201 in FIG. 22).

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

As described above, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is provided with various counters and flags.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has an opening / closing door that closes or opens the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the right specific winning opening 65a, and the left specific winning opening 650a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing of 65f1 and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and a rotating body motor 670c for rotating the rotating member 670a are connected, and the MPU 201 is inserted. Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these via the output port 205.

Further, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 to be described later provided in the power supply device 115 are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is connected to the MPU 201. Various processes are executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch (FIGS. 3, 122) circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 28) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the game ball, the launch strength of the game ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. be. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the game ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of the handle 51, and the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variable display effect (a variable display effect). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as (variable display). The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the output of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f, and from the number of sensors whose output is H (high), roughly determines the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. It is configured so that it can be grasped. Then, in the jackpot standby state, the mode (amount of gauge) of the chance meter CM to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed according to the number of game balls grasped according to the number of sensors. As a result, the player sees the amount of prize balls (the number of game balls to be entered when the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened) obtained when the game balls are inserted into the operating winning opening 660. Can be understood in an easy-to-understand manner. Therefore, during the jackpot standby state, the player is made to hit right with a firing strength (launching strength of less than 95%) that does not reach the winning opening 660 more aggressively, and more game balls reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. Can be made to try. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game during the jackpot standby state.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content of the time, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls to display the error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 14A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, and has more detailed variation from the rough variation content (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.)) indicated by the variation pattern command. Used to determine content. This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes. Here, one of a plurality of types of variation mode is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by the main control device 110.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (b). FIG. 14B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, and a fluctuation time counter 223f. , A standby state effect flag 223g, a level counter 223h, a game state storage area 223i, and other memory areas 223z are provided at least.

The winning information storage area 223a has a storage area composed of four areas (first area to fourth area) for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, it has one execution area. Winning information is stored in each area. In the pachinko machine 10, when a start winning is detected in the main control device 110, each of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning. From the values, various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information. Is notified from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting number) corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol held in the main control device 110 up to four times, and is a second special. The symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The value of the counter 203f cannot be acquired. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter. In 223c, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640, or in the main control device 110, a special symbol is used. When the fluctuation display in the above is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction, or the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is indicated. The ball count command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command from the hold ball number command to the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 or the second special symbol. The value of the reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S4308 in FIG. 36). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol hold ball number counter 223c according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. Therefore, the value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main control device 110.

The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol hold ball number counter 223c. At the same time, in order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol hold ball number counter 223c after storage, a display hold ball number command is sent to the display control device 114. Send to.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b and the second special of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main controller 110. The value is changed while synchronizing with 203f. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main control device 110. Can be changed while synchronizing with. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4302 in FIG. 36), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S4502 in FIG. 38). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, the variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4305 in FIG. 36), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S4507 in FIG. 38). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The fluctuation time counter 223f is a counter that counts the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the special symbol. When a fluctuation pattern command is received from the main controller 110, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command is set in the fluctuation time counter 223f.

The standby state effect flag 223g is a flag indicating whether or not the standby state effect (see FIGS. 7A and 7B) is being executed. If the standby state effect flag 223g is on, it means that the standby state effect is being executed, and if it is off, it means that the standby state effect is not being executed. The standby state effect flag 223g is set to ON when a standby state command indicating that the jackpot standby state has been reached is received from the main control device 110 and the start of the standby state effect is set (FIG. 37). See S4403). Further, the standby state effect flag 223g is set to off when an opening command indicating the start of a jackpot is received from the main control device 110 (see S4406 in FIG. 37).

The level counter 223h is a counter indicating the gauge number (level) of the chance meter CM displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the standby state effect (see FIGS. 7A and 7B). The value of the level counter 223h is updated in conjunction with the number of sensors whose output is H (high) among the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f (see S4204 in FIG. 35). That is, the number of sensors whose output is H (high) is set as a counter value.

The game state storage area 223i is a storage area for storing data according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10. The game state storage area 223i is updated every time a state command output is received from the main control device 110 every time the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed (see S4310 in FIG. 36). The game state storage area 223i is composed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and is configured so that the game state can be specified by the state of the lower 2 bits. More specifically, for example, it indicates whether or not the lowest bit is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and indicates whether or not the lower second bit is in the probabilistic state of the special symbol. Therefore, in the "low probability state of the special symbol" and the "normal state of the normal symbol", the lower 2 bits are "00B", and in the "low probability state of the special symbol" and the "time saving state of the normal symbol", the lower 2 bits are lower. The 2 bits are "01B", and the lower 2 bits are "11B" in the "probability variation state of the special symbol" and the "time saving state of the normal symbol". The MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10 on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the data stored in the game state storage area 223i.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed, a time-lapse timer that measures the effect time, and the like. are doing. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 36) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It controls the production) and continuous notice production. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 28).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches it, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset is applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by 1. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory generally has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading is possible for the data on the second and subsequent pages, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 described later of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and is, for example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to read and write data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b has one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in one bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a in the NOR type ROM 234d, specifically, the first program stored in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (command code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 in the boot program after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 39) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 39) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a is stored, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 20) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 41 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display a third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area for storing the corresponding data. Further, in the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a variable image at power-on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a variable effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 39).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 16, immediately after the power is turned on by the display control device 114, the power is turned on by the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 16A. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is the instruction command for starting the variation, is received, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 16 (b). On the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the image of the "x" symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 16 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. 16 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, the player started the game while the main image at the time of turning on the power was displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball was detected in the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. In this case, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 16 (b) and 16 (c) are alternated. The image controller 237 is instructed by the MPU 231 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed in the third symbol display. It can be immediately displayed on the device 81.

Returning to FIG. 15, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 17, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a range of four types of rear images and a rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 17A is an explanatory diagram showing " FIG. 17B shows the back surface A corresponding to the “sandy beach stage” and the back surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage”, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 17, as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A and B, an image that is horizontally longer than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the width in the horizontal direction of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the change of the back type is decided and the stage is changed to "sandy beach stage" or "deep sea stage", the MPU 231 sets the position between the first position a and the position a'of the corresponding back image as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c so as to flow toward the left with a smooth connection.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 17A, the back surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 in which all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the back surface A, that is, the position a to the position d is displayed. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage "sandy beach stage" is displayed, so the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed "sandy beach stage" is displayed. By making all of them resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17B, the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage" is resident only in a part of the back surface, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the video RAM 235.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but if this is done, the resident video RAM 235 will be resident. As a result, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image first displayed when the stage is changed is the range from the position a to the position a'(or the range of FIGS. 17A to 17B). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 17A and 17B) is transferred to the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, when the stage change is decided by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone can be changed with the passage of time. It can be displayed. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the image is stored on the back surface B, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surface B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

In the back surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 15) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, on the rear surface B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to the images between the positions b'and b. Data is stored in duplicate. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image controller 237 is controlled. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 15, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned nine types of main symbols (see FIG. 6 (b)) with numbers "1" to "9", which are the third symbols, are resident. To. As a result, when performing variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the main symbol without the numbers "1" to "9" is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. Will be. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "youth" and "female" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e. Therefore, when the display control device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but the character of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in the symbol area 235e in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A to F. If either is the case, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot type is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the right specific winning opening 65a and the left specific winning opening 650a, which are normally closed, will be repeatedly opened. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special gaming state.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw sprites, such as values, α-blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a light, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is specified for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays either back A or B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "sandy beach stage" or "deep sea stage"), or a back different from back A and B. It contains information that identifies whether to display the image. Further, as the back surface type, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A and B, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that either the back surface A or the back surface A or B is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the rear surface image corresponding to the stage determined by the lottery among the back surface A and B as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back A and B, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not the display should be performed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing by the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 18). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 20) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, it is resident. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 19). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 19).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 19 in the example, FIG. 19). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is the display data table. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 20) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 19, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified in the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Null data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 39) (see S6005 in FIG. 39). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in order to display an image other than the image at the time of turning on the power. It is set to off (see S7705 in FIG. 51 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 41 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 41 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 41B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 41 (b) see S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 42 to 47) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 48 to 50) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7601 in FIG. 51 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 51 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 52) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 20), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 20) described later that describes drawing instructions is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Null data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the later drawing list (see FIG. 20) that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 moves the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 41 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S7305 in FIG. 48) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list to be described later. (See FIG. 20) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 20, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Design 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as (design). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 includes various types. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. Processing is performed, composition processing with other sprites is performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and filtering processing is performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other contents of an image to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can be used according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 performs the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 prepares an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 41 (b). ) Is executed, the time counting counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7307 in FIG. 48). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "Off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7813 in FIG. 52). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7814 in FIG. 52). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7902 in FIG. 53).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when the value is "1", it is set to "0". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see S6306 in FIG. 41 (b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 21 to 32. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 399, 99, 99, 239, respectively, it clears to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, and then a special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 22 to 25.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process accompanying the passage of the game ball in the through gate 67 is performed. Execute (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. After the through gate passage process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. The launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and launches the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the game ball to the launch control device 112 when the launch of the game ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether the current state is in the jackpot waiting state or the jackpot of the special symbol (S201). Specifically, it is determined whether any of the ball entry waiting flag 203j and the jackpot medium flag 203m is on. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot standby state or the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S201, when it is determined that neither the jackpot standby state nor the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202). If the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (number of hold times N2 of variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is set. Acquire (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203f is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 30) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203f from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the second special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223c.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. The data is shifted and the process shifts to S213.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (first). The number of holdings N1) of the variation display based on the lottery of the special symbol is acquired (S208), and it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the acquired first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S209). ..

If it is determined in the process of S209 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S209: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S209: Yes), the number of first special symbol reserved balls The value (N1) of the counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S210), and the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S211). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 30) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223b.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S207 (S212), and the process is transferred to S213. Transition. In the process of S213 executed after the process of S207 or S212, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S213), and ends this process. The details of this special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 23.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), the fluctuation time counter for measuring the fluctuation time is updated (S214), and the updated fluctuation time counter is used. Based on the value, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S215). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S215: No) has not elapsed, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S216), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S215, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S215: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 23. When this special symbol change start process (S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it corresponds to the value of the first hit type counter C2. One of the jackpots A to F is determined.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on, and when the jackpot C is reached, the blue LED is turned on. , When the green LED is turned on and the jackpot is D, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on, and when the jackpot is E, the red LED and the green LED are turned on and the jackpot is F. In that case, the blue LED, the red LED, and the green LED are turned on. If it is off, the blue LED and the red LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S217 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S218). If the result of this lottery is a big hit of a special symbol (S218: Yes), the probability variation flag 203h is set to off and the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203i is reset to 0 (S219). Then, the ball entry waiting flag 203j is set to ON, a waiting state command indicating the start of the jackpot waiting state is set (S220), and the process proceeds to S223. The standby state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 30) described later. It is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the standby state command, the voice lamp control device 113 issues a display standby state command for starting the standby state effect (see FIGS. 7A and 7B) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is set as a command to be output to the display control device 114. As a result, the standby state effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S218, if the lottery result of this time is out of the special symbol (S218: No), is the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203i larger than 0 (that is, is the time reduction state of the normal symbol)? ) Is determined (S221), and if it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203i is larger than 0 (S221: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203i is subtracted by 1 (S222), and the process is transferred to S223. do. On the other hand, in the processing of S221, when it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203i is 0 (S221: No), the processing of S222 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S223. Although the illustration is omitted, when the value of the time reduction counter 203i after subtraction becomes 0 in the processing of S222, the game state is changed from the time reduction state of the normal symbol to the normal state of the normal symbol. A status command is set to indicate. The state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 30) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the state command, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the game state included in the state command. As a result, the state grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10.

In the process of S223, a stop command indicating the stop type is set, and this process is terminated. The stop command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 30) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the status command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the stop symbol of the third symbol based on the stop type indicated by the stop command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the special symbol change start processing (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start processing (S213). This special symbol change start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 22) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and includes the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a and Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol omission" is performed, and the first symbol is performed. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation pattern) of a variation effect performed by the display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol change start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area 203c is acquired (S301).

Next, the probability change flag 203h is read out to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol (S302). In the process of S302, if the probability change flag 203h is on, it is determined that the special symbol is in the probability change state, and if the probability change flag 203h is off, it is determined that the special symbol is in the low probability state (not the probability change state). When it is determined in the processing of S302 that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic state of the special symbol (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the special symbol for high probability. Based on the jackpot random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the first random number table for high probability (see 202a2 in FIG. 9B). As described above, 20 random numbers of "0 to 19" are set as the random number values that are the big hits of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number values that are the hits match. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S302 that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the probabilistic state of the special symbol (it is in the low probability state of the special symbol) (S302: No), the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 Based on the value of and the first random number table for low probability (see 202a1 in FIG. 9B), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the hit random number value (that is, "0, 1"), it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes). Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 10A) to determine what the jackpot type is. do. As described above, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", it is a big hit A (8 round probability variation big hit). Judging, if it is in the range of "5 to 64", it is judged to be a jackpot B (5 round probability variation jackpot), and if it is in the range of "65 to 99", it is a jackpot C (5 round normal jackpot). Judgment (see FIG. 10A). On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", it is determined that it is a big hit D (16 round probability variation big hit). If it is in the range of "5 to 64", it is determined to be a jackpot E (10 rounds normal jackpot), and if it is in the range of "65 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot F (10 rounds normal jackpot) ( See FIG. 10 (a)).

In this process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A to F). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A to F) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 11A), and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 (see FIG. 11A). Fluctuation time) is determined.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of out of alignment is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-order symbol, and the third symbol display is performed based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area 203c. As the stop type to be displayed on the device 81, it is set whether the reach is out of front / back, the reach is out of front / back, or the reach is completely out.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. And set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach out of front and back. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach out of front and back.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern (variation) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared. Time) is decided.

When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, the counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the current fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation time counter (S311). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S312). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 30). When the processing of S312 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 22).

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 and the second ball opening 640. , This is a process for executing the hold process of the value indicated by various counters when there is a start prize.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has won the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reserved balls N1 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired. (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first entry slot 64 (S401: No), or even if the game ball has a prize in the first entry slot 64, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e If the value (N1) of is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 30) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the first special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223b.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are set in the RAM 203. The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S406), and the process is shifted to S407. In the process of S406, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of S407, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the second entrance 640 (S407). Also in this process, similar to the process of S401, the ball entering the second ball entry port 640 is detected over the three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has won the second entry opening 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of pending numbers N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired. (S408), it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S409).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S407: No), or even if there is a prize in the second entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is If it is determined that the value is not less than 4 (that is, 4) (S409: No), the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S407: Yes) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S409: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S410). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203f changed by the calculation is set (S411).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 30) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol hold ball number counter 203f from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the second special symbol hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223c.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S411, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is changed. The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S412), and the process proceeds to S413. In the process of S412, as in the process of S406, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of S413, a look-ahead process for pre-reading whether or not the result is obtained from various counter values acquired based on the start winning is executed (S413), and this process is terminated. The details of this look-ahead process will be described with reference to FIG. 25.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead process (S413). In this look-ahead processing (S413), first, it is determined whether or not a new ball has been detected for the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640 in the starting winning process (see FIG. 24). (S501) If no new ball has been detected (S501: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a new ball has been detected in the process of S501 (S501: Yes), then whether the number of reserved balls corresponding to the detected ball is the upper limit value (that is, 4). Whether or not it is determined (S502), and if it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S502: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S502 that the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (S502: No), whether or not the timing of starting the variation display based on the incoming ball is the probable change state of the special symbol. (S503). In the process of S503, it is determined whether or not the game is in the probable change state according to the current gaming state and the look-ahead result of the reserved ball held before the current entry. Specifically, if the reserved ball does not include a big hit, the current game state and the timing to start the variation display based on the newly detected ball are the same, so that the current game state is a probable change state. It is determined that. In addition, if a jackpot is included in the reserved ball, the game state may be changed according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, if the probabilistic jackpot is suspended, it shifts to the probabilistic state after the jackpot, and if the normal jackpot is suspended, it shifts to the normal state after the jackpot. Taking these factors into consideration, it is determined whether or not the start timing of the variation display based on the newly detected ball is in the probable change state.

In the processing of S503, if it is determined that the start time of the fluctuation based on the ball entry detected this time is the probabilistic state of the special symbol (S503: Yes), the type of the ball entry port that detected the ball entry and the high probability time. Based on the first random number table (see 202a2 in FIG. 9B), the lottery result based on the current entry is acquired (S504), and the process is shifted to S506. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start of the fluctuation is in the low probability state of the special symbol (S503: No), the type of the entry port where the entry is detected and the first random number table for the low probability (FIG. 9). Based on (see 202a1 of (b)), the lottery result based on the current entry is acquired (S505), and the process is shifted to S506.

In the processing of S506 executed after the processing of S504 or S505, the winning information command is set based on the type of the entrance that detected the current entry and the lottery result acquired in the processing of S504 or S505. (S506), this process is terminated. The winning information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) described later. It is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the type of the winning ball notified by the winning information command and the lottery result in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second ball entry port. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the 640.

In this normal symbol variation processing (S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is used. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g (the number of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203 g is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203 g is 0 (S604 :). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203 g is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203 g is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203d is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203d is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203d is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S608). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, if the probability change flag 203h is on or the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203i is 1 or more, it is determined that the time reduction state of the normal symbol is in effect. If the probability variation flag 203h is off and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203i is 0, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state.

In the processing of S608, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S608: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 and the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. Based on this, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is a hit is acquired (S609). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", it is determined to be a hit. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see 202c2 in FIG. 10 (b)).

If it is determined in the process of S608 that the time saving state of the normal symbol is not obtained (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S610. In the processing of S610, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 is low. Based on the random number table per normal symbol for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of 0 to 4,29 to 239, it is normal. It is determined that the design is out of alignment (see 202c1 in FIG. 10B).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S609 or S610 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S611), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S611: Yes). The display mode at the time of hit is set (S612). In the process of S612, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the process is shifted to S614. .. On the other hand, in the process of S611, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not a hit (the normal symbol is out of order) (S611: No), the display mode at the time of off is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the process shifts to S614. ..

In the process of S614 executed after the process of S612 or S613, it is determined whether the normal symbol is in the time saving state (whether the probability variation flag 203h is on or the time saving medium counter 203i is 1 or more) (S614), and is normal. If the symbol time is shortened (S614: Yes), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S615), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, the probability variation flag 203h is off and the value of the time saving medium counter 203i is 0) (S614: No), the second symbol display device 83 is used. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display is set to 30 seconds (S616), and this process is terminated.

Further, in the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Is determined (S617). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S615 or the process of S616 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

If it is determined in the process of S617 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S617: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S617, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S617: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S618). In the processing of S618, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of S612, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is out of order and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of S618, and then the second symbol display update process (see S1008) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is executed, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S612 or the process of S613.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process a hit of the ordinary symbol? Is determined (S619). If the result of this lottery is a hit of a normal symbol (S619: Yes), then whether the normal symbol is in the time reduction state (that is, whether the probability variation flag 203h is on or the time reduction counter 203i is 1 or more). (S620), and if it is not in the time saving state (S620: No), the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 are set to "0.2 seconds x 1 time". The setting (S621) is performed, and the process shifts to S623. On the other hand, in the processing of S620, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time reduction (S620: Yes), the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 are set to "1 second x". Set to "Twice" (S622), and the process shifts to S623.

In the process of S623, the opening time determined in the process of S621 or S622 and the opening / closing control start of the number of times of opening are set (S623), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S623, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1006) of the main process (see FIG. 30) is executed, the electric accessory 640a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S621 or the process of S622 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S619, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S619: No), each process of S620 to S623 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, and the game ball has passed. If there is, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the game ball at the normal ball entry port 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203 g (the number of times of holding the variation display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S702). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the game ball has passed through the normal entry port 67 (S701: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal entry port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is 4. If it is not less than (S703: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal entry port 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203 g is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the number of normal symbol hold balls The value (M) of the counter 203 g is added by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is first set in the empty hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S705), and this process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S915. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is also shifted to S915 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data is destroyed, and the process is shifted to S915 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1015 in FIG. 30, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S915, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S915). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S916, S917) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S916, S917) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S916, S917) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S916, S917), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S916), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S917). After the processing of S917 is completed, the processing is transferred to S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. After the processing of S910 is completed, the probability change flag 203h, the time saving medium counter 203i, the ball entry waiting flag 203j, and the jackpot medium flag 203m are read (S911), and the read probability change flag 203h, the time saving medium counter 203i, and the ball entry waiting flag are read. 203j, a state command for notifying the game state indicated by the jackpot middle flag 203m is set (S912). After the processing of S912 is completed, the drive start of the rotating body motor 670c is set (S913), interrupts are permitted (S914), and the process proceeds to the main processing described later. The drive setting of the rotating body motor 670c set by the process of S913 is not changed until the power is cut off. As a result, the rotating member 670a can always be continuously rotated at a constant speed while the power is turned on for the gaming machine. Therefore, in the jackpot standby state, the game ball is aimed at the timing at which the rotation position of the rotating member 670a does not hinder the flow (flying) of the game ball in the direction of the operation winning opening 660. Since it can be fired, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of firing the game ball at the right time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the first embodiment, the rotating member 670a is configured to continue rotating at a constant speed while the power is turned on for the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the jackpot standby state, the rotation position of the rotating member 670a may be changed to an arrangement that prevents the ball from entering the operating winning opening 660 and an arrangement that does not interfere with the ball, for example, during the jackpot standby state. Only the rotating member 670a may be rotated at a constant speed and may be stopped in other states.

Further, in the first embodiment, the rotation speed of the rotating member 670a is configured to be constant, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotation speed and the rotation direction are randomly or regularly changed. It may be a variable configuration. With this configuration, the difficulty of entering the game ball into the actuated winning opening 660 becomes higher, so when the game ball enters the actuated winning opening 660 as intended, the player is more likely to enter. Can please.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1011 and S1012 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is input to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 22) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 24) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, when the game state is changed, a state command for notifying the change of the game state is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a game ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, in the jackpot standby state, the entry into the activated winning opening 660 is monitored. When a ball entering the operating winning opening 660 is detected, a jackpot start process for starting a jackpot is executed (S1004). The details of this jackpot start processing (S1004) will be described later with reference to FIG. 31. After the processing of S1004 is completed, next, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed, and the jackpot control for opening or closing the right specific winning opening 65a and the left specific winning opening 650a of the variable winning device 65. The process is executed (S1005). In the jackpot control process, the right specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing door 65f1) or the left specific winning opening 650a is opened for each jackpot round, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time has elapsed or whether the game ball has won a specified number of prizes. do. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the right specific winning opening 65a (opening / closing door 65f1) or the left specific winning opening 650a is closed. Here, in the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1005) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process. The details of this jackpot control process (S1005) will be described later with reference to FIG. 32.

When the processing of S1005 is completed, next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is executed (S1006). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S621 or the processing of S622 in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26) are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1007). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) ends, the first symbol display device is used. The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or the processing of S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 23) after ending the variation display executed in 37. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S615 or the process of S616 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26), the second symbol display device 83. Start variable display at. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the normal symbol (second symbol) are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S618 of the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 26), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S612 or the process of S613 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26) after ending the variable display. (Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1010). ), If the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process is transferred to S1001, and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if a predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1010: No), until the predetermined time is reached, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. Within the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011, S1012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (both 399 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S1009, if the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 28 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1013), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1015), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1009 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1008, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, in the initial setting process (see S901 in FIG. 29). By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the details of the jackpot start process (S1004) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, this jackpot start process (S1004) is a process for monitoring the entry of a ball into the operating winning opening 660 and starting the jackpot when the entry is detected.

In this jackpot start processing (see FIG. 31), first, it is determined whether or not the ball entry waiting flag 203j is on (S1101), and when it is determined that the ball entry waiting flag 203j is off (S1101: No), Since it means that the current state is not in the jackpot standby state, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when it is determined that the ball entry waiting flag 203j is on (S1101: Yes), it means that the jackpot waiting state is currently in progress. It is determined whether or not the ball has been detected (S1102). If it is determined in the process of S1102 that the ball has not been detected in the operation winning opening 660 (S1102: No), it is not the start timing of the big hit, so the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1102 that a ball has been detected in the activated winning opening 660 (S1102: Yes), the start of the jackpot is set and the jackpot start flag 203k is set to ON (S1103). ). Then, by setting the ball entry waiting flag 203j to off, the jackpot waiting state is terminated (S1104), and this processing is terminated.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1005). This jackpot control process (S1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects are executed according to the jackpot and the right specific winning opening. This is a process for opening or closing the 65a and the left specific winning opening 650a.

In the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32), first, it is determined whether the jackpot start flag 203k is on (that is, whether the jackpot start is set) (S1201). If it is determined in the process of S1201 that the jackpot start flag 203k is on (S1201: Yes), an opening command for notifying the start of the jackpot opening period is set (S1202). The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect. In the first embodiment, the opening period is set to 0.1 seconds, and one round is started with almost no time difference after detecting the entry of the game ball into the operating winning opening 660 (opening / closing door 65f1 is opened). It has a structure. With this configuration, the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 at the time of entering the operating winning opening 660 can be entered into the right specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the timing at which the player enters the game ball into the operation winning opening 660. After the processing of S1202, the jackpot middle flag 203m is set to on and the jackpot start flag 203k is set to off (S1203) to end this processing.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203j is off (S1201: No), it is determined whether the jackpot medium flag 203m is on (whether the jackpot of the special symbol is being hit) (S1204). .. If it is determined in the process of S1204 that the jackpot flag 203m is off (not during the jackpot of the special symbol) (S1204: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1204, if it is determined that the jackpot medium flag 203m is on (S1204: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1205), and it may be the start timing of the new round. If (S1205: Yes), the opening of the specific winning opening corresponding to the number of rounds is set (S1206). More specifically, if this is the start timing of the first round, the right specific winning opening 65a is set to the open state by opening the opening / closing door 65f1, and the left specific winning opening 650a is set to a state other than the first round. Is set to the open state. When the process of S1206 is completed, then a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1207), and this process is terminated. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1205, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1205: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (right specific winning opening 65a or left specific winning opening 650a) is satisfied. Judgment (S1208). Specifically, if the current round period is one round, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the right specific winning opening 65a, or a game is played after opening the right specific winning opening 65a. When it is detected that two or more balls have won in the right specific winning opening 65a, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied. If the current round period is a round other than the first round, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the left specific winning opening 650a, or after opening the left specific winning opening 650a. When it is detected that 10 or more game balls have won in the left specific winning opening 650a, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

If it is determined in the process of S1208 that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (right specific winning opening 65a or left specific winning opening 650a) is satisfied (S1208: Yes), the specific winning opening set to the open state is set. (S1209) is set to close (right specific winning opening 65a or left specific winning opening 650a), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1208, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening is not satisfied (S1208: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1210). Specifically, when all the rounds in the special gaming state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal time are completed, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect.

If it is determined in the process of S1210 that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1210: Yes), the ending command is set (S1211), and this process is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1210, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1210: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1212), and it is determined that it is not the end timing of the ending effect. If this is the case (S1212: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1212 that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1212: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot (any of jackpots A, B, D, and E). Discrimination (S1213).

In the processing of S1213, when it is determined that the hit is not a probable change jackpot (that is, it is a normal jackpot) (S1213: No), 100 is overwritten on the value of the time saving medium counter 203i, so that 100 times of normal symbols are displayed after the jackpot ends. The time saving period is set to be given (S1214), and the process shifts to S1216. On the other hand, in the processing of S1213, when it is determined that the current jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot (S1213: Yes), by turning on the probabilistic flag 203h, the probabilistic state of the special symbol is given after the jackpot ends. (S1215), and the process shifts to S1216.

In the processing of S1214 or the processing of S1216 executed after the processing of S1215, the game state after the jackpot is completed (probability change state of special symbol and time saving state of normal symbol, low probability state of special symbol, In addition, a status command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 (whether the normal symbol is in the time saving state) is set (S1216), the end of the jackpot is set (S1217), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 33 to 38, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, with reference to FIG. 33, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S4117 (see FIG. 34) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") in this start-up process. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 34, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 34), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S4117. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S4117 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S4117 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of RAM223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S4117 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is judged to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to the process of S4008. ..

If the power off processing flag is on in the processing of S4002 (S4002: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off processing of S4117, The MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004), and then it is determined whether or not each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal (S4005). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

In the process of S4005, if it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set ( S4006), the process is transferred to S4008. By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223.

On the other hand, in the process of S4005, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. .. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is executed (see S4117 in FIG. 34). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4117 is executed, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S4117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared (S4009) in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010). The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

After the processing of S4010, the notification content of the state command set in the startup processing (see FIG. 29) by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is analyzed (S4011), and the game state storage area 223i is analyzed according to the analysis result. Data is updated (S4012). As a result, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped from the time when the power is turned on. After the processing of S4012, interrupt permission is set (S4013), and the process proceeds to the main processing.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S4008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the processing of S4004 to S4006 is performed via the processing of S4008. This is the case where the process is reached, or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the processes of S4010 to S4013 are executed, and the process proceeds to the main process.

It should be noted that the reason for skipping the clearing process of S4009 is that when the processing of S4008 is reached via the processing of S4004 to S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S4004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S4101 was executed (S4101), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4112 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4111. In the process of S4101, whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly related to display (directing) in S4102 to S4111, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). Therefore, it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4112 and the variation display setting process of S4113 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S4113 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing. Based on the above, the settings related to the variable effect can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4101: Yes). S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process proceeds to the process of S4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) according to the values of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol hold ball number counter 223c is performed.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period when the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the stage is changed and the rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the changed stage in this rear image change command, the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be changed to an image corresponding to the stage. The process of changing to is performed. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production gives a feeling of expectation for the jackpot. It may be changed to an effect that can be held, or the frame button 22 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of the reach effects among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S4107 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

When the process of S4109 is completed, the liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S4110). In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of S4110 is completed, next, the effect update processing is executed (S4111), and the processing is transferred to S4112. In the effect update process (S4111), the effect mode of the effect during the standby state (the number of gauges of the chance meter CM (see FIGS. 7A and 7)) executed in the jackpot standby state is set to the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f. Control is executed to change according to the detection result of. The details of this effect update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35.

In the process of S4112, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S4112). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S4113). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38.

When the processing of S4113 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If it is determined in the processing of S4114 that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S4114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are set to ON (S4116), and the power is turned off. The process is executed (S4117). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S4118), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power cutoff occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4115: No), the process returns to the process of S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the details of the effect update process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this effect update process (S4111). As described above, this effect update process (S4111) is a process for updating the effect mode in the standby state effect.

In the effect update process (see FIG. 35), first, it is determined whether the standby state effect flag 223g is on (S4201), and if it is determined to be off (S4201: No), the current standby state effect is executed. Since it is not inside (there is no possibility of updating the production mode), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4201 that the standby state effect flag 223g is on (S4201: Yes), the number of sensors having an output of H (high) among the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f is counted (S4201: Yes). Count) (S4202).

When the processing of S4202 is completed, it is determined whether the count value (counting value) obtained by the processing of S4202 and the counter value of the level counter 223h match (S4203). As described above, the level counter 223h is a counter indicating the number of gauges of the chance meter CM displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The number of gauges of the chance meter CM is variable in conjunction with the number of sensors whose output is H (high) among the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f. Therefore, when it is determined in the processing of S4203 that the count value of the level counter 223h and the count value in the processing of S4202 are different (S4203: No), the number of game balls on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 has changed. Since it means that the display mode of the chance meter CM and the output are different from the number of H (high) sensors due to such factors, the count value (count value) in the processing of S4202 is overwritten with the value of the level counter 223 g. Update by doing (S4204). Then, the mode of the chance meter CM is updated to the mode of the number of gauges corresponding to the value of the level counter 223 g updated in the process of S4204 (S4205), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4203 that the count value (counting value) obtained by the processing of S4202 and the value of the level counter 223g match (S4203: Yes), the current passage detection sensors 228a to 228f Since the output and the number of gauges of the chance meter CM match, and it is not necessary to update the display mode of the chance meter CM (the effect mode of the standby state effect), each process of S4204 and S4205 is skipped and is as it is. This process ends.

By executing this effect update process (see FIG. 35), the mode of the chance meter CM can be updated according to the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. Therefore, referring to the aspect of the chance meter CM, it is possible to play a game aiming at the game ball entering the operation winning opening 660 while the aspect has a larger number of gauges. That is, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the timing at which the operation winning opening 660 should be aimed. Therefore, even a player who has little experience in playing a game with the pachinko machine 10 can intuitively understand the timing of aiming at the operation winning opening 660. As a result, even a player who plays a game for the first time can easily play the game, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the output status of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f and the chance meter CM by the process of S4203 each time the effect update process (see FIG. 35) is executed during the execution of the standby state effect. Although it is configured to determine whether or not there is a discrepancy with the number of gauges (whether the mode of the chance meter CM should be updated), the frequency of updating the mode of the chance meter CM may be reduced. Specifically, for example, the process of S4203 may be executed only once every 0.5 seconds during the execution of the standby state effect. With such a configuration, the processing load of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Next, the command determination process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4112). This command determination process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. It is a process for.

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S4301). When it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received in the processing of S4301 (S4301: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S4302), and the variation pattern type is selected from the received variation pattern command. Is extracted (S4303), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 38) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, in the process of S4301, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4301: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4304). Then, when the stop type command is received (S4304: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4305), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S4306). End the process. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S4304, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S4304: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4307). .. When it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S4307: Yes), the value included in the received hold ball number command, that is, the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 (Number of holdings of variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol N1) or the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number of holdings of variable display based on the second special symbol N2) is extracted and this Is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4308). Further, in the process of S4308, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol hold ball number counter 223c is set. .. After the processing of S4308 is completed, this processing is completed.

Here, the reserved ball number command is the main control device 110 when the game ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640, or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted from the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 by the processing of S4308 every time the start winning is detected or the special symbol lottery is performed. The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f. Therefore, due to the influence of noise and the like, the values of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 are the first special symbol holding ball number counters of the main control device 110. Even if the values deviate from the values of 203e and the second special symbol holding ball counter 203f, the first special symbol holding ball counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 are used when the start winning prize is detected or when the special symbol is drawn. The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c can be modified to match the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main control device 110. When the process of S4308 is executed, the display hold ball for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol hold ball number counter 223c. A few commands are set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S4307, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S4307: No), then it is determined whether or not the status command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S4309). Then, when it is determined that the state command has been received (S4309: Yes), the data in the game state storage area 223i is updated according to the received command (S4310). That is, when the probability change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol are notified based on the information corresponding to the game state notified by the state command, the lower 2 bits of the game state storage area 223i are set to "11B". When the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol are notified, the lower 2 bits of the game state storage area 223i are set to "01B", and the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state are notified. When the normal state of the normal symbol is notified, the lower 2 bits of the game state storage area 223i are set to "00B". As a result, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

On the other hand, in the process of S4309, when it is determined that the status command has not been received (S4309: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received (S4311). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received in the processing of S4311 (S4311: Yes), the information notified by the received winning information command (type of the entrance for which a new start winning is detected, and the lottery result are displayed. The information shown) is stored in the corresponding storage area of the winning information storage area 223a (S4312), and the present process is terminated.

If it is determined that the winning information command has not been received in the processing of S4311 (S4311: No), then the command related to the hit (either the waiting state command, the opening command, the round number command, or the ending command) is executed. It is determined whether or not the command has been received (S4313). Then, when it is determined that the command related to the hit has been received (S4313: Yes), the hit-related process for executing the control corresponding to the type of the command related to the hit is executed (S4314). End the process. The details of this hit-related process (S4314) will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

On the other hand, in the process of S4313, if it is determined that the command related to the jackpot has not been received (S4313: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S4315), and this process is terminated. In the processing of S4315, if the other command is a command used in the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is performed. Is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

Next, the hit-related processing (S4314) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this hit-related process (S4314).

In the hit-related processing, first, it is determined whether or not the standby state command has been received (S4401), and if the wait state command has been received (S4401: Yes), the display standby state for starting the standby state effect is started. Set the command (S4402). The display standby state command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display standby state command, the display control device 114 starts the standby state effect for notifying that the third symbol display device 81 is in the jackpot standby state. When the process of S4402 is completed, next, by setting the standby state effect flag 223 g to ON, it is shown that the standby state effect is being executed (S4403), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4401, if it is determined that the standby state command has not been received (S4401: No), then it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S4404), and the opening command has been received. If (S4404: Yes), a display opening command for starting the opening effect is set (S4405), and the end of the standby state effect is set by turning off the standby state effect flag 223 g (S4406). End the process. The display opening command set in the process of S4405 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is stored in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221. , Is transmitted toward the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts an opening effect for notifying the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S4404, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S4404: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4407). Then, when it is determined that the round number command has been received (S4407: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received round number command, and the display round number command is set according to the extracted round number command (S4408). ). The display round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81. After the processing of S4408, this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4407, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S4407: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4409). Then, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S4409: Yes), the display ending command for starting the ending effect is set (S4410), and this process is terminated. The display opening command set in the process of S4410 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is stored in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221. , Is transmitted toward the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts an ending effect for notifying the end of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S4409, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S4409: No), the present process is terminated as it is. By executing this hit-related process (see FIG. 37), appropriate control can be executed according to various commands related to the hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the variation display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S4113). This variation display setting process (S4113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4501). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S4501: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S4506 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, in the processing of S4501, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S4501: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S4502), and then S4303 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 36). In the process of, the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S4503).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4504). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S4505), and the processing is shifted to S4506. In the process of S4505, the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area.

In the process of S4506, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S4506). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S4506: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that this variable display is displayed. The setting process (see FIG. 38) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S4506: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to off (S4507), and then the command determination process (see FIG. 36) of S4306. In, the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S4508). Next, a display stop type command is set (S4509) based on the stop type acquired in the process of S4508, and this process is terminated. By receiving this display stop type command, the display control device 114 controls so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the stop display of the third symbol with the stop type indicated by this display stop type command. Will be done.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 39 to 53, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the V interrupt process can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

First, with reference to FIG. 39, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs initially processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type flash memory 234d, whereby the NOR type flash memory. Is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, so when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately becomes the first of the NOR type flash memory 234d. The boot program stored in the program storage area 234d1 can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory 234a has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released. , Of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to the predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 39) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 39) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 114. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type flash memory 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash. Even if the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the memory 234a is stored, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type flash memory 234d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. can do.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 40, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S6102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. It may execute the process set in 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. And S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. 1 It may be stored in the program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 39. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes a start address and a final address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, transfer destination information (here, resident video RAM 235), and a transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6003, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 51 (a)) described later. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7602 in FIG. 51 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41 (b)), a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 16 is drawn. The determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 41 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 41 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entry (starting prize) into the first entry slot 64 or the second entry slot 640, and the start instruction of the variable effect was given. When the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the fluctuation effect period, and a simple fluctuation is performed. You can produce. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, and it takes time to transfer the flash memory. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery is possible. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S6005, the interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 41 (a). FIG. 41 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 41 (b). FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. The command determination process (S6302) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 42 to 47.

In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the rear image after the change is sent to the image controller 237. Set a transfer instruction to transfer the image data of the above to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), which are determined by the task process (S6304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 20 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 53.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A to F, front / rear out reach, non-front / rear out reach, complete out) is supported. The stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed to shift to the process of S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 42 to 47, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 42, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command. For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a variable pattern command for display (S6404: Yes), the variable pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 43 (a). FIG. 43A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed in the main control device 110 at a distance of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6505), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6504, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S6502e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 as the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 42. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 43 (b). FIG. 43B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A to F, front / rear off reach, non-front / back out reach, complete off) indicated by the display stop type command. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned on. Is set to (S6603), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete deviation is set by the process of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will have a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out of order". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 42, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display standby state command among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is a display standby status command (S6408: Yes), the standby status command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the standby state command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the standby state command processing. This standby state command process executes the process corresponding to the standby state command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the standby state command processing, first, the display data table for the standby state effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the standby state effect display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set standby state effect display data table. (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6705), the standby state command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 42, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no standby state command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display opening is performed. If there is a command (S6410: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (a). FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802), and the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6803). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6804). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6805), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 42, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S6412: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (b). FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. Set to the table buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6904). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6905), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 42, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S6414: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S7001). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7002).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S7001, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S7003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7003). S7004). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S7005), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 42, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6414, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the rear image is determined. If there is a change command (S6416: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command process (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. 47 (a). FIG. 47A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S7603) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S7101). .. Then, among the bits of the rear image discrimination flag provided for each rear image type (rear surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set to on, and other bits are set. The bit corresponding to the rear image type is set to off (S7102), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S7101 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S7102. ..

Further, in the task processing (S6304), when it is specified to display either the back surface A or B according to the back surface type of the rear image specified in the display data table, the rear image discrimination flag set by S7102 is specified. From, the back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored is stored. The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7102, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 42. In the processing of S6416, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6418), and there is an error command. If (S6418: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. 47 (b). FIG. 47B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7201). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S7202). Ends the process and returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process (S6303), when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7201, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S7202 is determined and the error is determined. The process is executed so that the warning image corresponding to the type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error discrimination flag corresponding to all the error types indicated by each error command is set to ON in the process in S7202. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 42. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S6418 (S6418: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6420), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the processing of S6401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processing of S6402 to S6420 is executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6420 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41 (b)) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment processing, only the commands required to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are used from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 43 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 43 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 43A) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 48, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7301), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7301: No). ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, the processes of S7302 to S7304 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S7305. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S7302), S7303 to S7304 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S7303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S7303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7303: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S7304).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to and all the error discrimination set to ON is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S7401).

In the task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. are used for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7401, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 48. After the warning image setting process (S7304) or in the process of S7303, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is turned off (S7303: No), the process proceeds to the process of S7305.

In S7305, the pointer update process is executed (S7305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7501). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are sequentially started from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S7501, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S7502). As a result, if it is End information (S7502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7503), and if it is a demo display data table (S7503: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S7504), and the process proceeds to S7507.

On the other hand, in the process of S7503, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S7503: No), the display data table is the standby state effect display data table. (S7505), and if it is a standby state effect display data table (S7505: Yes), the effect time of the standby state effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is set. The corresponding time data is set in the time counting counter 233h (S7506), and the process proceeds to S7507.

In the process of S7507, the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7507), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demo effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7505, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for standby state effect (S7505: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1. (S7508), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawing contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7502: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 48. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7306). In the task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S7306 together with the warning image developed earlier, and each sprite is specified. Determine various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7308). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7308: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 0 or less (S7308: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S7309).

As a result, if the definite display flag is off (S7309: No), the definite display effect has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the definite display effect. Therefore, first, the definite display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S7310), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7311). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the definite display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7313). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7315), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final symbol display effect of the stopped symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set as such. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S6304), from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S7315, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7309, if the definite display flag is on (S7309: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7316). If the demo display flag is off (S7316: No), it means that the value of the timekeeping counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that a certain period of time has elapsed from the end of the final display effect. Later, a process for displaying the demo effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7317), and the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7318). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7320), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S7321), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S7316, if the demo display flag is on (S7316: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41 (b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the stop type command for display for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table that specifies that the image of the above is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 51 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7601: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S7602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, off as a result of the processing of S7601 (S7601: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 52.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7602), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 51 (b). FIG. 51 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S7701), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7701: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7702). In the process of S7702, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. .. When it is determined by the process of S7702 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7702: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7702: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7703. Further, as a result of the processing of S7701, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7701: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7703.

In the process of S7703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S7703: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7704), and this process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S7703 (S7703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S7705), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 41 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 41 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 42 to 47) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 48 to 50) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 52) (see S7601: No in FIG. 51 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be performed. , It is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a normal image transfer setting process (S7603), which is one of the transfer setting processes (see FIGS. 51 (a) and S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e is updated by the pointer update process (S7305) of the display setting process (see FIGS. 48 and S6303) executed earlier. The information described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is acquired (S7801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7802), and if it is transfer data information (S7802: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is stored from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7803) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7804), and the process proceeds to S7805.

Further, in the process of S7802, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S7802: No), the processes of S7803 and S7804 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S7805. In the process of S7805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7806).

In the process of S7806, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S7806 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7806: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7806: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7807. Further, as a result of the processing of S7805, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S7805: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7807.

In the process of S7807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7807), and if the transfer start flag is on (S7807: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S7808), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7803 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S7813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7807: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S7809). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S7809: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S7809: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S7810), the rear image provided for each rear image type. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7811). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally). The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S7812), and the process proceeds to S7813.

In the process of S7813, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7813). The discrimination in the process of S7813 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7813 (S7813: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7813 (S7813: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7814). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 includes the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S7814, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7815), and this normal image transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, it is indicated by the display stop type command. When it is determined that the stop type information is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (S6304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and a drawing list (see FIG. 20) is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7901). That is, in the processing of S7901, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task process. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address is read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. Then, in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the processing of S7902 (S7903). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process (see FIG. 41 (b)) is performed every time the drawing process is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65, in which the prize ball is paid out when the game ball enters during the jackpot, is closed, and the right specific winning opening 65a is closed. The upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured so that the game ball can flow down in a state where it is impossible to enter the game ball. The upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured to allow more game balls to flow down at the same time than the number of entering balls (that is, two) which is the end condition of the first round. In other words, the number of balls (that is, two) that is the end condition of the first round is determined between the time when one game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 and the time when it passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. It is configured so that a larger number of game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. As a result, at the timing when the first round is started (opening / closing door 65f1 is opened), the more game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, the more the game balls flowing down on the opening / closing door 65f1. , The open opening / closing door 65f1 can be used to enter the right specific winning opening 65a to obtain more prize balls. Therefore, at the start timing of one round of big hits, the game can be played by paying attention to the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, which improves the interest of the player at the start of the first round. Can be made to.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when a big hit is obtained by a lottery of a special symbol, the big hit is started when the game ball enters the operation winning opening 660. As a result, the player can adjust the timing at which the first round of the jackpot is started by adjusting the timing at which the game ball is launched toward the actuating winning opening 660, which is more advantageous for the player. Aiming at the timing (that is, the timing at which more game balls pass through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1), it is possible to realize the game property of allowing the game balls to enter the operating winning opening 660. Therefore, the amount of prize balls (privileges) that the player can obtain during the predetermined period of the jackpot (until the end of one round) can be different depending on the skill of the player (timing to aim at the operation winning opening 660). It is possible to make the timing of entering the game ball into the operation winning opening 660 more seriously. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in the first embodiment, in the jackpot standby state from the time when the jackpot is confirmed to the start of the jackpot, the player receives the game ball when the game ball is inserted into the operating winning opening 660. A guideline for the benefits (number of prize balls) that can be achieved is suggested to the player by the production mode (number of gauges of the chance meter CM). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to understand the timing at which the operation winning opening 660 should be aimed. Therefore, even a player who has little experience in playing a game with the pachinko machine 10 can realize easy-to-understand game performance, and thus can provide a game machine that is not easily avoided by the player. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, three convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c are provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, so that the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c are detoured by the gaming ball, and the gaming ball is the opening / closing door. It was configured to have a longer transit period through 65f1, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to providing the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c, the material of the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 has a friction coefficient higher than that of other parts (the surface of the game board 13, the inner surface of the right variable winning device 65, etc.). It may be made of a material having a large coefficient (for example, an elastic body or the like), or may be processed to prevent the game ball from rolling (for example, the surface may be provided with irregularities).

In the first embodiment, when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of one round, or when two or more game balls have entered the right specific winning opening 65a before 30 seconds have elapsed, the first round is performed. Was configured to end. That is, if a right-handed player is hit, the end condition is set so that the upper limit number (2) of game balls is almost certainly entered into the right specific winning opening 65a and the first round is completed. , Not limited to this. For example, even if a right-handed hit is made aiming at the right specific winning opening 65a after the first round is started, the first round may be completed in a period of a length that makes it difficult to enter the game ball. .. Specifically, for example, if 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of one round, or if 10 or more game balls have won the right specific winning opening 65a before 0.5 seconds have elapsed, one round has passed. It may be configured to close the eyes. In this configuration, if the game ball is not passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 at the timing when the game ball enters the operating winning opening 660, even one game ball enters the right specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to provide playability that increases the possibility that the first round will end without making the ball. Therefore, the player who wants to win the prize ball in the first round is made to launch the game ball toward the opening / closing door 65f1 before the game ball is put into the operating winning opening 660 in the jackpot standby state. It is possible to enjoy the playability of aiming at the operation winning opening 660 later. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game in the jackpot standby state of the player.

In the first embodiment, the game ball is inserted into the operating winning opening 660 by suggesting a guideline for the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 by the gauge number of the chance meter CM in the jackpot standby state. The structure suggests the degree of advantage when the ball is made to ball, but the structure is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may indicate the degree of advantage of the jackpot by the number of gauges of the chance meter CM. Specifically, for example, by suggesting the jackpot type by the number of gauges of the chance meter CM, the player may be informed of the degree of advantage when the game ball is inserted into the operating winning opening 660. Further, for example, the number of rounds of the jackpot may be set to be indefinite when the jackpot is confirmed, and the number of rounds of the jackpot may be drawn at the timing when the operating winning opening 660 is passed. Then, by suggesting the number of rounds determined by the lottery executed when the game ball is entered into the actuated winning opening 660 by the number of gauges, the case where the game ball is entered into the actuated winning opening 660 It may be configured to suggest the degree of advantage to the player.

In the first embodiment, the rotating member 670a is configured to continue rotating at a constant speed while the power is turned on for the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the jackpot standby state, the rotation position of the rotating member 670a may be changed to an arrangement that prevents the ball from entering the operating winning opening 660 and an arrangement that does not interfere with the ball, for example, during the jackpot standby state. Only the rotating member 670a may be rotated at a constant speed and stopped in other states.

In the first embodiment, the rotation speed of the rotating member 670a is configured to be constant, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotation speed and the rotation direction can be changed randomly or regularly. It may be configured. With this configuration, the difficulty of entering the game ball into the actuated winning opening 660 becomes higher, so when the game ball enters the actuated winning opening 660 as intended, the player is more likely to enter. Can please.

In the first embodiment, the standby state effect suggests the degree of advantage (the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round) when the big hit is started, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the degree of advantage when the big hit is started, an effect suggesting the degree of advantage of the big hit itself may be executed by the standby state effect. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to execute an effect that suggests a game state (whether or not it is a probable variable jackpot) after a jackpot, the number of rounds, and the like. Further, when executing an effect suggesting the degree of advantage of the jackpot itself, it is not necessary to execute the effect during the jackpot standby state. For example, when the stop display of the third symbol is displayed, the degree of advantage of the jackpot itself may be suggested during execution depending on the type of the third symbol. In addition, the degree of advantage of the jackpot itself may be suggested in the opening period, the round period, the ending period, and the like.

In the first embodiment, a pachinko machine 10 of a type in which a big hit is obtained by a lottery of a special symbol and a big hit is started when a game ball enters the operating winning opening 660 has been described as an example, but different specifications have been described. It may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 of the above. For example, it may be applied to a pachinko machine 10 in which a big hit is started when a game ball enters a specific area on the game board 13. That is, the pachinko machine 10 (so-called two-type type) that does not have the function of drawing special symbols, and the function of drawing special symbols is installed, but what is the result of the special symbol lottery? Regardless, it may be applied to a pachinko machine 10 (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which a big hit is started when a game ball enters a specific area. With this configuration, the degree of advantage in the first round of the jackpot can be changed according to the number of game balls on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 at the time when the game balls are entered into the specific area.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 62. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when a big hit is obtained by lottery of a special symbol, the pachinko machine shifts to the big hit standby state, and the game ball is inserted into the operating winning opening 660 during the big hit standby state. In that case, the jackpot was started. Further, the operation winning opening 660 is configured to be provided at only one place on the upper right side of the game board 13. That is, in the case of the jackpot standby state, the jackpot starts unless the game ball is fired toward the upper right side of the game board 13 and the game ball is inserted into the operation winning opening 660 regardless of the jackpot type. It was configured not to be done.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, the operation winning openings (right operating winning opening 661, left operating winning opening 662) that trigger the start of big hits on the upper right side and the lower left side of the game board 13, respectively). Is provided, and the operation winning opening that triggers the start of the jackpot is different depending on the type of jackpot. Further, the left-acting winning opening 662 is configured such that the game ball is almost automatically entered in a relatively short time (about 0.5 seconds) when the jackpot standby state is set. That is, in the case of the jackpot type in which the left-acting winning opening 662 triggers the start of the jackpot, the first round of the jackpot is started before the game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. .. That is, a jackpot type is provided so that the player cannot aim for an over prize in the first round. As a result, it is possible to provide a jackpot type that can aim for over-winning and a jackpot type that cannot aim for over-winning. Differences can be made.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main control device 110. , And the point that the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the point that the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the control executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The point is that the processing has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 54, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 54, on the upper right side of the front view of the game board 13, instead of the actuated winning opening 660 in the first embodiment, a right actuating winning opening 661 in which a game ball can enter is provided. This right-acting winning opening 661 is an actuating prize that triggers the start of six types of jackpots A2, B2, D2, F2-H2 among the eight types of jackpots (big hits A2 to H2) in the second embodiment. It's a mouth. This right-acting winning opening 661 can only be entered during the jackpot standby state, which is transferred when any of the above six types of jackpots (big hits A2, B2, D2, F2 to H2) is obtained by a special symbol lottery. It is configured to be determined to be valid.

Further, as shown in FIG. 54, a left-acting winning opening 662 through which a game ball can enter is provided on the lower left side of the front view with respect to the first entry opening 64. The left-acting winning opening 662 is an operating winning opening that triggers the start of two types of jackpots C2 and E2 among the eight types of jackpots (big hits A2 to H2) in the second embodiment. That is, it is an operation winning opening in which it is determined that the entry of the game ball is effective in the jackpot standby state in which the transition is triggered by either the jackpot C2 or E2 in the special symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. 54, a storage device 675 is provided above the left-operated winning opening 662 when viewed from the front. The storage device 675 is configured to be able to store only one game ball that has flowed down from vertically above. The storage device 675 may receive and store the game balls that have entered the storage device 675 at the lower end of the flow path having a width that allows one game ball to flow down (prevent the flow of the game balls). A variable storage valve 675a is provided at a possible closed position and an open position where the game ball is discharged directly below the storage device 675 without obstructing the flow of the game ball that has entered the storage device 675. There is.

The storage valve 675a of the storage device 675 is changed to the open position when the jackpot standby state is set, and is changed to the closed position at the end of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 54, since the left actuating winning opening 662 is arranged directly under the storage device 675, the storage valve 675a is set to the jackpot standby state when the game ball is stored in the storage device 675. As a result of the stored game ball flowing downward due to the opening, the game ball enters the left-acting winning opening 662 immediately after the jackpot standby state (about 0.5 seconds later). Here, in the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol), it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second entry port 640 (the electric accessory 640a is difficult to open). , It is the game method with the least loss for the player to play the game aiming at the first entrance 64 by hitting the left side. When the game ball is launched aiming at the first entry port 64, the game ball also flows down in the direction of the storage device 675 arranged on the lower left side of the first entry port 64. As a result, in the normal state, the game ball is almost stored in the storage device 675 until the big hit. Therefore, when the jackpot is either C2 or E2 in the normal state, the jackpot starts almost immediately after the jackpot standby state is reached. For this reason, in the case of jackpot C2 and E2, the period of the jackpot standby state is too short, and it is almost impossible for the game ball to reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 during the jackpot standby state. You will not be able to aim. For this reason, it is extremely likely that the number of prizes won in the first round of the jackpot will be the minimum (2), and as a result, it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained compared to the first round of other jackpots. Become.

As described above, in the first embodiment, in the jackpot type (big hit A2, B2, D2, F2 to H2) in which the right-acting winning opening 661 triggers the start of the jackpot, the first round is the same as in the first embodiment. While it is possible to play with the playability of acquiring more prize balls aiming at over-winning, in the jackpot type (big hit C2, E2) where the left-acting winning opening 662 triggers the start of jackpot, almost over-winning. The jackpot will start soon after aiming for. As a result, it is possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage in the first round of the jackpot according to the jackpot type, so that when the jackpot becomes a jackpot, the player can pay more attention to the jackpot type. Therefore, the interest of the player can be further improved. In the following, for the sake of simplification of the explanation, the jackpot type that is started when the ball enters the right-acting winning opening 661 is referred to as "right-triggered jackpot" and the entry into the left-acting winning opening 662. The type of jackpot that is triggered by a ball is called a "left-triggered jackpot."

<Electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. The ROM 202 of the second embodiment has only a partial change in the provisions of the first type selection table 202b from the ROM 202 of the first embodiment described above, and the other configurations are the same. , The same as the first embodiment described above. Therefore, as the description of the ROM 202 in the second embodiment, only the details of the first type selection table 202b will be described.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first type selection table 202b defined in the ROM 202 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 55, in the first hit type selection table 202b in the second embodiment, five types of jackpot types (big hits A2 to E2) that can be determined when a jackpot is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol. And three types of jackpot types (big hits F2 to H2) that can be determined when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol are stipulated.

As a jackpot of the first special symbol, "big hit A2" is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 4" (see 202b1 in FIG. 55). Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, five counter values are "big hit A2", so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit A2" is determined. The ratio is 5% (5/100). This "big hit A2" has 8 rounds like the "big hit A" in the first embodiment, and after the big hit is completed, a "probability change state of a special symbol" and a "time saving state of a normal symbol" are given. It is a big hit type. Further, this "big hit A2" is a kind of right-triggered jackpot that is started when the ball enters the right-acting winning opening 661. Therefore, if the game ball can be entered into the right-acting winning opening 660 with more game balls reaching the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 during the jackpot standby state, it is normal (one round is started). Since more prize balls can be obtained than when the game ball is hit to the right), the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round is likely to be more advantageous than the left-handed jackpot.

As a jackpot of the first special symbol, "big hit B2" is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "5 to 14" (see 202b2 in FIG. 55). Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes "big hit B2" is 10, so if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit B2" is determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100). This "big hit B2" has 5 rounds like the "big hit B" in the first embodiment, and after the end of the big hit, a "probability change state of a special symbol" and a "time saving state of a normal symbol" are given. It is a big hit type. Further, this "big hit B2" is a kind of right-triggered jackpot that is started when the ball enters the right-acting winning opening 661, like the "big hit A2". Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round tends to be more advantageous than the left-handed jackpot.

As a jackpot of the first special symbol, "big hit C2" is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "15 to 64" (see 202b3 in FIG. 55). Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 are counter values that become "big hit C2", so if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit C2" is determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100). This "big hit C2" has 5 rounds like the "big hit B" in the first embodiment, and after the end of the big hit, a "probability change state of a special symbol" and a "time saving state of a normal symbol" are given. It is a big hit type. Further, this "big hit C2" is a kind of left-triggered jackpot that is started when the ball enters the left-acting winning opening 662. For this reason, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round is likely to be disadvantageous compared to the right-handed jackpot.

As a jackpot of the first special symbol, "big hit D2" is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "65 to 74" (see 202b4 in FIG. 55). Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes "big hit D2" is 10, so if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit D2" is determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100). This "big hit D2" has 5 rounds like the "big hit C" in the first embodiment, and after the big hit is completed, a "low probability state of a special symbol" and a "time saving state of a normal symbol" are given. It is a big hit type to be done. Further, this "big hit D2" is a kind of right-triggered jackpot that is started when the ball enters the right-acting winning opening 661. Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round tends to be more advantageous than the left-handed jackpot.

As a jackpot of the first special symbol, "big hit E2" is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "75 to 99" (see 202b5 in FIG. 55). Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 25 counter values are "big hit E2", so if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit E2" is determined. The ratio is 25% (25/100). This "big hit E2" has 5 rounds like the "big hit C" in the first embodiment, and after the big hit is completed, a "low probability state of a special symbol" and a "time saving state of a normal symbol" are given. It is a big hit type to be done. Further, this "big hit E2" is a kind of left-triggered jackpot that is started when the ball enters the left-acting winning opening 662. For this reason, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round is likely to be disadvantageous compared to the right-handed jackpot.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, a right-handed big hit (either big hit A2, B2, D2) is obtained at a rate of 25%, and a rate of 75%. It is configured to be a left-handed jackpot (either jackpot C2 or E2). That is, it is the first special symbol that the game can be played with the game property of aiming at the right-acting winning opening 661 in a timely manner after allowing more game balls to reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 during the jackpot standby state. It is 25% when it is a big hit in the lottery. Most (75% ratio) are jackpots where the jackpot starts immediately (in about 0.5 seconds) after the jackpot standby state, so if the jackpot is right-handed, the player will be called. You can be more pleased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the jackpot of the second special symbol is composed only of the right-triggered jackpot. Therefore, when a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, the big hit is always started when the game ball enters the right-acting winning opening 661. The reason why the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in this way is basically during the "time saving state of the normal symbol", and the player continuously hits the game ball to the right. This is because there is a high possibility that the game ball is not stored in the storage device 675 at the start of the jackpot standby state because it is during firing. In other words, even if the jackpot of the second special symbol is configured to have a left trigger jackpot, there is a high possibility that the jackpot cannot be started immediately after the jackpot standby state. Only the right-handed jackpot is provided. As a result, the number of jackpot types can be reduced, so that the storage capacity of the storage area for storing data for each jackpot type can be reduced.

Each big hit (big hit F2 to H2) of the second special symbol in the second embodiment has each big hit (big hit DF) of the second special symbol in the first embodiment, and the number of rounds and the game state after the big hit. It is exactly the same. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the second embodiment, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is hit, the jackpot is always right-triggered, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even when the jackpot of the second special symbol is obtained, the jackpot may be configured to be a left-triggered jackpot at a predetermined ratio (for example, 10%). As described above, if a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is unlikely that the game ball is stored in the storage device 675. In that case, the game ball does not immediately enter the left-acting winning opening 662. Therefore, in the case of a left-triggered jackpot, it is possible to provide the game property of measuring the timing of entering the game ball into the left-acting winning opening 662. That is, it is possible to change the target operation winning opening during the jackpot standby state depending on whether the right-triggered jackpot or the left-triggered jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the variation of the game during the jackpot standby state.

Next, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 56, the RAM 203 in the second embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 13) in that a start trigger storage area 203n is added. There is. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The start trigger storage area 203n is a storage area in which data indicating the type of the operation winning opening that triggers the start of the jackpot is stored. More specifically, when "01H" is stored as data in the start trigger storage area 203n, the start trigger of the jackpot is the right-acting winning opening 661 (this jackpot is the right trigger jackpot). This means that when "02H" is stored, the start trigger of the jackpot is the left-acting winning opening 662 (this jackpot is the left-trigger jackpot). The initial value of the start trigger storage area 203n is set to "00H", and a big hit is obtained by lottery of a special symbol, and when the state shifts to the big hit standby state, the data corresponding to the current big hit type is overwritten ( See S232 in FIG. 57). During the jackpot standby state, when the ball entering the activated winning opening corresponding to the data stored in the start trigger storage area 203n is monitored and the entry to the monitored activated winning opening is detected, the ball is detected. It is configured to set the start of the jackpot (see S1113 and S1114 in FIG. 59). As a result, it is possible to start the jackpot triggered by entering a ball into a different operating winning opening according to the jackpot type. While it is possible to realize the playability of aiming at the winning opening, it is possible to realize the playability of starting the jackpot without aiming at the operating winning opening in the case of a left-triggered jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the playability in the jackpot standby state.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. First, the special symbol variation processing 2 (S111) will be described with reference to FIG. 57. This special symbol variation process 2 (S111) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment, and is the same as the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22). This is a process for setting a display on the symbol display device 37, setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

Of the special symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 57) in the second embodiment, the processes S201 to S23 are the same as the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 22) S201 to S223 in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process is executed.

Further, in the special symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 57) in the second embodiment, when the processing of S220 is completed, the storage valve 675a is set to be open (S231). By opening the storage valve 675a, when the game ball is stored in the storage device 675, the game ball can be entered into the left-acting winning opening 662 immediately after the start of the jackpot standby state. As a result, in the case of a left-triggered jackpot, the jackpot can be started shortly after the game ball reaches the upper surface of the open door 65f1.

When the processing of S231 is completed, next, the data stored in the start trigger storage area 203n is updated to the data corresponding to the current jackpot type (S232), and the processing is transferred to S223. In the processing of S232, when the current jackpot is a right-triggered jackpot (any of jackpot A2, B2, D2, F2 to H2), "01H" is stored as data and a left-triggered jackpot (big hit C2, E2). If any), "02H" is stored as data.

Next, the start-up process 2 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 58. This start-up process 2 is a process executed in place of the start-up process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, and is a process that is started when the power is turned on.

Of the start-up processes 2 (see FIG. 58) in the second embodiment, each process of S901 to S914 is the same as each process of S901 to S914 of the start-up process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, respectively. The process is executed.

Further, in the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 58) in the second embodiment, when the process of S911 is completed, it is next determined whether either the ball entry waiting flag 203j or the jackpot middle flag 203m is on (see). In S921), if it is determined that any of the flags is on (S921: Yes), it means that the storage state of the storage device 675 should be released (during the jackpot standby state or during the jackpot). Therefore, the storage valve 675a is set to be open (S922), and the processing is shifted to S912. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S921 that both the ball entry standby flag 203j and the jackpot medium flag 203m are off (S921: No), the period during which the storage device 675 should be set to the storage state. Since it means that (normal game is in progress), the storage valve 675a is set to be closed (S923), and the process is shifted to S912.

Next, the jackpot start processing 2 (S1021) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59. The jackpot start process 2 (S1021) is a process executed in place of the jackpot start process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment in the main process (see FIG. 30), and is an operation corresponding to the jackpot type. This is a process for monitoring the entry of a ball into the winning opening (right-acting winning opening 661 or left-acting winning opening 662) and starting a big hit when the entry into the operating winning opening is detected.

Of the jackpot start processing 2 (see FIG. 59) in the second embodiment, in each of the processes S1101, S1103, and S1104, the jackpot start processing (see FIG. 31) S1101, S1103, and S1104 in the first embodiment, respectively, The same process as each process of is executed.

Further, in the jackpot start processing 2 (see FIG. 59) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the ball entry waiting flag 203j is on (that is, the jackpot waiting state) in the processing of S1101 (S1101: Yes). ), Then, the data of the start trigger storage area 203n is read out (S1111), and it is determined whether the read data is the data indicating the right operation winning opening 661 (that is, “01H”) (S1112). In the process of S1112, if it is determined that the data corresponding to the right-acting winning opening 661 (that is, "01H") is stored (S1112: Yes), then the ball entering the right-acting winning opening 661 is detected. It is determined whether or not the ball has been hit (S1113), and if the ball has not been detected (S1113: No), this process is terminated as it is in order to continue the jackpot standby state. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1113 that a ball has been detected in the right-acting winning opening 661 (S1113: Yes), the processing is shifted to S1103 in order to end the jackpot waiting state and start the jackpot. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S1112, when it is determined that the data stored in the start trigger storage area 203n is the data indicating the left operation winning opening 662 (that is, “02H”) (S1112: No). , It is determined whether or not the ball has been detected in the left-acting winning opening 662 (S1114), and if the ball has not been detected in the left-acting winning opening 662 (S1114: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1114 that a ball has been detected in the left-acting winning opening 662 (S1114: Yes), the processing is shifted to S1103 in order to end the jackpot waiting state and start the jackpot. do.

By executing this jackpot start process 2 (see FIG. 59), the type of the operation winning opening that triggers the jackpot can be switched according to the jackpot type (whether it is a right-triggered jackpot or a left-triggered jackpot). Can be done. Therefore, in the case of a right-triggered jackpot, the profit (number of prize balls) that the player can enjoy in one round of the jackpot varies according to the timing of aiming at the right-acting winning opening 661, and the jackpot standby state. It is possible to switch between a game method and a game property in which the profit (number of prize balls) is not affected.

Next, the jackpot control process 2 (S1022) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60. The jackpot control process 2 (S1022) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment in the main process (see FIG. 30), and is a jackpot control process (see FIG. 32). ), It is a process for executing a jackpot effect and opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.

Of the jackpot control processes 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, the processes S1201 to S1217 are the same as the processes S1201 to S1217 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, respectively. The process is executed. Further, in the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, after the process of S1214 or S1215 is completed, the storage valve 675a of the storage device 675 is set to be closed (S1221), and the process is performed. Move to S1216. Thereby, the period in which the storage state of the storage device 675 is released can be limited to the jackpot standby state and the jackpot standby state.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. First, the hit-related process 2 (S4321) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 61. The hit-related process 2 (S4321) is a process executed in place of the hit-related process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, and is a command related to the hit as in the hit-related process (see FIG. 37). It is a process for executing the control corresponding to the type of.

Of the hit-related processes (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, in each of the processes S4401 and S4404 to S4410, the hit-related processes (see FIG. 37) S4401 and S4404 to S4410 in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process is executed. Further, in the hit-related process 2 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, when it is determined that there is a standby state command among the commands received from the main control device 110 in the process of S4401 (S4401: Yes). The wait state command process for determining the content of the wait state effect is executed according to the received wait state command (S4421), and this process is terminated. The details of this standby state command processing (S4421) will be described with reference to FIG. 62.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the standby state command processing (S4421). In the standby state command processing (S4421), first, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a right-triggered jackpot (S4601), and if it is determined to be a right-triggered jackpot (S4601: Yes), the first embodiment is performed. Similarly, a display standby state command for executing the standby state effect (see FIG. 7) is set (S4602), the standby state effect flag 223g is set to ON (S4603), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, when it is determined that the current jackpot is not a right-triggered jackpot (S4601: No), instead of executing the standby state effect, it is confirmed and displayed in the variable display effect. The display standby state command for executing the standby state effect in the mode of continuing to display the third symbol as it is (extending the confirmed display) is set (S4604), and this process is terminated. In the case of a left-triggered jackpot, the standby state effect in which the confirmation display of the third symbol is simply extended is that the jackpot standby state in the case of a left-triggered jackpot is an extremely short period (about 0.5 seconds). This is because it ends with and the big hit starts. Therefore, in the case of a left-triggered jackpot, if the same standby state effect (see FIG. 7) as the right-triggered jackpot is executed, the standby state effect is displayed for a moment (about 0.5 seconds). Since the jackpot is started, there is a risk that the player may feel uncomfortable with the displayed contents or confuse the player. Therefore, in the second embodiment, in the jackpot standby state set based on the fact that the jackpot has become a left-triggered jackpot, the jackpot is started in the display mode (confirmed display of the third symbol) at the end of the variable display effect. It is configured to continue to display until. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player feel as if the jackpot started as it is after the variable display ends, which may make the player feel uncomfortable or confuse the player. It is possible to prevent (suppress) from causing it to occur.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, two types of operation winning openings are arranged on the upper right side and the lower left side of the game board 13, and the starting trigger of the big hit is set according to the big hit type. The structure is such that the operating winning openings are different. The right-acting winning opening 661 provided on the upper right side of the game board 13 is provided at a position where a game ball can be entered when the game ball is launched by right-handed strike, while it is provided on the lower left side of the game board 13. The left-acting winning opening 662 is provided at a position where a game ball can be entered when the game ball is launched by a left-handed strike. Further, above the left-acting winning opening 662, a storage device 675 capable of storing only one game ball is arranged, and a game state in which a left-handed hit is performed (a low probability state of a special symbol and a low probability state). , In the normal state of the normal symbol), when the player plays a game of launching a game ball aiming at the first entrance 64, the storage device 675 is almost reached until the first special symbol becomes a big hit. On the other hand, it is configured so that the game ball is stored. Since the storage state of this storage device 675 is released when the jackpot standby state is entered, the jackpot type (left trigger jackpot) is started when the ball enters the left operation winning opening 662. In that case, the game ball stored in the storage device 675 flows downward and enters the left-acting winning opening 662, so that the big hit is started immediately after the big hit standby state is reached. As a result, in the first round of the jackpot, there is a high possibility that the jackpot will start when the game ball has not reached the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, regardless of the skill of the player. The number of prize balls obtained will be almost the same each time. On the other hand, when the right-triggered jackpot is reached, the jackpot will not start unless the game ball is fired at the right-acting winning opening 661. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, the game ball is entered into the right-acting winning opening 661. It is possible to realize a playability in which the number of prize balls obtained by the player in the first round of the jackpot can be different depending on the timing of the hit. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the playability in the jackpot standby state and the first round of the jackpot can be different depending on whether the jackpot is a left-triggered jackpot or a right-triggered jackpot. You can pay attention to the game.

In the second embodiment, the operation winning opening that triggers the start of the jackpot is different depending on the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in all jackpot types, the jackpot type is configured so that the jackpot starts when the game ball enters either the left or right operating winning opening, and then the jackpot type in which the storage valve 675a is opened and the jackpot type in which the storage valve 675a is not opened. It may be configured to provide a jackpot type. That is, in the case of a left-triggered jackpot, the storage valve 675a is opened from the start of the jackpot standby state to the end of the jackpot, while in the case of a right-triggered jackpot, the jackpot standby state is started. The storage valve 675a may be configured to remain closed from the time the jackpot is completed until the end of the jackpot. With this configuration, in the case of a left-triggered jackpot, immediately after the jackpot is confirmed and displayed, the storage valve 675a is released and the stored game ball enters the left-acting winning opening 662 (winning). Therefore, as in the second embodiment described above, the jackpot can be started immediately after the game balls are stored on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 (about 0.5 seconds after the jackpot standby state is reached). On the other hand, in the case of a right-triggered jackpot, the storage valve 675a is not opened, so even if the jackpot is confirmed and displayed, the possibility that the game ball will immediately enter the left-acting winning opening 662 is reduced. Therefore, the possibility that the jackpot will start immediately after the confirmation display of the jackpot is reduced, so that the firing speed (rate of fire) of the game ball is different as in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above. As a result, the number of winnings (that is, the number of winnings that is the end condition of the first round) is obtained by letting the game ball enter the right-acting winning opening 661 in a state where the game ball reaches (rides) more on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. It is possible to provide an epoch-making game property in which a number of game balls exceeding 2) can win a prize in the right specific winning opening 65a. As a result, as in the second embodiment, the gameplayability in which the first round ends with a predetermined number of winnings according to the jackpot type, and the number exceeding the predetermined number of winnings depending on the skill of the player. Since it is possible to switch between the game characteristics that allow the game ball to win a prize, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game.

In the second embodiment, two operating winning openings (right operating winning opening 661 and left operating winning opening 662) are provided, and the operating winning openings that trigger the start of the jackpot are different depending on the jackpot type. .. That is, after the combination of the third symbols indicating the big hit (that is, doublet) is confirmed and displayed, the game ball enters the left-acting winning opening 662 (winning), which is likely to immediately enter the game ball. After the combination of the jackpot type that starts by doing this and the third symbol indicating the jackpot is confirmed and displayed, the game ball is doublet in the right-acting winning opening 661, which is unlikely to get doublet if the player does not aim. The configuration was such that a jackpot type that was started by winning a ball (winning) was provided. On the other hand, the configuration is such that only the right-operated winning opening 661 is provided, and even if the game ball does not enter (win) in the right-acting winning opening 661 (that is, the combination of the third symbol indicating the big hit is confirmed and displayed. There may be a configuration in which a jackpot type that starts (just by hand) and a jackpot type that does not start a jackpot unless a game ball enters (wins) in the right-acting winning opening 661. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to provide the left-acting winning opening 662 and the storage device 670, so that the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Therefore, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the second embodiment, the ease of entering the game ball into the first entry port 64 is constant regardless of the state of the storage device 675, but the ease of entering the ball into the first entry port 64. The configuration may be changed according to the state of the storage device 675 (whether or not the game ball is stored). Specifically, for example, a storage device 675 is provided on the upper left side of the first ball entry port 64, and when a game ball is stored in the storage device 675, the stored game ball is used. The height of the storage device 675 is set so that the upper surface partially protrudes from the upper surface of the storage device 675. Then, when the game ball launched by the left-handed hit collides with the game ball stored in the storage device 675, it is easily repelled in the direction in which the first ball entry port 64 is arranged. Set the position of the storage device 675. With this configuration, when the game ball is stored in the storage device 675, the game ball can easily enter the first entry port 64, so that the lottery of the first special symbol can be easily executed. Become. That is, it is advantageous for the player to store the game ball in the storage device 675, so that the player can positively store the game ball at normal times. Therefore, since the jackpot standby state can be started more reliably with the game balls stored in the storage device 675, the game balls stored in the storage device 675 can be immediately started in the event of a left-handed jackpot. The ball can be entered into the left-acting winning opening 662 to start the left-handed jackpot.

In the second embodiment, the period from the jackpot standby state to the start of the jackpot is different by switching the operation winning opening that triggers the start of the jackpot according to the jackpot type. It is not limited to. For example, the operation winning opening itself may be deleted (that is, the jackpot is started without going through the jackpot standby state), and the opening period may be simply different depending on the jackpot type. With this configuration, in a jackpot with a long opening, more game balls can be reached on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 by hitting right during the opening, whereas in a jackpot with a short opening period. Since it becomes difficult for the game ball to reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, the degree of advantage in the first round can be changed according to the jackpot type without using the operation winning opening.

In the second embodiment, the operation winning opening that triggers the start of the jackpot is switched according to the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the jackpot standby state, the jackpot may be started regardless of which operating winning opening the game ball enters. Then, the degree of advantage of the jackpot may be different depending on the type of the winning operation winning opening. More specifically, for example, the number of rounds of the jackpot is likely to increase when the jackpot is started by winning the right-acting winning opening 661 rather than winning the left-acting winning opening 662 and starting the jackpot. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, if the game ball can be immediately won (winned) to the right-acting winning opening 661 when the jackpot standby state is entered, it will be an advantageous result for the player, so it is a jackpot. Whether or not it will be will be predicted from the execution of the variable display, and the game ball will be immediately (in about 0.5 seconds until the game ball wins the left operation winning opening 662) after the jackpot standby state. It is possible to play a game by devising a way to enter the right-acting winning opening 661. Further, in this case, instead of switching the degree of advantage according to the type of the operating winning opening, the playability may be switched. Specifically, for example, when a ball enters the left-operated winning opening 662 and a big hit is started, the jackpot of 10 rounds is always started, while the right-acting winning opening 661 is entered. When a big hit is started by a ball, either 4 rounds or 16 rounds of big hits may be selected by lottery. By configuring in this way, it is possible to switch between a playability that stably gives a jackpot of 10 rounds and an unstable (highly gambling) playability that can be a large number of rounds or a small number of rounds. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the second embodiment, the jackpot is started when the game ball enters the operating winning opening corresponding to the jackpot type after the jackpot is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol, but this is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, a jackpot (so-called per type) that starts immediately when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery without including the operation winning opening, and a game ball is placed in a specific area provided on the gaming board 13. The right variable winning device 65 of the present embodiment is applied to a pachinko machine 10 (so-called 1-type 2-type mixer) of a type in which a big hit (so-called per-type 2) that starts when a ball is entered is present. However, the same operation can be realized. That is, in the case of one type, since the big hit starts shortly after launching the game ball toward the right variable winning device 65, it becomes impossible to aim for over-winning, but a specific area can be entered. In the case of a state (a state where two types can be aimed at), the game ball is first fired on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 and then the game ball is fired aiming at a specific area to intentionally over-win. Can be generated in.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 68. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when a big hit is obtained by a lottery of a special symbol and the game shifts to the big hit standby state, the pachinko machine 10 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 at the timing when the game ball enters the operating winning opening 660. The more the game balls in the game, the more advantageous the player is (the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round increases).

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, a situation is provided in which the degree of advantage of the player is different depending on the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 even in the case of a big hit. More specifically, a lottery result (small hit) is provided in which the right specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 0.2 seconds) in a part of the case where the lottery of the special symbol is missed. .. As a result, the more game balls that are passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 at the timing when the small hit is started, the larger the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the small hit. You can pay attention to the game.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main control device 110. , And the point that the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the point that the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the control executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The point is that the processing has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 63, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the third embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 63, in the third embodiment, the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 and the second ball entry port 640 are arranged in the flow path provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80. It is configured to be. In addition, by launching the game ball by hitting left, the game ball can be inserted into any of the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the first entry port 64, and the second entry port 640. You can make it a ball. Therefore, except during the jackpot standby state and the jackpot standby state, the player can be made to play the game by left-handed regardless of the gaming state. Then, in the case of a big hit or a small hit, a game ball is fired on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 by right-handed hitting, so that more game balls are released at the timing when the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened. You can enjoy the playability of winning a prize.

In the third embodiment, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds) due to a small hit in a part of the case where the lottery of the second special symbol is missed, but the first special. In the design lottery, the small hit is not won. With such a configuration, it is possible to further increase the degree of advantage while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the time-saving state of the normal symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the display effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 64 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol in the probabilistic state (probability change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol). be. In the present embodiment, in the case of a small hit, in the third symbol display device 81, as a combination of the third symbols indicating the small hit (so-called chance eye), "3", "4", and "1" are used. A combination of the third symbols with numbers is displayed. FIG. 64A shows the moment when all the symbol rows are stopped and displayed as a small hit.

As shown in FIG. 64 (a), in the probabilistic state, an image prompting the player to hit left is displayed in the small area Ds3 until the combination of the symbols corresponding to the small hits is confirmed and displayed. As a result, in the probable change state, it is possible to make a left-handed strike aiming at the second entrance 640 provided on the left side of the game board 13.

FIG. 64 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode during the definite display of small hits. During the small hit confirmation display, a balloon is formed in which the characters "From the right!" And the figure of the arrow pointing to the right are displayed for the small area Ds3 in the third symbol display device 81. According to this display content, the game ball can reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 by hitting right. Therefore, when the opening period of the small hit is started, the game ball arranged on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 can be entered into the right specific winning opening 65a. The fixed display of the small hit (see FIG. 64 (b)) continues to be displayed from the lapse of the variable period of the variable display corresponding to the small hit to the end of the small hit. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of the explanation, the image that encourages right-handed striking (see FIG. 64 (b)) displayed during the small hit is referred to as a “right-handed striking notification image”.

The small hit in the third embodiment has a configuration in which an opening period of 4 seconds is set. That is, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds) after 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of displaying the right-handed notification image (see FIG. 64 (b)) on the display screen. There is. As a result, by allowing more game balls to reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 during the opening period of 4 seconds, a small hit opening period is reached, and when the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened, more game balls are released. The ball can be entered into the right specific winning opening 65a.

Further, as described above, the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured so that the game ball can pass through in about 4 seconds. That is, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 for a period substantially the same as the opening period of the small hit. Therefore, when right-handed hitting is started after the right-handed hitting notification image (see FIG. 64 (b)) is displayed, the game ball passes over the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 before the opening period elapses. Can be suppressed. In addition, after the small hit is confirmed and displayed, the earlier the right-handed game ball is started, the more game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, so that the probability change state (probability change state of the special symbol) can be reached. In addition, in the time saving state of the normal symbol (the time saving state of the normal symbol) and the time saving state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol), the game can be played by paying more attention to the display contents of the third symbol display device 81. can.

<Electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. The ROM 202 of the third embodiment is only partially changed from the ROM 202 of the first embodiment described above with respect to the provisions of the random number table 202a per first. It is the same as the first embodiment described above. Therefore, as the description of the ROM 202 in the third embodiment, only the details of the random number table 202a per first will be described.

FIG. 65A is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first random number table 202a in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 65 (a), in the first hit random number table 202a in the third embodiment, in addition to the random number value (counter value) determined to be a big hit, the random number value (counter value) determined to be a small hit is shown. ) Is stipulated.

More specifically, regardless of whether the special symbol is in the low probability state or the special symbol is in the high probability state, the value of the random number counter C1 per first is "360" for the lottery of the second special symbol. Small hits are defined in association with the range of "~ 399" (see 202a2 and 202a4 in FIG. 65 (a)). On the other hand, the lottery of the first special symbol is not associated with any value of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to the small hit (see 202a2 and 202a4 in FIG. 65 (a)). Therefore, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, there is no possibility of a small hit, but when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, there is a 1/10 (40/400) probability of a small hit. Will be. Therefore, in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is high, which makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second entrance 640, and the prize ball becomes a small hit with a relatively high probability. Since the chance to win is obtained, it becomes a very advantageous gaming state for the player. Further, it is possible to provide a large difference in the degree of advantage of the player depending on whether or not the game is played aiming at the specific winning opening 65a in the case of a small hit. That is, in the present embodiment, after the small hit is notified, a large number (around 6) of the game balls are reached on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 by hitting the game balls to the right during the opening period of 4 seconds. be able to. In other words, at the time when the opening period of the small hit is started, about 6 game balls can be in a state of passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. Every time one game ball wins a prize for the specific winning opening 65a, 10 prize balls are given. Therefore, right-handed hitting is performed according to the right-handed notification (see FIG. 64 (b)) displayed in the small area Ds3. By doing so, about 60 prize balls can be obtained for each small hit. Therefore, in the case of a small hit, the degree of advantage between the probabilistic state and the time saving state can be greatly different depending on whether or not right-handed hitting is performed according to the display content (right-handed notification image) of the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the game can be played by paying more attention to the display contents of the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 65 (b). FIG. 65B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 in the third embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 13) in that the small hit medium flag 203p is added. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The small hit medium flag 203p is a flag indicating whether or not the small hit is in progress, and if it is on, it means that the small hit is in progress. On the other hand, if it is off, it means that it is not a small hit. Here, the term “small hit medium” indicates the period from the start of the small hit opening period to the end of the small hit ending period. The small hit medium flag 203p is set on at the beginning of the small hit opening period (see S1303 in FIG. 67) and turned off at the end of the small hit (see S1311 in FIG. 67).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. First, the main process 3 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process 3 is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, and is a process for performing the main control of the game as in the main process (see FIG. 30). be.

Of the main processes 3 (see FIG. 66) in the third embodiment, in each of the processes S1001 to S1005 and S1006 to S1016, S1001 to S1005 and S1006 of the main processes (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of S1016 is executed. Further, in the main process 3 (see FIG. 66) in the third embodiment, when the process of S1005 is completed, the small hit control process for controlling the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a during the execution of the small hit is next. Is executed (S1021), and the process shifts to S1006. The details of this small hit control process (S1021) will be described with reference to FIG. 67.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the small hit control process (S1021). In this small hit control process (S1021), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the small hit (S1301). In the process of S1301, the variation pattern is executed based on the determination that the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23), and the variation pattern corresponding to the small hit ends. When the timing comes, it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit.

In the process of S1301, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit (S1301: Yes), the small hit opening command indicating the start of the small hit opening period is set (S1302), and the small hit medium flag 203p is set. Set it on (S1303) to end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the small hit (S1301: No), then it is determined whether the small hit medium flag 203p is on (that is, whether the small hit is in progress). (S1304), if it is determined that the small hit medium flag 203p is off (S1304: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit medium flag 203p is on (S1304: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the right specific winning opening 65a (S1305). That is, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the opening period (3 seconds).

If it is determined in the process of S1305 that it is the opening timing of the right specific winning opening 65a (S1305: Yes), the opening of the right specific winning opening 65a is set (S1306), and this processing is terminated. By setting the opening of the right specific winning opening 65a by the process of S1306, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened and the game ball passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 wins (wins) the right specific winning opening 65a. .. As a result, the more the game balls reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, the larger the number of prize balls can be obtained by the player. Therefore, since more game balls can be fired at the player during the opening period of the small hit, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

In the process of S1305, if it is determined that it is not the opening timing of the right specific winning opening 65a (that is, it is not the end timing of the opening period) (S1305: No), then the closing condition of the right specific winning opening 65a is satisfied. Whether or not it is determined (S1307). In the third embodiment, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied when 0.2 seconds have passed since the right specific winning opening 65a was opened or when two game balls are won.

If it is determined in the process of S1307 that the closing condition of the right specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1307: Yes), the closing of the right specific winning opening 65a is set (S1308), indicating the start of the ending period of the small hit. Set the ending command for small hits (S1309), and end this process. The ending period of the small hit is set to a sufficient period (for example, 0.5 seconds) to eject all the game balls that have entered the right specific winning opening 65a.

On the other hand, in the process of S1307, if it is determined that the closing condition of the right specific winning opening 65a is not satisfied (S1307: No), then it is the end timing of the small hit (that is, the end timing of the ending period). (S1310), and if it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (S1310: Yes), the end of the small hit is set by turning off the small hit medium flag 203p (S1311). ), End this process. If it is determined in the process of S1310 that it is not the end timing of the small hit (S1310: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

By executing this small hit control process (see FIG. 66), it is possible to realize the same opening / closing operation of the right specific winning opening 65a for each small hit.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a hit-related process 3 (S4331) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. The hit-related process 3 (S4331) in the third embodiment is a process executed in place of the hit-related process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment in the command determination process (see FIG. 36). Similar to the hit-related process (see FIG. 37), this is a process for executing the control corresponding to the type of the command related to the hit.

Of the hit-related processes 3 (see FIG. 68) in the third embodiment, the processes S4401 to S4410 are the same as the processes S4401 to S4410 of the hit-related processes (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, respectively. The process is executed.

Further, in the hit-related process 3 (see FIG. 68) in the third embodiment, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received in the process of S4409 (S4409: No), then from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the small hit opening command has been received (S4431), and if it is determined that the small hit opening command has been received (S4431: Yes), a right-handed notification image (see FIG. 64 (b)) is displayed. A display command for this is set for the display control device 114 (S4432), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4431, if it is determined that the small hit opening command has not been received (S4431: No), then it is determined whether the small hit ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4433). ), When it is determined that the small hit ending command has been received (S4433: Yes), the display for canceling the right-handed notification image and returning to the normal left-handed notification image (see FIG. 64 (a)). Set the command (S4434) to end this process. By canceling the right-handed notification image at the beginning of the ending period of the small hit instead of the end timing of the small hit, the right specific winning opening 65a is closed and the game ball can enter the right specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from continuing to shoot the game ball by hitting it to the right even though it has no sex. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a loss for the player. On the other hand, in the process of S4433, if it is determined that the small hit ending command has not been received (S4433: No), this process is terminated as it is.

By the processing of S4431 to S4434 in the hit-related processing 3 (see FIG. 68) in the third embodiment, the display of the right-handed notification image is set from the start of the small hit opening period to the end of the small hit. can do. Therefore, the player can be made to hit right before the opening period of the small hit is started (during the opening period of 4 seconds). It is possible to set a state in which a plurality of game balls have reached the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 at the start of the hit opening period. Therefore, although the opening period of the small hit is short (maximum 0.2 seconds), a plurality of game balls can be entered into the specific winning opening 65a, and the game is performed according to the right-handed notification image. The degree of advantage can be increased. As a result, the player can be made to confirm the display content of the third symbol display device 81 more seriously, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, the lottery result (small hit) in which the right specific winning opening 65a is opened for a maximum of 0.2 seconds in a part of the case where the special symbol is lost in the lottery. ) Is provided. In this small hit, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened for 0.2 seconds after the opening period of 4 seconds is set. Therefore, by continuously firing the game balls toward the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 during the opening period of 4 seconds, a state in which a plurality of game balls are passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 at the start of the opening period. Therefore, the plurality of game balls can be entered into the opened right specific winning opening 65a. Further, when a small hit is obtained by a lottery of a special symbol, a right-handed notification image is displayed from the start of the opening period of the small hit to the end of the opening period. With this configuration, by performing right-handed strikes only while the right-handed hit notification image is displayed according to the display contents of the third symbol display device 81, a plurality of game balls can be easily hit with each small hit. During the opening period of 2 seconds, the right specific winning opening 65a can be won. Therefore, the game can be played by paying more attention to the display contents of the third symbol display device 81. Further, in the third embodiment, right-handed hitting is advantageous only in the case of a big hit or a small hit, and normally, the game is played by left-handed hitting. With this configuration, it is possible to frequently switch between right-handed and left-handed during a time-saving state or a probable change state, so it is fun to switch the direction in which the game ball is launched to the player. Can be squeezed. In addition, since it is a chance to win a prize ball if the right-handed hit is notified, the player can be pleased when the right-handed hit is notified.

In the third embodiment, when a small hit occurs during normal times, an effect of notifying a right-handed hit is executed, and in other cases, an effect of notifying a left-handed hit is executed, but this is limited to this. is not. For example, in the case of a small hit, the opening period is set immediately (for example, 0.1 seconds after the end of the fluctuation). That is, if the right-handed hit is not started during the execution of the variable display, it is difficult to insert the game ball during the opening period of the small hit. Then, it may be configured to execute an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of a small hit during the variable display of the second special symbol. Specifically, for example, during the execution of the variable display of the third symbol, the characters "10%", the characters "30%", and the characters "60%" are used for the small area Ds3. , One of the characters "100%" may be selected and displayed. When selecting, the character to be displayed may be determined with a selection probability according to the lottery result of the second special symbol. More specifically, the character "100%" is selected only in the case of a small hit, but the probability of being selected is configured to be lower than that of other characters. Further, the character "10%" is more difficult to be selected than "30%" or "60%" when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and is most likely to be selected when the lottery result is out of order. It is configured as follows. Further, the character "30%" is configured so that the probability of being selected in the case of a small hit is higher than "10%" and lower than "60%", while it is selected in the case of a miss. It is configured so that the probability of being performed is lower than "10%" and higher than "60%". Further, the character "60%" is configured so that the probability of being selected in the case of a small hit is higher than "30%", while the probability of being selected in the case of a miss is higher than "30%". Configure to be low. With this configuration, most of the characters displayed in the case of a small hit will be "30%" or "60%" that can be displayed even in the case of a miss, so from the displayed characters, It is possible to make the player predict whether or not it will be a small hit. Then, the player who predicts that the small hit will be hit can be fired at the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 by right-handed while the variable display is being executed (before the small hit is started). As a result, if the player makes a small hit as predicted, the opening / closing door 65f1 can be opened to win the prize ball, but if the prediction is not correct, the player simply hits the right side in vain. It is possible to make the player more seriously predict whether or not it is a small hit. Further, when the character "100%" is displayed, it is always a small hit, so that the player can be relieved to make a right-handed hit while the variable display is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game in the probable change state and the time saving state.

In the third embodiment, as the small hit type, only the small hit with an opening period of 4 seconds is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of types having different opening periods may be provided. Specifically, for example, a type having an opening period of 1 second, a type having an opening period of 2 seconds, a type having an opening period of 4 seconds, and a type having an opening period of 8 seconds may be provided. With this configuration, if the opening period is short (1 second or 2 seconds), the small hit will be a small hit, and if the right hit is made after the opening period of the small hit is started, the small hit will be made. Since the number of game balls that reach the opening / closing door 65f1 before the opening period is started is reduced, the number of prize balls tends to be smaller than that of the small hit type having an opening period of 4 seconds. On the other hand, if the opening period is a type of small hit that is longer (8 seconds) than the period required for the game ball to pass through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, the right after the opening period of the small hit is started. If you continue to hit, the game ball launched in the first half of the opening period will pass through the opening / closing door 65f1 before the start of the opening period. Therefore, since waste balls are likely to occur, the number of balls held is likely to decrease as compared with the small hit type with an opening period of 4 seconds. As a result, the degree of advantage of the player is changed depending on the type of small hit, so when the small hit is notified (the right-handed notification image is displayed), right-handed while hoping that the small hit is advantageous. Can be done.

In the third embodiment, the right-handed notification image is displayed when a small hit occurs, but the right-handed notification image is displayed not only during the small hit. For example, the right-handed notification image may be diverted to the display during execution of the jackpot (for example, the display of the opening period). With such a configuration, it is not necessary to prepare separate effects for the big hit and the small hit, so that the number of data in the display data table can be reduced.

In the third embodiment, there is a possibility of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the lottery of the second special symbol, a small hit may be won with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/50) when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to obtain a certain amount of balls when a small hit occurs in the low probability state of the special symbol, which is the most disadvantageous to the player, and in the normal state of the normal symbol. , It is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous. Therefore, even if the most disadvantageous state continues for a long time (so-called addiction occurs), the player can hardly get tired of the game. In this case, the ratio of displaying the right-handed notification image (occurrence rate of right-handed navigation) when a small hit is won may be changed according to the number of consecutive misses. That is, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the right-handed navigation is hardly generated even if the small hit is made, and the right-handed navigation is performed when the specified number of times is exceeded. It may be configured such that the occurrence rate has a high probability (for example, 50%). As a result, when the number of times exceeds a specific number, it becomes difficult to reduce the number of balls held, so that the player can continue the game for a longer time. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the big hit is started when the game ball enters the operating winning opening 660, but the operating winning opening 660 is deleted and the small hit is started. The configuration may be such that an over-winning can occur only when the result is.

In the third embodiment, the jackpot is started when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively or in addition, the jackpot may be started when the game ball enters a specific area inside the right variable winning device 65. That is, during the opening period of the right specific winning opening 65a based on winning a small hit, the game ball enters the specific area by entering the game ball into the right specific winning opening 65a, and the big hit. May be configured in which may be initiated. With this configuration, the merit of entering the right specific winning opening 65a in a small hit can be further increased, so that the game can be played by paying attention to whether or not right-handed navigation occurs. .. In this case, the lottery of the first special symbol may be configured to win a small hit, and then the rate of occurrence of right-handed navigation when a small hit is obtained may be changed for each game state. That is, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the navigation occurrence rate may be low, and in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the navigation occurrence rate may be high. With such a configuration, it is possible to further increase the degree of advantage of the normal symbol in the time-saving state. On the contrary, the navigation occurrence rate may be higher in the low probability state of the normal symbol. As a result, in addition to the case where you get a big hit in the lottery of special symbols, even if you get a small hit, you will be given a chance to enter a specific area and become a big hit, so there will be a situation where you will not win the big hit for a long time. It can be difficult to do. Therefore, the player can continue the game for a longer time. Further, in a low probability state of a normal symbol, when the number of times the special symbol is missed in the lottery becomes a specific number or more, the occurrence rate of right-handed navigation in the case of a small hit may be increased. .. With this configuration, when the number of times exceeds a certain number, it is possible to form a situation where it is easier to win a big hit (it is easier to put a game ball in a specific area) than before it is exceeded, so it is possible to form a special symbol for a long time. It can be configured so that the situation where the deviations of the above are continuous is unlikely to occur. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 74. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the jackpot is started by allowing the game ball to enter the operating winning opening 660 while the game ball is passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, and the opening / closing door 65f1 is started. The game ball passing through the upper surface of the ball enters the right specific winning opening 65a. In other words, when the jackpot standby state is reached, the degree of advantage in the first round (to the right specific winning slot 65a in the first round) is determined according to the timing at which the jackpot is always started (the ball is entered into the operating winning opening 660). The configuration was such that the number of game balls to be inserted) was variable.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment, the gameplayability in which the degree of advantage (the number of prize balls that can be obtained) in the first round changes according to the timing of starting the jackpot, the timing of starting the jackpot, and the first round. The player can select the playability that is irrelevant to the degree of advantage of the eyes (the number of prize balls that can be obtained). More specifically, in the fourth embodiment, depending on the player's selection in the jackpot standby state, the right specific winning opening 65a of the right variable winning device 65 is opened or the left variable winning device is opened in the first round of the jackpot. It is configured to change whether to open the left specific winning opening 650a of the 650. As a result, the player can be made to select his / her favorite playability, so that it is possible to provide the playability according to the taste of each player.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the left in each round of the jackpot. The condition for determining that the specific winning opening 650a is closed is "when 30 seconds have passed or four or more gaming balls have won a prize", and the configuration of the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 has been partially changed. The point that the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the point that the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. And the point that the configuration of ROM 202 in the main control device 110 is partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 69, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 69, in the fourth embodiment, a distribution device 680 is arranged on the upper right side of the front view of the game board 13 instead of the operation winning opening 660 in the first embodiment. Inside the sorting device 680, two actuating winning openings (right actuating winning opening 681 and left actuating winning opening 682) into which game balls can enter are provided. As with the actuated winning opening 660 in the first embodiment, it is determined that the entry of the game ball is effective only during the jackpot standby state in both of these two actuating winning openings. When a game ball enters the right-acting winning opening 681 in the jackpot standby state, a jackpot in which the right specific winning opening 65a is opened is started in one round of the jackpot, and the game ball goes to the left-acting winning opening 682. When the ball enters, the jackpot that the left specific winning opening 650a is opened in one round of the jackpot is started.

Further, above the two operating winning openings (right operating winning opening 681 and left operating winning opening 682), a distribution member for distributing the game ball that has entered the distribution device 680 to either operating winning opening. 683 is provided. The distribution member 683 is configured to be rotatable around a shaft 683a, and is tilted to the right (see the solid line in FIG. 69) according to the elapsed time (every 2 seconds) and tilted to the left. It is varied alternately with the arrangement (see the dashed line in FIG. 69). When the distribution member 683 is tilted to the right, the upper part of the right actuating winning opening 681 is closed by the distribution member 683 and the upper part of the left actuating winning opening 682 is opened. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the distribution device 680 while the distribution member 683 is tilted to the right has an inclination from the upper right direction of the front view to the lower left direction of the front view formed by the distribution member 683. It flows down in the lower left direction along the ball and enters the left-acting winning opening 682.

When a game ball enters the left-acting winning opening 682 in the jackpot standby state, a jackpot in which the left specific winning opening 650a is opened in all rounds of the jackpot is started. Unlike the right variable winning device 65, the left variable winning device 650 keeps the game ball in a position where the game ball can enter the left specific winning opening 650a while the left specific winning opening 650a is closed. It is configured to make it impossible. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, the number of game balls entered is unlikely to vary, and almost the same number of prize balls can be stably paid out each time. Therefore, for a player or the like who is not confident in the game of launching the game ball at the same timing, it is possible to select a jackpot in which the left specific winning opening 650a is opened.

As described above, the jackpot that starts when the game ball enters the left-acting winning opening 682 is 30 seconds after the start of each round, or the game ball is 4 in the left specific winning opening 650a. The round ends when more than one ball is entered. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot (left trigger jackpot) started when the game ball enters the left-acting winning opening 682, almost four game balls win the left specific winning opening 650a and the jackpot ends. do.

On the other hand, when the distribution member 683 is tilted to the left, the upper part of the right-acting winning opening 681 is opened and the upper part of the left-acting winning opening 682 is closed by the distribution member 683. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the distribution device 680 while the distribution member 683 is tilted to the left side is inclined from the upper left direction of the front view to the lower right direction of the front view formed by the distribution member 683. It flows down to the lower right along the line and enters the right-acting winning opening 681. When a game ball enters the right-acting winning opening 681, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened in the first round of the jackpot, and the left specific winning opening 650a is opened in the second and subsequent rounds. Jackpot) is started. The first round of this right-triggered jackpot ends when 30 seconds have passed since the right specific winning opening 65a was opened, or when two or more game balls enter the right specific winning opening 65a. However, as described above, the number of winnings to the right specific winning opening 65a is approximately 2 to 6 depending on the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 at the time of opening the right specific winning opening 65a. It goes up and down in the range. Therefore, when a game ball enters the right-acting winning opening 681 in the jackpot standby state, the number of prize balls that can be obtained varies according to the timing of the entry.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the arrangement of the distribution member 683 is switched every 2 seconds in the jackpot standby state. Therefore, the player can confirm the arrangement of the distribution member 683 and play the desired game. By inserting the game ball into the operation winning opening corresponding to the above at the timing when the ball can be entered, it is possible to provide the game playability that suits each player's taste.

If the game ball that has entered the distribution device 680 does not enter any of the actuated winning openings between the right-actuated winning opening 681 and the left-acting winning opening 682, the game ball is distributed to the distribution device. An out port is provided for discharging the 680 to the outside. By providing this out port, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of problems such as ball clogging inside the sorting device 680.

Next, the display effect in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode during the standby state effect executed in the jackpot standby state in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 70A shows a display mode while the distribution member 683 is tilted to the right in the jackpot standby state.

As shown in FIG. 70 (a), in the jackpot standby state in the fourth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the display area in which the characters "Big hit confirmed!" Are displayed on the upper part of the front view on the display screen. The combination of the HR1 and the third symbol (final stop symbol) that is finally stopped (confirmed) in the variable display effect that was executed before the jackpot standby state is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 70 (a), while the distribution member 683 is tilted to the right, the display area HR2 formed on the display screen is "safe mode when hit now !?". And the characters "You can get the prize ball stably!" And the direction in which the game ball that entered the sorting device 680 flows down (the direction in which the left-acting prize opening 682 is placed). The image shown is displayed. Further, unlike the first embodiment, the chance meter CM is not displayed, and the right side of the display screen is vacant. From these display contents, it is possible to make the player recognize that when the game ball is launched toward the distribution device 680, there is a high possibility that the ball will enter the left-acting winning opening 682. That is, regardless of the timing at which the game ball is inserted into the left-acting winning opening 682, the game-playing jackpot that allows five game balls to be stably entered into the left specific winning opening 650a in the first round. Can be recognized when is started.

As shown in FIG. 70 (b), while the distribution member 683 is tilted to the left, the characters "Big hit confirmed!" Are displayed on the upper part of the front view on the display screen as in the first embodiment. The displayed display area HR1 and the combination of the third symbol (final stop symbol) that is finally stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in the variable display effect that was executed before the jackpot standby state is displayed are displayed. In addition, the chance meter CM is displayed on the right side of the display screen as in the first embodiment. Then, for the display area HR2 formed on the display screen, the characters "If you hit it now, it is an unstable mode !?" and "If you are lucky, you will get a lot! If you are unlucky, ..." And an image showing the direction in which the game ball that has entered the distribution device 680 flows down (the direction in which the right-acting winning opening 681 is arranged) is displayed. From these display contents, it is possible to make the game ball recognize that when the game ball is launched toward the distribution device 680, there is a high possibility that the ball will enter the right-acting winning opening 681. That is, the number of game balls reaching the opening / closing door 65f1 is determined from the number of gauges of the chance meter CM, and the game balls are inserted into the right-acting winning opening 681 at the right timing (at the timing when the number of gauges is larger). By doing so, it is possible to recognize that a big hit of playability that can acquire more prize balls will be started.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the type of the operating winning opening that is entered when the game ball is launched aiming at the distribution device 680 in the jackpot standby state, and the outline of the jackpot started by the entry (game). The property) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. With this configuration, the player can be made to select a jackpot of playability that suits his / her taste. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of switching the playability according to the preference of each player.

<Electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 71 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 in the fourth embodiment has a specific winning opening type storage area 203q, a distribution state storage area 203r, and a distribution state timer 203s with respect to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 13). And are different in that is added. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The specific winning opening type storage area 203q is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of the specific winning opening that is opened in the first round of the jackpot. Specifically, when "01H" is stored in the specific winning opening type storage area 203q, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened in the first round of the jackpot, and the left specific winning opening 650a is opened in the second and subsequent rounds. It means that it is an open jackpot type. On the other hand, when "02H" is stored, it means that it is a jackpot type in which the left specific winning opening 650a is opened in each round of jackpot. The initial value of the specific winning opening type storage area 203q is set to "00H", and "01H" is stored when the game ball enters the right-acting winning opening 681 in the jackpot standby state. When the game ball enters the left-acting winning opening 682, "02H" is stored (see S1131 and S1133 in FIG. 72). When the start condition of the first round of the jackpot is satisfied, the type of the specific winning opening to be opened is determined based on the data of the specific winning opening type storage area 203q (S1232 in FIG. 73).

The distribution state storage area 203r is a storage area in which data indicating the orientation of the distribution member 683 is stored. Specifically, when "00H" is stored in the distribution state storage area 203r, the distribution member 683 is tilted to the left (a state in which a game ball can enter the right-acting winning opening 681). When "01H" is stored, the distribution member 683 is tilted to the right (a state in which a game ball can enter the left-acting winning opening 682). Means. The data in the distribution state storage area 203r is updated to the data corresponding to the arrangement after the change every time the arrangement of the distribution member 683 is switched in the jackpot standby state (see S1125 and S1127 in FIG. 72). The initial arrangement of the distribution member 683 is in a state of being tilted to the left. Along with this, the initial value of the distribution state storage area 203r is also set to "00H". In the jackpot standby state, every time the data in the distribution state storage area 203r is updated, a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the arrangement of the distribution member 683 corresponding to the updated data (distribution state command). ) Is set. By this distribution state command, it is determined that the arrangement of the distribution member 683 has been switched, and the display mode of the standby state effect is updated to the display mode corresponding to the arrangement after the change.

The distribution state timer 203s is a timer for counting the remaining time until the state of the distribution member 683 is switched. The distribution state timer 203s resets the timer value to "0" each time the state of the distribution member 683 is switched in the jackpot standby state, and 1 each time the jackpot start process 4 (see FIG. 72) described later is executed. They are added one by one (S1121 in FIG. 72). That is, it is updated at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the main process. Then, when the timer value becomes 500 or more, the state of the distribution member 683 is switched (see SS1124 and S1126 in FIG. 72).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. First, the jackpot start processing 4 (S1041) in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 72. The jackpot start process 4 (S1041) is a process executed in place of the jackpot start process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, and is an actuation winning opening (right actuating winning opening 681 and left actuating winning opening 682). It is a process for monitoring the entry into the ball and starting a big hit corresponding to the type of the actuation winning opening when the entry into the operation winning opening is detected.

Of the jackpot start processing 4 (see FIG. 72) in the fourth embodiment, in each of the processes S1101, S1103, and S1104, the jackpot start processing (see FIG. 31) S1101, S1103, and S1104 in the first embodiment, respectively, The same process as each process of is executed.

Further, in the jackpot start processing 4 (see FIG. 72) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the ball entry waiting flag 203j is on (that is, the jackpot waiting state is in progress) in the processing of S1101 (S1101: Yes), then 1 is added to the value of the distribution state timer 203s (S1121), and it is determined whether the added timer value is 500 or more (S1122). In the process of S1122, when it is determined that the timer value of the distribution state timer 203s after addition is 500 or more (S1122: Yes), it means that it is time to switch the state of the distribution member 683. Each process of S1123 to S1129 for switching the state of the member 683 is executed.

Specifically, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the distribution state storage area 203r is "00H" (whether the distribution member 683 is tilted to the left) (S1123). If it is determined in the process of S1123 that "00H" is stored (S1123: Yes), the distribution member 683 tilted to the left is changed to a tilted state to the right (S1124), and the distribution state is changed. “01H” is stored in the storage area 203r (S1125), and the process shifts to S1128.

On the other hand, in the process of S1123, when it is determined that the data stored in the distribution state storage area 203r is "01H" (S1123: No), the distribution member 683 tilted to the right is tilted to the left. The state is changed (S1126), "00H" is stored in the distribution state storage area 203r (S1127), and the process shifts to S1128.

In the process of S1128 executed after the process of S1125 or S1127, a distribution state command indicating the arrangement of the distribution member 683 after switching is set (S1128), and the value of the distribution state timer 203s is reset to 0 (). S1129), the process shifts to S1130.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1122 that the value of the distribution state timer 203s after the update is less than 500 (S1122: No), it means that it is not the timing to switch the state of the distribution member 683. Therefore, each process of S1123 to S1129 is skipped, and the process is transferred to S1130. In the processing of S1130, it is determined whether or not a ball has been detected in the right-acting winning opening 681 (S1130), and if it is determined that a ball has been detected (S1130: Yes), the specific winning opening type storage area 203q is used. The data "01H" indicating the right specific winning opening 650a is stored (S1131), and the processing is transferred to S1103. As a result, it is possible to set the start of the jackpot in which the right specific winning opening 65a is opened in the first round of the jackpot.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball entering the right-acting winning opening 681 has not been detected in the processing of S1130 (S1130: No), then it is determined whether or not the entry into the left-acting winning opening 682 has been detected. (S1132). If it is determined that a ball has been detected in the left-acting winning opening 682 in the process of S1132 (S1132: Yes), the data indicating the left specific winning opening 650a with respect to the specific winning opening type storage area 203q is "02H". Is stored (S1133), and the process is transferred to S1103. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has not been detected in the left-acting winning opening 682 in the processing of S1132 (S1132: No), it means that it is not the end timing of the jackpot waiting state. End the process.

Further, in the jackpot start process 4 (S1041) in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S1104 is completed, the distribution state timer 203s is then reset to 0 (S1134), and the process is terminated. In the process of S1134, by resetting the distribution state timer 203s at the end of the jackpot standby state, it is possible to start updating the timer value from the state in which the distribution state timer 203s is reset in the next jackpot standby state. ..

Next, the jackpot control process 4 (S1042) in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 4 (S1042). The jackpot control process 4 (S1042) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, and is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32). ), This is a process for controlling the opening / closing operation of the right specific winning opening 65a and the left specific winning opening 650a.

Of the jackpot control processes 4 (see FIG. 73) in the fourth embodiment, in each of the processes S1201 to S1205 and S1207 to S1217, the jackpot control processes (see FIG. 32) S1201 to S1205 in the first embodiment, respectively, And the same processing as each processing of S1207 to S1217 is executed. Further, in the jackpot control process 4 (see FIG. 73) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1205 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1205: Yes), the round to be started this time is one round. (S1231).

In the processing of S1231, if it is determined that the round is one (S1231: Yes), the opening of the specific winning opening corresponding to the data stored in the specific winning opening type storage area 203q is set (S1232), and the processing is performed. To S1207. More specifically, if the data stored in the specific winning opening type storage area 203q is "01H", the opening of the right specific winning opening 65a is set, while the stored data is "02H". If so, open the left specific winning opening 650a.

On the other hand, in the process of S1231, if it is determined that the round to be started this time is not the first round (S1232: No), the opening of the left specific winning opening 650a is set (S1233), and the process is shifted to S1207. do.

By executing this jackpot control process 4 (see FIG. 73), in the first round of the jackpot, the specific winning openings according to the type of the (selected) operating winning openings passed by the player in the jackpot standby state are opened. Can be made to. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, it is possible to provide the playability according to the type of the operating winning opening selected by the player.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the hit-related process 4 (S4341) in the fourth embodiment. The hit-related process 4 (S4341) is a process executed in place of the hit-related process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, and is a command related to the hit as in the hit-related process (see FIG. 37). It is a process for executing the control corresponding to the type of.

Of the hit-related processes 4 (see FIG. 74) in the fourth embodiment, the processes S4401 to S4410 are the same as the processes S4401 to S4410 of the hit-related processes (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, respectively. The process is executed. Further, in the hit-related process 4 (see FIG. 74) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the ending command is not included in the command received from the main control device 110 in the process of S4409 (S4409: No), then it is determined whether or not the distribution state command is included (S4441).

When it is determined in the process of S4441 that the distribution status command is included in the command received from the main control device 110 (S4441: Yes), it corresponds to the distribution status indicated by the received distribution status command. A display command for updating to the standby state effect mode is set (S4442), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4441 that the distribution state command is not included in the command received from the main control device 110 (S4441: No), this process is terminated as it is.

By this hit-related process 4 (see FIG. 74), each time the state of the distribution member 683 is switched, the display mode (see FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b)) can be set according to the state after the change. Therefore, in the case of the jackpot standby state, the player only confirms the display content of the third symbol display device 81, and the current state of the distribution device 680 is his / her own when the game ball is inserted. It is possible to easily determine whether or not the jackpot of playability that suits the taste is started.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, two types of specific winning openings (right specific winning opening 65a and left specific winning opening 650a) that allow a game ball to enter in the event of a big hit are provided. It is configured to be provided. More specifically, while the right specific winning opening 65a is closed, the game ball is relatively long at a position (upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1) where the right specific winning opening 65a can be entered when the right specific winning opening 65a is opened. While the structure allows the player to stay for a while, the left specific winning opening 650a keeps the game ball in a position where the game ball can enter the left specific winning opening 650a while the left specific winning opening 650a is closed. It is configured so that it is impossible to keep it. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, two types of operating winning openings (right operating winning opening 681 and left operating winning opening 682) that trigger the start of a big hit are provided, and the operating winning opening for entering a ball in the jackpot standby state is played. It is configured to let the person choose. If the game ball enters the right-operated winning opening 681, the right-triggered jackpot 65a will be opened in each round of the jackpot, and the right-triggered jackpot will start, and if the game ball enters the left-acting winning opening 682. , The left-triggered jackpot is started, in which the left specific winning opening 650a is opened in each round of the jackpot. As a result, the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 at the timing of entering the game balls into the right-acting winning opening 681 greatly affects the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round. , It is possible to let the player select the playability in which the situation in the jackpot waiting state does not affect the number of winning prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to provide playability according to the taste of each player.

In the fourth embodiment, in the case of a left-triggered jackpot, it is impossible to keep the game ball at a position where the ball can enter the left specific winning opening 650a in the jackpot standby state. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls may be configured to stay at a position where the left specific winning opening 650a can enter, within a range smaller than the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. With this configuration, even when the player selects the left-acting winning opening 682, it is possible to provide a game property in which the degree of advantage changes according to the timing at which the game ball is inserted.

In the fourth embodiment, in the case of a right-triggered jackpot, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened in all rounds of the jackpot, while in the case of a left-triggered jackpot, the left specific winning opening 650a is opened in all rounds. It was designed to open up, but it is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the specific winning opening corresponding to the operating winning opening is opened only in the first round, and the common specific winning opening may be opened in the second and subsequent rounds. Even with this configuration, the game playability in the first round can be switched according to the type of the operating winning opening in which the game ball enters.

In the fourth embodiment, it is different whether to start the right-triggered jackpot or the left-triggered jackpot depending on the type of the activated winning opening. That is, the type of the specific winning opening to be opened in the big hit is different according to the type of the operating winning opening, but it is not limited to this depending on the type of the operating winning opening. For example, the number of rounds of the jackpot may be different depending on the type of the operating winning opening. More specifically, for example, when a game ball enters the right-operated winning opening 681, the number of rounds is 16 rounds, or the jackpot of 4 rounds is drawn in half, whereas the left-acting winning opening 682 is drawn. When a game ball enters the ball, a jackpot with 10 rounds may be selected without fail. In addition, in a gaming machine (so-called V-probability machine) in which a probabilistic state is given after a jackpot when a game ball enters a specific area during a big hit, the player enters the specific area according to the type of the operating winning opening. It may be configured to have different ball rates. More specifically, for example, when a game ball enters the right-acting winning opening 681, a 20% jackpot and a 100% jackpot in a specific area are drawn in half and half. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the left-acting winning opening 682, a jackpot with a ball entry rate of 60% in a specific area may be selected without fail.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 79. In the first embodiment described above, the degree of advantage when the jackpot is started (the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round) according to the number of game balls fired toward the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 in the jackpot standby state. Was a variable configuration.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, when the variation display corresponding to the big hit is completed, the big hit is started without going through the big hit standby state. Then, by making the opening period and the interval period of the big hit different according to the big hit type, the number of game balls that can reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 in the opening period and the interval period is made different, and each big hit type. The configuration is such that the degree of advantage is variable.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the end of each round of jackpots. The conditions were unified to "when 30 seconds have passed or two or more gaming balls have won a prize", the configuration of ROM 202 in the main controller 110 has been partially changed, and the main controller. The point is that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of 110 has been partially changed. The first regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 75, the board surface configuration of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 75, in the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment, the operation winning opening 660 provided on the upper right side of the front view of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) in the first embodiment is deleted. .. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, when the variation display corresponding to the jackpot ends, the jackpot opening period is immediately started (without going through the jackpot standby state).

Further, as shown in FIG. 75, in the fifth embodiment, the left variable winning device 650a is deleted. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, in all the rounds of the jackpot, 30 seconds have passed since the start of the round, or the right specific winning opening is closed when two or more game balls enter. 65a is released.

<Electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76A is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 76 (a), the ROM 202 in the fifth embodiment has a period length selection table 202e added to the configuration of the RM 202 in the first embodiment, and the first type selection table. It differs from the fact that the provisions of 202b have been partially changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of ROM 202 in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The period length selection table 202e is a data table in which the opening period of the jackpot and the interval period are defined for each type of jackpot. When the start timing of the jackpot opening period and the start timing of the interval period are reached, the period amount selection table 202e is referred to, and the opening period and the interval period according to the jackpot type are set. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 70 (c), but in this period length selection table 202e, there are two types of opening periods, a relatively long period (5 seconds) and a relatively short period (1 second). Is stipulated. Similarly, two types of interval periods are defined: a relatively long period (3 seconds) and a relatively short period (0.5 seconds). As a result, a jackpot with a long closing period (opening period) from the start of the jackpot to the start of the first round, and a jackpot with a long closing period (interval period) between the second and subsequent rounds is provided. be able to.

Next, the first type selection table 202b in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 76 (b). FIG. 76B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first type selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 76 (b), in the first hit type selection table 202b in the fifth embodiment, there are five types of jackpots, "big hit A5" to "big hit E5", as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. It is stipulated, and three types of jackpots, "big hit F5" to "big hit H5", are defined as the jackpot types of the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 76 (b), as the jackpot of the first special symbol, "big hit A5" is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 4". (See 202b1 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes "big hit A5" is five, so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit A5" is determined. The ratio is 5% (5/100). This "big hit A2" has 8 rounds like the "big hit A" in the first embodiment, and after the big hit is completed, a "probability change state of a special symbol" and a "time saving state of a normal symbol" are given. It is a big hit type. Further, this "big hit A5" is one of the big hit types in which a relatively long period is set as the opening period and the ending period. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, 30 seconds have passed in all rounds of the jackpot, or two or more game balls enter the right specific winning opening 65a to enter the right specific winning opening 65a. Is closed and the round ends. Therefore, if the opening period and the interval period are long, more game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 during the closing period, so that more game balls open / close at the start of the next round. It can be in a state of being on the door 65f1. That is, when a new round is started and the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened, more game balls can be dropped from the opening / closing door 65f1 and entered into the right specific winning opening 65a. As a result, there is a high possibility that the number of game balls exceeding the upper limit number of balls (2) specified in each round will enter the right specific winning opening 65a (over prize), so that the player can win. It tends to be advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if the opening period and the interval period are short, it becomes difficult for the game ball to reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 during these closing periods. There is a high possibility that two) game balls will enter and the round will end (the possibility of over-winning will be low). That is, it tends to be disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls. In the following explanation, a jackpot with a long opening period and an interval period (a jackpot in which the number of prize balls to be won in each round tends to increase) is referred to as a "long interval jackpot", and a jackpot with a short opening period and an interval period (each). A jackpot that makes it difficult for the number of prize balls to be won in a round to increase) is called a "short-interval jackpot."

As a jackpot of the first special symbol, "big hit B5" is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "5 to 14" (see 202b2 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes "big hit B2" is 10, so if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit B5" is determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100). This "big hit B5" has 5 rounds like the "big hit B" in the first embodiment, and after the end of the big hit, a "probability change state of a special symbol" and a "time saving state of a normal symbol" are given. It is a big hit type. Further, this "big hit B5" is a kind of long-interval big hit like "big hit A5". Therefore, the number of prize balls to be won in each round tends to be larger than that of the short-interval jackpot.

As a jackpot of the first special symbol, "big hit C5" is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "15 to 64" (see 202b3 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 counter values are "big hit C2", so if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit C5" is determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100). This "big hit C5" has 5 rounds like the "big hit B" in the first embodiment, and after the end of the big hit, a "probability change state of a special symbol" and a "time saving state of a normal symbol" are given. It is a big hit type. Moreover, this "big hit C5" is a kind of short-interval jackpot. For this reason, it is difficult for the number of prize balls to be obtained in each round to increase compared to the long-interval jackpot.

As a jackpot of the first special symbol, "big hit D5" is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "65 to 74" (see 202b4 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes "big hit D5" is 10, so if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit D5" is determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100). This "big hit D5" has 5 rounds like the "big hit C" in the first embodiment, and after the big hit is completed, a "low probability state of a special symbol" and a "time saving state of a normal symbol" are given. It is a big hit type to be done. Further, this "big hit D5" is a kind of long-interval jackpot. Therefore, the number of prize balls to be won in each round tends to be larger than that of the short-interval jackpot.

As a jackpot of the first special symbol, "big hit E5" is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "75 to 99" (see 202b5 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 25 counter values are "big hit E5", so if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit E5" is determined. The ratio is 25% (25/100). This "big hit E5" has 5 rounds like the "big hit C" in the first embodiment, and after the big hit is completed, a "low probability state of a special symbol" and a "time saving state of a normal symbol" are given. It is a big hit type to be done. Moreover, this "big hit E5" is a kind of short-interval jackpot. For this reason, it is difficult for the number of prize balls to be obtained in each round to increase compared to the long-interval jackpot.

Further, as a jackpot of the second special symbol, "big hit F5" is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 4" (see 202b6 in FIG. 76). .. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes "big hit F5" is five, so if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit F5" is determined. The ratio is 5% (5/100). This "big hit F5" has 16 rounds like the "big hit D" in the first embodiment, and after the end of the big hit, a "probability change state of a special symbol" and a "time saving state of a normal symbol" are given. It is a big hit type. Further, this "big hit F5" is a kind of long-interval jackpot. Therefore, the number of prize balls to be won in each round tends to be larger than that of the short-interval jackpot.

As a jackpot of the second special symbol, "big hit G5" is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "5 to 64" (see 202b7 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes "big hit G5" is 60, so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit G5" is determined. The ratio is 60% (60/100). This "big hit G5" has 10 rounds like the "big hit E" in the first embodiment, and after the end of the big hit, a "probability change state of a special symbol" and a "time saving state of a normal symbol" are given. It is a big hit type. Moreover, this "big hit G5" is a kind of long-interval jackpot. Therefore, the number of prize balls to be won in each round tends to be larger than that of the short-interval jackpot.

As a jackpot of the second special symbol, "big hit H5" is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "65 to 99" (see 202b8 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, the counter value that becomes "big hit H5" is 35, so if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit H5" is determined. The ratio is 35% (35/100). This "big hit H5" has 10 rounds like the "big hit D" in the first embodiment, and after the end of the big hit, a "low probability state of a special symbol" and a "time saving state of a normal symbol" are given. It is a big hit type to be done. Further, this "big hit H5" is a kind of long-interval jackpot. Therefore, the number of prize balls to be won in each round tends to be larger than that of the short-interval jackpot.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, a long-interval jackpot and a short-interval jackpot are provided. In the long-interval jackpot, the closing period of the right specific winning opening 65a between rounds becomes long, so that more game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 by right-handed during the long closing period. Therefore, when the closing period ends and a new round is started, the game ball passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 can be entered into the right specific winning opening 65a, so that more prize balls can be obtained. Can be acquired. On the other hand, in the short-interval jackpot, the period from the closing of the right specific winning opening 65a to the next opening is short, and most of the time, the game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 during the closing period. Since it cannot be done, the possibility of over-winning in the next round is low. Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round tends to be smaller than that of long-interval jackpots. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, the degree of advantage for each jackpot can be changed by differentiating the possibility of over-winning for each jackpot type, apart from the number of rounds and the game state after the jackpot. It is possible to pay attention to the type and play the game.

Next, the details of the period length selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 76 (c). FIG. 76C is a diagram showing the specified contents of the period length selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 76 (c), the period length selection table 202e defines the length of the opening period and the period to be set as the interval period for each type of jackpot.

Specifically, for the jackpot types "Big hit A5", "Big hit B5", "Big hit D5", "Big hit F5" to "Big hit H5" (long-interval jackpot), "5 seconds" is set as the opening period. In addition to being defined in association with each other, "3 seconds" is also specified in association with the interval period (see 202e1 in FIG. 76 (c)). For the jackpot types "big hit C5" and "big hit E5" (short interval jackpot), "1 second" is specified in association with the opening period, and "0.5 seconds" is defined as the interval period. Is specified in association with each other (see 202e2 in FIG. 76 (c)). By selecting the opening period and the interval period with reference to these provisions, each closing period (opening period, interval period) becomes relatively long in the long interval jackpot, so the game ball can be played during the closing period. A relatively large number can reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. On the other hand, in the short interval jackpot, each closing period is set to a short length such as whether or not one game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 even if the player hits right after the closing period starts. , Over-winning is less likely to occur in each round of big hits. Therefore, by setting the closing period with reference to the period length selection table 202e, it is possible to make the possibility of over-winning different depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the type of jackpot and play the game.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. First, the special symbol variation processing 5 (S121) in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 77. This special symbol variation process 5 (S121) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) instead of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment, and is a special symbol variation process. Similar to (see FIG. 22), this is a process for setting a display in the first symbol display device 37, setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

Of the special symbol variation processing 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment, in each of the processes S202 to S219 and S222 to S224, S202 to the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S219 and S222 to S224 is executed.

Further, when the special symbol variation processing 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment is started, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (S241), and if the jackpot is in progress (S241: Yes). The process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S241, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S241: No), the process is shifted to S202.

Further, in the special symbol variation processing 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment, when the processing of S219 is completed, the jackpot start flag 203k is set to ON (S242), and the processing is shifted to S224.

Next, the jackpot control process 5 (S1052) in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 78. The jackpot control process 5 (S1052) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, and opens and closes the right specific winning opening 65a. This is a process for controlling the operation.

Of the jackpot control processes 5 (see FIG. 78), in each of the processes S1201, S1203 to S1209, and S1210 to S1217, the jackpot control processes (see FIG. 32) S1201, S1203 to S1209, respectively, in the first embodiment, and The same processing as each processing of S1210 to S1217 is executed.

Further, in the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 78) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203k is on in the process of S1201 (S1201: Yes), the period length selection table 202e (FIG. 76). (C)) is read (S1241), the opening period of the length corresponding to the current jackpot type is specified from the read period length selection table 202e, and an opening command indicating the specified period is set (S1242). .. In the process of S1242, an opening command indicating an opening period of 5 seconds is set in the case of a long-interval jackpot, and an opening command indicating an opening period of 1 second is set in the case of a short-interval jackpot. When the processing of S1242 is completed, the processing is transferred to S1203.

Further, in the jackpot control process 5 (see FIG. 78) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that the closing condition of the right specific winning opening 65a is satisfied in the process of S1208 (S1208: Yes), the jackpot type is determined. The interval setting process for setting the interval period is executed (S1243), and this process ends. The details of this interval setting process (S1243) will be described with reference to FIG. 79.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the interval setting process (S1243). In this interval setting process (S1243), first, it is determined whether the closing condition established this time is the closing due to the end of the final round (S1401), and if it is determined that the closing is due to the end of the final round (S1401). : Yes), since it is not necessary to set the interval period, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1401 that the closing condition associated with the end of a round other than the final round is satisfied (S1401: No), the period length selection table 202e is read out (S1402), and the current jackpot type is supported. The length of the interval period to be performed is selected (specified) from the read period length selection table 202e (S1403). Then, the start of the interval period of the length specified in the process of S1403 is set (S1404), and the present process is terminated.

By executing this interval setting process (see FIG. 79), the length of the interval period can be changed depending on whether it is a long-interval jackpot or a short-interval jackpot. As a result, in the long interval jackpot, a large amount of game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 that is closed every interval period, so that a large amount of game balls reach the right specific winning opening 65a at the start of the next round. Can be over-winned. On the other hand, in the case of a short-interval jackpot, an extremely short period (0.5 seconds) is set as the interval period, so that the game ball can reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 during the interval period. It will be difficult. Therefore, over-winning is less likely to occur in each round, and the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that a long-interval jackpot will be selected as the jackpot type.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, a long-interval jackpot having a relatively long jackpot opening period and an interval period, and a short-interval jackpot having a relatively short jackpot opening period and an interval period are provided. It has a structure. In the case of a long-interval jackpot, the closing period (opening period) from the notification of the jackpot to the start of the first round, and the start of the next round after the end of one round. In the closing period (interval period) until, a large amount of prize balls can be made to reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 by hitting right. Therefore, when the closing period elapses and the right specific winning opening 65a is opened, the game ball on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 can be entered into the right specific winning opening 65a at once, so that in each round of the jackpot. It is possible to increase the rate at which over-winning occurs. On the other hand, in the case of a short-interval jackpot, even if the player hits right during the closing period, the closing period is too short and the next round starts with the game ball hardly reaching the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. .. Therefore, over-winning is less likely to occur, which is more disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls than the long-interval jackpot. As a result, in addition to the number of rounds of the jackpot and the game state after the jackpot ends, the susceptibility to over-winning can be made different depending on the jackpot type, so that the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type is further increased. be able to. Therefore, in the case of a big hit, it is possible to pay attention to the type of big hit and play the game.

In the fifth embodiment, only two types, a long interval jackpot with a long closing period and a short interval jackpot with a short closing period, are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to provide more types. Specifically, for example, in addition to the long-interval jackpot and the short-interval jackpot, a long interval (for example, 3 seconds) is set as a closing period until a predetermined round of jackpots (for example, the third round), and subsequent rounds. In, a short interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set as a jackpot type, and conversely, a short interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set as a closing period until a predetermined round (for example, the third round). , In the subsequent rounds, a jackpot type in which a long interval (for example, 3 seconds) is set may be provided. Further, for example, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type in which short intervals and long intervals are alternately repeated is provided. With this configuration, even if the opening period is short, the player will be informed that the jackpot will be a long interval after a predetermined round, or that the short interval and the long interval will be repeated alternately. You can expect it. In addition, if the opening period is a long interval, it can be expected to be a big hit in which a long interval is set for all closing periods. As a result, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of predicting the jackpot type.

In the fifth embodiment, when a long-interval jackpot occurs, both the opening period and the interval period are set to long intervals, and when a short-interval jackpot occurs, both the opening period and the interval period are short. It was supposed to be an interval, but it is not limited to this. For example, one may have a common length period, and only the length of the other period may be different depending on the jackpot type. As a result, the control can be simplified, so that the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In the fifth embodiment, the lengths of the opening period and the interval period are different depending on the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to this, at least one of the opening period and the interval period may be different depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, for example, in the low probability state of the special symbol disadvantageous to the player and the normal state of the normal symbol, a short opening period (for example, 1 second) and an interval period (for example, 0.5 second) are set. On the other hand, in the gaming state (probability change state, time saving state) in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, a long opening period (for example, 5 seconds) and an interval period (for example, 3 seconds) are set. It may be configured to provide a jackpot type. As a result, it is possible to further improve the degree of advantage of the probabilistic state and the time saving state that are advantageous to the player. On the contrary, a configuration may be configured in which a long closing period is set in a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, and a short closing period is set in a gaming state that is advantageous. As a result, if a big hit is made in a disadvantageous state to the player, more prize balls can be obtained, so that it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game in the case of a disadvantageous state. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Further, the control for varying the length of the closing period according to the gaming state or the jackpot type does not necessarily have to be combined with the right variable winning device 65 in the present embodiment. It may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 provided with only a variable winning device having a structure that cannot intentionally generate an over winning (for example, the left variable winning device 650 in each of the above embodiments). As a result, the closing period can be changed according to the situation (winning jackpot type, gaming state at the time of winning, etc.), so that the effect to be executed during the closing period can be different. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the production mode.

<Modified example of the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, a modified example of the fifth embodiment described above will be described. I explained the technique to set the jackpot type that is difficult to win. On the other hand, in this modification, the technique of using two types of variable winning devices (lower variable winning device 65 and upper variable winning device 650) to make the possibility of over-winning different without changing the closing period is described. explain.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 80, in this modification, the lower variable winning device 65 having the same structure as the right variable winning device 65 in each of the above embodiments is arranged at the same position as the right variable winning device 65 in each of the above embodiments. Has been done. Further, above the lower variable winning device 65, an upper variable winning device 650 having the same structure as the left variable winning device 650 in the first to fourth embodiments is arranged. In this modification, the upper specific winning opening 650a of the upper variable winning device 650 and the lower specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 are alternately opened for each round according to the jackpot type (alternate jackpot). ) And a jackpot type (one jackpot) in which the lower specific winning opening 65a is opened in each round of jackpots are provided. Further, each closing period (opening period, interval period) is set to the same period as the short interval jackpot in the fifth embodiment described above. With such a configuration, one jackpot has the same operation as the short-interval jackpot in the fifth embodiment described above, so that almost no over-winning occurs, which is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls.

On the other hand, in the case of alternating jackpots, if a right-handed hit is made in a round in which the upper specific winning opening 650a is open, some game balls pass through the right side of the upper specific winning opening 650a (upper specific winning opening 650a). It may flow downward (without winning a prize in the mouth 650a) and reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. That is, at the start of the next round (the round in which the lower specific winning opening 65a is opened), there is a possibility that one or more game balls are arranged on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. As a result, the more game balls that reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, the higher the rate of over-winning in the next round (the round in which the lower specific winning opening 65a is opened). Therefore, in the case of alternating jackpots, the player is allowed to play the game by devising a firing strength that makes it easier to reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 through the right side of the upper specific winning opening 650a. Can be done. That is, during a maximum of 30 seconds when the upper specific winning opening 650a is open, more game balls are made to reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, and then the upper specified winning opening 650a has a maximum number (2) or more games. It is possible to play a game with the aim of letting the ball enter. As a result, in the case of alternating jackpots, the prize balls that can be obtained differ depending on the player's game method, so players who are confident in their technique can actively play the game with the pachinko machine 10. Can be done. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 90. In the fifth embodiment described above, by making the opening period and the length of the ending period (the length of the closing period) different according to the jackpot type, the opening / closing door 65f1 of the right variable winning device 65 is reached in each closing period. The number of game balls that can be played is different. As a result, the game ball passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 at the start of each round (that is, when the right specific winning opening 65a is opened, is arranged at a position guided to the inside of the right specific winning opening 65a. It is configured so that the number of game balls) can be made different. In a long-interval jackpot where a closing period is set that allows more than two game balls to reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, the game balls are continuously fired toward the opening / closing door 65f1 during the closing period. All the game balls passing over the opening / closing door 65f1 at the start of the next round can be made to win a prize in the opened right specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, in each round of big hits that ends when two or more game balls are won, a number of game balls exceeding the specified number (2 pieces) can be entered by simply hitting right continuously during the closing period. be able to. On the other hand, in a short-interval jackpot with a closing period set to a length that allows only two or less game balls to reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, the jackpot passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 at the start of each round. The number of game balls inside is almost 2 or less. As a result, in each round of the jackpot, almost only the specified number (2) of game balls enter and the round ends. As a result, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round of the jackpot can be made different according to the jackpot type, so that the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type can be further increased.

On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, the length of the opening period is fixed at 0.5 seconds regardless of the jackpot type. That is, even if a right-handed hit is made after the opening period starts, the opening period ends before the game ball reaches the opening / closing door 65f1, and the right specific winning opening 65a is opened. Then, depending on the content of the suggestion during the execution of the variable display effect, whether it is better to fire the game ball from the variable display (whether the open / close door 65f1 is opened when a plurality of game balls reach the upper surface of the open / close door 65f1). Please let the player decide. That is, it is configured to be able to execute an effect of notifying the player of the possibility of being advantageous when hitting right while executing the variable display. As a result, the player is made to predict whether or not it is better to hit right from the content of the production, and when it is judged that it is better to hit right, it is right before the fluctuation ends. You can start hitting. Therefore, when the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened as expected, it is possible to give the player a sense of happiness for generating the over prize by himself / herself.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment is that the arrangement and number of the passage detection sensors 228 provided in the right variable winning device 65 are changed. , The configuration of ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main controller 110 has been partially changed, the configuration of ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially modified, and the audio lamp control device 113. The point is that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the above is partially changed. The fifth is about other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 81, the arrangement of the passage detection sensor 228 provided in the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a top view of the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 81, the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment is on the entrance side (front view right side) and the exit side (front view left side) of the flow path provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. , 228g 1,228g 2 of passage detection sensors capable of detecting the passage of the game ball, respectively, are provided. The passage detection sensor 228g1 can detect the game ball flowing into the flow path provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. Further, the passage detection sensor 228g2 can detect the game ball discharged to the left side of the opening / closing door 65f1 after passing through the flow path provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. In the sixth embodiment, the number of game balls flowing into the flow path provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 (the number of game balls detected by the passage detection sensor 228g1) and the number of game balls provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. By calculating the difference from the number of game balls discharged from the flow path (the number of game balls detected by the passage detection sensor 228g2), the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 can be calculated. , It is configured so that it can be grasped more accurately.

Further, as shown in FIG. 81, in the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment, the flow of the game ball is obstructed (the period required for the game ball to pass through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 by decelerating the game ball). In addition to the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, convex portions 65f1d and 65f1e capable of preventing the flow of the game ball are provided on the left and right sides of the opening / closing door 65f1. ing. The convex portion 65f1d allows the game ball flowing down from the right side of the right variable winning device 65 to flow into the flow path on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 from the front side of the front view on the upper surface of the right variable winning device 65. Further, the convex portion 65f1e can limit the discharge position to the front side of the front view of the right variable winning device 65 when the door is discharged from the flow path provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. The flow path (range not obstructed by the convex portions 65f1d, 65f1e) through which the game ball can pass through the inlet side (right side of the front view) and the exit side (left side of the front view) of the flow path on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. The width is such that only one game ball can pass through (the width of 1.5 game balls), and passage detection sensors 228g and 1,228g2 are arranged in the center thereof, respectively. By making the flow paths on the inlet side and the outlet side narrower than those in each of the above embodiments (the width is equal to 1.5 game balls), the passage detection provided on one inlet side and the exit side is provided. The sensors 228g and 1,228g2 can more reliably detect the game ball flowing into the flow path on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 and the game ball flowing out from the flow path. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately grasp the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84, a right-handed expectation suggestion effect that may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of the variable display effect according to the sixth embodiment will be described. conduct. This right-handed expectation suggestion effect is an effect that may be executed as part of the variable display effect that develops into super reach or special reach, and when the game ball is fired toward the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. It is a production to suggest the degree of expectation of whether or not it will be advantageous to the player. That is, in order to suggest the degree of expectation that the right specific winning opening 65a will be opened and over-winning will occur when more game balls reach the flow path on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 during the variable display. It is a production.

FIG. 82 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode during super reach in which a right-handed expectation suggestion effect is set. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the right-handed expectation suggestion effect is executed in a part of the case where the super reach or the special reach effect is developed. In this right-handed expectation suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 82 (a), the image of the adventurer character possessing the sword and the shield and the enemy monster glaring at each other is the image of the third symbol display device 81. It is displayed on the display screen. In addition, a display area HR4 in which the characters "Defeat the enemy !!" is displayed is formed on the upper side of the display screen, and a third symbol that is changing in the reach state is reduced and displayed on the right side of the display area HR4. Will be done. With these display contents, it is possible to make the player understand that if the adventurer can defeat the enemy monster, it will be a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 82 (a), the body of the monster has scratches crossing the cross. Further, the front side of the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment is decorated to imitate the scratches on the body of the monster. This gives the player the impression that the wound of the monster is related to the right variable winning device 65. Although the details will be described later, in the sixth embodiment, the adventurer attacks the wound of the monster. Along with this, as a player-participation-type production, a production in which a game ball is launched aiming at a right variable winning device 65 decorated to imitate a monster's wound is executed.

As shown in FIG. 82 (b), in the right-handed expectation suggestion effect, after the image of the adventurer and the monster glaring at each other is displayed, the upper side is zoomed up from the abdomen of the monster and displayed, and the image of the monster is displayed. On the right side of the monster, a display area HR5 is formed in which a physical strength gauge LG indicating the remaining physical strength of the monster is displayed. With these display contents, the player can visually understand the remaining physical strength of the monster in an easy-to-understand manner.

Also, on the left side of the monster, an image of an arrow pointing to the monster's wound is displayed, and in the display area HR4, the characters "Aim for the wound !!" and an image imitating the wound are displayed. Is displayed. Further, the vicinity of the decorative portion imitating a scratch on the right variable winning device 65 emits light in a color corresponding to the degree of expectation of this production. By these effects, it is suggested to the player that an over-winning may occur by firing a game ball aiming at the right variable winning device 65 decorated to imitate a scratch. Can be done.

The right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment has built-in light emitting diodes (LEDs) having a plurality of types of light emitting colors in order to emit light in the vicinity of a decorative portion imitating a scratch. That is, a white LED, a blue LED, a green LED, and a red LED are built-in. Although details will be described later, in the sixth embodiment, white emission color has the lowest expectation, blue has higher expectation than white, green has higher expectation than blue, and red has the highest expectation. Is configured to be high. This is advantageous when a game ball is launched onto the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 using the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 as a clue (whether the right specific winning opening 65a is opened and over-winning occurs). You can make me guess. Therefore, it is possible to pay more attention to the content of the right-handed expectation suggestion effect to perform the game.

FIG. 83A is a display mode in which the player shoots a game ball aiming at the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 by right-handing in the right-handed expectation suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 83 (a), after the display content (see FIG. 82 (b)) suggesting to attack the monster's wound is displayed in the right-handed expectation suggestion effect, the game ball. Every time the adventurer passes through the passage detection sensor 228g1, the adventurer attacks the wound of the monster, so that the monster's physical strength gauge LG is reduced by 1 gauge. By executing the effect of reducing this gauge, it is possible to make the player think that it is easier to defeat the monster by hitting right, so the game ball can be positively hit right. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the right-handed expectation suggestion effect.

In the right-handed expectation suggestion effect in the sixth embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the number of gauges of the physical strength gauge LG can be reduced to 0, but the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order. In this case, the configuration is such that only the remaining 1 gauge is reduced (the number of gauges never becomes 0). As a result, the player who wants to know the lottery result of the special symbol before the third symbol is stopped and displayed is more actively fired at the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to further improve the player's willingness to participate in the right-handed expectation suggestion effect.

FIG. 83 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the fluctuation is stopped when a fluctuation display in which a right-handed expectation suggestion effect is set is executed after a big hit in a special symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. 83 (b), when the jackpot is notified, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the display area HR3 with the same numbers. In addition to this, the monster collapses due to the attack of the adventurer, and the effect that the gauge number of the physical strength gauge is reduced to 0 is executed. In addition, the character "victory" is displayed for the display area HR4. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the jackpot has been achieved.

In addition, these display contents will continue to be displayed even during the opening period. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the opening period is configured to be extremely short, 0.5 seconds. Therefore, by executing the right-handed expectation suggestion effect until the opening period, the effect is prevented from becoming unnatural by performing the effect for only 0.5 seconds. At the end of the opening period, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened, so that when the player strikes right during the execution of the right-handed expectation suggestion effect and the game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. Enters the right specific winning opening 65a where the game ball is opened.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, changes over time in the display mode before and after the variable display effect in which the right-handed expectation suggestion effect is set in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 84A is a diagram showing changes over time in the display mode when the right-handed expectation suggestion effect is executed in the variable display effect when a big hit is obtained in the special symbol lottery. In FIG. 84 (a), a case where a super reach with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is selected as a fluctuation type will be described as an example. As shown in FIG. 84 (a), when the variation display corresponding to the jackpot is started, the normal variation display is first started, and the variation display of the third symbol constituting each symbol sequence is started. Then, when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variable display of the third symbol, the reach state occurs. That is, the left symbol column Z1 and the right symbol column Z3 are stopped and displayed at the third symbol with the same number, and only the middle symbol column Z2 is variablely displayed.

When 20 seconds have passed from the occurrence of the reach state, the super reach is developed and the right-handed expectation suggestion effect (see FIG. 82 (a)) is started. Then, when 26 seconds have passed since the right-handed expectation suggestion effect was started (that is, when the remaining 4 seconds until the end of the fluctuation), the characters "Aim for scratches !!" are displayed in the display area HR4. The effect to be performed (see FIG. 82 (b)) is executed. In this production, as described above, the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 is configured to suggest the degree of expectation of whether or not it will be advantageous when right-handed. By hitting right for 4.5 seconds, which is the remaining 4 seconds until the end of the fluctuation time and 0.5 seconds of the opening period of the jackpot, about 7 game balls are fired. Therefore, at the start of one round, about 7 game balls can be entered almost at the same time. In the following explanation, the effect of notifying the degree of expectation of whether or not it will be advantageous when right-handed by the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 (the characters "Aim for scratches !!" on the display screen! The effect of displaying) is referred to as "expectation notification effect".

In most cases, the emission color is checked to determine whether the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened before launching, so the longer the period required for launching, the more over-winning will be given. The number is reduced. If the game balls are fired in the case of off, all the fired game balls are wasted (almost all the game balls are discharged from the out port 66), so right-handed immediately every time the production occurs. This is because if the game is played by the method of the game to be performed, it will be a loss. Therefore, it is accurate to check whether the right specific winning opening 65a is opened every time the effect (expectation notification effect) in which the characters "Aim for scratches !!" is displayed to the player occurs. If it is determined that the game will be released, the game can be played in an attempt to quickly start right-handed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the right-handed expectation suggestion effect, and thus it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

When 0.5 seconds of the opening period of the jackpot has passed, the first round of the jackpot is started, the right specific winning opening 65a is opened, and the effect indicating that the jackpot has started (the effect equivalent to the opening effect). Is executed over a round period of one round and an interval period after the end of one round. Then, when the second round of the jackpot is started, the jackpot effect in the normal mode is executed. Compared to the case where the opening effect is executed during 0.5 seconds of the actual opening period by configuring the structure to execute the effect equivalent to the opening effect over the period until the second round of the jackpot starts. Then, it is possible to notify by directing that the jackpot has started for a sufficiently long time. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more surely recognize that the jackpot has started.

FIG. 84B is a diagram showing the change over time in the display mode when the fluctuation type of the super reach deviation of 60.5 seconds is determined as the fluctuation pattern and the right-handed expectation suggestion effect is set. be. As shown in FIG. 84 (b), the change over time in the effect mode in the case of deviation is exactly the same as in the case of the jackpot, at least until the expectation level notification effect occurs. On the other hand, as described above, the selection rate of the emission color of the decorative portion of the right variable winning device 65 is different from the case of the big hit. Therefore, when the expectation degree notification effect occurs, whether to start right-handed striking depends on whether the emission color has a high selection rate in the jackpot or the emission color has a high selection rate in the outlier. You can let the player decide.

As shown in FIG. 84 (b), 60 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, it is notified that the monster could not be defeated by the adventurer's attack, and the combination of the third symbols corresponding to the deviation is stopped. It will be displayed and you will be notified that it has come off. This makes it easy for the player to understand that the lottery result of this special symbol was out of order. The notification of the deviation (stop display of the combination of the third symbols corresponding to the deviation) continues for 0.5 seconds. It should be noted that the fact that the fluctuation time is longer by 0.5 seconds for the off-target is that when it becomes a big hit, as described above, the right-handed expectation is suggested by using 0.5 seconds, which is the opening period of the big hit. This is to carry out the production. That is, even in the case of a deviation, by setting the same effect time as in the case of a big hit, it is possible to standardize the effect mode until the lapse of 60 seconds when the final result is notified. Therefore, since the effect can be executed using common data, the amount of data for executing the right-handed expectation suggestion effect can be reduced.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when the right-handed expectation suggestion effect is set, the effect having the same mode other than the selection rate of the emission color of the decorative portion of the right variable winning device 65 ends. Continue until 0.5 seconds ago. As a result, the player can be made to judge whether or not it is better to hit right by using the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 as a clue.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the number of gauges of the physical strength gauge LG indicating the physical strength of the monster is one each time the game ball passes through the passage detection sensor 228g1 after the expectation degree notification effect is generated. It is displayed reduced. Then, in the case of a big hit (the right specific winning opening 65a is opened), the physical strength gauge LG decreases to 0, while in the case of a loss, the physical strength gauge LG decreases only to 1. Therefore, if the player keeps hitting right, it may be possible to detect whether or not it will be a big hit a little earlier. Since the initial value of the number of gauges of the physical strength gauge LG is 5, it is possible to detect whether or not it is a big hit by allowing five game balls to reach the passage detection sensor 228g1. That is, if the number of gauges decreases to 0, it can be determined that it is a big hit, while if the number of gauges does not decrease from 1, it can be determined that it is out of order. However, it takes at least 3 seconds to fire 5 game balls. Then, it takes about 1 second for the launched game ball to reach the passage detection sensor 228g1. Therefore, even if the game balls are fired after confirming the emission color of the right variable winning device 65, it is difficult to pass the five game balls through the passage detection sensor 228g1. Therefore, the player who wants to detect the jackpot as soon as possible can fire the game ball before the expectation notification effect is generated. In other words, according to the taste of each player, it is possible to know whether or not it is a big hit as soon as possible, and whether or not it is a big hit is estimated from the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 and whether or not to hit right. It is possible to let the player select the playability to be judged. Therefore, since it is possible to provide the playability according to the taste of each player, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game.

In the sixth embodiment, when the right-handed expectation suggestion effect is set in the variable display effect corresponding to the jackpot, the physical strength gauge LG is used when five or more game balls pass through the passage detection sensor 228g1. The number of gauges is always reduced to 0, but it is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a big hit, the gauge number of the physical strength gauge LG can be reduced to 0 at a predetermined ratio (for example, 50% ratio), and in other cases, it is reduced only until the gauge number becomes 1. It may be configured as. With this configuration, even if the number of gauges is reduced only to 1, the expectation for a big hit can be maintained.

<Electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment>
Next, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG. 85A is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 85 (a), the ROM 222 in the sixth embodiment is an effect mode selection table with respect to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 14 (a)). The difference is that 222b has been added. Since other configurations are the same as those in the fifth embodiment described above, the details thereof will be omitted.

The effect mode selection table 222b is a data table to be referred to when selecting an effect mode to be executed in the variable display effect. The effect mode selection table 222b defines a plurality of effect modes including the above-mentioned right-handed expectation suggestion effect, and at the start of the variable display effect, the mode corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223j described later is determined. Will be done. The details of the effect mode selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 86.

FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the effect mode selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 86, in the effect mode selection table 222b, the effect mode that can be selected and the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223j are defined in association with each other for each variation type. Specifically, for the variable type "win special reach", the normal effect is defined as the effect type in association with the value range "0 to 39" of the effect lottery counter 223j (222b1 in FIG. 86). reference). This normal effect is a general term for an effect mode in which it is difficult to understand whether or not it is advantageous when a right-handed strike is performed until immediately before the fluctuation stops. More specifically, in the case of a big hit and the case of a miss, it is necessary to distinguish whether or not it will be a big hit from the production mode, except whether or not the third symbols with the same numbers are aligned at the end of the fluctuation. It is a production of a mode that makes it difficult. When this normal effect is executed, it cannot be determined whether or not it is a big hit until the third symbol is stopped. Therefore, even if the player detects the jackpot and starts right-handed, the first round is started before the two or more game balls reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. Therefore, when the normal effect is selected, it becomes difficult to win an over prize in the first round.

Of the 100 values of "0 to 99" that the value of the effect lottery counter 223j can take, the counter value associated with the "normal effect" is 40, so when the variation type of the winning special reach is determined. In addition, the ratio at which the normal effect is determined as the effect mode is 40% (40/100).

On the other hand, for the value range "40 to 99" of the effect lottery counter 223j, a right-handed expectation suggestion effect is defined in association with the effect mode (see 222b2 to 222b5 in FIG. 86). Of these, in the range of "40 to 49", a right-handed expectation suggestion effect in which "white" is set as the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 is defined in association with the expectation notification effect. (See 222b2 in FIG. 86), the range of "50 to 74" is defined in association with the mode in which "blue" is set as the emission color (see 222b3 of FIG. 86), and the range of "75 to 90". Is defined in association with an embodiment in which "green" is set as the emission color (see 222b4 in FIG. 86), and in the range of "90 to 99", an embodiment in which "red" is set as the emission color is defined. It is defined in association with each other (see 222b5 in FIG. 86).

Of the 100 possible values of the production lottery counter 223j, the counter values associated with the emission colors of "white", "blue", "green", and "red" are 10, 25, respectively. Since there are 15 and 10 pieces, the ratios at which each emission color is determined are 10% (10/100), 25% (25/100), 15% (15/100), and 10% (10/100), respectively. be.

Further, for the variable type "hit super reach", the normal effect is defined as the effect type in association with the value range "0 to 74" of the effect lottery counter 223j (see 222b6 in FIG. 86). Of the 100 values that the value of the effect lottery counter 223j can take, the counter value associated with the "normal effect" is 75, so when the variation type of the winning super reach is determined, it is normal as an effect mode. The ratio at which the production is determined is 75% (75/100).

On the other hand, for the value range "75 to 99" of the effect lottery counter 223j, a right-handed expectation suggestion effect is defined in association with the effect mode (see 222b7, 222b8 in FIG. 86). Of these, in the range of "75 to 94", "white" is defined in association with the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 in the expectation degree notification effect (see 222b7 in FIG. 86), and "95 to 99". The range is defined in association with an embodiment in which "red" is set as the emission color (see 222b8 in FIG. 86). Of the 100 possible values of the effect lottery counter 223j, the counter values associated with the emission colors of "white" and "red" are 20 and 5, respectively, so that each emission color is determined. The proportions are 20% (20/100) and 5% (5/100), respectively.

Further, for the variable type "outside special reach", the normal effect is defined as the effect type in association with the value range "0 to 89" of the effect lottery counter 223j (see 222b9 in FIG. 86). Of the 100 values that the value of the effect lottery counter 223j can take, 90 counter values are associated with the "normal effect". The ratio at which the production is determined is 90% (90/100).

On the other hand, for the value range "90 to 99" of the effect lottery counter 223j, a right-handed expectation suggestion effect is defined in association with the effect mode (see 222b10 to 222b12 in FIG. 86). Of these, in the range of "90 to 96", "white" is defined in association with the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 in the expectation degree notification effect (see 222b10 in FIG. 86), and "97,98". The range is defined in association with the mode in which "blue" is set as the emission color (see 222b11 in FIG. 86), and the mode in which "green" is set as the emission color corresponds to "99". It is specified with the attachment (see 222b12 in FIG. 86). Of the 100 possible values of the production lottery counter 223j, the counter values associated with the emission colors of "white", "blue", and "green" are 7, 2, and 1, respectively. The ratio at which each emission color is determined is 7% (7/100), 2% (2/100), and 1% (1/100), respectively.

That is, when the hit special reach and the off special reach are compared, the right-handed expectation suggestion effect is selected at a higher rate in the hit special reach (the rate at which the normal effect is selected is lower). Therefore, at the time when the right-handed expectation suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the big hit. In addition, in the hit special reach, the determination ratio of the emission color of "white" and "blue" is lower when the right-handed expectation suggestion effect is determined, while the determination ratio of "green" is lower than that of the off special reach. The determination rate of the emission color is high. In addition, the emission color of "red" may be determined only in the case of hit special reach. Therefore, when the emission color becomes "green", it is possible to make the player think that it is more likely to be advantageous to hit right. Further, when the color becomes "red", the player can be notified that the right specific winning opening 65a is opened.

Further, for the variable type "outside super reach", the normal effect is defined as the effect type in association with the value range "0 to 94" of the effect lottery counter 223j (see 222b13 in FIG. 86). Of the 100 values that the value of the effect lottery counter 223j can take, the counter value associated with the "normal effect" is 95, so when the variation type of the out-of-order super reach is determined, it is normal as an effect mode. The ratio at which the production is determined is 95% (95/100).

On the other hand, for the value range "95 to 99" of the effect lottery counter 223j, the expectation level notification effect corresponding to the emission color of "white" is defined in association with the effect mode (222b14 in FIG. 86). reference). Of the 100 values that the value of the effect lottery counter 223j can take, the counter value associated with the expected degree notification effect of the emission color "white" is 5, so the expectation degree notification of the emission color "white". The ratio at which the production is determined is 5% (5/100).

That is, when the hit super reach and the off super reach are compared, the right-handed expectation suggestion effect is selected at a higher rate in the hit super reach (the rate at which the normal effect is selected is lower). Therefore, at the time when the right-handed expectation suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the big hit. Further, in the hit super reach, the determination ratio of the “white” emission color is lower when the right-handed expectation suggestion effect is determined, as compared with the out-of-order super reach. In addition, the emission color of "red" may be determined only in the case of hit special reach. Therefore, when the emission color becomes "white", it is possible to make the player guess whether it is advantageous to hit right or not. Further, when the color becomes "red", the player can be notified that the right specific winning opening 65a is opened.

In addition, the variation types other than the variation types "hit special reach", "hit super reach", "missing special reach", and "missing super reach" ("hit normal reach", "missing normal reach", "long miss", and "short miss" For ")," normal effect "is defined in association with all possible values of the effect lottery counter 223j (see 222b15 in FIG. 86). Therefore, when the variation type is "hit normal reach", "off normal reach", "long off", or "short off", the right-handed expectation suggestion effect is not executed.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the ratio of determining the right-handed expectation suggestion effect and the ratio of selecting each emission color in the expectation notification effect in the right-handed expectation suggestion effect are determined according to the variation type. It is configured to be different. As a result, the player can be made to judge whether or not it is better to hit right from the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 when the expectation degree notification effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 85 (b). As shown in FIG. 85 (b), the RAM 223 in the sixth embodiment has the effect lottery counter 223j and the passing number counter 223k with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 14 (b)). The difference is that the notification effect flag 223m, the physical strength gauge counter 223n, the notification standby flag 223p, and the notification type storage area 223q are added.

The effect lottery counter 223j is a counter used to select the mode of the variable display effect from the above-mentioned effect mode selection table 222b (see FIG. 86), and the value is updated in the range of “0 to 99”. At the start of the fluctuation, the effect mode corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223j is selected from the effect mode selection table 222b.

The passing number counter 223k is a counter for counting the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. The value of the passage number counter 223k is 1 for each passage detection sensor 228g1 provided on the upstream side of the passage detection sensors 228g and 1,228g2 when the passage of the game ball is detected (the output becomes H). It is added one by one. That is, 1 is added each time a game ball flows into the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. Further, the value of the passing number counter 223k is added by 1 each time the passing of the game ball is detected by the passing detection sensor 228g2 provided on the downstream side (the output becomes H). That is, it is subtracted by 1 each time the game ball flows out from the flow path on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1.

Whether or not the notification effect flag 223m is executing an expectation degree notification effect (an effect of notifying the degree of expectation whether or not it is advantageous when right-handed by the emission color of the right variable winning device 65). It is a flag indicating. If the notification effect flag 223m is on, it indicates that the expectation level notification effect is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the expectation level notification effect is not being executed. The notification effect during flag 223m is set to on when the start of the expectation notification effect is set (see S4708 in FIG. 88), and is set to off when the jackpot is started.

The physical strength gauge counter 223n is a counter indicating the number of gauges of the physical strength gauge LG displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of the expectation degree notification effect. The counter value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is set as an initial value obtained by subtracting the value of the passing number counter 223k from "5" which is the maximum value of the physical strength gauge number as an initial value at the start of the expectation degree notification effect (FIG. 88). S4706). As a result, if the game ball is hit right before the expected degree notification effect is started and a plurality of game balls are passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 at the start of the expected degree notification effect, it is expected. It is possible to shorten the period required for reducing the number of gauges of the physical strength gauge counter LG during the execution of the degree notification effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who wants to know whether or not it is a big hit as soon as possible to hit the game ball to the right before the expectation level notification effect is started. If the value of the passing number counter 223k is 4 or more at the start of the expected degree notification effect, the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is uniformly set to 1 regardless of the value of the passing number counter 223k (FIG. 88). See S4705). That is, even in the case of a big hit, the number of gauges of the physical strength gauge LG does not become 0 immediately after the start of the expectation notification effect. Therefore, the player can be made to judge whether or not it is better to start right-handed hitting by using the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 as a clue. This physical strength gauge counter 223n detects the passage of the game ball by the passage detection sensor 228g1 on the upstream side until it reaches the lower limit value (0 in the case of a big hit, 1 in the case of a miss) set for each lottery result of the special symbol. Each time, the value is subtracted by 1 and updated (see S4217 in FIG. 87).

The notification standby flag 223p is a flag indicating whether or not the variation display effect in which the right-handed expectation suggestion effect is set is being executed and the start timing of the expectation notification effect has not been reached. This notification standby flag 223p is set to on when the execution of the right-handed expectation suggestion effect is determined (see S4805 in FIG. 90), and is set to off when the start of the expectation notification effect is set. (See S4708 in FIG. 88).

The notification type storage area 223q is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of the expectation notification effect (emission color of the right variable winning device 65) executed in the right-handed expectation suggestion effect. When the type of the expected degree notification effect is determined with reference to the effect mode selection table 222b at the start of the fluctuation, the data corresponding to the determined type is stored in the notification type storage area 223q (FIG. 90). See S4804). The notification type storage area 223q is composed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and indicates an expectation notification effect in which the emission color "white" is set if "01H" is stored, and "02H" is stored. If it is, the expected degree notification effect in which the emission color "blue" is set is shown, and if "03H" is stored, the expectation degree notification effect in which the emission color "green" is set is shown, and "04H" is stored. If it is set, the expected degree notification effect in which the emission color "red" is set is shown. On the other hand, when "00H" is stored, it indicates that the right-handed expectation degree suggestion effect is not set.

<Control processing of the voice lamp control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. First, the effect update process 6 (S4121) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 87. This effect update process 6 (S4121) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 34) instead of the effect update process (see FIG. 35), and is for updating the effect mode according to the situation of the game. It is the processing of.

In this effect update process 6 (see FIG. 87), first, the output of the passage detection sensor 228g1 arranged on the upstream side (the inlet side of the flow path on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1) on the upper surface of the right variable winning device 65 is H. It is determined whether it is (high) (S4211), and if it is determined that the output is H (S4211: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the passing number counter 223k to update (S4212). Next, it is determined whether or not the notification effect flag 223m is on (S4213), and if it is determined that the notification effect flag 223m is on (S4213: Yes), the aspect of the physical fitness gauge LG is updated. After executing the processes (S4214 to S4218) for the above, the process is transferred to S4219. On the other hand, when it is determined that the output of the passage detection sensor 228g1 is L in the processing of S4211 (S4211: No), and when it is determined that the notification effect flag 223m is off in the processing of S4213 (S4213: No). Since there is no possibility of changing the display mode of the physical strength gauge LG, each process of S4214 to S4218 for updating the mode of the physical strength gauge LG is skipped, and the process shifts to S4219.

Here, the process for updating the aspect of the physical strength gauge LG will be described in detail. In the process for updating the physical strength gauge LG, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery for this special symbol was a big hit (S4214), and if it is determined that the result of the lottery for this special symbol is a big hit (S4214). S4214: Yes), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is 1 or more (S4215). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of gauges of the physical strength gauge LG has reached the lower limit (0) in the case of hitting, and the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is 1 or more (the number of gauges has not reached the lower limit). When it is determined (S4215: Yes), the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is subtracted by 1 and updated (S4217), and the display mode of the physical strength gauge LG is changed to the number of gauges corresponding to the updated value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n. (S4218), the process shifts to S4219. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is 0 (the number of gauges has reached the lower limit) in the processing of S4215 (S4215: No), it is not necessary to update the display mode of the physical strength gauge LG. , S4217 and S4218 are skipped, and the process is transferred to S4219.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4214, when it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol is out of order (not a big hit) (S4214: No), then the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is 2 or more. Whether or not it is determined (S4216). That is, it is determined whether the lower limit value (1) of the gauge number of the physical strength gauge LG in the case of deviation is reached (S4216), and the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is 2 or more (the gauge number has reached the lower limit value). If it is determined (S4216: Yes), each process of S4217 and S4218 for updating the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n and the display mode of the physical strength gauge LG is executed, and the process is shifted to S4219. .. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4216 that the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is 1 (the lower limit of the number of gauges in the case of deviation) (S4216: No), the display mode of the physical strength gauge LG is updated. Since it is not necessary, each process of S4217 and S4218 is skipped, and the process is transferred to S4219.

In the process of S4219, it is determined whether the output of the passage detection sensor 228g2 provided on the downstream side (the exit side of the flow path on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1) on the upper surface of the right variable winning device 65 is H (high). (S4219), when it is determined that the output is H (the game ball has passed) (S4219: Yes), the value of the passing number counter 223k is subtracted by 1 and updated (S4220), and the process is transferred to S4221. Transition. On the other hand, in the process of S4219, if it is determined that the output of the passage detection sensor 228g2 is L (the passage of the game ball is not detected) (S4219: No), the process of S4220 is skipped and the process is S4221. Move to.

In the process of S4221, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the expected degree notification effect, and when the start timing is reached, the notification start determination process for executing the expected degree notification effect is executed (S4221), and this process is performed. To finish. The details of this notification start determination process (S4221) will be described with reference to FIG. 88.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the above-mentioned notification start determination process (S4221). In this notification start determination process (S4221), first, it is determined whether the notification standby flag 223p is on (S4701), and if it is determined that it is off (S4701: No), the right-handed expectation suggestion effect is executed. It is not inside, or the right-handed expectation suggestion effect is being executed, but it means that the expectation notification effect has already started, and there is no possibility of starting the execution of the expectation notification effect, so it is as it is. This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4701 when it is determined that the notification standby flag 223p is on (S4701: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of the expectation notification effect (S4702), and the expectation notification effect is performed. If it is determined that it is not the start timing (S4702: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4702 that the start timing of the expectation notification effect has come (S4702: Yes), the value of the passing number counter 223k is read (S4703), and the read counter value is 4 or more. Whether or not it is determined (S4704).

When it is determined that the value of the passing number counter 223k is 4 or more in the processing of S4704, 1 is set to the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n (S4705), and the processing is shifted to S4707. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4704 that the value of the passing number counter 223k is less than 4, the value obtained by subtracting the value of the passing number counter 223k from the maximum value of the gauge number 5 is the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n. (S4706), and the process shifts to S4707. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the initial value of the gauge number of the physical strength gauge LG at the start of the expectation degree notification effect is set to the value of the passing number counter 223k (the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1). ), It is configured to be different. As a result, for players who want to know whether or not they will be a big hit as soon as possible, more game balls will be placed on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 by hitting right before the expectation notification effect is started. It can make you want to reach it.

In the processing of S4707, the start of the expectation notification effect is set in a manner corresponding to the data stored in the notification type storage area 223q and the value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n set in the processing of S4705 or S4706. (S4707). Specifically, the right variable winning device 65 is made to emit light with the emission color corresponding to the data stored in the notification type storage area 223q, and the number of gauges corresponding to the counter value of the physical strength gauge counter 223n is set to the physical strength gauge LG. It is set as a display mode. Next, the notification standby flag 223p is set to off, and the notification effect flag 223m is set to on (S4708) to end this process.

By executing this notification start determination process (see FIG. 88), the expected degree notification effect of the mode selected from the effect mode selection table 222b can be accurately executed.

Next, the variation display setting process 6 (S4122) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 89. The variation display setting process 6 (S4122) is a process executed in place of the variation display setting process (see FIG. 38). Of the variable display setting processes 6 (S4122) in the sixth embodiment, each process of S4501 to S4509 executes the same process as each process of S4501 to S4509 in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38). ..

Further, in the variation display setting process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, when the process of S4503 is completed, the effect mode is selected according to the variation pattern (variation type) extracted by the process of S4503. The effect mode selection process for determining from the table 222b is executed (S4511), and the process shifts to S4504. The details of this effect mode selection process (S4511) will be described with reference to FIG. 90.

FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the effect mode selection process (S4511). In this effect mode selection process (S4511), first, the effect mode selection table 222b and the value of the effect lottery counter 223j are read (S4801), and the read effect mode selection table 222b is used by the main control device 110 by a variable pattern command. The effect mode corresponding to the variation type notified from the above and the value of the effect lottery counter 223j is specified (S4802).

Next, when it is determined whether the specified effect mode is an effect mode corresponding to the right-handed expectation suggestion effect (S4803) and it is determined that the right-handed expectation suggestion effect is not executed (S4803). : No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4803, when the mode accompanied by the right-handed expectation suggestion effect is specified, the data corresponding to the current effect mode (emission color of the right variable winning device 65) is stored in the notification type storage area 223q. (S4804), the notification standby flag 223p is set to ON (S4805), and this process ends.

By executing this effect mode selection process (see FIG. 89), the effect mode of the expectation level notification effect can be selected from the effect mode selection table 222b at a ratio according to the variation type. Is executed, it is possible to infer from the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 whether or not it is advantageous to perform right-handed hitting, and let the player decide whether or not to start right-handed hitting.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment has a configuration in which 0.5 seconds is set as the opening period of the jackpot regardless of the jackpot type. That is, unless the game balls are fired at the right variable winning device 65 before the jackpot starts, the number of game balls exceeding the specified number (2) is reached at the start of the first round of the jackpot. The structure is such that it is impossible to make it in a state of passing through the flow path on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. Then, a part of the variable display effect for notifying the jackpot and a part of the variable display effect for notifying the deviation, the expectation degree notification effect for notifying the expectation degree that the right specific winning opening 65a is opened. Is configured to be feasible. Thereby, from the content of the expectation degree notification effect, it is possible to make the player decide whether or not to start right-handed while the variable display effect is being executed (before the lottery result of the special symbol is notified). If the right-handed hit is started during the execution of the variable display and the right specific winning opening 65a is opened as the player aims, an over-winning can be generated, so that the player can be satisfied. In addition, if the right specific winning opening 65a remains closed as the player aims (it was missed by the special symbol lottery) without right-handing during the execution of the variable display, it is uselessly right. You can feel relieved that you could avoid hitting and consuming your ball. On the other hand, if the result is contrary to the player's aim (the right specific winning opening 65a is not opened even though the right hit is made, and the right specific winning opening 65a is opened even though the right hit is not made). In the case of), in the next expectation notification production, it is possible to have a sense of purpose to make a prediction as to whether or not it is better to hit right. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the opening period is common regardless of the jackpot type, and the player is informed whether or not it is better to hit right while the variable display is being executed by controlling the voice lamp control device 113. By making the judgment, the degree of advantage in the first round (the number of game balls winning into the right specific winning opening 65a) is different for each big hit. As a result, unlike the fifth embodiment described above, it is not necessary to provide the period length selection table 202e (see FIG. 76C) that defines the correspondence between the jackpot type and the closing period in the main control device 110. , The capacity of ROM 202 can be reduced. Further, since the control process for selecting the opening period is also a process for setting a common period, the processing load of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced. Since the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 needs to perform main control related to the game such as a big hit lottery and a variation display of the first symbol, various main controls can be performed by reducing the processing load. It can be surely executed.

In the sixth embodiment, as the expectation degree notification effect, the configuration is such that the expectation degree of whether or not it is advantageous to perform right-handed by the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 is shown, but this is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. Instead of or in addition to this, for example, the degree of expectation may be shown by changing the color or mode of the monster displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or the degree of expectation depending on the content of the adventurer's attack. May be configured to notify. Further, the expected degree may be notified by changing the emission color of the right variable winning device 65 or the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, or by making the music or sound effect different.

In the sixth embodiment, the opening period of all jackpot types is unified to 0.5 seconds, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as in the fifth embodiment described above, the opening period is set to be different depending on the jackpot type, and a part of the case where the opening period is a short jackpot (and the case is missed by the special symbol lottery). Therefore, the expected degree notification effect may be executed during the execution of the variation display. As a result, when the jackpot type has a long opening period, it is possible to make a right-handed hit with confidence after the jackpot is notified. In addition, when the expectation degree notification effect is executed, the player determines whether it is better to start right-handed while the variable display is being executed based on the notification content (emission color of the right variable winning device 65). It is possible to provide playability to be made to play.

In the sixth embodiment, in the expectation degree notification effect, a decoration imitating a scratch is applied to the right variable winning device 65, and then the third symbol display device 81 displays a reminder to aim at the scratch. The structure indirectly suggests right-handed hitting to the player, but it is not limited to this. For example, in the expectation degree notification effect, it may be configured to clearly notify the right-handed hit. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily understand that there is a possibility that the player can be advantageous (over-winning occurs) by hitting right.

In the sixth embodiment, the right-handed hit is performed during the execution of the variable display by executing the expectation degree notification effect for notifying the expected degree of whether or not it is advantageous to the player when the right-handed hit is performed. Although it was configured to determine whether or not it is better, the expectation level notification effect is not necessarily a plurality of games at a position where a prize can be won when the right variable winning device 65 (right specific winning opening 65a is opened) in the present embodiment. It is not necessary to combine it with a variable winning device with a structure that can hold a ball. For example, the expectation level notification effect is applied to a pachinko machine 10 provided with only a variable winning device capable of winning only a game ball launched after being opened, such as the left variable winning device 650. May be good. That is, the expected degree notification effect may be simply executed as an effect of notifying the expected degree of whether or not a big hit will occur after the end of the fluctuation.

In the sixth embodiment, even if the lottery of the special symbol is missed, the expectation degree notification effect can be executed, but only when the lottery of the special symbol is a big hit, the expectation degree notification effect is performed. It may be configured to execute. In this case, the timing for starting the expectation notification effect may be changed. That is, in the sixth embodiment, the expectation degree notification effect is generated 4 seconds before the end of the fluctuation time, but for example, at any timing of 4 seconds, 2 seconds, or 1 second by lottery. The configuration may be such that the expectation degree notification effect is generated. Further, in this case, for example, as the number of consecutive fluctuation displays corresponding to the deviation increases, the rate at which the expectation notification effect occurs 4 seconds or 2 seconds before may increase. That is, when the number of consecutive deviations increases, the jackpot becomes a big hit and the right-handed expectation suggestion effect is selected, the right-handed player may be executed for a longer period during the execution of the variable display. .. With this configuration, the more times the variation display is executed since the last big hit, the more likely it is that the number of prize balls in the first round will increase when the big hit is won. In addition, it is possible to make the player want to continue the game until it becomes a big hit. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Further, for example, a device such as RTC (Real-Time-Lock) that can measure the time may be provided, and the timing at which the expectation notification effect is likely to occur may be different depending on the time zone. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player want to play the game in a time zone in which the expectation notification effect is likely to occur 4 seconds or 2 seconds before the end of the fluctuation.

<7th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 99. In the second embodiment described above, operation winning openings (right operating winning opening 661, left operating winning opening 662) that trigger the start of a big hit are provided on the upper right side and the lower left side of the game board 13, respectively, depending on the type of big hit. Therefore, the structure was such that the operating winning openings that triggered the start of the big hit were different. Further, the game ball is configured to enter the left-acting winning opening 662 almost automatically in a relatively short time (about 0.5 seconds) when the jackpot standby state is set. That is, when the left-acting winning opening 662 becomes a left-triggered jackpot that triggers the start of the jackpot, the first round of the jackpot is started before the game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. On the other hand, when the right-acting winning opening 661 becomes a right-triggered jackpot that triggers the start of a jackpot, a plurality of game balls are made to reach the flow path on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 during the jackpot standby state, and then the right. By inserting the game ball into the operation winning door 661, the player can aim for an over-winning.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment, even if the left-triggered jackpot is won, the game ball moves to the left-acting winning opening 662 unless the player makes a left-handed strike after the jackpot standby state is set. It is configured so that there is no possibility of entering the ball. Then, in the jackpot standby state, the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is configured to perform an effect as if it were a normal game state. That is, even during the jackpot standby state, the variable display effect of the third symbol is executed in a pseudo manner, and it is as if the player has not transitioned to the jackpot standby state (whether it is a normal gaming state). It is configured so that it can be misunderstood and the left-handed strike can be continued. In other words, in the case of a left-handed jackpot, by performing an effect that makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the jackpot is in a standby state, the player can continue to hit the left side and the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. The structure is such that the game ball is allowed to enter the left-acting winning opening 662 without the player being aware of the game ball. As a result, in the case of a left-handed jackpot, the jackpot can be started after the number of game balls exceeding the specified number (two, which is the upper limit of the first round) reaches the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. On the other hand, in the case of a right-handed jackpot, it is easy to enter the game ball into the right-acting winning opening 661 at the timing when more game balls reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. Over-winning can be generated. Therefore, as in the second embodiment described above, the degree of advantage (the number of prize balls that can be obtained) in the first round can be different between the left-triggered jackpot and the right-triggered jackpot. Can be done.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the voice lamp control device 113. The configuration of the RAM 223 has been partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. The second is about other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 91, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 91, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment is different from that of the game board 13 (see FIG. 54) in the second embodiment in that the storage device 675 is deleted. ing. Even if the storage device 675 is deleted and the left trigger jackpot is won and the jackpot standby state is entered, the game ball immediately enters the left operation winning opening 662 as in the second embodiment described above. There is nothing to do. That is, even in the case of a left-triggered jackpot, the jackpot will not start unless the game ball is inserted into the operating winning opening 662 by left-handed in the jackpot standby state. In the seventh embodiment, in the case of a left-triggered jackpot, the third symbol of the combination that is out of alignment is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even after the game shifts to the jackpot standby state, the normal gaming state is reached. It is configured to execute variable display in the same way as above. As a result, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the player is in the jackpot standby state, and even after the jackpot standby state is reached, the game ball continues to hit left and enters the left-acting winning opening 662. It is configured as follows. Therefore, as in the second embodiment, it is possible to generate an over-winning target in the right-triggered jackpot, but in the case of a left-triggered jackpot, the jackpot starts shortly after aiming for the over-winning. Can be provided. Further, among the game balls launched by left-handed hitting, the ratio of the game balls that win the left-acting winning opening 662 is configured to be higher than the ratio of the game balls that enter the first entry opening 64. .. As a result, when the jackpot standby state of the left-triggered jackpot is entered, the game ball can be entered (winning) into the left-acting winning opening 662 in a shorter period of time. Although not shown, the control process for opening and closing the storage valve 675a of the storage device 675 has also been deleted due to the deletion of the storage device 675.

Next, with reference to FIG. 92, in the case of a left-triggered jackpot, the change over time in the effect mode from the start of the variable display to the start of the jackpot will be described. FIG. 92 is a diagram illustrating a case where a variation display effect (a variation time of 60 seconds is a super reach) corresponding to a left-triggered jackpot is executed with two reserved balls accumulated at the start of the variation. .. As shown in FIG. 92, when the fluctuation display corresponding to the left-triggered jackpot is executed, it is pseudo-notified that the deviation has occurred at the end of the fluctuation. That is, in the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination of being off. At this time, in the first symbol display device 37, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed. However, the third symbol display device 81 is larger than the first symbol display device 37 and is arranged at a position that is easy to see. Therefore, most players do not notice that the stop symbol is a hit in the first symbol display device 37, so that the player who has confirmed the display content of the third symbol display device 81 has a special symbol. It can be made to think that the lottery result is out of order (it has not shifted to the jackpot standby state).

As shown in FIG. 92, when the variation display corresponding to the left trigger jackpot ends, the jackpot standby state is started, and the pseudo variation display is started in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the variation display corresponding to the two reserved balls held during the execution of the variation display corresponding to the left trigger jackpot is simulated. In this pseudo fluctuation display, a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is set for each, and at the end of the fluctuation, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete deviation is stopped and displayed. In order to execute this pseudo variation display, the display control device 114 prepares a display data table for the pseudo variation display. Further, when the pseudo fluctuation display is executed in the jackpot standby state, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also pseudo-reduced. As a result, the player can be made to think that the number of reserved balls is decreasing every 2 seconds, so a special symbol lottery is executed by additionally entering the game ball into the first entry port 64. You can make me want to. When the pseudo fluctuation display ends and the pseudo holding ball disappears, the pseudo fluctuation stop state is set. This pseudo-variable stop state has exactly the same display mode as the case where the number of reserved balls becomes 0 in the normal gaming state. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player think that the lottery of the special symbol will not be executed unless the game ball is inserted into the first entry port 64, it is possible to make the player more aggressively left-handed. ..

In addition, in this embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, only in the lottery of the first special symbol, the left-triggered jackpot is won. That is, the situation in which the left-triggered jackpot is won is limited to the gaming state (low probability state of the special symbol and normal state of the normal symbol) in which the game is played aiming at the first entry port 64. As a result, the direction in which the player launches the game ball in order to continue the game (make a lottery of a special symbol be performed) in the case of a pseudo fluctuation display effect or a pseudo fluctuation stop state is set on the game board. It can be limited to the left side of 13. Therefore, in a pseudo normal state, the player who tries to continue the game can more reliably enter the game ball into the left-acting winning opening 662.

When the player continuously hits the left side in the jackpot standby state and the game ball enters the left-acting winning opening 662, a special aspect of the effect (blackout effect) is executed. The details will be described later, but by executing this blackout effect that does not occur during the normal gaming state, the player can immediately understand that the jackpot was in the standby state and that the jackpot is started. be able to. This blackout effect is executed for 0.1 seconds during the opening period, and after the effect is completed, the normal jackpot effect is started.

If the left-acting winning opening 662 is not detected even after 3 seconds have passed in the pseudo-variable stop state, the pseudo-variable stop state is terminated and the standby state effect (FIG. 7). See). The configuration is such that the pseudo variable stop state is terminated in 3 seconds, when the player decides to quit the game at the timing of the variable stop state, before the player leaves the table. This is to make the player aware that the jackpot was actually on standby. That is, this is to prevent the player from leaving the seat in a state where the jackpot is confirmed and starting the game from the jackpot standby state by another player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied with the game by quitting the game without noticing it even though the jackpot was won.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, an effect mode during the left-triggered jackpot in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 (a) is a diagram showing a blackout effect executed during the opening period of the left-triggered jackpot. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, when the player wins the left-triggered jackpot and shifts to the jackpot standby state, the jackpot standby is performed by executing the pseudo fluctuation display and the pseudo fluctuation stop state effect. It makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the state has been reached. When the game ball wins a prize in the left-acting winning opening 662 during the execution of these pseudo effects and the big hit is started, the opening period is extremely short (0.1 seconds), so the third symbol is a winning combination. There is not enough time to notify the jackpot by producing a stop display with. Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, the blackout effect shown in FIG. 93 (a) is provided as a mode in which the player can see at a glance that the special effect has been executed and the effect time can be shortened. It is configured to be executed. That is, when the game ball wins a prize in the left-acting winning opening 662 and the opening period of the left-triggered jackpot is reached, the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 suddenly goes dark (blacks out). It is configured to be executed. By making it look very different from the pseudo-variation display or pseudo-variation stop state effect that was executed until then, it is possible to make the player understand that a special effect was executed instantly. can.

After the blackout effect is completed, the effect shown in FIG. 93 (b) indicating that the jackpot has started is executed. That is, in the main display area Dm, the characters "Big hit confirmed!" Are displayed, and three third symbols with the same number are stopped and displayed. Further, in the small area Ds1, a display indicating the number of rounds (character with "1 round") and a display indicating the number of prize balls paid out (character with "0000GET") are displayed. Further, in the small area Ds3, the characters "Right hit !!" and the figure of the arrow pointing to the right are displayed for firing the game ball toward the right specific winning opening 65a. With these display contents, it is possible to make the player immediately understand that the jackpot has already started.

<Electrical configuration in the 7th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 94, the RAM 223 in the seventh embodiment has a pseudo-holding ball number counter 223r with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 14 (b)). , Pseudo-normal state flag 223s, pseudo-variable timer 223t, and pseudo-variable stop state timer 223u are added.

The pseudo-held ball number counter 223r is a counter that indicates the number of pending pseudo-variable displays after the left-triggered jackpot is won and the jackpot standby state is entered. In the jackpot standby state, while the value of the pseudo-held ball counter 223r is 1 or more, the pseudo-variation display is repeatedly executed (see S4907 in FIG. 96), and the value of the pseudo-held ball counter 223r becomes 0. When the pseudo fluctuation display ends in the state, the pseudo fluctuation stop state is set (see S4906 in FIG. 96). In this pseudo-reserved ball number counter 223r, the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are set at the time of transition to the jackpot standby state corresponding to the left trigger jackpot (the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b). See S4614 in FIG. 98). That is, the pseudo-held ball number counter 223r is composed of at least a counter for counting the number of reserved balls of the pseudo first special symbol and a counter for counting the number of reserved balls of the pseudo second special symbol. Has been done. Further, the value of the pseudo-held ball number counter 223r is decremented by 1 each time the start of the pseudo-variation display is set (see S4908 in FIG. 96).

The pseudo-normal state flag 223s is set when an effect (pseudo-normal state effect) is executed in a pseudo-normal game state in the jackpot standby state (when the left-trigger jackpot is won). It is a flag indicating whether or not it is in the jackpot standby state. If the pseudo-normal state flag 223s is on, it indicates that the pseudo-normal state effect is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the pseudo-normal state effect is not being executed. This pseudo-normal state flag 223s is set to ON when the left-triggered jackpot is won and the jackpot standby state is started (see S4617 in FIG. 98). On the other hand, this pseudo-normal state flag 223s is set when the pseudo-normal state effect is completed (when the game ball enters the left-acting winning opening 662 and shifts to the opening period of the jackpot, or the pseudo-normal state is stopped. It is set to off (see S4912 in FIG. 96 and S4617 in FIG. 98) when the standby state effect is started continuously for 3 seconds.

The pseudo-variable timer 223t is a timer that measures the fluctuation time of the pseudo-variation display. A timer value (that is, 2000) corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the pseudo-variation timer 223t every time the start of the pseudo-variation display is set (see S4907 in FIG. 96). Whether or not the pseudo-variation display is being executed is determined based on whether or not the value of the pseudo-variation timer 223t is 0.

The pseudo-variable stop state timer 223u is a timer that measures the duration of the pseudo-variable stop state. A timer value (that is, 3000) corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the pseudo-variable stop state timer 223u at the timing when the pseudo-variable stop state is set (see S4906 in FIG. 96). When the pseudo-variable stop state timer 223u becomes 0, it means that 3 seconds have elapsed since the pseudo-variable stop state was started, so the start of the standby state effect is set. By configuring the configuration to end the pseudo fluctuation stop state in 3 seconds, even if the player decides to quit the game, the jackpot standby state is set before the player leaves the table. It is possible to make the player aware of this. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied with the game by quitting the game without noticing it even though he was elected to the left-handed jackpot.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 95 to 99, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 95, the main process 7 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. This main process 7 is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 34) in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment).

Of the main processes 7 (see FIG. 95) in the seventh embodiment, the processes S4101 to S4118 are the same as the processes S4101 to S4118 of the main process (see FIG. 34) in the second embodiment, respectively. Will be executed. Further, in the main process 7 (see FIG. 95) in the seventh embodiment, after the effect update process (S4111) is completed, a pseudo effect for setting an effect mode while a pseudo normal state is set is set. The normal state effect process is executed (S4131), and the process shifts to S4112. The details of this pseudo-normal state effect processing (S4131) will be described with reference to FIG. 96.

FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the above-mentioned pseudo-normal state effect processing (S4131). In this pseudo-normal state effect processing (S4131), first, it is determined whether the pseudo-normal state flag 223s is on (S4901), and when it is determined that the pseudo-normal state flag 223s is off (S4901: No), Since it means that a pseudo normal game state is not set (it is not a jackpot standby state based on the left trigger jackpot), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4901 when it is determined that the pseudo normal state flag 223s is on (S4901: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the pseudo variation display effect is being executed (S4902). .. More specifically, it is determined whether the value of the quasi-variable timer 223t is 1 or more. In the process of S4902, when it is determined that the pseudo-variation display effect is being executed (the value of the pseudo-variation timer 223t is 1 or more) (S4902: Yes), the value of the pseudo-variation timer 223t is set to 1. It is updated by subtraction (S4903), and it is determined whether the value of the timer 223t during the pseudo-variation after subtraction becomes 0 (S4904). That is, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation display has ended.

If it is determined in the process of S4904 that the value of the timer 223t during the pseudo-variation is not 0 (S4904: No), this process is terminated as it is in order to continue the pseudo-variation display. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the pseudo-changing timer 223t becomes 0 (S4904: Yes), then whether the value of the pseudo-held ball number counter 223r is 0 (pseudo corresponding to the first special symbol). When it is determined (S4905) whether the number of reserved balls and the pseudo number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol are both 0), and when it is determined that the value of the pseudo-held ball counter 223r is 0 (S4905). S4905: Yes), since the pseudo fluctuation display cannot be started, 3000 is set to the value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u in order to shift to the pseudo fluctuation stop state (S4906), and this process is performed. To finish. Since the pseudo normal state effect processing (see FIG. 96) is a processing executed every 1 millisecond in the main processing 7 (see FIG. 95), 3000 is set as the timer value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u. By setting, the timer value becomes 0 after 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds) have elapsed. As a result, it is possible to accurately measure 3 seconds after the pseudo fluctuation stop state is reached.

On the other hand, in the process of S4905, when it is determined that the value of the pseudo-held ball number counter 223r is not 0 (S4905: No), the start of the pseudo-variation display is newly set and the timer during the pseudo-variation is in progress. 2000 (timer value corresponding to 2 seconds) is set to the value of 223t (S4907). Next, the value of the pseudo-held ball number counter 223r is subtracted by 1, and the display mode is updated according to the pseudo-held ball number after subtraction (S4908), and this process is terminated.

Further, in the process of S4902, when it is determined that the pseudo fluctuation display is not being executed (S4902: No), it means that the present is a pseudo fluctuation stop state, so that the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u Is subtracted by 1 (S4909), and it is determined whether or not the value of the pseudo-variable stop state timer 223u after the subtraction becomes 0 (S4910). In the process of S4910, when it is determined that the value of the pseudo-variable stop state timer 223u is not 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S4910: No), in order to continue the pseudo-variable stop state, This process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4910, when it is determined that the value of the pseudo-variation stop state timer 223u after subtraction becomes 0 (S4910: Yes), the standby state effect is produced by setting the display standby state command (FIG. 7). (See) is set to be executed (S4911). Next, the standby state effect flag 223g is set to on, the pseudo normal state flag 223s is set to off (S4912), and the present process is terminated.

By executing this pseudo-normal state effect processing (see FIG. 96), it is as if the normal gaming state continues for the player in the jackpot standby state shifted based on the winning of the left-triggered jackpot. It is possible to perform an effect that reminds us of. As a result, when the player shifts to the jackpot standby state due to the left trigger jackpot, the player can continue to hit the left, so that the left trigger is shortly after the game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. You can start the first round of the jackpot.

In the seventh embodiment, the pseudo fluctuation display is executed for the number of reserved balls held at the start of the jackpot standby state (at the end of the fluctuation), and after the jackpot standby state is reached. When a ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected, the number of pseudo-reserved balls corresponding to the ball entry is not increased. This is because, as described above, the game board 13 is configured so that the game ball can easily enter the left-acting winning opening 662 rather than the first entry opening 64 when hitting left. If you hit the left continuously while waiting for a big hit, there is a very high possibility that the game ball will not win the left-acting winning opening 662 and will continuously enter the first entry opening 64. Because it is low. Therefore, since the process for increasing the number of pseudo reserved balls can be omitted, the processing load of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Further, if the configuration is such that the number of reserved balls is also increased, when the main control device 110 detects that the ball has entered the first entry port 64 during the jackpot standby state, the number of reserved balls has already been reached. Even if the upper limit is reached, the voice lamp control device 113 must be notified that the ball has entered. When the game shifts to the jackpot standby state when the number of reserved balls has reached the upper limit, and after the pseudo variation display effect is executed one or more times, the ball entering the first ball opening 64 is detected. This is because it is necessary to increase the number of reserved balls. Therefore, since the commands to be output in the main control device 110 increase, the processing load of the main control device 110 also increases. On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, since the configuration does not increase the pseudo-held ball number, it is not necessary to newly increase the command in the main control device 110, and the processing load of the main control device 110 is reduced. be able to. Furthermore, if the player is lucky enough to enter the first ball entrance 64 first and the player recognizes that the number of reserved balls does not increase, the player is informed that he / she was actually in a jackpot standby state. Can be understood. Therefore, the player who was lucky enough to detect the jackpot standby state should play the game by trying to make the game ball reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 and then enter the left-acting winning opening 662. Can be done. As a result, in order to determine whether the game is in a normal game state or a jackpot standby state, it is possible to make the player make a left-handed strike more aggressively.

Next, the hit-related process 7 (S4341) in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 97. The hit-related process 7 (S4341) is a process executed in place of the hit-related process 2 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, and is related to the hit as in the hit-related process 2 (see FIG. 61). This is a process for performing control according to a command when a command to be executed is received.

Of the hit-related processes 7 (see FIG. 97) in the seventh embodiment, in each of the processes S4401, S4404, and S4407 to S4410, the hit-related processes 2 (see FIG. 61) S4401, S4404 in the second embodiment, respectively. , And the same processing as each processing of S4407 to S4410 is executed. Further, in the hit-related process 7 (see FIG. 97) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined that the standby state command has been received from the main control unit 110 in the process of S4401 (S4401: Yes), the standby state command process is performed. Instead of (see FIG. 62), the standby state command process 7 is executed (S4441), and this process is terminated. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 98, but this standby state command process 7 (S4441) is a process for setting an effect mode according to the jackpot type as the jackpot standby state.

Further, in the hit-related process 7 (see FIG. 97) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined that the opening command has been received from the main control device 110 in the process of S4404 (S4404: Yes), the big hit is started. The opening command process for executing the opening effect of the mode according to the situation is executed (S4442), and this process is terminated. The details of this opening command processing (S4442) will be described later with reference to FIG. 99.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned standby state command processing 7 (S4441) will be described with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the standby state command process 7 (S4441). In each of the standby state command processes 7 (S4441), each process of S4601 to S4603 executes the same process as each process of S4601 to S4603 of the standby state command process (see FIG. 62) in the second embodiment, respectively. ..

Further, in the standby state command process 7 (see FIG. 98) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4601 that the current jackpot is not a right-triggered jackpot (a left-triggered jackpot) (S4601: No. ), The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are read (S4611), and it is determined whether or not each of the read counter values is 0 (S4612). ..

In the process of S4612, when it is determined that the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are both 0 (S4612: Yes), the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is It is 0, and if the pseudo fluctuation display is started, the player feels uncomfortable, so a pseudo fluctuation stop state is set. That is, 3000 (timer value corresponding to 3 seconds) is set to the value of the pseudo-variable stop state timer 223u (S4613), and the process shifts to S4617.

On the other hand, in the process of S4612, when it is determined that at least one of the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is not 0 (S4612: No), it is read out. The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are stored as the values of the pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r (S4614), and the start of the pseudo variation display is set. , 2000 (counter value corresponding to 2 seconds) is set to the value of the quasi-changing timer 223t (S4615). Then, the value of the pseudo-held ball number counter 223r is decremented by 1 and updated, and the reserved ball number symbol is pseudo-decreased by one to be displayed (S4616), and the process is shifted to S4617. In the process of S4617, the pseudo normal state flag 223s is set to ON (S4617), and this process is terminated.

By executing this standby state command process 7 (see FIG. 98), in the jackpot standby state of the left-triggered jackpot, it is possible to pseudo-execute an effect as if the normal gaming state is continuing. , If the right moment is a big hit, the standby state effect can be executed. As a result, in the case of a left-triggered jackpot, the player can continue to hit the left without noticing that the player is in the jackpot standby state, so that the game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. Soon, the left-acting winning opening 662 can be made to win a prize and a big hit can be started. On the other hand, in the case of a right-triggered jackpot, the player can easily understand that the jackpot is in a standby state, so that the first round is made according to the timing of winning the game ball to the right operating port 661. It is possible to provide a game property in which the degree of advantage (the number of game balls that can be entered into the right specific winning opening 65a) is variable. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of launching the game ball at the right time.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned opening command processing (S4442) will be described with reference to FIG. 99. In this opening command processing (S4442), first, it is determined whether or not the pseudo normal state flag 223s is on (S5001). In the process of S5001, when it is determined that the pseudo normal state flag 223s is on (S5001: Yes), the left operation winning opening is displayed while the pseudo fluctuation display effect or the pseudo fluctuation stop state is displayed. Since it means that the opening period of the jackpot has started after entering 662, a display opening command corresponding to the blackout effect (see FIG. 93 (a)) is set (S5002).

Next, the value of the pseudo-held ball number counter 223r, the value of the pseudo-variable timer 223t, and the value of the pseudo-variable stop state timer 223u are all reset to 0 (S5003), and the pseudo normal state flag 223s is set to off. (S5004), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5001, when it is determined that the pseudo normal state flag 223s is off (S5001: No), a display opening command corresponding to the normal opening effect is set (S5005), and the standby state effect flag 223g. Is set to off (S5006), and this process ends.

By executing this opening command process (see FIG. 99), when the game ball wins a prize in the left operation winning opening 662 and the opening period is started in the jackpot standby state in which the left trigger jackpot is won and the transition is made. It is possible to execute a blackout effect in which the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is suddenly darkened (blacked out). That is, it can be set in a mode that is significantly different from the pseudo-variation display or the pseudo-variation stop state effect that has been executed until then. This makes it possible for the player to instantly understand that the special effect has been executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the left trigger of the jackpot is left at a position where a part of the game ball launched aiming at the first entry port 64 can enter. The operation winning opening 662 is arranged. Then, in the case of a left-handed jackpot, the effect of stopping and displaying the third symbol of the out-of-order combination is executed as the effect of the third symbol display device 81 during the variable display of the special symbol. Further, in the jackpot standby state that shifts after the end of the fluctuation, the effect of the mode as if the normal gaming state is continued is executed. That is, even during the jackpot standby state, a pseudo normal state effect such as a pseudo variable display effect is executed to make the player misunderstand as if the player is in the normal game state and continue the left-handed strike. Is configured to be possible. As a result, when the player wins the jackpot and is in the jackpot standby state, the player can continue to hit the left side (the player can be prevented from hitting the right side), so that the opening / closing door 65f1 The game ball can be inserted into the left-acting winning opening 662 without the player being aware of reaching the upper surface of the game ball. Therefore, in the case of a left-handed jackpot, it is difficult to start the jackpot after reaching the number of game balls exceeding the specified number (two, which is the upper limit of the first round) on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. On the other hand, in the case of a right-trigger jackpot, the game ball can be easily overshot by entering the game ball into the right-acting winning opening 661 at the timing when more game balls reach the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. You can generate a prize. Therefore, the degree of advantage (the number of prize balls that can be obtained) in the first round can be different between the left-triggered jackpot and the right-triggered jackpot, so that the game can be played by paying attention to the jackpot type.

In the seventh embodiment, the pseudo-normal state effect is always executed when the jackpot standby state of the left-triggered jackpot is entered, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a big hit with a left trigger, it may be configured to determine whether to execute the pseudo normal state effect or the standby state effect by lottery.

In the seventh embodiment, the pseudo fluctuation display is executed for the number of reserved balls held at the start of the jackpot waiting state (at the end of the fluctuation), and after the jackpot waiting state is reached, the seventh embodiment is executed. 1 When a ball entering the ball entry port 64 is detected, the pseudo-reserved ball number corresponding to the ball entry is not increased, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each time a start winning prize is detected, the number of reserved balls may be increased in a pseudo manner. This makes it more difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the pseudo-normal state effect is being executed.

In the seventh embodiment, the execution start timing of the expectation degree notification effect is fixed for each variation type. That is, in the case of hit or miss special reach, the expectation notification effect is started to be executed at the timing when 86 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation, and in the case of hit or miss super reach, the timing when 56 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation. The configuration was such that the expected degree notification effect was started to be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the variable types are the same, the execution start timing of the expectation degree notification effect may be different by lottery or the like.

In the seventh embodiment, as a pseudo fluctuation display, a special effect for 2 seconds different from the usual one is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to pseudo-execute the variation display effect having the same variation time as the normal variation display and the display mode. More specifically, for example, the variable display that was executed immediately before the jackpot standby state may be repeated. With this configuration, the data of the variable display used immediately before can be used as it is, so that the processing load when executing the pseudo variable display can be reduced.

In the seventh embodiment, when the game shifts to the jackpot standby state due to a left-triggered jackpot, the pseudo-variable display of the number of times according to the number of reserved balls at that time is executed, and then the pseudo-stop display state is entered. It was configured to be migrated, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the game shifts to the jackpot standby state, the stop display state may be immediately set regardless of the number of reserved balls. In this case, the number of reserved balls may be set to 0 in a pseudo manner when the player shifts to the jackpot standby state or during the variable display. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give the player the impression that the number of reserved balls has become 0 when the jackpot standby state is entered. Therefore, a special symbol lottery is performed from the start of the jackpot standby state. You can have the player make a left-handed strike in an attempt to execute.

In the seventh embodiment, when the pseudo variable display is executed, the variable display is executed by using the image of the same large three symbols as the normal variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, a symbol having a different aspect from the normal third symbol may be prepared as a symbol dedicated to the pseudo variable display.

<First control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 to 117, a first control example applicable to the pachinko machine 10 in each of the above embodiments will be described. In this first control example, the player selects a musical piece (voice effect) to be output (reproduced) during a predetermined period (for example, a period in which a probability change state is set) during a normal game as a part of a hobby effect. It is configured to be possible. More specifically, when an operation on the operation button 230 provided on the front frame 14 is detected in a predetermined period (a period in which the probability change state is set), the third symbol display device 81 selects (selects) music. ) It is configured to display a list of possible songs (song selection menu screen). Then, the player selects an arbitrary music (voice effect) while the music selection menu screen is displayed, and performs a determination operation (pressing operation on the center button CB of the operation button 230) to perform the selected music (the selected music (voice effect). The output (playback) of the audio effect) is started. In this first control example, at the timing when a predetermined period is started (shifted to a probable change state), one piece of music (directing mode) is first randomly selected and played. The reproduction of the randomly selected music is continued until the reproduction of the music selected by the player is started or the probability change state (predetermined period) ends. As a result, the music can be played even from the transition to the probabilistic state until the music is selected by the player (while the music is not selected), which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to increase the satisfaction of the player for the probable change state.

Further, in the first control example, as the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen, the music is selected by the player in the previous game regardless of the type of the music (directing mode) randomly selected at the start of the probabilistic state. The more frequently (more frequently) songs are arranged, the easier it is to select the menu position. Here, the "menu position that is easy to select" means a menu position in which the number of operations executed for the operation button 230 until the music is selected is small (selectable within three operations). do.

First, the appearance of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. 100. FIG. 100 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 100, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, the operation button 230 is arranged on the left side of the front view with respect to the ball lending operation unit 40. The operation button 230 includes an upper button UB arranged on the upper side of the front view, a lower button DB arranged on the lower side of the front view, a right button RB arranged on the right side of the front view, and a left button LB arranged on the left side of the front view. , And the central button CB arranged in the central portion of the operation button 230. The details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102, but as described above, the operation button 230 is preset in the pachinko machine 10 and displayed on the music selection menu screen during the period in which the probability change state is set. It is provided to allow the player to select an arbitrary music from a plurality of music (26 songs of music A to Z).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102, a display mode during the probabilistic state in the first control example will be described. FIG. 101A is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the probable change state. As shown in FIG. 101 (a), in the probabilistic state, the music area for displaying the information of the music being played on the left side of the front view (the left side of the third symbol that is variablely displayed) in the main display area Dm. MR is formed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 101 (a), the character "music A" indicating the music currently being played (output) (music A in the example of FIG. 101 (a)) and "button operation". The text "You can select a song with!" Is displayed for the song area MR. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand what the music currently being played is. Further, by operating the operation button 230, the player can easily understand that any music can be selected.

In FIG. 101 (b), the player operates the operation button 230 while the image shown in FIG. 101 (a) is displayed (one of the buttons UB, DB, RB, LB, and CB is pressed. It is a figure which showed the display content which is switched in the case of). FIG. 101B illustrates a case where the display content (display mode) is switched (in conjunction with) based on the player pressing the lower button DB. As shown in FIG. 101 (b), when the operation button 230 is operated (pressed), a plurality of horizontally long rectangular display areas with music titles (music names) are formed inside the music area MR. Is displayed. Further, below the plurality of display areas, the characters "select with the up and down buttons" and the characters "decide with the center button" are displayed. With these display contents (music selection menu screen), the player can easily understand that an arbitrary music can be selected and played by operating the operation button 230. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of the description, the state in which this music selection menu screen is displayed (the state in which an arbitrary music can be selected according to the operation content of the operation button 230) is referred to as a "music selection mode". The display contents in this music selection mode will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 102.

FIG. 102 (a) is a diagram showing the arrangement of each item (image showing the type of music (music name)) on the music selection menu screen that is first displayed when the mode shifts to the music selection mode. As shown in FIG. 102 (a), on the music selection menu screen, at least five display areas (displaying a number smaller than the total number of music 26 songs) in which different items (images showing the types of music) are arranged are displayed. Area) is displayed. When the center button CB is pressed while the music selection menu screen is displayed, the playback of the item (music) arranged in the display area displayed in the center among the five display areas is determined.

Of the five display areas displayed on the song selection menu screen, the upper two display areas are for the types of songs that the player has selected most frequently in the probabilistic state so far (the songs that the player frequently selects). Corresponding items PA1 and PA2 (images showing music piece Y and music piece Z) are arranged. The item PA1 (image showing the music Z) arranged at a position relatively close to the central display area is the item P2 (showing the music Y) relatively far from the center display area. The player's selection frequency is higher than that of the image).

In the item RA1 (image showing the music A) displayed in the center on the music selection menu screen, an item indicating a randomly selected music (the music first played after shifting to the probabilistic state) is arranged. Then, on the lower side of the center, two items are displayed side by side in a predetermined order (alphabetically in the first control example) with the first selected music as a reference. That is, with reference to the item RA1 (musical piece A) displayed in the center, the items RA2 and RA3 with "musical piece B" and "musical piece C" in alphabetical order are displayed side by side below the item RA1. In the following description, for the sake of simplification of the explanation, in the initial arrangement on the music selection menu screen, the two items PA1 and PA2 displayed above the central item RA1 (the frequency of selection by the player so far is high). The display area in which the item) is arranged is referred to as a "history area". Further, a display area in which three items displayed below the history area are displayed (a display area in which randomly selected items are arranged) is referred to as a "random selection area". Further, the display area in which the item to be played when the player presses the center button CB is arranged is referred to as a "music selection area".

As shown in FIG. 102 (a), the item PA1 arranged in the music selection area (center on the music selection menu screen) is displayed in a lit state, and the other items PA1, PA2, RA2, RA3 are in a lighted state. Is displayed. As a result, when the center button CB is pressed, the item displayed in a mode (lighted appearance mode) different from other items (image showing the type of music) is determined as the music to be played this time. This can be made easier for the player to understand. Further, an upward substantially triangular upper image UG is displayed on the upper side of the music selection area and on the right side of the item PA1, and a downward substantially triangular shape is displayed on the lower side of the music selection area and on the right side of the item RA2. The lower image DG of the shape is displayed. When the upper button UB is pressed according to these display contents, the display contents (music) displayed in the music selection area are displayed one higher than the current state (in the example of FIG. 102 (a)). It is possible to shift to the image showing the music Z), and when the lower button DB is pressed, the display content (music) displayed in the music selection area is displayed one lower than the current state in conjunction with the pressing. It is possible to intuitively make the player understand that it is possible to shift to the content (in the example of FIG. 102 (a), the image showing the music B).

FIG. 102 (b) shows an example of a display mode when the player presses (operates) the upper button UB on the operation button 230 while the music selection menu screen shown in FIG. 101 (a) is displayed. It is a figure. As shown in FIG. 102 (b), when the player presses the upper button UB, all the display contents are moved downward by one display area in conjunction with the pressing, and the display mode is changed to the appearance. It is variable. As a result, the item PA1 (musical piece Z) arranged one above the music selection area in FIG. 102 (a) is changed to the appearance display mode moved to the music selection area in conjunction with the pressing of the upper button UB. Will be done. The item PA1 moved to the music selection area is set to the lit appearance mode, and the other items are set to the lit appearance mode. Further, the item PA3 indicating "musical piece X" is displayed on the upper side of the item PA2. In this item PA3, the next largest item after the item PA2 (musical piece Y) (“musical piece X” in the example of FIG. 102 (b)) is displayed as the number of times the player has selected so far. Further, as each item shifts downward by one display area, the upper image, which is the image corresponding to the upper button UB, becomes lit. As a result, the arrangement of the items on the music selection menu screen was changed in conjunction with pressing the upper button UB (the item PA1 arranged one above the music selection area could be moved to the music selection area. ) Can be easily understood by the player.

When the upper button UB is pressed a plurality of times, the item is shifted downward according to the number of times the upper button UB is pressed. For example, in the arrangement of the music selection menu screen shown in FIG. 102 (a), when the player presses the upper button DB three times, each item is shifted downward by three display areas. Item PA3 (an image showing music X) is arranged with respect to the music selection area. The arrangement of the menu items is in a loop shape, and it is possible to shift all the songs in order to the song selection area by pressing and holding the upper button. Further, when the item corresponding to the last song is arranged in the song selection area and the upper button UB is further pressed, the item indicating the first song (in the example of FIG. 102 (a), the song A). Is configured to return to the music selection area.

Although not shown, when the player operates (presses) the lower button DB, the operation opposite to the case where the upper button UB is pressed is performed. That is, by shifting upward by one for each item display area, the items arranged in the display area one below the music selection area at the time of the operation are moved to the music selection area in the appearance of the display mode. It is variable. For example, when the lower button DB is pressed in the arrangement shown in FIG. 102 (a), the item RA2 is changed to the appearance display mode in which the item RA2 is moved to the music selection area in conjunction with the pressing. Further, the lower image DG corresponding to the lower button DB is set to the appearance of lighting. Thereby, even when the player presses the lower button DB, the player can easily understand that the item is shifted in conjunction with the pressing.

In this first control example, three items (items PA1 to PA3) are arranged in descending order of the number of times the player has selected so far on the upper side of the music selection area in the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen. There is. That is, an item (musical piece) with a high selection frequency by the player is arranged at a position where the number of times the upper button UB is pressed can be selected within a range of 3 times (the music can be shifted to the music selection area). This is because it is considered that the higher the frequency of selection so far, the higher the possibility that the player will select even in the current probabilistic state. Temporarily, when deciding the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen, the items corresponding to the randomly selected items (music) are arranged in the music selection area, and the other items are simply arranged based on the items arranged in the music selection area. If the music is arranged in alphabetical order (predetermined order), it may be difficult for the player to select a favorite music. That is, when the item (musical piece) that the player wants to select and the item (musical piece) that is randomly selected are separated in order, the number of operations on the operation button 230 for shifting the item to be selected to the music selection area. There is a risk that the player will feel annoyed. In addition, as a method to make it difficult to feel annoyed, a method of setting the item to be initially placed in the music selection area in the case of a probable change state to an item with a high selection frequency of the player can be considered. In the method, there is a high possibility that the player is satisfied with the music that is first played (output) in the probabilistic state and does not want to change the music (the music selection menu screen is not displayed). The less the player has the opportunity to display the music selection menu screen, the less the opportunity to know the type of other music set in the pachinko machine 10. For this reason, it is less likely that the player will consider selecting another piece of music. Therefore, even if a large number of songs are set to be selectable for the pachinko machine 10, most of them may not be selected and may be wasted.

Further, as a method of making it easier for the player to select a favorite music, by displaying all the items collectively on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (arranging the items in a matrix), which music (the items are arranged in a matrix). A method is also conceivable so that the position of the item) can be understood at a glance. However, in this method, the display area for displaying items (area of the music selection menu screen) becomes wide, and the display area for displaying other display contents (third symbol, reserved ball number symbol, etc.). May become too narrow.

On the other hand, in the first control example, the items displayed on the music selection menu screen are displayed so that the player can easily select the items that are likely to be selected (the items that are frequently selected in the previous games). The initial placement of is set. More specifically, an image showing three items (musical pieces) that the player has frequently selected (many times selected) in the previous game is selected with a small number of operations (number of times the operation button 230 is pressed). It is configured to be arranged at a possible position (display area for the upper three of the music selection area). With this configuration, no matter which item (image showing the song name) is initially placed in the song selection area of the song selection menu screen, it can be selected with a small number of operations (operations within 3 times). Items that are frequently selected by the player can be placed at the positions. Therefore, in each probabilistic state, the item that the player has repeatedly selected so far (that is, the item that the player is likely to select even in the probable change state this time) can be selected with less effort. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel annoyed when selecting a song (item). If the number of items selected once or more (played music) is less than three (that is, the number of items frequently selected by the player is less than three), the item selected once or more. Only (less than 3 items) are arranged in the history area, and other items are arranged in a predetermined order (in alphabetical order of music) based on the items arranged in the music selection area. For this reason, when the player has never selected a song, such as immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the item decided to be placed in the song selection area by a random lottery is simply selected. As a standard, all items are arranged in a predetermined order (alphabetically order of music).

Further, in the first control example, an image showing the music name of one randomly selected music is arranged in the music selection area on the music selection menu screen displayed first after shifting to the probabilistic state, and the music is selected. The history area is arranged above the area. With this configuration, at least immediately after the transition to the probabilistic state, the randomly selected music can be played, so that the player can be given an opportunity to listen to music other than the music that is frequently selected. .. Therefore, it is possible to play a plurality of songs set in the pachinko machine 10 without waste. In addition, while listening to a randomly selected song, the player may like the song and want to play it even in a probable state after the next time. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the number of favorite songs of the player, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the probable change state. In addition, by continuing to select only the same songs, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the game from becoming monotonous.

Further, in the first control example, the number of items (images showing the music name) displayed on the music selection menu screen is limited to 5 (the number is smaller than the total number of music 26), and the operation button 230 is operated. By varying the types of items displayed on the music selection menu screen according to the content, all the items set in the pachinko machine 10 can be selected. With this configuration, the display area of the song selection menu screen can be reduced as compared with the case where all the items are displayed at once. Therefore, it is possible to display the display contents other than the music selection menu screen, such as the third symbol and the reserved ball number symbol, in a larger display area.

In this first control example, a display area corresponding to a music (item) having a high frequency (number of times) selected by the player in the previous game is arranged in the display area for the upper three of the music selection area. The remaining display areas are arranged in a predetermined order (alphabetically) with reference to one randomly selected display area, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of items with a high frequency (number of times) selected by the player in the previous games may be set to be less than 3 or set to be large.

In this first control example, in the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen, as the items to be arranged in the history area, the items frequently selected by the player in the previous games are arranged, but the configuration is limited to this. is not. For example, the items selected by the player in the probability change state set before the current probability change state may be arranged in the history area in the order of newest (closest) selected timing. With this configuration, images (items) showing songs that are likely to be selected by a player who tends to continuously select favorite songs can be arranged in the history area, so that the game can be played. It is possible to improve the convenience of the person.

In this first control example, the music selection menu screen is not displayed unless the operation button 230 is operated after the probability change state is reached. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the song selection menu is always displayed during the probability change state. The screen may be displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the time and effort of the player who wants to select a musical piece, so that the convenience of the player can be improved.

In the first control example, the item displayed first for the music selection area is selected by a random lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the item first displayed in the song selection area on the song selection menu screen, the item last selected by the player may be arranged in the probability change state set before the current probability change state.

In this first control example, a maximum of three items are selected in the order of the number of times the player has selected in the previous game with a relatively small number of operations in the initial arrangement on the music selection menu screen (shift to the music selection area). It was configured to be placed in a position where it is possible, but it is not limited to this. It suffices if the player can easily understand where the music that is likely to be selected by the player (the music that has been selected many times so far) is placed on the music selection menu screen. For example, the initial stage on the music selection menu screen. As an arrangement, it may be configured to be displayed somewhere in the music area MR. With this configuration, for example, even if the number of items to be displayed in the music area MR is increased from 5, the items that are likely to be selected by the player are displayed from the beginning. Can be kept. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to select an item, and the convenience of the player can be enhanced.

In the first control example, the display mode is different between the items displayed in the music selection area and the items displayed in the other display areas, but in addition to this, the player selects. The display mode may be changed depending on whether or not the music has a high possibility (an item arranged in the history area in the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen). With such a configuration, the player can more easily find an item that is likely to be selected by the player, so that the convenience of the player can be enhanced.

<Electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 108. FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, the operation button 230 is electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the electric configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in each of the above embodiments is provided. (See FIG. 8). Further, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 have been partially changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the above embodiments, the details thereof will be omitted. In the following description of the first control example, the first embodiment will be compared and the differences from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

When any button (UB, DB, RB, LB, CB) constituting the operation button 230 is pressed (operated), an on signal (a signal whose output is H) is applied to the signal line corresponding to the operated button. ) Is output. The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the output from the operation button 230, and if the output of the signal corresponding to any of the buttons is H, the voice lamp control device 113 executes control according to the type of the button. Specifically, for example, when it is detected that the output of the signal corresponding to one of the buttons becomes H when the music selection menu screen is not displayed in the probabilistic state, the music selection menu screen is displayed. Take control. Further, when it is detected that the output of the signal corresponding to the upper button UB is H while the music selection menu screen is displayed, each item on the music selection menu screen is shifted downward by one. To control.

Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. 104 (a). FIG. 104 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 104 (a), the ROM 222 in the first control example has an item order storage area 222aa added to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 14 (a)). Is different. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment described above, the details thereof will be omitted.

The item order storage area 222aa is a data table in which the order of arrangement of items on the music selection menu screen is defined, and is referred to when setting the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen. More specifically, the initial arrangement of the song selection menu screen is determined when the state changes to the probable change state. At the time of determining this initial arrangement, first, three items (musical pieces) to be arranged in the history area are determined, and then one item to be arranged in the music selection area is selected from other items not arranged in the history area. Randomly determined (for example, by lottery using random numbers). Then, based on the items arranged in the music selection area, the arrangement of other items (items not arranged in either the music selection area or the history area) is arranged in the order specified in the item order storage area 222aa. Set. As described above, in the first control example, the item order storage area 222aa is set so that the order of the items is in the alphabetical order of the music.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. 104 (b). FIG. 104 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 104 (b), the RAM 223 in the first control example has an item arrangement storage area 223aa and a menu position pointer 223ab with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 14 (b)). The difference is that the music selection count storage area 223ac, the music selection permission flag 223ad, and the menu display flag 223ae are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment described above, the details thereof will be omitted.

The item arrangement storage area 223aa is a storage area for storing the arrangement of each item (image showing the type of each music) on the music selection menu screen. When the transition to the probabilistic state is entered, the initial arrangement of each item is set for this item arrangement storage area 223aa (see S5204, S5208, S5212 in FIG. 113), and when the song selection menu screen is displayed, the item is displayed. The music selection menu screen is displayed in the arrangement set in the arrangement storage area 223aa. The details of this item arrangement storage area 223aa will be described with reference to FIG. 105 (a).

FIG. 105A is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the item arrangement storage area 223aa. In FIG. 105 (a), "music N", "music O", and "music P" are arranged in the history area, and "music A" is arranged in the music selection area. The contents of the item arrangement storage area 223aa in the above are illustrated. As shown in FIG. 105 (a), the item arrangement storage area 223aa stores data indicating the menu item corresponding to each value (“00H” to “19H”) that the menu position pointer 223ab can take. A storage area for the purpose is provided. In the example of FIG. 105 (a), the data corresponding to the menu item “music A” is stored in the storage area corresponding to the value “00H” of the menu position pointer 223ab, and the value “01H” of the menu position pointer 223ab is stored. The data corresponding to the menu item "music B" is stored in the storage area corresponding to. Even after that, the data is stored in alphabetical order of the music up to the value "0BH" of the menu position pointer 223ab. Further, the data corresponding to the "musical piece Q" is stored in the storage area corresponding to the "0CH" next to the "0BH". That is, it is possible to prevent the data corresponding to the "musical piece N", the "musical piece O", and the "musical piece P" already stored in the history area from being duplicately stored in the random selection area.

From the storage area corresponding to the value "0CH" of the menu position pointer 223ab to the storage area corresponding to "16H", data is stored in alphabetical order of the music as in the range of "00H" to "0BH". .. Further, the range in which the value of the menu position pointer 223ab is "17H" to "19H" corresponds to the history area, and in the example of FIG. 105 (a), "music N", "music O", and "music". The data corresponding to "P" is stored respectively. The data corresponding to the music having the highest selection frequency is stored in the storage area corresponding to the value "19H" of the menu position pointer 223ab, and the data corresponding to the storage area corresponding to "18H" is selected second. The data corresponding to the music having a high frequency is stored, and the data corresponding to the music having the third highest selection frequency is stored in the storage area corresponding to "17H".

In this first control example, when the music selection menu screen is displayed, the data stored in the item arrangement storage area 223aa (correspondence between the value of the menu position pointer 223ab and the menu item) and the menu position pointer 223ab The menu items stored in the storage area corresponding to the current value of the menu position pointer 223ab are arranged in the music selection area by comparing with the current value. Further, the menu items stored in the storage area corresponding to the two values before and after the value of the menu position pointer 223ab are arranged above and below the music selection area. For example, in the example of FIG. 105 (a), if the value of the menu position pointer 223ab is "19H", an item indicating "music P" is displayed for the music selection area. Further, above the music selection area, "music O" stored in the storage area corresponding to the value one above the value "19H" of the menu position pointer 223ab (that is, "18H") is arranged. Will be done. Similarly, "music N" corresponding to the value "17H" of the menu position pointer 223ab is arranged on the upper side of the music selection area. On the contrary, an item corresponding to the value one below the value "19H" of the menu position pointer 223ab is arranged one below the music selection area. Here, in this control example, the value next to "19H", which is the maximum value of the menu position pointer 223ab, is set to be determined as "00H" (similarly, the minimum value "00H" is set. The next (one lower) value is determined to be "19H") Therefore, one lower side and two lower sides of the music selection area are storage areas corresponding to "00H" and "01H", respectively. "Music A" and "Music B" stored in are arranged respectively.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 104 (b). The menu position pointer 223ab is a pointer used to determine the range of items to be displayed on the music selection menu screen in the above-mentioned item arrangement storage area 223aa. As described above, when displaying the music selection menu screen, the data stored in the five storage areas is read out centering on the storage area corresponding to the value of the menu position pointer 223ab, and the five items corresponding to each data are read. Is arranged on the song selection menu screen. The initial value of the menu position pointer 223ab is set to "00H", and the value is decremented by 1 each time a press on the upper button UB is detected while the music selection menu screen is displayed. When the pressing of the upper button UB is detected in the state of "00H", the value is updated to "19H" which is the maximum value. In addition, the value is incremented by 1 each time a press on the lower button DB is detected while the music selection menu screen is displayed. If the lower button UB is further pressed while the value is "19H", which is the maximum value, the value is updated to "00H", which is the minimum value (see S5110 in FIG. 111). Further, the value of the menu position pointer 223ab is reset to the initial value "00H" every time a big hit is made (see S4452 in FIG. 114). Since the probability change state always shifts after the end of the jackpot, by resetting to the initial value when the jackpot hits, the value of the menu position pointer 223ab must be set to "00H" at the start of the probability change state. be able to.

The music selection count storage area 223ac is a storage area for storing the selection count of each music (item). When the arrangement of menu items is set for the item arrangement storage area 223aa, the music selection count storage area 223ac is referred to, and the value "19H" of the menu position pointer 223ab is referred to in order from the music having the largest number of selections. , "18H", "17H", the data is stored in the storage area (that is, the history area) corresponding to. The details of the music selection number storage area 223ac will be described with reference to FIG. 105 (b).

FIG. 105B is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the music selection frequency storage area 223ac. As shown in FIG. 105 (b), the music selection number storage area 223ac is configured to be able to store the type of music and the number of times selected (music selection) so far in association with each other. For example, in the example of FIG. 105 (b), "music A" is stored in association with 0 times as the number of selections, and music B is stored in association with 1 time as the number of selections, and is stored in music C. On the other hand, 0 times are stored in association with each other as the number of selections. Similarly, for other music types, the number of selections is stored in association with each other. The music selection number storage area 223ac is used for the number of selections corresponding to the determined music each time the player decides to play one music by pressing the center button CB while the music selection menu screen is displayed. 1 is added and updated (see S5108 in FIG. 111). Since the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is not backed up, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, all the data indicating the number of times each song is selected is cleared.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 104 (b). The music selection permission flag 223ad is a flag indicating whether or not the music player can select the music. When the music selection permission flag 223ad is on, it indicates that an arbitrary music can be selected, and when it is off, it indicates that it is impossible to select a music. The initial value of the music selection permission flag 223ad is set to off, and is set to on when the state command output from the main control device 110 notifies that the transition to the probabilistic state has occurred (FIG. 113). See S5213). In addition, each time an opening command indicating the start of a jackpot is received, the command is reset to off (see S4451 in FIG. 114). While the music selection permission flag 223ad is on, it is determined that the music can be selected, and the pressing of the operation button 230 is treated as valid.

The menu display flag 223ae is a flag indicating whether or not the music selection menu screen (see FIG. 102A) is displayed. When the menu display flag 223ae is on, it indicates that the song selection menu screen is displayed, and when it is off, it indicates that the song selection menu screen is not displayed. The initial value of the menu display flag 223ae is set to off, and the menu display flag 223ae is set to on when the display of the music selection menu screen is set (see S5105 in FIG. 111). Further, when the press of the center button CB is detected while the music selection menu screen is displayed, the music selection menu screen is closed and the menu display flag 223ae is set to off (see S5109 in FIG. 111). It is also reset to off when an opening command indicating the start of a jackpot is received (see S4451 in FIG. 114). While the menu display flag 223ae is on, each item on the music selection menu screen is shifted in the corresponding direction each time a press on the upper button UB or the lower button DB is detected. Further, by detecting the pressing of the center button CB, the reproduction of the items arranged in the music selection area is set, and the music selection menu screen is closed.

Next, the electrical configuration of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 108. FIG. 106 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio output device 226. As shown in FIG. 106, the voice output device 226 is connected so as to be able to receive the data output from the voice lamp control device 113.

As shown in FIG. 106, the audio output device 226 is equipped with an MPU 301 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 301 is a ROM 302 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 301, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 302 is executed. It has a built-in RAM 303.

The MPU 301 of the voice output device 226 is electrically connected to the input port 305 and the voice synthesis unit 306. When a command for designating voice data is received from the voice lamp control device 113 to the voice output device 226, the command is input to the MPU 301 via the input port 305 and the bus line 304. Further, the voice data designated by the voice lamp control device 113 is read from the ROM 302 and output to the channel corresponding to the voice type of the voice synthesis unit 306. For example, the voice data corresponding to the music is output to CN1, the voice data corresponding to the sound effect is output to CN2, and the voice data corresponding to the warning sound is output to CN3.

The voice synthesis unit 306 is composed of a known voice synthesis LSI that synthesizes the voice data input to each channel and outputs the synthesized voice data to the amplifier unit 307. The synthesized voice data is amplified by the amplifier unit 307 and input to the speaker unit 308. As a result, various voices designated by the voice lamp control device 113 can be output from the speaker unit 308.

Next, the configuration of the ROM 302 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 107 (a). As shown in FIG. 107 (a), the ROM 302 is provided with at least an audio file storage area 302a.

The audio file storage area 302a is a storage area in which an audio file (audio data) used for outputting music, sound effects, or the like is stored. An audio file for playing a musical piece (musical piece A to Z) that can be selected by the player in the probabilistic state is also stored in the audio file storage area 302a. When the output of various voice data is instructed by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice file corresponding to the effect is read from the voice file storage area 302a and output to the corresponding channel of the voice synthesis unit 306.

The details of the audio file storage area 302a will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the audio file storage area 302a. As shown in FIG. 108, in the audio file storage area 302a, a music data group composed of a plurality of data used for playing each music (music A data group 302a1 to music Z data group 302a26). All audio files (audio data) that can be reproduced by the audio output device 226, such as data used for outputting each effect sound (for example, data 302a27 for effect sound A), are stored.

As described above, the audio files (music A data group 302a1 to music Z data group 302a26) corresponding to each music (music A to music Z) that can be played in the probabilistic state are each composed of a plurality of data. Has been done. The configuration of these music data groups 302a1 to 302a26 will be described with reference to FIG. 109.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the music data group. As shown in FIG. 109, the music data group is composed of a plurality of data in units of music parts (separations). More specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 109, for example, the intro data corresponding to the prelude (so-called intro) part of the music and the A melody 1 corresponding to the first melody (so-called A melody part) of the music. Data, data for B melody 1 corresponding to the second (next to A melody) melody (so-called B melody part) of the song, and chorus 1 corresponding to the most exciting part (so-called chorus part) of the song. Data, interlude data corresponding to the interlude part of the song, A melody 2 data corresponding to the second A melody part of the song, and B melody 2 data corresponding to the second B melody part of the song. , The chorus 2 data corresponding to the second chorus part of the song and the outro data corresponding to the outro part of the song are composed. By playing (outputting) the audio data of each part in the order specified for each piece of music, one piece of music is played back. With this configuration, the audio data can be diverted when a part of the music is used for other productions (for example, when the chorus part of a predetermined music is reproduced during the variable display production). .. In other words, since it is not necessary to separately store the audio data for one song and the audio data for a part of the song, the storage capacity of the audio file storage area 302a can be reduced. Further, each data constituting the music data group is defined in association with the data corresponding to the pointer value of the music pointer 303b described later set in the RAM 303 and the reproduction time when each data is reproduced. ing. In the first control example, the music is reproduced in the order of the values of the music pointer 303b. That is, when the reproduction time of the music data being reproduced has elapsed, the value of the music pointer 303b is updated by 1, and the music data corresponding to the updated pointer value is reproduced. As a result, the data for each musical piece can be played back in the same order each time.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 303 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 107 (b). FIG. 107 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 303. As shown in FIG. 107 (b), the RAM 303 is provided with at least a music data group storage area 303a, a music pointer 303b, a maximum value storage area 303c, and a music timer 303d.

The music data group storage area 303a is a storage area for storing an audio file (music data group) corresponding to the music to be played in the probabilistic state. During the probabilistic state, the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a is reproduced in the order of the value of the music pointer 303b, so that one music is reproduced. .. In the music data group storage area 303a, a command (voice lottery music command) output from the voice lamp control device 113 to instruct the playback of the music determined by the lottery at the start of the probability change state, or a game. When a command output to instruct the playback of a music selected by a person (voice selection music command) is received, the music data group corresponding to the music instructed by the command is read from the voice file storage area 302a. It is taken out and stored (see S9205 and S9210 in FIG. 116).

In this first control example, when starting the reproduction of the music based on the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a, the reproduction position is different depending on the background of the determination of the music. It is supposed to be. Specifically, when starting the playback of the music determined by the lottery at the start of the probability change state, the playback is started from the chorus part (playback of the data for chorus 1 is set), while the player selects it. When starting the reproduction of the determined music, the composition is such that the reproduction is started from the beginning (intro part) of the music (the reproduction of the intro data is set). It is highly likely that the player wants to listen carefully to the music selected by the player from the beginning of the music, while the player does not like the randomly selected music. This is because there is a possibility that the music will be changed immediately. Therefore, for a randomly selected song, by starting playback from the chorus part, which is the most exciting part of the song, at least the most characteristic part of the song is made to be heard by the player, and then the song is played. You can make a decision as to whether or not to change it. As a result, the goodness (characteristics) of the randomly selected music can be transmitted (understood) to the player to the maximum extent, so that the player's favorite music can be easily increased (randomly selected music). It makes it easier to find new songs that you like. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the probable change state.

The music pointer 303b is a pointer for indicating which data of the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a is being played. The value of the music pointer 303b is set to "00H" when the player is instructed to play the music selected (the music is notified by the voice music selection command) (see S9206 in FIG. 116). ). Along with this, reproduction of the intro data corresponding to the pointer value "00H" is set. On the other hand, when the playback of a randomly selected song is instructed at the start of the probabilistic state (the song is notified by the voice lottery song command), the value corresponding to the chorus 1 portion is set (FIG. 116). See S9211). The value of the music pointer 303b is updated by 1 each time the reproduction of the music data of 1 set in the music data group storage area 303a is completed. Further, in a state where the value of the music pointer 303b is the maximum value set for each type of music (in this first control example, the pointer value corresponding to one before the outro portion), a pointer is further added. When the value is updated, the value is updated to "01H".

Here, when the reproduction is completed up to one before the outro part, the value of the music pointer 303b is updated to "01H" corresponding to the verse 1 part without reproducing the outro part and the intro part. This is to make it difficult for the player to recognize the break of the music when the music is repeatedly played. If the composition is such that the music is repeatedly played by playing the music from the intro part again after playing up to the outro part of the music, the player can easily recognize the break of the music. In this case, there is a possibility that the breaks in the music become anxious and it becomes difficult to concentrate on the game in the probable change state. On the other hand, in this control example, when the music is repeatedly played, the outro part and the intro part of the music are skipped and the verse 1 part is returned to, so that the music can be looped with a more natural connection. can. Therefore, since it becomes difficult for the player to notice the break of the music, it is possible to make the player more concentrated and play the game in the probable change state.

The maximum value storage area 303c is a storage area for temporarily storing the maximum value of the music pointer 303b. As described above, in the first control example, the configuration is such that the part from the verse 1 portion to the portion immediately before the outro portion is repeatedly reproduced, but the pointer value corresponding to the portion immediately before the outro portion is It may vary depending on the song. Depending on the music, the C melody may be set next to the B melody, multiple types of chorus may be set, or the interlude may not be set, which is different from the data structure shown in FIG. 109. In some cases. Therefore, when the music data group is stored in the music data group storage area 303a and the music reproduction is set, the music pointer 303b corresponding to the music to be reproduced is set with respect to the maximum value storage area 303c. The maximum value of is set in advance (see S9207 and S9212 in FIG. 116). Then, each time the reproduction of the music data of 1 set in the music data group storage area 303a is completed, the value of the music pointer 303b is compared with the maximum value stored in the maximum value storage area 303c. , It is configured so that it can be determined whether or not the reproduction up to the portion immediately before the outro portion is completed (whether the music pointer 303b should be returned to "01H"). As a result, even if the data structure is different for each song, the intro part and the outro part can be reliably skipped and loop playback can be performed.

The music timer 303d is a timer that measures the reproduction time of the music data being reproduced. In the music timer 303d, a timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the music data is set every time the reproduction of new music data is set. The reproduction time of each music data is defined in the music data group storage area 303a in association with the type of music data. During music reproduction, it is determined whether or not the reproduction time has elapsed based on the value of the music timer 303d. Although not shown, the music timer 303d is updated periodically (for example, every 1 millisecond).

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 110 to 114, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example will be described. First, FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the main process 8 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example.

Of the main processes 8 (see FIG. 110) in the first control example, in each of the processes S4101 to S4111 and S4113 to S4118, the main processes (see FIG. 34) S4101 to S4111 and S4113 in the first embodiment, respectively, are used. The same process as each process of S4118 is executed. Further, in the main process 8 (see FIG. 110) in the first control example, after the effect update process of S4111 is completed, the operation (pressing) of the operation button 230 is monitored and the operation is detected. The operation detection process for executing the control is executed (S4141), and the process is transferred to S4142. The details of this operation detection process (S4141) will be described later with reference to FIG. 111.

Further, when it is determined that the processing of S4141 is completed or that 1 millisecond has not elapsed from the previous processing in the processing of S4101 (S4101: No), the command determination processing in the first embodiment (FIG. 36), the command determination process 8 is executed (S4142), and the process shifts to S4113. The details of this command determination process 8 (S4142) will be described later with reference to FIG. 112.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned operation detection process (S4141) will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing this operation detection process (S4141). In the operation detection process (S4141), first, it is determined whether or not an operation (pressing) for the operation button 230 is detected (S5101). In the process of S5101, the output of the signal line connected to each button of the operation button 230 is detected, and if any of the outputs is H, it is determined that the operation for the operation button 230 is detected.

If it is determined in the process of S5101 that the operation for the operation button 230 is not detected (that is, the output of the signal corresponding to all the buttons is L) (S5101: No), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation for the operation button 230 is detected (that is, the output of the signal corresponding to any button is H) (S5101: Yes), then the music selection permission flag 223ad is turned on. If it is determined (S5102) and the music selection permission flag 223ad is off (S5102: No), it means that it is a period during which the music cannot be selected, and the operation for the operation button 230 is invalidated. This process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5102, when it is determined that the music selection permission flag 223ad is on (S5102: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the menu display flag 223ae is on (S5103). If it is determined in the process of S5103 that the menu display flag 223ae is off (S5103: No), the display of the music selection menu screen is set (S5104), and the menu display flag 223ae is set to on (S5105). This process ends. By these processes, the music selection menu screen can be displayed regardless of the type of the pressed button when the music selection menu screen is not displayed in the probable change state.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5103 that the menu display flag 223ae is on (S5103: Yes), different control is executed according to the type of the button operated (pressed) by the player. Specifically, first, it is determined whether the operation detected by the process of S5101 is the operation for the center button CB (S5106), and the operation detected this time is determined to be the operation for the center button CB. (S5106: Yes) sets an audio selection music command for notifying the audio output device 226 of the reproduction of the music corresponding to the value of the current menu position pointer 223ab (S5107).

When the processing of S5107 is completed, then, among the storage areas set in the music selection count storage area 223ac, 1 is added to the music selection count of the music set to be played (selected) by the processing of S5107 to update. (S5108), the music selection menu screen is closed, the menu display flag 223ae is set to off (S5109), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation for the center button CB has not been detected in the processing of S5106 (S5106: No), the value of the menu position pointer 223ab is updated according to the type of the button for which the operation has been detected (S5110). ). In this process of S5110, when the press of the upper button UB is detected, 1 is subtracted from the value of the menu position pointer 223ab, while when the press of the lower button DB is detected, the menu position pointer 223ab is detected. Add 1 to the value of. When the pressing of the upper button UB is detected while the menu position pointer 223ab is "00H", the pointer value is updated to "19H" which is the maximum value. Further, when the pressing of the lower button DB is detected in the state where the menu position pointer 223ab is "19H" which is the maximum value, the pointer value is updated to "00H".

When the processing of S5110 is completed, the display mode of the music selection menu screen is updated according to the value of the menu position pointer 223ab after being updated by the processing of S5110 (S5111), and this processing is terminated. In the processing of S5111, the item corresponding to the value of the menu position pointer 223ab (image showing the type of music) is arranged in the music selection area, and the item corresponding to the two values before and after the current value of the menu position pointer 223ab (music). (Images showing the types of music) are placed above and below the music selection area.

By executing this operation detection process (see FIG. 111), the player can update the music selection menu screen, determine the music, etc. according to the operation content (type of the button for which the press is detected) for the operation button 230, as the player wishes. Can be executed.

Next, the command determination process 8 (S4142) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. 112. As described above, the command determination process 8 (S4142) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment.

Of the command determination processes 8 (see FIG. 112), in each of the processes S4301 to S4309, S4311 to S4313, and S4315, the command determination processes (see FIG. 36) S4301 to S4309, S4311 to S4313 in the first embodiment, respectively. , And the same processing as each processing of S4315 is executed. Further, in the command determination process 8 (see FIG. 112) in the first control example, if it is determined that the status command has been received in the process of S4309 (S4309: Yes), then the received status command is notified. A state command process for executing control according to the game state is executed (S4351), and this process is terminated. The details of this state command processing (S4351) will be described later with reference to FIG. 113.

Further, in the command determination process 8 (see FIG. 112) in the first control example, when it is determined that a hit-related command has been received in the process of S4313 (S4313: Yes), the hit-related process in the first embodiment Instead of (see FIG. 37), the hit-related process 8 is executed (S4352), and this process is terminated. The details of the hit-related process 8 (S4352) will be described later with reference to FIG. 114.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned state command processing (S4351) will be described with reference to FIG. 113. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing this state command processing (S4351). As described above, this state command process (S4351) is a process for performing control according to the game state notified by the state command.

In this state command process (see FIG. 113), first, the data in the game state storage area 223i is updated according to the game state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110 (S5201). That is, when the probability change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol are notified based on the information corresponding to the game state notified by the state command, the lower 2 bits of the game state storage area 223i are set to "11B". When the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol are notified, the lower 2 bits of the game state storage area 223i are set to "01B", and the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state are notified. When the normal state of the normal symbol is notified, the lower 2 bits of the game state storage area 223i are set to "00B". As a result, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 can easily grasp the change.

When the processing of S5201 is completed, it is next determined whether or not it is a state command indicating the transition to the probabilistic state (probability change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol) (S5202), and the transition to the probabilistic state. If it is determined that the command is not a status command indicating (S5202: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5202, when it is determined that a state command indicating the transition to the probabilistic state has been received (S5202: Yes), then the number of playbacks is increased from the music selection count storage area 223ac (see FIG. 105 (b)). Read up to three data in descending order (S5203). If the number of songs selected by the player is less than three after the power is turned on, only the selected songs (that is, data of less than three) are read out. Further, if the music has not been selected even once after the power is turned on (that is, the number of music selections corresponding to all the music types in the music selection number storage area 223ac is 0), the data is read out in the process of S5203. There is no such thing.

When the processing of S5203 is completed, the maximum three data read in the processing of S5203 are then stored in the history area (storage area corresponding to the values "17H" to "19H" of the menu position pointer 223ab) in the item arrangement storage area 223aa. Items (musical pieces) to be stored (S5204) and arranged in the song selection area on the song selection menu screen are determined by lottery (S5205). If the number of data read by the process of S5203 is less than three in the process of S5204, the data cannot be stored in all (three) storage areas of the history area, so that the data in the history area cannot be stored. Of these, one or more storage areas are empty areas. When the processing of S5205 is completed, next, it is determined whether the item determined by the lottery by the processing of S5205 is an item (music) already stored in the history area (S5206), and the item stored in the history area is used. If there is (S5206: Yes), in order to prevent the same item (music) from being duplicated in the music selection area and the history area, the process returns to S5205 and the lottery is repeated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5206, if it is determined that the item (music) determined by the lottery by the process of S5205 is not an item stored in the history area (S5206: No), the item determined by the lottery by the process of S5205 is selected. A voice lottery music command for notifying the reproduction of the corresponding music is set (S5207). The voice lottery music command set here is output to the voice output device 226 by the command output process (S4102) of the main process 8 (see FIG. 110). When the voice output device 226 receives the voice lottery music command, the music output device 226 is set so that the music specified by the command is played from the chorus 1 portion. Here, the reason why the music selected by the random lottery is played from the chorus 1 part is that the player may change the music immediately if he / she does not like it even a little. Therefore, for a randomly selected song, by starting playback from the chorus part, which is the most exciting part of the song, at least the most characteristic part of the song is made to be heard by the player, and then the song is played. You can make a decision as to whether or not to change it. As a result, the goodness of the randomly selected music can be transmitted to the player to the maximum extent, so that the player's favorite music can be easily increased (newly favorite music from the randomly selected music). Can be made easier to find). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the probable change state.

When the processing of S5207 is completed, the items determined by the lottery by the processing of S5205 are then stored in the storage area corresponding to the value "00H" of the menu position pointer 223ab in the item arrangement storage area 223aa (S5208) and stored immediately before. The items in the order to be arranged following the items are specified by referring to the order (that is, the alphabetical order of the music) defined in the item order storage area 222aa (S5209). Then, it is determined whether the item (musical piece) specified in the process of S5209 is the data (item) stored in the storage area corresponding to the value "00H" of the menu position pointer 223ab in the item arrangement storage area 223aa (S5210). If it is determined that an item other than the item stored in the storage area corresponding to the value "00H" of the menu position pointer 223ab in the item arrangement storage area 223aa is specified (S5210: No), the item has already been stored in the history area. It is determined whether or not the item has been specified (S5211).

If it is determined in the process of S5211 that the data not stored in the history area is specified in the process of S5209 (S5211: No), the item specified in the process of S5209 is the process of S5208 or the previous process of S5212. It is stored in the storage area next to the storage area stored in (S5212), and the process is returned to S5209. On the other hand, in the process of S5211 if it is determined that the item specified in the process of S5209 is an item already stored in the history area (S5211: Yes), the specified item is stored in the item arrangement storage area 223aa. Without doing so (skipping the process of S5212), the process returns to S5209. In the process of S5210, the transition is the process of S5209 for specifying the items in the order specified in the item order storage area 222aa until the items stored in the storage area corresponding to "00H" are specified, and the specified items. The process of S5212 stored in the item arrangement storage area 223aa is repeated.

Further, in the processing of S5210, when it is determined that the item specified by the processing of S5209 is an item stored in the storage area corresponding to the value "00H" of the menu position pointer 223ab in the item arrangement storage area 223aa (S5210: Yes), because it means that the item is stored in the storage area corresponding to all the values "00H" to "19H" of the menu position pointer 223ab in the item arrangement storage area 223aa, and it goes around and returns to "00H". , The loop of each process of S5209 to S5212 is terminated, and the process is transferred to S5213. In the process of S5213, the music selection permission flag 223ad is set to ON (S5213), and this process is terminated. By repeating the processing of S5209 to S5212, the data is duplicated for all the storage areas other than the area where the data is stored by the processing of S5204 and S5205, regardless of the number of data stored in the history area in the processing of S5204. Data can be stored reliably without any problems.

By executing this state command process (see FIG. 113), the initial arrangement of the configuration of the music selection menu screen can be set. In addition, up to three items (musical pieces) can be arranged in the history area on the music selection menu screen in descending order of the number of times the player has selected. That is, it is possible to arrange items (items that are likely to be selected by the player) that are frequently selected by the player in the previous games with respect to the arrangement of the upper three of the music selection areas. Therefore, in each probabilistic state, the item that the player has repeatedly selected so far (that is, the item that the player is likely to select even in the probable change state this time) can be selected with less effort. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel annoyed when selecting a song (item).

In addition, each time the probability change state is reached, the first music to be played can be determined by a random lottery. As a result, at least immediately after the transition to the probabilistic state, a randomly selected song can be played, so that the player can be given an opportunity to listen to a song other than the song frequently selected. Therefore, it is possible to play a plurality of songs set in the pachinko machine 10 without waste. In addition, while listening to a randomly selected song, the player may like the song and want to play it even in a probable state after the next time. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the number of favorite songs of the player, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the probable change state. In addition, by continuing to select only the same songs, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the game from becoming monotonous.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned hit-related process 8 (S4352) will be described with reference to FIG. 114. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the hit-related process 8 (S4352). Of the hit-related processes 8 (S4352) in the first control example, the same processes as the hit-related processes (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment are executed in each of the processes S4401 to S4410.

Further, in the hit-related process 8 (see FIG. 114) in the first control example, when the process of S4406 is completed, both the music selection permission flag 223ad and the menu display flag 223ae are reset to off (S4451), and the menu position is set. The value of the pointer 223ab is reset to "00H" (S4452), and this process ends. By executing each of the processes of S4451 and S4452, the flags and pointers related to the music selection menu screen can be reset every time an opening command is received (that is, every time a big hit is won).

In the first control example, the reset of the flag and the pointer related to the music selection menu screen is reset every time the jackpot is won, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the reset process may be executed only when the jackpot is won in the probable change state. Further, the reset process may be executed at the start of the probabilistic state.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio output device in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 115 to 117, various control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the first control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 115 (a), the main process executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. FIG. 115A is a flowchart showing the contents of this main process.

When the main process of the voice output device 226 is executed, first, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (S9001). The details of this command determination process (S9001) will be described later with reference to FIG. 116. After the processing of S9001, the audio setting process for setting the reproduction of the audio data and the switching of the data is executed (S9002). The details of this voice setting process (S9002) will be described later with reference to FIG. 117.

When the processing of S9002 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 303 (S9003). If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S9003 (S9003: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in progress flag are turned on (S9005), and the power-off processing is executed (S9006). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S9007), and then the process is looped infinitely.

On the other hand, if the power cutoff occurrence information is not stored in the process of S9003 (S9003: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 303 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 303 (S9004), and the RAM 303 is destroyed. If not (S9004: No), the process returns to the process of S9001 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 303 is destroyed (S9004: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 115 (b). FIG. 115B is a flowchart showing the contents of this command interrupt process.

This command interrupt process (see FIG. 115 (b)) is a process executed every time a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the RAM 303 (S9101), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by the command determination processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 116, a command determination process (S9001), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 115 (a)) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, will be described. In this command determination process (S9001), control according to the type of various commands received from the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination process (S9001).

In the command determination process (see FIG. 116), first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S9201), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S9201: No), the command determination process is performed. And return to the main process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S9201: Yes), the new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S9202), and then the unprocessed new command is stored in the command buffer area. For all the processing commands, the type of the command is analyzed (S9203).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a selected music command for voice for notifying the music selected by the player by operating the operation button 230 (S9204), and the music is selected for voice. When it is determined that there is a music command (S9204: Yes), the audio file (music data group) corresponding to the music notified by the command is read from the voice file storage area 302a of the ROM 302, and the read music is used. The data group is stored in the music data group storage area 303a (S9205). Next, "00H" is set for the value of the music pointer 303b, and the timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the intro data is set for the music timer 303d (S9206). As a result, the music selected by the player by operating the operation button 230 can be played from the beginning, so that the music selected by the player can be carefully played to the player (completely from the beginning of the music). ) Can be heard.

When the processing of S9206 is completed, the maximum value of the music pointer 303b corresponding to the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a this time is stored in the maximum value storage area 303c (S9207), and is used for the intro. Data reproduction is set (S9208), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S9204, when it is determined that the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 does not include the selected music command for voice (S9204: No), then the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. It is determined whether or not there is a voice lottery music command for notifying a music randomly selected based on the probability change state among the commands (S9209). If it is determined in the process of S9209 that there is a voice lottery music command (S9209: Yes), the voice file (music data group) corresponding to the music indicated by the received voice lottery music command is stored in the voice file storage area 302a. The music data group read from the above is stored in the music data group storage area 303a (S9210).

When the processing of S9210 is completed, next, the pointer value corresponding to the chorus 1 portion is set for the value of the music pointer 303b, and the timer value corresponding to the reproduction time of the chorus 1 data is set to the music timer 303d. Set (S9211). Then, the maximum value of the music pointer 303b corresponding to the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a this time is stored in the maximum value storage area 303c (S9212), and the reproduction of the chorus 1 data is set. (S9213), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S9209, when it is determined that the voice lamp control device 113 has not received the voice selection music command (S9209: No), it corresponds to the other command received from the voice lamp control device 113. The process is executed (S9214), and the process is returned to S9201. In the process of S9214, if the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is, for example, a command instructing the reproduction of the sound effect, the reproduction of the sound effect of the type specified by the command is set. If it is a command instructing the reproduction of the warning sound, the reproduction of the warning sound of the type specified by the command is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the details of the audio setting process (S9002) executed in the main process (see FIG. 115 (a)) by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing this voice setting process (S9002).

In this audio setting process (see FIG. 117), first, it is determined whether or not the music in the probabilistic state is being played (S9301), and if it is determined that the music in the probabilistic state is not being played (S9301). : No), it means that a single sound effect, warning sound, etc. is being played, or no audio is output, and there is no possibility of switching to other audio data during audio playback, so it is as it is. This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S9301 when it is determined that the music in the probabilistic state is being played (S9301: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the music data being played (S9302). That is, when it is determined whether the value of the music timer 303d has become 0 and it is determined that it is not the playback end timing of the music data (that is, the value of the music timer 303d has not become 0) (S9302: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S9302, when it is determined that the end timing of the data for the music being played has come (that is, the value of the music timer 303d has become 0) (S9302: Yes), it is for the music. In the data group storage area 303a, the process for setting the reproduction of the music data next to the music data for which the reproduction has ended this time is executed. Specifically, first, the data stored in the maximum value storage area 303c (the maximum value corresponding to the music data group being played this time) is compared with the current value of the music pointer 303b (S9303). ), It is determined whether or not the value of the music pointer 303b matches the maximum value (data stored in the maximum value storage area 303c) corresponding to the current music data group (S9304).

If it is determined in the processing of S9304 that the value of the music pointer 303b does not match the maximum value corresponding to the current music data group (S9304: No), 1 is added to the value of the music pointer 303b. And update (S9305), and shift the process to S9307. On the other hand, in the process of S9304, when it is determined that the value of the music pointer 303b matches the maximum value corresponding to the current music data group (S9304: Yes), the value of the music pointer 303b is set to ". It is updated to "01H" (S9306), and the process is shifted to S9307. By updating the value of the music pointer 303b to "01H" by the process of S9306, it is possible to return to the A melody 1 portion of the set music and perform loop reproduction. That is, loop reproduction can be performed by skipping the intro portion and the outro portion.

Here, if the loop playback of the music is performed, the player can easily recognize the break of the music by playing the music in a loop by playing the music from the intro part again after playing the outro part of the music. Will end up. In this case, there is a possibility that the breaks in the music become anxious, and it becomes difficult for the player to concentrate on the game in the probable change state. On the other hand, in this first control example, when the music is repeatedly played, the outro part and the intro part of the music are skipped and the music is returned to the verse 1 part, so that the music is looped with a more natural connection. be able to. Therefore, since it becomes difficult for the player to notice the break of the music, it is possible to make the player more concentrated and play the game in the probable change state.

In the processing of S9307 executed after the processing of S9305 or S9306 is completed, the music data of 1 corresponding to the value of the updated music pointer 303b is read from the music data group storage area 303a (S9307). , The reproduction of the read music data is set (S9308), and this process is terminated.

By executing this voice setting process (see FIG. 117), it is possible to skip the intro part and the outro part of the set music and perform loop playback in the probable change state.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, the player operates the third symbol display device 81 during a predetermined period (for example, a period in which the probability change state is set) during the normal game. The configuration is such that the music selection menu screen whose display mode (items displayed in the appearance mode lit in the music selection area) changes in conjunction with the operation of the button 230 is displayed, and the player can display the music selection menu screen. When the center button 230 is pressed, the music (voice effect) corresponding to the display mode (item displayed in the music selection area) of the music selection menu screen is played (executed). Further, as a configuration in which the configuration of the music selection menu screen displayed first after the predetermined period is reached is changed based on the type of music (type of audio production) selected by the player so far (at least last time). There is.

More specifically, when the state shifts to the probabilistic state, first, one song (one type of audio production) is randomly selected from a plurality of songs (songs A to Z) and placed in the song selection area. It is determined as an item and is configured to start playback of the selected song. Further, the player can select any music (arbitrary effect) of the player by operating the operation button 230 during the probability change state. By configuring the configuration to randomly select and play one song at the time of transition to the probabilistic state, the song can be played until the player selects the song (while the song is not selected). Since it can be regenerated, the player's satisfaction with the fact that the probabilistic state is favorable to the player can be further increased. Further, as the initial arrangement of the screen (music selection menu screen) for selecting music by operating the operation button 230, there is a possibility that the player selects the music regardless of the type of music randomly selected at the start of the probabilistic state. As a configuration in which a music that is considered to have a high value (a music that has been selected many times by the player in the previous game) is arranged at a position that can be selected with a small number of operations (the number of operations within 3 times) with respect to the operation button 230. There is. Here, tentatively, in determining the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen, randomly selected items (musical pieces) are arranged in the music selection area, and other items are simply arranged based on the items arranged in the music selection area. If the music is arranged in alphabetical order (predetermined order), it may be difficult for the player to select a favorite music. That is, when the item (musical piece) that the player wants to select and the item (musical piece) that is randomly selected are separated in order, the item that the player wants to select (an image showing the type of the song that the player wants to select) is shifted to the music selection area. The number of operations for the operation button 230 for making the operation button 230 increases, which may cause the player to feel annoyed. In addition, as a method to make it difficult to feel annoyed, it is conceivable to set the item that is first placed in the music selection area in the case of a probable change state as an item that is frequently selected by the player. In the method, there is a high possibility that the player is satisfied with the music that is first played (output) in the probabilistic state and does not want to change the music (the music selection menu screen is not displayed). The less the player has the opportunity to display the music selection menu, the less the chance to know the type of music set in the pachinko machine 10. For this reason, it is less likely that the player will consider selecting another piece of music. Therefore, even if a large number of songs are set to be selectable for the pachinko machine 10, most of them may not be selected and may be wasted. Therefore, it is less likely that the player will consider selecting another song, and even if a large number of songs are set to be selectable for the pachinko machine 10, most of them are selected. It may be wasted without it.

On the other hand, in this first control example, the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen is set so that it is easy for the player to select an item that is likely to be selected (an item that is frequently selected in the previous game). are doing. More specifically, it becomes possible to select three items (musical pieces) that the player has frequently selected in the previous game (the number of times of selection is large) with a small number of operations (the number of times the operation button 230 is pressed). It is configured to be arranged at a position (display area for the upper three of the music selection area). With this configuration, even if the item (image showing the type of music) initially placed in the music selection area of the music selection menu screen becomes the item corresponding to any music, the number of operations is small (up button). It is possible to arrange an item with a high selection frequency of the player at a position that can be selected by pressing the UB within 3 times). Therefore, in each probabilistic state, the item that the player has repeatedly selected so far (that is, the item that the player is likely to select even in the probable change state this time) can be selected with less effort. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel annoyed when selecting a song (item).

Further, in the first control example, the reproduction position (execution start position) of the music (sound effect) is changed according to the background in which the reproduction of the music (sound effect) is set. More specifically, the music selected by the player by operating the operation button 230 is configured to start playback from the beginning (that is, the intro part) of the music (from the second start position). On the other hand, for a song determined (selected) by a random lottery at the start of the probabilistic state, playback is started from the chorus 1 part of the song (from the second start position). As a result, the music selected by the player at his / her own will can be heard in its complete form from the beginning of the music. On the other hand, the reason why the music selected by the random lottery is played from the chorus 1 part is that the player may change the music immediately if he / she does not like it even a little. Therefore, for a randomly selected song, by starting playback from the chorus part, which is the most exciting part of the song, at least the most characteristic part of the song is made to be heard by the player, and then the song is played. You can make a decision as to whether or not to change it. As a result, the goodness of the randomly selected music can be transmitted to the player to the maximum extent, so that the player's favorite music can be easily increased (newly favorite music from the randomly selected music). Can be made easier to find). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the probable change state.

Further, in this first control example, the number of items displayed on the song selection menu screen is limited to five (the number is less than the total number of items), and the items displayed on the song selection menu screen can be changed by operating the operation button 230. By making it possible, all items can be selected in conjunction with the operation of the player. Here, as a method of making it easier for the player to select a favorite song on the song selection menu screen, all the items are collectively displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (the items are arranged in a matrix). By doing so, it is possible to consider a method of making it possible to understand at a glance which music (item) is arranged at which position. However, in this method, the display area (area of the music selection menu screen) for displaying each item becomes wide, and the display for displaying other display contents (third symbol, reserved ball number symbol, etc.) The area may become too small. On the other hand, in this first control example, the number of items to be displayed on the music selection menu screen is limited to five (the number is less than the total number of items). With this configuration, the display area of the song selection menu screen can be reduced as compared with the case where all the items are displayed at once. Therefore, it is possible to display the display contents other than the music selection menu screen, such as the third symbol and the reserved ball number symbol, in a larger display area.

In this first control example, for the music determined by the random lottery at the start of the probabilistic state, the reproduction from the chorus 1 part is set, and at the same time, the operation button 230 is operated to select the music during the probabilistic change state. The music that was played was configured to be played from the intro part, but it is not limited to this. On the contrary, for the music determined by the random lottery, the playback from the intro part is set, while for the music voluntarily selected by the player by operating the operation button 230, the music is played from the chorus 1 part. It may be configured to be used. Most of the players who voluntarily select a song want to listen to the chorus part of the selected song, so by playing the voluntarily selected song from the chorus part, the player's request can be met. It can come true instantly. Further, by replaying the music whose reproduction is determined by a random lottery at the start (transition) of the probabilistic state from the intro portion, the player can calmly select the music. In detail, the intro part of the music has a relatively calm melody, while the chorus part of the music has a relatively intense melody. Therefore, by setting the playback from the intro part, it is possible to set the relatively calm melody to flow first. Therefore, it is possible to make the player select a song in a calm mood while the relatively calm melody is playing. In addition, it is not always necessary to change the reproduction position according to the background in which the reproduction is set. For example, regardless of the circumstances, the reproduction may be started from the chorus 1 part (that is, from the most exciting part in the music), or the reproduction may be started from the intro part. With such a configuration, it is possible to omit the control of determining the background and changing the reproduction position, so that the processing load can be reduced.

In the first control example, the history area is arranged above the music selection area on the music selection menu screen, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any arrangement may be used. For example, the history area may be arranged below the music selection area. That is, three items (musical pieces) that are frequently selected by the player in the previous games may be arranged below the music selection area.

In the first control example, the history area is configured to provide an area in which items that are frequently selected by the player (frequently) are arranged, but the configuration of the history area is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the configuration of the first control example, as a second history area, an area in which items that are unlikely to be selected by the player from the past tendency of the player are arranged is a game. It may be configured to be provided in a range where it is difficult for a person to select (the number of operations for the operation button 230 for selecting a song is relatively large). More specifically, for example, when a randomly selected song is being played and changed to another song before a predetermined period elapses (for example, within 5 seconds), The music is placed in a range that is relatively difficult for the player to select (for example, a range that cannot be selected unless the player performs at least 10 operations) as an item that is unlikely to be selected by the player from the next time onward. It may be configured to make it. If the song is changed within the specified period, it is possible that the player has changed the song in a hurry because the song that the player does not want to listen to has been played. There is a high possibility that you do not want to listen (the possibility that the song will be changed immediately when it is played). That is, the reproduction may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, by arranging the music changed at a relatively early stage (within a predetermined period) during playback in the second history area, it is possible to eliminate the possibility of being selected at random lottery in the probable change state from the next time onward. At the same time, it is relatively easy to select other items (items that are more likely to be selected by the player than the items placed in the second history area) (can be selected with a relatively small number of operations). ) Can be placed at the position. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the music played at the start of the probabilistic state causes the player to feel uncomfortable.

In this first control example, the number of times each song is selected after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on is counted for each song, and three items (musical pieces) are arranged in the history area in descending order of the number of times. However, the method of estimating the music that the player is likely to select is not limited to this. For example, the tendency of music selection for each player may be accumulated in an external server owned by the manufacturer who developed the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, in the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10, the URL information for connecting to an external server can be displayed in a format that can be read by a mobile terminal (for example, a two-dimensional bar code format). Configure. By reading the URL information with a mobile terminal, accessing the external server from the mobile terminal, and entering the ID and password registered in advance or newly registered this time, the player's personal data (pachinko) The number of times a big hit is won by the machine 10, the number of times a special symbol is drawn, etc.) can be confirmed. The history and number of times of the selected music are also set in this item. Then, when the game by the pachinko machine 10 is started while logged in to the server, the selection history stored in the server is reflected in the pachinko machine 10, and the items to be stored in the selection area based on the selection history are displayed. It may be a configuration to be determined. As a method of reflecting the data of the server on the pachinko machine 10, for example, the data set in the server is converted into a password (encoded) and displayed on the player's mobile terminal, and the password is displayed on the mobile terminal. A method of inputting data to the pachinko machine 10 side by a person can be mentioned. That is, on the pachinko machine 10, the correspondence relationship between the password and the history is defined in advance, and when the password is input, the history corresponding to the password (the number of selections for each song) is stored in the music selection count storage area 223ac. It may be configured to be set to. With this configuration, it is possible to display a music selection menu screen that matches the tendency of each player, so that the pachinko machine 10 that allows the player to more easily select his / her favorite music is provided. be able to.

In this first control example, the initial arrangement of the items on the music selection menu screen has been configured to be variable according to the type and number of times of the music selected by the player (player's selection history). Not limited. In the case of executing a player-participation-type effect such as an effect for urging an operation on a predetermined operation button, the initial mode of the effect may be changed according to the participation status of the player. For example, for a player who tends to actively participate, in the case of a player who participates in the production infrequently, while controlling so that a production mode that encourages a larger number of operations can be easily selected. It may be configured to control so that an effect mode that encourages an operation with a relatively small number of operations can be easily selected. Further, for example, in the case of a player who rarely participates in the effect, the effect may be configured to facilitate the execution of an effect having a high expectation that a result advantageous to the player is notified by pressing the player. With such a configuration, a player who participates less frequently is more likely to want to participate in the pressing effect, so that an appropriate mode can be set according to the tendency of the player. Further, in this case, instead of determining the effect mode according to the participation status (history) of the player, the effect mode such as the number of operations may be randomly determined by lottery. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to memorize the participation status of the player, so that the control can be simplified.

In the first control example, when the player decides one song from the song selection menu screen, the playback is started from the beginning of the song regardless of the situation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the remaining time until the probability change state ends is short (for example, when the jackpot starts when the running fluctuation display ends), the reproduction may be started from the rust portion.

In this first control example, the music randomly selected at the start of the probabilistic state is started to be played from the chorus part of the music, while the music selected by the player from the music selection menu screen is from the beginning of the music. Although it was configured to be played back, the control for changing the playback position of the music piece (type of data for the music used first) according to the circumstances in which the playback of the music piece was decided is not limited to this. For example, when setting the playback of a song based on the start of the first round of the jackpot as a song to be played during the jackpot, the playback is started from the beginning (intro part) of the song, while the ending of the jackpot. When the playback of the music is set based on the start of the period, the playback may be started from the outro portion of the music.

In this first control example, the reproduction position (voice) of the music is determined according to the background of the determination of the type of the music (voice production) (whether it is selected by a random lottery or voluntarily selected by the player). Although it was configured to change the execution start position of the effect, this control is not limited to the effect by voice. For example, this control may be applied to the display effect executed by the third symbol display device 81. Further, the process of determining the type of effect is not limited to the one illustrated in the first control example (whether it was selected by a random lottery or voluntarily selected by the player). For example, if it is decided to execute a specific effect in a situation where the variable display corresponding to the deviation is being executed, the variable display corresponding to the jackpot is configured to execute the specific effect from the beginning. If the execution of a specific effect is determined under the situation that the specific effect is being executed, the execution may be started from the middle of the specific effect. With this configuration, it is possible to pay more attention to the content of the production and perform the game.

In this first control example, the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen is changed according to the history of music selection by the player (the number of times each music is selected), and the more items the player is likely to select, the fewer operations are performed. Although it was configured to be arranged at a position that can be selected by the number of times, this control is not limited to the case of selecting a musical piece. For example, a game composed of items corresponding to the volume of the sound output from the sound output device 226, items corresponding to the brightness of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, items corresponding to the game history, and the like. The menu screen is configured to be displayable by operating the operation button 230. Then, according to the history of the items selected by the player in the past, the items that are more likely to be selected by the player may be arranged at the positions that can be selected with a smaller number of operations.

In this first control example, the music selection menu screen is not displayed unless the operation button 230 is operated after the probability change state is reached. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the song selection menu is always displayed during the probability change state. The screen may be displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the time and effort of the player who wants to select a musical piece, so that the convenience of the player can be improved.

In the first control example, the item displayed first for the music selection area is selected by a random lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the item first displayed in the song selection area on the song selection menu screen, the item last selected by the player may be arranged in the probability change state set before the current probability change state.

In this first control example, a maximum of three items are selected in the order of the number of times the player has selected in the previous game with a relatively small number of operations in the initial arrangement on the music selection menu screen (shift to the music selection area). It was configured to be placed in a position where it is possible, but it is not limited to this. It suffices if the player can easily understand where the music that is likely to be selected by the player (the music that has been selected many times so far) is placed on the music selection menu screen. For example, the initial stage on the music selection menu screen. As an arrangement, it may be configured to be displayed somewhere in the music area MR. With this configuration, for example, even if the number of items to be displayed in the music area MR is increased from 5, the items that are likely to be selected by the player are displayed from the beginning. Can be kept. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to select an item, and the convenience of the player can be enhanced.

In the first control example, the display mode is different between the items displayed in the music selection area and the items displayed in the other display areas, but in addition to this, the player selects. The display mode may be changed depending on whether or not the music has a high possibility (an item arranged in the history area in the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen). With such a configuration, the player can more easily find an item that is likely to be selected by the player, so that the convenience of the player can be enhanced.

In the first control example, when the music determined by the random lottery is reproduced at the start of the probabilistic state, the reproduction is started from the rust portion which is the most characteristic part of the music. It is not limited, and any playback position may be used as long as it is easy for the player to pay attention to (it is easy for the player to think about listening to a randomly selected song). For example, a song that is partially diverted to another effect (for example, a variable display effect) (for example, a song that starts playing from the verse part as the back music of the effect at the start of the super reach reach effect). May be configured to start the reproduction of the music from the same reproduction start position as the reproduction start position set in the effect. With this configuration, it is possible to start playback from a playback position that was normally played during the game (that is, a playback position that is relatively familiar to the player). Therefore, by playing from a melody that can be played during a normal game (a melody that the player is likely to have already heard), the player's attention can be drawn, and the music can be listened to more carefully. Can be made.

In the first control example, the music selection menu screen can be displayed in the probable change state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the music selection menu screen may be displayed during the big hit, or may be displayed during the time saving state. Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a super reach effect) is selected as the effect mode during execution of the variation display, the music selection menu screen is displayed during the execution of the specific effect mode to display the variation. The music may be configured so that the player can freely select the music during the display.

<Second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 139. The pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above is configured to start the reproduction of a randomly selected musical piece (voice effect) at the start of the probabilistic state, and by operating the operation button 230, an arbitrary musical piece ( It was configured so that it could be changed to (voice production). Also, for randomly selected songs, playback starts from the chorus part (the most exciting part of the song), while for songs voluntarily selected by the player, the beginning of the song (intro part). It was configured to start playback from.

On the other hand, in the second control example, the player can select the music (type of voice effect) in the jackpot. Then, the playback order of the music data is dynamically rearranged according to the progress of the jackpot so that the chorus part is reproduced as much as possible until the final round is completed. That is, the type of music data (A Melo 1, B melody 1, chorus 1, etc.) is discriminated, and if the part far from the chorus part is played, the playback order of the data for each song constituting the song data group is rearranged and then played. The structure is such that the part is changed so that it becomes a part close to the rust part. As a result, by the end of the jackpot, the player can more surely hear the chorus part, which is the most exciting (most characteristic) part of the music.

Further, in the second control example, when the rust portion (specific range) is being reproduced at the end of the final round of the jackpot, the start timing of the ending effect is delayed to reproduce the rust portion for a longer time. It is configured to continue. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the most exciting (most characteristic) chorus part in the music from being forcibly ended by the end of the jackpot. As a result, the chorus portion can be more entertained by the player, so that the player's interest in the game during the jackpot can be improved.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is that the configuration of the voice output device 226 is partially changed, and the voice lamp control device 113. Some of the configurations of ROM 222 and RAM 223 have been changed, some of the configurations of RAM 303 of the audio output device 226 have been changed, and some of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been changed. It is a point that has been changed, and a point that the control process executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 has been partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, and the audio output device 226. The other processes executed by the above are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 118, the configuration of the jackpot of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 118, when the opening period of the jackpot is started, the music (opening music) dedicated to the opening period is played. When the opening period ends and the first round starts, a period during which music can be selected (music selection period) is set. In this music selection period, a music region MR (see FIGS. 101 (a) and 101 (b)) is formed on the left side of the third symbol display device 81, as in the probabilistic state in the first control example. Since the display content for the music area MR is the same as that of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this second control example, even if the player displays the music selection menu screen (see FIG. 101 (b)) and selects a music during the music selection period, the reproduction is not started immediately (the reproduction is delayed). ) The music playback is set at the timing when the first round is completed. In addition, during the first round in which the music selection period is set, the music (music for music selection) dedicated to the music selection period is played. With this configuration, the playback start timing of the music can be set regardless of whether the player immediately selects the music or the music is selected just before the end of the one round during the round period of one round. Since they can be made the same, it is possible to carefully select a favorite song during the song selection period. The initial arrangement of the items on the music selection menu screen is set by the same control as in the first control example described above. That is, in the song selection area, songs (items) selected by random lottery are arranged, and in the upper three display areas of the song selection area, songs (items) that are frequently selected by the player in the previous games. ) Is placed.

As shown in FIG. 118, when one round is completed and the interval period is started, the music selected by the player (if the player does not select the music on the music selection menu screen, the lottery at the start of the big hit). Playback of the music (the music placed in the music selection area) is started. Playback of this song will continue at least until the end of the final round of jackpots. Then, when the final round ends and the ending period starts, the ending effect is basically started and the song for the ending effect is played. As described above, when the chorus portion is being played at the end timing of the final round, the chorus portion of the music is continued to be played for a longer time by delaying the start timing of the ending effect. Since the chorus part, which is the most exciting part of the music, can be heard by the player for a longer period of time, it is possible to improve the interest in the game during the big hit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 118, in the jackpot in the second control example, there are two rearrangement determination timings for determining whether to rearrange the playback order of the music data group (interval period immediately before the final round in the jackpot). At the start of, and at the start of the final round of jackpots). At these rearrangement determination timings, whether or not to rearrange the music data to be played next (change from the normal playback order) based on the music playback position (type of music data currently being played). To determine. In this determination, when it is determined that the music is rearranged, the number of parts (the number of data for the music to be played) until the next chorus is played is reduced (for the music currently set to be played). (So that the playback of the chorus part is set next to the data group), rearrange the playback order of the music data. As a result, the time until the next rust is regenerated can be shortened, so that the rust portion can be regenerated more reliably until the jackpot ends. It should be noted that whether or not the data is of a type of music that is determined to be rearranged in the playback order of the music is preset (defined) in the rearrangement determination table 222bb (see FIG. 123) described later.

Next, a specific example of rearranging the playback order of the music will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. FIG. 119 shows the transition of the jackpot state and the transition of the music part when it is determined that the playback order is rearranged at the rearrangement determination timing 1 (at the start of the interval period immediately before the final round) during the reproduction of the music A. An example of the correspondence with the transition is shown.

As shown in FIG. 119, during one round of big hits, a music selection song dedicated to the music selection period is played as a music piece. If the music A is selected by the player during this period, the reproduction is started from the beginning of the music A (that is, from the intro part of the music A), triggered by the end of one round of the jackpot. From this point onward, in the order of the music data groups corresponding to the music A (the order of the values of the music pointer 303b associated with each data), from the verse 1 part to the part immediately before the outro part. The interval is played in a loop.

When the rearrangement determination timing 1 is reached while the loop reproduction is continuing, it is determined whether or not to rearrange the reproduction order of the music data. FIG. 119 illustrates a case where the verse 1 portion is being reproduced at the time when the rearrangement determination timing 1 is reached. As shown in the middle part of FIG. 119 (transition of the music before the rearrangement), when the A melody 1 part is being played at the rearrangement determination timing 1, the B melody 1 part is played by the end of the final round of the jackpot. It is likely that the final round will end during playback. That is, there is a high possibility that the reproduction of the musical piece A ends before the player reaches the chorus 1 part, which is the part (part) most likely to be listened to. Therefore, in this case, when the rearrangement determination timing 1 is reached, the reproduction order of the music data group is rearranged, and the reproduction order is set so that the chorus 1 portion is easily reproduced by the end of the final round.

More specifically, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 119 (transition of the music after the rearrangement), when the reproduction of the verse 1 part that was being reproduced at the time when the rearrangement was decided is completed, the original (FIG. 119). It is controlled so that the chorus 1 part is reproduced by skipping the B melody 1 part which is the order of the transition before the rearrangement shown in the middle row. More specifically, the pointer value of the music pointer 303b is updated to a value corresponding to the chorus 1 portion (data for chorus 1) of the music A, and the reproduction of the chorus 1 data is set. As a result, in the final round, the player can hear the chorus 1 part, which is the most exciting part of the music, so that the player's mood can be raised and the jackpot can be more satisfied. Can be done.

After rearranging the playback order and setting the playback of the chorus 1, the playback is continued in the order of the values of the music pointer 303b. That is, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 119, if the end timing of the jackpot is not reached during the reproduction of the chorus 1 portion, the interlude portion (interlude data) is reproduced as usual.

Next, with reference to FIG. 120, a specific example will be described in which it is determined that the reproduction order of the music is rearranged at the rearrangement determination timing 2 (that is, the start timing of the final round of the jackpot). In the example of FIG. 120, the B melody 1 portion is being reproduced when the recombination determination timing 1 is reached, and the reproduction of the B melody 1 portion is completed by the time the recombination determination timing 2 is reached, and the rust 1 portion is reproduced. The case of shifting to reproduction is illustrated.

In the example of FIG. 120, at the rearrangement determination timing 1, the B melody 1 portion is being reproduced, and the chorus 1 portion is reproduced next. Therefore, even if the reproduction order is not rearranged, the chorus is reproduced during the final round. There is a high possibility that one part will be reproduced. Therefore, at the rearrangement determination timing 1, rearrangement in the reproduction order is avoided. Further, in the example of FIG. 120, the rust 1 portion is being regenerated at the rearrangement determination timing 2. In this case, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 120, if the reproduction is continued as it is without rearranging the reproduction order, the reproduction of one rust part ends in the middle of the final round, and the next part of the rust 1 part for a relatively long period of time. The reproduction of the interlude part is executed. Since the interlude part has a relatively gentle melody, the interlude part may be played for a long time in the final round, which may impair the player's interest in the jackpot game. Therefore, if the chorus 1 portion is already being played at the rearrangement determination timing 2, the playback order of the music is rearranged, and as shown in the lower part of FIG. 120, after the chorus 1 portion is played back, the chorus 2 portion (chorus 1 portion) is rearranged. Set to play the next chorus). With this configuration, in the final round of the jackpot, the chorus part, which is the most exciting part of the music, can be continuously played for a longer period of time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game in the final round of the jackpot.

As described above, in the second control example, at a predetermined timing in the jackpot (at the start of the interval period immediately before the final round and at the start of the final round), the progress of the music (current playback position in the music) is set. According to the configuration, it is determined whether or not to rearrange the playback order of the music. Then, in the final round of the jackpot, if the rust portion is not reproduced at all or the reproduction time may be shortened, the rust portion (rust 1 portion, rust 2 portion, etc.) is reproduced longer during the final round. As described above, the playback order of the music data is rearranged (at least the music data to be played next is changed from a predetermined order (order of the value of the music pointer 303b)). In other words, based on the progress of the jackpot and the playback position of the song, the playback order of the music data is dynamically changed so that the chorus part is played longer during the predetermined period (final round) of the jackpot. It is configured to be made to. With this configuration, in the final round of the jackpot, the player can hear the most exciting chorus part of the music for a longer time. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of exhilaration just before the end of the jackpot, and thus it is possible to increase the motivation of the player for the game.

Further, in the case of a jackpot with a relatively small number of rounds (for example, a jackpot B with 5 rounds), there is a possibility that all rounds will end without reaching the rust portion in the first place. In particular, if the player cannot listen to the chorus part (chorus part 1, chorus 2 part, etc.) even though the player displays the song selection menu screen and is playing the song voluntarily selected, the jackpot ends. It can greatly discourage the player. This is because when the player voluntarily selects a song, it is highly likely that he / she is looking forward to listening to the chorus part of the selected song. On the other hand, in the second control example, the rust portion can be regenerated at least once more reliably until the final round of the jackpot is completed. Therefore, it is possible to satisfy the player who has selected the music.

Here, as a method for reproducing the chorus part in the final round of the jackpot, a method of setting the reproduction of the music data corresponding to the chorus portion at the start of the final round can be considered regardless of the progress of the music. .. However, in this method, there is a possibility that the connection of the music becomes unnatural before and after the start of the final round (that is, before and after switching to the reproduction of the chorus portion). That is, there is a high possibility that the reproduction of the rust portion will suddenly start from the middle of the other part. Therefore, in this method, the player may feel uncomfortable with the music being played, and may suspect that the pachinko machine 10 is out of order. That is, it becomes doubtful whether the pachinko machine 10 is operating normally, and there is a possibility that the game may cause anxiety. On the other hand, in this second control example, the playback order of the music data is rearranged (variable) in part units (melody (musical composition) delimiter units), so that when the playback order is rearranged, a feeling of strangeness is felt. Music can be played with a small amount of audio. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game during the big hit with confidence.

In the second control example, it is configured to determine whether or not to rearrange the playback order of the music data at the start of the interval period immediately before the final round of the jackpot and at the start of the final round. It is not limited to this. The number and timing of determination as to whether or not to rearrange the reproduction order can be arbitrarily determined.

Further, in the second control example, the playback order of the music data is rearranged so that the chorus portion is played for a longer time during the final round, but the playback order is not limited to this, and the chorus portion is played back. The round can be set arbitrarily.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the correspondence between the transition of the jackpot state and the transition of the part of the music when the start timing of the ending effect is delayed will be described. FIG. 121 is a diagram illustrating a case where the chorus 2 portion is being reproduced at the end of the final round as a result of rearranging the reproduction order of the music data.

The top row of FIG. 121 shows the transition of the state in the jackpot, the second row from the top shows the transition of the music when it is assumed that the start of the ending effect is not delayed, and the second row from the bottom shows the chorus part. The transition of the music when the start timing of the ending effect is delayed in order to reproduce the song for a longer time is shown, and the bottom row shows the transition of the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot. There is.

As shown in the second row from the top of FIG. 121, if the delay control of the ending effect is not performed, the reproduction of the music is stopped and the ending music is reproduced during the reproduction of the chorus 2 portion. In this case, the player may be dissatisfied with the impression that a different melody has suddenly started even though he / she was listening to the most exciting part. Therefore, in the second control example, when the rust portion (rust 1 portion, rust 2 portion, etc.) is being reproduced at the end timing of the final round of the jackpot, it is shown in the second row from the bottom of FIG. 121. As described above, the timing at which the ending song is played is delayed, and the chorus portion is continuously played for a longer period of time. Along with this, as for the effect mode, the effect mode displayed during the jackpot continues as it is. That is, even though the ending period has actually started, it seems as if the jackpot continues from the end of the final round until a predetermined period (for example, a maximum of 4 seconds) elapses. It is configured to be set in a mode (display mode, voice mode).

With this configuration, the possibility that the song will end in the middle of playing the chorus part is reduced, and the chorus, which is the most exciting part of the song, is longer until the ending production of the jackpot starts. The part can be heard by the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a greater sense of satisfaction to the player who has selected the music.

<Electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 126. First, the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 122 (a). FIG. 122A is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222 in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 122 (a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the second control example is the music data group type storage area with respect to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example described above (see FIG. 104 (a)). The difference is that 222ba, the rearrangement determination table 222bb, and the ending effect selection table 222bc are added.

The music data group type storage area 222ba is a data table that stores the configuration of the music data group corresponding to each music. In the music data group type storage area 222ba, at least information indicating the reproduction order and the reproduction time of each music data constituting the music data group is defined for each music type. In the first control example described above, in the voice lamp control device 113, the type of the music to be played and the background of the determination of the music (whether the music is selected by a random lottery or the music selected by the player). ) Is notified to the voice output device 226, and thereafter, the music output device 226 is configured to loop-play the music data in a predetermined order. That is, on the voice lamp control device 113 side, it was not necessary to grasp the progress of the music being played. On the other hand, in this second control example, the playback order of the music data is rearranged according to the progress of the jackpot and the music playback position (type of music data being played), or the start timing of the ending effect. It is necessary to execute the delay control of. Therefore, it is necessary for the voice lamp control device 113 to grasp the reproduction position of the music (type of the music data currently being reproduced) and the like. Therefore, in the second control example, the music data group storage area 222ba is defined, and the music data group configuration set in the audio output device 226 and the music being used (reproduced) are used. It is configured so that the type of data, the type of music data to be played next, etc. can be grasped.

The rearrangement determination table 222bb is a data table that is referred to for determining whether or not to rearrange the reproduction order of the music data when any of the rearrangement determination timings 1 and 2 in the jackpot is reached. In this rearrangement determination table 222bb, the determination result of whether or not to rearrange is determined according to the type of music data currently set to be played, and the music data to be set to be played next when it is determined to be rearranged. The type is specified. The details of the rearrangement determination table 222bb will be described with reference to FIG. 123.

FIG. 123 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the rearrangement determination table 222bb. As shown in FIG. 123, in the rearrangement determination table 222bb, the type of music data that is in the state of being played at the time when the rearrangement determination timing is reached, and the determination result (playback order) are displayed for each type of music. Whether or not it is determined to be rearranged) is specified in association with it.

More specifically, for example, for the A melody 1 portion in the music A, "OK" is specified in association with the discrimination result, and "rust" is specified as the type of music data to be played next. 1 ”is specified in association with each other. Therefore, when the rearrangement determination timing is reached during the reproduction of the verse 1 part, the chorus 1 part is reproduced after the reproduction of the verse 1 part is completed (the reproduction of the B melody 1 part is skipped). As described above, the playback order of the music data is rearranged. Further, for the B melody 1 portion, "impossible" is defined in association with the discrimination result. Therefore, even if the rearrangement determination timing is reached during the reproduction of the B melody portion, the reproduction order of the music data cannot be rearranged. Therefore, after the reproduction of the B melody 1 portion is completed, the rust 1 portion is reproduced as usual.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 123, for the chorus 1 part, the interlude part, and the verse 2 part in the music A, "OK" is specified in association with the discrimination result, and then As the type of music data to be reproduced, "rust 2" is defined in association with each other. Therefore, if the rearrangement determination timing is reached during reproduction of the chorus 1 part, the interlude part, or the verse 2 part, the chorus 2 is performed after the reproduction of the chorus 1 part, the interlude part, or the verse 2 part is completed. The playback order of the music data is rearranged so that the parts are played back. Further, for the B melody 2 portion in the music A, "impossible" is defined in association with the discrimination result. Therefore, after the reproduction of the B melody 2 portion is completed, the rust 2 portion is reproduced as usual. Further, for the chorus 2 portion in the music A, "OK" is associated and defined as the discrimination result, and "chorus 1" is associated and defined as the type of the music data to be played next. Has been done. Therefore, when the rearrangement determination timing is reached during the reproduction of the chorus 2 portion, the reproduction order of the music data is rearranged so that the chorus 2 portion is reproduced after the reproduction of the chorus 2 portion is completed.

Similarly for music B and later, the rearrangement is determined while the playback position relatively far from the chorus part set multiple times in the music (the playback position where one or more parts are separated) is being played. When the timing comes, the data of the recombination determination table 222bb is defined so that the latest chorus portion is reproduced after the part currently being reproduced is completed. With this configuration, the chorus part can be played more reliably in the final round, so that the jackpot can be ended after playing the most exciting part of the music. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the jackpot game.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 122 (a). The ending effect selection table 222bc is a data table that defines the mode of the ending effect for each timing when the ending effect is started. As described above, in the second control example, when the end timing of the final round is reached during the reproduction of the rust portion (rust 1 portion, rust 2 portion, etc.), the reproduction of the rust portion is continued and the ending effect is produced. It is configured to delay the start. Here, even if the start timing of the ending effect is delayed, since the ending period of the jackpot is constant, the execution period of the ending effect is shortened by the amount of the delay. In the second control example, a plurality of ending effects that can be selected according to the execution period of the ending effect are defined for the ending effect selection table 222bc. The details of the ending effect selection table 222bc will be described with reference to FIG. 124.

FIG. 124 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the ending effect selection table 222bc. As shown in FIG. 124, in the ending effect selection table 222bc, selection is made for each range of the remaining time (value of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb) until the reproduction of the rust portion is completed at the end of the final round of the jackpot. The types of ending effects to be performed are specified in association with each other. In the remaining playback time timer 223bb, a timer value corresponding to the playback time of the data is set at the timing when the playback of the music data is set, and the value is periodically subtracted by 1 (every 1 millisecond). It is configured to be.

As shown in FIG. 124, for a range in which the value (T) of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb is 1000 or less (that is, the remaining reproduction time of the rust portion at the end of the final round is 1 second or less), it is normal. The ending effect (normal ending) of the embodiment is defined in association with each other. This normal ending effect has an effect time of 4 seconds. That is, the period from the start of the ending period to the end of the ending effect (the sum of the remaining playback time of the rust portion and the normal ending effect period) is longer than 4 seconds and 5 seconds or less. Is set to be. On the other hand, the ending period of the jackpot is set to 5 seconds. That is, there is a maximum of about 1 second between the end of the normal ending effect and the end of the ending period. In this control example, an image (result image) for notifying the number of prize balls acquired by the player during the jackpot is displayed during the ending effect, and the difference from the end of the ending effect to the end of the ending period. During the period of, the result image is continuously displayed as a still image. This makes it possible to prevent (suppress) the player from giving the impression that the production has been interrupted during the period from the end of the ending effect to the actual end of the ending period. ..

Remaining reproduction time The value (T) of the timer 223bb is in the range of 2000 or less (that is, the remaining reproduction time of the rust portion at the end of the final round is longer than 1 second and 2 seconds or less). On the other hand, as the type of ending effect, the shortened ending 1 with an effect time of 3 seconds is defined in association with each other. That is, the sum of the remaining reproduction time of the rust portion and the effect time of the ending effect is set to be longer than 4 seconds and 5 seconds or less. Therefore, even in this case, the period from the end of the ending effect to the actual end of the ending period can be set to 1 second or less. Therefore, since the period during which the result image continues to be displayed as a still image can be limited to a short period of time, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the display content of the third symbol display device 81.

Further, the value (T) of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb is larger than 2000 and 3000 or less (that is, the remaining reproduction time of the rust portion at the end of the final round is longer than 2 seconds and 3 seconds or less). With respect to the range, as a type of ending effect, a shortened ending 2 with an effect time of 2 seconds is defined in association with the range. That is, the sum of the remaining playback time of the chorus portion and the production time of the ending effect is longer than 4 seconds and 5 seconds or less, as in the case where the normal ending or the shortened ending 1 is set. Set. Further, for a range in which the value (T) of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb is larger than 3000, a shortened ending 3 with an effect time of 1 second is defined as a type of ending effect. Here, in the second control example, in order to secure the effect time of the ending effect, the start timing of the ending effect is not delayed by 4 seconds or more. That is, if the chorus portion continues to be reproduced even after 4 seconds have passed from the start of the ending period, the reproduction of the music (big hit effect) is stopped and the ending effect is executed. Therefore, when the shortened ending 3 is set, the reproduction time of the rust portion can be limited to between 3 seconds and 4 seconds. Therefore, as in the case where the normal ending or the shortened endings 1 and 2 are set, the sum of the reproduction time of the chorus portion and the production time of the ending effect is longer than 4 seconds and 5 seconds or less. Set.

As described above, in the second control example, when the rust portion is being reproduced at the time when the end timing of the final round is reached, the start timing of the ending effect is delayed. Then, the mode of the ending effect is changed according to the length of the period from the start of the ending period to the end of the reproduction of the rust portion (or the reproduction is stopped), and the remaining time of the rust portion is set. Regardless of this, the ending effect can be finished before the ending period ends. With this configuration, the player can listen to the chorus part, which is the most exciting part of the music, for a longer period of time, and the ending effect can be performed without any discomfort.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 122 (b). FIG. 122B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 122 (b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the second control example has the reproduction data type storage area 223ba and the rest with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example (see FIG. 104 (b)). The difference is that the playback time timer 223bb, the ending delay flag 223bc, the music type storage area 223bd, the ending type storage area 223be, and the delay period timer 223bf are added. Since the other configurations are the same as the RAM 223 in the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The reproduction data type storage area 223ba is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of music data being reproduced by the audio output device 226. During the music reproduction period in the jackpot, the reproduction position of the music is specified based on the data stored in the reproduction data type storage area 223ba, and when the rearrangement determination timing is reached, the reproduction order of the music data is set. It is possible to judge whether or not to rearrange. The reproduction data type storage area 223ba is updated to a value corresponding to the music data of the type indicated by the command each time a music command is received from the voice output device 226 (see S5701 in FIG. 135). Here, the music command is a music lamp control device that sets the type of music data to be set when the playback time of one music data ends in the voice output device 226 and the playback of the next music data is set. This is a command for notifying 113. By this music command, the type of music data being played by the voice output device 113 can be accurately grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

The remaining reproduction time timer 223bb is a timer for measuring the remaining reproduction time of the music data. The remaining playback time timer 223bb is updated periodically (for example, every 1 millisecond). When the rust portion is being reproduced at the end timing of the final round of the jackpot, the timer value of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb is referred to, and the remaining reproduction time of the rust portion is specified. The effect type of the ending effect is determined according to the remaining playback time and the specified content of the ending effect selection table 222bc described above (see S5603 in FIG. 134).

The ending delay flag 223bc is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period during which the execution start of the ending effect is delayed. When the ending delay flag 223bc is on, it indicates that it is a period (ending delay period) from the determination of the delay of the start of the ending effect to the start of the ending effect. On the other hand, if the ending delay flag 223bc is off, it indicates that the ending delay period is not reached. This ending delay flag 223bc is set to on when the chorus portion is being played when the ending command is received (S5605 in FIG. 134). Further, when the ending delay period has elapsed and the start of the ending effect is set, it is set to off (see S5306 in FIG. 129).

The music type storage area 223bd is a storage area for storing data according to the type of music selected by the player during the music selection period set in the first round of the jackpot. In this music type storage area 223db, data corresponding to one music (item) determined by a random lottery at the start of the music selection period (that is, the first round of the jackpot) is stored (S5221 in FIG. 132). reference). If a music piece is selected by the player during the music selection period, the data corresponding to the selected music piece is overwritten (see S5121 in FIG. 128). At the end of the music selection period (first round of the jackpot), a voice selection music command for notifying the reproduction of the music corresponding to the data stored in the music type storage area 223db is set (S5507 in FIG. 133). reference).

The ending type storage area 223be delays the ending effect effect type determined according to the ending effect selection table 222 bc and the timer value of the remaining playback time timer 223 bb when the start timing of the ending effect is delayed. A storage area for storage during a period. In the ending type storage area 223be, the chorus portion is being played when the ending command is received, the delay of the start of the ending effect is determined, and the effect type of the ending effect is determined. The data corresponding to the effect type is stored (see S5604 in FIG. 134). When the ending delay period elapses, the start of the ending effect corresponding to the data stored in the ending type storage area 223be is set (see S5305 in FIG. 129).

The delay period timer 223bf is a timer for measuring the elapsed time (the length of the ending delay period) after the delay of the start of the ending effect is determined. The delay period timer 223bf is updated periodically (eg, every millisecond) during the ending delay period. If it is determined that the length of the ending delay period has reached 4 seconds before the reproduction of the rust portion is completed based on the value of the delay period timer 223bf, the ending delay period is terminated. The ending effect is started (see S5303 in FIG. 129).

Next, the configuration of the audio output device 226 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. First, FIG. 125 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the audio output device 226 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 125, the configuration of the audio output device 226 in the second control example is an input / output port instead of the input port 305 with respect to the configuration of the audio output device 226 in the first control example (see FIG. 106). The differences are that the 311 is provided, the bus line 312 is provided in place of the bus line 304, and the configuration of the RAM 303 is partially changed.

The input / output port 311 and the bus line 312 are changed so that commands can be output from the MPU 301 of the voice output device 226 to the voice lamp control device 113. That is, the input / output port 311 and the bus line 312 are configured to be capable of communicating in both directions from the voice lamp control device 113 toward the MPU 301 and from the MPU 301 toward the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 303 of the audio output device 226 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 303. As shown in FIG. 126, in the RAM 303 in the second control example, the rearrangement standby flag 303e and the rearrangement type storage area 303f are added to the configuration of the RAM 303 in the first control example (see FIG. 107 (b)). It is different in that it is done. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The rearrangement standby flag 303e is a flag indicating that it is a period from the notification of the rearrangement of the reproduction order of the music data from the voice lamp control device 113 to the actual setting of the rearrangement of the order. The type storage area 303f is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the type notified from the voice lamp control device 113 as the type of music data for which playback should be set first after rearranging the playback order. .. When a voice rearrangement command for notifying the rearrangement of the reproduction order of the music data is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the data corresponding to the type of the music data notified by the command is stored in the rearrangement type storage area 303f. The recombination standby flag 303e is set to ON (see S9402 and S9403 in FIG. 138). When the playback time of the music data being played has elapsed while the rearrangement standby flag 303e is on, the music data corresponding to the data stored in the rearrangement type storage area 303f is stored as the music data to be played next. It is set (see S9313 in FIG. 139).

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 127 to 135, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 127, the main process 9 executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. This main process 9 is a process executed in place of the main process 8 (see FIG. 110) in the first control example.

Of the main processes 9 (see FIG. 127) in the second control example, in each of the processes S4101 to S4111 and S4113 to S4118, the main processes 8 (see FIG. 110) S4101 to S4111 in the first control example, respectively, and The same processing as each processing of S4113 to S4118 is executed.

Further, in the main process 9 (see FIG. 127) in the second control example, when the effect update process of S4111 is completed, the operation detection process 9 is executed instead of the operation detection process (see FIG. 111) in the first control example. (S4151). Similar to the operation detection process (see FIG. 111) in the first control example, the operation detection process 9 (S4151) monitors the operation (pressing) of the operation button 230 and controls the operation corresponding to the case where the operation is detected. It is a process to be executed. The operation detection process 9 (S4151) will be described later with reference to FIG. 128.

When the operation detection process 9 (S4151) is completed, the ending effect for determining whether or not to start the ending effect is next during the period during which the delay for starting the ending effect is set (ending delay period). The start determination process is executed (S4152). The details of the ending effect start determination process (S4152) will be described later with reference to FIG. 129.

When the ending effect start determination process (S4152) is completed, the command determination process 9 is executed (S4153) instead of the command determination process 8 (see FIG. 112) in the first control example, and the process shifts to S4113. In this command determination process 9 (S4153), the hit-related process 9 (S4361) is executed in place of the hit-related process 8 (see FIG. 114) for the command determination process 8 (see FIG. 112) in the first control example. Since they are the same except for the above points, the illustration is omitted.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned operation detection process 9 (S4151) will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the operation detection process 9 (S4151) in the second control example. As described above, the operation detection process 9 (S4151) is a process executed in place of the operation detection process (see FIG. 111) in the first control example, and is an operation similar to the operation detection process (see FIG. 111). This is a process for monitoring the operation (pressing) of the button 230 and executing the corresponding control when the operation is detected.

Of the operation detection processes 9 (see FIG. 128) in the second control example, in each of the processes S5101 to S5106 and S5109 to S5111, the operation detection processes (see FIG. 111) S5101 to S5106 in the first control example, respectively, And the same processing as each processing of S5109 to S5111 is executed. Further, in the operation detection process 9 in the second control example, when it is determined that the operation for the center button CB is detected in the process of S5106 (S5106: Yes), the music corresponding to the current value of the menu position pointer 223ab. Data indicating (items currently arranged in the music selection area of the music selection menu screen) is stored in the music type storage area 223bad (S5121), and the process is transferred to S5109.

By this operation detection process 9 (see FIG. 128), the arrangement of items on the music selection menu screen can be changed according to the operation content for the operation button 230 of the player, and the operation is determined by the player during the music selection period. When (the operation of pressing the center button CB while the music selection menu screen is displayed) is performed, the music (music) arranged in the music selection area is set to be loop-played during the music playback period. be able to.

Next, the details of the ending effect start determination process (S4152) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 129. As described above, the ending effect start determination process (S4152) is a process for determining whether or not to start the ending effect during the ending delay period.

In the ending effect start determination process (see FIG. 129), first, it is determined whether the ending delay flag 223bc is on (S5301), and when it is determined that the ending delay flag 223bc is off (S5301: No), the ending This means that it is not a delay period, and there is no possibility of setting the start of the ending effect, so this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ending delay flag 223bc is on in the processing of S5301 (S5301: Yes), it means that the ending delay period is reached, so whether the ending delay period is ended and the ending effect is started. Execute the process for determining whether or not.

Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb is 0 (S5302). If it is determined in the process of S5302 that the value of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S5302: No), it means that the reproduction of the rust portion of the music is not completed. Therefore, next, it is determined whether the value of the delay period timer 223bf is 4000 or more (S5303). That is, it is determined whether or not 4 seconds or more have elapsed since the start of the ending effect was delayed. If it is determined in the processing of S5303 that the value of the delay period timer 223bf is not 4000 or more (less than 4000) (S5303: No), the ending delay period is continued (playback of the chorus part of the music is continued). Therefore, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S5303 that the value of the delay period timer 223bf is 4000 or more (S5303: Yes), the processing of S5304 to S5306 for setting the start of the ending effect is executed. Further, even when it is determined in the processing of S5302 that the value of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb is 0 (that is, the reproduction time of the rust portion has ended) (S5302: Yes), the processing is shifted to S5304 and the ending effect is produced. Set the start of.

In the process of S5304, the effect type (either normal ending or shortened endings 1 to 3) of the ending effect corresponding to the data stored in the ending type storage area 223be is specified (S5304), and the specified effect type is specified. A display ending command and an audio ending command for executing the ending effect are set (S5305). Then, by setting the ending delay flag 223bc to off, the end of the ending delay period is set (S5306), and this processing is terminated.

By this ending effect start determination process (see FIG. 129), while the ending delay period is set, the playback status of the music (whether or not the reproduction of the rust portion is completed) and the length of the ending delay period are determined. However, the start of the ending effect can be set at an appropriate timing.

Next, the details of the hit-related process 9 (S4361) will be described with reference to FIG. 130. The hit-related process 9 (S4361) is a process executed in place of the hit-related process 8 (see FIG. 114) in the first control example, and is the same as the hit-related process 8 (see FIG. 114). It is a process for executing the control corresponding to the type of the command related to the hit received from 110.

Of the hit-related processes 9 (S4361), the processes S4401 to S4407 and S4409 are the same as the processes S4401 to S4407 and S4409 of the hit-related process 8 (see FIG. 114) in the first control example, respectively. The process is executed. Further, in the hit-related process 9 (S4361) in the second control example, when it is determined in the process of S4407 that the command received from the main control device 110 includes the round number command (S4407: Yes). ), The round number command process for performing control according to the number of rounds indicated by the round number command is executed (S4461), and this process is terminated. The details of this round number command processing (S4461) will be described later with reference to FIG. 131.

Further, in the hit-related process 9 (see FIG. 130) in the second control example, when it is determined that the command received from the main control device 110 does not include the round number command in the process of S4407 (see FIG. 130). S4407: No), then it is determined whether or not an interval command indicating the start of the interval period has been received from the main controller 110 (S4462). If it is determined that an interval command has been received in the processing of S4462 (S4462: Yes), the interval command processing for performing control according to the interval type (what round of the interval is) is executed (S4462: Yes). S4463), this process is terminated. The details of this interval command processing (S4463) will be described later with reference to FIG. 133. On the other hand, in the process of S4462, if it is determined that the interval command is not included in the command received from the main control unit 110 (S4462: No), the process shifts to S4409.

Further, in the hit-related process 9 (see FIG. 130) in the second control example, when it is determined that the ending command is included in the command received from the main control device 110 in the process of S4409 (S4409: Yes), an ending command process for determining whether or not to delay the start of the ending effect is executed (S4464) according to the playback status of the music, and this process is terminated. The details of this ending command processing (S4464) will be described later with reference to FIG. 134.

On the other hand, in the process of S4409, if it is determined that the ending command is not included in the command received from the main control device 110 (S4409: No), then the music command output from the voice control device 226 is received. (S4465), and if it is determined that a music command is being received (S4465: Yes), the playback data type storage area 223ba and the playback time are determined according to the type of music data indicated by the music command. The music command process for updating the timer 223 bb is executed (S4466), and this process is terminated. The details of this music command processing (S4466) will be described later with reference to FIG. 135. If it is determined in the process of S4465 that the music command has not been received (S4465: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned round number command processing (S4461) will be described with reference to FIG. 131. In the round number command processing (S4461), first, a display round number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the round number indicated by the round number command is set (S5401), and then the round indicated by the round number command is set. It is determined whether the number is the number of rounds corresponding to the final round in this jackpot (S5402).

In the process of S5402, when it is determined that the round to be started this time is the final round (S5402: Yes), it is determined that the rearrangement determination timing 2 (timing for determining whether or not to rearrange the playback order of the music) has been reached. Therefore, each process of S5403 to S5405 for determining whether or not to rearrange the reproduction order is executed. Specifically, the specified content of the rearrangement determination table 222bb is compared with the data stored in the playback data type storage area 223ba (S5403), and the type of music data currently being played (playing part) is determined. , It is determined whether the playback order should be rearranged (S5404).

If it is determined in the processing of S5404 that the type of data for the music being played is the type for which the playback order should be rearranged (S5404: Yes), the result of rearranging the playback order (for the music currently being played). A voice recombination command for notifying the type of music data to be set to be played next to the data) is set (S5405), and this process is terminated. The voice recombination command set here is output to the voice output device 226 in the command output process of the main process 9 (see S4102 in FIG. 127). Upon receiving the voice rearrangement command, the MPU 301 of the voice output device 226 stores data indicating the rearrangement result (type of voice data to be reproduced next) notified by the command in the rearrangement type storage area 303f. Then, when the reproduction period of the music data currently being reproduced has elapsed, the reproduction of the rearranged music data is started. As a result, it is possible to more reliably reproduce the most exciting chorus part in the music until the final round is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S5404, if it is determined that the data reproduction order is not a type to be rearranged (S5404: No), the rust portion is reproduced by the end of the final round without rearranging the reproduction order. Since there is a high possibility, the process of S5405 is skipped and the present process is terminated as it is.

Further, in the process of S5402, if it is determined that the number of rounds notified by the round number command is not the final round (S5402: No), then whether or not the notified number of rounds is the first round is determined. Determine (S5406). If it is determined in the process of S5406 that the number of notified rounds is the first round (S5406: Yes), the song selection period setting process for setting the start of the song selection period is executed (S5407), and this process is performed. To finish. The details of this music selection period setting process (S5407) will be described later with reference to FIG. 132. On the other hand, in the process of S5406, if it is determined that the notification is not the first round (S5406: No), the process of S5407 is skipped and the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the details of the above-mentioned music selection period setting process (S5407) will be described. This music selection period setting process is for determining the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen in order to set the music selection period that allows the player to select a music (the music selection menu screen can be displayed). It is the processing of. That is, it is a process corresponding to the state command process (see FIG. 113) in the first control example. Since the music selection period setting process (S5407) and the state command process (see FIG. 113) in the first control example have much in common in the processing contents, the state command process (see FIG. 113) in the first control example is used. The explanation will focus on the differences.

In each of the processes S5203 to S5206 and S5208 to S5213 in the music selection period setting process (see FIG. 132), the processes S5203 to S5206 and S5208 to S5213 of the state command process (see FIG. 113) in the first control example, respectively. The same process as is executed.

Further, in the music selection period setting process (see FIG. 132) in the second control example, when the processing of S5208 is completed, the data corresponding to the item (music) determined by the random lottery by the processing of S5205 is next to the music type. It is stored in the storage area 223bad (S5221), and the process shifts to S5209. As described above, in the second control example, at the start of the music selection period (that is, the first round of the jackpot), the music determined by the random lottery is not played, but the dedicated music for the music selection period is played. Since it is configured, the process of immediately playing back the music determined by the lottery (the process of S5207) is not performed as in the state command process in the first control example.

Further, in the music selection period setting process (see FIG. 132) in the second control example, in the process of S5210, it has already been stored in the storage area corresponding to the value "00H" of the menu position pointer 223ab in the item arrangement storage area 223aa. When it is determined that the item of is specified again (S5210: Yes), a voice command for instructing (notifying) the voice output device 226 to play the music for the music selection period is set (S5222). The process shifts to S5213.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned interval command processing (S4463) will be described with reference to FIG. 133. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing this interval command processing (S4463). In the interval command processing (S4463), first, a display interval command for setting an interval effect according to the completed round is set (S5501), and then the interval command received from the main control unit 110 is the final. It is determined whether or not the command indicates the interval immediately before the round (S5502).

In the processing of S5502, when it is determined that the command indicates the interval immediately before the final round (S5502: Yes), the rearrangement determination timing 1 (timing for determining whether or not to rearrange the playback order of the music) has been set. Therefore, each process of S5503 to S5505 for determining whether or not to rearrange the reproduction order of the music data is executed. Specifically, the specified content of the rearrangement determination table 222bb is compared with the data stored in the playback data type storage area 223ba (S5503), and the type of music data currently being played (playing part) is determined. , It is determined whether the playback order should be rearranged (S5504).

If it is determined in the processing of S5504 that the type of data for the music being played is the type for which the playback order should be rearranged (S5504: Yes), the result of rearranging the playback order (for the music currently being played). A voice recombination command for notifying the type of music data to be set to be played next to the data) is set (S5505), and this process is terminated. The voice recombination command set here is output to the voice output device 226 in the command output process of the main process 9 (see S4102 in FIG. 127). Upon receiving the voice rearrangement command, the MPU 301 of the voice output device 226 stores data indicating the rearrangement result (type of voice data to be reproduced next) notified by the command in the rearrangement type storage area 303f. Then, when the reproduction period of the music data currently being reproduced has elapsed, the reproduction of the rearranged music data is started. As a result, it is possible to more reliably reproduce the most exciting chorus part in the music until the final round is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S5504, if it is determined that the data reproduction order is not a type to be rearranged (S5504: No), the rust portion is reproduced by the end of the final round without rearranging the reproduction order. Since there is a high possibility, the process of S5505 is skipped and the present process is terminated as it is.

Further, in the processing of S5502, if it is determined that the current interval command is not a command indicating the interval immediately before the final round (S5502: No), then the command indicating the interval set after the end of one round is used. It is determined whether or not there is (S5506). In the process of S5506, if it is determined that the command indicates the interval after the end of one round (S5506: Yes), the music corresponding to the data stored in the music type storage area 223db is instructed to play (notification). A selected music command for voice is set (S5507), and 1 is added to each data in the music selection count storage area 223ac corresponding to the music selection count of the music set to be played this time (S5508). Then, the non-display of the music selection menu screen is set, and both the menu display flag 223ae and the music selection permission flag 223ad are set to off (S5509) to end this process. On the other hand, in the processing of S5506, if it is determined that the current interval command is not a command indicating the interval after the end of the first round (S5506: No), each processing of S5507 to S5509 is skipped. This process ends as it is.

Next, the details of the ending command processing (S4464) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 134. As described above, this ending command process (S4464) is a process for determining whether or not to delay the start of the ending effect according to the reproduction status of the music.

In the ending command processing (see FIG. 134), first, the data stored in the reproduction data type storage area 223ba (that is, the data corresponding to the type of the music data currently being reproduced) was read (S5601) and read out. It is determined whether the data corresponds to the rust portion (that is, whether the rust portion is being reproduced) (S5602). In the process of S5602, if it is determined that the data corresponding to the rust portion has been read (S5602: Yes), each process of S5603 to S5605 for delaying the start of the ending effect and lengthening the reproduction time of the rust portion. To execute. Specifically, from the ending effect selection table 222bc (see FIG. 124), the effect type of the ending effect corresponding to the range to which the value of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb belongs is selected (S5603).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 124, when the value of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb is in the range of 1000 or less (that is, the remaining reproduction time of the rust portion at the end of the final round is 1 second or less). As the type of ending effect, a normal ending with an effect time of 4 seconds is selected, and the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is greater than 1000 and 2000 or less (that is, the remaining reproduction of the rust portion at the end of the final round). If the time is longer than 1 second and is within the range of 2 seconds or less), select the shortened ending 1 with an effect time of 3 seconds as the type of ending effect, and the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is larger than 2000. And, if it is in the range of 3000 or less (that is, the remaining playback time of the rust portion at the end of the final round is longer than 2 seconds and 3 seconds or less), the effect time is set to 2 as the type of ending effect. If the shortened ending 2 per second is selected and the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is in the range larger than 3000 (that is, the remaining playback time of the rust portion at the end of the final round is longer than 3 seconds), the ending effect is produced. As the type of, the shortened ending 3 with an effect time of 1 second is selected (see FIG. 124).

When the processing of S5603 is completed, next, the data corresponding to the ending effect selected in the processing of S5603 is stored in the ending type storage area 223be (S5604), the ending delay flag 223bc is set to ON (S5605), and the present End the process.

By executing each of these processes S5603 to S5605, the start timing of the ending effect can be delayed, and the type of the ending effect to be executed after the ending delay period is set in the ending type storage area 223be in advance. Can be done. As a result, the ending effect of an appropriate effect time (effect mode) is set according to the length of the period from the start of the ending period to the end of the reproduction (or the termination of the reproduction) of the rust portion. be able to. In addition, the chorus part, which is the most exciting part of the music, can be heard by the player for a longer time.

In the process of S5602, if it is determined that the data read from the reproduction data type storage area 223ba is the data corresponding to the part other than the rust portion (S5602: No), it is not necessary to delay the start timing of the ending effect. , A display ending command corresponding to the normal ending effect is set (S5606), and an audio ending command indicating a music corresponding to the normal ending effect is set (S5607), and this process is terminated. As a result, if a part other than the chorus portion is played at the start of the ending period (at the end of the final round), the normal ending effect can be executed at the same time as the start of the ending period.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned music command processing (S4466) will be described with reference to FIG. 135. In this music command processing (S4466), first, data indicating the type of music data (music data for which playback is set in the music output device 226) indicated by the music command output from the voice output device 226 is used as the playback data type. It is stored in the storage area 223ba (S5701). Then, the timer value corresponding to the type of the notified music data is set in the remaining playback time timer 223bb (S5702), and this processing is terminated.

By executing this music command processing (S4466), the type of music data (playing part) being played by the voice output device 226 and the playback time can be easily grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side. be able to.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio output device in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139, various control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the second control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 136, the main process 9 executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 115 (a)) in the first control example will be described in the second control example. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the main process 9.

Of the main processes 9 (see FIG. 136) in the second control example, each process of 9003 to S9007 is the same as each process of S9003 to S9007 of the main process (see FIG. 115 (a)) in the first control example. The process is executed. Further, in the main process 9 (see FIG. 136) in the second control example, when the process is started, first, various commands for the voice lamp control device 113 set by each process of S9012 and S9013 are voiced. A command output process for transmitting to the lamp control device 113 is executed (S9011).

Next, the command determination process 9 is executed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 116) in the first control example (S9012). This command determination process 9 (S9012) is a process for executing control according to the type of various commands received from the voice lamp control device 113, similarly to the command determination process (see FIG. 116) in the first control example. be. The details of this command determination process 9 (S9012) will be described later with reference to FIG. 137.

When the processing of S9012 is completed, the voice setting processing 9 is executed (S9013) instead of the voice setting processing (see FIG. 117) in the first control example, and the processing is transferred to S9003. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 139, but the audio setting process 9 (S9013) reproduces audio data such as music data, as in the audio setting process (see FIG. 117) in the first control example. And it is a process for setting the switching of music data.

Next, the details of the command determination process 9 (S9012) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 137. As described above, the command determination process 9 (S9012) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 116) in the first control example.

Of the command determination processes 9 (see FIG. 137) in the second control example, each process of S9201 to SS9214 is the same as each process of S9201 to SS9214 of the command determination process (see FIG. 116) in the first control example. The process is executed. Further, in the command determination process 9 (see FIG. 137) in the second control example, it is determined that the voice lottery music command is not included in the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S9209. In the case (S9209: No), then it is determined whether or not the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 includes a command related to the music being hit (S9221).

If it is determined in the processing of S9221 that a command related to the music in the jackpot is included (S9221: Yes), the jackpot music-related processing for executing the control according to the type of the command is executed (S9221: Yes). S9222), this process is terminated. The details of this jackpot music-related processing (S9222) will be described later with reference to FIG. 138. Further, in the process of S9221, if it is determined that the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 does not include the command related to the music in the jackpot (S9221: No), the process is shifted to S9214. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the details of the above-mentioned jackpot music-related processing (S9222) will be described. In this jackpot music-related process (S9222), first, it is determined whether the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 includes the voice recombination command (S9401), and the voice recombination command is included. (S9401: Yes), the data in the recombination type storage area 303f is updated according to the recombination content (the type of music data for which playback should be set next) notified by the command (S9402). Next, by setting the rearrangement standby flag 303e to on, it is shown that the music data to be played next to the music data currently being played is rearranged (variable from the playback order in the value order of the music pointer 303b). (S9403), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S9401, when it is determined that the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 does not include the voice recombination command (S9401: No), then the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is received. It is determined whether the ending command for voice is included in the command (S9404).

If it is determined in the process of S9404 that the ending command for voice is included (S9404: Yes), the playback of the currently playing song is stopped (S9405), and the ending of the type notified by the ending command for voice is stopped. Set the playback of the music for use (S9406), and end this process. On the other hand, in the process of S9404, if it is determined that the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 does not include the voice ending command (S9404: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned voice setting process 9 (S9013) will be described with reference to FIG. 139. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the voice setting process 9 (S9013). As described above, the voice setting process 9 (S9013) is a process executed in place of the voice setting process (see FIG. 117) in the first control example.

Of the voice setting processes 9 (see FIG. 139) in the second control example, each process of S9302 to S9308 is the same as each process of S9302 to S9308 of the voice setting process (see FIG. 117) in the first control example, respectively. The process is executed. Further, when the voice setting process 9 (see FIG. 139) in the second control example is started, it is first determined whether or not the music (any of music A to music Z) in the jackpot is being played. (S9311), if the music being hit is being played (S9311: Yes), the process shifts to S9302. On the other hand, in the process of S9311, if it is determined that the music being hit is not being played (S9311: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Further, in the audio setting process 9 (see FIG. 139) in the second control example, when it is determined in the process of S9302 that it is the reproduction end timing of the music data being reproduced (S9302: Yes), then the rearrangement is performed. It is determined whether or not the standby flag 303e is on (S9312). If it is determined in the processing of S9312 that the recombination standby flag 303e is on (S9312: Yes), the playback order is different from the playback order predetermined for each song (order specified by the voice lamp control device 113). ), It is necessary to set the reproduction of the music data, so the value corresponding to the data stored in the rearrangement type storage area 303f is updated by overwriting the value of the music pointer 303b (S9313), and the process is performed. To S9307. This makes it possible to set the reproduction of the music data after the rearrangement.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9312 that the recombination standby flag 303e is off (S9312: No), the process is shifted to S9303 and the reproduction in the order of the value of the music pointer 303b is set.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example, the music in the jackpot can be selected by the player. Then, the playback order of the music data is dynamically rearranged according to the progress of the jackpot so that the chorus part is reproduced as much as possible until the final round is completed. That is, the type of music data (A Melo 1, B melody 1, chorus 1, etc.) is discriminated, and if the part far from the chorus part is played, the playback order of the data for each song constituting the song data group is rearranged and then played. The structure is such that the part is changed so that it becomes a part close to the rust part. As a result, by the end of the jackpot, the player can more surely hear the chorus part, which is the most exciting part of the music.

Here, as a method for reproducing the chorus part in the final round of the jackpot, a method of setting the reproduction of the music data corresponding to the chorus portion at the start of the final round can be considered regardless of the progress of the music. .. However, in this method, there is a possibility that the connection of the music becomes unnatural before and after the start of the final round (that is, before and after switching to the reproduction of the chorus portion). That is, there is a high possibility that the reproduction of the rust portion will suddenly start from the middle of the other part. Therefore, in this method, the player may feel uncomfortable with the music being played, and may suspect that the pachinko machine 10 is out of order. That is, it becomes doubtful whether the pachinko machine 10 is operating normally, and there is a possibility that the game may cause anxiety. On the other hand, in this second control example, the playback order of the music data is rearranged (variable) in part units (melody (musical composition) delimiter units), so that when the playback order is rearranged, a feeling of strangeness is felt. Music can be played with a small amount of audio. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game during the big hit with confidence.

Further, in the second control example, when the chorus portion (chorus 1, chorus 2, etc.) is being reproduced at the end of the final round of the jackpot, the start timing of the ending effect is delayed to make the chorus portion longer. It is configured to continue the reproduction of. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the most exciting chorus part in the music from being forcibly ended by the end of the big hit. As a result, the chorus portion can be more entertained by the player, so that the player's interest in the game during the jackpot can be improved.

In this second control example, when the chorus part ends in the middle of the final round of the jackpot, the music is played in the order of the music data without rearranging the playback order, but this is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, when the reproduction of the chorus portion is completed in the final round, the reproduction order of the music data may be rearranged again so that the chorus portion is repeatedly reproduced. In this case, the music data for which the reproduction has been completed may be reproduced again, or a rust portion different from the rust portion whose reproduction has been completed may be reproduced (for example, when the reproduction of one rust portion is completed, the reproduction is completed. The reproduction of the rust 2 portion is continuously set, and when the reproduction of the rust 2 portion is completed, the reproduction of the rust 1 portion is set). With this configuration, in the final round, the longer and most exciting chorus part in the music can be played for a longer time, so that the player's interest in the final round can be further improved. In addition, instead of simply repeatedly playing the rust part, the end timing of the rust part when the rust part is repeatedly played is predicted in advance from the progress of the final round, etc., and is within the round period of the final round. The rust portion may be repeated only when the prediction result is highly probable. With this configuration, the ending period starts immediately after the repetition of the rust portion is set, and it is possible to prevent the rust portion from being insufficiently heard and the reproduction of the rust portion being interrupted.

In this second control example, at the start of the interval period immediately before the final round of the jackpot and at the start of the final round, it is configured to determine whether or not to rearrange the playback order of the music data. Not limited. The number and timing of determination as to whether or not to rearrange the reproduction order can be arbitrarily determined.

In this second control example, the playback order of the music data is rearranged so that the chorus part is played longer during the final round, but the playback order is not limited to this, and the round in which the chorus part is played is not limited to this. It can be set arbitrarily.

In the second control example, the reproduction order of the music data is rearranged in part units, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rearrangement may be performed in any unit. By rearranging in finer units than in part units, the rearrangement can be set more finely. In addition, the composition of the music data group can be simplified by rearranging the data in units that are rougher than the parts.

In this second control example, when it is decided to rearrange the music data, the parts in the order different from the original playback order are reproduced after the reproduction time of the part being reproduced (music data) has elapsed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the rearrangement is decided, the rearranged music data may be immediately reproduced. With this configuration, it is necessary to provide the audio output device 226 with a configuration (that is, a recombination type storage area 303f) for holding the type of music data after recombination until the timing of recombination. Since it disappears, the storage capacity can be reduced. Further, it may be more simply configured to start the reproduction of the chorus portion at the start of the final round of the jackpot, regardless of the reproduction position of the music. With such a configuration, the processing can be further simplified, so that the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 and the voice output device 226 can be reduced.

In the second control example, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not the music data can be rearranged, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the MPU 301 of the voice output device 226 may execute the configuration. In this case, the voice lamp control device 113 may be configured to notify the voice output device 226 only that the recombination determination timing has been reached. Then, the recombination determination table 222bb provided in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 was moved to the audio output device 226, and the audio lamp control device 113 notified the audio output device 226 that the recombination determination timing had come. Based on this, the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 may be configured to determine whether or not to rearrange the reproduction order of the music data.

In this second control example, the playback order of the music data can be rearranged according to the progress of the jackpot game and the music playback position, but the chorus part is played during the final round. The method for increasing the possibility of being done is not limited to this. For example, the playback speed of the music may be changed according to the progress of the game and the playback position of the music. That is, for example, when the current playback position and the chorus portion are far (two or more parts apart) at the rearrangement determination timing 1, the music is played at a faster playback speed than usual (for example, until the chorus portion is played back). It can be played at 1.5x speed), and if it is close (1 part or less), the music can be played at a slower playback speed (for example, 0.5x speed) until the chorus part is played. good.

In this second control example, both the progress status of the jackpot and the progress status of the music are discriminated, and whether or not the playback order of the music data is changed (recombined) is determined. It may be configured to determine only the progress status (whether or not the start timing of the final round has been reached) and determine whether or not to start the reproduction of the music data corresponding to the specific part (chorus part). Also, this control is not limited to the final round. For example, in a pachinko machine 10 having a configuration in which one song is loop-played during a jackpot and the outro portion of the song is played as an ending effect sound during the ending period, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the first round of the jackpot. However, if it is the start timing of the first round, the data corresponding to the intro portion may be reproduced (reproduced from the beginning of the music) regardless of the situation of the music. Further, it may be configured to determine whether or not it is the start timing of the ending period, and if it is the start timing of the ending period, the data to be reproduced may be changed to the music data corresponding to the outro portion regardless of the situation of the music. With this configuration, the song being produced at the ending can be set to the song in the outro part that corresponds to the song that was playing during the jackpot, so it is unified into the song that is played during the jackpot and during the ending production. You can give it a feeling. Further, this control can be applied even when a music dedicated to the ending is provided. That is, in the big hit, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the ending period, and if it is the start timing of the ending period, the music data corresponding to the dedicated music for the ending production is reproduced regardless of the situation of the music. It may be configured to start.

In the second control example, the progress status (playback position) of the music is determined at the start timing of the ending period, and if a specific playback range (rust portion) is being played, the start of the ending effect is delayed. Therefore, the specific reproduction range is configured to be reproducible for a longer period of time, but the control can be applied not only at the start of the ending period. It can be applied if the condition for playing another song is satisfied during the playback of the music. For example, the music is loop-played during the above-mentioned probability change state, and the end timing of the probability change state is set. In this case, if the rust portion is being reproduced, the start of the effect indicating that the probabilistic state has ended may be delayed so that the rust portion is reproduced for a longer period of time. Further, a known time measuring device such as RTC (Real Time Clock) is included in the configuration, and when the time measured by the time measuring device reaches a predetermined time, a specific effect different from the usual one (so-called island interlocking effect) can be executed. In a gaming machine having various specifications, the control in the second control example may be applied at the start of the island interlocking effect. Specifically, when the chorus part (specific playback range) of the music is being played at the start timing of the specific effect, the chorus part (specific playback range) is delayed by delaying the start timing of the specific effect. It may be configured to be played for a longer time. Further, the target to which this control can be applied is not limited to the effect accompanied by the sound (the effect of playing a musical piece). It can also be applied to the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, for example, when the time measured by the time measuring device reaches a predetermined time during the execution of the variation display, the island interlocking effect is started according to the progress status (effect mode) of the variation effect being executed. It may be configured to determine whether or not to delay. Specifically, for example, during the execution of the super reach effect, which has a relatively high expectation of a big hit, the island-linked effect may be suppressed (delayed) until the super reach effect is completed. good. With this configuration, the result of the variable display effect can be appropriately notified to the player. Further, for example, as a variable display effect or an effect during a big hit, an effect that encourages the operation of a predetermined operation button is executed, and the operation is detected or the operation is switched to a different effect mode when the operation valid period elapses. It may be applied to a gaming machine capable of performing the effect. That is, during the operation valid period, even if the operation for the operation button is detected, the switching of the effect mode is delayed until the effect during the operation valid period ends (the effect mode until the operation valid period ends). May be configured (to prevent the variable from changing).

In the second control example, if the rust portion is being reproduced at the start of the ending period, the start timing of the ending effect is delayed so that the rust portion is reproduced for a longer time, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the rust portion is being reproduced at the start timing of the ending period, the display mode for the ending effect may be started as the display mode, and the rust portion may be continuously reproduced. With this configuration, it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of display modes according to the remaining ending period as the ending effect, so that the number of display data tables for executing the ending effect can be reduced. Can be done. Therefore, the storage capacity of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

In this second control example, when the chorus portion is being reproduced at the start of the ending period, the start of the ending effect is delayed for a maximum of 4 seconds, and after the delay period elapses, it ends within the range of the remaining ending period. It was configured to execute the ending effect of the length to be performed, but it is not limited to this. For example, the ending effect that is started after the delay period has elapsed may have the same content as the ending effect that is started without delay (normal ending effect). That is, the length until the end of the ending period may be extended according to the delay period. With this configuration, it is not necessary to provide a plurality of types having different effect periods as the effect mode of the ending effect, so that the number of display data tables for executing the ending effect can be reduced. Therefore, the storage capacity of the display control device 114 can be reduced. Further, instead of extending the ending period, only the ending effect may be continued even after the ending period ends. In this case, the variation display based on the reserved ball held at the end of the jackpot is executed in a mode that is less conspicuous than the ending effect (for example, reduced to the lower right of the third symbol display device 81). May be. Even in this configuration, the number of display data tables for executing the ending effect can be reduced, so that the storage capacity of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

<Third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 to 150. In the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example described above, the player can select any music (voice mode) as the music (type of voice production) to be played (executed) during the jackpot. Then, in the final round of the jackpot, it is determined whether or not to switch the reproduction position of the music (rearrange the reproduction order of the music data) at a predetermined timing in the jackpot so that the chorus part is more likely to be reproduced. Was configured to execute.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example, a menu item called "random music selection" is added in which music (a mode of voice production) is randomly selected on the music selection menu screen, and "random music selection" is a player. If it is determined by, the music to be played after the end of the first round (music selection period) is determined by a predetermined lottery. Further, in the "random music selection", the music (voice production) that is not displayed as an item on the music selection menu screen can be determined. More specifically, when "random song selection" is decided in the probability change jackpot, "music a" is added to "music A" to "music Z" displayed on the music selection menu screen by lottery. It is configured to determine the music to be played during the jackpot. As a result, it is possible to select "random music selection" in the expectation that "music a" that cannot be normally listened to is determined.

Further, in the third control example, as a kind of effect executed during the jackpot, the number of rounds of the jackpot is performed during a predetermined period (for example, until the end of the 5th round or the 10th round) from the start of the jackpot. Is notified less than the original number of rounds, and when a predetermined period has elapsed, an effect of notifying the original number of rounds can be selected. By configuring the effect of notifying this number of rounds to be less than the original number of rounds (pseudo-small round effect), when a relatively small number of rounds is notified at the start of the jackpot (that is, the first When 5 rounds are notified by the jackpot of 1 special symbol, or 10 rounds are notified by the jackpot of the 2nd special symbol, see FIG. 10 (a)), more rounds after a predetermined period has elapsed. In the expectation that the number (8 rounds or 16 rounds) will be notified, the game can be played until the predetermined period elapses. Along with this, in the third control example, even in the pseudo final round during the execution of the pseudo small round effect, the chorus part is reproduced by rearranging the reproduction order of the music as in the original final round. It is configured to be. This makes it difficult to distinguish between the pseudo final round and the original final round from the parts of the music played during the pseudo final round. Therefore, until the pseudo-small round effect is completed (until a predetermined period elapses), it is possible to continue to have a sense of expectation that a larger number of rounds will be notified.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. And the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, and the audio output device 226. The various processes executed by the above are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the music selection menu screen in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 (a) and 140 (b). FIG. 140 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the music area MR when the music selection menu screen is first displayed after the music selection period of the jackpot is started. As shown in FIG. 140 (a), on the music selection menu screen in the third control example, a plurality of display areas (items RA1 to RA3, PA1, PA2) on which music names that can be selected by the player are displayed are arranged. In addition to the display area), a display area in which the item OA "random music selection" is displayed is displayed on the right side of the front view with respect to a plurality of images in which the music name is displayed. The item OA "random music selection" is an item in which one music is randomly selected by lottery from the music (music A to Z and music a) set in the pachinko machine 10.

The item OA "random song selection" is set to the appearance mode (similar to the item arranged in the display area other than the song selection area) when the song selection menu screen is first displayed. Further, a right image RG having a substantially triangular shape pointing to the right is displayed between the plurality of images on which the music name is displayed and the item OA. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that "random music selection" can be selected by pressing (operating) the right button RB on the operation button 230.

FIG. 140 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode of the music area MR when the player operates (presses) the right button RB while the music selection menu screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 140 (b), when the player presses the right button RB (when it is detected that the output of the signal corresponding to the right button RB becomes H), the item RA1 (when it is detected that the output of the signal corresponding to the right button RB becomes H) is arranged in the music selection area. The image) in which the characters "music A" are displayed is switched to the appearance mode in which the light is turned off, and the item OA is switched to the appearance mode in which the item OA is turned on. That is, the appearance of the item PA1 arranged in the music selection area and the appearance of the item OA are interchanged. Further, the right image RG is an aspect of the appearance of light emission. From these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the "random song selection" is determined when the center button CB is pressed.

When "random music selection" is determined, the most significant bit of the menu position pointer 223ab composed of 1 byte (8 bits) is set to on (1). As described above, in the first control example and the second control example, when the initial arrangement of the menu is determined, the value range of the menu position pointer 223ab is from "00H" (0000000000B) to "19H" (00011001B). "Music A" to "Music Z" are associated one by one, and the corresponding relationship is stored in the item arrangement storage area 223aa. In other words, the lower 5 bits of the menu position pointer 223ab make it possible to specify the item arranged in the music selection area, and the upper 3 bits are empty bits. In the third control example, one of the empty bits (for example, the most significant bit) is defined as a bit corresponding to "random music selection". With this configuration, even if "random song selection" is selected, the items (music) that were placed in the song selection area immediately before "random song selection" is selected can be displayed on the menu position pointer 223ab. It can be easily discriminated from the lower 5 bits of. That is, even if the player presses the right button RB to select "random song selection" and then presses the left button LB again, the state immediately before selecting "random song selection" (display mode of the song selection menu screen). ) Can be easily returned. In addition, when the center button CB is pressed by the player while the song selection menu screen is displayed (the menu display flag 223ae is on), the state of the most significant bit is simply checked and "random" is easily obtained. It is possible to identify whether or not "selection of music" has been decided.

Although the details will be described later, in the third control example, the player selects "random music selection" (the operation on the center button CB is detected while the item OA is in the lit appearance). In this case, if a specific condition is met (for example, if the running jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot), a special song that is not displayed as an item in the song selection menu screen (cannot be selected by the player). (That is, one song is determined by lottery from a plurality of songs (songs A to Z, and song a) including the song a). This makes it possible for a player who wants to listen to a special song to positively select "random music selection".

Next, with reference to FIGS. 141 (a) and 141 (b), the above-mentioned pseudo-small round effect (effect that makes the number of rounds appear to be smaller than the actual number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type) is set. An example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the above will be described. In FIGS. 141 (a) and 141 (b), when the jackpot A with 8 rounds is won and the pseudo small round effect is set, the number of rounds (5 rounds) smaller than the actual number is notified. Will be explained as an example.

FIG. 141 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode of a pseudo final round display mode (fifth round) during execution of a pseudo small round effect. As shown in FIG. 141 (a), in the third control example, during the jackpot, the progress of the jackpot (the current number of rounds and the maximum number of rounds) with respect to the small area Ds1 in the third symbol display device 81. Characters (characters "5/5 round") indicating (contrast) are displayed. In addition, below the letters indicating the progress of the jackpot, the letters indicating the acquisition status of the prize balls (comparison between the number of prize balls paid out so far and the maximum number of prize balls paid out in this big hit). (That is, the characters "500/500 GET") are displayed. FIG. 141 (a) shows the time when it is detected that a specified number (that is, 10) of game balls have entered the left specific winning opening 650 in the pseudo final round (fifth round) (that is, that is). An example of the display mode (when the number of prize balls paid out reaches 500) is shown, and the display of the number of prize balls in the small area Ds1 is updated from "490/500 GET" to "500/500 GET". It shows the moment when it was done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 141 (a), an image imitating a treasure box is displayed in the main display area Dm. This suggests that the player can obtain a large amount of prize balls (profit). Further, in the music area MR, an image showing the music name of the music selected by the player during the music selection period and currently being played is displayed. FIG. 141 (a) illustrates a case where the player selects “musical piece Z” during the music selection period, and the music area MR is an item (image) with the character “musical piece Z”. Is displayed.

FIG. 141 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode immediately after the pseudo final round is completed (that is, immediately after the display mode of FIG. 141 (a)) in the jackpot set with the pseudo small round effect. Is. When the pseudo final round in the pseudo small round effect is completed, the effect of notifying the original number of rounds is executed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 141 (b), the characters displayed in the small area Ds1 are updated with the characters indicating the original maximum number of rounds and the original maximum number of prize balls. That is, the character "5/5 round" displayed on the upper side in the small area Ds1 is updated to the character "5/8 round", and "500 /" displayed on the lower side in the small area Ds1. The characters "500 GET" are updated to the characters "500/800 GET". In addition, the effect that the boy character 710 displayed in the small area Ds2 utters the line "Still more !!" is executed. With these effect modes, the player can easily recognize that the jackpot does not end in 5 rounds but continues up to 8 rounds (the pseudo small round effect was executed). Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that more prize balls can be obtained, and thus it is possible to improve the interest of the player. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of the explanation, an effect of notifying that the jackpot will continue without ending, which is executed based on the completion of the pseudo final round in the pseudo small round (see FIG. 141 (b)). This is called "continuous production".

Although details will be described later, in the third control example, as in the second control example, a predetermined time during the jackpot is set so that the chorus part of the music is more likely to be reproduced in the final round of the jackpot. At the timing (at the start of the interval immediately before the final round and at the start of the final round), it is configured to determine whether or not to rearrange the playback order of the music data. In addition, in this third control example, even in the pseudo final round during the execution of the pseudo small round effect, there is a possibility that the chorus part is reproduced by rearranging the playback order of the music as in the original final round. It is configured to be controlled so that it is high. This makes it difficult to distinguish between the pseudo final round and the original final round from the parts of the music played during the pseudo final round. Therefore, until the pseudo-small round effect is completed (until a predetermined period elapses), it is possible to continue to have a sense of expectation that a larger number of rounds will be notified.

<Electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 142 (a). FIG. 142 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 142 (a), the ROM 222 in the third embodiment has a random music selection table 222ca and a pseudo small round lottery table with respect to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the second control example (see FIG. 122 (a)). It differs from 222cc in that it is added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the second control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The random music selection table 222ca is a data table referred to for determining one music when the player selects "random music selection". The details of this random music selection table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. 143.

FIG. 143 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the random music selection table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 143, in the random music selection table 222ca, the correspondence between the music type and the value of the music lottery counter 223ca informs the situation when the lottery is executed (the type of the winning jackpot and the jackpot). It is specified for each type of symbol). Here, the music lottery counter 223ca is provided to select one music from the random music selection table 222ca, and is a random number counter whose value is updated in the range of "0 to 259".

As shown in FIG. 143, in the variation pattern effect, it is notified by an effect mode in which the third symbols with odd numbers are aligned (that is, an effect mode selected at a rate of 40% only in the case of a probability variation jackpot). In the case of a probable change jackpot (probability change jackpot of odd number symbol notification), the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is in the range of "0 to 8" (the range of 9 values of the music lottery counter 223ca) and "music A". Is specified in association with each other (see 222ca1 in FIG. 143). Further, the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is defined in association with the range of "9 to 17" for "music B" (see 222ca2 in FIG. 143), and the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is "18 to 26". "Music C" is defined in association with the range (see 222ca3 in FIG. 143). Although the illustration is omitted, each music type of "music D" to "music Z" is defined in association with the range of nine values of the music lottery counter 223ca. Of the 260 values that can be taken by the music lottery counter 223ca, the values of nine music lottery counters 223ca are defined in association with each music type of "music A" to "music Z". , It becomes a probable change jackpot of odd number symbol notification, and when "random music selection" is selected during the music selection period, the ratio of "music A" to "music Z" being determined is about 3.5% (9/260) respectively. ).

Further, as shown in FIG. 143, in the situation where the probability variation big hit of the probability variation symbol notification is obtained, the special music that is not displayed on the music selection menu screen for the range of the music lottery counter 223ca value of "234 to 259". "Music a" is defined in association with each other. Of the 260 values that can be taken by the music lottery counter 223ca, the value associated with "music a" is 26 of "234 to 259". When "random music selection" is selected by a person, the ratio (probability) at which "music a" is determined is 10% (26/260) (see 222ca27 in FIG. 143).

On the other hand, in the variation pattern production, the production mode in which the third symbols with even numbers are aligned (that is, the probability variation jackpot is selected at a rate of 60%, while the normal jackpot is 100%. In the case of the probability variation jackpot (probability variation jackpot of even-numbered symbol notification) notified by the effect mode selected by the ratio), the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is in the range of "0 to 6" (music) as shown in FIG. 143. "Music A" is defined in association with the lottery counter (range of 7 values of 223ca) (see 222ca1 in FIG. 143). Further, the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is defined in association with the range of "7 to 13" for "music B" (see 222ca2 in FIG. 143), and the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is "14 to 20". "Music C" is defined in association with the range (see 222ca3 in FIG. 143). Although the illustration is omitted, each music type of "music D" to "music Z" is defined in association with the range of seven values of the music lottery counter 223ca. Of the 260 values that the music lottery counter 223ca can take, the values of the seven music lottery counters 223ca are defined in association with each music type of "music A" to "music Z". , It becomes a probable change jackpot of even-numbered symbol notification, and when "random music selection" is selected during the music selection period, the ratio of "music A" to "music Z" being determined is about 2.7% (7/260), respectively. ).

Further, as shown in FIG. 143, in the situation where the even-numbered symbol notification is a probable change jackpot, a special music that is not displayed on the music selection menu screen for the range of the music lottery counter 223ca value of "182 to 259". "Music a" is defined in association with each other. Of the 260 values that the music lottery counter 223ca can take, the value associated with "music a" is 78, which is "182 to 259". When "random music selection" is selected by a person, the ratio (probability) at which "music a" is determined is 30% (78/260) (see 222ca27 in FIG. 143). That is, the ratio of "music a" selected when "random music selection" is selected is higher in the even-numbered symbol notification probability variation jackpot than in the odd-numbered symbol notification probability variation jackpot. Therefore, for a player who wants to listen to (play) "music a", when a variable display with even-numbered third symbols is executed and a big hit is notified, the player is more positive. "Random song selection" can be selected.

As shown in FIG. 143, for a normal jackpot, "music A" corresponds to the range where the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is "0 to 9" (the range of 10 values of the music lottery counter 223ca). It is specified with the addition (see 222ca1 in FIG. 143). Further, "music B" is defined in association with the range of "10 to 19" in the value of the music lottery counter 223ca (see 222ca2 in FIG. 143), and the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is "20 to 29". "Music C" is defined in association with the range (see 222ca3 in FIG. 143). Although the illustration is omitted, each music type of "music D" to "music Z" is defined in association with the range of 10 values of the music lottery counter 223ca. Of the 260 values that can be taken by the music lottery counter 223ca, the values of 10 music lottery counters 223ca are defined in association with each music type of "music A" to "music Z". , Usually, it is a big hit, and when "random music selection" is selected during the music selection period, the ratio of "music A" to "music Z" determined is about 3.8% (10/260), respectively. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot, the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is not associated with the special music "music a" (see 222ca27 in FIG. 143). That is, in the case of a normal big hit, there is no possibility that "music a" is determined (reproduced) even if "random music selection" is selected. In other words, when "random music selection" is selected and "music a" is played, the probability variation jackpot is confirmed. Therefore, in particular, when a big hit is made by the variable display (variable effect) in which the third symbol with an even number is aligned (whether it is a probable variable big hit or a normal big hit), even a little Actively "random song selection" for players who want to know whether or not to shift to the probabilistic state quickly (that is, before confirming the result of the effect of notifying whether or not to shift to the probabilistic state). Can be selected. Further, when the "musical piece a" is played as expected by the player, the player can be pleased. Furthermore, even if "music a" is not played, it is possible to continue to have a sense of expectation for the probabilistic state until the effect of notifying whether or not to shift to the probable change state is executed during the jackpot. can.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 142 (a). The pseudo small round lottery table 222cc is a data table referred to for determining (lottery) whether or not to execute the pseudo small round effect. The lottery for whether or not to execute the pseudo small round effect using the pseudo small round lottery table 222cc is executed when the opening command corresponding to the big hit A or the big hit D is received (see S5833 in FIG. 147). .. Although not shown, the pseudo small round lottery table 222cc is set so that when the jackpot A or the jackpot D is reached, the execution of the pseudo small round effect is determined at a rate of 50%.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 142 (b). FIG. 142 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 142 (b), the RAM 223 in the third control example has a music lottery counter 223ca and a jackpot status storage for the configuration of the RAM 223 in the second control example described above (see FIG. 122 (b)). The difference is that the area 223cc and the pseudo final R storage area 223cc are added.

The music lottery counter 223ca is a counter used for selecting (determining) one music from the above-mentioned random music selection table 222ca, and the value is updated in the range of "0 to 259". When "random music selection" is determined by the player during the music selection period, the music corresponding to the value of the music lottery counter 223ca is selected from the random music selection table 222ca.

The jackpot status storage area 223cc is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the types of jackpots and the symbols aligned by the variable effect executed when the jackpot is won. The jackpot status storage area 223cc is composed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and if "01H" is stored as data, it indicates that it is a probability variation jackpot for odd-numbered symbol notification. Further, if "02H" is stored, it indicates that it is a probabilistic jackpot for even-numbered symbol notification, and if "03H" is stored, it indicates that it is a normal jackpot for even-numbered symbol notification. On the other hand, if "00H" is stored, it indicates that the jackpot has not been won. In this jackpot status storage area 223cc, when the execution of the variable effect for notifying the jackpot is set, the type of the winning jackpot and the type of the symbol for notifying the jackpot (the third symbol with an odd number are aligned). Or, depending on whether the third symbol with an even number is aligned), the corresponding data is stored (see S4522 in FIG. 150). When the player selects (determines) "random music selection" during the music selection period, the regulation contents corresponding to the data stored in the jackpot status storage area 223cc in the random music selection table 222ca and the music lottery counter 223ca Is compared with and one song to be played during the jackpot is determined.

The pseudo final R storage area 223cc is a storage area in which data indicating a pseudo final round is stored when a pseudo small round effect is determined. In this pseudo final R storage area 223cc, when a pseudo small round effect is determined as an 8 round jackpot (big hit A), the number of rounds is relatively large among the jackpots of the first special symbol. While data corresponding to (the number of rounds of small jackpots B and C) is set (see S5836 in FIG. 147), when the jackpot is 16 rounds (big hit D) and a pseudo small round effect is determined, 10 rounds are set. (That is, the number of rounds of the jackpots E and F, which has a relatively small number of rounds among the jackpots of the second special symbol), is set (see S5837 in FIG. 147). In the jackpot, at the start of a new interval period or the start of a new round, it is the start timing of the interval period immediately before the pseudo final round according to the data stored in the pseudo final R storage area 223cc. It is determined whether it is the start timing of the pseudo final round. That is, it is determined whether or not it is the timing for determining the rearrangement of the music.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 144 to 150, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. Although not shown, in the third control example, the main process 10 is executed instead of the main process 9 (see FIG. 127) in the second control example. In the main process 10, the operation detection process 10 (S4161) is executed in place of the operation detection process 9 (S4151, see FIG. 128) with respect to the main process 9 (see FIG. 127) in the second control example. Only the point where the command determination process 10 (S4165) is executed instead of the command determination process 9 (S4153) and the variation display setting process 10 (S4162) is executed instead of the variation display setting process (see FIG. 38). It's different.

First, the details of the operation detection process 10 (S4161) in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 144. The operation detection process 10 (S4161) is a process executed in place of the operation detection process 9 (see FIG. 128) in the second control example, and is an operation similar to the operation detection process 9 (see FIG. 128) described above. This is a process for monitoring the operation (pressing) of the button 230 and executing control according to the operation content when the operation is detected.

Of the operation detection processes 10 (see FIG. 144) in the third control example, in each of the processes S5101 to S5106, S5109, and S5110, the operation detection processes 9 (see FIG. 128) in the second control example are S5101 to S5106, respectively. , S5109, and S5110 are the same processes as each process. Further, in the operation detection process 10 (see FIG. 144) in the third control example, when it is determined that the operation (press) for the center button CB is detected in the process of S5106 (S5106: Yes), the selected item is selected. A music determination process for determining a music to be played after the end of the music selection period according to the type is executed (S5121), and this process is terminated. The details of this music determination process (S5121) will be described with reference to FIG. 145.

FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the details of the above-mentioned music determination process (S5121). In this music determination process (S5121), first, it is determined whether or not the random music selection is determined by the player (whether the most significant bit of the menu position pointer 223ab is on (1)) (S5801). When it is determined in the process of S5801 that an item other than the random music selection is determined (the most significant bit of the menu position pointer 223ab is off (0) when the pressing of the center button CB is detected), it is determined (S5801: No. ), Data indicating the music corresponding to the value of the lower 5 bits of the menu position pointer 223ab is specified from the item arrangement storage area 223aa, stored in the music type storage area 223bad (S5802), and the process is shifted to S5806.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5801 that the random music selection is determined (the most significant bit of the menu position pointer 223ab is on (1)) (S5801: Yes), the random music selection table 222ca (see FIG. 143). (S5803), and by comparing the specified content corresponding to the data stored in the jackpot status storage area 223cc in the read table with the value of the music lottery counter 223ca, the value of the music lottery counter 223ca. 1 song corresponding to (S5804) is determined. Then, the data corresponding to the music determined in the processing of S5804 is stored in the music type storage area 223bad (S5805), and the processing is transferred to S5806.

In the processing of S5806 executed after the processing of S5802 or S5805, the music selection menu screen is closed, the menu display flag 223ae is set to off (S5806), and this processing is terminated. By executing this music determination process (see FIG. 145), when random music selection is determined, one music can be randomly selected from a plurality of music.

As described above, when random music selection is determined, there is a possibility that a music (that is, "music a") that is not displayed as an item on the music selection menu screen is determined. This "music a" may be determined only in the case of a probabilistic jackpot, and when it becomes a probabilistic jackpot for even-numbered symbol notification (whether it is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot is unknown). ) Is determined at a higher rate than the case where the odd-numbered symbol notification is a probabilistic jackpot (when it is confirmed that the probabilistic jackpot is confirmed). With this configuration, when a big hit of even-numbered symbol notification occurs, it will be in the probabilistic state as soon as possible (that is, before confirming the result of the effect of notifying whether or not to shift to the probabilistic state). Players who want to know whether or not to make a transition can be made to positively select "random song selection". Further, when the "musical piece a" is played as expected by the player, the player can be pleased. Furthermore, even if "music a" is not played, it is possible to continue to have a sense of expectation for the probabilistic state until the effect of notifying whether or not to shift to the probable change state is executed during the jackpot. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 146, the details of the hit-related process 10 (S4371) in the third control example will be described. The hit-related process 10 (S4371) is a process executed in place of the hit-related process 9 (see FIG. 130) in the second control example. Of the hit-related processes 10 (S4371) in the third control example, the hit-related processes 9 (FIG. 130) in the second control example in each of the processes S4401 to S4404, S4406, S4407, S4409, S4462, and S4464 to S4466, respectively. The same processes as those of S4401 to S4404, S4406, S4407, S4409, S4462, and S4464 to S4466 of (see) are executed.

Further, in the hit-related process 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example, when it is determined that the opening command is included in the command received from the main control device 110 in the process of S4404 (S4404: Yes), then, a pseudo small round lottery process is executed to draw (determine) whether or not the pseudo small round effect, which is an effect that makes the number of rounds appear to be smaller than the original number of rounds, is executed (S4471). ), The process is transferred to S4406. The details of this pseudo small round lottery process (S4471) will be described later with reference to FIG. 147.

Further, in the hit-related process 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example, when it is determined that the round number command is included in the command received from the main control device 110 in the process of S4407 (S4407). : Yes), then, instead of the round number command process (see FIG. 131) in the second control example, the round number command process 10 is executed (S4472), and this process is terminated. The details of the round number command process 10 (S4472) will be described later with reference to FIG. 148.

Further, in the hit-related process 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example, when it is determined that the command received from the main control device 110 includes the interval command in the process of S4462 (S4462 :. Yes), then, instead of the interval command process (see FIG. 133) in the second control example, the interval command process 10 is executed (S4473), and this process is terminated. The details of the interval command process 10 (S4473) will be described later with reference to FIG. 149.

Next, with reference to FIG. 147, the details of the above-mentioned pseudo small round lottery process (S4471), which is one process in the hit-related process 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example, will be described. As described above, this pseudo small round lottery process (S4471) is a process for drawing whether or not to set the execution of the pseudo small round effect.

In the pseudo small round lottery process (see Fig. 147), first, the type of jackpot for which the start of the opening period is notified by this opening command is jackpot A (among the jackpots of the first special symbol, the number of rounds is relatively large 8). It is determined whether it is either a round jackpot) or a jackpot D (a 16-round jackpot with a relatively large number of rounds among the jackpots of the second special symbol) (S5831). In the processing of S5831, if it is determined that the current jackpot is neither the jackpot A nor the jackpot D (S5831: No), the jackpot this time is the jackpots B and C (relatively among the jackpots of the first special symbol). It means that it is either 5 round jackpot with a small number of rounds) or E, F (10 round jackpot with a relatively small number of rounds among the jackpots of the second special symbol). Therefore, in this case, since the original number of rounds is small and there is no possibility of executing the pseudo small round effect, each process of S5832 to S5833 for drawing (determining) whether or not the pseudo small round effect can be executed is skipped. Then, the process is transferred to S5838.

On the other hand, in the process of S5831 when it is determined that the current jackpot is either jackpot A or jackpot D (S5831: Yes), in order to draw (determine) whether or not the pseudo small round effect can be executed. Each process of S5832 to S5837 of S5832 is executed. Specifically, the pseudo small round lottery table 222cc is read out (S5832), and whether or not the pseudo small round effect can be executed is drawn (determined) (S5833). As described above, the pseudo small round lottery table 222cc is set so that the lottery result corresponding to the execution of the pseudo small round effect is obtained at a rate of 50%.

When the processing of S5833 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the lottery (determination) result by the processing of S5833 is the lottery result corresponding to the execution of the pseudo small round effect (S5834), and the pseudo small round effect is executed. If it is determined that the result is not the corresponding lottery result (S5834: No), each process of S5835 to S5837 for setting the execution of the pseudo small round effect is skipped, and the process is shifted to S5838.

On the other hand, in the process of S5834, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to the execution of the pseudo small round effect (S5834: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is the jackpot A (S5835). .. In the processing of S5835, if it is determined that the jackpot this time is jackpot A (8 round jackpot of the first special symbol) (S5835: Yes), the jackpot this time is the number of rounds among the jackpots of the first special symbol. In order to make it look like a relatively small jackpot (5 round jackpot), the value (data) corresponding to 5 rounds is stored in the pseudo final R storage area 223cc (S5836), and the processing is shifted to S5838. do.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5835, when it is determined that the current jackpot is not the jackpot A (that is, the jackpot D) (S5835: No), the current jackpot is selected as the jackpot of the second special symbol. In order to make it look like a jackpot with a relatively small number of rounds (10 round jackpot), the value (data) corresponding to 10 rounds is stored in the pseudo final R storage area 223cc (S5738), and the processing is performed in S5838. Transition.

In the process of S5838, a display opening command corresponding to the opening effect to be executed is set, and this process is terminated. By executing this pseudo small round lottery process, when a relatively small number of rounds is notified at the start of the jackpot (that is, when 5 rounds are notified by the jackpot of the first special symbol, or when the second special symbol is notified. Even if 10 rounds are notified by the jackpot), it is possible to play the game during the jackpot in the expectation that a larger number of rounds will be notified (pseudo small round production is executed). can. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 148, it is one of the hit-related processes 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example, instead of the round number command process (see FIG. 131) in the second control example. The details of the number of rounds command processing 10 (S4472) to be executed will be described. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the round number command process 10 (S4472).

Of the round number command processes 10 (see FIG. 148) in the third control example, each process of S5401 to S5407 is a process of S5401 to S5407 of the round number command process (see FIG. 131) in the second control example, respectively. The same process is executed. Further, in the round number command processing 10 in the third control example, when the processing of S5401 is completed, the round notified by the current round number command is set to the pseudo final R storage area 223cc. If it is determined whether it matches the final round (S5411) and if it is determined that this round is a pseudo final round (S5411: Yes), the process is shifted to S5403 and the playback order of the music data type is determined. Determine whether or not to rearrange. On the other hand, in the process of S5411, if it is determined that this round is not a pseudo final round (S5411: No), the process is shifted to S5402.

By executing this round number command process 10 (see FIG. 148), at the start of a pseudo final round (at the start of 5 rounds in jackpot A and 10 in jackpot D) when a pseudo small round effect is executed. At the beginning of the round), as in the original final round, the rearrangement of the playback order of the music data is determined so that the chorus part of the music is more likely to be played during the pseudo final round. Can be configured in. That is, since the audio mode in the pseudo final round can be made equivalent to the audio vs. use in the original final round, it is either the pseudo final round or the original final round from the audio aspect of the music. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from being detected by the player before the continuous effect (see FIG. 141 (b)) is executed. Therefore, when the pseudo small round effect is set, is the continuous effect executed until the start timing of the continuous effect (see FIG. 141 (b)) (that is, the end timing of the pseudo final round)? Since it is possible to make it difficult to identify whether the jackpot ends as it is, it is possible to increase the player's expectation during the pseudo final round.

Next, with reference to FIG. 149, it is one of the hit-related processes 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example, and is executed instead of the interval command process (see FIG. 133) in the second control example. The details of the interval number command processing 10 (S4473) to be performed will be described. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the interval number command process 10 (S4473).

Of the interval command processes 10 (see FIG. 149) in the third control example, each process of S5501 to S5509 is the same as each process of S5501 to S5509 of the interval command process (see FIG. 133) in the second control example, respectively. The process is executed. Further, in the interval command processing 10 (see FIG. 149) in the third control example, when the processing of S5501 is completed, the interval period notified by the current interval command is the pseudo final round (pseudo final R storage area). When it is determined whether the interval period is set immediately before (the round set in 223cc) (S5511) and the current interval period is determined to be the interval period immediately before the pseudo final round (S5511). : Yes), the process is shifted to S5503, and it is determined whether or not to rearrange the reproduction order of the music data type. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5511 that the current round is not a pseudo final round (S5511: No), the processing is transferred to S5502.

By executing the process of S5511, at the start of the interval period immediately before the pseudo final round in the case where the pseudo small round effect is executed, the same as at the start of the interval period immediately before the original final round. , The rearrangement of the reproduction order of the music data can be determined, and the possibility that the chorus part of the music is reproduced during the pseudo final round can be increased. That is, since the audio mode in the pseudo final round can be made equivalent to the audio vs. use in the original final round, it is either the pseudo final round or the original final round from the audio aspect of the music. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from being detected by the player before the continuous effect (see FIG. 141 (b)) is executed. Therefore, when the pseudo small round effect is set, is the continuous effect executed until the start timing of the continuous effect (see FIG. 141 (b)) (that is, the end timing of the pseudo final round)? Since it is possible to make it difficult to identify whether the jackpot ends as it is, it is possible to increase the player's expectation during the pseudo final round.

Further, in the interval command processing 10 (see FIG. 149) in the third control example, in the processing of S5506, the interval period notified by the current interval command is not the interval period after the end of the first round of the jackpot. When it is determined (S5506: No), then it is determined whether or not the current interval is the interval period after the pseudo final round (the round set in the pseudo final R storage area 223cc) is completed (S5506: No). S5512). Then, in the process of S5512, if it is determined that the interval period is after the end of the pseudo final round (S5512: Yes), the execution of the continuous effect (see FIG. 141 (b)) is set (S5513). , The data stored in the pseudo final R storage area 223cc is reset (S5514), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 150, the details of the variation display setting process 10 (S4162) in the third control example will be described. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 10 (S4162). The variation display setting process 10 (S4162) in the third control example is the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, similarly to the variation display setting process (see FIG. 38) in the second control example (and the first embodiment). Is a process for generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute.

Of the variation display setting processes 10 (see FIG. 150) in the third control example, in each process of S4501 to S4509, S4501 of the variation display setting process (see FIG. 38) in the second control example (first embodiment), respectively. The same process as each process of S4509 is executed. Further, in the variation display setting process 10 (see FIG. 150) in the third control example, when the process of S4504 is completed, it is next determined whether the variation pattern of this time is a variation pattern for notifying a jackpot. (S4521), if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is for notifying the jackpot (S4521: Yes), the jackpot type and the third symbol type (odd symbol or even number) aligned in the fluctuation pattern set this time. The data according to (whether it is a symbol) is stored in the jackpot status storage area 223cc (S4522), and the processing is transferred to S4505. In the process of S4522, "01H" is stored in the jackpot status storage area 223 kb when the odd-numbered symbol notification is a probable change jackpot, and "02H" is stored when the even-numbered symbol notification is a probable change jackpot. Stores "03H" when it is a normal jackpot for even-numbered symbol notification.

The data stored in the jackpot status storage area 223cc by the processing of S4522 is referred to when the player selects (determines) "random music selection" during the music selection period, and is used in the random music selection table 222ca in the jackpot status storage area 223cc. The specified content corresponding to the data stored in is compared with the music lottery counter 223ca, and one music to be played during the jackpot is determined.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4521, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern set this time is not the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the jackpot (that is, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the deviation) (S4521: No), the processing of S4522 is skipped. Then, the process is transferred to S4505.

As described above, in the third control example, when "random music selection" is determined by the player on the music selection menu screen, the music to be played after the end of the first round (music selection period) is randomly selected. It is configured to be decided. Also, when "random song selection" is decided, if certain conditions are met (that is, if this jackpot is a probability variation jackpot), a special song that is not displayed as an item on the song selection menu screen (that is, that is). , "Music a") can be selected. As a result, it is possible to select "random music selection" in the expectation that "music a" that cannot be normally listened to is determined. In particular, when a big hit is made by the variable display (variable effect) in which the third symbols with even numbers are aligned (when it is unknown whether it is a probable variable big hit or a normal big hit), as soon as possible (when it is unknown) That is, "random song selection" is positively performed for the player who wants to know whether or not to shift to the probabilistic state (before confirming the result of the effect of notifying whether or not to shift to the probabilistic state). You can choose. Further, the ratio of "music a" determined by lottery is configured so that the probability variation jackpot of even-numbered symbol notification is higher than the probability variation jackpot of odd-numbered symbol notification. As a result, when the jackpot of even-numbered symbol notification is won, "random song selection" can be selected more positively. By increasing the possibility that the "random music selection" is determined by the player, it is possible to evenly reproduce a plurality of music pieces (musical pieces A to Z) set in the pachinko machine 10. This makes it possible to listen to a plurality of songs without waste.

Further, in the third control example, as a kind of effect executed during the jackpot, the number of rounds of the jackpot is performed during a predetermined period (for example, until the end of the 5th round or the 10th round) from the start of the jackpot. Is notified less than the original number of rounds, and a pseudo-small round effect for notifying the original number of rounds can be selected after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. By configuring this pseudo-small round effect to be executable, if a relatively small number of rounds is notified at the start of the jackpot, a larger number of rounds (8 rounds or 16 rounds) will be available after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. It is possible to play the game until the predetermined period elapses in the expectation that the game will be notified. Along with this, in the third control example, even in the pseudo final round during the execution of the pseudo small round effect, the chorus part is reproduced by rearranging the reproduction order of the music as in the original final round. It is configured to be. This makes it difficult to distinguish between the pseudo final round and the original final round from the parts of the music played during the pseudo final round. Therefore, until the pseudo-small round effect is completed (until a predetermined period elapses), it is possible to continue to have a sense of expectation that a larger number of rounds will be notified.

In the third control example, if the player decides "random music selection" only in the case of the probability variation jackpot, the "music a" may be played, and the odd-numbered symbol notification probability variation jackpot. The probability variation jackpot of even-numbered symbol notification was configured so that the ratio of selecting "music a" was higher than that of the even-numbered symbol notification. , Can be determined arbitrarily. Specifically, for example, even in the case of a normal big hit, the "music a" may be determined with a low probability (for example, a ratio of 0.1%). That is, when "random song selection" is selected during the execution of the probabilistic jackpot, the ratio of "music a" being selected is higher than when "random song selection" is selected during the execution of the normal jackpot. It may be configured. With this configuration, even if the "music a" is played, the probability change jackpot is not fixed, so the game can be played with a sense of tension until the probability change state is notified. .. Further, the rate at which "music a" is determined may be configured so that the probability variation jackpot of odd-numbered symbol notification is higher than the probability variation jackpot of even-numbered symbol notification.

In the third control example, among the hobby effects executed during the jackpot (predetermined period), the production mode (type of music to be played) of the hobby effect by voice is set as the operation content for the operation button 230 of the player ( The configuration was such that the determination was made according to the selection result on the music selection menu screen), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during a predetermined period may be changed according to the player's selection result (operation content for the operation button 230). More specifically, when a specific effect execution condition is satisfied, it corresponds to a plurality of items corresponding to a plurality of effect modes (corresponding to each of "music A" to "music Z" in the third control example). ) And an item in which the effect mode is randomly selected (corresponding to an item corresponding to "random music selection" in the third control example) are configured to be displayable on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the effect mode of the effect to be executed is determined according to the item selected by the player by operating the operation button 230. That is, when the item corresponding to the effect mode is selected, the effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the selected item, while when the randomly selected item is selected, the effect is selected at a predetermined timing. The configuration may be such that one production mode is determined from a plurality of possible production modes. With this configuration, the player can select the game property of selecting the player's favorite effect mode and the game property of randomly selecting the effect mode and paying attention to which effect mode is selected. Can be made to. Further, in this case, as in the third control example, a special effect that can be determined only when the player selects an item whose effect mode is randomly selected (in the special music in the third control example). A display effect) corresponding to a certain "music a" may be set. With this configuration, it is possible to visually determine whether or not a special effect has been executed, so whether or not it is a special effect (that is, whether or not it shifts to a probable change state after a big hit) is determined. It can be understood more easily.

In the third control example, the special music "music a" can be selected only when the player selects "random music selection" on the music selection menu screen, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, when the probabilistic jackpot is confirmed (that is, the odd-numbered symbol notification probabilistic jackpot and the player is confident that the probabilistic jackpot is already), "Music a" is displayed on the music selection menu screen. May be configured to display the item. With this configuration, in a situation where the probabilistic state is fixed, there is a higher possibility that another song will be selected for the player who wants to listen to "song a", "random song selection". Instead of selecting "", the item "music a" can be selected. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved. Further, in this case, "music a" is displayed at a predetermined ratio to the music selection menu screen displayed in the probabilistic jackpot of even-numbered symbol notification (a situation in which the player cannot know whether or not the player is in the probable change state). May be configured to display the item. With this configuration, there are variations in the method of early detection of whether or not a probable change state occurs (whether or not "music a" is included in the items, and "random song selection" is selected. Since it is possible to provide whether or not the music a ”is played, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player during the music selection period of the big hit of the even-numbered symbol notification.

In the third control example, the special music "music a" can be selected only when the player selects "random music selection" on the music selection menu screen, but the player does not necessarily select the music. It does not have to be configured so that it can be done. For example, the operation button 230 may be abolished, and the music to be played during the execution of the jackpot may be randomly selected by referring to the random music selection table 222ca each time. That is, if the probability change state is reached after the end of the big hit, the "music a" can be played, but if the probability state is low after the end of the big hit, the "music a" is not likely to be played. You may. Even with this configuration, if the even-numbered symbol notification is a big hit, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the "music a" is played and to play the game during the big hit. Further, the present invention is not limited to the case where the "musical piece a" is used to suggest whether or not the state is in a probable change state. In a predetermined period during the game, the state after the predetermined period has elapsed becomes an advantageous state for the player (for example, a big hit, a time saving state, a small hit RUSH, a slot BIG BONUS, ART, AT, etc.), or the advantage thereof. It is determined whether the state is more disadvantageous than the above state, and if it is in an advantageous state, a special song can be played. On the other hand, if it is in a disadvantageous state, a special song is played. It may be configured so that there is no possibility that it will be done.

In the third control example, the music that can be selected when "random music selection" is selected is configured to be different depending on whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the music that can be selected when "random music selection" is selected may be different depending on whether or not the pseudo-small round effect is being executed. Specifically, when "random song selection" is determined during the execution of the pseudo-small round effect, one song is selected from a plurality of songs including "music a", and the pseudo-small round effect is executed. If not, one song may be selected from a plurality of songs excluding "music a".

In this third control example, the control when setting the music in the jackpot is described as an example, but the control is not limited to the jackpot. If the player is in a relatively advantageous state after the end of the predetermined music reproduction period, a special music (that is, "music a") can be selected when "random music selection" is selected. On the other hand, when it becomes a relatively disadvantageous state after the end of the playback period, at least the special music (that is, "music a") is excluded (that is, in "music A" to "music Z"). Any situation can be used as long as it can be configured to select one song from. For example, as in the first control example, the configuration may be used for control for selecting a musical piece in a probabilistic state. In this case, if "random music selection" is selected with the jackpot included in the reserved ball, a special song can be selected, while the jackpot is included in the reserved ball. If not, one song may be selected from the songs excluding special songs. In addition, it is configured so that the music selection menu screen can be displayed during the execution of the variable display effect, and when "random music selection" is selected (determined) during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the jackpot, it is special. If "random song selection" is selected (determined) during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the deviation, one song is selected from the ones excluding special songs. It may be configured.

In this third control example, when "random music selection" is selected, the probability change state is determined if "music a" is selected, but the player has an item other than "random music selection" on the music selection menu screen. Even when is selected, a case may be provided in which the probability change state is determined at a predetermined ratio. Specifically, for example, when the player selects one song during the execution of the probability variation jackpot, the playback position of the music is played from a playback position different from the normal one with a predetermined probability (for example, the chorus portion). It may be played from, or played from the second song, etc.). In addition, instead of or in addition to this, a music different from the selected music (for example, "music a") is played with a predetermined probability, the music tone is different from the normal one, or the version is different from the normal one. It may be configured to be different. With this configuration, it is possible to meet the desire of a player who has both the desire to select his / her favorite music and the desire to detect at an early stage whether or not a probable change state will occur. Further, in this case, the music selected by the player may be reproduced in a voice mode different from the usual one only when the same music is continuously selected for a predetermined number of jackpots.

In this third control example, the music selected during the music selection period is played from the beginning (intro part) at the end of the first round of the jackpot, regardless of the number of rounds of the jackpot. Not limited. For example, for a jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, an 8-round jackpot or a 16-round jackpot), playback starts from the beginning of the song, while a jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, 5 rounds) and a pseudo-small round effect. For the jackpot for which is set, the playback may be started from the chorus part of the music. With this configuration, even if the jackpot type has a small number of rounds, the chorus part of the music can be more reliably heard by the player in one jackpot. Further, in this case, when the pseudo-small round effect is set, it may be determined by lottery whether to start the reproduction from the chorus portion of the music or the intro portion of the music. Specifically, for example, when a pseudo-small round effect is set, playback is started from the chorus part of the music at a rate of 90%, and playback is started from the beginning part of the music at a rate of 10%. May be good. With this configuration, if playback starts from the beginning of the song even though a small number of rounds (for example, 5 rounds) has been notified, a pseudo-small round effect is being executed at that point. Since it is possible to make the player understand that, before confirming the continuous production, it is possible to have a feeling of satisfaction that the jackpot has a large number of rounds.

<Fourth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 to 169. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first to third control examples described above, when determining the initial arrangement of items on the music selection menu screen, the game is within a range (history area) that can be selected by operating the upper button UB within three times. It is configured to arrange up to three items that are frequently selected by the person. If the number of selections is less than 3 items, the items less than 3 items are arranged in the history area, and the items determined by random lottery are arranged in the remaining area (in the song selection area). One item determined by lottery is arranged, and other items are arranged in alphabetical order based on the one item). With this configuration, even when the number of times a song is selected is small, such as immediately after the power is turned on, all the songs can be arranged on the song selection menu screen without duplication.

On the other hand, in the fourth control example, when there are few items to be set for the history area (less than three), the empty area of the history area (the area where the items with high selection frequency are not arranged) The structure is such that the priority of the items to be arranged is specified. This priority is higher for songs that are more likely to be known by more players (for example, the theme song of the work that became the motif of the pachinko machine 10 or the song that is played during normal games such as reach production). It is set to be high. With this configuration, even when the number of times a song is selected is small, songs that are likely to be selected by the player can be placed in the history area, which can improve the convenience of the player. can.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second and third control examples described above, for music at a predetermined timing during the jackpot so that the rust portion is more likely to be in the playing state in the final round during the jackpot. It was configured so that the playback order of the data could be rearranged. As a result, the chorus part, which is the most exciting part (characteristic part) in the music, can be more reliably heard by the player in the final round.

In addition to this, in the fourth control example, when the reproduction of the rust portion is completed during the final round, it is determined whether or not the rust portion is repeatedly reproduced according to the progress of the final round. More specifically, it is possible to end the chorus part between the end of the reproduction of the chorus part and the end of the final round (or the end of the period during which the ending effect can be delayed). If there is a high possibility that the chorus part will be played repeatedly, and if there is a high possibility that the chorus part will end in the middle (the ending effect will start in the middle of playing the chorus part), the chorus part will not be repeated. The playback is set according to the playback order of the music data. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the rust portion is not cut off in the middle of the final round and can be reproduced in a perfect shape.

Further, in the above-mentioned third control example, the first round of the jackpot is set as the music selection period, and the player is made to select the music. During this song selection period, regardless of whether or not the song to be played is decided (the center button CB is pressed), the dedicated song continues to be played during the song selection period, and the song selection period has elapsed (1 round). It was configured to start playback from the beginning (intro part) of the song at the timing when the eyes were closed.

On the other hand, in the fourth control example, every time the player operates the operation button 230 during the music selection period to arrange a different item in the music selection area, the chorus portion of the music corresponding to the arranged item is reproduced. It is composed. As a result, not only the music name displayed on the music selection menu screen but also the melody of the most characteristic chorus part in the music can be added to select the music. Further, in the fourth control example, when the music is determined during the music selection period, the reproduction start position and the reproduction start timing of the music are changed according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Specifically, in the case of a jackpot with a large number of rounds (16 rounds), when the song selection period ends, playback is started from the beginning (intro part) of the song, and the jackpot of 10 rounds and 8 rounds. In the case of, when the music selection period ends, playback is started from the A-melody part of the music (that is, skipping the intro part). On the other hand, in the case of a big hit with a small number of rounds (5 rounds), when the player decides the music, the music is continued to be played from the continuation of the chorus part that is already being played (the music selection period ends). The music is played from the front). With this configuration, even with a small number of rounds, the rust portion can be heard by the player for a longer period of time.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example and the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example is that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The configuration of the RAM 303 in the audio output device 226 has been partially changed, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, and it is executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226. The point is that some control processes have been changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, and the audio output device 226. The other processing executed by is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the third control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 151 (a). FIG. 151 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 151 (a), the ROM 222 in the fourth control example has one provisional content of the pseudo small round lottery table 222 cab with respect to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the third control example (see FIG. 142 (a)). The difference is that the part has been changed and the priority specification table 222da and the sabi loop determination table 222db have been added.

The priority setting table 222da is a table in which the priority order of the items to be arranged in the history area is determined. If the number of songs selected once or more when determining the initial arrangement of items on the song selection menu screen is less than 3, it is specified in this priority setting table 222da for the empty area of the history area. The items are arranged in order from the item having the highest priority (see S5275 in FIG. 163). The details of this priority specification table 222da will be described later with reference to FIG. 152 (b).

The rust loop determination table 222db is referred to for determining whether or not to repeatedly reproduce the rust portion (loop reproduction) when the reproduction end timing of the music data corresponding to the rust portion is reached in the final round. It is a data table (see S5905 in FIG. 158). The details of the rust loop discrimination table 222db will be described later with reference to FIG. 153.

Next, with reference to FIG. 152 (a), the details of the pseudo small round lottery table 222cc in the fourth control example will be described. The pseudo small round lottery table 222cc is a data table referred to for determining (lottery) whether or not to execute the pseudo small round effect, as in the third control example described above.

As shown in FIG. 152 (a), the pseudo small round lottery table 222cc in the fourth control example corresponds to the range of the value of the effect lottery counter for drawing the effect mode, and whether or not the pseudo small round effect can be executed. (Whether to execute a normal effect or a pseudo-small round effect) is specified in association with each other. In addition, in the pseudo small round lottery table 222cc in the fourth control example, the voice mode (playback mode) when playing the music is matched to the number of rounds pseudo-notified by the pseudo small round effect, or the original round. Whether to match the number is also specified in association with the value of the effect lottery counter. That is, in the fourth control example, whether or not the display mode of the pseudo-small round effect and the reproduction mode of the music are matched is also configured to be drawn by the pseudo-small round lottery table 222kb. When the player recognizes that the reproduction mode of the music does not match the number of rounds notified by the pseudo-small round effect, it can be understood that the pseudo-small round effect is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to give satisfaction to the player who understands that the pseudo-small round effect is executed before the continuous effect (see FIG. 141 (b)) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 152 (a), in the jackpot A, for the range of the effect lottery counter value of "0 to 49", "normal effect" is defined in association with the display mode, and the music reproduction mode. "For 8R / 10R" is specified in association with each other. Therefore, if the jackpot A is won and the value of the effect lottery counter is in the range of "0 to 49", the pseudo small round effect is not executed, and it is notified that the jackpot is a jackpot of 8 rounds from the beginning. (Normal production is performed). Further, as a reproduction mode of the music, a reproduction mode (reproduction mode for 8R / 10R) in which the music is reproduced from the verse 1 portion at the end of the music selection period is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the jackpot of the first special symbol is a jackpot of 8 rounds, which has a relatively large number of rounds, from the start of the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to play the game during the big hit with confidence from the start of the big hit. Of the 100 counter values (random values) of "0 to 99" that the value of the effect lottery counter can take, the counter associated with the display mode "normal effect" and the reproduction mode "for 8R / 10R". Since there are 50 values (random values) of "0 to 49", the ratio at which the display mode "normal effect" and the reproduction mode "for 8R / 10R" are determined is 50% (50/100). ..

As shown in FIG. 152 (a), in the jackpot A, for the range of the effect lottery counter value of "50 to 94", "pseudo small round effect" is defined as a display mode in association with the music piece. As a reproduction mode, "for 5R" is defined in association with each other. Therefore, if the jackpot A is won and the value of the effect lottery counter is in the range of "50 to 94", the pseudo small round effect is executed, and the jackpot of 8 rounds is performed for a predetermined period. (Until the end of the 5th round) A display effect (pseudo small round effect) as if it were a big hit in the 5th round is executed. In addition, as a reproduction mode of the music, a reproduction mode (reproduction mode for 5R) in which the reproduction of the music is continued as it is from the reproduction position being reproduced when the player determines the music is set. As a result, until the continuous effect is executed, both the display mode and the audio reproduction mode are the same as the 5-round jackpot (big hit B and jackpot C), so that the predetermined period elapses. It can be difficult to identify whether a pseudo-small round effect is being performed or a five-round jackpot is being performed. Therefore, when the continuous production is executed, the player can be given greater joy. Of the 100 counter values (random values) of "0 to 99" that the value of the effect lottery counter can take, the counter associated with the display mode "pseudo-small round effect" and the reproduction mode "for 5R". Since there are 45 values (random values) of "50 to 94", the ratio at which the display mode "pseudo-small round effect" and the reproduction mode "for 5R" are determined is 45% (45/100).

As shown in FIG. 152 (a), in the jackpot A, for the range of the effect lottery counter value of "95 to 99", "pseudo small round effect" is defined as a display mode in association with the music piece. As a reproduction mode, "for 8R / 10R" is defined in association with each other. Therefore, if the jackpot A is won and the value of the effect lottery counter is in the range of "95 to 99", the pseudo small round effect is executed, and the jackpot of 8 rounds is performed for a predetermined period. (Until the end of the 5th round) A display effect (pseudo small round effect) as if it were a big hit in the 5th round is executed. In addition, as a reproduction mode of the music, a reproduction mode (reproduction mode for 8R / 10R) in which the music is reproduced from the verse 1 portion at the end of the music selection period is set. As a result, at least until the player decides the music during the music selection period, the display mode and the audio reproduction mode are the same as those of the 5-round jackpot (big hit B and jackpot C), but the music is played. The reproduction mode of the voice after the determination is set to a mode different from the 5-round jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel uncomfortable that the playback mode and the display mode of the sound do not match, so that the player can easily understand that the pseudo-small round effect is being executed. can. As a result, it is possible to give a sense of superiority to the player who was able to detect that the pseudo-small round effect was executed before the continuous effect was executed. Of the 100 counter values (random values) of "0 to 99" that the value of the effect lottery counter can take, it is associated with the display mode "pseudo-small round effect" and the reproduction mode "for 8R / 10R". Since there are five counter values (random values) of "95 to 99", the ratio at which the display mode "pseudo-small round effect" and the reproduction mode "for 8R / 10R" are determined is 5% (5/100). Is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 152 (a), in the jackpot D, for the range of the effect lottery counter value of "0 to 49", "normal effect" is defined as a display mode in association with the music piece. As a reproduction mode, "for 16R" is defined in association with each other. Therefore, if the jackpot D is won and the value of the effect lottery counter is in the range of "0 to 49", the pseudo small round effect is not executed, and it is notified that the jackpot is 16 rounds from the beginning. (Normal production is performed). Further, as the reproduction mode of the music, a reproduction mode (reproduction mode for 16R) in which the music is reproduced from the intro portion at the end of the music selection period is set. Therefore, the player can be made to recognize that the jackpot is 16 rounds, which has a relatively large number of rounds among the jackpots of the second special symbol, from the start of the jackpot. Of the 100 counter values (random values) of "0 to 99" that the value of the effect lottery counter can take, the counter value associated with the display mode "normal effect" and the reproduction mode "for 16R" ( Since the number of random values) is 50 of "0 to 49", the ratio at which the display mode "normal effect" and the reproduction mode "for 16R" are determined is 50% (50/100).

As shown in FIG. 152 (a), in the jackpot D, for the range of the effect lottery counter value of "50 to 94", "pseudo small round effect" is defined as a display mode in association with the music piece. As a reproduction mode, "for 8R / 10" is defined in association with each other. Therefore, if the jackpot D is won and the value of the effect lottery counter is in the range of "50 to 94", the pseudo small round effect is executed, and the jackpot of 16 rounds is performed for a predetermined period. (Until the end of the 5th round) A display effect (pseudo-small round effect) as if it were a big hit for 10 rounds is executed. In addition, as a reproduction mode of the music, a reproduction mode (reproduction mode for 8R / 10R) in which the music is reproduced from the verse 1 portion at the end of the music selection period is set. As a result, until the continuous effect is executed, both the display mode and the audio reproduction mode are the same as the 10-round jackpot (big hit E and jackpot F), so that the predetermined period elapses. It can be difficult to identify whether a pseudo-small round effect is being performed or a 10-round jackpot is being performed. Therefore, when the continuous production is executed, the player can be given greater joy. Of the 100 counter values (random values) of "0 to 99" that the value of the effect lottery counter can take, the counter associated with the display mode "pseudo-small round effect" and the reproduction mode "for 5R". Since there are 45 values (random values) of "50 to 94", the ratio at which the display mode "pseudo-small round effect" and the reproduction mode "for 8R / 10R" are determined is 45% (45/100). ..

As shown in FIG. 152 (a), in the jackpot D, for the range of the effect lottery counter value of "95 to 99", "pseudo small round effect" is defined as a display mode in association with the music piece. As a reproduction mode, "for 16R" is defined in association with each other. Therefore, if the jackpot D is won and the value of the effect lottery counter is in the range of "95 to 99", the pseudo small round effect is executed, and the jackpot of 16 rounds is performed for a predetermined period. (Until the end of the 5th round) A display effect (pseudo small round effect) as if it were a big hit for 10 rounds is executed. In addition, as a reproduction mode of the music, a reproduction mode (reproduction mode for 16R) in which the music is reproduced from the intro portion at the end of the music selection period is set. As a result, at least until the end of the song selection period, both the display mode and the audio reproduction mode are the same as the 10-round jackpot (big hit E and jackpot F), but after the song selection period ends. The audio reproduction mode is set to a mode different from the 10-round jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel uncomfortable that the playback mode and the display mode of the sound do not match, so that the player can easily understand that the pseudo-small round effect is being executed. can. As a result, it is possible to give a sense of superiority to the player who can detect that the pseudo-small round effect has been executed before the continuous effect is executed. Of the 100 counter values (random values) of "0 to 99" that the value of the effect lottery counter can take, the counter associated with the display mode "pseudo-small round effect" and the reproduction mode "for 16R". Since there are five values (random values) of "95 to 99", the ratio at which the display mode "pseudo-small round effect" and the reproduction mode "for 16R" are determined is 5% (5/100).

As described above, in the fourth control example, the reproduction mode of the music (the timing at which the reproduction of the music is started and the reproduction position of the music) are different depending on the number of rounds of the jackpot. Then, in a part (predetermined ratio) when a pseudo small round effect (an effect as if it is a (unfavorable) jackpot with a smaller number of rounds than the actual number of rounds) is executed, only the audio mode is actually The configuration is set to the reproduction mode corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player know from the voice mode that the pseudo-small round effect is executed before the continuous effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of superiority to the player who can detect that the pseudo-small round production is being executed at an early stage.

Next, with reference to FIG. 152 (b), the specified contents of the priority specification table 222da will be described. As described above, the priority setting table 222da is a data table that defines the priority (priority) of the items to be arranged with respect to the history area. If the number of songs selected once or more when determining the initial arrangement of items on the song selection menu screen is less than 3, it is specified in this priority setting table 222da for the empty area of the history area. Items are arranged in order from the item with the highest priority.

As shown in FIG. 152 (b), in the priority specification table 222da, the priority to be arranged in the history area and the menu item are defined in association with each other. More specifically, in the priority definition table 222da, "music A" is defined as a menu item for the priority "high", and "music A" is defined as a menu item for the priority "medium". "Music J" is associated and defined, and "Music E" is associated and defined as a menu item for the priority "low". These items are set so that the music that is likely to be known to more players has a higher priority. Specifically, for example, the opening song (theme song) of the work that became the motif of the pachinko machine 10 is defined as the "music A" corresponding to the priority "high", and the "medium" corresponding to the priority "medium". The ending song of the work that became the motif is defined as "Music J", and the insert song of the work that became the motif is defined as "Music E" corresponding to the priority "low".

By deciding the items to be placed in the history area by referring to the priority specification table 222da, for example, when the number of songs selected once or more shifts to the probabilistic state with two pieces, the song selection menu screen is displayed. As an initial arrangement, first, two songs (items) selected once or more by the player are arranged in the history area. Then, the item "music A" corresponding to the priority "high" is arranged in the empty area for one item. In addition, when the number of songs selected once or more shifts to the probabilistic state with one piece, one item selected once or more by the player is placed in the history area for two items. "Music A" corresponding to the priority "high" and "music J" corresponding to the priority "medium" are stored in the empty area of. Further, when the music is not selected even once, all three items specified in the priority specification table 222da are stored in the history area.

As described above, in the fourth control example, when the number of times of music selection is small (the number of music selected once or more is less than three), the priority of the items to be arranged in the empty area of the history area is set to the priority. It is configured to be specified in advance by the specified table 222da. The priority setting table 222da is configured so that the music that is likely to be known to more players has a higher priority. With this configuration, even when the number of times a song is selected is small, it is possible to arrange a song that is likely to be selected by the player in the history area. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the convenience of the player when selecting a musical piece.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned rust loop discrimination table 222db will be described with reference to FIG. 153. FIG. 153 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the rust loop discrimination table 222db. As described above, this chorus loop determination table 222db is used to determine whether or not to perform loop reproduction of the chorus portion for which the reproduction has been completed when the reproduction of the music data corresponding to the chorus portion is completed during the final round. It is a data table referenced in.

As shown in FIG. 153, the chorus loop determination table 222db has a range of the reproduction time of the chorus portion in the currently playing music and the number of winnings determined to be capable of loop reproduction (entering the left specific winning opening 650a in the final round). The number of game balls that have been balled) is specified in association with each other. Here, as described above, the firing interval of the gaming balls in the pachinko machine 10 (the interval from the launching of one gaming ball to the launching of the next gaming ball) is configured to be 0.6 seconds at the shortest. are doing. During the jackpot, it is often considered that the player fires the game ball at the shortest firing interval, so in the final round, the game ball is left at intervals of about 0.6 seconds. To win a ball (win). As a result, it is possible to roughly predict the time until the ending effect is started based on the number of winnings in the final round. The rust loop determination table 222db allows loop reproduction of the rust portion when the remaining time until the ending effect predicted from the number of winnings in the final round is started is longer than the reproduction time of the rust portion, and the reproduction of the rust portion is allowed. Correspondence is stipulated so that the loop reproduction of the rust part is restricted when the time is less than the time. The length of the chorus portion of the music having the shortest chorus portion in the music A to the music Z and the music a is 7 seconds. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 153, the rust loop discrimination table 222db defines only the range in which the reproduction time (L) of the rust portion is 7 seconds or more.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 153, the number of winnings that allows loop reproduction of the rust portion in the range where the reproduction time (L) of the rust portion is 7 seconds or more and less than 7.6 seconds. , "0 to 3" are defined in association with each other. If the number of winnings is 3 or less, even if the 4th prize is detected immediately after the reproduction of the rust part is completed, the 5th to 10th 6 pieces will be completed by the end of the final round. It is possible to secure about 3.6 seconds (0.6 second interval x 6 pieces), which is the time until the winning of the minute is detected. In addition, as described above, the start timing of the ending effect can be delayed by up to 4 seconds after the final round of the jackpot ends. Therefore, there is a high possibility that 7.6 seconds or more will elapse before the ending effect is started, so if the chorus part has a playback time of less than 7.6 seconds, loop playback can be performed. There is a high possibility that the reproduction of the rust part will be completed by the start of the ending effect. Therefore, when the reproduction time (L) of the rust portion is in the range of less than 7.6 seconds, the rust loop determination table 222db allows the loop reproduction of the rust portion in the range where the number of winnings is 3 or less. It is stipulated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 153, in the range where the reproduction time (L) of the rust portion is 7.6 seconds or more and less than 8.2 seconds, the number of winnings that allows the loop reproduction of the rust portion is set. "0 to 2" are specified in association with each other. If the number of winnings is 2 or less, even if the 3rd prize is detected immediately after the reproduction of the rust part is completed, the 4th to 10th 7 pieces will be completed by the end of the final round. 8.2 seconds, which is the sum of about 4.2 seconds (0.6 second interval x 7 pieces) until the winning of the minute is detected and 4 seconds that can delay the start of the ending effect, is the chorus part. It can be secured as a time for performing loop playback. Therefore, if the rust portion has a reproduction time of less than 8.2 seconds, there is a high possibility that the reproduction of the rust portion will be completed by the start of the ending effect even if the loop reproduction is performed. Therefore, the reproduction time (L) of the rust portion. When is in the range of 7.6 seconds or more and less than 8.2 seconds, the rust loop discrimination table 222db is defined so as to allow loop reproduction of the rust portion in the range where the number of winnings is 2 or less. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 153, in the range where the reproduction time (L) of the rust portion is 8.2 seconds or more and less than 8.8 seconds, the number of winnings that allows the loop reproduction of the rust portion is set. "0,1" is specified in association with each other. If the number of winnings is 1 or less, even if the 2nd prize is detected immediately after the reproduction of the rust part is completed, the 3rd to 10th 8 pieces will be completed by the end of the final round. 8.8 seconds, which is the sum of about 4.8 seconds (0.6 second interval x 8 pieces) until the winning of the minute is detected and 4 seconds that can delay the start of the ending effect, is the chorus part. It can be secured as a time for performing loop playback. Therefore, if the rust portion has a reproduction time of less than 8.8 seconds, there is a high possibility that the reproduction of the rust portion will be completed by the start of the ending effect even if the loop reproduction is performed. When is in the range of 8.2 seconds or more and less than 8.8 seconds, the rust loop discrimination table 222db is defined so as to allow loop reproduction of the rust portion in the range where the number of winnings is 1 or less. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 153, in the range where the reproduction time (L) of the rust portion is 8.8 seconds or more and less than 9.4 seconds, the number of winnings that allows the loop reproduction of the rust portion is set. Only "0" is specified in association with each other. If the number of winnings is 0, even if the first winning is detected immediately after the reproduction of the rust part is completed, the second to tenth nines will be received by the end of the final round. 9.4 seconds, which is the sum of about 5.4 seconds (0.6 second interval x 9 pieces) until the winning of the prize is detected and 4 seconds that can delay the start of the ending effect, is the loop of the chorus part. It can be secured as time for reproduction. Therefore, if the rust portion has a reproduction time of less than 9.4 seconds, there is a high possibility that the reproduction of the rust portion will be completed by the start of the ending effect even if the loop reproduction is performed. When is in the range of 8.8 seconds or more and less than 9.4 seconds, the rust loop discrimination table 222db is defined so as to allow loop reproduction of the rust portion in the range where the number of winnings is 0 or less. ing.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 153, when the reproduction time (L) of the rust portion is in the range of 9.4 seconds or more, loop reproduction is not allowed. This is because there is a high possibility that the ending effect will start during the reproduction of the chorus portion regardless of the number of winnings.

As described above, in the fourth control example, when the reproduction of the rust portion is completed in the final round, the rust loop determination table 222db is configured to determine whether or not to reproduce the rust portion in a loop. With this configuration, whether the chorus part can be played back in a loop before the ending effect is started (whether it is unlikely that the ending effect will be started during the playback of the chorus part). Can be accurately determined. Therefore, since the possibility that the ending effect is started during the reproduction of the chorus portion can be reduced, the chorus portion can be completely reproduced during the final round (and the ending delay period) of the jackpot. ..

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 151 (b). FIG. 151 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 151 (b), the RAM 223 in the fourth control example has a loop discrimination flag 223 da and a reproduction mode storage area 223 db with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the third control example (see FIG. 142 (b)). And the winning number counter 223dc are added.

The loop determination flag 223da is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period for determining whether or not the loop reproduction of the rust portion is possible. If this loop determination flag 223da is on, it indicates that it is a period for determining whether or not loop reproduction is possible (that is, the final round of the jackpot), and if it is off, it indicates that it is not a period for determining whether or not loop reproduction is possible. .. The loop discriminant flag 223da is set on at the start of the final round of the jackpot (see S5421 in FIG. 161) and turned off at the beginning of the ending period of the jackpot (see S4484 in FIG. 159).

The reproduction mode storage area 223db is a storage area for storing data indicating the reproduction mode of the music (whether it is for 5R, 8R / 10R, or 16R). In this reproduction mode storage area 223db, data indicating the reproduction mode according to the number of rounds of the big hit and the lottery result of whether or not the pseudo small round effect can be executed is stored (see S5841 and S5842 in FIG. 160). Based on the data stored in the reproduction mode storage area 223db, the reproduction mode when the music is determined is set.

The winning number counter 223dc is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won a prize for the right specific winning opening 65a or the left specific winning opening 650a in each round of big hits. The initial value of the winning number counter 223dc is set to 0, and each time a winning command output when a winning command for the right specific winning opening 65a or the left specific winning opening 650a is detected in the main control device 110 is received. The value is incremented by 1 (see S4486 in FIG. 159). Further, when each round is completed, the value is reset to 0 (see S4484 in FIG. 159 and S5521 in FIG. 164). When the reproduction of the rust portion is completed in the final round of the jackpot (while the loop discrimination flag 223da is on), the value of the winning number counter 223dc and the above-mentioned rust loop discrimination table 222db are referred to to display the rust portion. Whether or not to perform loop reproduction is determined (see S5905 in FIG. 158).

Next, the configuration of the RAM 303 of the audio output device 226 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. 154 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 303 in the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 154, the RAM 303 in the fourth control example has a provisional music selection flag 303g added to the configuration of the RAM 303 (see FIG. 126) in the third control example (and the second control example). Is different. Since other configurations are the same as those of the above-described third control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The provisional music selection flag 303g is a flag indicating whether or not the chorus portion of the music (temporarily selected) arranged in the music selection area by the operation of the player's operation button 230 should be loop-played during the music selection period. be. When the provisional music selection flag 303g is on, it indicates that the loop reproduction of the rust portion should be performed, and when it is off, it indicates that the loop reproduction of the rust portion should not be performed. This provisional song selection flag 303g is set to ON every time the operation button 230 is operated by the player in the state where the song selection menu screen is displayed and a new item is arranged in the song selection area (FIG. 168). See S9507). In addition, it is set to off when the player decides the music during the music selection period in the 5 round jackpot (the player presses the center button CB), or when the music selection period ends in the jackpot other than the 5th round (the player presses the center button CB). See S9233 and S9239 in FIG. 167). While the provisional song selection flag 303g is on, the chorus portion is controlled to be played in a loop (see S9603 in FIG. 169).

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 155 to 165, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 155, the main process 11 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the main process 11.

Of the main processes 11 (see FIG. 155), in each of the processes S4101 to S4111, S4114 to S4118, and S4152, S4101 to S4111, S4113 to S4118 of the main process 10 (not shown) in the third control example, respectively. And the same process as each process of S4152 is executed. Further, in the main process 11 (see FIG. 155) in the fourth control example, when the process of S4111 is completed, the operation detection process 11 is executed instead of the operation detection process 10 (see FIG. 144) in the third control example. (S4171). The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 156, but the operation detection process 11 (S4171) monitors the operation (pressing) of the operation button 230 and operates in the same manner as the operation detection process 10 (see FIG. 144). This is a process for executing control according to the operation content when is detected.

When the operation detection process 11 (S4171) is completed, next, in the final round of the jackpot, when the reproduction of the rust portion is completed, the rust partial loop process for determining whether or not to reproduce the rust portion in a loop is executed. (S4172). The details of this rust partial loop processing (S4172) will be described later with reference to FIG. 158. Further, when the chorus partial loop process (S4172) is completed, the command determination process 11 for performing control according to the type of the command received from the main control device 110 is executed (S4173), and the process shifts to S4162. ..

Next, the details of the above-mentioned operation detection process 11 (S4171) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 156. As described above, the operation detection process 11 (S4171) is a process executed in place of the operation detection process 10 (see FIG. 144) in the third control example. In each of the operation detection processes 11 (S4171), S5101 to S5106, S5109, and S5110, each of S5101 to S5106, S5109, and S5110 of the operation detection process 10 (see FIG. 144) in the third control example, respectively. The same process as the process is executed.

Further, in the operation detection process 11 (see FIG. 156) in the fourth control example, if it is determined that the operation for the center button CB is detected in the process of S5106 (S5106: Yes), the music is determined in the third control example. Instead of the process (see FIG. 145), the music determination process 11 is executed (S5131), and this process is terminated. The music determination process 11 (S5131) is a process for determining a music to be played after the end of the music selection period or immediately after the selection, depending on the type of the selected item and the number of rounds of the jackpot. The details of the music determination process 11 (S5131) will be described later with reference to FIG. 157.

Further, in the operation detection process 11 (see FIG. 156) in the fourth control example, when the process of S5110 is completed, the chorus portion of the music corresponding to the value of the menu position pointer 223ab updated by the process of S5109 is played back in a loop. A temporary music selection command for voice is set for this (S5132), and this process is terminated. The audio temporary music selection command set here is output to the audio output device 226 in the command output process (S4102) of the main process 11 (see FIG. 155). When the voice output device 226 receives the voice provisional music selection command, the voice output device 226 sets the start of playback from the chorus portion of the music indicated by the received command. As a result, every time the player operates the operation button 230 and a new item is arranged in the music selection area, the rust portion corresponding to the arranged item can be reproduced. Therefore, not only the music name but also the melody of the chorus part can be taken into consideration when selecting the music, so that the favorite music can be selected more accurately. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be further enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the details of the above-mentioned music determination process 11 (S5131) will be described. As described above, the music determination process 11 (S5131) is a process executed in place of the music determination process (see FIG. 145) in the third control example.

Of the music determination processes 11 (see FIG. 157) in the fourth control example, each process of S5801 to S5806 is the same as each process of S5801 to S5806 of the music determination process (see FIG. 145) in the third control example, respectively. The process is executed. Further, in the music determination process 11 (see FIG. 157) in the fourth control example, random music selection is not determined by the player in the process of S5801 (the most significant bit of the menu position pointer 223ab is not on (1)). When the determination is made (S5801: No), then the data stored in the reproduction mode storage area 223db is read (S5811), and it is determined whether the read data is the data corresponding to the reproduction mode for 5R (S5811). S5812).

In the process of S5812, the data corresponding to the reproduction mode for 5R is not stored in the reproduction mode storage area 223db (that is, the data corresponding to the reproduction mode for 8R / 10R or 16R is stored). If it is determined (S5812: No), the process shifts to S5802. On the other hand, in the process of S5812, when it is determined that the data corresponding to the reproduction mode for 5R is stored in the reproduction mode storage area 223db (S5812: Yes), a voice for notifying the cancellation of the loop reproduction of the rust portion. Set the loop release command (S5813), and end this process. The voice loop release command set here is output to the voice output device 226 in the command output process (S4102) of the main process 11 (see FIG. 155). Upon receiving the audio loop release command, the audio output device 226 cancels the loop reproduction of the chorus portion (that is, the provisional song selection flag 303g is set to off). As a result, when the reproduction time of the rust portion currently being reproduced ends, the rust portion is not loop-reproduced, and the reproduction of the part (music data) defined in the next reproduction order of the rust portion is set. After that, the data for each musical piece is reproduced in order according to the reproduction order of the data for the musical piece. As a result, in a 5-round jackpot where the number of rounds is small and the period until the jackpot ends (that is, the period during which the song can be played) tends to be short, the song is not determined (that is, without waiting for the end of the song selection period). To) You can play music. Therefore, in a 5-round jackpot with a small number of rounds, it is possible to effectively utilize a relatively short period until the end of the jackpot to play the music.

Further, in the music determination process 11 (see FIG. 157) in the fourth control example, when the processing of S5805 is completed, the reproduction of the music for the music selection period is set (S5814), and the processing shifts to S5806. When random song selection is decided (S5801: Yes), it is the song selection that sets the playback of the song for the song selection period without playing the chorus part of the song decided by the lottery using the random song selection table 222ca. By determining the random song selection many times during the period, it is possible to prevent an irregular selection method of repeatedly determining whether or not the chorus part of "music a" is played, and for one jackpot, "music a". This is because it is possible to confirm whether or not "" is reproduced only once.

Next, the above-mentioned rust partial loop processing (S4172) will be described with reference to FIG. 158. FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing this rust partial loop process (S4172). As described above, this rust partial loop process (S4172) is a process for determining whether or not to loop-regenerate the rust portion when the reproduction of the rust portion is completed in the final round of the jackpot.

In the rust partial loop processing (see FIG. 158), first, it is determined whether or not the loop discrimination flag 223da is on (S5901), and when it is determined that the loop discrimination flag 223da is off (S5901: No), Since there is no possibility of loop playback of the rust part, this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5901 when it is determined that the loop determination flag 223da is on (S5901: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the part currently being played is a rust portion (S5902), and the rust portion is determined. If it is determined that is not being reproduced (S5902: No), there is no possibility that the rust portion is reproduced in a loop, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5902, when it is determined that the part being reproduced is the rust portion (S5902: Yes), then the remaining reproduction time of the rust portion (value of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb) is 0. If it is determined (S5903) and the remaining reproduction time of the rust portion (value of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb) is not 0 (S5903: No), the book is used as it is in order to continue the reproduction of the rust portion. End the process. On the other hand, in the process of S5903, when it is determined that the remaining reproduction time of the rust portion (value of the remaining reproduction time timer 223bb) becomes 0 (S5903: Yes), it is determined whether or not the loop reproduction of the rust portion can be executed. The processing of S5904 to S5907 is executed.

More specifically, first, the chorus loop discrimination table 222db (see FIG. 153) is read (S5904), the specified contents of the read chorus loop discrimination table 222db, and the playback time (L) of the chorus portion of the music being played this time. , It is determined whether or not the loop reproduction of the rust portion can be executed based on the value of the winning number counter 223dc (S5905). As described above, the rust loop determination table 222db (see FIG. 153) is set to allow loop reproduction of the rust portion when there is a high possibility that the rust portion will end before the ending effect is started. Has been done.

Next, when it is determined whether the determination result by the process of S5905 is the determination result corresponding to the execution of the loop reproduction (S5906) and it is determined that the determination result is not the determination result corresponding to the execution of the loop reproduction (S5906: No. ), This process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5906, when it is determined that the determination result corresponds to the execution of the loop reproduction (S5906: Yes), a loop reproduction command for voice indicating the loop reproduction of the rust portion is set (S5907). , End this process. The voice loop reproduction command set here is output to the voice output device 226 in the command output process (S4102) of the main process 11 (see FIG. 155). When the audio output device 226 receives the audio loop reproduction command, the audio output device 226 reproduces the rust portion that has finished reproduction from the beginning again. As a result, the player can hear the chorus part, which is the most exciting part of the music, more times before the ending effect is started. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of satisfaction.

Next, the hit-related process 11 (S4381) in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 159. The hit-related process 11 (S4381) is a process executed in place of the hit-related process 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example. Of the hit-related processes 11 (S4381) in the fourth control example, the hit-related processes 10 (FIG. 146) in the third control example in each of the processes S4401 to S4404, S4406, S4407, S4409, S4462, and S4464 to S4466, respectively. The same processes as those of S4401 to S4404, S4406, S4407, S4409, S4462, and S4464 to S4466 of (see) are executed.

Further, in the hit-related process 11 (see FIG. 159) in the fourth control example, when it is determined that the opening command is included in the command received from the main control device 110 in the process of S4404 (S4404: Yes), instead of the pseudo small round lottery process (see FIG. 147) in the third control example, the pseudo small round lottery process 11 is executed (S4481), and the process shifts to S4406. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 160, but this pseudo small round lottery process 11 (S4481) executes a pseudo small round effect as in the pseudo small round lottery process (see FIG. 147) in the third control example. This is a process for determining whether or not it is possible.

Further, in the hit-related process 11 (see FIG. 159) in the fourth control example, when it is determined that the round number command is included in the command received from the main control device 110 in the process of S4407 (S4407). : Yes), instead of the round number command process 10 (see FIG. 148) in the third control example, the round number command process 11 is executed (S4482), and this process is terminated. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 161. However, the round number command process 11 (S4482) is a process for performing control according to the number of rounds indicated by the round number command.

Further, in the hit-related process 11 (see FIG. 159) in the fourth control example, when it is determined in the process of S4462 that the command received from the main control device 110 includes an interval command (S4462: Yes), instead of the interval command process 10 (see FIG. 149) in the third control example, the interval command 11 is executed (S4483), and this process is terminated. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 164, but the interval command process 11 (S4483) is a process for performing control according to the type of interval (which round of the interval is).

Further, in the hit-related process 11 (see FIG. 159) in the fourth control example, when it is determined that the ending command is included in the command received from the main control device 110 in the process of S4409 (S4409: Yes), the loop determination flag 223da is set to off, the winning number counter 223dc is reset to 0 (S4484), and the process shifts to S4464. By this process of S4484, the period for determining the loop reproduction of the rust portion can be terminated.

Further, in the hit-related process 11 (see FIG. 159) in the fourth control example, when it is determined that the music command is not included in the command received from the main control device 110 in the process of S4465 (S4465: No), then, if it is determined whether or not the winning command is included in the command received from the main control device 110 (S4485), and if it is determined that the winning command is included (S4485: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 223dc (S4486), and this processing is terminated. By updating the value of the winning number counter 223dc according to the winning command, it is possible to grasp the progress of each round of the jackpot (rough remaining time until the round ends). Therefore, in the final round, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not there is a sufficient period left to reproduce the rust portion to the end by adding the counter value of the winning number counter 223dc. On the other hand, in the process of S4485, if it is determined that the winning command is not included in the command received from the main control device 110 (S4485: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160, the details of the above-mentioned pseudo small round lottery process 11 (S4481) will be described. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing a pseudo small round lottery process 11 (S4481). As described above, the pseudo small round lottery process 11 (S4481) is a process executed in place of the pseudo small round lottery process (see FIG. 147) in the third control example. Of the pseudo small round lottery processes 11 (S4481) in the fourth control example, each process of S5831 to S5838 has the same as each process of S5831 to S5838 of the pseudo small round lottery process (see FIG. 147) in the third control example. The same process is executed.

Further, in the pseudo small round lottery process 11 (see FIG. 160) in the fourth control example, when it is determined that the pseudo small round effect is to be executed in the process of S5834 (S5834: Yes), whether or not the pseudo small round effect can be executed. At the same time as the lottery, data indicating the reproduction mode of the music determined by the lottery using the pseudo small round lottery table 222cc (see FIG. 152 (a)) is stored in the reproduction mode storage area 223db (S5841) and processed. Move to S5835. When a music is determined during the music selection period based on the data stored by the process of S5841, the reproduction mode of the determined music can be appropriately set. As a result, in a part (predetermined ratio) when a pseudo small round effect (an effect as if it is a (unfavorable) jackpot with a smaller number of rounds than the actual number of rounds) is executed, only the audio mode is used. It is possible to set the reproduction mode corresponding to the actual number of rounds of the jackpot. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player know from the voice mode that the pseudo-small round effect is executed before the continuous effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of superiority to the player who can detect that the pseudo-small round production is being executed at an early stage.

Further, in the pseudo small round lottery process 11 (see FIG. 160) in the fourth control example, in the process of S5831, the jackpot won this time is neither jackpot A nor jackpot D (that is, jackpots B, C, E, and F). When it is determined (S5831: No) and when it is determined that the pseudo small round effect is not executed in the processing of S5834 (S5834: No), the music corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot The data indicating the reproduction mode is stored in the reproduction mode storage area 223db (S5842), and the present process is terminated. Specifically, if the jackpot this time is either jackpot B or C (5 round jackpot), while storing the data corresponding to the reproduction mode of "for 5R", either jackpot E or F (5 round jackpot) ( If it is a 10-round jackpot), the data corresponding to the reproduction mode of "for 8R / 10R" is stored. Further, when the jackpot this time is jackpot A (8 round jackpot) and the pseudo small round effect is not executed, the data corresponding to the reproduction mode of "for 8R / 10R" is stored in the reproduction mode storage area 223db. On the other hand, when the jackpot D (16 round jackpot) and the pseudo small round effect is not executed, the data corresponding to the reproduction mode of "for 16R" is stored.

By executing this pseudo small round lottery process 11 (see FIG. 160), the reproduction mode of the music (the timing at which the reproduction of the music is started and the reproduction position of the music) is changed according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Can be done. Then, in a part (predetermined ratio) when the pseudo small round effect is executed, it is possible to set the reproduction mode in which only the voice mode corresponds to the actual number of rounds of the jackpot. This makes it possible for the player to detect from the audio aspect that the pseudo-small round effect is executed before the continuous effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of superiority to the player who can detect that the pseudo-small round production is being executed at an early stage.

Next, the details of the round number command process 11 (S4482) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 161. As described above, the round number command process 11 (S4482) is a process executed in place of the round number command process 10 (see FIG. 148) in the third control example.

Of the round number command processes 11 (see FIG. 161) in the fourth control example, in each of the processes S5401 to S5406 and S5411, the round number command processes 10 (see FIG. 148) in the third control example are S5401 to S5406, respectively. , And the same processing as each processing of S5411 is executed. Further, in the round number command process 11 (see FIG. 161) in the fourth control example, when it is determined in the process of S5402 that the number of rounds notified by the current round number command is the final round (S5402: Yes). ), The loop determination flag 223da is set to ON (S5421), and the process shifts to S5403. By setting the loop determination flag 223da to ON in the process of S5421, it is possible to determine whether or not to reproduce the rust portion in a loop at the timing when the reproduction time of the rust portion elapses during the final round. This makes it possible to increase the chances that the rust portion will be regenerated during the execution of one jackpot.

Further, in the round number command process 11 (see FIG. 161) in the fourth control example, when it is determined in the process of S5406 that the number of rounds notified by the current round number command is the first round (S5406: Yes), instead of the music selection period setting process (see FIG. 132) in the third control example (and the second control example), the music selection period setting process 11 is executed (S5422), and this process is terminated. The details of the music selection period setting process 11 (S5422) will be described with reference to FIG. 162.

FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the music selection period setting process 11 (S5422). In each of the processes S5205, S5206, S5208 to S5213, S5221, and S5222 in the song selection period setting process 11 (S5422), the song selection period setting process (see FIG. 132) in the third control example (and the second control example), respectively. ), The same processes as those of S5205, S5206, S5208 to S5213, S5221, and S5222 are executed.

Further, in the music selection period setting process 11 (see FIG. 162) in the fourth control example, first, the history area setting process for setting the items to be arranged in the history area is executed (S5231), and the process shifts to S5205. do. The details of this history area setting process (S5231) will be described with reference to FIG. 163.

FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the history area setting process (S5231). As described above, this history area setting process (S5231) is a process for setting items to be arranged in the history area. In this history area setting process (S5231), first, the data stored in the music selection count storage area 223ac (see FIG. 105 (b)) is read (S5271), and there are three or more songs having a playback count of 1 or more. Whether or not it is determined (S5272). If it is determined in the process of S5272 that there are less than three songs having a play count of 1 or more (S5272: No), among the data defined in the song selection count storage area 223ac, the data having a play count of 1 or more. (S5273), and the read data is stored in the history area of the item arrangement storage area 223aa (see FIG. 105A) (storage area corresponding to the value range "17H" to "19H" of the menu position pointer 223ab). On the other hand, the data is stored in descending order of the number of reproductions (S5274). Next, among the history areas, the priority specified in the priority specification table 222da (see FIG. 152 (b)) is higher than the remaining area (vacant area) in which data was not stored in the processing of S5274. Data is stored in order from the item (S5275), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5272, when it is determined that the number of songs having a playback count of 1 or more is 3 or more (S5272: Yes), 3 data are read out from the music selection count storage area 223ac in descending order of the number of playbacks. (S5276), the three read data are stored in the history area of the item arrangement storage area 223aa in descending order of the number of reproductions (S5277), and the present process is terminated.

By executing this history area setting process (see FIG. 163), even when the number of times of music selection is small (the number of music selected once or more is less than 3), the empty area of the history area is covered. Items that are likely to be selected by the player (items with high priority specified in the priority specification table 222da) can be arranged. More specifically, most players who have seen the motifs in the past, such as the opening song (theme song), ending song, and insert song of the work that became the motif of the pachinko machine 10. The songs that you have definitely listened to are specified as high priority items. With this configuration, even when the number of times a song is selected is small, items that are likely to be known by more players can be arranged in the history area. That is, regardless of the number of times the music is selected, the music that is likely to be selected by the player can be arranged in the history area, so that the convenience of the player when selecting the music can be enhanced.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned interval command processing 11 (S4483) will be described with reference to FIG. 164. Of the interval command processes 11 (S4483) in the fourth control example, in each of the processes S5501 to S5506 and S5511 to S5514, the interval command processes 10 (see FIG. 149) S5501 to S5506 in the third control example, respectively, and The same process as each process of S5511 to S5514 is executed.

Further, in the interval command processing 11 (see FIG. 164) in the fourth control example, when the processing of S5501 is completed, the winning number counter 223dc is reset to 0 (S5521), and the processing is shifted to S5511. By resetting the winning number counter 223dc each time an interval command is received, the number of game balls that have won in the specific winning opening (right specific winning opening 65a or left specific winning opening 650a) in each round of big hits. Can be accurately grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

Further, in the interval command processing 11 (see FIG. 164) in the fourth control example, in the S5506 processing, the interval period notified by the current interval command is the interval period after the first round is completed. If it is determined (S5506: Yes), the selected music setting process for setting the playback of the music selected (determined) by the player during the music selection period (that is, the first round) is executed (S5522). This process ends. The details of this selected music setting process (S5522) will be described with reference to FIG. 165.

FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the selected music setting process (S5522). In this selected music setting process (S5522), first, the music corresponding to the data stored in the music type storage area 223db is specified (S5551), and then the data stored in the reproduction mode storage area 223db is supported. The reproduction mode is specified (S5552). Then, it is determined whether or not the reproduction mode specified in the process of S5552 is the reproduction mode for 5R (S5553), and if it is determined that the reproduction mode is for 5R (S5553: Yes), then, It is determined whether or not the music during the music selection period is being played (S5554). If it is determined in the process of S5554 that the music during the music selection period is being played (S5554: Yes), the player decides whether or not the music selection menu screen is displayed even once during the music selection period. This means that the playback of the music corresponding to the data stored in the music type storage area 223bd is not set. Therefore, the sound for playing the music specified by the processing of S5551 from the chorus part. The selected music command is set (S5555), and the process shifts to S5559.

On the other hand, in the process of S5554, when it is determined that the music for the music selection period is not being played (S5554: No), the player displays the music selection menu screen during the music selection period and other than "random music selection" (that is,). , Any of music A to music Z) is selected. As described above, when the music is determined in the state where the reproduction mode for 5R is set, the loop reproduction of the chorus part of the music is canceled at that time, and the music data is stored from the reproduction position that was being reproduced at the time of determination. The music is set to start playing according to the playback order. That is, since it is not necessary to newly set the reproduction of the music at the end of the music selection period, the processing of S5555 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S5559.

Further, in the process of S5553, when it is determined that the reproduction mode specified in the process of S5552 is not the reproduction mode for 5R (S5553: No), then the reproduction mode specified in the process of S5552 is the reproduction mode for 16R. It is determined whether it is an embodiment (S5556). If it is determined in the processing of S5556 that the reproduction mode for 16R is not specified (the reproduction mode for 8R / 10R is specified) (S5556: No), the music specified by the processing of S5551 is the verse 1 portion. A selected music command for audio to be played from is set (S5557), and the process shifts to S5559. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S5556 that the specified reproduction mode is the reproduction mode for 16R (S5556: Yes), the audio selection music command for reproducing the music specified by the processing of S5551 from the intro portion. Is set (S5558), and the process shifts to S5559.

In the process of S5559, 1 is added to the data corresponding to the number of times of music selection of the music played this time in the music selection number storage area 223ac (S5559), the music selection menu screen is closed, and the menu display flag 223ae and the music selection permission flag 223ad are closed. And is set to off (S5560) to end this process.

By executing this selected music setting process (see FIG. 165), at the end of the music selection period, the playback of the music selected by the player is set in the playback mode according to the data stored in the playback mode storage area 223db. can do.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio output device in the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 166 to 169, various control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the fourth control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 166, the main process 11 executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the fourth control example will be described. This main process 11 is a process executed in place of the main process 9 (see FIG. 136) in the third control example (and the second control example).

Of the main processes 11 (see FIG. 166), in each of the processes S9003 to S9007, S9011, and S9013, S9003 to S9007 of the main process 9 (see FIG. 136) in the third control example (and the second control example), respectively. The same processing as each processing of S9011 and S9013 is executed. Further, in the main process 11 (see FIG. 166) in the fourth control example, when the process of S9011 is completed, the command determination process 9 (see FIG. 137) in the third control example (and the second control example) is subsequently replaced. Then, the command determination process 11 is executed (S9021), and the process is transferred to S9013. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 167, but the command determination process 11 (S9021) is a command received from the voice lamp control device 113 as in the command determination process 9 (see FIG. 137) in the third control example. This is a process for executing control according to the type of.

Further, in the main process 11 (see FIG. 166) in the fourth control example, after the process of S9013 is completed, the chorus portion of the item (music) arranged (provisionally selected) by the player in the music selection area is then performed. Is executed during the provisional music selection period for loop reproduction (S9022), and the processing is transferred to S9003. The details of the process during the provisional song selection period (S9022) will be described later with reference to FIG. 169.

Next, the details of the command determination process 11 (S9021) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 167. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 11 (S9021). As described above, the command determination process 11 (S9021) is a process executed in place of the command determination process 9 (see FIG. 137) in the third control example. In each of the command determination processes 11 (see FIG. 167), S9201 to S9205, S9207, S9214, S9221, and S9222, the command determination processes 9 (see FIG. 137) in the third control example, S9201 to S9205, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S9207, S9214, S9221 and S9222 is executed.

Further, in the command determination process 11 (see FIG. 167) in the fourth control example, when the process of S9205 is completed, the pointer value corresponding to the part indicated by the selected music command for voice received from the voice lamp control device 113 is set. The timer value corresponding to the playback time of the part for which playback is set is set in the music timer 303d (S9231) while being set in the music pointer 303b, and the process shifts to S9207. Further, when the processing of S9207 is completed, the reproduction from the music data corresponding to the part indicated by the voice selection music command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S9232), and the provisional music selection flag 303g is set to off. (S9233), this process is terminated.

Further, in the command determination process 11 (see FIG. 167) in the fourth control example, when it is determined in the process of S9204 that the unprocessed command does not include the selected music command for voice (S9204: No. ), Then, it is determined whether or not the unprocessed command includes the voice loop reproduction command (that is, the command for instructing the loop reproduction of the chorus portion in the final round) (S9234). In the processing of S9234, if it is determined that the unprocessed command includes the audio loop playback command (S9234: Yes), the timer value corresponding to the playback time of the chorus portion at which the playback ends is set to the music timer 303d. At the same time as resetting to, the reproduction of the rust portion at which the reproduction ends is reset (S9235), and this processing ends. By executing the process of S9235, the rust portion can be regenerated in a loop in the final round of the jackpot. Therefore, since the rust portion can be regenerated more times during one jackpot, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S9234 that the loop playback command for voice is not included in the unprocessed command, then the temporary music selection command for voice (new in the music selection area) is included in the unprocessed command. It is determined whether or not the command) for instructing the loop reproduction of the chorus portion of the music arranged in is included (S9236). In the processing of S9236, if it is determined that the provisional music selection command for voice is included in the unprocessed command (S9236: Yes), the item (temporarily selected) newly placed in the music selection area (music). ), The provisional music selection command process for loop playback is executed (S9237), and this process is terminated. The details of this provisional music selection command processing (S9237) will be described later with reference to FIG. 168.

Further, in the processing of S9236, if it is determined that the unprocessed command does not include the voice provisional song selection command (S9236: No), then the voice loop release command is included in the unprocessed command. It is determined whether or not it is contained (S9238). In the process of S9238, when it is determined that the unprocessed command includes a voice loop release command (a command instructing to release the loop playback of the chorus part of the provisionally selected song in the 5-round jackpot). (S9238: Yes), by turning off the provisional music selection flag 303g, the loop playback of the chorus portion of the provisionally selected music is set to be canceled (S9239), and this processing is terminated. By canceling the loop reproduction of the rust portion in the process of S9239, the music data can be reproduced in order according to the reproduction order of the music data after the reproduction time of the rust portion has elapsed. As a result, in a 5-round jackpot where the number of rounds is small and the period until the jackpot ends (that is, the period during which the song can be played) tends to be short, the song is not determined (that is, without waiting for the end of the song selection period). To) You can play music. Therefore, in a 5-round jackpot with a small number of rounds, it is possible to effectively utilize a relatively short period until the end of the jackpot to play the music.

On the other hand, in the process of S9238, when it is determined that the loop reproduction command for voice is not included in the unprocessed command, the process is shifted to S9221.

Next, with reference to FIG. 168, the details of the above-mentioned provisional music selection command processing (S9237) will be described. As described above, this provisional music selection command processing (S9237) is a processing for loop-playing the chorus portion of the item (musical piece) newly arranged (temporarily selected) in the music selection area.

In the tentative music selection command processing (see FIG. 168), first, it is determined whether or not the tentative music selection command indicates random music selection (S9501), and if it is determined that the tentative music selection command indicates random music selection (S9501: Yes). ), Set the reproduction of the music for the music selection period (S9502), and end this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S9501 that the received temporary music selection command is not a temporary music selection command indicating random music selection (S9501: No), an audio file (music data group) corresponding to the music indicated by the command is input. It is read from the voice file storage area 302a, and the read voice file is stored in the music data group storage area 303a (S9503).

When the processing of S9503 is completed, the pointer value corresponding to the chorus 1 part of the music notified by the command is set to the music pointer 303b, and the timer value corresponding to the playback time of the chorus 1 part is set to the music. Set to the timer 303d (S9504). Next, the maximum value of the music pointer 303b is stored in the maximum value storage area 303c (S9505), and the reproduction of the music data corresponding to the chorus 1 portion is set (S9506). Then, the provisional music selection flag 303g is set to ON (S9507), and this processing is terminated.

By executing this provisional music selection command processing (see FIG. 168), the loop reproduction of the chorus 1 portion of the provisionally selected music can be started. As a result, the player can select a favorite music by taking into account not only the music name displayed on the music selection menu screen but also the melody of the chorus part of the music. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the convenience of the player when selecting a musical piece.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 169, the details of the provisional music selection period processing (S9022) executed in the above-mentioned main processing 11 (see FIG. 166) will be described. As described above, the process during the provisional music selection period (S9022) is a process for loop-playing the chorus portion of the music when the music is temporarily selected (arranged in the music selection area).

In this provisional music selection period processing (see FIG. 169), first, it is determined whether or not the provisional music selection flag 303g is on (S9601), and when it is determined that the provisional music selection flag 303g is off (S9601 :. No) Since it means that the music has not been tentatively selected, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S9601, when it is determined that the provisional music selection flag 303g is on (S9601: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the reproduction end timing of the music data being reproduced (S9602), and the reproduction is completed. If it is determined that it is not the timing (S9602: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S9602, if it is determined that it is the reproduction end timing of the music data being reproduced (the value of the music timer 303d is 0) (S9602: Yes), the reproduction of the rust 1 portion is started. Reset (S9603), reset the playback time corresponding to the chorus 1 portion to the music timer 303d (S9604), and end this process.

By executing this process during the provisional music selection period (see FIG. 169), one chorus portion of the provisionally selected music (arranged in the music selection area) can be repeatedly reproduced. Therefore, it is possible to more easily select a favorite music, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the player.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example, when the number of items to be set for the history area is small (less than 3), the empty area of the history area (items with high selection frequency are not arranged). The priority (priority) of the items to be placed in the area) is specified. This priority is higher for songs that are more likely to be known by more players (for example, the theme song (opening song) of the work that became the motif of the pachinko machine 10, the ending song, the insert song, etc.). Is set to. With this configuration, even when the number of times a song is selected is small, songs that are likely to be selected by the player can be placed in the history area, which can improve the convenience of the player. can.

Further, in the fourth control example, when the reproduction of the rust portion is completed during the final round, it is determined whether or not the rust portion is repeatedly reproduced according to the progress of the final round. More specifically, it is possible to end the chorus part between the end of the reproduction of the chorus part and the end of the final round (or the end of the period during which the ending effect can be delayed). If there is a high possibility that the chorus part will be played repeatedly, and if there is a high possibility that the chorus part will end in the middle (the ending effect will start in the middle of playing the chorus part), the chorus part will not be repeated. The playback is set according to the playback order of the music data. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the rust portion is not cut off in the middle of the final round and can be reproduced in a perfect shape.

Further, in the fourth control example, each time the player operates the operation button 230 to arrange a different item in the music selection area (temporary music selection) during the music selection period, the chorus portion of the music corresponding to the arranged item is provided. Is configured to be reproduced. As a result, not only the music name displayed on the music selection menu screen but also the melody of the most characteristic chorus part in the music can be added to select the music. Further, in the fourth control example, when the music is determined during the music selection period, the reproduction start position and the reproduction start timing of the music are changed according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Specifically, in the case of a jackpot with a large number of rounds (16 rounds), when the song selection period ends, playback is started from the beginning (intro part) of the song, and the jackpot of 10 rounds and 8 rounds. In the case of, when the music selection period ends, playback is started from the A-melody part of the music (that is, skipping the intro part). On the other hand, in the case of a big hit with a small number of rounds (5 rounds), when the player decides the music, the music is continued to be played from the continuation of the chorus part that is already being played (the music selection period ends). The music is played from the front). With this configuration, even with a small number of rounds, the rust portion can be heard by the player for a longer period of time.

In this fourth control example, when there are few items to be arranged in the history area (when the number of songs selected by the player at least once is less than three), the priority setting table is set for the empty area of the history area. The configuration is such that the data indicating the music having the highest priority specified in 222da is stored in order, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regardless of the number of empty areas in the history area, the items arranged in the history area may be stored in the item arrangement storage area 223aa in order from the data indicating the music having the highest priority. With this configuration, even if the player has selected many songs, the songs that are relatively likely to be selected by the player (high priority) can be operated with a relatively small number of operations. It can be set to an arrangement that can be moved to the music selection area with.

In the fourth control example, when the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen is determined, the storage area of the item arrangement storage area 223aa can be selected with a small number of operations (history area in the item arrangement storage area 223aa). On the other hand, among the items having one or more selections, a maximum of three items are stored in descending order of the number of selections. Then, if the number of items arranged in the history area is less than 3, the item to be arranged in the empty area of the history area is added and set from the items whose selection count is 0, but this control is set. It is not limited to the control when determining the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen. It can be diverted as long as it is controlled to set a predetermined number of data for a specific range of storage areas in a storage means such as RAM. In other words, in the storage means, a predetermined number of data are set for the first storage area and the second storage area, and the first storage area has a specific condition. It can be diverted as long as it controls to store the data satisfying the above conditions and arrange the other data in the second storage area. Specifically, for example, a player selects a predetermined menu screen (for example, a game menu screen or a menu screen for selecting an effect mode in a reach effect) for selecting one item from a plurality of items. When displaying multiple items including possible items and non-selectable items at the same time (for example, each time the player accomplishes a preset predetermined mission (task), the selectable items increase. It may be diverted to (when displaying a menu with specifications to be used). That is, even if the items that can be selected by the player are preferentially arranged for a specific display range and the control is used for setting data for arranging the remaining items in other display ranges. good. In this case, first, the data corresponding to the item to be displayed in the specific display range is set. Then, when a sufficient number of items can be set to be displayed in a specific display range, the remaining data is continuously set as items to be displayed in another display range. On the other hand, when the number of items less than the number of items that can be displayed in a specific display range can be selected by the player, the items that the player cannot select as the items to be displayed in the specific display range. The data may be set so that the data is displayed in a specific display range in the order of the items having the highest priority. As a method of setting the priority in this case, for example, the higher the priority is, the easier it is to switch to the selectable state (the item that switches to the selectable state by completing a mission with a relatively easy difficulty level). It may be set as follows.

In this fourth control example, when the number of items to be arranged in the history area (items whose number of selections is one or more) is less than three, the priority (priority) of the items to be additionally arranged in the history area is set. The composition was such that the more frequently used songs (opening song (theme song), ending song, insert song, etc.) used in the work that became the motif of the pachinko machine 10, the higher the priority, but the composition is not limited to this. .. The priority may be set arbitrarily, and for example, the music that is frequently used in the game of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the music that is played during the reach production) is configured to have a higher priority. You may. Further, for example, it may be configured so that the player can set the priority during the normal game.

In this fourth control example, when there are few songs (less than 3) whose number of selections is 1 or more, the songs with high priority specified in the priority setting table 222da are preferentially placed in the history area. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in addition to counting the number of times selected by the player during the jackpot song selection period in the song selection number storage area 223ac, the music played during the normal game (for example, played by developing into a super reach effect). It may be configured to count the number of times the music has been played. Then, while the number of selections by the player is small, the music that has been played many times during the normal game is stored in an empty area of the history area (the remaining storage area after storing the music in which the number of selections by the player is 1 or more). It may be configured to be stored in. With this configuration, the music that the player has listened to during the game can be arranged in the history area. In most cases where the player voluntarily selects a song, the song that he / she has listened to is selected, so the song that he / she has definitely listened to (the song that has been played during the normal game) is set in the history area. By arranging the music (menu item) that is likely to be selected by the player, it is possible to arrange the music (menu item) in a range that can be selected with a small number of operations (within 3 times) for the operation button 230. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be further enhanced. This modification will be described in more detail with reference to FIGS. 170 to 172.

<Variation example of the fourth control example>
FIG. 170 is a diagram showing a reproduction number storage area 223dd during production added to the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the modified example of the fourth control example. The reproduction number storage area 223dd during the production is a storage area for storing the number of times the music is played (used) in the variable display effect executed during the normal game for each type of music. As shown in FIG. 170, in the playback number storage area 223dd during production, data indicating the number of times played (used) during a normal game is stored in association with each type of music (music A to Z). It is configured as follows. That is, it has the same configuration as the music selection frequency storage area 223ac (see FIG. 105 (b)). The example of FIG. 170 illustrates a case where the musical piece C and the musical piece Z are each played once during the normal game, and the other musical pieces are not played.

The number of reproductions of each musical piece stored in the reproduction number storage area 223dd during the production is determined and displayed in the variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 172) in the variation display setting process 12 (see FIG. 172). If there is a musical piece to be played in the determined variable pattern effect after the variable pattern command for use is set, 1 is added to the number of times the musical piece is played (see S4532 in FIG. 172). Further, the number of times of reproduction (number of times of use) of each song stored in the number of times of reproduction storage area 223dd during the production is referred to when setting an item to be arranged in the history area in the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen (FIG. 171 S5281).

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the modified example of the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 171 and 172, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described. First, the details of the history area setting process 12 (S5421) in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 171. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the history area setting process 12 (S5421). This history area setting process 12 (S5421) is executed in place of the history area setting process (see FIG. 163) in the fourth control example, and like the history area setting process (see FIG. 163), the history area on the music selection menu screen. This is a process for determining the items (musical pieces) to be placed in.

Of the history area setting processes 12 (see FIG. 171) in the modified example of the fourth control example, in each process of S5271 to S5277, the history area setting processes (see FIG. 163) of S5271 to S5277 in the fourth control example, respectively. The same process as each process is executed. Further, in the history area setting process 12 (see FIG. 171) in this modification, when the process of S5274 is completed, the data of the playback number storage area 223dd during the production (corresponding to the number of times each song is played during the normal game). (S5281), and whether or not the number of songs played once or more during the normal game is equal to or greater than the number of empty areas where data was not stored in the history area in the processing of S5274. Discrimination (S5282).

In the process of S5282, if it is determined that the number of songs played once or more during the normal game is equal to or greater than the number of empty areas in the history area (S5282: Yes), the play count storage area 223dd during production is set. Data corresponding to the number of songs in the empty area of the history area is read out in descending order of the number of stored playbacks (S5283), and the read data is stored in the order of the number of playbacks in the empty area of the history area. (S5284), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5282, when it is determined that the number of songs played once or more during the normal game is less than the number of empty areas in the history area (S5282: No), the number of playbacks during the normal game The music having a value of 1 or more is read (S5285), all the read music is stored in an empty area of the history area (S5286), and the process is transferred to S5275.

By executing this history area setting process 12 (see FIG. 171), when the number of times the music is selected by the player is small, the music that the player has heard during the normal game is arranged in the history area. be able to. Therefore, the music (item) that is likely to be selected by the player can be preferentially arranged in the history area, so that the convenience of the player can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 172, the details of the variation display setting process 12 (S4182) in the modified example of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 12 (S4182). The variation display setting process 12 (S4182) is a process executed in place of the variation display setting process 10 (see FIG. 150) in the fourth control example (and the third control example), and is a process executed in place of the variation display setting process 10 (FIG. 150). (Refer to 150), in order to execute the variation effect (variation display effect) on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110. It is a process for.

Of the variation display setting process 12 (see FIG. 172) in the modified example of the fourth control example, in each process of S4501 to S4509, S4521, and S4522, the variation display in the fourth control example (and the third control example), respectively. The same processes as those of S4501 to S4509, S4521, and S4522 of the setting process 10 (see FIG. 150) are executed. Further, in the variation display setting process 12 (see FIG. 172) in the modified example of the fourth control example, when the process of S4504 is completed, the variation display effect is executed by the display variation pattern command set in the process of S4504. However, it is determined whether or not the production content is accompanied by the reproduction of the music (S4531). In this modification, when the super reach effect or the special reach effect is executed, a part of the music corresponding to the reach type is played.

In the process of S4531, when it is determined that the current variable display effect is the effect content accompanied by the reproduction of the musical piece (S4531: Yes), then, in the reproduction number storage area 223dd during the effect, the current variable display effect is displayed. 1 is added to the number of playbacks corresponding to the music to be played during execution (S4532), and the process shifts to S4521. On the other hand, in the process of S4531, when it is determined that the variable display effect this time is the effect content that does not involve the reproduction of the music (for example, the variable display effect corresponding to the completely out-of-order variation pattern) (S4531: No). The process of S4532 is skipped, and the process is transferred to S4521.

As described above, in the modified example of the fourth control example, when there are few songs (less than 3) that have been selected by the player, the music is played (executed) during the execution of the variable display effect during the normal game. The image corresponding to the performed music (voice effect) is preferentially arranged in the history area (menu position that can be selected with a small number of operations). With this configuration, even if there are few songs (less than 3) that have been selected by the player, the songs that the player has listened to can be arranged in the history area. Therefore, regardless of the number of times the music is selected, the music (menu item) that is likely to be selected by the player can be arranged within the selectable range with a small number of operations (within 3 times) for the operation button 230. , The convenience of the player can be further enhanced.

In this modification, when the number of times a song is selected is small (the number of songs selected once or more is less than 3), the song has been played in a normal game against an empty area in the history area. The configuration was such that the corresponding images (items) were preferentially arranged, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as an item to be arranged in the history area, first, a composition is set in which songs that have been played many times during a normal game are preferentially arranged, and if there is an empty area in the history area, the player selects a music period. The image corresponding to the music that has been selected (determined) many times in the above may be arranged in the empty area. Further, for example, after arranging a music having a large number of selections by the player in the history area, an image corresponding to the music having a large number of selections can be obtained regardless of whether or not there is an empty area in the history area. Subsequently, images corresponding to a maximum of three (predetermined upper limit) songs may be arranged in descending order of the number of times played during the normal game.

In the above-mentioned fourth control example and its modification, when the player temporarily selects a random song and when the player decides the random song selection, the song for the song selection period is played, and a random lottery is performed. The composition of what the song was determined by was indistinguishable until the song selection period had elapsed, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the player decides the random song selection, the chorus portion of the song decided by the random lottery may be started to be played. Further, for example, the music to be played at the time when the player temporarily selects the random music may be determined by lottery, and the loop reproduction of the chorus portion may be started in the same manner as the other items. With this configuration, the player can identify the music determined by the lottery during the song selection period, so if the player does not like the music determined by the lottery, there is an opportunity to reselect other items. Can be given. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be further enhanced. In these cases, every time the player temporarily selects or decides a random song selection in one song selection period, the song may be re-determined by a random lottery, or when the random song selection is decided. The music to be played may be fixed to the music first determined by lottery in one music selection period. By configuring the random lottery to redo the determination of songs by random lottery each time the random song selection is tentatively selected or decided, the random song selection tentative selection or decision is made until the favorite song is played during the song selection period. The player can be given the option of repeating. Therefore, it is possible to play the game during the big hit as one of the pleasures during the song selection period, whether or not the favorite music can be played by the random music selection, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. .. On the other hand, if the music to be played when the random music selection is decided is fixed to the music first determined by the lottery in one song selection period, the probability change jackpot will be obtained at the time of playback. The opportunity to decide whether or not the "music a" to be confirmed is decided by lottery can be limited to once in one jackpot. Therefore, even if "song a" is not played when the random song selection is provisionally selected or decided, it can be made to think that it just happened to be out of the lottery, so that the player's expectation for the probability change jackpot is maintained. Can be made to.

In the above-mentioned fourth control example and its modification, the chorus portion of the tentatively selected song is played back in a loop during the song selection period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reproduction position of the tentatively selected song is It can be set arbitrarily. Further, the volume may be different between the music to be played based on the provisionally selected music and the music to be played after the music selection period has elapsed. For example, by lowering the volume of the tentatively selected song and increasing the volume of the song to be played after the song selection period has elapsed, the player can listen to the song selected by the player at a louder volume. Therefore, it is possible to give a greater sense of satisfaction to the player who listens to the music. Further, by increasing the volume of the tentatively selected song, the player can more clearly recognize the melody of the chorus part of the tentatively selected song during the song selection period. Therefore, it is possible to more easily determine whether or not the song is a favorite song, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the player when selecting a song.

In the fourth control example and the modified example thereof, in a part of the case where the pseudo small round effect is determined, the music is played in a playback mode different from the playback mode of the music corresponding to the number of rounds notified by the pseudo small round effect. It was configured to be able to detect in advance whether or not a pseudo-small round effect is being executed by playing back, but it is not limited to this. For example, whether or not the pseudo small round effect is executed by setting a part of the display mode to a mode corresponding to a number of rounds different from the number of rounds notified by the pseudo small round effect instead of the reproduction mode. It may be configured to provide a case where the player can detect it before the pseudo small round effect is completed (before the continuous effect is executed). Specifically, for example, the characters displayed in the small area Ds2 in the third symbol display device 81 are configured to be different according to the number of rounds, and when the pseudo small round effect is determined, the pseudo small round effect is basically produced. The character corresponding to the number of rounds notified by is displayed, but the character displayed in the small area Ds2 is displayed at a predetermined ratio (for example, a ratio of 10%) to display the character corresponding to the actual number of rounds. May be. With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the third symbol display device 81 and perform the game during the big hit.

In the above-mentioned fourth control example and its modification, when the pseudo small round effect is executed, it is set to the playback mode of the music corresponding to the number of rounds notified by the pseudo small round effect, or it is set to the actual number of rounds. The configuration is such that it is determined by lottery whether to set the playback mode of the corresponding music, but this control is not limited to the case where the pseudo-small round effect is executed. With the effect that is executed when the state has changed to an advantageous state (or it has been decided to move in the future), and when the state has temporarily changed to a disadvantageous state (or it has been decided to move in the future). It can be applied as long as it performs an effect that is difficult to distinguish. Specifically, for example, the probabilistic jackpot of even-numbered symbol notification and the normal jackpot of even-numbered symbol notification are set so as to have basically the same display mode and voice mode as the opening effect of the jackpot and the music for the opening. .. On the other hand, in the case of a probabilistic jackpot of odd-numbered symbol notification, a configuration different from the display mode and voice mode of the opening in the normal jackpot of even-numbered symbol notification is set as the opening effect of the jackpot and the opening music. In this case, in a part of the case where the even-numbered symbol notification is a probable change jackpot (for example, at a rate of 10%), the same song as the odd-numbered symbol notification probabilistic jackpot is played as the opening song. It may be configured. With this configuration, the jackpot was notified with an even numbered symbol, but it is possible to make the player know that the jackpot was actually a probabilistic jackpot. Therefore, since the voice mode during the opening period can be heard more intensively, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In addition, instead of or in addition to changing the opening music, the display mode of the opening effect is an odd numbered symbol in a part (for example, a ratio of 10%) when the even numbered symbol notification is a probable change jackpot. The display mode may be set to the same as that in the case of a probable change jackpot of notification. With this configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the display mode during the opening period and perform the game. Further, these modifications are not limited to the display mode and the voice mode during the opening period. The control may be applied to a display mode or a voice mode in a predetermined round during a jackpot, or the control may be applied to a display mode or a voice mode in a predetermined interval period. This control may be applied to the display mode or the voice mode during the ending period.

In the above-mentioned fourth control example and its modification, the pseudo-small round lottery table 222cc is used to configure both the feasibility of executing the pseudo-small round effect and the lottery mode of the music reproduction mode to be able to be drawn at the same time. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the pseudo small round effect is determined, the reproduction mode corresponding to the number of rounds notified by the pseudo small round effect is set as the reproduction mode of the music, or the reproduction mode corresponding to the original number of rounds is set. Alternatively, a dedicated data table for drawing lots may be provided separately.

In the fourth control example and its modification, when the pseudo small round effect is executed, the reproduction mode corresponding to the number of rounds notified by the pseudo small round effect is set, or the original number of rounds is corresponded to. It was configured to select whether to set the reproduction mode by lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the pseudo-small round effect is executed, the reproduction mode corresponding to the original number of rounds may be set without fail. With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the reproduction mode of the music more carefully.

In the third and fourth control examples and the modification of the fourth control example, the number of times of music selection is also played even when the music determined by the random lottery executed by the player determining the random music selection is played. The configuration is such that 1 is added to the number of reproductions stored in the storage area 223ac, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the music played by determining the random music selection may be excluded from the target of the counting of the number of times played. With this configuration, only the number of times the player has voluntarily selected a song can be counted, so items that are more likely to be selected by the player are placed in the history area. Can be made to.

In the above-mentioned second and third control examples, the music selected for the music selection period (first round) is played, and the music selected by the player is played from the end of the first round. , Not limited to this. For example, every time the player operates (presses) the up button UB or the down button DB on the song selection menu screen (every time the item that is the display mode of the lit appearance is switched), the chorus of the item newly placed in the song selection area. It may be configured to reproduce a part. With this configuration, not only the title (song name) of the song but also the voice mode of the most characteristic chorus part in the song can be taken into consideration to determine the song to be played during the jackpot. It is possible to make it easier to select a song. Further, in this case, when the jackpot this time is a jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, a jackpot with a small number of rounds), the music is played as it is from the continuation of the playback position when the player presses the center button CB to select it. May be configured to continue. With this configuration, the music can be played more effectively using the remaining period of the jackpot with a small number of rounds.

In each of the above control examples, the player can select the production mode (type of music to be played) of the production by voice among the hobby effects executed in the predetermined period (during the probability change state or during the big hit). However, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured so that the effect mode of the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be selected.

In each of the above control examples, a music data group is provided for each type of music to be played, and one music is played by playing each data constituting the music data group in a predetermined order. , Not limited to this. There may be a configuration in which only one piece of data capable of playing one piece of music from the start to the end is provided as many as the number of pieces of music. In this case, the reproduction position may be set as a data structure in an identifiable format, and the reproduction position may be changed at least in parts. With this configuration, it is possible to start the reproduction of the music from different reproduction positions according to the circumstances in which the music is selected, as in the first control example described above. Further, as in the second control example described above, the reproduction position can be changed so that the rust portion is more likely to be reproduced during the round period of the final round of the jackpot.

In each of the above control examples, only the items to be placed in the song selection area are determined by random lottery, and the other items (items to be placed in the menu position other than the history area) are predetermined based on the items to be placed in the song selection area. It was configured to be arranged in the order (alphabetically), but it is not limited to this. For example, other items may be determined by a random lottery.

In each of the above control examples, in the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen, items with a high selection frequency of the player are arranged in a range that can be selected with a small number of operations, and one item selected by random lottery for the music selection area is selected. Items other than these are arranged in a predetermined order based on the items arranged in the music selection area, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the player may be configured to freely customize the arrangement of items on the music selection menu screen by operating the operation button 230 or the like. With this configuration, the music that the player wants to select can be arranged in advance at a position where the music can be selected within a range in which the number of operations is small, so that the convenience of the player can be enhanced.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it can be easily inferred that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be done.

For example, in the first to fourth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, one or a plurality of operation winning openings that trigger the start of a jackpot by entering a game ball are provided, but the trigger for the start of the jackpot is It is not limited to this. For example, a configuration in which an operating means such as a switch is provided within the reach of the player, and a jackpot is started when a specific operation is performed on the operating means after a big hit in a special symbol lottery. May be. With this configuration, the jackpot can be easily started, so the player is disappointed because he did not enter the operating winning opening even though he fired the game ball aiming at the operating winning opening. It can be prevented from being lost.

<8th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 to 185. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when a big hit is obtained by lottery of a special symbol, the pachinko machine shifts to the big hit standby state, and the game ball is inserted into the operating winning opening 660 during the big hit standby state. In that case, the jackpot was started. Further, the operation winning opening 660 is configured to be provided at only one place on the upper right side of the game board 13. That is, in the case of the jackpot standby state, regardless of the jackpot type, the jackpot starts unless the game ball is fired toward the upper right side of the game board 13 and the game ball is inserted into the operating winning opening 660. It was configured not to be done.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment has a configuration in which a plurality of operating winning openings are provided, and the type of jackpot (degree of advantage) started according to the type of operating winning opening that has won a prize in the jackpot standby state. It was configured to be different. More specifically, it is configured to provide four operating winning openings, a MAX operating winning opening 6710a, a normal operating winning opening 6710b, 6710c, and a special MAX operating winning opening 6720, and a MAX operating winning opening 6710a in a jackpot standby state. , And when the game ball enters either of the special MAX operating winning openings 6720, a jackpot with 16 rounds is started, while the normal operating winning openings 6710b and 6710c are entered. When a game ball enters, a jackpot with four rounds is started. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, if a big hit can be started by inserting a game ball into the MAX operation winning opening 6710a, the game ball enters the special MAX operation winning opening 6720. Since it is possible to form an easy state, it is possible to easily insert the game ball into the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 in the next jackpot standby state. Therefore, since the number of rounds is large (that is, advantageous to the player) in 16 rounds in a row in the two big hits, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. The configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed. The point is that the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 173, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 173 is a front view of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 173, in the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment, in order to distribute the game ball to either the MAX operating winning opening 6710a or the normal operating winning opening 6710b or 6710c below the variable display device unit 80. The distribution device 6700 is provided. The distribution device 6700 is provided with an opening on the right side of the front view that allows a game ball to enter the inside, and an operating gate 6700a for opening and closing the opening. The operating gate 6700a is normally closed (closed position) in which the game ball cannot enter the inside of the distribution device 6700, and enters the inside of the distribution device 6700 only during the jackpot standby state. It will be in the open state (open position) where the ball is possible.

As shown in FIG. 173, inside the distribution device 6700, a guide flow path 6700b through which the game ball entering from the opening can flow down and a game ball flowing down the guidance flow path 6700b are awarded three operation prizes. A 3-hole croon 6710 is provided for randomly distributing to any of the ports (MAX operating winning opening 6710a, normal operating winning opening 6710b, 6710c). When a ball is entered into the MAX operating winning opening 6710a in the jackpot standby state, a jackpot with 16 rounds is started, while when the ball is entered into either the normal operating winning opening 6710b or 6710c in the jackpot standby state, the ball is started. A jackpot with 4 rounds will start.

The 3-hole crune 6710 is configured by a known croon means, and has three actuating winning openings on the bottom surface of a mortar-shaped inner wall. The game ball that has flowed down the induction flow path 6700b and has flowed into the 3-hole crune 6710 rolls on the mortar-shaped inner wall for a predetermined period of time, and then enters one of the operating winning openings. It should be noted that the ratio of the game balls flowing into the 3-hole crune 6710 into each operating winning opening is equal. That is, the probability (ratio) that the game ball that has entered the distribution device 6700 enters the MAX operating winning openings 6710a and the normal operating winning openings 6710b and 6710c is 1/3, respectively. In other words, the probability of winning a 16-round jackpot (probability of being distributed to the MAX operating winning opening 6710a) is 1/3 when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, and the probability of winning a 4-round jackpot (normal operating winning). The probability of being distributed to either the mouth 6710b or 6710c) is 2/3.

As shown in FIG. 173, in the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment, a special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is provided in the lower left direction of the front view with respect to the distribution device 6700. This special MAX operating winning opening 6720 is a kind of operating winning opening in which the start of a 16-round jackpot is set when a game ball enters in a jackpot standby state. That is, the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is an operation winning opening having the same function as the MAX operation winning opening 6710a. As shown in FIG. 173, the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 is provided with a non-electric accessory 6720a capable of opening and closing the special MAX operating winning opening 6720.

The non-electric accessory 6720a is connected to an opening mechanism (not shown) provided inside the MAX operating winning opening 6710a, and while the non-electric accessory 6720a is closed, the MAX operating winning opening 6710a is reached. When the game ball enters (the game ball passes through the opening mechanism), the non-electric accessory 6720a is configured to be mechanically released (without using electrical control). The opening mechanism has only a function of opening the non-electric accessory 6720a, and the game ball further enters the MAX operation winning opening 6710a in a state where the non-electric accessory 6720a is open. Even if the game ball passes through the opening mechanism, the state of the non-electric accessory 6720a does not change (the non-electric accessory 6720a is closed).

Further, in the non-electric accessory 6720a, the non-electric accessory 6720a is mechanically formed by the game ball passing through a closing mechanism (not shown) provided inside the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 while the non-electric accessory 6720a is in the open state. Closed (without electrical control). Unlike other operating winning openings, the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the flow path on the left side of the front view can enter the variable display device unit 80. There is. That is, in order to allow a game ball to enter another operating winning opening (MAX operating winning opening 6710a, normal operating winning opening 6710b, 6710c), right-handed while the operating gate 6700a is open. On the other hand, in order to allow the game ball to enter the special MAX operation winning opening 6720, a left-handed strike may be performed while the non-electric accessory 6720a is open.

As described above, the non-electric accessory 6720a is normally closed, and is opened only when the game ball enters the MAX operation winning opening 6710a. That is, when the non-electric accessory 6720a becomes a big hit in the closed state and the game ball enters the MAX operation winning opening 6710a in the big hit standby state, the 16-round big hit game (player) with the largest number of rounds. In addition to executing a type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player, the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 can be opened. Therefore, if the game ball does not enter the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 (if the game ball does not pass through the closing mechanism) before the next big hit, hit left in the next big hit standby state. Just by doing so, it is possible to easily enter a game ball into the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 and start a 16-round jackpot (a type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player). In the eighth embodiment, as the game state after the end of the big hit, either the probability change state that continues until the next big hit or the time reduction state in which the number of time reductions is 100 times is the jackpot type (whether the jackpot is a probability change jackpot). Is it usually a big hit?). That is, even if the lottery of the special symbol continues to be missed, the time saving state of the normal symbol continues until at least 100 times the lottery of the special symbol is completed. The 640a is easily released. For this reason, at least until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 100 times, the game will be played aiming at the second entrance 640 by right-handed (the player does not hit left), so the big hit ends. After that, it is possible to prevent (prevent) the non-electric accessory 6720a from being closed due to the game ball entering the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 immediately. As a result, when a game ball enters the MAX operating winning opening 6710a and a big hit is started, it is possible to form a state in which it is easy to continuously win the 16 rounds of big hits, which is the most advantageous for the player. Because it can be done, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 173, a rectifying device 6800 for lengthening the arrival interval of the game ball with respect to the distribution device 6700 is provided above the operating gate 6700a. Although the details will be described later, the rectifying device 6800 periodically has a stationary state in which the reached game ball is stopped in the device and a flowing state in which the stopped game ball is made to flow down toward the distribution device 6700. Switch. Since the switching cycle is set to be a period during which one game ball can flow down in 5 seconds, when the operation gate 6700a of the distribution device 6700 is opened, 1 There can be an interval of 5 seconds between the time when the game ball enters the distribution device 6700 through the opening and the time when the next game ball reaches the distribution device 6700. On the other hand, the distribution device 6700 is controlled so that the operation gate 6700a is closed when the game ball enters any of the operation winning openings. In addition, the internal structure of the distribution device 6700 is configured so that the period until the game ball that has entered the inside of the distribution device 6700 enters one of the operating winning openings is about 4 seconds. ing. That is, since the period from when one game ball enters the distribution device 6700 until the operation gate 6700a is closed is configured to be less than 5 seconds, the rectifying device 6800 is used to distribute the distribution device 6700. By setting the shortest arrival interval of the game balls to 5 seconds, it is possible to prevent two or more game balls from entering the distribution device 6700 during the jackpot standby state of 1.

Here, if a configuration is such that a plurality of game balls can enter the distribution device 6700 without providing the rectifying device 6800, the game balls can enter different operating winning openings in one jackpot standby state. There is sex. That is, after one game ball enters either the normal operation winning opening 6710b or 6710c, another game ball may enter the MAX operating winning opening 6710a. In this case, the non-electric accessory 6720a is released even though the 4-round jackpot corresponding to the normally operated winning opening is executed (the ball can be entered into the operating winning opening 6720 for special MAX). Therefore, the number of cases in which the ball can be entered into the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 increases, which may be excessively advantageous for the player.

On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, by providing the rectifying device 6800 on the upstream side of the opening of the sorting device 6700, a game ball capable of entering the sorting device 6700 in the jackpot standby state of 1 is provided. Limited to one (for the distribution device 6700 between the time when one game ball enters the distribution device 6700 and the time when the ball enters one of the operation winning openings and the operation gate 6700a is closed. (Prevents the next game ball from arriving), so if the non-electric accessory 6720a is closed and the jackpot is won (the game ball is put into the distribution device 6700 to win the jackpot). The non-electric accessory 6720a can be released with a probability (ratio) of 1/3 each time (when starting). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the non-electric accessory 6720a from being opened more frequently, which is excessively advantageous to the player, and thus it is possible to prevent an unexpected disadvantage from being caused to the hole. ..

Next, the details of the operation of the rectifier 6800 will be described with reference to FIG. 174. FIG. 174 (a) is a diagram showing a case where the game ball reaches the rectifier device 6800 in the stationary state while the operation gate 6700a of the distribution device 6700 is open. As shown in FIG. 174 (a), the rectifying device 6800 is provided in a vertical flow path capable of causing the game ball to flow down to the distribution device 6700, and is provided in the middle of the flow path to close the flow path. And a gate induction valve 6800a that can be opened. In the stationary state of the rectifying device 6800, the gate induction valve 6800a is closed, so that it is impossible (difficult) for the game ball to pass through the rectifying device 6800. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 174 (a), the game ball that has reached the rectifying device 6800 is blocked from flowing down by the gate induction valve 6800a, and is therefore stopped above the gate induction valve 6800a. Since the upper part of the gate induction valve 6800a is configured to have a width that allows only one game ball to be stopped, it is assumed that another game ball reaches the rectifying device 6800 while one game ball is stopped. However, it does not stop above the gate induction valve 6800a, but flows down to the lower side of the game board 13 through the flow path on the right side of the rectifying device 6800. As a result, when the gate induction valve 6800a is opened, it is possible to prevent two or more game balls from flowing down toward the distribution device 6700 at the same time, so that a plurality of game balls can be distributed in the one jackpot standby state. It is possible to more reliably prevent the ball from entering the inside of the device 6700.

FIG. 174 (b) is a diagram showing a case where the gate induction valve 6800a is opened while the game ball is stopped above the gate induction valve 6800a. As shown in FIG. 174 (b), when the gate induction valve 6800a is opened, the game ball stopped above the gate induction valve 6800a falls downward. As a result, when the operating gate 6700a is open, the game ball enters the distribution device 6700. As shown in FIG. 174 (c), the gate induction valve 6800a is set to open / close cycle so that the game ball closes immediately after passing through the gate induction valve 6800a. More specifically, the gate induction valve 6800a is configured to periodically repeat a closed state for 4.9 seconds and an open state for 0.1 seconds. As a result, only one game ball can flow down toward the distribution device 6700 per 5 seconds. Therefore, after one game ball enters the distribution device 6700, the distribution device 6700 can be used. It is possible to more reliably prevent other game balls from entering the distribution device 6700 within about 4 seconds until the actuating gate 6700a is closed.

Next, the details of each operating winning opening will be described with reference to FIG. 175. FIG. 175 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the game ball is rolling on the inner wall of the 3-hole crune 6710. As shown in FIG. 175 (a), the three-hole croon 6710 provided inside the sorting device 6700 has a MAX operating winning opening 6710a and a normal operating winning opening 6710b, 6710c in a substantially central portion thereof. There are two operating winning openings. When a game ball enters the MAX operating winning opening 6710a, the number of rounds of the jackpot is set to 16 rounds, while when the ball enters either the normal operating winning opening 6710b or 6710c, the number of jackpot rounds is set. The number is set to 4 rounds. Therefore, when a game ball enters the distribution device 6700 in the jackpot standby state, it is for MAX, which is an advantageous 16-round jackpot opportunity among the three operating winning openings provided in the 3-hole croon 6710. It is possible to realize the playability that is expected to enter the actuating winning opening 6710a.

Further, as shown in FIG. 175 (a), the MAX operation winning opening 6710a and the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 are mechanically connected. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 175 (b), a game ball enters the MAX operating winning opening 6710a, and an opening mechanism (not shown) provided inside the MAX operating winning opening 6710a is provided. Upon passing, the non-electric accessory 6720a attached to the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 opens in conjunction with the passage of the game ball. As a result, the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 is maintained in an open state until the game ball enters the special MAX operating winning opening 6720. Therefore, if the jackpot is won before the game ball enters the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 and the jackpot standby state is entered, it is easy to aim at the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 by hitting the left. It is possible to start a 16-round jackpot with a large number of rounds (that is, advantageous for the player). Therefore, it is possible to form an extremely advantageous state in which there is a high possibility of winning consecutively in an advantageous jackpot type, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, only the number of rounds of the jackpot is determined according to the type of the operating winning opening in which the game ball enters during the jackpot standby state, and the game state after the jackpot ends is the jackpot. It has a predetermined configuration according to the type (whether it is a probable variable jackpot or a normal jackpot is determined when a special symbol lottery is executed). Therefore, the gaming state after the end of the 16-round jackpot executed by entering the MAX operation winning opening 6710a (that is, with the non-electric accessory 6720a open) is a probable change state and a time saving state. There is a possibility of either. In other words, even if you win a relatively disadvantageous normal jackpot, if you can put the game ball into the MAX operation winning opening 6710a, the number of rounds if you win the jackpot until the time saving state elapses. Will continue to be in an advantageous state set to 16 rounds, so if the ball enters either the normal operation winning openings 6710b or 6710c due to a short-time jackpot (when the non-electric accessory 6720a is not opened). In comparison, it is possible to play the game with a stronger expectation that the lottery result in the time-saving state will be a big hit. That is, even in the same time saving state, the expectation for winning the jackpot can be different depending on the state of the non-electric accessory 6720a, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, a mechanism is adopted in which the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 is opened by one game ball entering the MAX operating winning opening 6710a, but this is limited to this. The number of winnings to the MAX operating winning opening 6710a required until the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 is opened can be arbitrarily determined. Further, similarly, the number of winnings for the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 required until the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 in the opened state is closed can be arbitrarily determined.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177, a characteristic display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 176 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the ending effect of the jackpot when the jackpot ends in a state where the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is opened. The case where the jackpot ends with the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 open is basically executed when the game ball enters the MAX operating winning opening 6710a in the jackpot standby state. This is the case when the 16-round jackpot is over. In addition, even though the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 was a big hit in the open state, the player made a right-handed hit in the big hit standby state due to the wrong launch direction, etc., and went to the distribution device 6700. Even when the ball is entered and the ball is entered into any of the operating winning openings provided in the 3-hole croon 6710, the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 is opened at the end of the big hit. In this case as well, the same ending effect is executed.

In the ending effect when the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is open, the characters "MAX zone rush !!" and "MAX is confirmed if hit while hitting right" on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. !? "is displayed. By these display contents, the player wins a big hit while hitting right, and the game ball is put into the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 to make a 16-round big hit (MAX big hit). Can be easily understood that can be started. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the state in which the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is opened is referred to as a “MAX zone”.

Next, with reference to FIG. 176 (b), a display mode (standby state effect) in the jackpot standby state when a jackpot is won during the MAX zone will be described. As shown in FIG. 176 (b), when a big hit is won in the MAX zone, the display area HR5 in which the characters "Aim for MAX by left-handed !!" is displayed above the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Is formed, and below the display area HR5, a display area HR6 is formed in which the display content to which the image of the arrow is directed with respect to the image imitating the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is displayed. With these display contents, it is easy for the player to aim at the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 by left-handed instead of aiming at the distribution device 6700 by right-handed in this jackpot standby state. Can be understood.

Next, with reference to FIG. 177 (a), a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the number of time reductions has ended (the time reduction period has elapsed) in the MAX zone will be described. As shown in FIG. 177 (a), when the number of time reductions has elapsed in the MAX zone, the characters "Pinch of the MAX zone fall !!" and "Before the fall" are displayed at the bottom of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it hits, a display area HR7 is formed in which the characters "MAX confirmed !?" are displayed. This display content makes it easy for the player to understand that the MAX zone may end. Conversely, even if a short period of time elapses and the game shifts to a relatively disadvantageous game state (normal game state) in which it is necessary to play a game by hitting left, the game ball enters the special MAX operation winning opening 6720. If a game ball can be entered into the first entrance 64 before the ball is hit and a jackpot can be won, an advantageous 16-round jackpot can be executed simply by entering the special MAX operating winning opening 6720. Since the benefit of the MAX zone is received as it is, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game immediately when the time saving state ends. That is, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reminded that the player wants to continue the game at least until the game ball enters the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 and the MAX zone ends. Can be improved. In the eighth embodiment, when the non-electric accessory 6720a is left-handed, the game ball is moved to the non-electric accessory 6720a at a ratio of about 1 in 5 game balls. It is configured so that the ball can enter. On the other hand, since only one out of every ten game balls enters the first entrance 64, when the non-electric accessory 6720a is left open. , The number of times the lottery of the first special symbol is executed is almost once or less. Therefore, it is very unlikely that the non-electric accessory 6720a will enter the first ball opening 64 first and the lottery based on the ball will be a big hit. When this occurs, the player can have a greater sense of accomplishment and satisfaction. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

FIG. 177 (b) is a diagram showing a case where the MAX zone is terminated (when the non-electric accessory 6720a is closed) by entering the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 in the MAX zone. As shown in FIG. 177 (b), a short period of time has passed in the MAX zone, and a left-handed hit is performed in order to execute a lottery of a special symbol, so that the game ball enters the special MAX operation winning opening 6720. Then, the display content of the display area HR7 is changed to the characters "falling !!", and the non-electric accessory 6720a is closed. With this display content, the player can easily understand that the MAX zone has ended.

In the eighth embodiment, when the non-electric accessory 6720a is left-handed, the fired game balls enter at a rate of about 1 in 5. However, the rate at which the game ball enters may be arbitrarily determined. By increasing the rate at which the game ball enters (for example, 1/3 rate), if the non-electric accessory 6720a becomes a big hit with the open state, the special MAX operation prize will be awarded with a smaller number of shots. Since the ball can be entered into the mouth 6720, the game can be efficiently performed. On the other hand, by lowering the rate at which the game ball enters (for example, the rate of 1/20), the special MAX operation is performed when the non-electric accessory 6720 is open and the number of time reductions elapses. The non-electric accessory 6720a is open because it is more likely that a special symbol lottery can be executed by entering the first entry slot 64 before entering the winning opening 6720. It is possible to increase the possibility of becoming a big hit. Further, it may be configured so that the clerk of the hall or the like can change the ratio of the ball entering the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 when the ball is hit to the left. That is, it may be configured so that it can be set so that the game can be played efficiently, or whether it is possible to increase the possibility of a big hit with the special MAX operation winning opening 6720a open. .. With this configuration, it is possible to realize specifications that match the management policy of each hall.

<Electrical configuration in the eighth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 178 and 179, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 and the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed from the first embodiment. ing. First, the first type selection table 202b provided in the ROM 202 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 178. Since the contents other than the specified contents of the first type selection table 202b are the same as those of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 178, in the first hit type selection table 202b in the eighth embodiment, two types of jackpot types, "big hit A12" and "big hit B12", are defined as jackpot types. In the eighth embodiment, a common jackpot type is selected regardless of whether the lottery is for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. More specifically, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is within the range of "0 to 64", the jackpot type is selected. "Big hit A12" is determined (see 202b1 in FIG. 178). This "big hit A12" is a big hit type in which the gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to the probable change state. As described above, the number of rounds varies depending on the type of operating winning opening that has won a prize in the jackpot standby state. More specifically, when the ball enters the normal operation winning openings 6710b and 6710c, it becomes a big hit for four rounds, while the ball enters the MAX operation winning opening 6710a or the special MAX operation winning opening 6720. In some cases, it will be a big hit for 16 rounds.

Of the 100 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 65 counter values of "0 to 64" are associated with "big hit A12", so a special symbol lottery. In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit A12" is determined is 65% (65/100).

On the other hand, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is within the range of "65 to 99", the jackpot type is " The jackpot B12 ”is determined (see 202b2 in FIG. 178). This "big hit B12" is a big hit type in which the number of time reductions is set to 100 times as a game state after the end of the big hit. Therefore, since the gaming state is more disadvantageous than the probabilistic state, the "big hit B12" is more disadvantageous to the player than the "big hit A12". The number of rounds is variable according to the type of winning operation winning opening, as in the case of "Big hit A12".

Of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 35 counter values of "65 to 99" are associated with "big hit B12", so a special symbol lottery. In the case of a big hit, the rate at which "big hit B12" is determined is 35% (35/100).

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, only the game state set after the end of the jackpot is predetermined according to the jackpot type, and the number of rounds is such that the game ball is (first) entered in the jackpot standby state. It is configured to be determined according to the type of the ball-operated winning opening. That is, the degree of advantage of the jackpot game is configured to be variable according to the type of the operating winning opening in which the game ball enters in the jackpot standby state. As a result, when the jackpot standby state is reached, the game can be performed by paying attention to the type of the operating winning opening into which the game ball enters, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 179 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 179, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eighth embodiment is that the MAX zone middle flag 223da is added to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 14B), and The difference is that the level counter 223h has been deleted.

The MAX zone in flag 223da is a flag for indicating whether or not the MAX zone is in (that is, whether the non-electric accessory 6720a is open). If the flag 223da in the MAX zone is on, it means that the flag is in the MAX zone (the non-electric accessory 6720a is open), and if it is off, it is not in the MAX zone (the non-electric accessory 6720a is open). It is closed). This MAX zone flag 223da is set to on when a prize in the MAX operation winning opening 6710a is detected in the jackpot standby state (see S4003 in FIG. 185), and a prize in the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is detected. If so, it is set to off (see S4005,40009 in FIG. 185). When the ending period of the jackpot is reached and an ending command is received from the main control device 110, the normal ending effect is executed by referring to the state of the flag 223da in the MAX zone, or the ending effect indicating the MAX zone is executed. It is determined whether or not to do so (see S4493 to S4495 in FIG. 184).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the eighth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. First, the special symbol variation processing 12 (S131) in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 180. This special symbol variation process 12 (S131) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment, and is different from the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for setting the display mode in the first symbol display device 37 and setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81.

Of the special symbol variation processing 12 (see FIG. 180) in the eighth embodiment, the processes S201 to S223 are the same as the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 22) S201 to S223 in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process is executed. Further, in the special symbol variation processing 12 (see FIG. 180) in the eighth embodiment, when the processing of S220 is completed, the opening of the operating gate 6700a is set (S251), and the processing is shifted to S223. By setting the opening of the operating gate 6700a, it becomes possible to easily enter the game ball into the inside of the distribution device 6700 by performing a right-handed strike in the jackpot standby state.

Next, the start-up process 12 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 181. This start-up process 12 is a process executed in place of the start-up process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, and like the start-up process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, the power is turned on. This is a process that is started along with it. Of the start-up processes 12 (see FIG. 181) in the eighth embodiment, in each of the processes S901 to S912 and S914 to S917, the start-up processes S901 to S912 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 29), respectively. And the same processing as each processing of S914 to S917 is executed. Further, in the start-up process 12 (see FIG. 181) in the eighth embodiment, when the process of S912 is completed, the drive start of the gate induction valve 6800a is set (S931), and the process shifts to S914. When the drive of the gate induction valve 6800a is started, the gate induction valve 6800a periodically repeats a closed state for 4.9 seconds and an open state for 0.1 seconds until the power supply is cut off. As a result, the interval at which the game ball that has reached the rectifier 6800 reaches the distribution device 6700 can be set to an interval of 5 seconds or more, so that one game ball reaches the distribution device 6700 in the jackpot standby state. Another game ball enters the inside of the distribution device 6700 within about 4 seconds from when the ball enters the ball until the game ball enters one of the operating gates (the operating gate 6700a is closed). It is possible to prevent the ball from hitting. Therefore, when the non-electric accessory 6720a becomes a big hit in the closed state, the ratio of shifting to the MAX zone based on the entry into the MAX operation winning opening 6710a (the non-electric accessory 6720a is opened). Can be maintained at 1/3. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessive shift to the MAX zone and an unexpected disadvantage to the hole.

Next, the main process 12 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 182. This main process 12 is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, and similarly to the main process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, it controls the main game. It is a process to execute.

Of the main processes 12 (see FIG. 182) in the eighth embodiment, in each of the processes S1001 to S1003 and S1005 to S1016, S1001 to S1003 and S1005 of the main processes (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of S1016 is executed. Further, in the main process 12 (see FIG. 182) in the eighth embodiment, when the process of S1003 is completed, the jackpot start process 12 is executed instead of the jackpot start process (see FIGS. 31 and S1004) in the first embodiment. Then (S1061), the process is transferred to S1005. The details of the jackpot start processing 12 (S1061) will be described with reference to FIG. 183.

FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the jackpot start process 12 (S1061). The jackpot start process 12 (S1061) is a process executed in place of the jackpot start process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, and is a process for starting a jackpot based on a ball entering the operating winning opening. Is. Of the jackpot start processing 12 (S1061) in the eighth embodiment, in each of the processes S1101, S1102, and S1104, each of the jackpot start processing (see FIG. 31) S1101, S1102, and S1104 in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as the process is executed.

Further, in the jackpot start processing 12 (see FIG. 183) in the eighth embodiment, when the processing of S1102 is completed (S1102: Yes), the operation gate 6700a is set to be closed (S1121), and the operation in which the winning is detected is detected. A winning opening type command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the winning opening type is set (S1122). The winning opening type command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing 12 (see FIG. 182) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the winning opening type command, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the MAX zone middle flag 223da according to the type of the operating winning opening notified by the command. Thereby, the mode of the ending effect executed at the end of the big hit can be set according to the state (whether or not it is the MAX zone) of the special MAX operation winning opening 6720.

Further, when the processing of S1122 is completed, the start of the jackpot of the number of rounds according to the type of the operating winning opening for which the winning is detected is set (S1123). More specifically, when a prize is detected in either the normal operation winning opening 6710b or 6710c, the start of the 4-round jackpot is executed, while the MAX operation winning opening 6710a or the special MAX operation winning opening is executed. When a prize in either of the 6720s is detected, the start of the 16-round jackpot is set. When the processing of S1123 is completed, the jackpot start flag 203k is set to ON (S1124), and the processing is shifted to S1104.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the eighth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 184 and 185, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described. First, the hit-related process 12 (S4391) in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 184. The hit-related process 12 (S4391) is a process executed in place of the hit-related process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment in the command determination process (see FIG. 36), and is a hit-related process in the first embodiment. Similar to the process (see FIG. 37), it is a process for executing the control corresponding to the type of the command related to the hit.

Of the hit-related processes 12 (see FIG. 184) in the eighth embodiment, the processes S4401 to S4409 are the same as the processes S4401 to S4409 of the hit-related processes (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, respectively. The process is executed. Further, in the hit-related process 12 (see FIG. 184) in the eighth embodiment, when it is determined that the round number command is not included in the unprocessed commands received from the main control device 110 in the process of S4407. (S4407: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning opening type command is included in the unprocessed command (S4491), and if it is determined that the winning opening type command is included (S4491). : Yes), the winning opening type command processing for executing the control according to the type of the operating winning opening notified by the command is executed (S4492), and this processing is terminated. The details of the winning opening type command processing (S4492) will be described later with reference to FIG. 185.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4491 that the winning opening type command is not included in the unprocessed commands received from the main control device 110 (S4491: No), the processing is shifted to S4409. In the processing of S4409, if it is determined that the ending command is included in the unprocessed command received from the main controller 110 (S4409: Yes), then whether or not the MAX zone in-flag 223da is turned on. If it is determined (S4493) and it is determined that the flag 223da in the MAX zone is on (S4493: Yes), it means that the non-electric accessory 6720a is open, and the probability change set after the jackpot ends. By winning the jackpot again during the state or the time saving state, it means that it is possible to enter the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 and start an advantageous 16-round jackpot, so the MAX zone. The execution of the ending effect (see FIG. 176 (a)) indicating the entry into is set (S4494), and the present process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4493, if it is determined that the flag 223da in the MAX zone is off (S4493: No), a normal ending effect is set (S4495), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 185, the details of the above-mentioned winning opening type command processing (S4492) will be described. As described above, the winning opening type command processing (S4492) is a process for executing control according to the type of the operating winning opening notified by the winning opening type command received from the main control device 110.

In this winning opening type command processing (see FIG. 185), first, it is determined whether or not the standby state effect flag 223g is on (S40001), and when it is determined that the standby state effect flag 223g is on (S40001). : Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winning opening type command received this time is a command indicating the MAX operation winning opening 6710a (S40002). In the process of S40002, when it is determined that the command indicates the MAX operation winning opening 6710a (S40002: Yes), it means that the game ball has entered the MAX operation winning opening 6710a in the jackpot standby state. Since it means that the game ball has passed through the opening mechanism for opening the non-electric accessory 6720a (the non-electric accessory 6720a has been released), the flag 223da in the MAX zone is set to ON (S4003). This process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S40002 that the command for the winning opening type received this time is not a command indicating the MAX operating winning opening 6710a (S40002: No), then the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 is shown. If it is determined whether or not it is a command (S40004) and it is determined that the command is a winning opening type command indicating the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 (S40004: Yes), the ball is entered into the special MAX operating winning opening 6720. This means that the game ball passes through the closing mechanism (the non-electric accessory 6720a is closed). Therefore, the flag 223da in the MAX zone is set to off (S4005), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S40004, if it is determined that the command is not the winning opening type command indicating the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 (S40004: No), the state of the non-electric accessory 6720a is not switched, so that it is as it is. This process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S40001 that the standby state effect flag 223g is off (S40001: No), then whether or not a winning opening type command indicating the operation winning opening 6720 for special MAX is received is determined. If it is determined (S40006) and it is determined that the command is a winning opening type command indicating the operation winning opening 6720 for special MAX (S40006: Yes), it is determined whether or not the flag 223da in the MAX zone is on (S40007). .. If it is determined in the processing of S40002 that the flag 223da in the MAX zone is on (S40007: Yes), the ball is entered into the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 in the open state in a state other than the jackpot standby state. Since it means that the non-electric accessory 6720a has been closed, the execution of the fall effect (see FIG. 177 (b)) is set (S40008). Next, the flag 223da in the MAX zone is set to off (S40009), and this process is terminated. This makes it easy for the player to understand that the MAX zone has ended.

On the other hand, in the processing of S40006, it is not a winning opening type command indicating the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 (it is a winning opening type command indicating any of the MAX operating winning opening 6710a, the normal operating winning opening 6710b, 6710c). When it is determined (S40006: No), the distribution device 6700 is not in the jackpot standby state (the operation gate 6700a is closed and the game ball cannot enter the inside of the distribution device 6700). It means that a game ball has entered the inside, and there is a possibility that the operation gate 6700a has failed or some kind of fraudulent activity has been performed. Therefore, an error is notified by setting a display error command (S40010). This process ends. Further, in the process of S40001, when it is determined that the flag 223da in the MAX zone is off (S40007: No), the game ball is special even though the non-electric accessory 6720a should be closed. It means that the ball has entered the MAX operation winning opening 6720, and there is a possibility that a malfunction such as a failure of the non-electric accessory 6720a has occurred. Therefore, the process is shifted to S40010 and error notification is set. Then, this process is terminated.

By executing this winning opening type command process (see FIG. 185), the MAX zone middle flag 223da can be suitably updated according to the type of the operating winning opening for which a winning is detected.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment, the degree of advantage (big hit type) of the big hit game to be executed (determined) varies according to the type of the operating winning opening that has entered the ball in the big hit standby state. It is composed. That is, when a game ball enters the MAX operating winning opening 6710a or the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 in the jackpot standby state, a relatively advantageous 16-round jackpot is executed, while the normal operating winning opening 6710b, When the ball enters 6710c, a relatively disadvantageous 4-round jackpot is executed. Of the four operating winning openings, the three operating winning openings 6710a for MAX and the normal operating winning openings 6710b and 6710c are provided inside the distribution device 6700 and enter the inside of the distribution device 6700. The game balls are evenly distributed with a probability (ratio) of 1/3 each. That is, when a game ball enters the distribution device 6700 in the jackpot standby state, it becomes a 16-round jackpot at a rate of 1/3 (that is, it enters the MAX operation winning opening 6710a) and a rate of 2/3. It becomes a big hit for 4 rounds (that is, it enters either the normal operation winning opening 6710b or 6710c). As a result, it is possible to realize a playability that is expected to be distributed to the MAX operation winning opening 6710a, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game in the jackpot standby state.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, when the game ball enters the MAX operating winning opening 6710a, the special MAX operating winning opening 6720, which is normally closed, is opened. It is composed. The open state of the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 is maintained until the next game ball enters the special MAX operating winning opening 6720. Here, since the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is arranged in the flow path on the left side of the game board 13, the game is played between the probabilistic state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set and the time saving state (that is, right-handed). During the game state in which the game progresses), the game ball does not enter the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 and the non-electric accessory 6720a is not closed. Therefore, if you win the probability change jackpot (big hit A12) and enter the MAX operation winning opening 6710a in the jackpot standby state, 16 rounds of jackpot will be executed and the next big hit will be special. Since the ball can be entered into the MAX operation winning opening 6720, it is possible to provide the playability that it is confirmed that a type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player is executed in succession by two jackpots. .. On the other hand, if you win a normal jackpot (big hit B12) and enter the MAX operation winning opening 6710a, the next jackpot will also be a 16-round jackpot because it will be a jackpot while the time saving state continues. Therefore, it is possible to realize the playability of playing a game with a strong desire to become a big hit again during the time saving state. In this way, the playability after the end of the jackpot is different depending on whether the ball has entered the MAX operation winning opening 6710a in the jackpot standby state of the probabilistic jackpot or the jackpot standby state of the normal jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the eighth embodiment, the game balls are randomly distributed to the three operating winning openings by providing the 3-hole crune 6710 inside the distribution device 6700. The configuration for this is not limited to this. Any configuration can be adopted as long as the game balls can be randomly distributed to a plurality of operating winning openings.

In the eighth embodiment, control is performed so that only one game ball can enter the inside of the distribution device 6700 in the one jackpot standby state, but the conditions (for example, the jackpot type and the jackpot standby state) are controlled. The number of game balls that can be entered into the distribution device 6700 may be changed according to the game state at the time of transition to, the number of lottery of special symbols at the time of winning a big hit, and the like). When more game balls can be entered, there is a higher possibility that the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 will be opened by entering the MAX operating winning opening 6710a, so that the player can enter the ball. Since the transition to the MAX zone can be expected more strongly, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the eighth embodiment, the game ball that has entered the distribution device 6700 is randomly distributed to any of the three operating winning openings, but it is not always necessary to randomly distribute the game ball. For example, each time the jackpot standby state is reached, the operation winning openings to which the game balls are distributed may be switched in a predetermined order. With this configuration, when the operating winning opening to be distributed next time is the MAX operating winning opening 6710a, it is possible to remind the player to continue the game until a big hit. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, the MAX operating winning opening 6710a has both a role as an operating winning opening that triggers the start of a big hit and a role of opening the special MAX operating winning opening 6720. Not limited. For example, an opening mechanism for opening the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 may be provided with respect to the normal operating winning opening 6710b. With this configuration, when a relatively unfavorable jackpot (4 round jackpot) is executed, the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 will be in an advantageous state, so it is considered to be a disadvantageous jackpot. However, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained. Furthermore, if the jackpot is a normal jackpot, there is a strong desire to win the 16-round jackpot again by becoming a jackpot again within the 100 times of time saving that the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is kept open. You can have them play the game if you wish. Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation of the player for the game. Further, in addition to the operating winning opening, a dedicated entry opening for opening the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 may be provided. In this case, the dedicated ball entry port for opening the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 does not necessarily have to be provided inside the distribution device 6700, and may be provided, for example, inside the specific winning opening 65a. ..

In the eighth embodiment, when a game ball enters the MAX operating winning opening 6710a in the jackpot standby state, a 16-round jackpot is always obtained, while when a game ball enters the normal operating winning openings 6710b, 6710c, 4 rounds are always obtained. It was designed to be a big hit, but it is not limited to this. For example, depending on the jackpot type, the distribution of the operating winning opening in which the number of rounds is set to 16 rounds and the operating winning opening in which 4 rounds are set may be different. That is, either the jackpot type in which a 16-round jackpot is set when the ball is entered into the MAX operating winning opening 6710a or the normal operating winning opening 6710b, or the inside of the distribution device 6700. The number of rounds is set to 16 rounds even if it is distributed to the operating winning openings, and the number of rounds is set to 4 rounds regardless of which of the operating winning openings inside the distribution device 6700 is distributed. It may be configured to provide a jackpot type.

In the eighth embodiment, the game state after the end of the big hit is predetermined according to the type of the big hit, and only the number of rounds of the big hit is set according to the type of the operating winning opening in which the game ball has entered. However, it is not limited to the number of rounds of the jackpot that can be changed depending on the type of the operating winning opening, but instead of or in addition to the number of rounds, other factors related to the degree of advantage of the jackpot are added to the type of the operating winning opening. It may be configured according to the setting. Specifically, for example, when a ball is entered into the MAX operating winning opening 6710a or the special MAX operating winning opening 6720, the number of jackpot rounds is set to 16 rounds, or in addition to it. , The game state after the end of the big hit may be set to the probable change state. In addition, when the ball enters the normal operation winning opening 6710b, the number of rounds of the jackpot is set to 4 rounds, or in addition, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to the probable change state. It may be configured as. In addition, when the ball enters the normal operation winning opening 6710b, the number of rounds of the jackpot is set to 4 rounds, or in addition, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to the time saving state. It may be configured as. With this configuration, the difference in the degree of advantage set according to the type of the operating winning opening of the game ball can be further increased, so pay attention to the type of the operating winning opening in which the game ball enters. You can play a game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the eighth embodiment, in a state where the non-electric accessory 6720a is open, the non-electric accessory 6720a is closed by one game ball entering the special MAX operation winning opening 6720. However, the condition (the number of game balls entered) for switching the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 in the open state to the closed state is not limited to this. For example, the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 may be maintained in an open state until two game balls are inserted. In this configuration, if the game ball can be inserted into the MAX operation winning opening 6710a, an advantageous state (MAX zone) in which the 16-round jackpot is confirmed when the jackpot is won during the right-handed game. It can be continued for up to two jackpots. Therefore, since the benefit when the game ball enters the MAX operating winning opening 6710a can be further increased, pay attention to the type of the operating winning opening in which the game ball entered into the distribution device 6700 is distributed. Can be played.

In the eighth embodiment, even if a game ball enters the MAX operating winning opening 6710a in a state where the non-electric accessory 6720a is open, the state of the non-electric accessory 6720a is not affected at all. Although it was configured (it merely opened the closed non-electric accessory 6720a), it is not limited to this, and the MAX operation winning opening 6710a is reached with the non-electric accessory 6720a open. The state of the non-electric accessory 6720a may be configured to be more advantageous to the player when the ball is entered. Specifically, for example, for special MAX until the non-electric accessory 6720a is closed every time the game ball enters the MAX operation winning opening 6710a in a state where the non-electric accessory 6720a is open. The number of balls entered for the activated winning opening 6720 may be increased by one. With this configuration, even if a big hit occurs when the non-electric accessory 6720a is open, the option of firing a game ball at the distribution device 6700 in the big hit standby state is available. Can be given to a person. That is, by inserting the game ball into the MAX operation winning opening 6710a, it is possible to make it think that the number of balls entered until the non-electric accessory 6720a is closed is added. Therefore, in a state where the non-electric accessory 6720a is open, it is possible to realize the playability of selecting the firing direction, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, when the probability change jackpot is reached, the probability variation state and the time saving state are continued until the next big hit, and when the normal jackpot is reached, the time saving state is continued until the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the number of time reductions may be diversified. Specifically, for example, a probabilistic jackpot (big hit a) in which the time reduction state continues until the next big hit, a probabilistic jackpot (big hit b) in which the number of time reductions is set to 10 times, and a probability variation jackpot (big hit b) in which the number of time reductions is set to 100 times. A normal jackpot (big hit c) to be performed and a normal jackpot (big hit d) in which the number of time reductions is set to 10 may be provided at least. With this configuration, if a big hit occurs when the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 is open, the game ball will be transferred to the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 in the big hit standby state, taking into account the big hit type. It is possible to realize the playability of selecting whether to insert the ball into the distribution device 6700 or to insert the game ball into the distribution device 6700. That is, in the case of a big hit a or a big hit c (a big hit type with a relatively high possibility of winning the big hit again during the time saving state), the next big hit is the state in which the special MAX operation winning opening 6720 is opened. It is possible to give the player the option of firing a game ball at the distribution device 6700 in order to carry over to. On the other hand, if it becomes a jackpot b or a jackpot d (a jackpot type that has only 10 time reduction states and is relatively unlikely to win a jackpot within the number of time reductions), the game is played to the special MAX operation winning opening 6720. If the ball is not entered, the time saving state will elapse and the game will return to the left-handed game, and there is a high possibility that the game ball will enter the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 (the special MAX operating winning opening 6720). It is more likely that you will lose the right to the 16-round jackpot because it will be closed), so give the player the option of letting the game ball enter the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 and executing the 16-round jackpot. Can be done. In this case, if a combination is combined with a specification in which 1 is added to the number of balls that are the closing conditions of the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 each time a game ball enters the MAX operating winning opening 6710a. It is effective. That is, when a game ball is inserted into the distribution device 6700 with the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 open and the ball is entered into the MAX operating winning opening 6710a, not only is it a 16-round jackpot. Since the closing condition of the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 is added by 1, the game ball moves to the MAX operating winning opening 6710a regardless of whether the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 is closed or open. By entering the ball, it is possible to give a merit to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<9th embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 186 to 208. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment described above, when the ball enters the MAX operating winning opening 6710a in the jackpot standby state, an advantageous 16-round jackpot is started and the special MAX operating winning opening 6720 is reached. By providing a MAX zone that allows the player to enter the ball, it is easy to continuously execute a jackpot of an advantageous type, and the player's interest in the game is improved.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment, in addition to the case where the lottery of the special symbol is a big hit, the lottery of the special symbol becomes a small hit which is a kind of loss, and during the small hit game. The specification is adopted in which a game ball wins a big hit even when the game ball enters the V winning opening (specific area) provided in the game area. Further, in the ninth embodiment, the small hit is won with a high probability (for example, on 9/10) only in the lottery of the second special symbol (the lottery of the special symbol based on the entry into the second entrance 640). It is possible to make a small hit (the lottery of the second special symbol is more likely to be a small hit than the lottery of the first special symbol), and the ease of entering the second ball entrance 640 according to the game state. It is configured to be variable. That is, in the ninth embodiment, the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery is set to be constant regardless of the game state, and the opening probability of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 (as a hit of the normal symbol). By making the fluctuation time, opening time, etc. of the normal symbol different according to the game state, the possibility of winning a small hit differs depending on the game state, and as a result, the possibility of winning a big hit (So-called type 1 and type 2 mixer specifications).

Further, in the ninth embodiment, as the types of V winning openings that win the jackpot when the ball is won when the small hit is won, the V winning opening for MAX that triggers the execution of the 16-round jackpot and the small hit type. It is configured to provide two types, a normal V winning opening, which triggers the execution of the jackpot of the number of rounds corresponding to. Further, as in the eighth embodiment described above, the non-electric accessory 6752a is attached to one MAX V winning opening (6753 V winning opening for special MAX) to which a 16-round jackpot is given. , The non-electric accessory 6752a is opened in conjunction with the entry of the game ball into the V winning opening (V winning opening 6750f1 for MAX) of 1 to which the 16-round jackpot is given. As a result, if a small hit occurs while the normal symbol is in a short time state, the game ball is inserted into the special MAX V winning opening 675 by left-handing before the small hit ends. With just one, you can easily determine the jackpot for 16 rounds.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. And the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and some of the control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are partially changed. It is a point that has been changed, and a point that the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, 8 It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the eighth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 186, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 186 is a front view of the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 186, the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment is provided with a lottery device 6750 instead of the distribution device 6700 for the board surface configuration (see FIG. 173) of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment. The difference is that a special MAX V winning opening 6752 is provided in place of the special MAX operating winning opening 6720.

The lottery device 6750 is provided inside the lottery device 6750 so that when a small hit is made in a special symbol lottery, a game ball can enter the ball for a predetermined period (that is, the small hit attacker 6750a is opened). A big hit is won by the game ball entering any one of the three V winning openings (MAX V winning opening 6750f1, normal V winning opening 6750f3, 6750f5). Inside the lottery device 6750, the same number of out openings (out openings 6750f2, 6750f4, 6750f6) as the number of V winning openings (3) are provided. Since the game ball that has entered the inside of the lottery device 6750 always enters one of the V winning openings or one of the out openings, the game ball that has entered the lottery device 6750 has one of the V winning openings. The rate (probability) of entering the ball into the mouth (V winning occurs) is 1/2 (3/6).

When a game ball enters one of the normal V winning openings 6750f3 and 6750f5 during the execution of the small hit game (during the small hit validity period), the large hit of the number of rounds corresponding to the type of the executed small hit is executed. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the MAX V winning opening 6750f1, 16 rounds of big hits are executed regardless of the small hit type. Further, inside the MAX V winning opening 6750f1, an opening mechanism for opening the non-electric accessory 6752a provided accompanying the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is provided. For this reason, if a game ball enters the MAX V winning opening 6750f1 during the small hit validity period, the jackpot of 16 rounds with the largest number of rounds (advantageous to the player) is executed and left-handed. It becomes possible to easily enter the game ball into the special MAX V winning opening 6752 just by performing. Even when a game ball enters the special MAX V winning opening 6752 during the small hit validity period, the number of rounds is the same regardless of the small hit type, as in the case of entering the MAX V winning opening 6750f1. Since you win the most 16 rounds of jackpots, you will be given the chance to win consecutive wins in a favorable jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the ninth embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the possibility of winning a small hit is 0, but when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, there is a high probability (for example). , 9/10) to win a small hit. Therefore, in the time-saving state of the normal symbol that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second entrance 640, by continuing to hit right, there is a high probability that a small hit will occur and the small hit attacker 6750a will be released. Therefore, it is easy to enter the V winning opening. On the other hand, in the normal state of the normal symbol, it is difficult to allow the game ball to enter the second entrance 640 even if the player hits right, so it is necessary to advance the game by hitting left. A left-handed game ball can enter the first entrance 64, but cannot enter the second entrance 640. Therefore, in the normal state of a normal symbol, a small hit is won. There is no. Therefore, the game state after the end of the jackpot executed based on the game ball entering the MAX V winning opening 6750f1 (the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is opened) is the normal state of the normal symbol. In that case, the game ball hit to the left before the small hit enters the special MAX V winning opening 6752, and the non-electric accessory 6752a is closed. On the other hand, the game state after the end of the jackpot executed based on the fact that the game ball enters the MAX V winning opening 6750f1 (the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is opened) is the time saving of the normal symbol. If it is in a state, there is a high probability that you will win a small hit, so by hitting left when you win a small hit, you can easily move the game ball to the special MAX V winning opening 6752 during the small hit validity period. You can enter the ball. Therefore, it is possible to execute a jackpot of an advantageous jackpot type in succession by two jackpots.

Next, the details of the lottery apparatus 6750 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 187. FIG. 187 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the lottery device 6750. As shown in FIG. 187, inside the lottery device 6750, there are three V winning openings (MAX V winning opening 6750f1, normal V winning opening 6750f3, 6750f5) and three out openings (out opening 6750f2, 6750f4, 6750f6). ), And a distribution rotating body 6750f that constantly rotates at a constant speed is provided. The game ball that has reached the distribution rotating body 6750f enters one of the three V winning openings and the three out openings. Since the distribution rotating body 6750f always rotates at a constant speed from when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 until the power is turned off, the timing of winning a small hit and the inside of the lottery device 6750 Depending on the rolling speed of the game ball in the above, it is possible to change which of the entry openings (three V winning openings and three out openings) provided in the distribution rotating body 6750f. That is, every time the game ball enters the inside of the lottery device 6750 as a small hit, the game ball can be randomly distributed to any of the entrances.

Further, as shown in FIG. 187, a small hit attacker 6750a for opening and closing the entrance portion of the lottery device 6750 is provided on the right side of the front view of the lottery device 6750. The small hit attacker 6750a is released for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) when the small hit is won. The game ball that has reached the small hit attacker 6750a from above during this opening period flows into the inside of the lottery device 6750. As shown in FIG. 187, the lottery device 6750 is provided with an induction flow path 6750b for flowing the game ball toward the distribution rotating body 6750f, and one of the floor surfaces of the induction flow path 6750b. The portion is provided with a ball discharge door 6750c that opens and closes the floor surface. When the ball discharge door 6750c is closed, the floor surface of the guide flow path 6750b and the upper surface of the ball discharge door 6750c form one flow path, so that the game ball is moved downstream from the ball discharge door 6750c. Can be made to flow down. On the other hand, in the state where the ball discharge door 6750c is open, the game ball falls into the discharge area 6750d formed below the ball discharge door 6750c and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. That is, it is discharged to the outside without reaching the distribution rotating body 6750f. Further, as shown in FIG. 187, the flowing game ball is temporarily stopped in the induction flow path 6750b on the downstream side of the lower end of the ball discharge door 6750c by about one game ball (induction flow path). A ball stopper 6750e capable of (closing a specific position of 6750b) is provided.

The ball discharge door 6750c, the discharge area 6750d, and the ball stop portion 6750e are provided to limit the number of game balls that reach the distribution rotating body 6750f in one small hit to a maximum of one. A control method for limiting the number of game balls reaching the distribution rotating body 6750f to one will be described with reference to FIG. 188. FIG. 188 (a) is a diagram showing a case where a plurality of game balls enter the inside of the lottery device 6750 in a state where both the ball discharge door 6750c and the ball stop portion 6750e are closed. As shown in FIG. 188 (a), when the ball discharge door 6750c and the ball stop portion 6750e are closed, the game ball flowing into the inside of the lottery device 6750 passes through the upper surface of the ball discharge door 6750c. Then, the flow is obstructed by the ball stop portion 6750e, and the ball is stopped to the right of the ball stop portion 6750e. If the game ball further flows down the guide flow path 6750b while the game ball of 1 is stopped, the flow is hindered by the game ball that has already been stopped, and the game ball is moved to the right of the stopped game ball. Be stopped. As described above, the ball stop portion 6750e is arranged with a distance of about one game ball from the lower end of the ball discharge door 6750c, so that the second and subsequent ball stop portions enter the lottery device 6750. The ball is stopped on the upper surface of the ball discharge door 6750c.

FIG. 188 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the ball discharge door 6750c is opened while the game ball is stationary. As shown in FIG. 188 (b), when the ball discharge door 6750c is opened, a game ball other than the game ball parked on the right side of the ball stop portion 6750e falls into the discharge area 6750d, resulting in pachinko. It falls to the outside of the machine 10. As a result, it is possible to form a state in which only one game ball is stopped inside the lottery device 6750. The ball stop portion 6750e is in a state of being able to pass through the guide flow path 6750b by tilting to the left in the front view after 0.5 seconds have passed since the ball discharge door 6750c was opened. As a result, one game ball remaining in the lottery device 6750 can be made to flow down toward the distribution rotating body 6750f. By controlling in this way, it is possible to limit the number of game balls that can reach the distribution rotating body 6750f in one small hit to a maximum of one, so that the probability of a big hit lottery using the lottery device 6750 (distribution). The ratio of distribution to the V winning opening by the rotating body 6750f) can be made constant.

Next, the details of the distribution rotating body 6750f will be described with reference to FIG. 189. FIG. 189 (a) is a top view of the distribution rotating body 6750f. As shown in FIG. 189 (a), the distribution rotating body 6750f is configured to have a substantially circular shape when viewed from above, and six entry ports are arranged at the outer edge portion thereof. Since the distribution rotating body 6750f is provided with an inclination in the downward direction from the center toward the outer edge, the game ball arriving from above near the center of the distribution rotating body 6750f is inclined toward the outer edge direction. Is distributed to any of the entrances provided at the outer edge portion.

As shown in FIG. 189 (a), three V winning openings having a substantially trapezoidal shape on the upper surface and three out openings having a substantially trapezoidal shape on the upper surface are alternately arranged on the distribution rotating body 6750f. That is, the MAX V winning opening 6750f1, the out opening 6750f2, the normal V winning opening 6750f3, the out opening 6750f4, the normal V winning opening 6750f5, and the out opening 6750f6 are arranged in order. As shown in FIG. 189 (a), the distribution rotating body 6750f always has a constant speed (for example, clockwise in the top view) with the shaft 6750fz as the rotation axis while the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. It is configured to continue rotating at a rotation speed (rotational speed of one rotation in 5 seconds).

As shown in FIG. 189 (b), when the game ball that has reached the distribution rotating body 6750f enters the MAX V winning opening 6750f1, the game ball is opened inside the MAX V winning opening 6750f1. Since it passes through the mechanism, the non-electric accessory 6752a is released in conjunction with the passage of the opening mechanism. As a result, an open state is formed in which the game ball can enter the special MAX V winning opening 6752. This open state continues until the game ball enters the special MAX V winning opening 675 and passes through the closing mechanism provided inside. In addition, since the special MAX V winning opening 675 will not enter as long as the game ball is hit to the right, a big hit (MAX V winning opening 6752) will be an opportunity to switch to the open state. If the jackpot won based on the entry into the mouth 6750f1) is a time-saving jackpot, the game can be advanced by right-handing the time-saving state after the jackpot and executing the second special symbol lottery, left. You can win a small hit without hitting. Therefore, when a small hit is won, a game ball can be easily entered into the special MAX V winning opening 6752 by simply hitting the left side during the small hit valid period, which is an advantageous type of big hit (16 round big hit). ) Can be executed. On the other hand, if the jackpot won by entering the MAX V winning opening 6750f1 is a normal jackpot, the normal symbol will be in the normal state after the jackpot ends, and even if you hit right, the second special symbol Since it becomes difficult to execute the lottery, it is necessary to advance the game by letting the game ball enter the first entrance 64 by hitting the left side. Therefore, since the game ball can easily enter the special MAX V winning opening 6752, the non-electric accessory 6752a is closed at a relatively early stage. Therefore, in most cases, it is not possible to benefit from the opening of the special MAX V winning opening 6752.

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, depending on whether the jackpot executed by being distributed to the MAX V winning slot 6750f1 in the small hit is a time-saving jackpot or a normal jackpot, the special MAX V winning slot 6752. It is configured to be variable whether or not you can receive the benefit of being released (the next small hit, you can easily win the 16 round big hit). Therefore, when a game ball enters the MAX V winning opening 6750f1 and a big hit is executed, the player is more expected that the game state after the big hit will be the normal symbol time saving state. Can be played. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 190, each part of the lottery device 6750 (small hit attacker 6750a, ball stop portion 6750e, and ball) in the case of a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol in the ninth embodiment. The operation pattern (opening pattern) of the discharge door 6750c) will be described. FIG. 190 is a diagram showing changes over time in the state of each part at the time of winning a small hit.

As shown in FIG. 190, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the small hit attacker 6750a is released at the same time as the start of the small hit (the start of the small hit valid period). As shown in FIG. 190, the open state of the small hit attacker 6750a continues for 0.5 seconds and is closed after 0.5 seconds. After that, the small hit attacker 6750a is maintained in the closed state until the small hit is completed. If the game ball can be entered into the small hit attacker 6750a during the opening period of 0.5 seconds, the game ball is made to reach the distribution rotating body 6750f during the small hit valid period, and either of them is used. A game ball can be entered into the entrance.

Further, as shown in FIG. 190, the ball stop portion 6750e is maintained in a closed state (see FIG. 188 (a)) from the start of the small hit until 2 seconds have elapsed, and at the time when 2 seconds have elapsed (small hit). From the time when the attacker 6750a is closed 1.5 seconds to the end of the small hit, it is switched to the open state (the state where the guide flow path 6750b can flow down), and when the small hit is finished, it is switched to the closed state again. .. On the other hand, the ball discharge door 6750c is maintained in the closed state (see FIG. 188 (a)) from the start of the small hit until 1.5 seconds have elapsed, and at the time when 1.5 seconds have elapsed (for small hits). From 1 second after the attacker 6750a is closed to the end of the small hit, the open state (see FIG. 188 (b)) is switched, and when the small hit is finished, the closed state is switched again. That is, for 1.5 seconds after the start of the small hit, both the ball stop portion 6750e and the ball discharge door 6750c are closed, so that all the game balls that have entered the inside of the lottery device 6750 are all. It is stopped in the induction flow path 6750b by the ball stop portion 6750e.

Further, when 1.5 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit, the ball discharge door 6750c is opened with the ball stop portion 6750e closed, so that the ball discharge door 6750c is stopped by directly contacting the right side of the ball stop portion 6750e. All the game balls other than the game ball of 1 fall from the opening of the ball discharge door 6750c to the discharge area 6750d and are discharged to the outside. That is, there is only one game ball parked inside the lottery device 6750. Then, since the ball stop portion 6750e is opened 0.5 seconds after the ball discharge door 6750c is opened, one game ball remaining inside the lottery device 6750 is directed toward the distribution rotating body 6750f. Flow down. In this way, by opening the ball discharge door 6750c first and then opening the ball stop portion 6750e, two or more game balls are inside the lottery device 6750 during the opening period of the small hit attacker 6750a. Even if the ball enters, the second and subsequent game balls can be discharged to the outside from the discharge area 6750d until the ball stop portion 6750e is opened. Therefore, since the number of game balls that reach the distribution rotating body 6750f in one small hit can be limited to one each time, the winning probability of the big hit in the small hit (probability that the game ball enters the V winning opening). ) Can always be constant (50%).

Next, with reference to FIG. 191, a characteristic display effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the ninth embodiment will be described. In the ninth embodiment, as a V winning opening in which a big hit is given by a game ball entering during the small hit validity period, inside a lottery device 6750 in which a right-handed game ball can enter. In addition to the three V winning openings provided (MAX V winning opening 6750f1, normal V winning opening 6750f3, 6750f5), a special MAX V winning opening is available at a position where a game ball launched by left-handed can enter. A mouth 6752 is provided. In the ninth embodiment, when a small hit is made while the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is open, the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is used instead of the lottery device 6750 within the small winning valid period. A production that encourages you to aim (special small hit production) is executed. The display mode of this special small hit effect is provided with three types of display modes that can suggest the degree of expectation that a game ball will be a time-saving jackpot when a game ball is inserted into the special MAX V winning opening 6752.

FIG. 191 (a) is an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when a special small hit effect (special small hit effect for low expectation) suggesting that the expectation of the time-saving jackpot is low is executed. It is a figure which showed. As shown in FIG. 191 (a), when the special small hit effect for low expectation is executed, the remaining time until the end of the small hit valid period is displayed in the upper left of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. When a game ball enters the special MAX V winning opening 6752, the entry is treated as valid, and a display area HR8 for displaying (a period during which a 16-round jackpot is won) is formed. As shown in FIG. 191 (a), the character "MAX valid timer" is displayed inside the display area HR8, and the valid period of the small hit elapses below the character "MAX valid timer". The number of seconds according to the remaining time until is displayed. By confirming the display content of the display area HR8, the player can easily understand the remaining time until the ball entering the special MAX V winning opening 675 becomes invalid.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 191 (a), in the substantially central part of the display screen, the characters "If you enter MAX before the timer reaches 0, the MAX jackpot is confirmed !!" and "Enter the time saving mode. A display area HR9 is formed in which the characters "may ...?" Are displayed. Further, below the display area HR9, the characters "left-handed" are displayed facing the direction of the image imitating the special MAX V winning opening 675 and the image imitating the special MAX V winning opening 6752. A display area HR10 is formed in which an image imitating an arrow is displayed. According to the display contents of these display areas HR9 and HR10, it is easy for the player to win at least 16 rounds by launching a game ball aiming at the special MAX V winning opening 6752 by hitting left. Can be understood. In addition, the characters with a relatively bearish expression such as "Maybe we will enter the time saving mode ...?" Are displayed in the display area HR9, so that even if the game ball is entered, the time saving mode (normal pattern) is displayed. It is possible to make the player aware that it is unlikely to shift to the (time saving state). Therefore, during the small hit period, you can either hit left to win the 16-round big hit, or stop launching the game ball and wait until the next small hit (avoid V winning in this small hit). Since it is possible to realize the playability of letting a person make a choice, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. The special small hit effect for low expectations is configured so that it is difficult to be selected during the small hit valid period corresponding to the short-time big hit, and it is easy to be selected during the small hit valid period corresponding to the normal big hit. There is.

FIG. 191 (b) is an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when a special small hit effect (special small hit effect for high expectation) suggesting that the expectation of a time-saving jackpot is high is executed. It is a figure which showed. As shown in FIG. 191 (b), the display mode of the special small hit effect for high expectation differs from the display mode of the special small hit effect for low expectation only in the display mode of the display area HR9. It is configured. Specifically, the character displayed in the lower row inside the display area HR9 is the character "Expected high in the time saving mode !!". According to this display mode, it is extremely likely that the player will win the time-saving jackpot by letting the player enter the game ball into the special MAX V winning opening 6752 during the current small hit validity period. It can be easily understood. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 195 (b), but this special small hit effect for high expectation is easy to be selected during the small hit valid period corresponding to the short-time big hit, and corresponds to the normal big hit. It is configured to be difficult to select during the small hit validity period.

Although not shown, the special small hit effect in the ninth embodiment is provided for medium expectation in addition to low expectation and high expectation. If a small hit is won with the special MAX V winning opening 6752 open, a special small hit effect for one expectation will be decided according to the type of small hit among these three expectations. Will be done. As a result, the game allows the player to select whether to aim for a prize in the special MAX V winning opening 6752 or to avoid the V winning by left-handing, taking into account the degree of expectation suggested by the special small hit effect. Since the sex can be realized, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Electrical configuration in the ninth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 192 (a), the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 192 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 192 (a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the ninth embodiment is a small hit with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 9 (a)). The difference is that the type selection table 202ea has been added, and the provisions of the first random number table 202a and the first type selection table 202b have been partially changed.

The small hit type selection table 202ea is a data table that is referred to for determining the small hit type when a small hit is obtained in a lottery of a special symbol. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 193 (b), but when a small hit is obtained in the special symbol lottery, the small hit type selection table 202ea is referred to and the value of the small hit type counter C5 is set. The corresponding small hit type is determined.

Next, the first random number table 202a in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 192 (b). FIG. 192 (b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first random number table 202a in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 192 (b), in the first random number table 202a in the ninth embodiment, two random number values (counter values) of "0, 1" are defined as determination values to be determined as big hits. (See 202a1 in FIG. 192 (b)). The determination value that becomes a big hit is common to the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. Of the 400 random number values (counter values) that can be taken by the first random number counter C1, the number of judgment values (counter values) that are determined to be jackpots is 2, so the probability that a jackpot will be determined by a special symbol lottery. Is 1/200 (2/400).

In addition, "2 to 399" is defined as the range of judgment values determined to be out of the lottery for the first special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 192 (b)), and the determination is determined to be a small hit of the first special symbol. The value is not specified (see 202a3 in FIG. 192 (b)). Further, "2 to 39" is defined as the range of the determination value determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 192 (b)), and the determination value determined to be a small hit of the second special symbol. The range is defined as "40 to 399" (see 202a3 in FIG. 192 (b)). Of the 400 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first random number counter C1, the number of judgment values (counter values) that are determined to be small hits is 360, so it is determined to be a big hit by lottery of special symbols. The probability is 9/10 (360/400).

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, the small hit can be won only by the lottery of the second special symbol. As a result, in the time-saving state of the normal symbol in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed, the game ball is easily entered into the V winning opening, so that the big hit is likely to occur again in a short period of time. As a result, the degree of advantage in the time-saving state can be further increased, so that the player can be greatly delighted in the case of the time-saving state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 193 (a), the first type selection table 202b in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 193 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first type selection table 202b in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 193 (a), the first hit type selection table 202b in the ninth embodiment is provided with two types of jackpots A13 and B13 as the jackpot types of the first special symbol, and the second There are two types of jackpots, C13 and D13, as jackpot types of special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 193 (a), "big hit A13" is associated with the first special symbol in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49". (See 202b1 in FIG. 193 (a)). This "big hit A13" has four rounds, and is a big hit type (4 rounds time saving big hit) in which the game state after the big hit is set to the time saving state of the normal symbol. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 are counter values that are "big hit A13", so if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit A13" is determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100).

As shown in FIG. 193 (a), "big hit B13" is associated with the first special symbol in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99". (See 202b2 in FIG. 193 (a)). This "big hit B13" is a big hit type (4 rounds normal big hit) in which the number of rounds is 4 and the game state after the big hit is set to the normal state of the normal symbol. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 are counter values that become "big hit B13", so if a big hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit B13" is determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 193 (a), "big hit C13" is defined in association with the range of "0 to 79" in the value of the first hit type counter C2 for the second special symbol. (See 202b3 in FIG. 193 (a)). This "big hit C13" is a jackpot type (16 rounds time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 16 and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time-saving state of the normal symbol. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 80 counter values are "big hit C13", so if a big hit is made in the second special symbol lottery, "big hit C13" is determined. The ratio is 80% (80/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 193 (a), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "80 to 99" for the "big hit D13" for the second special symbol. (See 202b4 in FIG. 193 (a)). This "big hit D13" is a big hit type (4 rounds normal big hit) in which the number of rounds is 4 and the game state after the big hit is set to the normal state of the normal symbol. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 20 counter values are "big hit D13", so if a big hit is made in the second special symbol lottery, "big hit D13" is determined. The ratio is 20% (20/100).

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, a big hit of four rounds with a small number of rounds is always executed, while a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol. In the case of, the jackpot of 16 rounds with the largest number of rounds is executed at a rate of 80%, and the jackpot of 4 rounds with a small number of rounds is executed at a rate of 20%. In addition, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, the ratio of setting an advantageous time saving state after the end of the big hit is 50%, whereas the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit. In that case, the rate at which the time saving state is set is 80%. Therefore, it is configured so that it is easier for the player to win the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol than to win the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol.

Next, the details of the small hit type selection table 202ea will be described with reference to FIG. 193 (b). FIG. 193 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the small hit type selection table 202ea. The small hit type selection table 202ea is a data table in which a determination value for determining the small hit type is defined when a small hit is obtained in a special symbol lottery, and the determination value of the small hit type counter C5. Is specified in association with each small hit type.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193 (b), "small hit A13" is defined as a small hit type in association with the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "0 to 4". (See 202ea1 in FIG. 193 (b)). This "small hit A13" is a small hit type that wins "big hit E13" (16 round time saving big hit) when a game ball enters any V winning opening during the small hit validity period. .. That is, even when the game ball enters the normal V winning openings 6750f3 and 6750f5, the round is the same as when the game ball enters the MAX V winning opening 6750f1 and the special MAX V winning opening 6752. This is the most advantageous jackpot type in which the 16-round jackpot with the largest number (advantageous to the player) is executed, and the time saving state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot ends. Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, 5 counter values are "small hit A13", so if a small hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery, "small hit A13" will be displayed. The determined percentage is 5% (5/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 193 (b), "small hit B13" is defined as a small hit type in association with the range in which the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "5 to 54". See 202ea2 in FIG. 193 (b)). This "small hit B13" is a small hit type that wins "big hit F13" (special time saving big hit) when a game ball enters any V winning opening during the small hit valid period. In this "big hit F13", when a game ball enters either of the normal V winning openings 6750f3 and 6750f5 during the small hit valid period, the number of rounds of the big hit is set to 4 rounds, while MAX. When a game ball enters the V winning opening 6750f1 for special MAX or the V winning opening 6752 for special MAX, the number of rounds of the jackpot is set to 16 rounds. That is, in the "small hit B13", the number of rounds (advantageous degree) of the big hit is variable according to the type of the winning V winning opening, so that when the game ball enters the normal V winning opening, the player It will be disadvantageous for. Further, since the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the time saving state, it is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends. Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, 50 counter values are "small hit B13", so if a small hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery, "small hit B13" will be displayed. The determined percentage is 50% (50/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 193 (b), "small hit C13" is defined as a small hit type in association with the range in which the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "55 to 99". See 202ea3 in FIG. 193 (b)). This "small hit C13" is a small hit type that wins "big hit G13" (special normal big hit) when a game ball enters any V winning opening during the small hit valid period. In this "big hit G13", when a game ball enters either of the normal V winning openings 6750f3 and 6750f5 during the small hit validity period, the number of rounds of the big hit is set to 4 rounds, while MAX. When a game ball enters the V winning opening 6750f1 for special MAX or the V winning opening 6752 for special MAX, the number of rounds of the jackpot is set to 16 rounds. That is, in the "small hit C13", the number of rounds (advantageous degree) of the big hit is variable according to the type of the winning V winning opening, so when the game ball enters the normal V winning opening, the player It will be disadvantageous for. Further, since the game state after the big hit is set to the normal state of the normal symbol, it is a big hit type that is disadvantageous to the player in terms of the game state after the big hit ends. Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small hit type counter C5 can take, 45 counter values are "small hit C13", so if a small hit is obtained by a special symbol lottery, "small hit C13" will be displayed. The determined percentage is 45% (45/100).

In this way, when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, the ratio of the small hit type (small hit A13, B13) corresponding to the time saving big hit is set to 55% (5% + 50%). On the other hand, the ratio at which the small hit type (small hit C13) corresponding to the normal big hit is determined is set to 45%. As mentioned above, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 9/10, so it is almost a small hit to win the big hit in the time saving state of the normal symbol. This is the case when a V prize is awarded. Therefore, when a big hit occurs in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the ratio of the advantageous normal symbol to the time saving state again after the big hit is 45%. Further, the number of rounds of the big hit, which is a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol and is won when the V prize is generated, is configured to be variable according to the state of the special MAX V prize opening 6752. That is, if the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is closed, it is necessary to insert the game ball into the lottery device 6750 in order to generate the V winning during the small hit valid period, so that the V winning occurs. One-third of the cases where the V winning opening is 6750f1 for MAX is V winning, while two-thirds when the V winning occurs is the V winning for either of the normal V winning openings 6750f3 and 6750f5. .. Then, as described above, the small hit B13 determined at a rate of 50% in the case of a small hit and the small hit C13 determined at a rate of 45% are usually either V winning openings 6750f3 or 6750f5. When the game ball enters, the number of rounds of the jackpot is set to 4 rounds. That is, when a V prize is generated for the MAX V prize opening 6750f1, a 16-round jackpot is set at a rate of 100%, while a V prize is generated for either of the normal V prize openings 6750f3 and 6750f5. 16 rounds of jackpots are set at a rate of 5% (small hits A13), while 4 rounds of jackpots are set at a rate of 95% (either small hits B13 or C13). Therefore, when the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is closed, 16 rounds will be a big hit at a rate of about 36.7% (1/3 + 2/3 x 5%) when a V winning occurs. , 4 rounds jackpot at a rate of about 63.3% (2/3 x 95%). On the other hand, as described above, if a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, it will be a big hit for 16 rounds at a rate of 80%. As a ratio of advantageous 16 round big hits, if a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, and a V prize is generated during the execution of the small hit game (during the small hit valid period) and the big hit is obtained (about). 36.7%) is higher in the case of a big hit (80%) in the lottery of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, in the state where the time is shortened and the V winning opening 6752 for special MAX is open, regardless of the small hit type, left-handed is performed and the special MAX is opened. Just by entering the game ball into the V winning opening 6752, the 16-round jackpot with the largest number of rounds is always set, so in terms of the number of rounds, compared to the case of a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery. It will be advantageous. In other words, in the ninth embodiment, even in the same gaming state (normal symbol time saving state), the second special symbol lottery is performed depending on whether or not the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is open. It becomes a small hit, and the degree of advantage is switched between the case where a V prize is generated during the execution of the small hit game and the big hit is obtained, and the case where the big hit is obtained by the lottery of the second special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player wish for a different opportunity as a big hit winning opportunity (V winning and lottery of the second special symbol) according to the state of the special MAX V winning opening 6752. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 194, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 194 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 according to the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 194, the configuration of the RAM 203 in the ninth embodiment has a small hit medium flag 203ea with respect to the configuration of the RAM 203 (see FIG. 13) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above. The difference is that the jackpot type storage area 203eb and the V passing flag 203ec are added, and the probability variation flag 203h and the ball entry waiting flag 203j are deleted. Since the other configurations are the same as the configurations of the RAM 203 in the above-described eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The small hit medium flag 203ea is a flag indicating whether or not the small hit is in progress. If the small hit medium flag 203ea is on, it means that the small hit is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the small hit is not in progress. The small hit medium flag 203ea becomes a small hit in the lottery of the special symbol, and is set to on when the small hit starts. It is also set to off at the end of the small hit (see S1311 in FIG. 203). In the special symbol variation processing 13 (see FIG. 197), the small hit medium flag 203ea is referred to to determine whether or not the small hit is in progress (see S261 in FIG. 197).

The jackpot type storage area 203eb is a storage area for temporarily storing data indicating the winning jackpot type when a jackpot is won. In the jackpot type storage area 203eb, data corresponding to the jackpot type is stored when a jackpot is obtained by lottery of a special symbol (see S321 in FIG. 198). Further, when a small hit is obtained by a lottery of a special symbol and a game ball enters the V winning opening in the small hit, data indicating the big hit type corresponding to the small hit type is stored (see S1502 in FIG. 199). ). The data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203eb is held until the end timing of the winning jackpot, and is used to set the gaming state after the jackpot end according to the jackpot type.

The V-passing flag 203ec indicates whether or not the game ball has already entered the V winning opening during the execution of the small hit game (whether or not it is confirmed that the big hit will be achieved after the small hit is completed). It is a flag of. If this V-pass flag 203ec is on at the end of the small hit, the start of the big hit is set at the end of the small hit, while if the V-pass flag 203ec is off, the big hit is not started and the small hit is set. It will be terminated. The initial value of the V passage flag 203 ec is set to off, and is set to on when the game ball wins the V winning opening during the execution of the small hit game (see S1608 in FIG. 204). Further, it is set to off after setting the start of the jackpot based on the game ball entering the V winning opening (see S1325 in FIG. 203).

Next, with reference to FIG. 195 (a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 195 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 195 (a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the ninth embodiment is expected with respect to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 14 (a)). The only difference is that the selection table 222ea has been added. This expectation degree selection table 222ea determines the production mode (expectation degree suggested by the production) of the special small hit effect to be executed when the small hit is won with the special MAX V winning opening 6272 open. It is a data table that is referenced to do so. Here, as described above, in the ninth embodiment, the big hit is won by entering any V winning opening during the small hit valid period. Further, the type of big hit (big hit symbol) to be won when the ball enters the V winning opening is predetermined for each small hit type (see FIG. 193 (b)). That is, when a game ball is put into the V winning opening and a big hit is won, whether or not the time saving state is given after the end of the big hit is when the small hit type is decided (change of special symbol). It is decided at the start time). In the ninth embodiment, if a small hit is won while the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is open, the expectation that a time saving state is given by making the V winning during the small hit valid period. The special small hit effect suggesting the above is selected from the expectation degree selection table 222ea and executed. With this configuration, if a small hit is made with the special MAX V winning opening 675 open, the game ball can be entered into the special MAX V winning opening 675 within the small hit valid period. Whether or not to start the big hit can be decided according to the degree of expectation suggested by the special small hit effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. The details of the expectation degree selection table 222ea will be described with reference to FIG. 195 (b).

FIG. 195 (b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the expectation degree selection table 222ea. As shown in FIG. 195 (b), the expectation degree selection table 222ea has a range of the expected degree type (expectation degree suggested by the special small hit effect) and the value range of the effect lottery counter 223ea for each small hit type. Is specified in association with. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 195 (b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is set for the small hit A13 and the small hit B13 (the small hit type that wins the time-saving big hit when the V prize occurs). The production mode for high expectation (see FIG. 191 (b)) is defined in association with the range of "0 to 19", and the production mode for medium expectation (not shown) is defined in the range of "20 to 89". Is defined in association with each other, and an effect mode for low expectation (see FIG. 191 (a)) is associated and defined in the range of "90 to 99".

Since the effect lottery counter 223ea can take 100 values of "0 to 99", the effect mode for high expectation, medium expectation, and low expectation when the small hit is A13 or B13. Are determined at 20% (20/100), 70% (70/100), and 10% (10/100), respectively.

Further, as shown in FIG. 195 (b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is in the range of "0 to 4" for the small hit C13 (the small hit type that normally wins a big hit when a V prize occurs). The effect mode for high expectation (see FIG. 191 (b)) is defined in association with each other, and the effect mode for medium expectation (not shown) is associated with the range of "5 to 49". An effect mode for low expectations (see FIG. 191 (a)) is associated with the range of "50 to 99".

Since the production lottery counter 223eka can take 100 values of "0 to 99", the production modes for high expectation, medium expectation, and low expectation are determined when the small hit is C13. The percentages are 5% (5/100), 45% (45/100), and 50% (50/100), respectively. From these provisions, it can be said that the effect mode for high expectation is easy to be selected when the small hit A13 and the small hit B13 are won, but it is difficult to be selected when the small hit C13 is won. Further, the effect mode for the medium expectation degree is selected at a relatively high rate regardless of whether the small hit A13 and the small hit B13 are won or the small hit C13 is won, and the effect mode for the low expectation degree is selected. Is difficult to be selected when the small hit A13 and the small hit B13 are won, and is easily selected when the small hit C13 is won. Therefore, it is possible to suggest that there is a high possibility that the small hit being executed is the small hit A13 or the small hit B13 when the effect mode for high expectation is executed. When the effect mode for low expectation is executed, it is possible to suggest that the small hit being executed is likely to be the small hit C13. Further, when the effect mode for medium expectation is executed, it is possible to suggest that there is a possibility of a small hit A13 and a small hit B13, and a possibility of a small hit C13. As a result, it is possible to provide a game property that allows the player to select whether or not to insert the game ball into the special MAX V winning opening 6752 according to the degree of expectation suggested by the production mode. , It is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the ninth embodiment, when a small hit is won with the special MAX V winning opening 6752 open, the special small hit effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, even when a small hit is made in a state where the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is closed, the special small hit effect may be configured to be executable. In this case, for example, every time a small hit is won, a special small hit effect is executed, or a normal small hit effect (an effect in which the expectation of a time-saving big hit is not suggested when a V prize is won) is performed. It may be decided by lottery whether it is executed. Further, the lottery probability may be changed according to the situation. More specifically, the more consecutively the normal jackpot is won, the higher the probability that the special small hit effect will be executed when the time-saving jackpot is won and the time-saving state is entered. May be good. With this configuration, it is possible to provide relief in the event of a situation that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, such as winning consecutive jackpots, so even if a disadvantageous situation occurs, the player's It is possible to maintain motivation for the game. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 196, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 196 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 196, the RAM 223 in the ninth embodiment has a point that the effect lottery counter 223ea is added to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 179), and the standby state effect flag 223 g. Is different in that is removed.

The effect lottery counter 223ea is a counter used to select the effect mode (expectation type) of 1 from the above-mentioned expectation degree selection table 222ea. The value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is updated in the range of "0 to 99". When selecting the effect mode (expectation type) of the special small hit effect, the random value (counter value) specified in the expectation degree selection table 222ea is compared with the value of this effect lottery counter 223ea, and the corresponding 1 The production mode (expectation type) of is selected. The effect lottery counter 223ea is updated every 1 ms in, for example, the main process 13 (see FIG. 201).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the ninth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 197 to 204, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described. First, the special symbol variation processing 13 (S141) in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 197. This special symbol variation process 13 (S141) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process 12 (see FIG. 180) in the eighth embodiment, and is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process 12 (see FIG. 180) in the eighth embodiment. ), This is a process for setting the display mode in the first symbol display device 37 and setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81.

Of the special symbol variation processing 13 (see FIG. 197) in the ninth embodiment, in each of the processes S202 to S212, S214 to S218, and S221 to S223, the special symbol variation processing 13 in the eighth embodiment (FIG. 197) is used. The same processes as those of S202 to S212, S214 to S218, and S221 to S223 of (see) are executed. Further, when the special symbol variation process 13 (see FIG. 197) in the ninth embodiment is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit game or the small hit game is being executed (S261), and the big hit game is executed. , Or if it is determined that the small hit game is being executed (S261: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is executed in the process of S261 (S261: No), the process is shifted to S202. In the process of S261, if the big hit medium flag 203m is on, it is determined that the big hit game is in effect, and if the small hit medium flag 203ea is on, it is determined that the small hit game is being executed. When it is determined that both the medium flag 203m and the small hit medium flag 203ea are off, it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit.

Further, in the special symbol variation processing 13 (see FIG. 197) in the ninth embodiment, when the processing of S207 or S212 is completed, the special symbol variation processing (S213, FIG. Instead of (see 23), the special symbol variation process 13 is executed (S262), and this process is terminated. The details of this special symbol variation processing 13 (S262) will be described later with reference to FIG. 198. Further, in the special symbol variation processing 13 (see FIG. 197) in the ninth embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S218 that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit (S218: Yes), the time saving medium counter. The 203i is reset to 0 (S263), the start of the jackpot is set, and the jackpot start flag 203k is set to ON (S264), and the process shifts to S223.

Further, in the special symbol variation processing 13 (see FIG. 197) in the ninth embodiment, after the processing of S222 is completed, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a small hit (S265). If it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S265: Yes), the small hit start process for setting the start of the small hit is executed (S266), and this process ends. The details of this small hit start process (S266) will be described later with reference to FIG. 199. On the other hand, in the processing of S265, if it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is a miss) (S265: No), the small hit start processing (S266) is skipped and the result is as it is. This process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 198, the details of the special symbol change start processing 13 (S262) in the ninth embodiment will be described. This special symbol variation start process 13 (S262) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is a process executed in place of the eighth embodiment (and the eighth embodiment). Similar to the special symbol change start processing (see FIG. 23) in the first embodiment), the values of various counters stored in the execution areas of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Based on the above, a lottery (win / fail determination) of "big hit of special symbol", "missing of special symbol", or "small hit of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are used. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation pattern) of the variation effect to be performed.

Of the special symbol variation start processing 13 (see FIG. 198) in the ninth embodiment, in each of the processes S301 to S312, the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 23) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. ), The same processing as each processing of S301 to S312 is executed. Further, in the special symbol change start processing 13 (see FIG. 198) in the ninth embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S305 that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit (S305: Yes), the big hit type Data indicating the jackpot type won by this lottery is stored in the storage area 203eb (S321), and the process is shifted to S306.

On the other hand, in the processing of S305, when it is determined that the lottery of the special symbol this time is not a big hit (S305: No), then it is determined whether or not the lottery of the special symbol this time is a small hit (S322). ), When it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S322: Yes), the display mode at the time of a small hit is set based on the value of the small hit type counter C5 acquired in the process of S301 (S323). More specifically, the value of the small hit type counter C5 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the small hit type selection table 202ea (see FIG. 193 (b)) to determine what the small hit type is. .. As described above, if the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in the range of "0 to 4", it is determined to be the small hit A13, and if it is in the range of "5 to 54", it is determined to be the small hit B13. If it is in the range of "55 to 99", it is determined that it is a small hit C13 (see FIG. 193 (b)).

When the processing of S323 is completed, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a small hit is determined (S324). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S324, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the combination of symbols indicating small hits. The fluctuation time of the third symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 11A), and the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared. Determine (variation time). When the process of S324 is completed, this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 199, the details of the above-mentioned small hit start processing (S266) will be described. As described above, this small hit start process (S266) is a process for setting the start of a small hit when a small hit is obtained by a lottery of a special symbol. When this small hit start process is executed, first, the operation scenario of the lottery device 6750 corresponding to the small hit type is read out (S1501). In this operation scenario, data for setting the operation shown in FIG. 190 for the small hit attacker 6750a, the ball stop portion 6750e, and the ball discharge door 6750c are specified.

When the processing of S1501 is completed, next, data indicating the jackpot type corresponding to the current small hit type is stored in the jackpot type storage area 203eb (S1502). In the processing of S1502, if the small hit type this time is the small hit A13, the data indicating the big hit E13 (16 rounds of short-time big hit) is stored in the big hit type storage area 203eb, and the current small hit type is the small hit B13. If there is, the data indicating the jackpot F13 (special time saving jackpot) is stored in the jackpot type storage area 203eb, and if the small hit type this time is the small hit C13, the data indicating the jackpot G13 (special normal jackpot) is stored in the jackpot type. Store in area 203eb. When the process of S1502 is completed, the start of the small hit is set (S1503), and the present process is terminated.

Next, the start-up process 13 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 200. The start-up process 13 is a process executed in place of the start-up process 12 (see FIG. 181) in the eighth embodiment, and is a power source like the start-up process 12 (see FIG. 181) in the eighth embodiment. This is a process that is started when the data is turned on. Of the start-up processes 13 (see FIG. 200) in the ninth embodiment, in each of the processes S901 to S910, S912, and S914 to 917, the start-up processes (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment are S901 to The same processing as each processing of S910 and S914 to S917 is executed.

Further, in the start-up process 13 (see FIG. 200) in the ninth embodiment, when the process of S910 is completed, the time saving medium counter 203i, the big hit medium flag 203m, and the small hit medium flag 203ea are read out (S941), and the process is performed. To S912.

Further, in the start-up process 13 (see FIG. 200) in the ninth embodiment, the start of the rotation operation of the distribution rotating body 6750f provided inside the lottery device 6750 is set (S942), and the process is performed in S914. Move to. By executing the process of S942, the distribution rotating body 6750f rotates at a constant rotation speed (for example, a rotation speed of one rotation in 5 seconds) until the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. continue. Therefore, it is possible to randomly change the entrance to which the game balls that have entered the lottery device 6750 are distributed according to the timing of winning the small hit.

Next, the details of the main process 13 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 201. This main process 13 is a process executed in place of the main process 12 (see FIG. 182) in the eighth embodiment, and is the main game in the same manner as the main process 12 (see FIG. 182) in the eighth embodiment. It is a process for executing control.

Of the main processes 13 (see FIG. 201) in the ninth embodiment, in each of the processes S1001 to S1003 and S1006 to S1016, S1001 to S1003 and S1006 of the main processes (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of S1016 is executed. Further, in the main process 13 (see FIG. 201) in the ninth embodiment, when the process of S1003 is completed, the jackpot control process (see S1005 and FIG. 30) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) is replaced. , The big hit control process 13 is executed (S1071), then the small hit control process 13 for executing various controls during the small hit game is executed (S1072), and the process shifts to S1006. The details of the jackpot control process 13 (S1071) and the small hit control process 13 (S1072) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 202 and 203, respectively.

First, with reference to FIG. 202, the details of the jackpot control process 13 (S1071) described above will be described. As described above, the jackpot control process 13 is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and controls the opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a. It is a process for.

Of the jackpot control processes 13 (S1071) in the ninth embodiment, in each of the processes S1201 to S1212, S124, S1216, and S1217, the jackpot control process in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (FIG. 32). The same processing as each processing of S1201 to S1212, S124, S1216, and S1217 of (see) is executed.

Further, in the jackpot control process 13 (see FIG. 202) in the ninth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1212 that the end timing of the ending effect has come (S1212: Yes), the jackpot this time is a time-saving jackpot. If it is determined whether or not it is (S1251) and it is determined that it is a time saving jackpot, the process is shifted to S1214. On the other hand, in the process of S1251, if it is determined that the time reduction is not a big hit (S1251: No), the process is shifted to S1216.

Next, the details of the small hit control process 13 (S1072) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 203. As described above, the small hit control process 13 (S1072) is a process for executing various controls during the small hit game. In other words, it is a process for performing the same control as the small hit control process (see FIG. 67) in the third embodiment described above.

Of the small hit control processes 13 (see FIG. 203), in each of the processes S1301 to S1304, S1310, and S1311, the small hit control processes (see FIG. 67) S1301 to S1304, S1310 in the third embodiment, respectively, and The same process as each process of S1311 is executed. Further, in the small hit control process 13 (see FIG. 203) in the ninth embodiment, when the process of S1303 is completed, the start of the operation scenario for the small hit is set (S1321), and the present process is terminated. ..

Further, in the small hit control process 13 (see FIG. 203) in the ninth embodiment, when the process of S1311 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the V pass flag 203 ec is ON (S1322), and V pass. When it is determined that the flag 203ec is on (S1322: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203i is reset to 0 (S1323), and the jackpot of the type corresponding to the data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203eb The start is set (S1324), the V passage flag 203ec is set to off (S1325), and the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1322 that the V passage flag 203 ec is off (S1322: No), each process of S1323 to S1325 is skipped and the present process is terminated as it is.

Further, in the small hit control process 13 (see FIG. 203) in the ninth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1310 that it is not the end timing of the small hit (S1310: No), the ball enters the V winning opening. When a ball is detected, a V passage detection process for controlling the type of the V winning opening is executed (S1326), and this process is terminated. The details of this V-passage detection process (S1326) will be described with reference to FIG. 204.

FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing the V passage detection process (S1625). As described above, this V passage detection process (S1625) is a process for monitoring the entry of a ball into the V winning opening and, when the entry is detected, performing control corresponding to the type of the V winning opening. .. When this V-passage detection process (S1625) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the V-passage flag 203ec is on (S1601), and if it is determined that the V-passage flag 203ec is on (S1601:). Yes), it means that the ball has already been detected (passed) into one of the V winning openings and no new setting is required, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the V passing flag 203ec is off (S1601: No), it is determined whether or not a ball (passing) for any V winning opening is detected (S1602). If it is determined that the ball (passing) to the V winning opening has not been detected (S1602: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that a ball has been detected for the V winning opening in the processing of S1602 (S1602: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the V winning is in the valid period (S1603), and the valid period is out of the valid period. If (S1603: No), there is a possibility that the game ball has entered (passed) into the V winning opening due to fraudulent activity, etc., so an error command is set (S1604) and this process is terminated. ..

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1603 that it is within the V valid period (S1603: Yes), then the type of the V winning opening that detected the entry in the processing of S1602 is the normal V winning opening 6750f3. , 6750f5 (S1605), and the current entry (passing) is neither of the normal V winning openings 6750f3 and 6750f5 (MAX V winning opening 6750f1 or special MAX V winning opening). If it is determined (S1605: No), the data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203eb is rewritten to the data corresponding to the 16-round jackpot (S1606), and the processing is performed to S1607. And migrate.

On the other hand, in the process of S1605, if it is determined that a ball has been detected in either of the normal V winning openings 6750f3 and 6750f5 (S1605: Yes), the process of S1606 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1607. Transition. In the process of S1607, the V-pass command is set (S1607), and then the V-pass flag 203ec is set to ON (S1608). Next, a V winning opening command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the type of the V winning slot that has detected passage is set (S1609), and this process is terminated.

By this V passage detection process, when a ball is detected in the MAX V winning opening 6750f1 and the special MAX V winning opening 6752 during the small hit validity period, 16 rounds of big hits are executed regardless of the small hit type. can do. As a result, it is possible to pay attention to the type of V winning opening that enters the ball during the small hit valid period, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the ninth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 205 to 207, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment will be described. First, the hit-related process 13 (S43001) in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 205. The hit-related process 13 (S43001) is a process executed in place of the hit-related process 12 (see FIG. 184) in the eighth embodiment in the command determination process (see FIG. 36), and is a process executed in place of the hit-related process 12 (see FIG. 184). Similar to the related process 12 (see FIG. 184), this is a process for executing the control corresponding to the type of the command related to the hit.

Of the hit-related processes 13 (see FIG. 205) in the ninth embodiment, in each of the processes S4404, S405, S4407, and S4408, the hit-related processes 12 (see FIG. 184) in the eighth embodiment are S4404 and S4405, respectively. , S4407, and S4408, and the same processing is executed. Further, in the hit-related process 13 (see FIG. 205) in the ninth embodiment, it is determined that the round number command is not included in the unprocessed commands received from the main control unit 110 in the process of S4407. If (S4407: No), then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed command received from the main controller 110 includes the small hit opening command (S44001), and the small hit opening command is issued. If it is determined that it is included (S44001: Yes), the expectation degree suggestion setting process for setting the effect mode during the small hit is executed (S444002), and this process is terminated. The details of this expectation degree suggestion setting process (S44002) will be described later with reference to FIG. 206.

Further, in the hit-related process 13 (see FIG. 205) in the ninth embodiment, when it is determined that the small hit opening command has not been received in the process of S44001 (S44001: No), then the main control device. It is determined whether or not the V winning opening command is included in the unprocessed command received from 110 (S44003), and if it is determined that the V winning opening command is included (S44003: Yes), the entry is entered. The V winning opening command process for executing the control according to the type of the V winning opening that detected the ball and the state is executed (S44004), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V winning opening command is not included in the processing of S4403 (S44003: No), the processing is shifted to S4409. The details of the V winning opening command processing (S44004) will be described later with reference to FIG. 207.

Next, with reference to FIG. 206, the details of the above-mentioned expectation degree suggestion setting process (S44002) will be described. As described above, this expectation degree suggestion setting process (S44002) is a process for setting the effect mode during the small hit. In this expectation degree suggestion setting process (S44002), first, it is determined whether or not the MAX zone flag 223da is on (S40101), and if it is determined that the MAX zone flag 223da is on (S40101: Yes). ), Since it means that the small hit was executed in the state where the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is open, each process of S40103 to S40105 for determining the effect mode of the special small hit effect is executed. More specifically, the expectation degree selection table 222ea is read out (S40103), and from the read out expectation degree selection table 222ea, the current small hit type and the expectation degree type corresponding to the counter value of the effect lottery counter 223ea are specified. (S40104), the execution of the special small hit effect of the specified expectation type is set (S40105), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S40101, when it is determined that the flag 223da in the MAX zone is off (S40101: No), it means that the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is closed, so that it is normal. Execution of the small hit effect is set (S40102), and this process is terminated. By this expectation degree suggestion setting process (see FIG. 206), when the V winning opening 6752 for special MAX is opened, the expectation degree that the time saving jackpot is executed when the V winning is made by the production mode of the special small hit effect. Can be suggested to the player. Therefore, it is possible to realize the playability of selecting whether or not to insert the game ball into the special MAX V winning opening 6752 in consideration of the suggestion content of the special small hit effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 207, the details of the above-mentioned V winning opening command processing (S44004) will be described. As described above, this V winning opening command process (S44004) is a process for executing control according to the type and state of the V winning opening that has detected a ball. In this V winning opening command processing (S44004), first, it is determined whether or not the V winning opening command received this time is a command indicating a ball entering the V winning opening 6750f1 for MAX (S40201), and V for MAX. If it is determined that the command indicates the winning opening 6750f1 (S40201: Yes), the MAX zone flag 223da is set to ON (S4022), and V indicating that the winning slot has been won during the small hit valid period. The winning effect is set (S4023), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4021, if it is determined that the command is not a command indicating entry into the MAX V winning opening 6750f1 (S40201: No), then V indicating entry into the special MAX V winning opening 6752. It is determined whether or not it is a winning opening command (S40204). In the process of S40204, if it is determined that the V winning opening command this time is a command indicating the V winning opening 6752 for special MAX (S40204: Yes), then the MAX zone middle flag 223da is set to off (S40205). ), Then, it is determined whether or not the small hit game is currently being executed (S40206). If it is determined in the processing of S40206 that the small hit game is currently being executed (S40206: Yes), the game ball enters the open special MAX V winning opening 6752 during the small hit valid period. Since it means that the game has been performed, the execution of the V winning effect is set (S40207), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S40206, when it is determined that the small hit game is not being executed (normal game is in progress) (S40206: No), it is released by hitting left outside the small hit valid period. Since it means that the game ball has entered the special MAX V winning opening 6752 and the special MAX V winning opening 6752 has been closed, the execution of the fall effect is set (S40208), and this processing is completed. do.

On the other hand, in the processing of S40204, if it is determined that the V winning opening command received this time is not a command indicating winning to the special MAX V winning opening 675 (S40204: No), the normal V winning opening 6750f3 Since it means that it is a command indicating any of 6750f5, the execution of the V winning effect is set (S40209), and this process is terminated. By executing this V winning opening command process (see FIG. 207), it is possible to execute appropriate control according to the type of the V winning opening that detected the winning, the state of the V winning opening 6752 for special MAX, and the like. can.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment, the V winning opening for 16 rounds, which is the type of the V winning opening that wins the big hit when the ball is won when the small hit is won, is the V for MAX. There are two types of winning openings, a winning opening and a normal V winning opening that triggers the execution of a large hit in the number of rounds corresponding to the small hit type. In addition, two MAX V-winning openings 6750f1 and a special MAX V-winning opening 6752 are provided as MAX V-winning openings for 16-round jackpots. Is configured to be provided with a non-electric accessory 6752a. The non-electric accessory 6752a is configured to be opened in conjunction with the entry of the game ball into the MAX V winning opening 6750f1. This open state continues until the game ball enters the special MAX V winning opening 6752, so if the game ball can be entered into the MAX V winning opening 6750f1 during a small hit. In the case of a small hit, it is possible to easily determine the 16 round big hit by simply putting the game ball into the special MAX V winning opening 6752 by hitting left before the small hit ends. It is possible to form a very favorable condition that can be done. That is, it is possible to form an extremely advantageous state in which there is a high possibility of winning the jackpot of the most advantageous type in succession, so that the player can be more satisfied.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol in the time saving state, the big hit is 16 rounds at a rate of 80% regardless of the state of the special MAX V winning opening 6752. It is configured as follows. On the other hand, when V winning occurs while the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is closed, the ratio is about 36.7% (when the ball enters the MAX V winning opening 6750f1 and a small hit. If a V prize occurs during the small hit validity period of A13), you can win the 16 round big hit only. On the other hand, if the V prize opening 6272 for special MAX is open, the special MAX during the small hit validity period. Just by firing a game ball aiming at the V winning opening 6752, you will definitely win a 16-round jackpot. In other words, if the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is closed in the time saving state of the normal symbol, it will be a big hit in the second special symbol lottery than when the V winning occurs during the small hit validity period. On the other hand, if the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is open, it is better if the V winning occurs during the small hit validity period. 2 The percentage of 16 rounds of big hits is higher than the case of big hits in the lottery of special symbols. Therefore, even though the game is in the same state, a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol depending on whether or not the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is open, and the small hit game is being executed. It is possible to switch the degree of advantage between the case where a V prize is generated and a big hit is obtained and the case where a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol. Therefore, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is possible to make the player wish for a different opportunity as a jackpot winning opportunity (V winning and lottery of the second special symbol) according to the state of the special MAX V winning opening 6752. Because it can be done, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Modified example of the ninth embodiment>
Next, a modification of the ninth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIG. 208. In the ninth embodiment described above, the type of V winning opening is supported by allowing the game ball to enter (pass) into any V winning opening during the execution of the small hit game (during the small hit valid period). The jackpot of the number of rounds to be played was set to start. That is, depending on the type of small hit, only whether it is a short-time big hit or a normal big hit when a V prize is won is predetermined, and the number of rounds of the big hit is indefinite until the V prize occurs. board.

On the other hand, in the modified example of the ninth embodiment, in addition to the number of rounds of the big hit, the game state after the big hit is also changed according to the type of the V winning opening that was entered during the small hit valid period. It is configured to obtain. More specifically, even if the small hit C13 corresponding to the big hit G13 (special normal big hit) is won, the ball enters the MAX V winning opening 6750f1 or the special MAX V winning opening 6752 during the small hit valid period. If so, a 16-round time-saving jackpot is given (the jackpot G13 is rewritten as a 16-round time-saving jackpot). With this configuration, the benefit when the game ball enters the MAX V winning opening 6750f1 and the special MAX V winning opening 675 can be further increased, so that the game ball can be moved to the lottery device 6750. When the ball enters, it is possible to pay more attention to the type of V winning opening to enter the ball and play the game. In addition, if the special MAX V winning opening 675 is open and the time is shortened, 16 rounds can be easily achieved by simply hitting the left within the small hit valid period of the small hit won on 9/10. Since it is possible to form an extremely advantageous state in which the player can win the time-saving jackpot, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the ninth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment described above is that the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. It is a point that has become. The ninth is about other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the ninth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the modified example of the ninth embodiment>
Next, the V passage detection process (S1625) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 208. This V passage detection process (S1625) monitors the entry into the V winning opening and detects the entry, as in the V passage detection process (see FIG. 204) in the ninth embodiment described above. This is a process for performing control corresponding to the type of V winning opening.

Of the V-passage detection processes (see FIG. 208) in the modified example of the ninth embodiment, in each of the processes S1601 to S1605 and S1607 to S1609, the V-passage detection processes (see FIG. 204) in the ninth embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S1601 to S1605 and S1607 to S1609 is executed.

Further, in the V passage detection process (see FIG. 208) in this modification, in the process of S1605, the V winning opening that detected the passage this time is neither the normal V winning opening 6750f3, 6750f5 (that is, the V winning opening for MAX). When it is determined (S1605: No), the data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203eb is rewritten into the data indicating the 16-round time-saving jackpot. (S1611), the process shifts to S1607.

As described above, in the V passage detection process (see FIG. 208) in this modification, when the ball is detected in the MAX V winning opening 6750f1 or the special MAX V winning opening 6752 during the small hit valid period. , Regardless of the small hit type (that is, regardless of the big hit type corresponding to the small hit type), the 16-round time-saving big hit is set. With this configuration, the player's advantage can be further enhanced when the game ball enters the MAX V winning opening 6750f1 or the special MAX V winning opening 6752. It is possible to improve the interest in.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the ninth embodiment, when the game ball enters the MAX V winning opening 6750f1 during the small hit valid period, the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is used. In addition to being open, it is configured to win a 16-round time-saving jackpot. With this configuration, when the ball is entered into the MAX V winning opening 6750f1, it will always shift to the gaming state where the game is played by right-handed, so the special MAX V winning opening 6725 is opened. After that, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the fact that the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is closed without winning even once in a small hit. In addition, even if a game ball enters the special MAX V winning opening 675 during the small hit validity period, the game ball will be won to the MAX V winning opening 6750f1 because it is configured to win the 16-round time-saving jackpot. By entering the ball, it is possible to form an extremely advantageous state in which it is almost certain that the player will win the 16-round time-saving jackpot at least twice at short intervals. Therefore, when the game ball enters the inside of the lottery device 6750 during the small hit valid period, it can be expected that the game ball enters the MAX V winning opening 6750f1. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in this modification, when a game ball enters the MAX V winning opening 6750f1 and the special MAX V winning opening 6752, the gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to the time saving state. , The ease of transition to the time saving state can be changed according to the game state and the state of the special MAX V winning opening 6752. More specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, when the big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, the time saving jackpot is obtained at a rate of 50%, whereas in the normal state of the normal symbol, the second special symbol is used. When a big hit is made in the lottery, the time-saving big hit is set at a rate of 80% (see FIG. 193 (a)). On the other hand, in the time saving state, the ratio of the time saving state when the big hit is won by the V winning during the small hit is variable depending on whether or not the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is open. That is, if a V prize occurs while the special MAX V prize opening 6752 is closed, during the small hit valid period in either the small hit A13 or B13 (small hit corresponding to the time-saving big hit). Winning a short-time jackpot when a V prize occurs (55%) and when the ball enters the MAX V prize opening 6750f1 during the small hit valid period of the small hit C13 (45% x 1/3). do. In other words, it is a time-saving jackpot at a rate of 70%. On the other hand, in the state where the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is open, just by hitting the left during the small hit valid period, the ball enters the special MAX V winning opening 675 and the time saving big hit is executed. Can be made to. For this reason, if the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is closed in a short time state, the case where a big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol is the case where the V winning occurs during the small hit valid period. While it is easier to shift to a shorter time state than, when the special MAX V winning opening 6752 is open, V winning during the small hit valid period rather than winning a big hit in the second special symbol lottery. It is easier to shift to the time saving state when Therefore, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is possible to make the player wish for a different opportunity as a jackpot winning opportunity (V winning and lottery of the second special symbol) according to the state of the special MAX V winning opening 6752. Because it can be done, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In addition, in the ninth embodiment and the modified example thereof, the type of the big hit to be won when the V prize occurs during the small hit valid period is defined in association with each other, and the V prize for MAX is specified. When a game ball enters the mouth 6750f1 or the special MAX V winning mouth 6752, the jackpot type is rewritten to 16 round jackpot or 16 round time saving jackpot, but it is not always the jackpot type for each small hit type. It is not necessary to prescribe. The jackpot type may be determined by lottery when a V prize is generated. More specifically, for example, when a game ball enters the normal V winning openings 6750f3, 6750f5 during the small hit validity period, the rate of 5% is 16 rounds, and the rate is 4 A lottery may be performed so that a round time reduction jackpot and a 4-round normal jackpot are determined at a rate of 45%. Further, when a ball is detected in the MAX V winning opening 6750f1 or the special MAX V winning opening 6752, a lottery may be performed so that a 16-round time-saving jackpot is always determined. With this configuration, it is not necessary to specify the small hit type and the big hit type in association with each other, so that the small hit type selection table 202ea can be omitted.

<10th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 209 to 220. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment described above, in the second special symbol lottery that is easy to be executed during the time saving state, a small hit is won with a high probability, while in the first special symbol lottery, a small hit is won. The composition was such that it could not be won. Then, the game ball enters the V winning opening during the small hit valid period, so that the big hit is won.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment, even when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, a small hit is won with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/100), and the first 1 The open pattern that can win a V prize is set for a part of the small hit of the special symbol. That is, even in a normal state in which the game should be advanced by launching the game ball aiming at the first entry port 64 by hitting the left side, the jackpot winning by the V prize can occur. Further, as the small hit of the first special symbol in which the V prize can occur, a plurality of small hit types (50%, 75%, and 100% V prize rates) having different V prize rates are provided. As a result, if a small hit is made in the lottery of the first special symbol, it can be expected to be a small hit with an open pattern that enables V winning, and a small hit with a higher V winning rate. Since the game can be performed with the expectation that it will become, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. The point is that the configuration of is partially changed. The ninth implementation is for other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the form. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the ninth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 209, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 209 is a front view of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 209, in the tenth embodiment, the lottery device 6755 is provided below the variable display device unit 80 in place of the lottery device 6750 in the ninth embodiment, and in the ninth embodiment. The difference is that the special MAX V winning opening 6752 has been deleted. The details of the lottery device 6755 will be described with reference to FIGS. 210 to 212.

FIG. 210 is an enlarged front view of the area around the lottery device 6755 in the game board 13 of the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 210, a distribution rotating body 6755f is provided inside the lottery device 6755 according to the tenth embodiment in place of the distribution rotating body 6750f according to the ninth embodiment. The distribution rotating body 6755f is provided with three V winning openings (central V winning openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3) and three out openings (central out openings 6755fo1 to 6755fo3), and the shaking according to the ninth embodiment. Similar to the minute rotating body 6750f, it is configured to constantly rotate at a constant speed. Since the game ball that has reached the distribution rotating body 6755f is randomly distributed to any of the six entrances depending on the timing of winning the small hit, the game ball that has reached the distribution rotation body 6755f becomes the V winning opening. The probability (ratio) of distribution is 1/2 (3/6).

Further, as shown in FIG. 210, the lottery device 6755 opens and closes a small hit attacker 6755a that can open and close the lottery device 6755, a discharge area 6755d for discharging the game ball to the outside, and a discharge area 6755. A ball discharge door 6755c for the purpose and a ball stop portion 6755e for temporarily stopping the game ball passing through the upper surface of the ball discharge door 6755c in the guide flow path 6755b are provided. These small hit attackers 6755a, discharge area 6755d, ball discharge door 6755c, and ball stopper 6755e are the small hit attackers 6750a, discharge area 6750d, and ball discharge provided in the lottery device 6750 in the ninth embodiment, respectively. Since it has the same functions as the door 6750c and the ball stopper 6750e, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

Further, as shown in FIG. 210, the game ball is placed in a predetermined position between the small hit attacker 6755a and the discharge area 6755d inside the lottery device 6755 in a direction (downward) different from that of the distribution rotating body 6755f. A guide flow path 6755b2 that can be made to flow down, and two entry ports (right V winning opening 6755bV and right out opening) provided at positions where a game ball that has flowed down the guidance flow path 6755b2 can enter. 6755bO), an upper opening / closing door 6755bU capable of opening / closing the upper end of the guide flow path 6755b2, and a lower opening / closing door 6755bD capable of opening / closing the upper part of the right V winning opening 6755bV. The peripheral structure of the induction flow path 6755b2 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 211.

FIG. 211 (a) is an enlarged front view around the guide flow path 6755b2 in a state where both the upper opening / closing door 6755bU and the lower opening / closing door 6755bD are closed, and FIG. 211 (b) shows the upper opening / closing door 6755bU. It is an enlarged front view around the guide flow path 6755b2 in a state where the lower opening / closing door 6755bD is opened, and FIG. 211 (c) shows a state where both the upper opening / closing door 6755bU and the lower opening / closing door 6755bD are opened. It is an enlarged front view around the induction flow path 6755b2 in.

As shown in FIG. 211 (a), when both the upper opening / closing door 6755bU and the lower opening / closing door 6755bD are closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the upper opening / closing door 6755bU so that the game ball can pass through. .. As a result, the game ball that has entered the inside of the lottery device 6755 passes over the upper opening / closing door 6755bU and flows down toward the distribution rotating body 6755f. Further, as shown in FIG. 211 (b), when the upper opening / closing door 6755bU is opened and the lower opening / closing door 6755bD is closed, the game ball can flow into the guide flow path 6755b2, and the inflowing game. It becomes impossible (difficult) for the ball to enter the right V winning opening 6755bV. Further, as shown in FIG. 210 (b), the lower opening / closing door 6755bD forms a downward inclination toward the right out port 6755bO in the closed state. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the lottery device 6755 with the upper opening / closing door 6755bU opened and the lower opening / closing door 6755bD closed flows into the guide flow path 6755b2 whose upper end is open and is closed. As a result of being guided toward the right out opening 6755bO by the inclination formed by the upper surface of the lower opening / closing door 6755bD, the ball enters the right out opening 6755bO.

Further, as shown in FIG. 210 (c), the right V winning opening 6755bV is arranged directly under the induction flow path 6755b2, while the right out opening 6755bO is on the left side with respect to the flow direction of the induction flow path 6755b2. It is provided at a branching position. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the inside of the lottery device 6755 with both the upper opening / closing door 6755bU and the lower opening / closing door 6755bD flowing down along the flow direction of the induction flow path 6755b2, and the right V Enter the winning door 6755bV.

As described above, the lottery device 6755 of the tenth embodiment distributes the game ball flowing into the inside of the lottery device 6755 according to the combination of opening and closing the upper opening / closing door 6755bU and the lower opening / closing door 6755bD. It is possible to switch between a state of flowing down to the side (see FIG. 211 (a)), a state of flowing down to the right out opening 6755bO (see FIG. 211 (b)), and a state of flowing down to the right V winning opening 6755bV. can. That is, the flow direction in which the V prize is generated at a rate of 1/2 (the direction in which the distribution rotating body 6755f is provided), the flow direction in which the V prize is impossible (difficult) (the direction of the right out port 6755bO), and It is possible to switch between the flow direction (the direction of the right V winning opening 6755bV) where the V winning is confirmed (easy). Therefore, since the game can be played by paying more attention to the flow direction of the game ball that has entered the lottery device 6755, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Although details will be described later, in the tenth embodiment, when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, a V prize is won by entering one of the central V winning openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3. Is configured so that the possibility of a short-time jackpot is higher in the case where the V prize is generated than in the case where the V prize is generated by entering the right V winning opening 6755bV. More specifically, if a game ball enters the central V winning openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 during the small hit game of the second special symbol, the player wins the 16-round time-saving jackpot at a rate of 100%, while winning the right V. When the ball enters the mouth 6755bV, it is configured so that only a little less than 40% will be a time-saving jackpot. With this configuration, when the second special symbol is a small hit, the ball enters one of the central V winning openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 rather than entering the right V winning opening 6755bV. You can play the game with a stronger expectation. Therefore, in particular, when the game ball flows down toward the distribution rotating body 6755f during the execution of the small hit game of the second special symbol (that is, the central V winning opening 6755fv1 to 6755fv3, or the central out opening 6755fo1 to 6755fo3). When it is confirmed that the game ball is distributed to any of the above), it is possible to strongly request a V prize. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the configuration of the distribution rotating body 6755f in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 212. FIG. 212 is a top view of the distribution rotating body 6755f according to the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 212, the distribution rotating body 6755f in the tenth embodiment has six distribution rotating bodies 6750 (see FIG. 189 (a)) along the outer peripheral portion, similarly to the distribution rotating body 6750 in the ninth embodiment. The entrance is arranged. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 212, the central V winning openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 and the central out openings 6755fo1 to 6755fo3 are arranged so that the V winning openings and the out openings are alternately adjacent to each other. Since the distribution rotating body 6755f continues to rotate at a constant speed in a fixed direction with the axis 6755fz as the rotation axis, the game balls that reach the distribution rotating body 6755f are evenly distributed to each entry port. It is sorted. That is, the ratio (probability) of the game ball entering the V winning opening is 1/2 (3/6).

Next, with reference to FIG. 213, the operation patterns of the upper opening / closing door 6755bU, the lower opening / closing door 6755bD, the ball stop portion 6755e, and the ball discharge door 6755c in the case of a small hit in the lottery of the special symbol will be described. Here, in the tenth embodiment, when a small hit is won, only the opening / closing operation mode (opening pattern) of the small hit attacker 6755a is different depending on the small hit type, and other operation modes (upper opening / closing). The operation patterns of the door 6755bU, the lower opening / closing door 6755bD, the ball stop portion 6755e, and the ball discharge door 6755c) are configured to be common regardless of the small hit type. FIG. 213 describes an operation mode of a portion other than the small hit attacker 6755a, which is common regardless of the small hit type. The opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a for each small hit type will be described later with reference to FIGS. 214 and 215.

FIG. 213 is a diagram showing changes over time (operation pattern) of the open / closed state of the upper opening / closing door 6755bU, the lower opening / closing door 6755bD, the ball stop portion 6755e, and the ball discharge door 6755c during the execution of the small hit game. As shown in FIG. 213, the upper opening / closing door 6755bU is set to the open state as the initial state, and switches to the closed state when 0.2 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small hit. That is, the state is switched to a state in which the game ball can flow down in the direction of the distribution rotating body 6755f. This closed state lasts for 0.2 seconds (that is, continues until 0.4 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit), and then switches to the open state 0.2 seconds after switching to the closed state. After that, the upper opening / closing door 6755bU is maintained in the open state from the start of the small hit to the time when 2 seconds have passed, and is switched to the closed state again from the time when 2 seconds have passed to the time when 3 seconds have passed. Then, when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit, the open state is switched again, and thereafter, the open state is maintained until the end of the small hit. That is, the game ball that has entered the inside of the lottery device 6755 between the time when 0.2 seconds have passed and the time when 0.4 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit, and between the time when 2 seconds have passed and the time when 3 seconds have passed has passed. The game ball that rolls on the upper surface of the closed upper opening / closing door 6755bU and flows down to the distribution rotating body 6755f side (see FIG. 211A) and enters the inside of the lottery device 6755 during the other period. It flows into the induction flow path 6755b2 and is guided to the right V winning opening 6755bV or the right out opening 6755bO (see FIGS. 211 (b) and 211 (c)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 213, the lower opening / closing door 6755bD is set in the closed state as the initial state, and the closed state is maintained until 0.6 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small hit. Then, when 0.6 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit, the open state is switched to. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the induction flow path 6755b2 can enter the right V winning opening 6755bV. The open state of the lower opening / closing door 6755bD continues for 0.2 seconds, and switches to the closed state 0.8 seconds after the start of the small hit. After that, the lower opening / closing door 6755bD is kept in the closed state until 3 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit, and after 3 seconds have passed, the lower opening / closing door is switched to the open state again. This open state lasts for 1 second. That is, the open state continues until 4 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit, and the closed state is switched to the closed state after 4 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit. After that, the closed state is maintained until the small hit is completed.

By combining the operation patterns of the upper opening / closing door 6755bU and the lower opening / closing door 6755bD, the game ball is guided to the right out opening 6755bO for 0.2 seconds from the start of the jackpot (see FIG. 211 (b)). Will be. That is, for 0.2 seconds from the start of the small hit, even if the game ball enters the lottery device 6755, it is impossible (difficult) to enter the V winning opening (V impossible period). ). Then, when 0.2 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small hit and the upper open door 6755bU is switched to the closed state, the game ball is guided to the distribution rotating body 6755f (see FIG. 211 (a)). As described above, the game ball that has reached the distribution rotating body 6755f is distributed to any V winning opening at a rate of 1/2, so that 0.2 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit, and the lottery device. It is a period in which a game ball that has entered 6755 wins a V at a rate of 1/2 (a period in which the V winning rate is 50%). This V winning rate 50% period continues from the start of the small hit to the time when 0.4 seconds have elapsed, and when 0.4 seconds have elapsed, the period is switched to the V-impossible period.

The V-impossible period continues until 0.6 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit, and when 0.6 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit, the upper opening / closing door 6755bU is maintained in the open state and the lower opening / closing door 6755bD. Is released. As a result, the game ball that has entered the lottery device 6755 is guided to the right V winning opening 6755bV (see FIG. 211 (c)). That is, it is a period in which the game balls that have entered the lottery device 6755 win a V prize at a rate of almost 100% (V winning rate 100% period). This V winning rate 100% period continues for 0.2 seconds, and when 0.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small hit, the lower opening / closing door 6755bD is closed, so that the period is switched to the V impossible period again. This V-impossible period continues until 2 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit, and the upper opening / closing door 6755bU is closed 2 seconds after the start of the small hit, so that 1 second until 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit. During that time, the V winning rate will switch to a 50% period. Then, 3 seconds after the start of the small hit, the upper opening / closing door 6755bU is opened and the lower opening / closing door 6755bD is opened, so that the V winning rate is switched to the 100% period. This 100% V winning rate period continues until 4 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit (that is, 1 second), and after 1 second, the lower opening / closing door 6755bD is closed, resulting in a V-impossible period. Switch. After that, the V-impossible period is maintained until the small hit ends.

In this way, during the execution of the small hit game, the V impossible period, the V winning rate 50% period, and the V winning rate 100% period are switched. Therefore, depending on the timing when the game ball enters the lottery device 6755, The V winning rate can be changed. Therefore, since the game can be performed by paying attention to the timing at which the game ball enters the lottery device 6755, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 213, the ball stop portion 6755e is maintained in a closed state from the start of the small hit until 5 seconds have elapsed, and at the time when 5 seconds have elapsed (the second V winning rate 50% period). After that, from the time when 2 seconds have passed) to the end of the small hit, it is switched to the open state (the state where the guide flow path 6755b can flow down), and when the small hit ends, it is switched to the closed state again. On the other hand, the ball discharge door 6755c is maintained in a closed state from the start of the small hit until 4.5 seconds have elapsed, and at the time when 4.5 seconds have elapsed (the second V winning rate 50% period has elapsed). After that, it is switched to the open state from the time when 1.5 seconds have elapsed) to the end of the small hit, and is switched to the closed state again at the end of the small hit. That is, for 4.5 seconds after the start of the small hit, both the ball stop portion 6755e and the ball discharge door 6755c are closed, so that the inside of the lottery device 6755 is entered during the V winning rate of 50%. All the game balls that have passed through the upper surface of the upper opening / closing door 6755bU in the closed state are stopped in the guide flow path 6755b by the ball stop portion 6755e.

Further, when 4.5 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit, the ball discharge door 6755c is opened with the ball stop portion 6755e closed, so that the ball discharge door 6755c is stopped by directly contacting the right side of the ball stop portion 6755e. All the game balls other than the game ball of 1 fall from the opening of the ball discharge door 6755c to the discharge area 6755d and are discharged to the outside. That is, even if a plurality of game balls flow into the inside of the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate of 50%, the games are stopped inside the lottery device 6755 after the ball discharge door 6755e is opened. The maximum number of spheres can be one. Then, since the ball stop portion 6755e is opened 0.5 seconds after the ball discharge door 6755c is opened, one game ball remaining inside the lottery device 6755 is directed toward the distribution rotating body 6755f. Flow down. By opening the ball discharge door 6755c first and then opening the ball stop 6755e, it is assumed that two or more game balls have entered the inside of the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate of 50%. Also, the second and subsequent game balls can be discharged to the outside from the discharge area 6755d until the ball stop portion 6755e is opened. Therefore, since the number of game balls that reach the distribution rotating body 6755f in one small hit can be limited to a maximum of one, the game balls enter the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate of 50%. The V winning rate in the case can be fixed (50%) each time.

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the operation of the upper opening / closing door 6755bU, the lower opening / closing door 6755bD, the ball stop portion 6755e, and the ball discharge door 6755c when the small hit is won is performed regardless of the type of the small hit. It is common. As a result, only the operation of the small hit attacker 6755a needs to be different depending on the small hit type, so that the processing load at the time of winning the small hit can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 214, an opening pattern set for the small hit attacker 6755a when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol in the tenth embodiment will be described. In the tenth embodiment, four different opening patterns are provided as opening patterns of the small hit attacker 6755a in the small hit of the first special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 214, a V winning confirmation pattern (see FIG. 214 (a)), a V winning rate 50% pattern (see FIG. 214 (b)), and a V winning rate 75% pattern (see FIG. 214 (b)). 214 (c)) and a normal small hit pattern (see FIG. 214 (d)) are provided.

As shown in FIG. 214 (a), when the V winning confirmation pattern is set as the opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a, the small hit attacker 6755a is used from the start of the small hit until one second elapses. It is kept closed. During this time, the game ball fired by right-handed hitting is blocked by the closed small hit attacker 6755a, and it becomes impossible to enter the lottery device 6755. Then, when 1 second has elapsed from the start of the small hit, the small hit attacker 6755a is released for 0.1 seconds. After 0.1 seconds, the small hit attacker 6755a is closed. Since this 0.1 second period corresponds to a V-impossible period, even if a game ball can be entered into the lottery device 6755, a prize ball for the entry (for example, 10 prize balls) is simply used. Can only be obtained, and the ball cannot be entered into the V winning opening.

The closed state after the opening period of 0.1 seconds continues until 3 seconds have passed after the start of the small hit. Then, when 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small hit, the small hit attacker 6755a is set to the open state for 1 second (that is, until 4 seconds have elapsed after the start of the small hit). As described above with reference to FIG. 213, the V winning rate is 100% for 3 to 4 seconds after the start of the small hit. That is, both the upper opening / closing door 6755bU and the lower opening / closing door 6755bD are opened (see FIG. 211 (c)). Therefore, by allowing the game ball to enter the lottery device 6755 during the opening period. , Almost certainly, the game ball enters the right V winning opening 6755bV and wins the big hit. If you continue to hit right during the small hit, you can easily put the game ball into the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of 1 second, so the V winning confirmation pattern is set as the opening pattern. Then, the V prize is almost confirmed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 214 (b), when the V winning rate 50% pattern is set as the opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a, the opening / closing operation up to the lapse of 2 seconds is the same as the V winning confirmation pattern. Become. That is, the small hit attacker 6755a is released only for 0.1 second from the time when 1 second has elapsed after the start of the small hit. Then, in the V winning rate 50% pattern, the small hit attacker 6755a is released when 2 seconds have passed after the start of the small hit, and this open state continues for 1 second. That is, the open state is maintained from the time when 2 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit to the time when 3 seconds have passed, and the small hit attacker 6755a is closed when 3 seconds have passed. By continuing to hit the game ball to the right at the shortest firing interval (that is, 0.6 second interval) for this 1 second, it becomes possible to easily enter one or more game balls into the lottery device 6755. It is set as a period. After the small hit attacker 6755a is closed, the small hit attacker 6755a is maintained in the closed state until the end of the small hit. As described above with reference to FIG. 213, the V winning rate is 50% for 2 to 3 seconds after the start of the small hit. That is, both the upper opening / closing door 6755bU and the lower opening / closing door 6755bD are closed (see FIG. 211 (a)). Therefore, by allowing the game ball to enter the lottery device 6755 during the opening period. The game ball of No. 1 can be made to flow down to the distribution rotating body 6755f. As described above, when the game ball reaches the distribution rotating body 6755f, it is distributed to the V winning opening at a rate of 1/2, so that the V winning rate is set when the V winning rate 50% pattern is set as the opening pattern. The rate of occurrence is 50%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 214 (c), when the V winning rate 75% pattern is set as the opening pattern of the attacker 6755a for small hits, the opening / closing operation up to the lapse of 2 seconds is the V winning confirmation pattern or V. It is the same as the winning rate 50% pattern. That is, the small hit attacker 6755a is released only for 0.1 second from the time when 1 second has elapsed after the start of the small hit. Then, in the V winning rate 75% pattern, the small hit attacker 6755a is released 2.5 seconds after the start of the small hit, and this open state continues for 1 second. That is, the open state is maintained from the time when 2.5 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit to the time when 3.5 seconds have passed, and the small hit attacker 6755a is closed when 3.5 seconds have passed. After that, the small hit attacker 6755a is maintained in the closed state until the end of the small hit. As described above with reference to FIG. 213, the V winning rate is 50% period from 2 seconds to 3 seconds after the start of the small hit, and the V winning rate is 100% period from 3 seconds to 4 seconds. That is, when the V winning rate 75% pattern is set, the first half 0.5 seconds of the opening period becomes the V winning rate 50% period, and the latter half 0.5 seconds of the opening period becomes the V winning rate 100% period. Become. Therefore, if a game ball enters the lottery device 6755 in the first half of the 1-second open period, the V winning rate will be 50%, while if the ball enters the lottery device 6755 in the second half, the V winning rate will be 100%. Will be. Therefore, when the V winning rate 75% pattern is set, the V winning rate is 75% on average (50% × 1/2 + 100% × 1/2).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 214 (c), when the normal small hit pattern is set, the opening / closing operation up to the lapse of 2 seconds includes a V winning confirmation pattern, a V winning rate 50% pattern, and the like. Although it is the same as the V winning rate 75% pattern, after the opening period of 0.1 seconds ends, the small hit attacker 6755a is not released until the small hit ends. Therefore, when the normal small hit pattern is set, the small hit attacker 6755a is released only for an extremely short period of 0.1 seconds during the small hit valid period, and the game ball is luckily released during the opening period. Even if the ball can be entered into the lottery device 6755, the ball is entered into the right out opening 6755bO. That is, no V prize is generated. Therefore, the normal small hit pattern is the open pattern that is the most disadvantageous (less benefit) for the player.

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, one of the four types of opening patterns having different V winning rates is used as the opening pattern of the attacker 6755a for small hits. It is configured to be set. Also, at least until 2 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit, a common opening / closing operation (opening only for 0.1 seconds after 1 second has elapsed) regardless of the opening pattern set for the small hit attacker 6755a. The operation to be performed) is executed. By configuring in this way, it can be configured so that it is difficult for the player to recognize which opening pattern is set until at least 2 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small hit. It is possible to expect a V prize in the small hit type of. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the tenth embodiment, the maximum number of balls that can be entered in one small hit is set to one, and the end of the small hit is based on the detection of the entry of one game ball. Was configured to be set. That is, the small hit attacker 6755a is set to be closed, and all the game balls that have entered the lottery device 6755 until the small hit attacker 6755a is completely closed are in one of the lottery devices 6755. By entering the ball into any of the entrances and ejecting the ball, the small hit is terminated regardless of the elapsed time from the start of the small hit. Therefore, for example, when a right-handed game ball enters the inside of the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of 0.1 seconds, the small hit attacker 6755a is closed and entered. The small hit ends when the ball is entered into the right out opening 6755bO. In other words, even if a V winning open pattern (see FIGS. 214 (a) to 214 (c)) is set, during the 0.1 second open period set at 1 second after the start of the small hit. If you let a game ball enter the ball, it is extremely disadvantageous that the small hit will be terminated before the period when V winning is possible (V winning rate 50% period and V winning rate 100% period) is reached. Situations can occur. On the other hand, when the normal small hit pattern (see FIG. 214 (d)) is set, if the game ball is not inserted during the opening period of 0.1 seconds, then the small hit attacker 6755a Is not released and there is no chance to get a prize ball, so if you do not hit right in accordance with the opening period of 0.1 seconds, it may be a loss for the player. Therefore, when a V winning open pattern is set, it is highly likely that it is advantageous for the player not to let the game ball enter during the open period of 0.1 seconds. When a normal small hit pattern is set in which V winning is not possible, it is advantageous for the player to enter the game ball during the opening period of 0.1 seconds, so the small hit type (small hit type ( It is possible to realize the playability of predicting the set opening pattern) and selecting whether or not to enter the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of 0.1 seconds. That is, the player who predicts that the opening pattern is capable of winning V is made to choose to wait or hit left so that the game ball does not enter the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of 0.1 seconds. On the other hand, it is possible to make a player who is predicted to have a normal small hit pattern perform a right-handed strike aiming at an open period of 0.1 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the tenth embodiment, all the small hit types have a common operation for two seconds from the start of the small hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. In some small hits where V prizes can be won, the opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a, which does not include the same operation mode as the normal small hit pattern, may be set. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a case in which a small hit that can win a V prize can be detected quickly, so that the game can be played by paying attention to the opening pattern of the attacker 6755a for small hits.

Next, with reference to FIG. 215, an opening pattern set for the small hit attacker 6755a when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol in the tenth embodiment will be described. In the tenth embodiment, three different opening patterns (opening patterns A to C) are provided as opening patterns of the small hit attacker 6755a in the small hit of the second special symbol.

In the tenth embodiment, when one or more game balls enter during a small hit, the small hit ends when the entered game ball is discharged, while the game ball is played. If the ball is not entered, the small hit does not end until 8 seconds have passed, but the structure is not limited to this. For example, if the entry of the game ball is not detected at the time when all the opening periods of the small hit attacker 6755a in one small hit are completed, the small hit may be terminated at that time. With this configuration, even though the game ball did not enter the lottery device 6755 (that is, there is no possibility that a V prize will occur), a small hit will occur until 8 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit. Since it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the event that the game is not completed, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the game.

On the contrary, the end of the small hit may be set according to the elapsed time from the time when all the opening periods of the small hit attacker 6755a are completed. More specifically, for example, when a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the end of the opening period of the small hit attacker 6755a, the small hit is forcibly left (the game ball remains in the lottery device 6755). It may be configured to end (even if it is done). In this case, during the period until the small hit is completed, the game balls that have entered the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate of 50% are distributed to any of the entrances by the distribution rotating body 6755f. A period of at least longer than that (detecting an incoming ball), and a period of length that makes it difficult to guide the game ball to the flow path (central route) on the 6755f side of the distribution rotating body by force with a magnet or the like. It should be set to. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that forcibly guide the game ball to the distribution rotating body 6755f by using a magnet or the like. Here, since the game ball is usually composed of a magnetic material (metal), the flow direction of the game ball can be changed by bringing a magnet or the like close to the game ball flowing down the game area. It is possible to make it. By utilizing this property, for example, a game ball that has entered the lottery device 6755 is attracted by a magnet, and the game ball is guided by the magnetic force of the magnet regardless of whether the upper opening / closing door 6755bU is closed or open. As a result, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act of passing through the upper opening / closing door 6755bU and the ball discharge door 6755c and guiding them to the distribution rotating body 6755f may be performed. In particular, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the game ball that has reached the distribution rotating body 6755f enters the V winning opening, which is the most advantageous 16-round time saving jackpot. That is, if a fraudulent act of guiding a game ball to the distribution rotating body 6755f is performed by a magnet or the like with each small hit, the probability of winning the small hit is high (9/10), which is the most advantageous. 16 rounds of short-time jackpots are repeated endlessly, which is extremely advantageous for fraudsters. In other words, it can inflict an unexpected disadvantage on the hall. On the other hand, in this modification, even if an attempt is made to guide the game ball to the distribution rotating body 6755f by force using a magnet or the like, the small hit is terminated before the game ball enters any of the entrances. It is configured to be stowed away. That is, with the upper opening / closing door 6755bU open, by attracting the game ball from the front side of the game board 13 with a magnet, the game ball is floated with respect to the induction flow path 6755b, and the upper opening / closing door 6755bU in the open state. If a series of fraudulent acts such as forcibly passing over the ball discharge door 6755c are performed, the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the period of V winning rate of 50% and the game ball enters the distribution rotating body 6755f. Since the period until the game ball flows down to the distribution rotating body 6755f is longer than that (when the game ball flows down), the game ball that reaches the distribution rotating body 6755f due to fraudulent activity goes to one of the entrances. You can finish the small hit before it is sorted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraudulent activities.

Further, instead of ending the small hit after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the closing timing of the small hit attacker 6755a, after the predetermined period has elapsed since the last V winning rate of 50% in the small hit has elapsed. With the configuration to end the small hit (that is, regardless of the type of small hit, the period from the start of the small hit to the end of the small hit is standardized), the V winning rate 50% period and V By changing the order of the winning rate 100% period, it may be configured to prevent fraudulent acts of guiding to the side of the distribution rotating body 6755f by a magnet or the like. With this configuration, the end condition for small hits can be simplified, and the processing load can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 215 (a), when the opening pattern A is set, the small hit attacker 6755a is released at the same time as the start of the small hit. This open state continues for 0.6 seconds, and the small hit attacker 6755a is closed 0.6 seconds after the start of the small hit. After that, the small hit attacker 6755a is maintained in the closed state until the small hit is completed. Since the opening time is relatively short at 0.6 seconds, the rate at which the game ball enters is about 70% even if the right-handed shot is executed at the shortest firing interval (that is, 0.6 second interval). .. In addition, it is extremely difficult to insert two or more game balls during the opening period.

As described above with reference to FIG. 213, the period from the start of the small hit until 0.2 seconds have elapsed, and from the time when 0.4 seconds have elapsed to the time when 0.6 seconds have elapsed are set to the V-impossible period. On the other hand, from the time when 0.2 seconds have passed to the time when 0.4 seconds have passed, the V winning rate is set to 50%. Therefore, 1/3 (0.2s / 0.6s) when the open pattern A is set and the ball enters the lottery device 6755 is the ball entry during the V winning rate 50% period. That is, the game ball that has entered the lottery device 6755 is distributed to the distribution rotating body 6755f at a rate of 1/3, and a V prize is generated at a rate of 1/2 of that.

Further, as shown in FIG. 215 (b), when the opening pattern B is set, the small hit attacker 6755a is maintained in the closed state for 0.4 seconds after the start of the small hit, and 0.4 seconds. It switches to the open state for 0.6 seconds from the lapse of time to the lapse of 1 second, and is maintained in the closed state until the end of the small hit after 1 second. As mentioned above, from 0.4 seconds to 0.6 seconds after the start of the small hit, and from 0.8 seconds to 1 second, the V-impossible period is set to 0. From the time when 6 seconds have passed to the time when 0.8 seconds have passed, the V winning rate is set to 100%. Therefore, 1/3 (0.2s / 0.6s) when the open pattern B is set and the ball enters the lottery device 6755 is the ball entry during the period of 100% V winning rate. That is, a V prize is generated when the game ball that has entered the lottery device 6755 enters the right V winning opening 6755bV at a rate of 1/3. As mentioned above, if the ball enters the right V winning opening 6755bV when the second special symbol is a small hit, the possibility of a time saving state is relatively low (a little less than 40%). Has been done. On the other hand, as described above, when the ball enters the central V winning openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3, the 16-round time-saving jackpot that is most advantageous for the player is determined. Therefore, it can be said that the opening pattern B, which can only enter the right V winning opening 6755bV, is a more disadvantageous opening pattern than the opening pattern A.

Further, as shown in FIG. 215 (c), when the opening pattern C is set, the small hit attacker 6755a is maintained in the closed state for 0.2 seconds after the start of the small hit, and 0.2 seconds. It switches to the open state for 0.6 seconds from the lapse of 0.8 seconds to the lapse of 0.8 seconds, and after 0.8 seconds, it is maintained in the closed state until the end of the small hit. As mentioned above, the V winning rate is set to 50% from 0.2 seconds to 0.4 seconds after the start of the small hit, and from 0.4 seconds to 0.6 seconds. , The V-impossible period is set, and the V winning rate is set to 100% from the time when 0.6 seconds have passed to the time when 0.8 seconds have passed. Therefore, 1/3 (0.2s / 0.6s) when the open pattern C is set and the ball enters the lottery device 6755 becomes 1/3 during the V winning rate 50% period. (0.2s / 0.6s) is a ball entry during the period of 100% V winning rate. That is, the open pattern C is an open pattern in which a V prize is generated in 2/3 when the ball enters the lottery device 6755, so that it is an advantageous open pattern in which the V prize rate is higher than other open patterns.

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, when a small hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, one of three types of open patterns is set, and the V winning rate is set according to the open pattern. Or, the type of V winning opening that can be entered is different. With this configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the opening pattern (operation of the upper opening / closing door 6755bU and the lower opening / closing door 6755bD during the opening period) set in the small hit attacker 6755a at the time of a small hit. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 216, a characteristic effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 216 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a selection effect executed when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol in the tenth embodiment. As described above, in the tenth embodiment, as the small hit of the first special symbol, a small hit in which a V winning open pattern (see FIGS. 214A to 214) is set and a V winning is not possible. A small hit is provided in which a (difficult) opening pattern (see FIG. 214 (d)) is set, but the opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a (small hit attacker) is provided until at least 2 seconds have elapsed. Since the operation mode of 6755a) is common, it is difficult to distinguish from the appearance whether or not the opening pattern that allows V winning is set. Therefore, it is unclear whether it will be particularly beneficial or detrimental to the player if the game ball is inserted during the opening period of 0.1 seconds set while operating in the common opening pattern. That is, when the opening pattern in which the V prize can be won is set, if the game ball is inserted during the opening period of 0.1 seconds set in the V non-winning period, the prize ball is given. It will be a loss because the small hit will be completed, but if the normal small hit pattern is set, if a game ball is inserted during the opening period of 0.1 seconds, a prize ball will be given. Therefore, it is beneficial for the player. The selection effect is an effect for allowing the player to select whether or not to launch the game ball aiming at the opening period of 0.1 seconds set while the common opening pattern (operation mode) is being executed. ..

As shown in FIG. 216, when the selection effect is executed, a display area HR8 in which the characters "Select !!" is displayed is formed on the upper center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Further, on the left side of the center of the display screen, a horizontally long rectangular display area HR9 is formed in which the characters "low expectation of prize ball get" and "medium V challenge expectation" are displayed. Further, below the display area HR9, an arrow image YG1 having a shape imitating a left-pointing arrow and displaying the characters "left-handed" is displayed. On the other hand, on the right side of the center of the display screen, a horizontally long rectangular display area HR10 is formed in which the characters "medium expectation of prize ball get" and "low expectation of V challenge" are displayed. Further, below the display area HR10, an arrow image YG2 having a shape imitating a right-pointing arrow and displaying the characters "right-handed" is displayed. From these display contents, it is possible to let the player understand the merits and demerits of hitting left and the merits and demerits of hitting right. That is, if a left-handed hit is made, the game ball cannot be entered during the opening period of 0.1 seconds to obtain a prize ball, but the small hit attacker 6755a is released during the period during which the V prize can be won. It is possible to make the player understand that there is a possibility (V challenge is executed). Also, if you hit right, there is a possibility that you can win a prize ball by entering a game ball during the opening period of 0.1 seconds, but if a V winning opening pattern is set Can make the player understand that the small hit may be terminated without executing the V challenge (opening of the small hit attacker 6755a during the period when the V prize is possible).

It should be noted that, as the mode of the selection effect, a plurality of types having different expectations in which the opening pattern in which the V prize can be won are set are provided. That is, there are a plurality of types in which the ratio selected when the opening pattern for V winning is set and the ratio selected when the opening pattern for normal small hits is set are different (shown). figure). This makes it possible for the player to decide whether to hit right or left, taking into account the degree of expectation of the open pattern that can win V, which is suggested by the selection effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 217, a change over time in the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol will be described. FIG. 217 (a) is a diagram showing changes over time in the display mode when a small hit (V challenge small hit) in which a V-winning open pattern is set is won. In FIG. 217 (a), as a V challenge small hit, a case where a small hit in which a V winning rate 50% pattern is set is won will be described as an example.

As shown in FIG. 217 (a), when a small hit in which a V winning rate 50% pattern is set is won, first, a variable display corresponding to the small hit is started. After this variation display continues for 60 seconds, the winning of the small hit is notified and the selection effect (see FIG. 216) is started. That is, the selection effect is started when the period corresponding to the small hit is confirmed and displayed. This selection effect lasts for up to 3 seconds. That is, it continues until 2 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small hit (until the common operation mode ends).

If the game ball does not enter the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of 0.1 seconds set 1 second after the start of the small hit (that is, if the end condition of the small hit is not satisfied). During the period when the V prize can be won, the attacker 6755a for small hits is released, and the V challenge effect indicating that the V challenge effect is executed is executed. Although not shown, in this V-challenge effect, a game is played to either the distribution rotating body 6755f or the right V winning opening 6755bV by hitting the right side and letting the game ball enter the lottery device 6755. It is a production that informs that the ball can be reached. That is, it is an effect for notifying that V prizes are generated at a rate of at least 50%. In this V challenge production, a game ball is entered into the lottery device 6755, and when a V prize is generated, a big hit is executed.

In addition, if the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of 0.1 seconds by hitting right during the execution of the selection effect, the effect of congratulating the winning of the prize ball is given. It is executed and the selection effect is finished. That is, in the V-challenge small hit, even if the execution of the V-challenge is canceled by inserting the game ball during the opening period of 0.1 seconds, the normal small hit pattern is set. It can be configured so that it is impossible (difficult) to distinguish it from the case where a game ball enters. Therefore, even if the execution of the V challenge is canceled, it seems that the player was able to predict that the normal small hit pattern was set and hit right, and let the game ball enter as intended. Can be made. Therefore, even if the V-challenge is canceled, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for the game from being lowered.

FIG. 217 (b) is a diagram showing a change over time in the effect mode when a normal small hit in which a normal small hit pattern is set is won. As shown in FIG. 217 (b), when a normal small hit is won, the change over time in the production mode from the start of the variation display corresponding to the normal small hit to the lapse of 2 seconds after the start of the small hit. Is the same as when the V Challenge small hit is won. That is, the selection effect is executed after the variable display effect is executed for 60 seconds. The selection effect continues for 4 seconds on condition that the entry of the game ball is not detected during the opening period of 0.1 seconds (that is, the end condition of the small hit is not satisfied). .. That is, it is the same as the start timing of the small hit V challenge in which the V winning confirmation pattern (see FIG. 214 (a)), which has the longest period until the small hit attacker 6755a is released, is set among the V challenge small hits. The selection effect continues to be executed until the timing of (when 4 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit). Then, when 4 seconds have passed after the start of the small hit, an effect for notifying that the V challenge is not executed (that the V challenge was not won) is executed. As a result, the player who predicts that the V-challenge is a small hit and chooses to hit left during the selection effect can continue to have a sense of expectation for the V-challenge for a longer period of time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the tenth embodiment, the selection effect is started at the end of the small hit variation, and the opening period of 0.1 seconds is set 2 seconds after the start of the selection effect. Not limited. The timing of the selection effect and the opening period may be set at an earlier timing. Specifically, the selection effect is executed during the fluctuation (before the first symbol is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37), and the release period is set immediately after the start of the small hit. You may. With this configuration, the small hit type is specified by identifying the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37, and the game ball is launched so that the game ball enters during the opening period. Even if it is decided whether or not it is decided, it is possible to prevent it from being in time for the opening period, so that it is possible to more seriously select whether to hit right or left in advance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Electrical configuration in the tenth embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 218 to 220. Here, in the tenth embodiment, the provisions of the first random number table 202a and the small hit type selection table 202ea are defined for the configuration of the ROM 202 in the ninth embodiment described above (see FIG. 192 (a)). It differs only in that it has been partially changed. Since other configurations are the same as the configurations of ROM 202 in the above-described ninth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

First, the first random number table 202a in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 218. FIG. 218 (a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first random number table 202a in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 218 (a), in the first random number table 202a in the tenth embodiment, two random number values (counter values) of "0, 1" are defined as determination values to be determined as big hits. (See 202a1 in FIG. 218 (a)). The determination value that becomes a big hit is common to the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol, as in the ninth embodiment. Of the 400 random numbers that can be taken by the first random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be big hits is 2, so the probability of winning a big hit in a special symbol lottery is 1/200 (2). / 400). In addition, "2-395" is defined as the range of judgment values determined to be out of the lottery for the first special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 218 (a)), and the determination is determined to be a small hit of the first special symbol. As the range of values, "396 to 399" is specified (see 202a3 in FIG. 218 (a)).

Of the 400 random numbers that can be taken by the first random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be small hits is 4, so the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is 1. / 100 (4/400). Although details will be described later, 60% of the small hits of the first special symbol are open patterns for normal small hits (that is, even if a game ball is inserted into the lottery device 6755, a V prize may occur. No open pattern) is set. That is, the V-challenge small hit is 40% of the small hits of the first special symbol. That is, at a rate of 1/100, the opening operation of the small hit attacker 6755a, which makes it possible for the player to expect a V challenge small hit, is executed for 0.1 seconds, and 40% of them execute the V challenge. (That is, the small hit attacker 6755a is released at the timing when the V prize can be won). Therefore, the probability of winning a V-challenge small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is 1/250 (1/100 × 4/10).

Further, as shown in FIG. 218 (a), “2 to 39” is defined as a range of determination values determined to be out of the second special symbol (see 202a2 in FIG. 218 (a)), and the second special symbol is specified. "40 to 399" is defined as a range of determination values determined to be small hits (see 202a3 in FIG. 218 (a)). Therefore, the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 9/10 (360/400) as in the ninth embodiment described above. Regarding the small hit of the second special symbol, in all the small hit types, the period during which the small hit attacker 6755a can be opened includes a period in which a V prize can be won.

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, as in the ninth embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit is won with a high probability (9/10). Even when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit is won with a low probability (1/100). That is, even in the lottery of the first special symbol, which is mainly executed in a disadvantageous normal state, it is possible to expect a big hit based on the V prize. Further, in the tenth embodiment, as a small hit of the first special symbol, a small hit attacker during a period in which V winning is possible (one or both of a V winning rate 50% period and a V winning rate 100% period). A V-challenge small hit in which 6755a is opened and a normal small hit in which the small hit attacker 6755a is opened only during the period when V winning is impossible (difficult) (V impossible period) are provided. As a result, when the small hit is won, it can be expected that the V challenge small hit is won, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the normal small hit and the V challenge small hit have the same operation mode of the opening / closing operation of the small hit attacker 6755a in 2 seconds after the start of the small hit. That is, one second after the start of the small hit, the operation mode in which the small hit attacker 6755a is released is executed only for 0.1 second. Therefore, even after the winning of the small hit is notified, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether the small hit is a normal small hit or a V challenge small hit for at least 2 seconds. Therefore, even if a normal small hit is won, the expectation for the V-challenge small hit can be maintained for a predetermined period (2 seconds) from the start of the small hit. Therefore, every time a small hit is won, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 218 (b), the details of the small hit type selection table 202ea in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 218 (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the small hit type selection table 202ea in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 218 (b), the small hit type selection table 202ea in the tenth embodiment is referred to in order to determine the small hit type when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol. A special figure 1 small hit table 202ea1 and a special figure 2 small hit table 202ea2 referred to for determining a small hit type when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol are provided. First, the details of the special figure 1 small hit table 202ea1 will be described with reference to FIG. 219.

FIG. 219 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the above-mentioned special figure 1 small hit table 202ea1. As shown in FIG. 219, in the special figure 1 small hit table 202ea1, the small hit type to be determined is defined in association with the range of the value of the small hit type counter C5. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 219, "small hit A14" is specified as the small hit type in association with the range in which the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "0,1". (See 202ea1a in FIG. 219). This "small hit A14" is a small hit type in which a V winning confirmation pattern (see FIG. 214 (a)) is set as an opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a. In addition, when a V prize is generated in this "small hit A14", the "big hit E14" is won. "Big hit E14" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 5 and the game state after the big hit is set to the time saving state. Therefore, the "small hit A14" can almost certainly generate a V prize simply by hitting right during the opening period of the small hit attacker 6755a and letting the game ball enter the lottery device 6755. , V It is a small hit type that gives an advantageous time saving state after a big hit by generating a prize.

Of the 100 random values (counter values) that the small hit type counter C5 can take, the random value (counter value) associated with the "small hit A14" is two, so it is small in the first special symbol lottery. The rate at which "small hit A14" is determined in the case of a hit is 2% (2/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 219, "small hit B14" is specified as the small hit type in association with the range in which the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "2, 3" (FIG. 219). See 202ea1b). Similar to the "small hit A14", this "small hit B14" is a small hit type in which a V winning confirmation pattern (see FIG. 214 (a)) is set as an opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a. In addition, when a V prize is generated in this "small hit B14", the "big hit F14" is won. "Big hit F14" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 5 and the game state after the big hit is set to the normal state of the disadvantageous normal symbol. Therefore, the "small hit B14" can almost certainly generate a V prize simply by hitting right during the opening period of the small hit attacker 6755a and inserting the game ball into the lottery device 6755. When a V prize occurs, it is a small hit type in which a disadvantageous normal state is given after a big hit. Therefore, "small hit B14" is a small hit type that is more disadvantageous than "small hit A14".

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the small hit type counter C5, 2 are the random values (counter values) associated with the "small hit B14", so the lottery for the first special symbol is small. The rate at which "small hit B14" is determined in the case of a hit is 2% (2/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 219, "small hit C14" is defined as a small hit type in association with the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "4 to 9" (FIG. 219). See 202ea1c). This "small hit C14" is a small hit type in which a V winning rate 75% pattern (see FIG. 214 (c)) is set as an opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a. In addition, when a V prize is generated in this "small hit C14", the "big hit E14" (5 round time saving big hit) is won. Therefore, although the "small hit C14" is set to the "small hit A14" in which the V prize confirmation pattern is set and the open pattern in which the V prize is less likely to occur than the "small hit B14", the V prize has occurred. In the case, it is a small hit type that is given an advantageous time saving state after a big hit. Therefore, the "small hit C14" is more disadvantageous than the "small hit A14" and the "small hit B14" as the opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a (it becomes difficult to win a V prize). Further, in terms of the gaming state set after the big hit when the V prize occurs, it is more advantageous than the "small hit B14".

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the small hit type counter C5, 6 are the random values (counter values) associated with the "small hit C14", so the lottery for the first special symbol is small. The rate at which "small hit C14" is determined in the case of a hit is 6% (6/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 219, for the value of the small hit type counter C5 in the range of "10 to 15", "small hit D14" is defined in association with the small hit type (FIG. 219). See 202ea1d). This "small hit D14" is a small hit type in which a V winning rate 75% pattern (see FIG. 214 (c)) is set as an opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a. In addition, when a V prize is generated in this "small hit D14", the "big hit F14" (5 round normal big hit) is won. Therefore, in the "small hit D14", a "small hit A14" in which a V winning confirmation pattern is set and an open pattern in which a V winning is less likely to occur than in the "small hit B14" are set, and a V winning occurs. If so, it is a small hit type that is given a disadvantageous normal state after the big hit. Therefore, the "small hit D14" is more disadvantageous than the "small hit A14" and the "small hit B14" as the opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a (it becomes difficult to win a V prize). In addition, the aspect of the gaming state set after the big hit when the V prize is generated is also the most disadvantageous.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the small hit type counter C5, 6 are the random values (counter values) associated with the "small hit D14", so the lottery for the first special symbol is small. The ratio at which "small hit D14" is determined in the case of a hit is 6% (6/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 219, for the value of the small hit type counter C5 in the range of "16 to 27", "small hit E14" is defined in association with the small hit type (FIG. 219). See 202ea1e). This "small hit E14" is a small hit type in which a V winning rate 50% pattern (see FIG. 214 (b)) is set as an opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a. In addition, when a V prize is generated in this "small hit E14", the "big hit E14" (5 round time saving big hit) is won. Therefore, "small hit E14" includes "small hit A14" and "small hit B14" in which a V winning confirmation pattern is set, and "small hit C14" and "small hit C14" in which a V winning rate 75% pattern is set. Although an opening pattern is set in which V prizes are less likely to occur than "Hit D14", when V prizes occur, it is a small hit type in which an advantageous time saving state is given after a big hit. Therefore, the "small hit E14" is more disadvantageous than the "small hit A14" to the "small hit D14" as the opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a (it becomes difficult to win a V prize). On the other hand, it is the most advantageous in terms of the gaming state set after the big hit when the V prize occurs.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the small hit type counter C5, 12 are the random values (counter values) associated with the "small hit E14", so the lottery for the first special symbol is small. The rate at which "small hit E14" is determined in the case of a hit is 12% (12/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 219, for the value of the small hit type counter C5 in the range of "28 to 39", "small hit F14" is defined in association with the small hit type (FIG. 219). See 202ea1f). This "small hit F14" is a small hit type in which a V winning rate 50% pattern (see FIG. 214 (b)) is set as an opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a. In addition, when a V prize is generated in this "small hit F14", the "big hit F14" (5 round normal big hit) is won. Therefore, "small hit F14" includes "small hit A14" and "small hit B14" in which a V winning confirmation pattern is set, and "small hit C14" and "small hit C14" in which a V winning rate 75% pattern is set. It is a small hit type in which an opening pattern in which V prizes are less likely to occur than "Hit D14" is set, and when V prizes occur, a disadvantageous time saving state is given after a big hit. Therefore, "small hit F14" is more disadvantageous than "small hit A14" to "small hit D14" as an opening pattern of the attacker 6755a for small hits (it becomes difficult to win a V prize). In addition, it is the most disadvantageous in terms of the game state set after the big hit when the V prize occurs. In other words, "small hit F14" is the most disadvantageous in terms of the open pattern set in the attacker 6755a for small hits in the V challenge small hits, and also in terms of the game state after the end of the big hit when a V prize occurs. It is a small hit type.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the small hit type counter C5, 12 are the random values (counter values) associated with the "small hit F14", so the lottery for the first special symbol is small. The rate at which "small hit F14" is determined in the case of a hit is 12% (12/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 219, for the value of the small hit type counter C5 in the range of "40 to 99", "small hit G14" is defined in association with the small hit type (FIG. 219). See 202ea1g). This "small hit G14" is a small hit type in which a normal small hit pattern (see FIG. 214 (d)) is set as an opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a. Therefore, it is almost impossible to win a V prize during the small hit validity period. It is extremely difficult to generate a V prize, but if a V prize occurs during the valid period of the small hit of "small hit G14", it will be "big hit E14" (5 round time saving big hit).

Of the 100 random values (counter values) that the small hit type counter C5 can take, 60 are the random values (counter values) associated with the "small hit G14", so the lottery for the first special symbol is small. The ratio at which "small hit G14" is determined in the case of a hit is 60% (60/100).

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, as the V challenge small hit of the first special symbol, a plurality of types of small hit types having different V winning rates are provided. That is, "small hit A14" and "small hit B14" where the V winning rate is 100%, "small hit C14" and "small hit D14" where the V winning rate is 75%, and the V winning rate is 50%. "Small hit E14" and "small hit F14" are provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to expect the player to win a small hit with a higher V winning rate, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Further, in the tenth embodiment, in addition to the V challenge small hit, the "small hit G14" (normally) in which the small hit attacker 6755a is released only during the period when V winning is impossible (difficult) (V impossible period). A small hit) is provided. As a result, when the small hit is won, it can be expected that the V challenge small hit is won, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In the tenth embodiment, the normal small hit and the V challenge small hit have the same operation mode of the opening / closing operation of the small hit attacker 6755a in 2 seconds after the start of the small hit. That is, one second after the start of the small hit, the operation mode in which the small hit attacker 6755a is released is executed only for 0.1 second. Therefore, even after the winning of the small hit is notified, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether the small hit is a normal small hit or a V challenge small hit for at least 2 seconds. Therefore, even if a normal small hit is won, the expectation for the V-challenge small hit can be maintained for a predetermined period (2 seconds) from the start of the small hit. Therefore, every time a small hit is won, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 220, the details of the above-mentioned special figure 2 small hit table 202ea2 will be described. FIG. 220 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special figure 2 small hit table 202ea2. As shown in FIG. 220, the special figure 2 small hit table 202ea2 defines six types of small hits, "small hit H14" to "small hit M14".

As shown in FIG. 220, “small hit H14” is associated with the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “0 to 12” (see 202ea2a in FIG. 220). This "small hit H14" is a small hit type in which an opening pattern A (see FIG. 215 (a)) is set as an opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a. That is, if the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of the small hit attacker 6755a, it may enter the right out port 6755bO or reach the distribution rotating body 6755f. A certain opening pattern is set. When a V prize is generated in "small hit H14", a different big hit type is won according to the type of the V winning opening that has entered the ball. More specifically, if a V prize is generated by entering the right V prize opening 6755bV, the "big hit G14" is won. This "big hit G14" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the gaming state after the end of the big hit is set to a time saving state which is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when a V prize is generated by a game ball entering any of the central V winning openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 (that is, entering the V winning opening provided in the distribution rotating body 6755f). Will win the "Big Hit I14". This "big hit I14" has 16 rounds, and is a big hit type in which the gaming state after the big hit is set to an advantageous time saving state. That is, it is the most advantageous jackpot type because the number of rounds is the largest and the gaming state after the jackpot is completed is also advantageous. As shown in FIG. 220, when the second special symbol is a small hit and the game ball enters any of the central V winning openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 during the valid period of the small hit, It is configured to win "Big Hit I14" regardless of the small hit type. Therefore, when the game ball flows down to the distribution rotating body 6755f, the most advantageous jackpot is won at a rate of 50%, so that the player's expectation can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In the open pattern A, the small hit attacker 6755a is not opened at the timing when the game ball can enter the right V winning opening 6755bV, so basically the V winning is given at "small hit H14". If it occurs, it is a V prize for any of the central V prize openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3. That is, if a V prize occurs during the small hit valid period of "small hit H14", the most advantageous "big hit I14" is basically won.

Of the 100 possible random values (counter values) of the small hit type counter C5, the number of counter values associated with "small hit H14" is 13, so it is small in the second special symbol lottery. The rate of winning the "small hit H14" in the case of a hit is 13% (13/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 220, “small hit I14” is associated with the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “13 to 25” (see 202ea2b in FIG. 220). This "small hit I14" is a small hit type in which an opening pattern B (see FIG. 215 (b)) is set as an opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a. That is, if the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of the small hit attacker 6755a, there is a possibility that the ball enters the right out opening 6755bO or the right V winning opening 6755bV. An opening pattern is set. When a V prize is generated for the right V winning opening 6755bV in the "small hit I14", the "big hit G14" (10 round time saving big hit) is won in the same manner as the "small hit H14". In the open pattern B, the small hit attacker 6755a is not released at the timing when the game ball can reach the distribution rotating body 6755f, so basically a V prize is generated at "small hit I14". If so, it is a V prize for the right V prize opening 6755bV. That is, if a V prize occurs during the small hit valid period of "small hit I14", the "big hit G14" (10 round time saving big hit) is basically won.

Of the 100 possible random values (counter values) of the small hit type counter C5, the number of counter values associated with "small hit I14" is 13, so it is small in the second special symbol lottery. The percentage of winning "small hit I14" is 13% (13/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 220, “small hit J14” is associated with the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “26 to 38” (see 202ea2c in FIG. 220). This "small hit J14" is a small hit type in which an opening pattern C (see FIG. 215 (c)) is set as an opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a. That is, when a game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of the small hit attacker 6755a, it enters the right out opening 6755bO, the right V winning opening 6755bV, or An opening pattern that may reach the distribution rotating body 6755f is set. When a V prize is generated for the right V winning opening 6755bV in the "small hit J14", the "big hit G14" (10 round short-time big hit) is won in the same manner as the "small hit H14" and "small hit I14". In the opening pattern C, the small hit attacker 6755a is released even at the timing when the game ball can reach the distribution rotating body 6755f and at the timing when the game ball can enter the right V winning opening 6755bV. .. That is, if a V prize occurs during the small hit valid period of "small hit J14", it may be "big hit G14" or "big hit I14".

Of the 100 possible random values (counter values) of the small hit type counter C5, the number of counter values associated with "small hit J14" is 13, so it is small in the second special symbol lottery. The percentage of winning "small hit J14" is 13% (13/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 220, “small hit K14” is associated with the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “39 to 58” (see 202ea2d in FIG. 220). This "small hit K14" is a small hit type in which an opening pattern A (see FIG. 215 (a)) is set as an opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a. That is, if the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of the small hit attacker 6755a, it may enter the right out port 6755bO or reach the distribution rotating body 6755f. A certain opening pattern is set. If a V prize is generated for the right V winning opening 6755bV in the "small hit K14", the "big hit H14" is won. This "big hit H14" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the normal state of a disadvantageous normal symbol is set after the end of the big hit. In the open pattern A, the small hit attacker 6755a is not opened at the timing when the ball can enter the right V winning opening 6755bV, so basically when a V winning occurs in "small hit K14". Is a V prize for any one of the central V prize openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3. That is, if a V prize occurs during the small hit valid period of the "small hit K14", the "big hit I14" (16 rounds of short-time big hit) is basically won.

Of the 100 possible random values (counter values) of the small hit type counter C5, the number of counter values associated with the "small hit K14" is 20, so it is small in the second special symbol lottery. The percentage of winning "small hit K14" is 20% (20/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 220, “small hit L14” is associated with the range where the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “59 to 79” (see 202ea2e in FIG. 220). This "small hit L14" is a small hit type in which an opening pattern B (see FIG. 215 (b)) is set as an opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a. That is, if the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of the small hit attacker 6755a, there is a possibility that the ball enters the right out opening 6755bO or the right V winning opening 6755bV. An opening pattern is set. When a V prize is generated for the right V winning opening 6755bV in the "small hit L14", the "big hit H14" (10 round normal big hit) is won in the same manner as the "small hit K14". In the open pattern B, the small hit attacker 6755a is not released at the timing when the game ball can reach the distribution rotating body 6755f, so basically a V prize is generated at "small hit L14". If so, it is a V prize for the right V prize opening 6755bV. That is, if a V prize occurs during the small hit valid period of "small hit L14", basically, "big hit H14" (10 rounds normal big hit) is won. Therefore, the "small hit L14" is a small hit type that is disadvantageous to the player (the time saving state ends) when a V prize is generated.

Of the 100 possible random values (counter values) of the small hit type counter C5, the number of counter values associated with the "small hit L14" is 21, so it is small in the second special symbol lottery. The percentage of winning "small hit L14" is 21% (21/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 220, "small hit M14" is defined in association with the value of the small hit type counter C5 in the range of "80 to 99" (see 202ea2f in FIG. 220). This "small hit M14" is a small hit type in which an opening pattern C (see FIG. 215 (c)) is set as an opening pattern of the small hit attacker 6755a. That is, when a game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of the small hit attacker 6755a, it enters the right out opening 6755bO, the right V winning opening 6755bV, or An opening pattern that may reach the distribution rotating body 6755f is set. When a V prize is generated for the right V winning opening 6755bV in the "small hit M14", the "big hit H14" (10 round normal big hit) is won in the same manner as the "small hit K14" and the "small hit L14". In the opening pattern C, the small hit attacker 6755a is released even at the timing when the game ball can reach the distribution rotating body 6755f and at the timing when the game ball can enter the right V winning opening 6755bV. .. That is, if a V prize occurs during the small hit valid period of the "small hit M14", there is a possibility of becoming a "big hit H14" or a "big hit I14".

Of the 100 possible random values (counter values) of the small hit type counter C5, the number of counter values associated with the "small hit M14" is 20, so it is small in the second special symbol lottery. The percentage of winning "small hit M14" is 20% (20/100).

As described above, in the tenth embodiment, when a small hit is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, a different big hit type is won according to the type of the V winning opening into which the game ball has entered. That is, when the game ball enters any of the central V winning openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3, the most advantageous "big hit I14" is determined, while when the ball enters the right V winning opening 6755bV. , It is either a relatively advantageous "big hit G14" or a disadvantageous "big hit H14". Further, the ratio of "big hit H14" (that is, "small hit K14" to "" is higher than the ratio of "big hit G14" (that is, the ratio of winning any of "small hit H14" to "small hit J14"). The rate of winning any of the "small hits M14") is configured to be higher. As a result, if a small hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, the player will receive a V prize only at a rate of 50% rather than entering the right V winning opening 6755bV. It is possible to provide a novel game property that the game ball is expected to reach the rotating body 6755f. Therefore, each time the game ball enters the lottery device 6755, the game can be played by paying attention to the flow direction of the game ball, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment is configured to win a small hit with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/100) when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed. As a result, even in the normal state of a normal symbol in which it is necessary to proceed with the game by hitting the left side, the game can be performed with the expectation that a small hit will be obtained by the lottery of the special symbol. Further, in the tenth embodiment, a plurality of types having different V winning rates are provided as small hits of the first special symbol. That is, there are V challenge small hits with V winning rates of 100%, 75%, and 50%, and normal small hits that make V winning impossible (difficult). As a result, when a small hit is won, the game can be played with the expectation that the small hit type corresponding to the higher V winning rate will be determined, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Can be done. Further, in the tenth embodiment, in the case of a small hit of the first special symbol, the mode of opening / closing operation of the small hit attacker 6755a within 2 seconds from the start of the small hit is common regardless of the small hit type. It has become. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize which type of small hit is being executed, at least until 2 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit. Even when the hit is executed, the expectation for the V-challenge small hit can be kept for a longer time.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is predicted whether or not it is a V challenge small hit, and the launch direction of the game ball is determined according to the prediction result. It is configured to execute a selection effect that is variable to the player. That is, when the small hit this time is a normal small hit, the game ball is sent to the lottery device 6755 by hitting right while the common operation mode is being executed for 2 seconds after the start of the small hit. While it is possible to get a prize ball by entering the ball, if you hit left, you cannot get a prize ball. On the other hand, if the small hit this time is a V-challenge small hit, if the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 by hitting right while the common operation mode is being executed, that is the case. At that point, the end condition of the small hit (one or more game balls enter) is satisfied, and the small hit ends without the V challenge being executed. On the other hand, if a left-handed strike is performed while a common operation mode is being executed in the V-challenge small hit (that is, during the execution of the selection effect), the small hit is terminated until the V-challenge is started. There is no such thing. Therefore, in the normal small hit, there is an advantage that the prize ball can be obtained by hitting right during the selection effect, whereas in the V challenge small hit, by hitting the left during the selection effect. There is a merit that the V challenge can be surely executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a novel game property of predicting the small hit type and firing the game ball in the direction corresponding to the prediction.

In the tenth embodiment, the small hit attacker 6755a has a common opening operation for the normal small hit and the V challenge small hit. During the two seconds after the start of the small hit, only 0.1 second is used for the small hit. It was configured to open the attacker 6755a, but it is not limited to this, and if the attacker 6755a for small hits is released during the period when V winning is impossible (difficult), it is arbitrary as a common operation mode. The operation mode of may be set. For example, as a common operation mode, an opening operation may be set for 0.5 seconds from the time when 0.8 seconds have elapsed after the start of the small hit. With this configuration, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the inside of the lottery device 6755 during the execution of the common operation mode, so that it is easier for the player who normally predicts a small hit to hit the ball right. Can win a prize ball.

In the tenth embodiment, in the lottery device 6755, the operation patterns of each part other than the attacker 6755a for small hits are common regardless of the small hit type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it depends on the small hit type. The operation pattern of each part may be different. As a result, the operation for each type of small hit can be diversified, so that the degree of freedom of the operation at the time of winning the small hit can be improved.

In the tenth embodiment, when one or more game balls enter during a small hit, the small hit ends when the entered game ball is discharged, while the game ball is played. If the ball is not entered, the small hit does not end until 8 seconds have passed, but the structure is not limited to this. For example, if the entry of the game ball is not detected at the time when all the opening periods of the small hit attacker 6755a in one small hit are completed, the small hit may be terminated at that time. With this configuration, even though the game ball did not enter the lottery device 6755 (that is, there is no possibility that a V prize will occur), a small hit will occur until 8 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit. Since it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the event that the game is not completed, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the game.

<First modification of the tenth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the tenth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 221 to 223. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment described above, when a small hit is obtained in a special symbol lottery, the game ball enters any V winning opening provided inside the lottery device 6755. It was configured to win a big hit. Further, in the small hit of the second special symbol, the degree of expectation that the time will be shortened after the end of the big hit is different depending on the type of the V winning opening in which the game ball has entered. That is, if a game ball enters any of the central V winning openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 as a small hit of the second special symbol and wins the big hit, the time is always shortened after the big hit is completed, regardless of the small hit type. While the state is set, when the ball enters the right V winning opening 6755bV and wins the big hit, the time saving state is set only at a rate of 39% (that is, when the small hit is H14 to J14). It was composed. That is, in the small hit of the second special symbol, it is more pleasing to the player that the game ball reaches the distribution rotating body 6755f than to enter the right V winning opening 6755bV. In addition, since the opening period of the small hit of the second special symbol is as short as 0.6 seconds, it is configured so that one game ball can be inserted at most.

On the other hand, in this modification, in a part of the small hit of the second special symbol, after the small hit attacker 6755a is opened during the period when the game ball is distributed to the right V winning opening 6755bV, the swing is made. Even during the period in which the game ball is guided to the minute rotating body 6755f, a special opening pattern is set in which the small hit attacker 6755a is opened again. Further, a delay device 6755b3 for delaying the flow speed of the game ball is provided in the middle of the flow path leading to the right V winning opening 6755bV, and the game ball is guided to the right V winning opening 6755bV in the special opening pattern. When the game ball is inserted into the distribution rotating body 6755f during both the period and the period in which the game ball is guided to the distribution rotating body 6755f, the game ball is distributed to one of the entrances by the distribution rotating body 6755f. The delay period by the delay device 6755b3 is set so that the game ball flows down to the right V winning opening 6755bV after being played. As a result, if the player is not distributed to any of the central V winning openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 by the distribution rotating body 6755f (that is, it is distributed to any of the central out openings 6755fo1 to 6755fo3). ), Since it is possible to recognize that the game ball enters the right V winning opening 6755bV, which has a low expectation of a time saving state, pay attention to the type of the entry opening distributed by the distribution rotating body 6755f. You can play a game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

First, the configuration of the lottery device 6755 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 221. FIG. 221 is an enlarged front view of the guide flow path 6755b2 of the lottery device 6755 in the first modification. As shown in FIG. 221, the induction flow path 6755b2 in the first modification is a game ball that has passed through the lower opening / closing door 6755bD between the lower opening / closing door 6755bD and the right V winning opening 6755bV (that is, V winning 100). % A delay device 6755b3 is provided for prolonging (delaying) the period until the game ball that has entered the lottery device 6755 during the period reaches the right V winning opening 6755bV. The delay device 6755b3 is composed of known croon means. That is, the game ball that has passed through the lower opening / closing door 6755bD and is incident from the left side of the delay device 6755b3 continues to orbit the inner wall portion for about 8 seconds, and then wins a right V through the passage port provided in the center. It is configured to fall towards the mouth 6755bV. As shown in FIG. 221, the upper right side of the induction flow path 6755b2 forms an inclination in the downward direction toward the left side of the delay device 6755b3. As a result, the game ball that has entered the lottery device 6755 during the period of 100% V winning rate and has passed through the lower opening / closing door 6755bD can be reliably dropped to the left of the delay device 6755b3. That is, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has passed through the lower opening / closing door 6755bD from directly passing through the opening of the delay device 6755b3 (the flow of the game ball cannot be delayed). As a result, a small hit in which a special opening pattern (an opening pattern in which the small hit attacker 6755a is opened in the V winning rate 100% period and the V winning rate 50% period) is executed, and the V winning rate is 100. % When the player enters the game ball into the lottery device 6755 in both the% period and the V winning rate 50% period, surely after the distribution of the game ball by the distribution rotating body 6755f is completed. , The game ball can be put into the right V winning opening 6755bV. Therefore, when the special opening pattern is set, it is possible to provide a game property that makes it more strongly expected that the game ball is distributed to any V winning opening by the distribution rotating body 6755f. That is, before entering the right V winning opening 6755bV, which has a low expectation of winning the time-saving jackpot, the winning of the 16-round time-saving jackpot (big hit I14) is confirmed at the time of entering the central V winning opening 6755fv1 ~ It is possible to realize the playability that strongly desires the game ball to enter any of 6755fv3. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game when the special opening pattern is set.

Since the board surface configuration other than the induction flow path 6755b2 is the same as the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 222, the details of the special opening pattern in the first modification of the tenth embodiment will be described. This special opening pattern is used for small hits when it becomes a special small hit selected at a predetermined ratio (for example, 1% of the small hit of the second special symbol) among the small hits of the second special symbol. It is set as an open pattern of the attacker 6755a. As shown in FIG. 222, when the special opening pattern is set, the small hit attacker 6755a is maintained in the closed state from the start of the small hit until 0.4 seconds elapse, and is 0 from the start of the small hit. . When 4 seconds have passed, the small hit attacker 6755a is released. This open state continues for 0.6 seconds, and the small hit attacker 6755a is closed 1 second after the start of the small hit. This closed state continues until 2 seconds have passed after the start of the small hit. That is, the special opening pattern has exactly the same operation as the opening pattern B (see FIG. 215 (b)) described above for 2 seconds after the start of the small hit. That is, the game ball that has entered the lottery device 6755 within 0.4 seconds to 1 second after the start of the small hit flows down to the right V winning opening 6755bV at a rate of 1/3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 222, in the special opening pattern, when 2 seconds have passed after the start of the small hit, the attacker 6755a for the small hit is released for 0.5 seconds, and 2.5 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit. At that point, the small hit attacker 6755a is closed again. After that, the small hit attacker 6755a is maintained in the closed state until the small hit is completed. As described above with reference to FIG. 213, since the V winning rate is set to a 50% period between 2 seconds and 2.5 seconds after the start of the small hit, the lottery device is used during this 0.5 second opening period. The game ball that has entered the 6755 passes through the upper surface of the upper opening / closing door 6755bU in the closed state and is guided to the distribution rotating body 6755f. That is, at a rate of 50%, it is distributed to one of the central V winning openings and wins the most advantageous 16-round time saving jackpot. As described above, if the game ball has entered the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate 100% period, the delay device 6755b3 delays the arrival at the right V winning opening 6755bV. Therefore, even if the game ball is entered into the lottery device 6755 in both the V winning rate 100% period and the V winning rate 50% period, the distribution of the game ball by the distribution rotating body 6755f is completed first. After that, the game ball enters the right V winning opening 6755bV. Therefore, when the game ball is distributed to the central V winning opening by the distribution rotating body 6755f, it is distributed to the central out opening by the distribution rotating body 6755f while winning the most advantageous 16-round time saving jackpot. In that case, the jackpot based on the entry into the right V winning opening 6755bV, which is less expected to be given a time saving state, is won. Therefore, since the game can be played by paying attention to the type of the ball entry port distributed by the distribution rotating body 6755f, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

As described above, in the first modification, in a part of the small hit of the second special symbol, the attacker 6755a for small hit is released in the V winning rate 100% period and the V winning rate 50% period. The open pattern is set, and the V winning rate is 50% before the game ball that has entered the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate 100% period reaches the right V winning opening 6755bV. The game balls that entered during the period are distributed to one of the entrances. That is, when a game ball enters both the V winning rate 100% period and the V winning rate 50% period, first, the distribution of the game ball by the distribution rotating body 6755f is completed, and then the right V winning. The structure is such that the game ball enters the mouth 6755bV. In other words, after the result of winning the most advantageous 16-round time-saving jackpot (distributed to the central V winning opening by the distribution rotating body 6755f) is obtained, the ball should be entered into the right V winning opening 6755bV. It is configured in. Since the jackpot based on the entry into the right V winning opening 6755bV has a low expectation that a time saving state will be given (for example, a ratio of 39%), the central V winning opening is given to the player by the distribution rotating body 6755f. It is possible to provide a novel playability that allows the player to play a game with a strong desire to be distributed to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In this first modification, when the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate 100% period and the V winning rate 50% period in one small hit, the distribution rotation is performed first. The flow speed of the game ball toward the right V winning opening 6755bV is delayed so that the game ball reaches the right V winning opening 6755bV after the distribution of the game ball by the body 6755f is completed, but it is not always 1 It doesn't have to be a small hit. While the game ball is delayed by the delay device 6755b3, the small hit is terminated so that the next fluctuation and the small hit can be started, so that the right V winning opening 6755bV is reached across multiple small hits. It may be possible to realize an operation in which the distribution by the distribution rotating body 6755f is completed before the distribution is completed. With this configuration, it is not necessary to provide a small hit in which the special opening pattern is set (similarly by winning a small hit in which the opening pattern A is set after the small hit in which the opening pattern B is set). Therefore, the storage capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

In the first modification, the jackpot type is determined based on the type of the V winning opening in which the game ball first enters during the small hit validity period, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot type may be determined based on the type of the V winning opening to which the game ball last entered in the small hit valid period of 1. With this configuration, even if the game ball is guided to the distribution rotating body 6755f after entering the right V winning opening 6755bV first during the small hit valid period of 1, the distribution rotating body It can be configured to win the most advantageous 16-round time-saving jackpot by being distributed to the central V winning opening by 6755f. In other words, it is possible to realize the same playability as the first modification described above without providing the delay device 6755b3. As a result, the board configuration of the gaming board 13 can be simplified, so that the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

<Second variant of the tenth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 223. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment described above, when the game balls that have entered the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate 50% period are distributed to the central out port by the distribution rotating body 6755f, There was no possibility of winning the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the second modification, even when the game ball is distributed to the central out port by the distribution rotating body 6755f, the jackpot can be won.

A second modification of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 223. FIG. 223 (a) is a top view showing a portion of the induction flow path 6755b of the lottery device 6755 on the right side of the ball discharge door 6755c. As shown in FIG. 223 (a), in the guide flow path 6755b in the second modification, the portion between the ball discharge door 6755c and the upper opening / closing door 6755bU branches into the front side and the back side of the front view. ing. Further, at the branch point, a distribution member 6755 g for distributing the game ball to either the flow path on the front side of the front view or the flow path on the back side is provided. The distribution member 6755 g is normally arranged in a state of guiding the game ball to the front side of the front view (see FIG. 223 (b)), and is arranged for a predetermined period during the V winning rate 50% period (see FIG. 223 (b)). For example, it is configured to be variable so that the game ball can be distributed to the flow path on the back side (see FIG. 223 (a)) only for 0.1 seconds).

Further, as shown in FIG. 223 (a), the V passage port 6755h through which the game ball can pass is provided in the flow path on the back side of the front view in the guide flow path 6755b. The V passage port 6755h has the same function as various V winning openings provided in the lottery device 6755. That is, the game ball passes through the V passage port 6755h during the small hit valid period, and the big hit is won.

In this way, by configuring the game ball to pass through the flow path on the side where the V passage port 6755h is provided for a predetermined period during the period of the V winning rate of 50%, the game ball passes through the V passage port 6755h. Even if it later reaches the distribution rotating body 6755f and is distributed to the central out port, after the small hit ends, the big hit that has already been won because it passed through the V passage port 6755h first is started. Can be done. That is, when the game is distributed to the central out port, the player can be made to think that he did not win the jackpot and then the jackpot can be started, which is a great surprise and joy for the player. Can be embraced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

It should be noted that which of the branched flow paths the game ball has passed through is configured to be difficult to see due to decoration or the like. With this configuration, it can be difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the jackpot has already been won by passing through the V passage port 6755h, so it is also distributed to the central out port. Regardless, when the winning of the jackpot is notified, the player can be more surely surprised. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Although not shown, if the game ball is distributed to the central out port after passing through the V passage port 6755h, it is said that the jackpot was not won because it was once distributed to the out port. The effect of notifying that is executed. Then, after that, the winning of the big hit is notified by the so-called revival production, and the big hit is started. As a result, every time the game ball is distributed to the central out port and it is notified that the jackpot has not been won, it can be expected that a revival effect will occur. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player's expectation for the big hit for a longer period of time, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In the tenth embodiment and various modifications thereof, a plurality of V winning openings are separately provided, and a jackpot is won when a game ball enters each V winning opening. It is not limited to. For example, there is a configuration in which only one specific area is provided to win a big hit when a game ball enters, and the game ball that has entered each V winning opening is finally flowed down to one specific area. May be. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to provide a detection means such as a sensor for detecting a winning ball in each V winning opening, so that the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the tenth embodiment and various modifications thereof, the degree of expectation that V prize will be generated according to the small hit type is determined by making the ease of entering the ball in the V prize rate 100% period different according to the small hit type. It was designed to be different, but it is not limited to this. Alternatively or in addition to this, the number of game balls that can reach the distribution rotating body 6755f may be different depending on the type of small hit, so that the degree of expectation that V winning will occur may be different. Specifically, for example, by hitting right during the opening period of the small hit attacker 6755a, the small hit type that allows a maximum of one game ball to reach the distribution rotating body 6755f and the distribution. A configuration may be provided in which a small hit type that allows a maximum of two game balls to reach the rotating body 6755f is provided. If two game balls can reach the distribution rotating body 6755f, the rate at which V prizes occur is 75% (the probability that both game balls cannot win V prizes is 50% x 50% = 25). %) Therefore, as the number of game balls reaching the distribution rotating body 6755 increases, the player's expectation for the V prize can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<11th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 224 to 256. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment described above, in addition to the case where the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the special symbol lottery is a small hit, and one of the V prizes is won during the valid period of the small hit. Even when a pachinko ball enters the mouth, the jackpot game is executed. In addition, the probability of a small hit is variable between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol, and in the lottery of the second special symbol, the probability of a small hit is high (9/10). On the other hand, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the small hit is won only with a relatively low probability (1/100). As a result, in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, which is easy to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (the probability of winning the normal symbol is high), it is relatively easy to win the small hit (V prize is likely to occur). ), While it is advantageous for the player, in the normal state of the normal symbol in which the game needs to be advanced by the lottery of the first special symbol, it is relatively difficult to win a small hit (V prize is less likely to occur). ), Which is disadvantageous to the player.

In addition to this, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment, various hobby effects that can further improve the interest of the player by executing the pachinko machine 10 in the specifications (specs) of the tenth embodiment are added. are doing. More specifically, during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol, the hobby effect executed to suggest the expectation degree of the big hit or the small hit, or during the execution of the small hit game in the time saving state, the distribution rotating body. An entertaining effect or the like that is executed to suggest the entry timing at which the game ball is easily distributed to 6755f has been added.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment is that the operation button 230 (FIG. 100) is provided, the configurations of ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. The point is that the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is partially changed. .. For other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and other processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the other processes are performed. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the tenth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the operation button 230 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. Since the shape of the operation button 230 in the eleventh embodiment is the same as the shape of the operation button 230 in the first control example described above, here, reference to FIG. 100 referred to in the description in the first control example again. And explain. As shown in FIG. 100, the operation button 230 is arranged on the left side of the front view with respect to the ball rental operation unit 40. The operation button 230 includes an upper button UB arranged on the upper side of the front view, a lower button DB arranged on the lower side of the front view, a right button RB arranged on the right side of the front view, and a left button LB arranged on the left side of the front view. , And the central button CB arranged in the central portion of the operation button 230. In the eleventh embodiment, the upper button UB and the lower button DB are the luminancees of various light emitting members in the pachinko machine 10 (luminance of the illuminated units 29 to 33, the luminance of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, etc.). The right button RB and the left button LB are used as buttons for adjusting the volume of various sounds in the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, by operating the operation button 230, the brightness and the volume can be set to any one of the five stages. That is, it is possible to set the brightness of various light emitting members to be increased by one step each time the upper button UB is operated (pressed), while various light emission is performed each time the lower button DB is operated (pressed). It is possible to set the brightness of the member to be reduced by one step. Further, it is possible to set the volume to be increased by one step each time the right button RB is operated (pressed), while the volume is set to be decreased by one step each time the left button LB is pressed. It becomes possible to do. Further, the center button CB is prompted to operate in a predetermined effect (for example, a button operation effect such as an operation support effect described later) that can be set during the execution of the variable display effect. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 224 and the like, but in the operation support effect, each time the center button CB is pressed during the execution of the effect, a display mode indicating the degree of expectation such as a big hit is displayed. As a result, the player can positively press the center button CB, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the brightness setting and the volume setting can be basically changed at all times. That is, it is possible to change the setting to the player's preference by pressing the operation button 230 even during the execution of the variable display effect or the execution of the jackpot game. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be further improved. In the eleventh embodiment, an upper button UB and a lower button DB for changing the brightness setting, and a right button RB and a left button LB for changing the volume setting are provided around the center button CB. Has been done. That is, a player who tries to press the center button CB mistakenly presses a different button while an effect that prompts an operation on the center button CB (for example, a button operation effect such as an operation support effect described later) is being executed. It is a button layout that is relatively likely to end up. In other words, there is a possibility that the brightness setting may be changed or the volume setting may be changed even though the player who tried to participate in the button operation effect tried to press the center button CB. be.

Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, among the execution periods of the variable display effect in which the button operation effect is set, the brightness or volume setting is changed at least during the operation valid period in which the operation for the center button CB is treated as valid. Is configured to be restricted. More specifically, various settings (brightness setting and volume setting) are set from 1 second before the operation valid period of the center button CB starts to 1 second after the end of the operation valid period. The number of operations of various buttons (non-directing buttons) required to change) is increased more than usual. More specifically, in the normal state, the setting is changed by one step each time the various buttons (non-effect buttons) are operated (for example, the volume is set to 1 each time the right button RB is pressed once. The setting will be set to a larger level), while the setting will not be changed unless the various buttons are operated twice from 1 second before the start of the operation validity period to 1 second after the end. ing. With this configuration, if the player who tried to operate the center button CB accidentally presses the non-directing button during the execution of the button operation effect, various settings are made against the player's will. Can be suppressed from being changed, and the effect mode corresponding to the operation is not displayed, so that the player is made to recognize the operation error (the type of the button to be pressed is incorrect). be able to. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably execute the button operation effect. Here, the reason why the setting change based on the operation for the non-effect button is restricted not only during the operation valid period but also for 1 second before and after the operation valid period is that the button operation effect is started. In order to deal with cases where a player who detects and starts a button operation before the operation valid period starts, or a player who continues the operation without noticing that the operation valid period has expired makes an erroneous operation. Is. As a result, it is possible to further reduce the possibility that the setting change is made against the intention of the player. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of the explanation, the period from 1 second before the start of the operation valid period to 1 second after the end is referred to as a non-effect button restriction period.

In the eleventh embodiment, various settings can be changed by one step by pressing the non-effect button twice during the non-effect button restriction period, but the settings are changed. The specified number of operations (number of presses) is not limited to two, and any number can be set. Further, for example, the setting may not be changed unless the same non-effect button is continuously operated over a predetermined number of operations. That is, it may be configured so that the specified number of operations is reset each time a different button is operated. With this configuration, except when the non-production button is operated with the intention of changing the setting during the non-production button restriction period (for example, by roughly operating the center button CB, 1 in several times. Since it is possible to prevent the setting from being changed when other buttons are operated to some extent), it is possible to more reliably prevent the setting from being changed against the player's will. can do.

In the eleventh embodiment, the operation valid period of the center button CB and one second before and after the operation valid period are set as the non-directing button limiting period, but the non-directing button limiting period can be arbitrarily set. can. For example, the non-effect button restriction period may always be set during the variable period of the variable display effect in which the button operation effect is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting from being changed against the intention of the player when the player performs an erroneous operation. Further, for example, the non-effect button restriction period may be set only during the operation valid period. With this configuration, the player who tries to change the setting immediately before or after the operation validity period can be made to change the setting without imposing any restrictions, which is convenient for the player. Can be improved. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the non-production button restriction period is set only in the operation support effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the non-production button restriction period is also set in other button operation effects. It may be configured to be set. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting from being changed against the player's will even in other button operation effects. In addition, by setting the non-effect button restriction period in other button operation effects, for example, the non-effect button is operated to determine whether or not the button operation effect in which the jackpot expectation is greatly jumped up at the time of appearance is executed. By doing so, it is possible to realize playability that can be known in advance. More specifically, for example, in a part of the case where a big hit occurs, a button operation effect is generated after the stop display is once displayed with a symbol that is off, and an operation on the center button CB is performed during the effect period of the button operation effect. The non-effect button restriction period is set for the effect that is changed to the jackpot symbol based on the fact that (or the predetermined effect period has elapsed). Then, for example, the non-effect button restriction period is started one second before the valid period (for example, when the off-design is stopped). By configuring in this way, by operating the non-effect button when the detached symbol is stopped, it is possible to make the player detect the execution of the button operation effect before the button operation effect is executed. can. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player understand that the jackpot will be a big hit before the button operation effect is started, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. Further, even in the variable display effect in which the non-effect button is arranged adjacent to the other operation means different from the center button CB and the effect for urging the operation to the operation means is executed, the non-effect is not produced. It may be configured to set the button limit period. In particular, by arranging the non-effect button in the vicinity of the operation means for which the operation is promoted only in the production with a high expectation, the execution of the effect for urging the operation for the operation means with a high expectation is performed for the non-production. By operating the non-directing button during the button restriction period, it can be detected at an early stage, so when there is a possibility that the non-production button restriction period has expired, the non-production button is positively pressed. It is possible to realize playability. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 224 to 226, an operation support effect, which is one of the button operation effects in the eleventh embodiment, will be described. In this operation support effect, each time the player operates the center button CB during the effect period, the degree of expectation that the jackpot will be notified in the running fluctuation display and the degree of expectation in the running fluctuation display are higher. It is a production to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for developing into a high variable display mode (the degree of expectation for developing into reach, the degree of expectation for developing from normal reach to super reach, etc.). In the following explanation, as an example, the operation support effect is executed while the character 811 imitating an adventurer and the character 812 imitating a monster are confronting each other as a super reach effect. conduct.

As shown in FIG. 224 (a), when the operation support effect is executed, a horizontally long substantially rectangular display area HR11 is formed with respect to the upper left portion in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Further, in a place other than the display area HR11, as a super reach effect, an effect in which the character 811 imitating an adventurer and the character 812 imitating a monster confront each other is executed. As shown in FIG. 224 (a), the character 813 imitating a bird is displayed in the display area HR11, and the characters "Cheer with the button PUSH !!" are displayed below the character 813. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the effect supported by the character 230 is executed by operating the operation button 230.

As shown in FIG. 224 (b), when the center button CB of the operation button 230 is operated (pressed) during the execution of the operation support effect, a character image 814 imitating the character "Gun Valley" is displayed in the display area HR11. Is displayed. As shown in FIG. 225 (a), a plurality of character images can be displayed in the display area HR11. That is, each time the player presses the center button CB while the display area HR11 is displayed (during the operation valid period of the center button CB), a character image is displayed. FIG. 225 (a) is a diagram illustrating a case where two character images 814a and 814b are displayed in a normal (default) display mode (white character display mode).

FIG. 225 (b) shows a display mode (character mode) in which one of the two character images displayed on the display area HR11 has a high degree of expectation that one character image develops into a reach effect with a higher degree of expectation. It is a figure which showed the case which was set to. As shown in FIG. 225 (b), in the eleventh embodiment, a striped character mode (character image 814c) is provided as a character mode with high expectations for development. By displaying the character mode of the striped pattern, the player can be expected to develop a reach effect with a high degree of expectation, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, six types of character modes of the character image 814 are provided. Specifically, in addition to the above-mentioned striped character mode, for example, it is easier to be displayed during the execution of the jackpot variation display than during the execution of the out-of-bounds variation display (that is, the expectation of the jackpot is higher). A display mode (character mode) of red characters and the like are provided. During the execution of the operation support effect, each time the center button CB is pressed, one character mode from the six types of character modes is determined by lottery, and the character image of the determined character mode is displayed. .. Therefore, in the expectation that a character mode with a high expectation of a big hit and a character mode with a high expectation of development will be displayed, the center button CB should be positively operated during the operation support effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the operation support production. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the eleventh embodiment, the selection rate of each character mode is changed according to the operation status (operation tendency) of the player. That is, it is possible to determine whether the player has a tendency to actively operate the center button CB during the execution of the operation support effect, and to make the selection rate of each character mode different according to the determination result. It is composed. More specifically, if it is determined that the player who tends to actively press the center button CB during the operation support effect is playing the game, the character mode with high expectation (the expectation of the jackpot is high). While the ratio of determining the character mode of high red characters and the character mode of the striped pattern with high expectations for development) is relatively low, the frequency of pressing the center button CB during the execution of the operation support effect tends to be low. When it is determined that the player of the above is playing a game, the determination rate of the character mode having a high expectation is relatively high.

Here, in the operation support effect, if the configuration is such that the determination ratio of each character mode is set only by the propriety of the variable display effect being executed and the development status regardless of the tendency of the player to press the character, the press is positively pressed. Since the player who performs (that is, the number of times of pressing in the operation support effect of 1 is large) tends to increase the number of times of drawing the character mode, the display ratio of the character mode having a relatively high expectation becomes high. .. That is, there is a problem that the degree of expectation shown by the operation support effect changes according to the tendency of the player.

On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, the determination ratio of each character mode is changed according to the tendency of each player to press the character during the execution of the operation support effect, and the comparison is made with the player who positively presses the character. It is configured so that the difference in the reliability of the degree of expectation suggested during the execution of the operation support effect is small between the player who presses the target less frequently. This makes it possible to more appropriately provide the degree of expectation of the character aspect regardless of the tendency of the player to press the character.

Next, with reference to FIG. 226, the execution period of the operation support effect when the variable display effect in which the operation support effect is set is executed will be described. In addition, in FIG. 226, the case where the operation support effect is set for the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (that is, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 60 seconds, see FIGS. 11B to 11D) will be described as an example. conduct. As shown in FIG. 226, when the execution of the operation support effect is determined for the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, three operation support effects are set during one variation period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 226, 4 seconds (first production period) from the time when 5 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation to the time when 9 seconds have passed, and from the time when 24 seconds have passed since the start of the change to the time when 29 seconds have passed. The operation support effect is executed in 4 seconds (second effect period) and 4 seconds from the time when 55 seconds have elapsed from the time when the fluctuation starts to the time when 59 seconds have elapsed (third effect period). That is, it develops into super reach for 4 seconds (first production period) from 5 seconds to 1 second before the timing (when 10 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation) that develops into reach production (reach occurs). 4 seconds from 5 seconds to 1 second before the timing (30 seconds after the start of fluctuation) and 1 from 5 seconds before the stop timing of fluctuation (60 seconds after the start of fluctuation) The operation support effect is executed in 4 seconds (third effect period) until the second before. That is, the operation support effect is executed every 5 seconds before the reach effect with higher expectation is developed and 5 seconds before the fluctuation stop.

Further, as shown in FIG. 226, for 6 seconds from 1 second before the start of each effect period to 1 second after the end, the non-effect button (upper button UB for changing the brightness setting) and It is set to the non-directing button restriction period in which the setting change based on the operation for the lower button DB and the right button RB and the left button LB for changing the volume setting is restricted. That is, the number of operations (presses) of various buttons (non-effect buttons) required to change various settings (brightness setting and volume setting) is increased more than usual (changed from 1 time to 2 times). It is composed. With this configuration, if the player who tried to operate the center button CB accidentally presses the non-directing button during the execution of the button operation effect, various settings are made against the player's will. Can be suppressed from being changed, and the effect mode corresponding to the operation is not displayed, so that the player is made to recognize the operation error (the type of the button to be pressed is incorrect). be able to. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably execute the button operation effect. In addition, by setting the non-effect button restriction period to 1 second before and after the operation valid period, the player who detects that the button operation effect is started and starts the button operation before the operation valid period starts, and the operation. Even if the player who continues the operation without noticing that the validity period has expired makes an erroneous operation, it is possible to prevent the setting change against the player's intention. can.

In this embodiment, the selection ratio of each character mode is configured to be variable before or after all the development is completed (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, before and after the development to the super reach effect). ing. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 226, before the development into super reach (operation support effect performed in the first effect period and the second effect period), the character mode with high expectation of development (for example, the striped pattern). While the selection ratio of the character mode (character mode) is relatively high, the selection ratio of the character mode (blue character, green character, red character, etc.) suggesting the success or failure of the jackpot is relatively low. On the other hand, after developing into super reach (operation support production performed in the third production period), the selection ratio of the character mode indicating the degree of expectation of development becomes low, while the character mode suggesting the success or failure of the jackpot. The selection rate of is relatively high. As a result, the type of character mode that the player expects to be displayed can be different for each stage of development in the variable display. That is, basically, the higher the expectation of the reach production, the higher the expectation of the jackpot. Therefore, there are few development stages (low expectations) such as before the development of the reach production and during the execution of the normal reach production. In), the player can be expected to display a character mode in which the degree of expectation for development is high. On the other hand, after developing to a stage where the expectation of the jackpot is high (for example, super reach), the player can be expected to display the character mode in which the expectation of the jackpot is high. Therefore, it is possible to make different types of character modes that are expected to be displayed according to the stage of development of the reach effect, even though the same display mode of the operation support effect is executed. It is possible to realize a novel production.

In addition, in FIG. 226, the case where the operation support effect is set for the fluctuation pattern of the super reach has been described as an example, but if the execution timing of the operation support effect in the other fluctuation patterns is also briefly explained, it is completely out of order. In the fluctuation pattern of, the operation support effect is executed only 5 seconds before the fluctuation stops. That is, the operation support effect is executed only during the period in which the player pays attention to whether or not the reach effect is developed. Further, when the operation support effect is set for the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, the operation support effect is executed 5 seconds before the reach effect develops and 5 seconds before the fluctuation stop. That is, the operation support effect is executed during the period in which the player pays attention to whether or not it develops into the reach effect and the period in which the player pays attention to whether or not it develops into the super reach effect. Furthermore, when the operation support effect is set for the fluctuation pattern of the special reach, 5 seconds before the reach effect develops, 5 seconds before the super reach effect develops, and 5 seconds before the special reach effect develops. And 5 seconds before the fluctuation stop, the operation support effect is executed respectively.

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, when the operation support effect is set, the timing at which the third symbol may be stopped and displayed (the timing at which the reach effect with higher expectation may be developed). Every 5 seconds before, the operation support effect for 4 seconds is executed. In this operation support effect, each time the player presses the center button CB during the effect period of 4 seconds, the degree of expectation that a big hit will be notified at the end of the variation display and after the end of the operation support effect. The character mode of the character image 814 suggests the degree of expectation for the development of a reach effect with a higher degree of expectation. For this reason, players who want to more accurately predict whether or not they will be a big hit and whether or not they will develop by confirming as many suggestions as possible will be proactive during the 4-second production period. Can operate the center button CB. Therefore, since it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the operation support production, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In the eleventh embodiment, the selection rate of each character mode is changed according to the operation status (operation tendency) of the player. That is, it is possible to determine whether the player has a tendency to actively operate the center button CB during the execution of the operation support effect, and to make the selection rate of each character mode different according to the determination result. It is composed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the difference in the reliability of the degree of expectation suggested during the execution of the operation support effect between the player who actively presses and the player who presses relatively few times. It is possible to more appropriately provide the degree of expectation of the character aspect regardless of the tendency of the person to press.

In the eleventh embodiment, the timing at which the third symbol may be stopped and displayed (10 seconds after the start of fluctuation, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, and 90 seconds) is 5 seconds. The operation support effect has been executed for 4 seconds from before, but the execution timing of the operation support effect is not limited to this. For example, in the pachinko machine 10 of a type capable of executing an effect (so-called pseudo-continuous effect) of executing a pseudo-multiple times of variable display within the effect period of 1 variable display effect, the following The operation support effect may be executed from a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) before the timing at which the pseudo fluctuation can be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to expect the player to display different types of character modes for each number of pseudo-reams. That is, while the number of pseudo-reams is small (once or twice), it is possible to expect that a character mode with a high expectation of developing into the next pseudo-ream is displayed, while the number of pseudo-reams is high. After the number of characters has increased and the number has reached a stage where notification of whether or not a jackpot can be made, it can be expected that a character mode in which the expectation of a jackpot is high will be displayed. Therefore, since the game can be performed by paying attention to the character mode of the character image 814 displayed during the execution of the operation support effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the eleventh embodiment, when the operation support effect is set, the timing at which the third symbol may be stopped and displayed (10 seconds after the start of fluctuation, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, and 90). It was configured to execute the operation support effect every 5 seconds before (when the second elapses), but it is not always necessary to execute the operation support effect at each timing. It may be configured to decide whether or not to execute the cheering effect. In this case, the lottery probability may be varied depending on whether or not it is a big hit, whether or not it develops, and the like. With this configuration, it is possible to play the game while paying attention to whether or not the operation support effect is executed, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 227 to 232, a mini character notice effect that can be executed during the variable period of the variable display effect in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This mini character notice effect is an effect in which the character (mini character) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 performs a predetermined action (action), and in the normal state of the normal symbol, the V challenge small hit (FIG. 214 (a)). It is executed to suggest that (see (c)). That is, the effect that the mini character performs a maximum of three stages of actions during the variable period is executed, and the effect that the V challenge small hit is determined by executing up to the third stage action is executed.

First, with reference to FIGS. 227 (a) and 227 (b), the first stage action (first action) in the mini character notice effect will be described. When the first stage action in the mini character notice effect is started during the execution of the variable display, first, as shown in FIG. 227 (a), the character (mini character) MC imitating the robot is the third symbol display device 81. Appears in the lower center of the display screen. The mini character MC that appears below the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 then moves to the right in the front view and fades out of the display screen as it is, as shown in FIG. 227 (b).

Further, in the second stage action (second action) executed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the first stage action is completed and the mini character MC fades out of the screen, FIG. 228 (a) is shown. As shown in the above, the mini character MC fades in from the right side of the display screen to the display screen, and the action of jumping from the right side of the screen to the upper left direction is executed. In this second stage action, the mini character that jumped up to the upper left fades out to the upper part of the display screen as it is.

Further, in the third stage action (third action) executed after a predetermined period has elapsed from the end of the second stage action, as shown in FIG. 228 (b), the action is moved to the upper part of the display screen. The effect that the faded out mini character MC fades in from above to the display screen is executed together with an image (V challenge symbol) imitating a signboard displaying the characters "V challenge". By executing this third stage action and displaying the V challenge symbol, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the V challenge small hit has been won. In addition, this third stage action (third action) is executed, and the combination of symbols whose third symbol indicates a V challenge small hit (in the example of FIG. 228 (b), "3", "V", Stop display is displayed by the combination of "3").

Next, with reference to FIG. 229, a change over time in the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the mini character notice effect is executed will be described. FIG. 229 is a diagram showing changes over time in the display mode of the mini character MC starting from the start of the mini character advance notice effect when the mini character MC executes up to the third action in the mini character advance notice effect. As shown in FIG. 229, when the mini character notice effect is started, the mini character MC first appears at the lower center of the display screen and moves to the right (see FIGS. 227 (a) and 227 (b)). )I do. This first action continues for 5 seconds, and when 5 seconds have passed, the mini character MC fades out of the screen. The period in which the mini character MC fades out of the screen (mini character absent period) continues for 5 to 10 seconds. The length of the absentee period is determined by lottery according to the type of variation (the lottery result of the special symbol, the length of the variable period, etc.).

Further, as shown in FIG. 229, when the set mini character absence period elapses, the second action in which the mini character MC jumps from the right direction to the upper left direction of the display screen is executed. This second action continues for 3 seconds, and when 3 seconds have passed, the mini character MC fades out of the screen. The mini character absence period after the mini character fades out lasts for 4 to 9 seconds, and when the set mini character absence period elapses, the third action in which the mini character MC falls into the display screen together with the V challenge symbol is executed. .. By executing the third action, the winning of the V challenge small hit is confirmed, so that the player can expect that the advance notice effect will continue until the third action every time the mini character advance notice effect is started. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the eleventh embodiment, the execution timing of various actions (first to third actions) performed by the mini character MC is made different by changing the length of the mini character absence period. Further, in the variable display in which the mini character notice effect is set, when the variable display ends without developing to the third action, the timing of the variable stop is always set to be the mini character absent period. This makes it possible to prevent (suppress) the variable display from ending while the mini character MC is performing an action on the display screen. Therefore, it is possible to provide a more suitable display effect. In addition, by configuring the configuration to prevent the variable display from ending while the mini character MC is performing an action, it will develop into a reach production with higher expectations depending on the timing of the action start of the mini character MC. , It is possible to provide a playability that can be known in advance before the production related to the development is executed. That is, if the mini character MC starts the action immediately before (for example, 2 seconds before) the lapse of 10 seconds from the start of the change that may develop into a reach effect, the action of the mini character MC has passed 10 seconds after the start of the change. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is likely to be executed over time. Straddling 10 seconds means that the symbol will not be stopped and the variable display will not end after 10 seconds have passed, so it will develop into a reach effect when the action of the mini character MC occurs. Can be indirectly understood by the player. Therefore, not only the content of the action of the mini character MC itself, but also the situation of the variable display of the third symbol when the mini character MC starts the action can be paid attention to the game, so that the player's interest in the game can be enjoyed. Can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 230 to 231, the correspondence between the situation of the variable display of the third symbol and the situation of the action of the mini character MC will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, three types of execution periods of low expectation, medium expectation, and high expectation are set as the execution period of each action in the mini character notice effect. That is, the action itself of the mini character MC is set to be common, and the degree of expectation that the mini character MC will be a V challenge small hit is suggested by making only the period during which the mini character MC performs the action different. With such a configuration, the image data required for the mini character notice effect can be minimized, so that the storage capacity of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

First, with reference to FIG. 230 (a), the correspondence relationship between the action period of the mini character MC and the fluctuation period of the third symbol when the mini character notice effect is set for the fluctuation pattern of the long deviation will be described. do. As shown in FIG. 230 (a), when the mini character notice effect is set for the long deviation pattern, the first action is always started 5 seconds after the fluctuation starts, and when the deviation symbol is stopped. The first action is terminated. By making the configuration in which the first action can be executed in the fluctuation pattern of the long deviation, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the V challenge small hit will be obtained even in the fluctuation pattern of the long deviation.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 230 (b) to 231 the corresponding relationship between the fluctuation time and the action period of the mini character MC when the mini character notice effect is set for the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach will be described. FIG. 230 (a) is a diagram showing a case where a mini-character notice effect of a low expectation degree action timing is set for a fluctuation pattern of a normal reach deviation (including a normal small hit). As shown in FIG. 230 (b), when the mini character notice effect with a low expectation is set, the first action is executed 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. That is, as the execution period of the first action, the same execution period as the variation pattern of the long deviation is set. Therefore, at the stage when the first action is executed, the expectation of the player is not improved so much. Further, as shown in FIG. 230 (b), the second action is executed when 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. This second action continues for 3 seconds, as described above. When the second action is completed, the mini character is absent period until the out-of-order symbol stops (the variable period ends). This low expectation action timing is selected at a higher rate than the action timings of other expectations (medium expectation and high expectation) when the lottery result is different from the V challenge small hit. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who has confirmed the timing of the action recognize that the expectation of the V challenge is not so high, so that the expectation can be appropriately recognized.

Further, FIG. 230 (c) is a diagram showing a case where a mini character notice effect of action timing with a low expectation is set for a fluctuation pattern of a normal reach small hit (V challenge small hit). As shown in FIG. 230 (c), when the mini character notice effect of the action timing with a low expectation is set for the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach corresponding to the lottery result of the V challenge small hit, the first action and the second action are set. The action is executed in the same period as when the action is out of normal reach (see FIG. 230 (b)). That is, the first action is executed 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the second action is executed 20 seconds later. Then, as shown in FIG. 230 (c), when 27 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach small hit, the third action is executed and the winning of the V challenge small hit is notified. That is, the action timings of the mini character MCs are configured to be exactly the same until 27 seconds have elapsed after the start of the fluctuation. Therefore, it is difficult (impossible) to distinguish from the content of the action of the mini character MC whether it is a fluctuation pattern that is out of the normal reach or a fluctuation pattern of the normal reach small hit for which the mini character notice effect for low expectation is set. Therefore, when the V-challenge small hit is notified by the third action, it is possible to give greater joy and surprise to the player.

FIG. 231 (a) is a diagram showing a case where a mini-character notice effect of an action timing of a medium expectation degree is set for a fluctuation pattern of a normal reach deviation (including a normal small hit). As shown in FIG. 231 (a), when the mini character notice effect of the medium expectation degree is set, the first action is executed 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. That is, the first action is executed immediately after developing into a reach effect. This first action continues until 15 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation, and after 15 seconds, the mini character is absent. Then, as shown in FIG. 231 (a), the second action is executed when 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. The second action is executed until 23 seconds have passed since the start of the change, after which the mini character is set to the absence period until the end of the change.

FIG. 231 (b) is a diagram showing a case where the action timing of the medium expectation degree is set for the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach small hit (limited to the V challenge small hit). As shown in FIG. 231 (b), when the action timing of the medium expectation is set for the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach small hit, the first action and the second action are out of the normal reach (FIG. 231). It is executed in the same period as (a)). That is, the first action is executed 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the second action is executed 20 seconds later. Then, as shown in FIG. 231 (b), when 27 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach small hit, the third action is executed and the winning of the V challenge small hit is notified. That is, similarly to the action timing with a low expectation, at least the action timing of the mini character MC is configured to be exactly the same until 27 seconds have elapsed after the start of the fluctuation. Therefore, it is difficult (impossible) to distinguish from the content of the action of the mini character MC whether it is a fluctuation pattern that is out of the normal reach or a fluctuation pattern of the normal reach small hit for which the mini character notice effect for the medium expectation is set. Therefore, when the V-challenge small hit is notified by the third action, it is possible to give greater joy and surprise to the player.

In addition, when the action timing of medium expectation is set, the timing is clearly different from the case where the mini character notice effect is set for the long deviation variation pattern (see FIG. 230 (a)) (after developing into reach effect). Since the first action is executed at, the player can expect the variable display effect to have a higher degree of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

FIG. 231 (c) is a diagram showing a case where an action timing for high expectation is set for a fluctuation pattern of deviation from normal reach (including normal small hit). As shown in FIG. 231 (c), when the action timing for high expectation is set, the first action is started 8 seconds after the start of fluctuation. That is, the first action is started before the development of the reach effect and at a timing later than the timing of the first action for low expectation. As a result, it is possible to make the player realize that the action timing different from the first action for low expectation, which is relatively easy to occur in normal times, is set. Therefore, the expectation for the V-challenge small hit can be increased. Further, as described above, since the first action continues for 5 seconds, the first action is executed across the timing of developing the reach effect. Therefore, for the player who has confirmed by comparing the progress of the first action with the mode of the variation display of the third symbol, the end of the first action is more than the timing when it is determined whether or not the reach effect is generated. It can make you feel that the timing is likely to come later. Here, as described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the variable display does not end in the middle of the action of the mini character MC. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who understands this specification and plays the game know that the reach effect will occur before the time when the reach effect occurs. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a novel way of enjoying the game while comparing the progress of the variable display with the progress of the action of the mini character MC.

Further, as shown in FIG. 231 (c), the 7 seconds from the time when 13 seconds after the start of the fluctuation when the first action ends to the time when 20 seconds have passed after the start of the change is set as the mini character absence period. Then, the second action for 3 seconds is executed 20 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and thereafter, the mini character is absent until the end of the fluctuation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 231 (d), when the mini character notice effect of the action timing for high expectation is set for the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach small hit (V challenge small hit), the first action and the first action are performed. 2 Actions are executed in the same period as when the normal reach is off. That is, the action timings of the mini character MCs are configured to be exactly the same until 27 seconds have elapsed after the start of the fluctuation. Therefore, it is difficult (impossible) to distinguish from the content of the action of the mini character MC whether it is a fluctuation pattern that is out of the normal reach or a fluctuation pattern of the normal reach small hit for which the mini character notice effect for low expectation is set. Therefore, when the V-challenge small hit is notified by the third action, it is possible to give greater joy and surprise to the player.

The action timing for high expectation is relatively high in the case of a V challenge small hit in the special symbol lottery, and the ratio set in the case of a miss is extremely low, so the mini character MC It is possible to give a great expectation to the player who is judged to be an action for high expectation from the timing of the action of the V challenge to be a small hit. Therefore, it is possible to play the game by paying attention not only to the content of the action of the mini character MC but also to the timing when the action is started, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Although not shown, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds and the fluctuation pattern of the special reach with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds are also for low expectation, medium expectation, and high expectation. The action timing for is specified. In the case of super reach and special reach, it is basically the same as in the case of normal reach, and in the action timing with low expectation, the first action ends just before the final development timing in the reach production. It is configured. That is, if it is a fluctuation pattern of super reach, the first action is executed so that the first action ends immediately before the development of super reach (that is, 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation), and the fluctuation pattern of special reach is used. If so, the first action is executed so that the first action ends immediately before the development of the special reach (that is, 60 seconds after the start of the fluctuation). Further, in the action timing for medium expectation, the first action is configured to start immediately after the last development timing in the reach production, and in the action timing for high expectation, the last development in the reach production. It is configured so that the first action is executed across the timing.

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the mini character notice effect is executably configured as a kind of effect suggesting the execution of the V challenge. In this mini-character notice effect, the player is notified that the V-challenge is executed by completing all the first to third actions of the mini-character MC. In addition, the mini character notice production has multiple types (low expectation, medium expectation, and high expectation) with different expectations for the V challenge to be executed, and the action content of the mini character MC itself is the same. However, the timing at which the action is executed is configured differently for each expected degree. As a result, the image data itself used for displaying the action of the mini character MC can be shared, so that the character ROM 234 storage capacity of the display control device 114 can be reduced. Further, when the action timing for high expectation is set in the variable display in which the mini character notice effect is set, the first action is executed across the timing of developing the reach effect with higher expectation. Therefore, rather than the timing at which it is determined whether or not the player will develop a reach effect with higher expectations for the player who has confirmed by comparing the progress of the first action with the mode of the variable display of the third symbol. You can feel that the end timing of the first action is likely to be later. Here, as described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the variable display does not end in the middle of the action of the mini character MC. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who understands this specification and plays the game know that the production will develop before the timing when the production actually develops. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a novel way of enjoying the game while comparing the progress of the variable display with the progress of the action of the mini character MC.

Next, with reference to FIG. 232, the central route suggestion effect executed in the time saving state of the normal symbol in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This central route suggestion effect is basically likely to be distributed to the distribution rotating body 6755f when the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 (the game ball flows down the central route) (distribution). It is an effect suggesting a period (see FIG. 215) that makes it easier to distribute to the rotating body 6755f. As described above, the game ball that has reached the central distribution rotating body 6755f is any of the six entry ports (central V winning opening 6755fv1 to 6755fv3, central out port 6755fo1 to 6755fo3) provided in the distribution rotating body 6755f. (See Fig. 212). If the game ball enters any of the central V winning openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 among these six entrances, the most advantageous "big hit I14" is won. That is, since the number of rounds is large and the time saving state of the normal symbol is set again after the big hit, when the game ball enters the central V winning openings 6755fv1 to 6755fv3, the player feels great satisfaction. Can be embraced. On the other hand, as described above, when the ball enters the central out openings 6755fo1 to 6755fo3, no privilege is given to the player. Therefore, the period from the distribution of the game ball to the distribution rotating body 6755f to the distribution to any of the entrances is one of the periods in which the player has the highest expectation. Therefore, by configuring the configuration to suggest the timing at which the game ball is easily distributed to the distribution rotating body 6755 (easily flowing down the central route) by the central route suggestion effect, the game is played while the central route suggestion effect is being executed. It is possible to realize the playability that makes the player wish to have the ball enter the lottery device 6755. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

FIGS. 232 (a) and 232 (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the small hit is executed in the time saving state. FIG. 232 (a) shows an example of the display mode while the upper opening / closing door 6755bU is open (V impossible period or V winning rate 100% period), and FIG. 232 (a) shows the upper opening / closing door 6755bU. Shows an example of a display mode while the door is open (V impossible period or V winning rate 100% period). As shown in FIG. 232 (a), during the execution of the small hit game in the time saving state, the boy character 710 is displayed for the small area Ds2, and the character "right-handed!" Is displayed in the small area Ds3. , An image that imitates an arrow pointing to the right is displayed. With these display contents, it is easy for the player to know that the game ball can be entered into the small hit attacker 6755a by hitting the right while the small hit game is being executed, and the player can aim for the V prize. Can be understood. Further, in the main display area Dm, the stop symbol indicating a small hit continues to be displayed. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the small hit game is being executed. The display content of the small area Ds1 is the same as in the normal state. That is, since the reserved symbol is only displayed, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

FIG. 232 (b) shows an example of the display mode while the upper open door 6755bU is closed (V winning rate 50% period). As shown in FIG. 232 (b), the appearance of the boy character 710 displayed in the small area Ds2 is changed to emit light (wearing an aura). By changing the display mode of the small area Ds2, the game ball is distributed to the central route by entering the lottery device 6755 (the situation is that the most advantageous jackpot I14 is won at a ratio of 1/2). It can be easily recognized. Therefore, in the case of a small hit in the short time state, whether or not the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 while the boy character 710 is in the display mode of wearing an aura (light emitting). Since the game can be played with more attention, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, there is a possibility that the central route suggestion effect is executed even during the period when the route is not distributed to the central route. Specifically, even in the case of any of the small hits H14 to J14 (that is, the small hit type that becomes a 10-round time-saving big hit when a V prize occurs), the predetermined ratio is also in the V prize rate 100% period. (For example, the ratio of 40%) is configured to execute the central route suggestion effect. As a result, the game ball is guided to the right V winning opening 6755bV even though the game ball is entered into the lottery device 6755 while the central route suggestion effect is occurring, and the time is shortened after the big hit. It is possible to realize an unusual behavior (behavior of being distributed to the distribution rotating body 6755f) of continuing to the state. Therefore, since it is possible to give a great surprise and joy to the player, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Here, as described above, the central route suggestion effect is an effect that is executed in synchronization with the V winning rate 50% period or the V winning rate 100% period set within 1 second after the start of the small hit. The production time is 0.2 seconds (see FIG. 215). Therefore, even if the game ball is fired after visually recognizing that the central route suggestion effect has occurred, it is impossible (difficult) to reach the lottery device 6755 until the effect is completed. .. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the anomalous game method aiming at allowing the game ball to enter the lottery device 6755 while the central route suggestion effect is occurring in the time-saving state of the normal symbol. It is possible to prevent an unexpected disadvantage from being given to the patient. In addition, even if the game ball is fired after visually recognizing the central route suggestion effect, it has already been fired by making it impossible for the game ball to enter the lottery device 6755 during the execution period of the effect. At the timing when the game ball enters the lottery device 6755, it is possible to realize the game property that the central route suggestion effect is expected to occur. That is, it is possible to pay attention not only to the flow path of the game ball that has entered the lottery device 6755 but also to the production status at the time of entering the lottery device 6755. In other words, it is possible to realize a novel game property that allows the player to grasp the flow path of the game ball in advance by comparing the occurrence state of the central route suggestion effect with the entry timing of the game ball to the lottery device 6755. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, when a small hit is won in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the V winning rate is 50% period (the period during which the game ball is easily guided to the distribution rotating body 6755f). Is configured to execute a central route suggestion effect for suggesting to the player. With this configuration, not only the flow path until the game ball enters the inside of the lottery device 6755 until the game ball enters one of the entrances, but also the game ball is a lottery device. It is possible to pay attention to the production situation when entering the 6755 and play the game. That is, the timing at which the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 is compared with the situation of the central route suggestion effect executed in the small area Ds2, and the game ball flows down the central route (the game ball flows down to the distribution rotating body 6755f). It is possible to realize a novel playability that causes the player to predict the degree of expectation (which can be distributed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. From this behavior, in the central route suggestion effect, when a V prize is generated by a game ball that has entered the lottery device 6755 during the effect, the time saving state after the big hit is determined (the situation where the effect is not generated). It can be said that it is easier to set the time saving state than when the V prize is generated by the game ball entered in.

In the eleventh embodiment, the configuration is such that the ball entry timing, which is likely to be distributed to the central route by the central route suggestion effect, is notified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of types may be provided in the display mode of the central route suggestion effect, and the degree of expectation distributed to the central route may be different depending on the display mode. With this configuration, it is possible to play the game by paying attention not only to the period during which the central route suggestion effect is being executed but also to the display mode of the central route suggestion effect. Can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the central route suggestion effect is executed in synchronization with the V winning rate 50% period or the V winning rate 100% period, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the execution timing of the central route suggestion effect is set in consideration of the time lag between entering the lottery device 6755 and reaching the upper opening / closing door 6755bU (lower opening / closing door 6755bD). , The period from 0.1 seconds before the start of the period to 0.1 seconds before the end of the period is set as the execution period). With this configuration, even though the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 while the central route suggestion effect is being executed, the distribution rotating body 6755f (or the right V winning opening 6755bV) is reached. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the situation in which the game ball does not flow down, causing the player to feel dissatisfied, or making it difficult to understand the meaning of the central route suggestion effect.

<Electrical configuration of the eleventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 233 (a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 233 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222 according to the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 233 (a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the eleventh embodiment is a character aspect with respect to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the tenth embodiment (and the eighth embodiment) (see FIG. 195 (a)). The difference is that the selection table 222fa, the mini character effect selection table 222fb, and the small hit effect selection table 222fc are added.

The character mode selection table 222fa determines the character mode of the character image 814 displayed when the player presses (operates) the center button CB during the operation support effect (see FIG. 224 (b)). It is a data table in which the data of is specified. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 234 and 235, but this character mode selection table 222fa shows a lottery result of a special symbol and a player when the center button CB is operated during the execution of the operation support effect. Is referred to in order to select a character mode according to the operation status of the center button CB (see S40609 in FIG. 245).

The mini character effect selection table 222fb is a data table in which data for determining the timing of an action executed by the mini character MC in the mini character advance notice effect (see FIGS. 227 and 228) is specified. The details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 236 and 237, but this mini character effect selection table 222fb is referred to when setting the execution of the variation display based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the mini character notice is given. It is referred to for determining the presence / absence of the effect and the degree of expectation (timing of the action of the mini character MC) suggested by the advance notice effect (see S41307 in FIG. 254).

The small hit time effect selection table 222fc defines data for determining whether or not to execute the central route suggestion effect (see FIG. 232 (b)) and the execution timing when a small hit occurs in the time saving state of the normal symbol. It is a data table that has been created. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 238, but the small hit effect selection table 222fc is used at the start of the small hit (when a small hit type command indicating the small hit type is received from the main controller 110). With reference to this, the presence / absence of execution of the central route suggestion effect and the execution timing are determined according to the small hit type (see S41004 and S41005 in FIG. 250).

Next, the details of the character mode selection table 222fa will be described with reference to FIGS. 234 and 235. As described above, the character mode selection table 222fa is the character of the character image 814 displayed when the player presses (operates) the center button CB during the operation support effect (see FIG. 224 (b)). A data table referenced to determine aspects.

FIG. 234 (a) is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the character mode selection table 222fa. As shown in FIG. 234 (a), the character mode selection table 222fa is in the process of executing the variation display (variation effect) corresponding to the jackpot, and is an operation executed before the final development timing in the reach effect. From the hit (before completion of development) table 222fa1 referenced to select the character mode in the cheering production and the variable display (variable production) corresponding to the jackpot being executed and from the final development timing in the reach production. The hit (after the development is completed) table 222fa2, which is referred to for selecting the character mode in the operation support effect that was executed later, and the variable display (variable effect) corresponding to the deviation are being executed, and the reach effect is performed. In the operation support effect executed before the last development timing in, the table 222fa3 for deviation (before the development is completed), which is referred to for selecting the character mode, and the variation display (variation effect) corresponding to the deviation are being executed. It is also composed of a hit (after development completion) table 222fa4 referred to for selecting a character mode in an operation support effect executed after the final development timing in the reach effect.

First, the details of the winning table 222fa1 (before the completion of development) will be described with reference to FIG. 234 (b). FIG. 234 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the hit table 222fa1 (before the completion of development). As shown in FIG. 234 (b), for each range of values of the effect lottery counter 223ea, the winning (before completion of development) table 222fa1 has six types of character modes that can be set in the character image 814 in the operation support effect. Each is specified in association with each other. Further, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in a different range depending on the operation status of the player (the participation status for the operation support effect). When a player with a low operation frequency is playing a game (when the average number of operations of each operation support effect in the previous variation display in which the operation support effect is set is 5 times or less), FIG. 234 (b). ) Refers to the regulation content corresponding to "low operation frequency", and when a player with a medium operation frequency is playing a game (operation of each operation support effect in the previous variable display in which the operation support effect is set) When the average number of times is 6 times or more and 9 times or less), the provisions corresponding to "during operation frequency" in FIG. 234 (b) are referred to, and the player with high operation frequency is playing the game. In the case (when the average number of operations of each operation support effect in the previous variation display in which the operation support effect is set is 10 times or more), the provision content corresponding to the "frequent operation" in FIG. 234 (b). Is referenced.

As shown in FIG. 234 (b), "white" is associated with the range of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 199" as a character mode as a regulation content corresponding to a player who operates less frequently. (222fa1a in FIG. 234 (b)). Since the production lottery counter 223ea can take 1000 values of "0 to 999", the center button CB is pressed in the operation support production performed before the final development in the fluctuation production corresponding to the jackpot is completed. When operated by the player, the character image 814 of white characters is displayed at a rate of 20% (200/1000).

Further, as shown in FIG. 234 (b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in association with "blue" as the character mode with respect to the range of "200 to 449" (FIG. 234 (b)). 222fa1b). Therefore, in the operation support effect executed before the end of the final development in the variable effect corresponding to the jackpot, when the player operates the center button CB, the blue character is 25% (250/1000). Character image 814 is displayed. Further, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in association with "green" as the character mode with respect to the range of "450 to 479" (222fa1c in FIG. 234 (b)). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the final development in the variable effect corresponding to the jackpot is completed, the green character is 3% (30/1000). Character image 814 is displayed. Further, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in association with "red" as the character mode with respect to the range of "480 to 499" (222fa1d in FIG. 234 (b)). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the final development in the variable effect corresponding to the jackpot is completed, the red characters are displayed at a rate of 2% (20/1000). Character image 814 is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 234 (b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in association with the range of "500 to 949" with "stripe (black)" as the character mode (FIG. 234). 222fa1e of (b). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the final development in the variable effect corresponding to the jackpot is completed, the black color is 45% (450/1000). A character image 814 with a striped pattern is displayed. Further, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in association with "stripe (red)" as the character mode with respect to the range of "950 to 999" (222fa1f in FIG. 234 (b)). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the final development in the variable effect corresponding to the jackpot is completed, the red color is 5% (50/1000). A character image 814 with a striped pattern is displayed.

In this way, in the operation support effect executed before the final development in the variable effect corresponding to the jackpot is completed, the operation frequency is low (the average number of operations in one operation support effect is 5 times or less). When a person operates the center button CB, the character mode of the black or red stripe pattern, which has a high expectation of development, is set at a rate of 1/2. In addition, although the details will be described later, the character modes (green characters and red characters) of the type with a high expectation of hitting are set at a higher ratio than in the case of deviation. Therefore, when a character mode (black stripe pattern or red stripe pattern) with high expectation for development is selected, it is possible to expect the player to develop a reach production with higher expectation. .. In addition, when a character mode (green character or red character) of a type that has a high expectation of winning is selected, it is possible to increase the expectation of becoming a big hit. The red stripe pattern is configured so that it cannot be displayed in the operation support effect executed after the final development in the reach effect is completed. That is, when the character image 814 with the red stripe pattern is displayed, it is confirmed that the production will be developed with a higher degree of expectation than the current stage of the reach production.

On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is "0 to 579" as a rule content corresponding to a player with a medium operation frequency (the average number of operations in one operation support effect is 6 times or more and 9 times or less). “White” is associated with the range as a character mode (222fa1a in FIG. 234 (b)). Therefore, in the operation support effect executed before the end of the final development in the variable effect corresponding to the jackpot, when the player operates the center button CB, the white characters are displayed at a rate of 58% (580/1000). The character image 814 is displayed. Further, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in association with "blue" as the character mode with respect to the range of "580 to 779" (222fa1b in FIG. 234 (b)). Therefore, in the operation support effect executed before the end of the final development in the variable effect corresponding to the jackpot, when the player operates the center button CB, the blue character is 20% (200/1000). Character image 814 is displayed. Further, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in association with "green" as the character mode with respect to the range of "780 to 791" (222fa1c in FIG. 234 (b)). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the final development in the variable effect corresponding to the jackpot, the rate is 1.2% (12/1000). The character image 814 of green characters is displayed. Further, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in association with "red" as the character mode with respect to the range of "792 to 799" (222fa1d in FIG. 234 (b)). Therefore, in the operation support effect executed before the end of the final development in the variable effect corresponding to the jackpot, when the player operates the center button CB, the rate is 0.8% (8/1000). The character image 814 in red characters is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 234 (b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in association with the range of "800 to 979" with "stripe (black)" as the character mode (FIG. 234). 222fa1e of (b). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the final development in the variable effect corresponding to the jackpot is completed, the black color is 18% (180/1000). A character image 814 with a striped pattern is displayed. Further, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in association with "stripe (red)" as the character mode with respect to the range of "980 to 999" (222fa1f in FIG. 234 (b)). Therefore, in the operation support effect executed before the end of the final development in the variable effect corresponding to the jackpot, when the player operates the center button CB, the red color is 2% (20/1000). A character image 814 with a striped pattern is displayed.

In this way, when the operation frequency is medium (the average number of operations is 6 or more and 9 or less), the expectation of a big hit is compared with the case where the operation frequency is low (the average number of operations is 5 or less). The selection ratio of character modes with high degree (green characters, red characters) and character modes with high expectations for development (black stripe pattern and red stripe pattern) is low. With this configuration, even if players who have different tendencies in the number of operations play the game, compared to the case where the selection ratio of each character mode is common regardless of the tendency of operations, one operation support effect is produced. It is possible to reduce the difference in the number of times that the character mode with high expectation of big hit and development is displayed. Therefore, the effect can be preferably set regardless of the tendency of the operation.

On the other hand, as a rule content corresponding to a player who frequently operates (the average number of operations in one operation support effect is 10 times or more), characters are used for the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 799". As an embodiment, "white" is defined in association with each other (222fa1a in FIG. 234 (b)). Therefore, in the operation support effect executed before the end of the final development in the variable effect corresponding to the jackpot, when the player operates the center button CB, the rate of white characters is 80% (800/1000). The character image 814 is displayed. Further, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in association with "blue" as the character mode with respect to the range of "800 to 889" (222fa1b in FIG. 234 (b)). Therefore, in the operation support effect executed before the end of the final development in the variable effect corresponding to the jackpot, when the player operates the center button CB, the blue character is 19% (190/1000). Character image 814 is displayed. Further, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in association with "green" as the character mode with respect to the range of "890 to 895" (222fa1c in FIG. 234 (b)). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the final development in the variable effect corresponding to the jackpot, the rate is 10.6% (6/1000). The character image 814 of green characters is displayed. Further, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in association with "red" as the character mode with respect to the range of "896 to 899" (222fa1d in FIG. 234 (b)). Therefore, in the operation support effect executed before the end of the final development in the variable effect corresponding to the jackpot, when the player operates the center button CB, the rate is 0.4% (4/1000). The character image 814 in red characters is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 234 (b), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in association with the range of "900 to 989" with "stripe (black)" as the character mode (FIG. 234). 222fa1e of (b). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the final development in the variable effect corresponding to the jackpot is completed, the black color is 9% (90/1000). A character image 814 with a striped pattern is displayed. Further, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in association with "stripe (red)" as the character mode with respect to the range of "990 to 999" (222fa1f in FIG. 234 (b)). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the final development in the variable effect corresponding to the jackpot is completed, the red color is 1% (10/1000). A character image 814 with a striped pattern is displayed.

In this way, when the operation frequency is high (the average number of operations is 10 or more), the operation frequency is low (the average number of operations is 5 or less) or medium (the average number of operations is 6 or more, 9). Compared to the case of (less than once), the selection ratio of the character mode with high expectation of big hit (green character, red character) and the character mode with high expectation for development (black stripe pattern or red stripe pattern) It is even lower. With this configuration, even if players who have different tendencies in the number of operations play the game, compared to the case where the selection ratio of each character mode is common regardless of the tendency of operations, one operation support effect is produced. It is possible to reduce the difference in the number of times that the character mode with high expectation of big hit and development is displayed. Therefore, the effect can be preferably set regardless of the tendency of the operation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 234 (c), the details of the above-mentioned hit (after completion of development) table 222fa2 will be described. As described above, the hit (after the development is completed) table 222fa2 is in the process of executing the variation display (variation effect) corresponding to the jackpot, and the operation support effect executed after the final development timing in the reach effect. It is a data table referred to when the character mode is selected in.

As shown in FIG. 234 (c), as a rule content corresponding to a player who operates infrequently, "white" is associated with the range of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 99" as the character mode. It is defined (see 222fa2a in FIG. 234 (c)), and "blue" is associated with the range of "100 to 199" as a character mode (see 222fa2b in FIG. 234 (c)), and "200 to 699". "Green" is associated with the range of "" (see 222fa2c in FIG. 234 (c)), and "red" is associated with the range of "700 to 949". (See 222fa2d in FIG. 234 (c)), "stripe (black)" is specified as a character aspect in association with the range of "950 to 999" (see 222fa2e in FIG. 234 (c)). ). Further, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is not associated with "stripe (red)" (see 222fa2f in FIG. 234 (c)). Therefore, even if the center button CB is pressed, the red stripe pattern is not set.

In this way, the operation support effect executed after the final development in the reach effect is completed has a higher expectation of a big hit than the operation support effect executed before the final development is completed. The selection ratio of the character mode indicating the above increases (the selection ratio of green characters increases from 22% to 50%, and the selection ratio of red characters increases from 2% to 25%). Therefore, by displaying the character mode indicating that the expectation of the jackpot is high, it is possible to make it more strongly expected that the jackpot will be notified at the current development stage. On the other hand, after the final development in the reach production is completed, the selection ratio of the character pattern indicating that the degree of expectation of development is high is greatly reduced (the selection ratio of the black stripe pattern is 45% → 5%, red). The selection ratio of the stripe pattern is reduced from 5% to 0%), so it is highly likely that the lottery result will be notified at the current development stage so that the character mode indicating that the degree of expectation for development is high is not displayed. It is possible to make the player recognize that. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 234 (c), as a regulation content corresponding to a player with a medium operation frequency, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is "white" as a character mode with respect to the range of "0 to 399". (See 222fa2a in FIG. 234 (c)), and “blue” is associated with the range of “400 to 679” as a character mode (see 222fa2b in FIG. 234 (c)). "Green" is defined as a character mode in association with the range of "680 to 879" (see 222fa2c in FIG. 234 (c)), and "red" is defined as a character mode for the range of "880 to 979". "Stripes (black)" are defined as the character mode in association with the range of "980 to 999", which are defined in association with each other (see 222fa2d in FIG. 234 (c)). Further, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is not associated with "stripe (red)" (the red stripe pattern is not set even if the center button CB is pressed).

That is, even when a player with a medium operation frequency is playing a game, the operation support effect executed after the final development in the reach effect is completed is executed before the final development is completed. Compared to the operation support effect, the selection ratio of the character mode indicating that the expectation of the big hit is high increases (the selection ratio of green characters is 1.2% → 20%, the selection ratio of red characters is 0.8). % → Increases from 10%), and the selection ratio of the character pattern indicating that the degree of expectation of development is high is greatly reduced (the selection ratio of the black stripe pattern is 18% → 2%, the selection of the red stripe pattern is selected. The ratio drops from 2% to 0%). It is possible to make the player aware that there is a high possibility that the lottery result of the special symbol will be notified at the current development stage by making it difficult for the character mode indicating that the degree of expectation for development is high to appear. In addition, it is possible to improve the expectation for a big hit at the current stage of development by making it easier to generate a character mode indicating that the expectation of a big hit is high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 234 (c), as a regulation content corresponding to a player who frequently operates, "white" corresponds to the character mode for the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 699". It is specified by attaching (see 222fa2a in FIG. 234 (c)), and "blue" is associated with the range of "700 to 839" as a character mode (see 222fa2b in FIG. 234 (c)), and "840". "Green" is associated with the range of "939" as the character aspect (see 222fa2c in FIG. 234 (c)), and "red" is associated with the range of "940-989" as the character aspect. (See 222fa2d in FIG. 234 (c)), "stripe (black)" is defined as a character mode in association with the range of "990 to 999". Further, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is not associated with "stripe (red)" (the red stripe pattern is not set even if the center button CB is pressed).

That is, even when a player with a high frequency of operation is playing a game, in the operation support effect executed after the final development in the reach effect is completed, the operation is executed before the final development is completed. Compared to the cheering production, the selection ratio of the character mode indicating that the expectation of the big hit is high increases (the selection ratio of green characters is 1.2% → 20%, the selection ratio of red characters is 0.8% → (Increases to 10%), the selection ratio of the character pattern indicating that the degree of expectation for development is high is greatly reduced (the selection ratio of the black stripe pattern is 18% → 2%, and the selection ratio of the red stripe pattern is high). It decreases from 2% to 0%). It is possible to make the player aware that there is a high possibility that the lottery result of the special symbol will be notified at the current development stage by making it difficult for the character mode indicating that the degree of expectation for development is high to appear. In addition, it is possible to improve the expectation for a big hit at the current stage of development by making it easier to generate a character mode indicating that the expectation of a big hit is high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 235 (a), the details of the above-mentioned disengagement (before completion of development) table 222fa3 will be described. As described above, this disengagement (before completion of development) table 222fa3 is in the process of executing the variation display (variation effect) corresponding to the disengagement, and the operation support executed before the final development timing in the reach effect. It is a data table referred to when the character mode is selected in the production.

As shown in FIG. 235 (a), as a rule content corresponding to a player who operates infrequently, "white" is associated with the range of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 99" as the character mode. It is defined (see 222fa3a in FIG. 235 (a)), and "blue" is associated with the range of "100 to 479" as a character mode (see 222fa3b in FIG. 235 (a)), and "480 to 494". "Green" is associated with the range of "" (see 222fa3c in FIG. 235 (a)), and "red" is associated with the range of "495 to 499". (See 222fa3d in FIG. 235 (a)), "stripe (black)" is defined as a character aspect in association with the range of "500 to 949" (see 222fa3e in FIG. 235 (a)), and "950". "Stripes (red)" are defined in association with the range of "~ 999" as a character mode (see 222fa3f in FIG. 235 (a)).

In this way, in the variable effect corresponding to the deviation, if the operation support effect is executed before the final development is completed, the hit (before the development is completed) table 222fa1 (see FIG. 234 (b)) is referred to. The selection ratio of the character mode indicating that the expectation of the jackpot is high is lower than in the case of (green character selection ratio is 3% → 1.5%, red character selection ratio is 2% → 0.5%). Decreases to). On the other hand, the selection ratio of the character mode indicating that the degree of expectation for development is high is the same as the case where the hit (before completion of development) table 222fa1 (see FIG. 235 (b)) is referred to. Before the final development is completed, the selection ratio of each character mode should be almost the same by making the selection ratio of the character mode indicating that the expectation of development is high in both the big hit and the miss. Can be done. Therefore, regardless of whether it is a hit or a miss, until the final development is completed, it becomes difficult to select a character mode that indicates that the expectation of winning is high, and as a result, it is a big hit until the final development is completed. You can continue to hold your expectations for it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 235 (a), as a regulation content corresponding to a player with a medium operation frequency, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is "white" as a character mode with respect to the range of "0 to 599". (See 222fa3a in FIG. 235 (a)), and “blue” is associated with the range of “600 to 791” as a character mode (see 222fa3b in FIG. 235 (a)). "Green" is defined as a character mode in association with the range of "792 to 797" (see 222fa3c in FIG. 235 (a)), and "red" is defined as a character mode for the range of "798,799". It is defined in association with each other (see 222fa3d in FIG. 235 (a)), and "stripe (black)" is associated with the range of "800 to 979" as a character aspect (see 222fa3e in FIG. 235 (a)). ), "Stripes (red)" are defined as the character mode in association with the range of "980 to 999" (see 222fa3f in FIG. 235 (a)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 235 (a), as a regulation content corresponding to a player who frequently operates, "white" corresponds to the character mode for the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 799". It is specified by attaching (see 222fa3a in FIG. 235 (a)), and "blue" is associated with the range of "800 to 895" as a character mode (see 222fa3b in FIG. 235 (a)), and "896". "Green" is associated with the range of "~ 898" as a character aspect (see 222fa3c in FIG. 235 (a)), and "red" is associated with "899" as a character aspect (see FIG. 235 (a)). (See 222fa3d in FIG. 235 (a)), “stripes (black)” are defined as a character mode in association with the range of “900 to 989” (see 222fa3e in FIG. 235 (a)), “990 to 999”. "Stripes (red)" are defined in association with the range of "" (see 222fa3f in FIG. 235 (a)).

In this way, even in the off-table (before the completion of development) 222fa3, the more frequently the player plays the game, the higher the expectation of the jackpot is, and the higher the expectation of development. The selection rate of the character mode indicating is low. As a result, the number of appearances of each character mode in the operation support effect of 1 is greatly different, and it is possible to prevent the degree of expectation from changing according to the game method. Therefore, a more suitable production mode can be realized.

Next, with reference to FIG. 235 (b), the details of the above-mentioned disengagement (after completion of development) table 222fa4 will be described. As described above, the disengagement (after the development is completed) table 222fa4 is in the process of executing the variation display (variation effect) corresponding to the disengagement, and the operation support effect executed after the final development timing in the reach effect. It is a data table referred to when the character mode is selected in.

As shown in FIG. 235 (b), as a regulation content corresponding to a player who operates infrequently, "white" is associated with the range of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 254" as the character mode. It is defined (see 222fa4a in FIG. 235 (b)), and "blue" is associated with the range of "255 to 754" as a character mode (see 222fa4b in FIG. 235 (b)), and "755 to 944". "Green" is associated with the range of "" (see 222fa4c in FIG. 235 (b)), and "red" is associated with the range of "945 to 949". (See 222fa4d in FIG. 235 (b)), and "stripe (black)" is specified as a character aspect in association with the range of "950 to 999" (see 222fa4e in FIG. 235 (a)). On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is not associated with the character mode of "stripe (red)" (see 222f4f in FIG. 235 (b)).

In this way, in the variable effect corresponding to the deviation, when the operation support effect is executed after the final development is completed, the hit (after the development is completed) table 222fa2 (see FIG. 234 (c)) is referred to. The selection ratio of the character mode indicating that the expectation of the jackpot is high is lower than in the case (the selection ratio of the green character is reduced from 50% to 19%, and the selection ratio of the red character is reduced from 25% to 0.5%. ). On the other hand, the selection ratio of the character mode indicating that the degree of expectation for development is high is the same as when the hit table 222fa2 (see FIG. 234 (c)) is referred to, and the black stripe. The character mode of the pattern is selected at a rate of 5%, and the character mode of the red striped pattern is not selected. That is, character modes with high expectations for development are rarely selected. After the final development is completed, the effect is achieved by setting the selection ratio of the character mode, which indicates that the expectation of development is high in both big hits and misses, to a common low probability (5% ratio). It is possible to make the player aware that the above development will not occur (that is, the lottery result of the special symbol will be notified at the current development stage). Therefore, it is possible to pay more attention to the combination of the third symbols that are stopped and displayed so that the game can be played.

Further, as shown in FIG. 235 (b), as a regulation content corresponding to a player with a medium operation frequency, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is "white" as a character mode with respect to the range of "0 to 699". (See 222fa4a in FIG. 235 (b)), and “blue” is associated with the range of “700 to 899” as a character mode (see 222fa4b in FIG. 235 (b)). "Green" is defined as a character mode in association with the range of "900 to 977" (see 222fa4c in FIG. 235 (b)), and "red" is defined as a character mode for the range of "978,979". It is defined in association with each other (see 222fa4d in FIG. 235 (b)), and "stripe (black)" is associated with the range of "980 to 999" as a character mode (see FIG. 235 (b)). See 222fa4e). On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is not associated with the character mode of "stripe (red)" (see 222fa4f in FIG. 235 (b)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 235 (b), as a regulation content corresponding to a player who frequently operates, "white" corresponds to the character mode for the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 849". It is specified by attaching (see 222fa4a in FIG. 235 (b)), and "blue" is associated with the range of "850 to 949" as a character mode (see 222fa4b in FIG. 235 (b)), and "950". "Green" is associated with the range of "to 988" as a character aspect (see 222fa4c in FIG. 235 (b)), and "red" is associated with "989" as a character aspect (see FIG. 235 (b)). (See 222fa4d in FIG. 235 (b)), “stripes (black)” are defined as the character mode in association with the range of “990 to 999” (see 222fa4e in FIG. 235 (b)). On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is not associated with the character mode of "stripe (red)" (see 222fa4f in FIG. 235 (b)).

Therefore, even in the off-table (after the completion of development) 222fa4, it is shown that the more frequently the player plays the game, the higher the expectation of the jackpot is, and the higher the expectation of development is. The selection rate of the character mode is low. As a result, the number of appearances of each character mode in the operation support effect of 1 is greatly different, and it is possible to prevent the degree of expectation from changing according to the game method. Therefore, a more suitable production mode can be realized.

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the operation support effect is configured to be executed a plurality of times for the same variable effect (variable display), and the timing at which the operation support effect is executed (all developments are completed). The selection ratio of the character mode displayed when the player presses the center button CB is configured to be variable depending on whether it is before or after the operation. More specifically, in the operation support production performed before all the development is completed, the character mode (black stripe pattern or red stripe) that raises the expectation of development is high regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol. While the ratio set in the pattern) is high, the ratio set in the character mode in which the expectation of a big hit is high is extremely low. As a result, in the operation support effect that is executed before the final development is completed, there is almost no difference in the displayed character mode regardless of whether it is a big hit or a miss, so at least the final development is completed. Until then, it is possible to have the player play the game without losing the expectation for the big hit. In addition, although the selection rate of the character mode in which the expectation of a big hit is high is low, the expectation of a big hit increases when selected, so that the character mode in which the expectation of a big hit increases in each operation support production. Can be pressed by pressing the center button CB in the expectation that is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the operation support production. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the number of times the player presses the center button CB in the operation support effect is counted, and the average number of operations in one operation support effect is calculated. Then, the selection ratio of each character mode for each pressing of the center button CB is made different according to the average number of operations. That is, when a player who presses less frequently is playing a game, the selection ratio of the character mode indicating that the expectation of the jackpot is high and the character mode indicating that the expectation of development is high is increased. , When a player who frequently presses the game is playing a game, the selection ratio of the character mode indicating that the expectation of the jackpot is high and the character mode indicating that the expectation of development is high is set to be low. .. With this configuration, the number of display times of the character mode indicating that the expectation is high in the operation support effect can be made equal regardless of the tendency of the player's operation, so that a more suitable effect can be realized. be able to.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned mini character effect selection table 222fb will be described with reference to FIGS. 236 and 237. FIG. 236 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the mini character effect selection table 222fb. As shown in FIG. 236 (a), the mini character effect selection table 222fb is used for the V challenge small hit, which is referred to for determining whether or not the mini character advance notice effect can be executed and the action timing in the variable display corresponding to the V challenge small hit. Table 222fb1 and the normal small hit table 222fb2 referred to for determining whether or not the mini character notice effect can be executed and the action timing in the variable display corresponding to the normal small hit, and the variable display corresponding to the lottery result other than the small hit. It is composed of at least three data tables, that is, a non-small hit table 222fb3 that is referred to for determining whether or not the mini character notice effect can be executed and the action timing.

First, the details of the V-challenge small hit table 222fb1 will be described with reference to FIG. 236 (b). As described above, the V-challenge small hit table 222fb1 is a data table in which data for determining whether or not the mini character advance notice effect can be executed and the action timing in the variable display corresponding to the V-challenge small hit are specified. As shown in FIG. 236 (b), the V-challenge small hit table 222fb1 is defined in association with the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea and the effect mode of the mini character notice effect for each variation type.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 236 (b), for the fluctuation type (variation pattern) of the normal reach, there is no mini character notice production for the value of the production lottery counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 99". It is defined in association with each other (see 222fb1a in FIG. 236 (b)), and a mini character notice effect with a low expectation (see FIG. 230 (c)) is associated with the range of "100 to 399" (see FIG. 236). (See 222fb1b in FIG. 236), a mini character notice effect with a medium expectation (see FIG. 231 (b)) is defined in association with the range of “400 to 699” (see 222fb1c in FIG. 236 (b)). A high-expected mini-character notice effect (see FIG. 231 (d)) is defined in association with the range of “700 to 999” (see 222fb1d in FIG. 236 (b)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 236 (b), for the fluctuation type (variation pattern) of the super reach and the special reach, the mini character notice effect is produced for the range where the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is "0 to 99". None is specified in association with (see 222fb1e in FIG. 236 (b)), and a mini character notice effect with a low expectation (see FIG. 230 (c)) is specified in association with the range of “100 to 149” (see FIG. 230 (c)). (Refer to 222fb1f in FIG. 236 (b)), a mini character notice effect with a medium expectation degree (see FIG. 231 (b)) is defined in association with the range of “150 to 649” (see 222fb1g in FIG. 236 (b)). ), A mini character notice effect with a high expectation (see FIG. 231 (d)) is defined in association with the range of “650 to 999” (see 222fb1h in FIG. 236 (b)).

That is, the variable type that develops into a reach with a higher degree of expectation is configured so that the mini character notice effect with a higher degree of expectation is more likely to be selected. In particular, by increasing the selection ratio of the high-expectation mini-character notice production in the high-expectation reach production, there is a possibility that the high-expectation action timing will be set at the development stage with higher expectation. Can be high. As described above, when the first action with high expectation is set, the mini character MC performs the first action across the timing of developing into the reach production with higher expectation. Then, each action of the mini character MC is configured so as not to be terminated in the middle (that is, the action is set so that the fluctuation time does not elapse in the middle of the action of the mini character MC). Therefore, it is possible to make the player who understands the specification and plays the game know that the reach production with high expectation will be developed before the development. However, even if the first action with high expectations is executed at the development stage with relatively low expectations and the development can be detected, the lottery result of the special symbol can be notified at the development stage with low expectations. Since the nature is high, it is not possible to raise the expectation for the V challenge small hit so much. Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, the variable type having a high degree of expectation has a configuration in which the rate of execution of the action with a high degree of expectation is increased. As a result, it is possible to let the player know in advance that the reach production will be developed to the development stage with a high expectation, and the production will be further developed with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 237 (a), the details of the above-mentioned normal small hit table 222fb2 will be described. FIG. 237 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal small hit table 222fb2. As described above, the normal small hit table 222fb2 is a data table in which data for determining whether or not the mini character advance notice effect can be executed and the action timing in the variable display corresponding to the normal small hit are specified.

As shown in FIG. 237 (a), for the fluctuation type (variation pattern) of the normal reach, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in association with the range of "0 to 499" without the mini character notice effect. (Refer to 222fb2a in FIG. 237 (a)), a mini character notice effect with a low expectation (see FIG. 230 (b)) is defined in association with the range of “500 to 899” (222fb2b in FIG. 237 (a)). (See), a mini-character notice effect of medium expectation (see FIG. 231 (a)) is defined in association with the range of "900 to 989" (see 222fb2c in FIG. 237 (a)), and "990 to 999". A high-expected mini-character notice effect (see FIG. 231 (c)) is defined in association with the range of (see 222fb2d in FIG. 237 (a)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 237 (a), for the fluctuation type (variation pattern) of the super reach and the special reach, the mini character notice effect is produced for the range where the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is "0 to 99". None is specified in association with (see 222fb2e in FIG. 237 (a)), and a mini character notice effect with a low expectation (see FIG. 230 (b)) is specified in association with the range of “100 to 799” (see FIG. 230 (b)). (See 222fb2f in FIG. 237 (a)), a mini character notice effect with a medium expectation degree (see FIG. 231 (a)) is defined in association with the range of “800 to 949” (see 222fb2g in FIG. 237 (a)). ), A mini character notice effect with a high expectation (see FIG. 231 (c)) is defined in association with the range of “950 to 999” (see 222fb2h in FIG. 237 (a)).

Therefore, when it becomes a normal small hit and the variation type of the normal reach is selected, the execution rate of the mini character notice effect is lower (90% → 50%) than in the case of the V challenge small hit, and further, it is executed. Even if it is, the mini character notice production with low expectation is almost decided. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the V-challenge small hit when the mini-character notice effect of the medium expectation degree or the high expectation degree is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach. In addition, when the variable type of super reach or special reach is selected as a normal small hit, the execution rate of the mini character notice effect itself becomes the same, but the selection rate of the mini character notice effect with medium expectation and high expectation. Will be low. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the V-challenge small hit when the mini-character notice effect of medium expectation or high expectation is executed.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned non-small hit table 222fb3 will be described with reference to FIG. 237 (b). FIG. 237 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the non-small hit table 222fb3. As described above, the non-small hit table 222fb3 is a data table in which data for determining whether or not the mini character notice effect can be executed and the action timing in the variable display corresponding to the lottery result other than the small hit are specified. ..

As shown in FIG. 237 (b), for the variation type (variation pattern) of the long deviation, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is specified in the range of "0 to 949" in association with no mini character notice effect. (See 222fb3a in FIG. 237 (b)), and a mini character notice effect with a low expectation (see FIG. 230 (b)) is associated with the range of "950 to 999" (see FIG. 237 (b)). ) 222fb3b).

Further, as shown in FIG. 237 (b), for the fluctuation type (variation pattern) of the normal reach, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is associated with the range of "0 to 599" without the mini character notice effect. It is defined (see 222fb3c in FIG. 237 (b)), and a mini character notice effect with a low expectation (see FIG. 230 (b)) is associated with the range of "600 to 949" (see FIG. 237 (b)). (Refer to 222fb3d), a mini-character notice effect of medium expectation (see FIG. 231 (a)) is defined in association with the range of “950 to 998” (see 222fb3e in FIG. 237 (b)), “999”. A high-expected mini-character notice effect (see FIG. 231 (c)) is defined in association with the above (see 222fb3f in FIG. 237 (b)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 237 (b), for the fluctuation type (variation pattern) of the super reach and the special reach, the mini character notice effect is produced for the range where the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is "0 to 399". None is specified in association with (see 222fb3g in FIG. 237 (b)), and a mini character notice effect with a low expectation (see FIG. 230 (b)) is specified in association with the range of “400 to 899” (see FIG. 230 (b)). (See 222fb3h in FIG. 237 (b)), a mini-character notice effect with a medium expectation degree (see FIG. 231 (a)) is defined in association with the range of “900 to 979” (see 222fb3i in FIG. 237 (b)). ), A mini character notice effect with a high expectation (see FIG. 231 (c)) is defined in association with the range of “980 to 999” (see 222fb3j in FIG. 237 (b)).

Therefore, when the lottery result is other than the small hit, the execution rate of the mini character notice effect is lower than in the case of the normal small hit, and the ratio of selecting the mini character notice effect for medium expectation and high expectation is also. It will be lower. As a result, when the mini character notice effect is executed, there is a high possibility that the lottery result is at least a small hit (V challenge small hit or normal small hit), so the mini character notice effect is executed. Thereby, the player's expectation for the small hit game can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, only in the case of the V challenge small hit, the third action (see FIG. 228 (b)) is executed by the mini character notice effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the third action is configured to be executed even with a normal small hit, and as the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a display mode in which only the small hit is confirmed (for example, the character "small hit" is displayed. The action that the mini character MC falls together with the symbol) may be set. With this configuration, when the mini character MC executes up to the third action, it is possible to realize the playability of predicting whether the mini character MC is a V-challenge small hit or a normal small hit from the content of the action. That is, similarly to the selection effect (see FIG. 216) in the tenth embodiment described above, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the small hit type is predicted and the firing direction is switched according to the prediction result. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 238, the details of the above-mentioned small hit effect selection table 222fc will be described. FIG. 238 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the small hit effect selection table 222fc. As shown in FIG. 238, when the small hit effect selection table 222fc becomes any of the small hits H14 to J14 in the time saving state of the normal symbol, whether or not the central route suggestion effect (see FIG. 232 (b)) can be executed. , And the table 222fc1 for small hits H14 to J14 for selecting the execution timing, and the small hit K14 to M14 in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the central route suggestion effect (see FIG. 232 (b)). It is composed of a table 222fc2 for small hits K14 to M14 for selecting whether or not to execute and the execution timing.

First, the details of the small hit H14 to J14 tables 222fc1 will be described with reference to FIG. 238 (b). FIG. 238 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the tables 222fc1 for small hits H14 to J14. As shown in FIG. 238 (b), in the table 222fc1 for small hits H14 to J14, the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is defined in association with each execution timing of the central route suggestion effect.

As shown in FIG. 238 (b), for the range where the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is "0 to 599", the "V winning rate 50% period" is associated with the execution timing of the central route suggestion effect. It is specified (see 222fc1a in FIG. 238 (b)). Since the production lottery counter 223ea can take 1000 values of "0 to 999", when any of the small hits H14 to J14 is obtained, the V winning rate is 50% for the period (that is, to the lottery device 6755). The ratio (probability) that the central route suggestion effect is executed only during the period during which the entered game ball is easily distributed to the distribution rotating body 6755f is 60% (600/1000).

Further, as shown in FIG. 238 (b), "V winning rate 100% period" is associated with the execution timing of the central route suggestion effect for the range where the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is "600 to 749". (See 222fc1b in FIG. 238 (b)). Therefore, in the case of any of the small hits H14 to J14, during the period of 100% V winning rate (that is, the period during which the game ball that has entered the lottery device 6755 is easily distributed to the right V winning opening 6755bV). Only the rate (probability) that the central route suggestion effect is executed is 15% (150/1000). That is, when the small hits H14 to J14 are won, the central route suggestion effect that suggests the timing at which the game ball is likely to flow down to the distribution rotating body 6755f (it becomes easy to flow down the central route) is displayed in the center. It is configured so that it can be executed even when the route cannot flow down. This is because when the small hits are H14 to J14, both when the ball enters the central V winning opening 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 and when the ball enters the right V winning opening 6755bV, it becomes a time-saving big hit. In other words, even though the ball entered the lottery device 6755 during the execution of the central route suggestion effect, it deviates from the basic effect rule that the game ball is distributed to the distribution rotating body 6755f, and the expectation that the time is shortened. When the game ball enters the right V winning opening 6755bV, which is low (only 39% of the time is shortened), on the contrary, the time saving state after the big hit is confirmed, which is a novel behavior. Can be done. Therefore, when the game ball that has entered the lottery device 6755 during the execution of the central route suggestion effect enters the right V winning opening 6755bV (that is, the behavior that deviates from the basic effect rule of the central route suggestion effect). When it occurs), it is possible to be convinced that the player is given a time saving state, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 238 (b), for the range of the effect lottery counter 223ea of "750 to 799", the execution timing of the central route suggestion effect is "both periods" (V winning rate 50% period). , And both periods of the V winning rate 100% period) are defined in association with each other (see 222fc1c in FIG. 238 (b)). Therefore, in the case of any of the small hits H14 to J14, the ratio (probability) that the central route suggestion effect is executed in both the V winning rate 50% period and the V winning rate 100% period is 5%. (50/1000). By performing the central route suggestion effect in both periods, it is possible to make the player think that the chance of becoming a shorter time than usual is increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 238 (b), "non-execution" is defined in association with the range in which the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is "800 to 999". Therefore, when any of the small hits H14 to J14 is obtained, the ratio (probability) that the central route suggestion effect is not executed is 20% (200/1000). Even if a small hit is won, the central route suggestion effect is not executed, so that even if the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 while the central route suggestion effect is not executed, the ball is shaken. The configuration can be such that a game ball may flow down to the minute rotating body 6755f, or the ball may enter the right V winning opening 6755bV to give a time saving state. Therefore, even when the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 when the central route suggestion effect is not executed, the time saving state can be expected, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 238 (c), the details of the above-mentioned small hit K14 to M14 tables 222fc2 will be described. FIG. 238 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the small hit K14 to M14 tables 222fc2. As shown in FIG. 238 (c), in the table 222fc2 for small hits K14 to M14, for the range where the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is "0 to 949", the execution timing of the central route suggestion effect is "V". The winning rate of 50% period ”is defined in association with each other (see 222fc2a in FIG. 238 (c)). Since the production lottery counter 223ea can take 1000 values of "0 to 999", when any of the small hits K14 to M14 is obtained, the V winning rate is 50% for a period (that is, to the lottery device 6755). The ratio (probability) that the central route suggestion effect is executed only during the period during which the entered game ball is easily distributed to the distribution rotating body 6755f is 95% (950/1000).

As shown in FIG. 238 (c), "non-execution" is defined in association with the range in which the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is "950 to 999". Therefore, when any of the small hits K14 to M14 is obtained, the ratio (probability) that the central route suggestion effect is not executed is 5% (50/1000). Even if a small hit is won, the central route suggestion effect is not executed, so that even if the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 while the central route suggestion effect is not executed, the ball is shaken. The configuration can be such that a game ball may flow down to the minute rotating body 6755f, or the ball may enter the right V winning opening 6755bV to give a time saving state. Therefore, even when the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 when the central route suggestion effect is not executed, the time saving state can be expected, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. ..

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the central route suggestion effect is synchronized with the V winning rate 50% period or the V winning rate 100% period in the type of small hit that becomes a time-saving big hit due to the occurrence of V winning. Was configured to execute. With this configuration, if a game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the execution of the central route suggestion effect, it will be distributed to the distribution rotating body 6755f and will be a 16-round time-saving jackpot at a rate of 1/2. Or, since the ball enters the right V winning opening 6755bV and becomes a short-time jackpot, it is possible to play the game with a strong expectation that the game ball will enter the lottery device 6755 during the execution of the central route suggestion effect. .. Therefore, the game property of predicting whether or not the time is shortened by comparing the entry timing of the game ball with respect to the lottery device 6755 and the execution status of the central route suggestion effect (display mode of the third symbol display device 81). Since it can be realized, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 233 (b), the details of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 233 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 according to the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 233 (b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eleventh embodiment has the effect timing storage area 223fa and the operation valid period flag with respect to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 196). 223fb, support effect flag 223fc, development completion flag 223fd, press count counter 223fe, operation frequency flag 223ff, mini character flag 223fg, action timing storage area 223fh, action counter 223fi, and flag 223fj during the limited period. , Is different from the counter 223fk during the time limit in that is added.

The effect timing storage area 223fa temporarily stores data indicating the execution timing of the central route suggestion effect determined at the start of the small hit in the time saving state of the normal symbol, at least until the central route suggestion effect is actually started. It is a storage area for storing. This effect timing storage area 223fa indicates that the central route suggestion effect is not executed when, for example, a 1-byte storage area is allocated and "00H" is stored as data, and "01H" is stored. In the case of, it is shown that the central route suggestion effect is executed only in the V winning rate 50% period, and when "02H" is stored, the central route suggestion effect is executed only in the V winning rate 100% period. It is shown that when "03H" is stored, the central route suggestion effect is executed in both the V winning rate 50% period and the V winning rate 100% period. The initial value of this effect timing storage area 223fa is set to "00H", and at the start of a small hit (when a small hit type command is received), the effect timing according to the small hit type is selected for the small hit effect. Based on the determination from the table 222fc, the data corresponding to the determined effect timing is stored (see S41006 in FIG. 250). Also, it is reset to "00H" at the end of the small hit.

The operation valid period flag 223fb is a flag indicating whether or not the operation valid period of the center button CB is in progress. If the flag 223fb is on during the operation valid period, it means that the operation is in the valid period. That is, when the player presses the center button CB, the character mode is drawn by using the character mode selection table 222fa, and the character image 814 of the character mode determined by the lottery is displayed. The initial value of the operation valid period flag 223fb is set to off, and is set to on at the start of the execution period of each operation support effect in the variable effect (variable display) in which the operation support effect is set (Fig.). See S40405 of 243). Further, it is set to off at the end timing of the operation support effect (see S40408 in FIG. 243).

The support effect flag 223fc is a flag indicating whether or not the variable effect (variable display) in which the operation support effect is set is being executed, and if it is on, the variable effect in which the operation support effect is set is being executed. Indicates that. This support effect flag 223fc is set to on when a variable display effect accompanied by an operation support effect is determined (see S4211 in FIG. 252). It is also set to off when the fluctuation stops.

The development completion flag 223fd is a flag indicating whether or not the final stage of development in the variable display has been completed. That is, if it is a fluctuation pattern of normal reach, it indicates whether or not it has developed to normal reach, if it is a fluctuation pattern of super reach, it indicates whether or not it has developed to super reach, and if it is a fluctuation pattern of special reach. , Indicates whether or not it has developed to special reach. If this development completion flag 223fd is on, it means that the development to the final stage in the variable display has been completed, and if it is off, it means that the development to the final stage in the variable display has not been completed. do. The initial value of the development completion flag 223fd is set to off, and is set to on at the timing when the final stage development in each variation effect is performed (see S40504 and S40508 in FIG. 244). It is also set to off when the fluctuation stops. When the center button CB is pressed during the execution of the operation support effect, the development completion flag 223fd is referred to to determine whether or not the development is completed, and it is defined in the character mode selection table 222fa according to the determination result. The data table of any one of the four data tables is determined as a table for selecting the character mode (see S40604, S40605, S40607, S40608 in FIG. 245).

The press count counter 223fe is a counter that counts the number of presses of the center button CB in the variable display effect of 1 for which the operation support effect is set. The initial value of the press count counter 223fe is set to 0, and the value is incremented by 1 each time the center button CB is pressed (presses are detected) during the operation valid period of the operation support effect. It is updated (see S40601 in FIG. 245). The value of the press count counter 223fe is held until the next execution of the variable display effect in which the operation support effect is set is set, and based on the held counter value, the tendency of the previous player's operation (1). The value is reset to 0 after determining (the average number of operations in the operation support effect of FIG. 253) (see S41209 in FIG. 253). The tendency of the player's operation determined based on the press count counter 223fe is set as a state (any of "00H" to "02H") of the operation frequency flag 223ff, which will be described later. When the character mode is determined based on the operation of the player with respect to the center button CB in the operation support effect, the data table corresponding to the player's operation frequency indicated by the state of the operation frequency flag 223ff is selected from the character mode selection table 222fa. Then, the character mode is determined using the selected table (see S40609 in FIG. 245).

The operation frequency flag 223ff is a flag in which data indicating the tendency (operation frequency) of the player's operation is set. This operation frequency flag 223ff is composed of 1 byte, and if it is "00H", it means that a player with a high operation frequency is playing a game, and if it is "01H", it is a game with a medium operation frequency. It indicates that a player is playing a game, and if it is "02H", it means that a player with a low operation frequency is playing a game. The initial setting of this operation frequency flag 223ff is set to "00H", and the tendency of the player to press (average) determined based on the press count counter 223fe at the start of the variation display in which the operation support effect is set. The state is set according to the number of operations of (see S41205, S41207, S41208 in FIG. 253).

The mini character flag 223fg is a flag indicating whether or not the variable display effect in which the mini character advance notice effect is set is being executed, and if it is on, it indicates that the variable display in which the mini character advance notice effect is set is being executed. On the other hand, if it is off, it indicates that the mini character notice effect is not set. This mini character flag 223fg is set to ON when the execution of the mini character notice effect is determined by lottery using the mini character effect selection table 222fb (see FIG. 236 (a)) at the start of the variable display effect (FIG. 254). S41309). In addition, it is set to off at the end of the variable display in which the mini character notice effect is set.

The action timing storage area 223fh is a storage area for storing data indicating the execution timing of each action in the mini character notice effect. In this action timing storage area 223fh, when the execution of the mini character advance notice effect is decided based on the mini character effect selection table 222fb (see FIG. 236 (a)), the type (expectation degree) of the determined mini character advance notice effect is set. Data indicating the corresponding execution timing is stored (see S41310 in FIG. 254). During the execution of the variable display effect in which the mini character notice effect is set, the execution timing of each action is determined based on the data stored in the action timing storage area 223fh, and the execution of each action is set (Fig.). See S40705 of 246).

The action counter 223fi is a counter in which a value indicating the stage of the action of the mini character notice effect is set. The action counter 223fi adds 1 to the value each time the action stage advances by one stage in the mini character notice effect (see S40704 in FIG. 246). When it is the start timing of a new action in the mini character notice effect, the action corresponding to the counter value of the action counter 223fi is set (see S40705 in FIG. 246).

The limited period flag 223fj is a flag indicating whether or not the non-effect button limiting period (the period from 1 second before the start of the operation valid period to 1 second after the end) is on, and if it is on. It indicates that it is a non-effect button restriction period, while if it is off, it indicates that it is not a non-effect button restriction period. During this limited period, the flag 223fj is set to turn on at the timing one second before each operation support effect (operation valid period) starts in the variable display in which the operation support effect is set (see S40905 in FIG. 248). ), It is set to off at the timing when 1 second has elapsed after the end of the operation support effect (see S40903 in FIG. 248). While the flag 223fj is on during this restriction period, even if the non-effect button is operated, the change of the setting corresponding to the operated button is restricted. As a result, if the player who tries to operate the center button CB accidentally presses the non-directing button during the execution of the operation support effect, various settings are changed against the player's intention. In addition to being able to suppress this, it is possible to make the player recognize an operation error (the type of the button to be pressed is incorrect) because the effect mode corresponding to the operation is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably execute the operation support effect. Here, the reason why the setting change based on the operation for the non-effect button is restricted not only during the operation valid period but also for 1 second before and after the operation valid period is that the operation valid period is started. Even if a player who detects and starts the button operation before the operation valid period starts, or a player who continues the operation without noticing that the operation valid period has expired, makes an erroneous operation. This is to correspond. As a result, it is possible to further reduce the possibility that the setting change is made against the intention of the player.

The counter 223fk during the limited period is a counter for counting the number of times the non-effect button is pressed (operated) in the non-effect button limited period of 1. In the eleventh embodiment, the setting corresponding to the type of the pressed button is not changed unless the non-effect button is operated twice or more during the non-effect button restriction period. That is, when the value of the counter 223fk is 1 or less during this limited period, the setting change of the light amount or the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is avoided (restricted). With this configuration, the player who tried to participate in the operation support effect by pressing the center button CB during the operation valid period and the period of 1 second before and after that is in the vicinity of the center button CB (predetermined distance). It is possible to prevent the setting of the pachinko machine 10 from being changed against the player's will when the non-directing button arranged in the range within the range) is accidentally pressed. Therefore, since the player can be more concentrated on the operation support effect, a suitable effect mode can be realized.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 239 and 240, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. First, the small hit start processing 14 (S271) in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 239. The small hit start process 14 (S271) is a process executed in place of the small hit start process (see FIG. 199) in the tenth embodiment, and is the same as the small hit start process (see FIG. 199) in the tenth embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for setting the start of a small hit when a small hit is obtained by a lottery of a special symbol.

Of the small hit start processes 14 (see FIG. 239) in the eleventh embodiment, each process of S1501 to S1503 is the same as each process of S1501 to S1503 of the small hit start process (see FIG. 199) in the tenth embodiment. The same process is executed. Further, in the small hit start processing 14 (see FIG. 239) in the eleventh embodiment, when the processing of S1503 is completed, the small hit type command indicating the type of the small hit to be started this time is set, and this processing is ended. The small hit type command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process 13 (see FIG. 201) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the small hit type command in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to execute the central route suggestion effect and the execution timing according to the small hit type notified by the command.

Next, the small hit control process 14 (S1081) in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 240. The small hit control process 14 (S1081) is a process executed in place of the small hit control process 13 (see FIG. 203) in the tenth embodiment, and the small hit control process 13 (see FIG. 203) in the tenth embodiment. ), It is a process for executing various controls during the small hit game.

Of the small hit control processes 14 (see FIG. 240) in the eleventh embodiment, in each of the processes S1301 to S1304, S1310, S1311, and S1321 to S1326, the small hit control process 13 (FIG. 203) in the tenth embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S1301 to S1304, S1310, S1311, and S1321 to S1326 of (see) is executed.

Further, in the small hit control process 14 (see FIG. 240) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined that the small hit medium flag 203ea is on in the process of S1304 (S1304: Yes), then the lottery device 6755. When it is determined whether or not it is the operation timing of each of the actuating members (attacker for small hit 6755a, upper opening / closing door 6755bU, lower opening / closing door 6755bD) (S1331), and it is determined that it is the operating timing of any of the actuating members. (S1331: Yes) sets an operation content command indicating the type of operating member to be operated and the movable position (operation content) (S1332), and ends this process. The operation content command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1001) of the main process 13 (see FIG. 201) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the operation content command in the state where the execution of the central route suggestion effect is determined, the voice lamp control device 113 compares the operation content with the execution timing of the determined central route suggestion effect, and compares the operation content with the execution timing of the determined central route suggestion effect. Determines whether or not to start.

By executing this small hit control process 14 (see FIG. 240), the operation timing of each operating member can be accurately grasped, so that the closing timing of the upper opening / closing door 6755bU (start timing of the V winning rate 50% period) ) And the opening timing of the lower opening / closing door 6755bD (the start timing of the V winning rate 100% period), and the central route suggestion effect can be executed.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 241 to 255, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. First, the main process 14 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 241. The main process 14 is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 34) in the tenth embodiment (and the first embodiment).

Of the main processes 14 (see FIG. 241) in the eleventh embodiment, in each of the processes S4101 to S4110 and S4114 to S4118, the main processes (see FIG. 34) in the tenth embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. The same processes as those of S4101 to S4110 and S4114 to S4118 are executed. Further, in the main process 14 (see FIG. 241) in the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S4110 is completed, the effect is replaced with the effect update process (see FIG. 35) in the tenth embodiment (and the first embodiment). The update process 14 is executed (S4191). The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 242, but the effect update process 14 is a process for updating the effect modes of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment.

Further, in the main process 14 (see FIG. 241) in the eleventh embodiment, after the effect update process 14 (S4191) is completed, the operation for the non-effect button (button for changing the setting of the volume and the light amount) (? Pressing) is monitored, and when an operation is detected, various setting button input monitoring processes for changing the setting according to the type of the button on which the operation is performed are executed (S4192). Details of the various setting button input monitoring processes (S4192) will be described later with reference to FIG. 243.

Further, when the various setting button input monitoring processes (S4192) are completed, the command determination process 14 is executed (S4193) instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 36) in the tenth embodiment (and the first embodiment). ), Then, instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38) in the tenth embodiment (and the first embodiment), the variable display setting process 14 is executed (S4194), and the process shifts to S4114. The details of the variable display setting process 14 will be described later with reference to FIG. 252.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned effect update process 14 (S4191) will be described with reference to FIG. 242. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the effect update process 14 (S4191). As described above, the effect update process 14 is a process for updating the effect modes of various effects. As shown in FIG. 242, when the effect update process 14 (S4191) is executed, the operation support effect process for updating the effect mode in the variable display in which the operation support effect is set is executed (S4031), and then the operation support effect process is executed (S4031). The mini-character setting process for updating the effect mode in the variable display in which the mini-character notice effect is set is executed (S40302), and this process ends. Details of these operation support effect processing (S4031) and mini character setting processing (S40320) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 243 to 245 and 246, respectively.

Next, with reference to FIG. 243, the details of the above-mentioned operation support effect processing (S4031) will be described. FIG. 243 is a flowchart showing the operation support effect processing. As described above, this operation support effect process (S40301) is a process for updating the effect mode in the variable display in which the operation support effect is set.

When the operation support effect process (see FIG. 243) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the support effect flag 223fc is on (S40401), and if it is determined to be off (S40401), the operation support effect is performed. Since the variable display for which is set is not being executed, this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S40401, when it is determined that the support effect flag 223fc is on (S40401: Yes), then the development determination process for determining the development status of the variable effect being executed is executed (S40402). .. The details of this development determination process (S40402) will be described later with reference to FIG. 244. When the processing of S40402 is completed, next, it is determined whether or not the flag 223fb during the operation valid period is on (S40403), and when it is determined that the flag 223fb during the operation valid period is not on (off). (S40403: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the operation valid period (S40404). In the process of S40404, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the operation valid period (that is, the start timing of the operation support effect) (S40404: Yes), the flag 223fb during the operation valid period is set to ON (S40405), and the operation is performed. The start of the cheering effect (see FIG. 224) is set (S40406), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S40404, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the operation valid period (start timing of the operation support effect) (S40404: No), each process of S40405 and S40406 is skipped and the present process is terminated as it is. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S40403, when it is determined that the flag 223fb during the operation valid period is on (that is, during the execution period of the operation support effect) (S40403: Yes), the end timing of the operation valid period (S40403: Yes) That is, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the operation support effect (S40407). In the process of S40407, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the operation valid period (S40407: Yes), the flag 223fb during the operation valid period is set to off (S40408), and the end of the operation support effect is set (S40409). ), End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S40407, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the operation valid period (S40407: No), it is determined whether or not the press (operation) for the center button CB is detected (S40410), and the center button CB is determined. When it is determined that the pressing of the character is detected (S40410: Yes), the character mode of the character image 814 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to whether the special symbol is correct or not and the operation status of the player. The character mode setting process is executed (S40411), and this process is terminated. The details of this character mode setting process (S40411) will be described later with reference to FIG. 245. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S40410 that the pressing of the center button CB is not detected (S40410: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the details of the development determination process (S40402) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 244. As described above, this development determination process (S40402) is a process for determining the development status of the variable effect being executed. When this development determination process (S40402) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the development completion flag 223fd is on (S40501), and if it is determined that the development completion flag 223fd is on (S40501: Yes). ), Since the stage of reach production does not develop any more in the variable production currently being executed, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S40501, when it is determined that the development completion flag 223fd is off (S40501: No), then the timing at which reach occurs (develops into a normal reach effect) (that is, 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation) It is determined whether or not it is (timing) (S40502), and if it is determined that it is the timing of reach occurrence (S40502: Yes), then the variable type being executed is the normal reach variation type (variation pattern). Whether or not it is determined (S40503). When it is determined in the processing of S40503 that it is the fluctuation type (variation pattern) of the normal reach (S40503), it means that the development to the normal reach is the last development in the fluctuation display, so the development completion flag 223fd is turned on. After setting (S40504), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S40503 that it is not a variable type of normal reach (S40503: No), it is determined that the development to normal reach is not the last development (development to super reach or special reach remains). Since it means, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S40502, if it is determined that it is not the timing at which reach occurs (develops to normal reach effect) (S40502: No), then the timing to develop into super reach effect (that is, the start of fluctuation). If it is determined whether or not it is the timing when 30 seconds have passed (S40505), and if it is determined that it is the timing to develop into the super reach effect (S40505: Yes), the variation type currently being executed is the variation of the super reach. It is determined whether or not it is a type (S40506). In the process of S40506, when it is determined that it is a variation type of super reach, it means that the development to super reach is the last development in the variation display, so the development completion flag 223fd is set to ON (S40508). ), End this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S40505 that it is not a variable type of super reach (S40505: No), it means that the development to super reach is not the last development (development to special reach remains). Therefore, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S40505 that it is not the development timing for the super reach effect (S40505: No), then the development timing for the special reach effect (that is, the timing when 60 seconds have elapsed after the start of the fluctuation). (S40507), and if it is determined that it is time to develop into a special reach effect (S40507: Yes), the development completion flag 223fd is set to ON (S40508), and this process is terminated. do. On the other hand, in the process of S40507, if it is determined that it is not the timing to develop into the special reach (S40507: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

By executing this development determination process, the development completion flag 223fd can be suitably updated according to the development status of the reach effect. Therefore, in the operation support effect, the character mode can be preferably set by using the development status indicated by the development completion flag 223fd.

Next, with reference to FIG. 245, the details of the character mode setting process (S40411) described above will be described. As described above, this character mode setting process (S40411) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the center button CB is pressed in the operation support effect, depending on whether the special symbol is correct or not and the operation status of the player. This is a process for determining the character mode of the character image 814 to be generated.

When the character mode setting process (S40411) is executed, first, 1 is added to the value of the press count counter 223fe to update (S40601), and then it is determined whether or not the development completion flag 223fd is on. (S40602). In the process of S40602, if it is determined that the development completion flag 223fd is off (S40602: No), then it is determined whether the variation display corresponding to the jackpot is being executed (S40603), and the jackpot is dealt with. When it is determined that the variable display is being executed (S40603: Yes), the character mode is determined (lottery) in the character mode selection table 222fa hit (before the completion of development) table 222fa1 (see FIG. 234 (b)). It is read out as a data table for the purpose (S40604), and the process is transferred to S40609. On the other hand, in the process of S40603, when it is determined that the variation display corresponding to the jackpot is not being executed (that is, the variation display corresponding to the deviation is being executed) (S40603: No), the character mode selection table 222fa The out-of-order (before completion of development) table 222fa3 (see FIG. 235 (a)) is read out as a data table for determining (lottery) the character mode (S40604), and the process shifts to S40609.

On the other hand, in the process of S40602, when it is determined that the development completion flag 223fd is on (S40602: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the variation display corresponding to the jackpot is being executed (S40606). When it is determined that the variable display corresponding to the jackpot is being executed (S40606: Yes), the character mode is changed to the hit (after development completion) table 222fa2 (see FIG. 234 (c)) of the character mode selection table 222fa. Read as a data table for determination (lottery) (S40607, process shifts to S40609. On the other hand, in S40606 processing, the variation display corresponding to the jackpot is not being executed (that is, the variation display corresponding to the deviation). When it is determined (S40606No), the data for determining (lottery) the character mode of the table 222fa4 (see FIG. 235 (c)) for the off (after the completion of development) of the character mode selection table 222fa. It is read out as a table (S40608), and the process is transferred to S40609.

In the processing of S40609 executed after each processing of S40604, S40605, S40607, and S40608 is completed, the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea and the operation frequency flag 223ff are changed from the data table read in the immediately preceding processing. The character mode is specified according to the corresponding operation frequency (S40609), the display of the dialogue (character image 814) of the specified character mode is set (S40610), and the present process is terminated.

By executing this character mode setting process (see FIG. 245) each time the center button CB is pressed while the operation support effect is being executed, the lottery result of the special symbol, the development status of the variable display, and the game An appropriate character mode can be set according to the operation frequency of the person.

Next, with reference to FIG. 246, the details of the above-mentioned mini character setting process (S40302) will be described. As described above, this mini character setting process (S40302) is a process for updating the effect mode in the variable display in which the mini character notice effect is set. When this mini character setting process (S40302) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the mini character flag 223fg is on (S40701), and when it is determined that the mini character flag 223fg is not on (off) (. S40701: No), which means that the variable display in which the mini character notice effect is set is not being executed, and there is no possibility of updating the effect mode related to the mini character notice effect, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S40701, when it is determined that the mini character flag 223fg is on (S40701: Yes), the data in the action timing storage area 223fh is read (S40702), and the action timing specified based on the read data is read. It is determined whether or not the result is (S40703). More specifically, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation (value of the fluctuation time counter 223f) matches the action timing corresponding to the data read in the process of S40702.

If it is determined in the process of S40703 that it is not the start timing of the action of the mini character MC (S40703), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S40703, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new action of the mini character MC (S40703: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the action counter 223fi to update (S40704), and the action after the addition is performed. A display action command indicating an action corresponding to the value of the counter 223fi is set (S40705), and this process is terminated.

The display action command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed in the command output process (S4102) of the main process 14 (see FIG. 241) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving this display action command, the display control device 114 executes display control so that the mini character MC executes the action corresponding to the command.

By executing this mini character setting process (see FIG. 246), each action can be accurately started at each action timing of the mini character notice effect determined at the start of the variable display. Therefore, it is possible to accurately suggest the degree of expectation of a V-challenge small hit in each mini-character notice production.

Next, with reference to FIG. 247, the details of the various button input monitoring processes (S4192) described above will be described. As described above, the various button input monitoring processes (S4192) are one of the main processes 14 (see FIG. 241), and are operations for non-directing buttons (buttons for changing the volume and light intensity settings). This is a process for monitoring (pressing) and changing the setting according to the type of the button on which the operation is performed when the operation is detected.

In the various setting button input monitoring processes (see FIG. 247), first, the pressing (operation) of any of the non-directing buttons (either the upper button UB, the lower button DB, the right button RB, or the left button LB) was detected. If it is determined whether or not (S40801) and it is determined that the press (operation) for the non-effect button is not detected (S40801: No), then whether or not the support effect flag 223fc is turned on is determined. Distinguish (S40802). If it is determined in the process of S40802 that the support effect flag 223fc is on (S40802: Yes), it means that the variation display in which the operation support effect is set is being executed. The limited period setting process for setting the non-effect button limited period according to the time is executed (S40803), and this process is terminated. The details of this limited period setting process (S40803) will be described later with reference to FIG. 248. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S40802 that the support effect flag 223fc is not on (off) (S40802: No), it means that the variable display in which the operation support effect is set is not being executed. , Non-effect button Since there is no possibility of setting and ending the restriction period, this process ends as it is.

Further, in the process of S40801, when it is determined that the press on any of the non-effect buttons is detected (S40801: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the flag 223fj is on during the restriction period (S40804). ), If it is determined that the flag 223fj is off during the restriction period (S40804: No), the process shifts to S40808. On the other hand, in the process of S40801, when it is determined that the flag 223fj is on during the limited period (S40804: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the counter 223fk during the limited period to update (S40805). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 223fk during the updated limited period becomes 2 (that is, whether the player presses the non-directing button twice or more during the non-directing button limiting period). (S40806), if it is determined that the updated counter value is not 2 (that is, 1) (S40806: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S40806, when it is determined that the value of the counter 223fk during the restricted period after the update is 2 (that is, the non-effect button is pressed twice or more during the non-effect button restriction period). (S40806: Yes), the value of the counter 223fk is reset to 0 during the limited period (S40807), and the process shifts to S40808. In the process of S40808, the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is updated according to the type of the non-effect button for which the operation is detected (S40808), and the present process is terminated. Specifically, when the upper button UB is pressed, the light amount (luminance) setting is increased by one step, while when the lower button DB is pressed, the light amount setting is decreased by one step. Further, when the right button RB is pressed, the volume setting is increased by one step, while when the left button LB is pressed, the volume setting is decreased by one step.

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, various settings (volume and light amount settings) of the pachinko machine 10 are not changed unless the non-production button is pressed twice or more during the non-production button restriction period. It is configured in. As a result, even if the player who tries to operate the center button CB accidentally presses the non-directing button during the execution of the operation support operation effect, various settings are changed against the player's intention. In addition to being able to prevent this from happening, it is possible to make the player recognize an operation error (the type of the button to be pressed is incorrect) because the effect mode corresponding to the operation is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably execute the operation support effect. In addition, the player who wants to change the setting of the pachinko machine 10 during the operation support production by configuring the setting to be changeable by pressing the non-production button twice during the non-production button restriction period. Can meet the demands of. Therefore, since it is possible to meet the needs of various players, it is possible to further improve the convenience of the players.

Next, with reference to FIG. 248, the details of the above-mentioned limited period setting process (S40803) will be described. As described above, this limited period setting process (S40803) is a process for setting the non-effect button limiting period according to the elapsed time after the start of fluctuation. In this limit period setting process (S40803), first, it is determined whether or not the flag 223fj is on during the limit period (S40901), and when it is determined that the flag 223fj is on during the limit period (S40901: Yes). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the non-effect button restriction period (that is, the timing when one second has elapsed after the end of the operation support effect) (S40902).

In the process of S40902, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the non-effect button restriction period (S40902: Yes), the value of the counter 223fk during the restriction period is reset to 0 (S40903), and the flag 223fj during the restriction period is turned off. (S40904) to end this process. On the other hand, in the process of S40902, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the non-effect button restriction period (the timing when one second has elapsed after the end of the operation support effect) (S40902: No), each process of S4093 and S40904 is performed. Skip and end this process as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S40901, when it is determined that the flag 223fj is not on (that is, is off) during the limited period (S40901: No), the start timing of the non-directing button limited period (that is, operation support). It is determined whether or not it is (1 second before the start of the production) (S40905), and it is the start timing of the non-production button restriction period (that is, the timing 1 second before the operation support production is started). If it is determined that (S40905: Yes), the flag 223fj is set to ON during the limited period (S40906), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S40905 that it is not the start timing of the non-effect button restriction period (that is, the timing one second before the operation support production is started) (S40905), the processing of S40905 is skipped. , Ends this process as it is.

By executing this restriction period setting process (see FIG. 248), the non-effect button restriction is performed accurately from 1 second before the operation support effect is started to 1 second after the end of the operation support effect. Can be set to a period. Therefore, even if the player who tries to operate the center button CB accidentally presses the non-directing button during the operation support operation effect, various settings are changed against the player's will. Can be suppressed.

Next, the details of the hit-related process 14 (S43011) in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 249. This hit-related process 14 (S43011) is a process executed in place of the hit-related process 13 (see FIG. 205) in the tenth embodiment in the command determination process 14 (S4193) in the eleventh embodiment. , This is a process for executing the control corresponding to the type of the command related to the hit, as in the hit-related process 13 (see FIG. 205) in the tenth embodiment. Since the command determination process 14 in the eleventh embodiment is unchanged except that the hit-related process 14 (S43011) is executed instead of the hit-related process 13 (see FIG. 205) in the tenth embodiment. The detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Of the hit-related processes 14 (see FIG. 249) in the eleventh embodiment, in each of the processes S4404, S4405, S4407 to S4410, and S44401 to S44404, the hit-related processes 13 in the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 205), respectively. The same processes as those of S4404, S4405, S4407 to S4410, and S44001 to S44004 are executed.

Further, in the hit-related process 14 (see FIG. 249) in the eleventh embodiment, it is determined that the small hit opening command is not included in the unprocessed commands received from the main control unit 110 in the process of S4401. Then, it is determined whether or not the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 includes the small hit type command (S44011). In the processing of S44011, if it is determined that the small hit type command is included in the unprocessed command (S44011: Yes), the small for executing the control according to the small hit type notified by the command. The hit type command process is executed (S44012), and this process ends. The details of this small hit type command processing (S44012) will be described later with reference to FIG. 250.

On the other hand, in the processing of S44011, when it is determined that the small hit type command is not included in the unprocessed command (S44011: No), then the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is included in the unprocessed command. It is determined whether or not the operation content command is included (S44013), and if it is determined that the operation content command is included (S44013: Yes), the control according to the operation content indicated by the received command is executed. Operation content command processing for this is executed (S44014), and this processing is terminated. The details of this operation content command process (S44014) will be described later with reference to FIG. 251. On the other hand, in the process of S44013, if it is determined that the operation content command is not included in the unprocessed command (S44013: No), the process is shifted to S44003.

Next, with reference to FIG. 250, the details of the above-mentioned small hit type command processing (S44011) will be described. FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing this small hit type command processing (S44011). This small hit type command process (S44011) is one of the hit related processes 14 (see FIG. 249), and as described above, the process for executing the control according to the small hit type notified by the command. Is.

In the small hit type command processing (see FIG. 250), first, the data stored in the game state storage area 223i is read (S41001), and whether or not the read data is the data indicating the time saving state of the normal symbol is determined. Determine (S41002). When it is determined that data indicating a gaming state (that is, a normal state of a normal symbol) different from the time saving state has been read in the process of S41002 (S41002: No), the central route suggestion effect (see FIG. 232 (b)). ) Is not likely to be executed, so this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S41002 that the data indicating the time saving state has been read (S41002: Yes), then the small hit type notified by the small hit type command is any of the small hits H14 to J14. If it is determined whether or not it is (S41003), and if it is determined to be any of the small hits H14 to J14 (S41003: Yes), the central route suggestion effect is produced with reference to the table 222fc1 for the small hits H14 to J14. (See FIG. 232 (b)) Executability and execution timing are determined (S41004), and the process shifts to S41006.

On the other hand, in the process of S41003, when it is determined that the small hit type notified by the command is not the small hits H14 to J14 (any of the small hits K14 to M14) (S41003: No), the small hits K14 to With reference to the table 222fc2 for M14, whether or not the central route suggestion effect (see FIG. 232 (b)) can be executed and the execution timing are determined (S41004), and the process shifts to S41006.

In the process of S41006 executed after the process of either S41004 or S41005, the data indicating the effect timing determined by the process of S41004 or S41005 is stored in the effect timing storage area 223fa (S41006), and this process is performed. finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 251, the details of the operation content command processing (S44014) described above will be described. This operation content command process (S44014) is one process in the hit-related process 14 (see FIG. 249), and as described above, is a process for executing control according to the operation content indicated by the received command. .. In this operation content command process (S44014), first, the data in the effect timing storage area 223fa is read (S41101), and the start timing of the suggestion effect corresponding to the read data is notified by the operation content command this time. It is determined whether or not it matches the operation timing of (S41102). In the process of S41102, when the operation content command indicating the closure of the upper opening / closing door 6755bU is received in the state where the V winning rate 50% period is set as the effect timing, and the V winning rate 100% period is set as the effect timing. When the operation content command indicating the opening of the lower opening / closing door 6755bD is received in the set state, it is determined that the effect timing has been matched.

In the process of S41102, if it is determined that the operation timing of the operation content notified by the command and the start timing of the suggestion effect match (S41102: Yes), the execution of the suggestion effect is set (S41103). End the process. On the other hand, in the process of S41102, if it is determined that the operation timing of the operation content notified by the command does not match the start timing of the suggestion effect (S41102: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 252, the details of the variation display setting process 14 (S4194) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This variation display setting process 14 (S4194) is one process in the main process 14 (see FIG. 241), and as described above, the variation display setting process (FIG. 38) in the tenth embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process that is executed in place of (see). Of the variable display setting processes 14 (S4194) in the eleventh embodiment, in each of the processes S4501 to S4509, the variable display setting processes (see FIG. 38) in the tenth embodiment (and the first embodiment) are S4501 to S4501 to each. The same process as each process of S4509 is executed.

Further, in the variation display setting process 14 (see FIG. 252) in the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S4504 is completed, the variation pattern (variation display effect) set in the process of S4504 is accompanied by the operation support effect. It is determined whether or not it is a fluctuation pattern (S4541), and if it is determined that it is a fluctuation pattern accompanied by an operation support effect (S4541: Yes), a support effect setting process for setting an operation support effect is executed. (S4542), the process is transferred to S4543. The details of the support effect setting process (S4542) will be described later with reference to FIG. 253. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4541 that the fluctuation pattern is not accompanied by the operation support effect (S4541: No), the processing of S4542 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S4543.

In the process of S4543, the execution possibility of the mini character notice effect and the action timing determination process for drawing the execution timing are executed (S4543), and the process shifts to S4505. The details of this action timing determination process (S4543) will be described later with reference to FIG. 254.

Next, with reference to FIG. 253, the details of the above-mentioned cheering effect setting process (S4542) will be described. As described above, this support effect setting process (S4542) is a process for setting the operation support effect. In this operation support effect processing (S4542), first, the support effect flag 223fc is set to ON (S4211), and then the value of the press count counter 223fe is read out (S41202). Then, from the value of the read-out press count counter 223fe, the average number of presses (A) of 1 operation support effect in the variation display in which the previous operation support effect is set is calculated (S41203). Here, the operation support effect is executed 2 to 4 times during one variation period depending on the variation type. Specifically, in the normal reach variation pattern, it is executed twice before developing into normal reach and after developing into normal reach, and in the super reach variation pattern, it is executed before developing into normal reach, after developing into normal reach, and super. It is executed 3 times after developing into reach, and in the variation pattern of special reach, it is executed 4 times before developing into normal reach, after developing into normal reach, after developing into super reach, and after developing into special reach. .. In the process of S41203, if the variation type of the variation display accompanied by the operation support effect executed last time is normal reach, the value obtained by dividing the value of the press count counter 223fe by 2 is calculated as the average number of operations (A), and the super is performed. In the case of reach, the value divided by 30 is calculated as the average number of operations (A), and in the case of special reach, the value obtained by dividing the value of the press count counter 223fe by 4 is calculated as the average number of operations (A). ..

When the processing of S41203 is completed, next, the average number of operations (A) calculated in the processing of S41203 is a value of 5 or less (that is, the average number of operations of the player in the previous operation support effect is 5 or less). (S41204), and if it is determined to be 5 or less (S41204: Yes), the operation frequency flag 223ff is set to "02H" indicating "low operation frequency" (S41205). , The process shifts to S41209. On the other hand, in the process of S41204, when it is determined that the average number of operations (A) is larger than 5 (S41204: No), then the average number of operations (A) is 9 or less. Whether or not it is determined (S41206).

When it is determined that the average number of operations (A) is 9 or less in the processing of S41206, the operation frequency flag 223ff is set to "01H" indicating "in operation frequency" (S4107), and the processing is performed. Move to S41209. On the other hand, in the process of S41206, when it is determined that the average number of operations (A) is 10 or more (S41206: No), the operation frequency flag 223ff is set to "00H" indicating "high operation frequency". (S41208), the process shifts to S41209. In the process of S41209, the value of the press count counter 223fe is reset to 0 (S41209), and this process is terminated.

By executing this support effect setting process (see FIG. 253), the operation frequency flag 223ff can be updated based on the tendency of the player to press the variable display accompanied by the previous operation support effect. Therefore, when the operation support effect is actually started and the center button CB is pressed, the character mode can be appropriately set according to the tendency of the operation.

In the eleventh embodiment, the value of the press count counter 223fe is held until the start timing of the variation display in which the operation support effect is executed next, and the held value of the press count counter 223fe is held. However, the configuration is such that the state of the operation frequency flag 223ff is set at the start of the variable display in which the operation support effect is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the end of the fluctuation display in which the operation support effect is set, the state of the operation frequency flag 223ff is set based on the value of the press count counter 223fe, and only the state of the operation frequency flag 223ff is set to the operation support effect next time. It may be configured to hold until the variable display in which is set is executed. With this configuration, the processing load at the start of fluctuation can be reduced. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the number of times the center button CB is pressed during the operation valid period is simply counted to determine the tendency of the number of times the player operates, but the tendency of the player to press the button. The method of determining is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to this, for example, it is determined whether the center button CB tends to be pressed in the first half of the operation valid period, the center button CB tends to be pressed in the second half, or the center button CB tends to be pressed evenly. The character mode with high expectation of development or big hit may be switched between a period in which it is determined that the player has a high tendency to press the character and a period in which the player does not. By increasing the determination rate of the character mode with high expectation during the period when the tendency to press is high, it is possible to set an appropriate display mode according to the tendency of each player. On the contrary, by increasing the determination ratio of the character mode having a high expectation during the period when the player has a low tendency to press, the player can be made to think to try a different pressing method. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the above-mentioned action timing determination process (S4543) will be described with reference to FIG. 254. As described above, this action timing determination process is a process for drawing a lottery about whether or not the mini character advance notice effect can be executed and the execution timing. In this action timing determination process (S4543), first, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation pattern is a small hit fluctuation pattern (S41301), and if it is determined that it is not a small hit fluctuation pattern (S41301: No). ), Then, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern is short (S41302). If it is determined in the process of S41302 that the variation pattern is short (S41302: Yes), the variation pattern is such that there is no possibility of executing the mini character notice effect, so the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S41302, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not a short deviation (S41302: No), the non-small hit table 222fb3 is used as a data table for determining the production mode (action timing) of the mini character notice effect. (See FIG. 237 (b)) is read out (S41303), and the process shifts to S41307.

On the other hand, in the process of S41301, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern to be executed this time is the fluctuation pattern of the small hit (S41301: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern corresponds to the V challenge small hit. (S41304), if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern corresponds to the V challenge small hit (S41304: Yes), the data table for determining the production mode (action timing) of the mini character notice effect is for the V challenge small hit. The table 222fb1 (see FIG. 236 (b)) is read out (S41305), and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S41304, when it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is not the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the V challenge small hit (S41304: No), the data for determining the production mode (action timing) of the mini character notice effect. As a table, the normal small hit table 222fb2 (see FIG. 237 (a)) is read out (S41306), and the process shifts to S41307.

In the process of S41307, the effect mode corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea from the table read by any of the processes of S41303, S41305, or S41306 (whether or not the mini character notice effect can be executed, and the action timing when the effect timing is executed). ) Is specified (S41307), and then it is determined whether or not the execution of the mini character notice effect is specified in the process of S41307 (S41308). If it is determined in the process of S41308 that the execution of the mini character notice effect is specified (S41308: Yes), the mini character flag 223fg is set to ON (S41309), and the action timing corresponding to the effect mode specified in the process of S41307 is set. The indicated data is stored in the action timing storage area 223fh (S41310), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S41308 that the execution of the mini character advance notice effect is not specified (the mini character advance notice effect is not executed) (S41308), each process of S41309 and S41310 is skipped and the main process is performed as it is. To finish. By executing this action timing determination process (see FIG. 254), it is possible to set an appropriate effect mode according to the lottery result of the special symbol.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 255 and 256, various control processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. First, the command determination process 14 (S6311) of the display control device 114 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 255. This command determination process 14 (S6311) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 42) in the tenth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is a process executed in place of the tenth embodiment (and the first embodiment). ) Is the same as the command determination process (see FIG. 42), which is a process for executing control according to the type of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

Of the command determination processes 14 (S6311) in the eleventh embodiment, in each of the processes S6401 to S6420, the command determination processes (see FIG. 42) in the tenth embodiment (and the first embodiment) are S6401 to S6420. The same process as each process is executed. Further, in the command determination process 14 (S6311) in the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S6418 that the unprocessed command received from the voice lamp control device 113 does not include an error command. (S6418: No) Next, it is determined whether or not the display action command is included in the unprocessed command (S6431). In the processing of S6431, if it is determined that the display error command is included in the unprocessed command (S6431: Yes), the action command processing for displaying the action of the mini character MC indicated by the display action command. (S6432) to end this process. On the other hand, in the process of S6431, if it is determined that the display action command is not included in the unprocessed command (S6431: No), the process is shifted to S6420. The details of this action command processing (S6432) will be described with reference to FIG. 256.

FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing the action command processing (S6432). In this action command processing (S6432), first, the action data corresponding to the action notified by the display action command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is read from the action data table (S8001), and the read action data is read. , The current value of the pointer 233f is added as a starting point to the data already stored in the display data table buffer 233d (S8002).

When the processing of S8002 is completed, the transfer action data table corresponding to the set action data (display data table) is determined, and the contents specified in the determined transfer action data table are transferred to the transfer data table buffer 233e. On the other hand, the current value of the pointer 233f is added as a starting point (S8003), and this processing is terminated.

By executing this action command processing (see FIG. 256). Since the display data for displaying the action of the content notified by the display action command can be accurately added to the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, the variable display already set can be displayed. It is possible to suitably execute the mini character notice effect without affecting the display mode of the effect.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment is configured to be capable of executing various hobby effects such as an operation support effect, a mini character notice effect, and a central route suggestion effect. The operation support effect is an effect in which a character image suggesting various expectations is displayed depending on the display mode each time a specific condition is satisfied (the player presses the center button CB) during the effect period. By executing this operation support effect, a player who wants to know various expectations in the variable effect being executed is made to play a game so that a specific condition can be easily satisfied (actively center button CB). Can be pressed (operated), so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved. In addition, the operation support effect is configured to be executed multiple times for the same variable effect (variable display), and the timing at which the operation support effect is executed (before or after all development is completed). The selection ratio of the character mode displayed when the player presses the center button CB is configured to be variable according to the presence or absence). More specifically, in the operation support production performed before all the development is completed, the character mode (black stripe pattern or red stripe) that raises the expectation of development is high regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol. While the ratio set in the pattern) is high, the ratio set in the character mode in which the expectation of a big hit is high is extremely low. As a result, in the operation support effect that is executed before the final development is completed, there is almost no difference in the displayed character mode regardless of whether it is a big hit or a miss, so at least the final development is completed. Until then, the player can be made to play the game without losing the expectation for the big hit. In addition, although the selection rate of the character mode in which the expectation of a big hit is high is low, the expectation of a big hit increases when selected, so that the character mode in which the expectation of a big hit increases in each operation support production. Can be pressed by pressing the center button CB in the expectation that is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the operation support production. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the number of times the player presses the center button CB in the operation support effect is counted, and the average number of operations in one operation support effect is calculated. Then, the selection ratio of each character mode for each pressing of the center button CB is made different according to the average number of operations. That is, when a player who presses less frequently is playing a game, the selection ratio of the character mode indicating that the expectation of the jackpot is high and the character mode indicating that the expectation of development is high is increased. , When a player who frequently presses the game is playing a game, the selection ratio of the character mode indicating that the expectation of the jackpot is high and the character mode indicating that the expectation of development is high is set to be low. .. With this configuration, the number of display times of the character mode indicating that the expectation is high in the operation support effect can be made equal regardless of the tendency of the player's operation, so that a more suitable effect can be realized. be able to. Further, a unique game property can be realized by performing a game method in which the player intentionally changes the tendency of operation for each variable display. That is, from the mode of the variable display effect until the operation support effect is executed, when it is judged that the expectation of the big hit is low, the game method of not participating in the operation support effect is selected, while the expectation of the big hit. By selecting the game method of participating in the operation support effect only when it is judged that the degree is high, it is determined that the player is a player who operates infrequently when participating in the operation support effect. There is a high possibility that the character mode will be drawn. In other words, when a player participates in the operation support effect, it is possible to form a state in which it is easy to select a character mode with a high expectation in the case of a big hit, so that the player participates evenly in the operation support effect. It is possible to increase the display probability of the character mode having a high degree of expectation as compared with the case where. Therefore, it is possible to provide a playability that can more accurately predict whether or not a big hit will occur.

In addition, the mini character notice production is a kind of production that suggests the execution of the V challenge. In this mini-character notice effect, the player is notified that the V-challenge is executed by completing all the first to third actions of the mini-character MC. In addition, the mini character notice production has multiple types (low expectation, medium expectation, and high expectation) with different expectations for the V challenge to be executed, and the action content of the mini character MC itself is the same. However, the timing at which the action is executed is configured differently for each expected degree. As a result, the image data itself used for displaying the action of the mini character MC can be shared, so that the character ROM 234 storage capacity of the display control device 114 can be reduced. Further, when the action timing for high expectation is set in the variable display in which the mini character notice effect is set, the first action is executed across the timing of developing the reach effect with higher expectation. Therefore, rather than the timing at which it is determined whether or not the player will develop a reach effect with higher expectations for the player who has confirmed by comparing the progress of the first action with the mode of the variable display of the third symbol. You can feel that the end timing of the first action is likely to be later. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, the action timing is set so that the variable display does not end in the middle of the action of the mini character MC. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who understands this specification and plays the game know that the production will develop before the timing when the production actually develops. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a novel way of enjoying the game while comparing the progress of the variable display with the progress of the action of the mini character MC. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, the central route suggestion effect is an effect that is executed in synchronization with the V winning rate 50% period or the V winning rate 100% period in the type of small hit that becomes a time-saving big hit due to the occurrence of the V winning. That is, a period during which the game ball easily flows down to the distribution rotating body 6755f by entering the lottery device 6755, or a period during which the game ball is easily distributed to the right V winning opening 6755bV and a time saving state is easily given. It is a production that suggests. By executing this central route suggestion effect, it is possible to play the game with a strong expectation that the game ball will enter the lottery device 6755 during the execution of the central route suggestion effect. Therefore, the game property of predicting whether or not the time is shortened by comparing the entry timing of the game ball with respect to the lottery device 6755 and the execution status of the central route suggestion effect (display mode of the third symbol display device 81). Since it can be realized, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the eleventh embodiment, the frequency of the operation for the center button CB is determined in the variable display unit and the state of the operation frequency flag 223ff is updated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation frequency may be determined for each operation support effect and the state of the operation frequency flag 223ff may be updated. As a result, the tendency of the player to press the character can be determined more accurately, so that the selection ratio of each character mode can be set more preferably.

In the eleventh embodiment, if the lottery result (whether or not it is a big hit) of the special symbol and the state of the development completion flag 223fd are the same, the same data table is read out from the character mode selection table 222fa every time. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of tables may be defined for each combination of the lottery result of the special symbol and the state of the development completion flag 223fd, and one table may be selected by the lottery. That is, a table in which it is difficult to select green characters or red characters as a character mode is selected even though it is a hit, or a table in which green characters or red characters are relatively easy to be selected is selected even though it is out of order. It may be a possible configuration. With such a configuration, it is possible to further diversify the production mode. Further, instead of changing the table only according to the combination of the lottery result of the special symbol and the state of the development completion flag 223fd, for example, refer to a different table according to the variation pattern and the mode of the selected variation display effect. It may be configured to determine the character mode. Further, in the eleventh embodiment, as the state of the development completion flag 223fd, only two states of whether or not all the development is completed are taken, but the table referred to in each development stage is used. It may be configured to switch.

In the eleventh embodiment, the table selected from the character mode selection table 222fa is different depending on whether it is a hit or a miss, but there are three patterns of hit, V challenge small hit, and miss (including normal small hit), respectively. It may be configured so that the selected tables are different. In this case, a character mode (for example, a yellow character) that is easier to set in the case of a V-challenge small hit may be provided than in the case of a hit or a miss. With this configuration, it is possible to realize a game property that allows the player to predict whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss, so that the player's game can be realized. You can improve your interest. Further, the character mode selection ratio may be changed according to the V winning rate in the case of a V challenge small hit.

In the eleventh embodiment, in the case of a V-challenge small hit, the action timing of the mini character notice effect is determined by referring to a common table regardless of the small hit type, but this is limited to this. is not. For example, the action timing may be selected in consideration of not only whether or not the V challenge small hit is won, but also the small hit type (V winning rate) of the V challenge small hit. With this configuration, it is possible to realize predictable playability from the timing of the action of the mini character MC to the type of V challenge small hit, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the execution period of the operation support effect (the remaining time until the operation support effect is completed) is not suggested (notified) to the player, but the execution period of the operation support effect is set as a timer. It may be configured to suggest (notify) to the player by a display, an indicator display, or the like. With such a configuration, the player can easily grasp the execution period of the operation support effect, so that the convenience of the player can be improved. In this case, the execution period of the operation support effect may be displayed by the character image 814. Specifically, for example, as a configuration in which the remaining effect period of the operation support effect at the time when the press on the center button CB is detected is determined, and the character image 814 imitating the character corresponding to the remaining effect period is displayed. May be good. That is, when the center button CB is pressed with the remaining 1.2 seconds, the character image imitating the character "1.2" is displayed in the character mode determined by the lottery at the time of pressing. good. Further, for example, as the remaining time decreases, the character 813 imitating a bird becomes transparent, and when the execution period of the operation support effect elapses, the character 813 is completely transparent and disappears. It may be configured as. With this configuration, the player can easily understand the remaining time of the operation support effect. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be further improved.

<12th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 257 to 265. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment described above, each time the player presses the center button CB in the operation support effect, the character aspect of the character image 814 suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit and the degree of expectation for development. Was configured to be displayed. Then, during the period from 1 second before the start of the operation support effect to 1 second after the end, the operation on the non-effect button arranged around the center button CB is restricted (twice). If you do not press the button above, the setting corresponding to the button that detected the press will not be changed).

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment, during the execution period of the operation support effect, the player is asked whether to participate in the operation support effect or change the setting of the pachinko machine 10 by operating the operation button 230. It was configured so that it could be selected. As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the player who tries to participate in the operation support effect from making a mistake in the operation and unintentionally changing the setting of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth to eleventh embodiments described above, in a small hit, is all the game balls that have entered after one or more game balls have entered the lottery device 6755 discharged? Or, it is assumed that the end condition of the small hit game is satisfied when 8 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit, and the small hit is terminated. However, in this configuration, for example, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act of forcibly guiding a game ball that has entered the lottery device 6755 to an advantageous flow path (central route) using a magnet or the like may be possible. be. That is, by attracting the game ball that has entered the lottery device 6755 from the front side of the game board 13 (the front side of the glass unit 16) by the attractive force of the magnet, the game ball is floated with respect to the induction flow path 6755b and opened and closed upward. Regardless of the open / closed state of the door 6755bU and the ball discharge door 6755c, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act of passing above them and guiding them to the distribution rotating body 6755f may be performed.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment, the upper opening / closing door 6755bU and the ball discharge door 6755c are used in order to suppress fraudulent acts of attracting the game ball from the front side of the game board 13 by using a magnet or the like. The arrangement is such that it is not easily affected by the attractive force due to the magnetic force generated from the front side of the glass unit 16. Further, the game ball that has entered the lottery device 6755 is forcibly guided to the flow path on the distribution rotating body 6755f side by using a magnet or the like, and the game ball is either entered by the distribution rotating body 6755. The structure is such that the small hit validity period is set so that the small hit ends before the ball enters the mouth. That is, even if all the game balls that have entered the lottery device 6755 have not reached any of the entrances (remaining in the lottery device 6755), a specific period (for example, for example) from the start of the small hit. The small hit is terminated when 6.5 seconds have passed. In other words, while the game ball that has flowed down in the lottery device 6755 can easily enter any of the entrances without the intervention of an external force such as a magnetic force (only by gravity or the inclination of the induction flow path 6755b). , With a configuration that forcibly (forces) changes the flow direction with a magnet or the like to set an effective period in which it becomes difficult for a game ball guided in a direction different from the original to reach one of the entrances. bottom.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment is that the internal structure of the lottery device 6755 is partially changed, and the voice lamp control device 113. The configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 have been partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the audio lamp control device 114 has been partially changed. The eleventh regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the eleventh embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 257, the internal structure of the lottery device 6755 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 257 is a top view of the induction flow path 6755b of the lottery device 6755. As shown in FIG. 257, among the guide flow paths 6755b in the twelfth embodiment, the opening / closing door 6755bU, the ball discharge door 6755c (and the discharge area 6755d provided below the door), and the ball stop portion 6755e are included. It is provided on the back side of the front view as compared with other parts of the guide flow path 6755b. Therefore, when the game ball is to be guided to the distribution rotating body 6755f from the front side of the glass unit 16 in the game board 13 by a magnet or the like, the game ball reaches the upper opening / closing door 6755bU and the ball discharge door 6755c. The distance to the glass unit 16 can be increased before and after the operation. That is, the game ball is guided to the distribution rotating body 6755f in a state where the upper opening / closing door 6755bU and the ball discharge door 6755c are opened by a magnet or the like (a state in which the distribution rotating body 6755f cannot be reached by the normal game method). When attempting to do so, the magnet can be configured so that the distance between the magnet and the game ball is the longest when the upper opening / closing door 6755bU or the ball discharge door 6755c in the open state is reached. That is, when the game ball reaches the upper opening / closing door 6755bU or the ball discharge door 6755c in the open state, the magnetic force acting on the game ball can be weakened most, so that the upper opening / closing door 6755bU or the ball discharge door 6755c in the open state can be weakened most. It can be configured so that the game ball can easily fall into the right out port 6755bO or the discharge area 6755d via the door. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to succeed in the fraudulent act of illegally reaching the game ball to the distribution rotating body 6755f using a magnet or the like, and thus it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unexpected disadvantage from being given to the hall due to fraudulent acts. Further, since the guiding flow path 6755b has a meandering shape instead of a straight line, the period required to guide the game ball to the distribution rotating body 6755f when trying to guide the game ball with a magnet or the like is made longer. be able to. Therefore, the small hit game can be terminated before the game ball guided to the distribution rotating body 6755f by fraudulent activity is guided to any of the entrances. Therefore, the deterrent effect against fraudulent activity can be further enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 258 and 259, a display mode of the operation support effect in the twelfth embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 258 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the operation support effect in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 258 (a), when the operation support effect in the twelfth embodiment is executed, the support button image 815a in which the character "support" is displayed below the character 813 imitating a bird, and The volume setting button image 815b displayed below the support button image 815a and displaying the characters "volume setting" is displayed between the support button image 815a and the volume setting button image 815b, and has an upward substantially regular triangular shape. The upper button image 815c and the lower button image 815d displayed below the upper button image 815c and having a substantially regular triangular shape downward are displayed. Further, the support button image 815a is set so as to have a light emitting appearance. Depending on these display contents, the item "support" can be selected by pressing the upper button UB (that is, the selection to participate in the operation support effect can be made), and the lower button DB is pressed. This makes it possible for the player to intuitively understand that the item "volume setting" can be selected (that is, the volume setting can be changed). Further, by setting the support button image 815a to the display mode of the shining appearance, the player can intuitively understand that the item "support" is selected.

In the twelfth embodiment, not only the character mode of the character image 814 displayed in the display area HR11 but also the display mode (emission color) of the support button image 815a suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit. It is configured to be possible. Although the details will be described later, the suggestion of the jackpot expectation degree by the display mode of the support button image 815a is more likely to occur when the player who does not perform any operation is playing the game (expected in the case of the jackpot). It is configured so that the ratio of being set to a high-degree emission color is high). As a result, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit even for a player who does not participate in the operation support effect, so that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

FIG. 258 (b) shows a third symbol display when the player further presses the upper button UB in a state where the item “support” is selected (a state in which the support button image 815a is set to have a shining appearance). It is a figure which showed the display mode of the apparatus 81. As shown in FIG. 258 (b), when the player presses the upper button UB with the item "support" selected, the character mode is determined by lottery using the character mode selection table 222fa, and the character mode is determined. The character image 814 of the character aspect is displayed. That is, every time the player presses the upper button UB with the item "support" selected, it suggests the degree of expectation for big hits and development, as in the case of pressing the center button CB in the eleventh embodiment described above. It is possible to display a character image to be used. By setting the setting at the start of the operation support effect to the state in which the item "support" is selected, the same operability as the eleventh embodiment described above (a specific button (specific button in the state at the start of the operation support effect) It is possible to realize operability) that makes it possible to display a character image each time the upper button UB) is pressed. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 259 (a), when the player presses the lower button DB while the item "support" is selected, the support button image 815a is changed from the lit appearance to the extinguished appearance. , Volume setting button The appearance of the image 815b being turned off is changed to the appearance of light emission. That is, the item "volume setting" is changed to the selected state. Further, a horizontally long substantially rectangular display area 816 is formed in the front view right direction in the display area HR11. As shown in FIG. 259 (a), an image showing the current volume setting is displayed in the display area 816. That is, an image imitating a speaker is displayed, and a volume bar SB that displays the current volume setting in five stages according to the length of the bar is displayed below the image imitating the speaker. In the volume bar SB, the number of shaded bars increases as the volume is set to be louder, and the number of bars shaded as the volume is set to be lower. In FIG. 259 (a), out of the five bars constituting the volume bar SB, the three bars from the left are set in the shaded display mode, so that the volume can be set in three of the five stages. Indicates the state set to. By displaying the volume setting (the number of bars with diagonal lines) indicated by the volume bar SB left-justified, the number of bars with diagonal lines can be reduced by pressing the left button LB. And the player can easily understand that the number of shaded bars can be increased by pressing the right button RB. Therefore, the player can easily understand how to change the volume setting.

FIG. 259 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the player presses the right button RB while the item of “volume setting” is selected. As shown in FIG. 259 (b), when the player presses the right button RB while the "volume setting" item is selected, the number of bars displayed with diagonal lines increases by one. That is, one additional bar with diagonal lines is displayed on the right side of the three shaded bars that were displayed until just before pressing. By this change in the display mode, the player can easily understand that the change in the volume setting has been normally executed.

As described above, in the operation support effect in the eleventh embodiment, the player selects the item "support" and the item "volume setting" according to the operation (pressing) of the upper button UB and the lower button DB. It is configured so that it can be made to. Then, in the state where the item "support" is selected, the display of the character image 814 is set each time the upper button UB corresponding to "support" is pressed, while the right button corresponding to "volume setting" is set. Even if the RB or the left button LB is pressed, no setting change is made. On the other hand, in the state where the item "volume setting" is selected, it is possible to change the volume setting by pressing the right button RB or the left button LB, but even if the upper button UB is pressed, the characters are displayed. The image 814 is configured not to be displayed. With this configuration, even if the player who tries to participate in the operation support effect accidentally presses the right button RB or the left button LB, the setting change contrary to the player's intention will be executed. It can be suppressed. Further, even if the player who tries to set the volume accidentally presses the upper button UB or the lower button DB, it is possible to prevent the character image 814 from being displayed against the player's intention. can. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be further improved.

In the twelfth embodiment, even if the lower button DB is pressed while the "volume setting" item is selected, no display mode or setting is changed. It is not limited to this. For example, under specific conditions, the character mode of the character image 814 may be drawn and displayed even when a press on the lower button DB is detected. More specifically, for example, when the lower button DB is pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) or more while the "volume setting" item is selected, the player can participate in the operation support effect. It may be determined that the character image 814 is erroneously recognized (it is misunderstood that the character image 814 is displayed by pressing the lower button DB), and the lottery and display of the character mode of the character image 814 may be set. .. With this configuration, even a player who continuously presses the lower button DB due to a misunderstanding or the like can participate in the operation support effect, which further improves the convenience of the player. be able to. In this case, after detecting the pressing of the lower button DB more than a predetermined number of times, the display mode of the volume setting button image 815b may be changed to the same appearance as the support button image 815a. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the unnatural appearance that the character image 814 is displayed even though the "volume setting" is selected, so that the display mode is more preferable. Can be set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 260, the upper opening / closing door 6755bU, the lower opening / closing door 6755bD, the ball stopper 6755e, and the ball discharge door 6755c in the case of a small hit in the special symbol lottery in the twelfth embodiment. The operation pattern will be described. Here, in the twelfth embodiment, as in the eleventh embodiment described above, when a small hit is won, only the mode (opening pattern) of the opening / closing operation of the small hit attacker 6755a is determined according to the small hit type. Other operating modes (operation patterns of the upper opening / closing door 6755bU, the lower opening / closing door 6755bD, the ball stop portion 6755e, and the ball discharge door 6755c) are configured to be common regardless of the small hit type. FIG. 260 describes an operation mode of a portion other than the small hit attacker 6755a, which is common regardless of the small hit type.

FIG. 260 shows changes over time (operation patterns) of the open / closed state of the upper opening / closing door 6755bU, the lower opening / closing door 6755bD, the ball stop portion 6755e, and the ball discharge door 6755c during the execution of the small hit game of the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure. As shown in FIG. 260, the upper opening / closing door 6755bU is set to the open state as the initial state, and switches to the closed state at the same time as the start of the small hit. This closed state (V winning rate 50% period) continues for 1 second (that is, continues until 1 second has elapsed from the start of the small hit), and after switching to the closed state, it switches to the open state after 1 second has elapsed. After that, the upper opening / closing door 6755bU is maintained in the open state from the start of the small hit to the time when 1.2 seconds have passed, and is in the closed state again from the time when 1.2 seconds have passed to the time when 1.4 seconds have passed (V winning rate 50). % Period). Then, when 1.4 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit, the open state is switched again, and thereafter, the open state is maintained until the end of the small hit. That is, the game ball that has entered the inside of the lottery device 6755 from immediately after the start of the small hit to the time when 1 second has passed, and from the time when 1.2 seconds have passed to the time when 1.4 seconds have passed is closed. The game ball that rolls on the upper surface of the upper opening / closing door 6755bU and flows down to the distribution rotating body 6755f side (see FIG. 211 (a)) and enters the inside of the lottery device 6755 during the other period is the guide flow path 6755b2. It flows into the right V winning opening 6755bV or is guided to the right out opening 6755bO (see FIGS. 211 (b) and 211 (c)). That is, in the twelfth embodiment, the V winning rate 50% period is configured to end earlier than in the eleventh embodiment. In the twelfth embodiment, even if the game ball remains in the lottery device 6755 when 6.5 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit, the small hit is forcibly terminated. .. As a result, when a relatively time-consuming fraudulent act such as forcibly changing the traveling path of the game ball with a magnet or the like and guiding the game ball to the distribution rotating body 6755f is performed, the distribution rotating body By 6755f, the small hit can be forcibly terminated before the game ball is distributed to any of the entrances. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraudulent activities.

Further, as shown in FIG. 260, the lower opening / closing door 6755bD is set in the closed state as the initial state, and the closed state is maintained until 1.6 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small hit. Then, when 1.6 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit, the state is switched to the open state (V winning rate 100% period). As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the induction flow path 6755b2 can enter the right V winning opening 6755bV. The open state of the lower opening / closing door 6755bD continues for 0.2 seconds, and switches to the closed state 1.8 seconds after the start of the small hit. After that, the lower opening / closing door 6755bD is kept in the closed state until 2 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit, and after 2 seconds have passed, it is switched to the open state again (V winning rate 100% period). This open state lasts for 1 second. That is, the open state continues until 3 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit, and the closed state is switched to the closed state after 3 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit. After that, the closed state is maintained until the small hit is completed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 260, the ball stop portion 6755e is maintained in a closed state from the start of the small hit until 2.9 seconds have elapsed, and at the time when 2.9 seconds have elapsed (second V winning rate). After the lapse of 50% period, it is switched to the open state (the state where it is possible to flow down the induction flow path 6755b) from the time when 1.5 seconds have passed until the end of the small hit, and it is closed again at the end of the small hit. Can be switched. On the other hand, the ball discharge door 6755c is maintained in a closed state from the start of the small hit until 2.4 seconds have elapsed, and at the time when 2.4 seconds have elapsed (the second V winning rate 50% period has elapsed). After that, it is switched to the open state from the time when 1 second elapses to the end of the small hit, and is switched to the closed state again at the end of the small hit. That is, for 2.4 seconds after the start of the small hit, both the ball stop portion 6755e and the ball discharge door 6755c are closed, so that the inside of the lottery device 6755 is entered during the V winning rate of 50%. All the game balls that have passed through the upper surface of the upper opening / closing door 6755bU in the closed state are stopped in the guide flow path 6755b by the ball stop portion 6755e.

Further, when 2.4 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit, the ball discharge door 6755c is opened with the ball stop portion 6755e closed, so that the ball discharge door 6755c is stopped by directly contacting the right side of the ball stop portion 6755e. All the game balls other than the game ball of 1 fall from the opening of the ball discharge door 6755c to the discharge area 6755d and are discharged to the outside. That is, even if a plurality of game balls flow into the inside of the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate of 50%, the games are stopped inside the lottery device 6755 after the ball discharge door 6755e is opened. The maximum number of spheres can be one. Then, since the ball stop portion 6755e is opened 0.5 seconds after the ball discharge door 6755c is opened, one game ball remaining inside the lottery device 6755 is directed toward the distribution rotating body 6755f. Flow down. By opening the ball discharge door 6755c first and then opening the ball stop 6755e, it is assumed that two or more game balls have entered the inside of the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate of 50%. Also, the second and subsequent game balls can be discharged to the outside from the discharge area 6755d until the ball stop portion 6755e is opened. Therefore, since the number of game balls that reach the distribution rotating body 6755f in one small hit can be limited to a maximum of one, the game balls enter the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate of 50%. The V winning rate in the case can be fixed (50%) each time.

As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the setting timing of the V winning rate 50% period is earlier than that of the tenth and eleventh embodiments. As a result, the timing of operation of the ball discharge door 6755c and the ball stop portion 6755e can be made earlier than in the tenth embodiment and the eleventh embodiment, so that the end timing of the small hit can be made earlier. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the lottery device 6755 during the V-impossible period set after the V-winning rate 50% period and the V-winning rate 100% period is illegally distributed to the rotating body 6755f by a magnet or the like. Even if an attempt is made to guide the game ball, the small hit can be completed before the guided game ball is distributed to any of the entrances by the distribution rotating body 6755f. That is, even if a game ball is inserted into the V winning opening due to fraud, it is difficult to execute a big hit. Therefore, the deterrent effect against fraudulent activity can be enhanced. Further, in the twelfth embodiment, when 6.5 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit (V winning rate 50%, the ball entered the lottery device 6755 and flowed down to the distribution rotating body 6755f. The structure is such that the small hit game is forcibly completed during the period (a period of length that allows the game ball to be sufficiently distributed to any of the entrances). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts using magnets or the like without affecting the player who plays the game by the regular game method. That is, when an attempt is made to reach the distribution rotating body 6755f by attracting the game ball with a magnet or the like and forcibly changing the flow path, the game ball flows down only by the action of inclination or gravity. ), The period until reaching the distribution rotating body 6755f is longer than that in the case of reaching the distribution rotating body 6755f. During the period of 6.5 seconds after the start of the small hit, the game ball that has reached the distribution rotating body 6755f in normal operation can be distributed to any of the entrances without any problem, and it is illegal due to a magnet or the like. It is composed of a period in which it is difficult (impossible) to distribute the game ball guided to the distribution rotating body 6755f by the action to any of the entrances. As a result, even if a fraudulent act of forcibly guiding the game ball flowing into the lottery device 6755 to the distribution rotating body 6755f using a magnet or the like is performed, the game ball is distributed to any of the entrances. Since the small hit can be terminated before the game is played, the fraudulent activity can be configured so as not to be established. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unexpected disadvantage from being given to the hall due to fraudulent acts.

<Electrical configuration in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 261 (a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 261 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 222 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 261 (a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the twelfth embodiment is that the button mode selection table 222ga is added to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the eleventh embodiment (see FIG. 233). It's different. Since other configurations are the same as the configuration of ROM 222 in the eleventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 233), detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The button mode selection table 222ga is a data table referred to when selecting the display mode (emission color) of the support button image 815a (see FIG. 258 (a)) displayed in the operation support effect. At the start of the operation support effect, the button mode selection table 222ga is referred to, and the display mode of 1 is determined according to the lottery result of the special symbol, the operation status of the player, and the like. The details of this button mode selection table 222ga will be described with reference to FIGS. 262 and 263.

FIG. 262 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the button mode selection table 222ga. As shown in FIG. 262 (a), the button mode selection table 222ga in the twelfth embodiment corresponds to a jackpot in a situation where a player who tends not to perform any operation in the operation support effect is playing a game. A hit (non-operation) table 222ga1 for selecting the emission color (button color) of the support button image 815a in the operation support effect set for the display, and a player who tends to operate in the operation support effect play the game. In the situation where the support button image 815a is set for the variable display corresponding to the jackpot, the hit (operation) table 222ga2 for selecting the emission color (button color) of the image 815a and the operation support effect In a situation where a player who tends not to perform any operation is playing a game, the disengagement for selecting the emission color (button color) of the support button image 815a in the operation support effect set for the variable display corresponding to the disengagement. Light emission of the support button image 815a in the operation support effect set for the (non-operation) table 222ga3 and the variable display corresponding to the disengagement in the situation where the player who tends to operate in the operation support effect is playing the game. It is composed of at least a hit (operation) table 222ga4 for selecting a color (button color).

First, the details of the hit (non-operation) table 222ga1 will be described with reference to FIG. 262 (b). FIG. 262 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the hit (non-operation) table 222ga1. As shown in FIG. 262 (b), the winning (non-operation) table 222ga1 is defined in association with the button color for each value range of the effect lottery counter 223ea. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 262 (b), for the range where the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is "0 to 199", "white" is used as the button color (display mode of the support button image 815a). It is defined in association with each other (see 222ga1a in FIG. 262 (b)). Of the 1000 random values (counter values) that can be taken by the production lottery counter 223ea, the random number values (counter values) associated with the button color "white" are 200, so no operation is performed in the operation support production. The ratio (probability) that "white" is set as the button color when a player with a tendency is playing a game and a special symbol lottery is a big hit and an operation support effect is executed is 20% (200/1000). ).

Further, as shown in FIG. 262 (b), "blue" is associated with the button color (display mode of the support button image 815a) for the range where the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is "200 to 599". It is specified (see 222ga1b in FIG. 262 (b)). Of the 1000 random values (counter values) that can be taken by the effect lottery counter 223ea, the random number values (counter values) associated with the button color "blue" are 400, so no operation is performed in the operation support effect. In the state where the player with a tendency is playing a game, the ratio (probability) that "blue" is set as the button color when the special symbol lottery is a big hit and the operation support effect is executed is 40% (400/1000). ).

Further, as shown in FIG. 262 (b), "green" is associated with the button color (display mode of the support button image 815a) for the range where the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is "600 to 899". It is specified (see 222ga1c in FIG. 262 (b)). Of the 1000 random values (counter values) that can be taken by the effect lottery counter 223ea, the random number values (counter values) associated with the button color "green" are 300, so no operation is performed in the operation support effect. In the state where the player with a tendency is playing a game, the ratio (probability) that "green" is set as the button color when the special symbol lottery is a big hit and the operation support effect is executed is 30% (300/1000). ).

Further, as shown in FIG. 262 (b), "red" is associated with the button color (display mode of the support button image 815a) for the range in which the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is "900 to 999". It is specified (see 222ga1d in FIG. 262 (b)). Of the 1000 random values (counter values) that can be taken by the effect lottery counter 223ea, 100 random values (counter values) associated with the button color "red" are used, so no operation is performed in the operation support effect. In the state where the player with a tendency is playing a game, the ratio (probability) that "red" is set as the button color when the special symbol lottery is a big hit and the operation support effect is executed is 10% (100/1000). ).

In this way, in a situation where a player who tends not to perform any operation is playing a game, when the operation support effect is executed during the jackpot fluctuation, the jackpot expectation is low at a rate of 80%, "white". In addition to being set to a button color other than "", a button color of "green" or "red", which has a high expectation of a big hit, is set at a rate of 40%. That is, when a player who tends not to perform any operation is playing a game, the ratio of selecting a button color having a high expectation of a big hit is relatively high in the case of a big hit. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately suggest the degree of expectation that will be a big hit even for players who do not participate in the operation support production, so there is a tendency not to perform operations (do not participate in the operation support production). It is possible to entertain the operation support production even for the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 262 (c), the details of the hit (operation) table 222ga2, which is a kind of data table constituting the button mode selection table 222ga, will be described. FIG. 262 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the hit (operation) table 222ga2. As shown in FIG. 262 (c), "white" is associated with the button color (display mode of the support button image 815a) for the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 499". (See 222ga2a in FIG. 262 (c)). Of the 1000 random values (counter values) that can be taken by the production lottery counter 223ea, the random number values (counter values) associated with the button color "white" are 500, so there is a tendency to perform operations in the operation support production. When the player is playing a game, the lottery of special symbols will be a big hit, and the ratio (probability) that "white" is set as the button color when executing the operation support effect is 50% (500/1000). be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 262 (c), "blue" is associated with the button color (display mode of the support button image 815a) for the range where the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is "500 to 899". It is specified (see 222ga2b in FIG. 262 (c)). Of the 1000 random values (counter values) that can be taken by the production lottery counter 223ea, the random number values (counter values) associated with the button color "blue" are 400, so there is a tendency to perform operations in the operation support production. When the player is playing a game, the lottery of special symbols will be a big hit, and the ratio (probability) that "blue" will be set as the button color when executing the operation support effect is 40% (400/1000). be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 262 (c), "green" is associated with the button color (display mode of the support button image 815a) for the range where the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is "900 to 979". It is specified (see 222ga2c in FIG. 262 (c)). Of the 1000 random values (counter values) that can be taken by the production lottery counter 223ea, 80 random values (counter values) associated with the button color "green" tend to be operated in the operation support production. When the player is playing a game, the lottery of special symbols will be a big hit, and the rate (probability) that "green" will be set as the button color when executing the operation support effect is 8% (80/1000). be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 262 (c), "red" is associated with the button color (display mode of the support button image 815a) for the range in which the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is "980 to 999". It is specified (see 222ga2d in FIG. 262 (c)). Of the 1000 random values (counter values) that can be taken by the production lottery counter 223ea, 20 random values (counter values) associated with the button color "red" tend to be operated in the operation support production. When the player is playing a game, the lottery of special symbols will be a big hit, and the rate (probability) that "red" will be set as the button color when executing the operation support effect is 2% (20/1000). be.

In this way, when the player who tends to perform the operation during the operation support effect is playing the game, the jackpot fluctuation is higher than when the player who does not perform the operation is playing the game. The ratio of selecting "white" with the lowest expectation is high even during execution, and the selection ratio of the button color with high expectation is significantly low at 10%. Therefore, it is difficult to predict the degree of expectation of a big hit from the button color. Therefore, by positively pressing the button in the operation support effect, the degree of expectation of a big hit is predicted from the character mode of the displayed character image 814. Can make you think. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the operation support production.

Next, the details of the disengagement (non-operation) table 222ga3 will be described with reference to FIG. 263 (a). FIG. 263 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the detachment (non-operation) table 222ga3. As shown in FIG. 263 (a), "white" is associated with the button color (display mode of the support button image 815a) for the range of the effect lottery counter 223ea of "0 to 799". (See 222ga3a in FIG. 263 (a)). Of the 1000 random values (counter values) that can be taken by the production lottery counter 223ea, 800 random values (counter values) associated with the button color "white" are used, so no operation is performed in the operation support production. In the state where the player with a tendency is playing a game, the ratio (probability) that "white" is set as the button color when the operation support effect is executed is 80% (800/1000). ).

Further, as shown in FIG. 263 (a), "blue" is associated with the button color (display mode of the support button image 815a) for the range where the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is "800 to 949". It is specified (see 222ga3b in FIG. 263 (a)). Of the 1000 random values (counter values) that can be taken by the production lottery counter 223ea, the random number values (counter values) associated with the button color "blue" are 150, so no operation is performed in the operation support production. The ratio (probability) that "blue" is set as the button color when the player with a tendency is playing a game and the special symbol is drawn out and the operation support effect is executed is 15% (150/1000). ).

Further, as shown in FIG. 263 (a), "green" is associated with the button color (display mode of the support button image 815a) for the range in which the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is "950 to 998". It is specified (see 222ga3c in FIG. 263 (a)). Of the 1000 random values (counter values) that can be taken by the production lottery counter 223ea, 49 random values (counter values) associated with the button color "green" are used, so no operation is performed in the operation support production. The ratio (probability) that "green" is set as the button color when the player with a tendency is playing a game and the special symbol is drawn out and the operation support effect is executed is 4.9% (49). / 1000).

Further, as shown in FIG. 263 (a), for the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea of "999", "red" is associated with the button color (display mode of the support button image 815a). (See 222ga3d in FIG. 263 (a)). Of the 1000 random values (counter values) that can be taken by the effect lottery counter 223ea, only one random value (counter value) is associated with the button color "red", so no operation is performed in the operation support effect. The rate (probability) that "red" is set as the button color when the player with a tendency is playing a game and the special symbol is drawn out and the operation support effect is executed is 0.1% (1). / 1000).

In this way, if a player who does not participate in the operation support effect (does not operate the button) is playing a game and is out of the lottery for a special symbol, the selection rate of the button color "white" is high. On the other hand, the selection ratio of "green" and "red", which are highly expected, is significantly reduced. Therefore, it is possible to provide the playability of predicting the jackpot expectation from the button color.

Next, the details of the disengagement (operation) table 222ga4 will be described with reference to FIG. 263 (b). FIG. 263 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the disengagement (operation) table 222ga4. As shown in FIG. 263 (b), "white" is associated with the button color (display mode of the support button image 815a) for the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 599". (See 222ga4a in FIG. 263 (b)). Of the 1000 random values (counter values) that can be taken by the production lottery counter 223ea, the random number values (counter values) associated with the button color "white" are 600, so there is a tendency to perform operations in the operation support production. The ratio (probability) that "white" is set as the button color when the player is playing a game and the special symbol is drawn out and the operation support effect is executed is 60% (600/1000). be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 263 (b), "blue" is associated with the button color (display mode of the support button image 815a) for the range in which the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is "600 to 949". It is specified (see 222ga4b in FIG. 263 (b)). Of the 1000 random values (counter values) that can be taken by the production lottery counter 223ea, 350 random values (counter values) associated with the button color "blue" tend to be operated in the operation support production. In the state where the player is playing a game, the ratio (probability) that "blue" is set as the button color when the special symbol is drawn out and the operation support effect is executed is 35% (350/1000). be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 263 (b), "green" is associated with the button color (display mode of the support button image 815a) for the range in which the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is "950 to 997". It is specified (see 222ga4c in FIG. 263 (b)). Of the 1000 random values (counter values) that can be taken by the production lottery counter 223ea, 48 random values (counter values) associated with the button color "green" tend to be operated in the operation support production. The ratio (probability) that "green" is set as the button color when the player is playing a game and the special symbol is drawn out and the operation support effect is executed is 4.8% (48/1000). ).

Further, as shown in FIG. 263 (b), "red" is associated with the button color (display mode of the support button image 815a) in the range where the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is "998,999". It is specified (see 222ga4d in FIG. 263 (b)). Of the 1000 random values (counter values) that can be taken by the production lottery counter 223ea, there are two random values (counter values) associated with the button color "red", so there is a tendency to perform operations in the operation support production. When the player is playing a game, the lottery of special symbols will be a big hit, and the rate (probability) that "red" will be set as the button color when executing the operation support effect is 0.2% (2/1000). ).

In this way, even in the situation where the player who participates in the operation support production (operates the button) is playing the game, the button color "white" is selected when the player is out of the lottery of the special symbol. While the ratio is high, the selection ratio of "green" and "red", which are highly expected, is low. Therefore, although the difference between the case where the player who does not perform any operation and the case where the player wins the game is smaller than the case where the player does not perform the game, it is possible to provide the game property in which the expected degree of the big hit is predicted from the button color.

Next, with reference to FIG. 261 (b), the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 261 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 261 (b), in the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment, a cursor position storage area 223ga is added to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eleventh embodiment (see FIG. 233 (b)). It differs in that it is. Since the other configurations are the same as the configurations of the RAM 223 in the eleventh embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The cursor position storage area 223ga is a storage area for storing information indicating an item (cursor position) selected by the player during the execution of the operation support effect. When "00H" is stored in the cursor position storage area 223ga, it indicates that the item "support" is selected, and when "01H" is stored, the item "volume setting" is displayed. Indicates the selected state. The cursor position storage area 223ga is updated with data according to the item each time the player selects a different item during the execution of the operation support effect.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 264 to 267, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. First, the operation support effect processing 15 (S40301) in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 264. This operation support effect process 15 (S4031) is a process executed in place of the operation support effect process (see FIG. 243) in the eleventh embodiment, and is the same as the operation support effect process (see FIG. 243) in the eleventh embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for updating the effect mode in the variable display in which the operation support effect is set.

Of the operation support effect processing 15 (see FIG. 264) in the twelfth embodiment, each process of S40401 to S40409 is a process of S40401 to S40409 of the operation support effect process (see FIG. 243) in the eleventh embodiment, respectively. The same process is executed. Further, in the operation support effect processing 15 (see FIG. 264) in the twelfth embodiment, when the processing of S40405 is completed, the lottery result of this special symbol in the button mode selection table 222ga and the operation of the player are then performed. A table corresponding to the situation (state of the operation frequency flag 223ff) is read (S40421), and the button color corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is specified from the read table (S40422). When the processing of S40422 is completed, the processing is transferred to S40406. In the twelfth embodiment, a state (“03H”) indicating that no operation is performed is added as a state of the operation frequency flag 223ff. In the process of S40421, whether to select a non-operation table (a hit (non-operation) table 222ga1 or a loss (non-operation) table 222ga3) depending on whether or not the operation frequency flag 223ff is "03H". Whether or not it is variable.

Next, with reference to FIG. 265, the details of the various setting button input monitoring processes 15 (S4195) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. The various setting button input monitoring processes 15 (S4195) in the twelfth embodiment are processes executed in place of the various setting button input monitoring processes (see FIG. 247) in the eleventh embodiment, and are various in the eleventh embodiment. Similar to the setting button input monitoring process (see FIG. 247), when the operation (pressing) for the non-directing button (button for changing the volume and light amount settings) is monitored and the operation is detected, the operation is performed. This is a process for changing the settings according to the type of button that has been performed.

Of the various setting button input monitoring processes 15 (see FIG. 265) in the twelfth embodiment, in each of the processes S40801 and S40808, S40801 and the various setting button input monitoring processes (see FIG. 247) in the eleventh embodiment, respectively. And the same process as each process of S40808 is executed. Further, in the various setting button input monitoring processes 15 (see FIG. 265) in the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined that the pressing of any of the non-directing buttons is detected in the process of S40801 (S40801), then. It is determined whether or not the flag 223fb is on during the operation valid period (S40811). If it is determined in the process of S40811 that the flag 223fb is off during the operation valid period (S40811: No), the process is shifted to S40808. On the other hand, if it is determined that the flag 223fb is on during the valid period in the processing of S40811, then it is determined whether or not the pressing of the upper button UB or the lower button DB is detected in the processing of S40801. (S40812).

When it is determined that the press on the upper button UB or the lower button DB is detected in the process of S40812 (S40812: Yes), the cursor position (selected item) when the button is pressed, and the type of the button on which the press is detected. The process of pressing the up / down buttons for executing the control according to the above is executed (S40813), and the present process is terminated. The details of the up / down button pressing process (S40813) will be described later with reference to FIG. 266. On the other hand, in the process of S40812, if it is determined that the press is not detected in the upper button UB or the lower button DB (S40812: No), then it is determined whether the press on the right button RB or the left button LB is detected. Discrimination (S40814).

When it is determined that the press on the right button RB or the left button LB is detected in the process of S40814 (S40814: Yes), the cursor position (selected item) when the button is pressed, and the type of the button on which the press is detected. The processing when the left and right buttons are pressed to execute the control according to the above is executed (S40815), and this processing is terminated. The details of the left / right button pressing process (S40815) will be described later with reference to FIG. 267. On the other hand, in the process of S40814, if it is determined that the button pressed this time is neither the right button RB nor the left button LB (S40814: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 266, the details of the above-mentioned up / down button pressing process (S40813) will be described. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing the process when the up and down buttons are pressed (S40813). As described above, this up / down button pressing process (S40813) is the cursor position (selected item) when the button is pressed when either the upper button UB or the lower button DB is pressed in the operation support effect. , And is a process for executing control according to the type of the button for which the press is detected.

In the processing when the up and down buttons are pressed (see FIG. 266), first, the data in the cursor position storage area 223ga is read (S41401), and the read data indicates the upper cursor position (the state in which the "support" item is selected). (That is, it is determined whether or not it is "00H") (S41402). In the process of S41402, if it is determined that the data stored in the cursor position storage area 223ga is the data indicating the upper cursor position (S41402), then it is determined whether or not the press on the upper button UB is detected. (S41403).

If it is determined that the press on the upper button UB is detected in the process of S41403 (S41403: Yes), then the character mode setting process (see FIG. 245) is executed to draw a lottery for the character mode corresponding to the press. At the same time, the display of the character image 814 of the character mode determined by the lottery is set (S41404), and the present process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S41403, if it is determined that the button is not pressed on the upper button UB (that is, the pressed button is pressed on the lower button DB) (S41403: No), the volume setting button image 815b is set as the light emitting mode (S41405). , The data in the cursor position storage area 223ga is updated to "01H" (S41406), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S41402, when it is determined that the data stored in the cursor position storage area 223ga is not the data indicating the upper cursor position (the data indicating the lower cursor position) (S41402: No), then it is determined whether or not the press on the upper button UB is detected (S41407). When it is determined that the pressing of the upper button UB is detected in the processing of S41407 (S41407: Yes), then the support button image 815a is set to the light emitting mode (S41408), and the data of the cursor position storage area 223ga is set to "". Update to "00H" (S41409), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S41407 that the press on the upper button UB is not detected (that is, the press on the lower button DB) (S41407: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 267, the details of the above-mentioned left / right button pressing process (S40815) will be described. As described above, this left / right button pressing process (S40815) is the cursor position (selected item) when the button is pressed when either the left button LB or the right button RB is pressed in the operation support effect. , And is a process for executing control according to the type of the button for which the press is detected.

In this left / right button pressing process (see FIG. 267), first, the data stored in the cursor position storage area 223ga is read (S41501), and the read data is the lower cursor position (“volume setting” item). It is determined whether or not the data indicates the selected state) (that is, "01H") (S41502). In the process of S41502, if it is determined that the data indicating the lower cursor position (“01H”) has been read (S41502: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the press on the right button RB has been detected (S41502: Yes). S41503).

When it is determined that the pressing of the right button RB is detected in the processing of S41503 (S41503: Yes), the volume setting of the pachinko machine 10 is increased by one step, and the volume bar displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The number (the number of bars with diagonal lines) is increased by one (S41504), and this process is terminated. If the volume setting is the maximum value (5 steps) at the time of pressing the right button RB, the volume setting cannot be increased any more, so the process of S41504 is skipped. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pressing of the left button LB is detected in the processing of S41503 (S41503: No), the volume setting of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced by one step and the volume displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The number of bars is reduced by one (S41505), and this process ends. If the volume setting is the minimum value (one step) at the time of pressing the left button LB, the volume setting cannot be further reduced, so the process of S41505 is skipped.

On the other hand, in the process of S41502, when it is determined that the data (“00H”) indicating the upper cursor position has been read (S41502: No), even though the item of “support” is selected. Since it means that the right button RB or the left button LB was pressed (the operation corresponding to the volume setting change was performed while the volume setting could not be changed), each process of S41503 to S41505 was skipped. This process ends as it is.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment, during the execution period of the operation support effect, whether to participate in the operation support effect or change the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is played by operating the operation button 230. It is configured so that the person can make a choice. Specifically, during the execution of the operation support effect, the item "support" (support button image 815a) and the item "volume setting" (volume setting button image 815b) are provided to the third symbol display device 81. Is configured to be displayed, and any item of the player can be selected by operating the upper button UB and the lower button DB. More specifically, each time the upper button UB is pressed with the item "support" selected, a character image 814 suggesting a big hit or an expectation for development is displayed, while "volume setting". By pressing the right button RB or the left button LB with the item "" selected, the volume setting of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, even if an operation corresponding to another item is performed in a state where one item is selected, the control corresponding to the other item is avoided. It is composed. That is, even if the right button RB or the left button RB is pressed while the "support" item is selected, the control for changing the volume setting is avoided (restricted). Further, even if the upper button UB is pressed while the "volume setting" item is selected, the "support" item is simply selected. That is, the control for displaying the character image 814 is avoided (restricted). As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the player who tries to participate in the operation support effect from making a mistake in the operation and unintentionally changing the setting of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, in addition to the character mode of the character image 814 displayed in the display area HR11 during the execution of the operation support effect, the display mode (emission color) of the support button image 815a is also used. , It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that will be a big hit. Further, the suggestion of the jackpot expectation degree by the display mode of the support button image 815a is more likely to occur when the player who does not perform any operation is playing the game (in the case of the jackpot, the emission color with high expectation degree). The ratio to be set is high). As a result, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit even for a player who does not participate in the operation support effect, so that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, the upper opening / closing door 6755bU and the ball discharge door 6755c are provided with a glass unit in order to suppress fraudulent acts of attracting the game ball from the front side of the game board 13 by using a magnet or the like. The arrangement is such that it is not easily affected by the attractive force due to the magnetic force generated from the front side of 16 (the arrangement is located on the back side of the front view from the other parts of the induction flow path 6755b). As a result, even if an illegal act of guiding the game ball to the distribution rotating body 6755f by a magnet or the like is performed, the influence of the magnetic force can be weakened directly above the upper opening / closing door 6755bU and the ball discharge door 6755c. The game ball easily flows down to the induction flow path 6755b2 directly under the upper opening / closing door 6755bU and the discharge area 6755d directly under the ball discharge door 6755c. That is, since it becomes difficult to guide the game ball to the distribution rotating body 6755f side, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts using a magnet or the like. In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, the game ball that has entered the lottery device 6755 is forcibly guided to the flow path on the distribution rotating body 6755f side by using a magnet or the like, and the game ball is distributed and rotated. The structure is such that the small hit validity period is set so that the small hit is completed before the ball enters any of the entrances by the body 6755. That is, even if all the game balls that have entered the lottery device 6755 have not reached any of the entrances (remaining in the lottery device 6755), a specific period (for example, for example) from the start of the small hit. The small hit is terminated when 6.5 seconds have passed. In other words, while the game ball that has flowed down in the lottery device 6755 can easily enter any of the entrances without the intervention of an external force such as a magnetic force (only by gravity or the inclination of the induction flow path 6755b). , With a configuration that forcibly (forces) changes the flow direction with a magnet or the like to set an effective period in which it becomes difficult for a game ball guided in a direction different from the original to reach one of the entrances. bottom. With this configuration, even if a fraudster tries to guide the game ball that has flowed into the lottery device 6755 to the distribution rotating body 6755f by using a magnet or the like, the distribution rotating body 6755f causes the game ball to move. Since the small hit validity period can be terminated before it is distributed to any of the entrances (even if the ball is entered in the V winning opening, the big hit does not start), the merit of cheating is eliminated. Can be done. Therefore, the deterrent effect against fraudulent activity can be further enhanced.

In the twelfth embodiment, the emission color of the support button image 815a displayed during the execution of the operation support effect suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit, but the target suggested by the emission color is a big hit. It is not limited to expectations. Instead of or in addition to the expectation of the jackpot, it may be configured to suggest the expectation for the development or the expectation of the V challenge small hit. With such a configuration, it is possible to pay more attention to the emission color (display mode) of the support button image 815a, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the twelfth embodiment, the emission color of the support button image 815a is set independently of the data table selected from the character mode selection table 222fa, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the emission color of the support button image 815a may be configured to suggest which of the character mode selection tables 222fa is used to draw the character mode. That is, when a table is set in which a high proportion of characters having a high degree of expectation is selected, a emission color having a high degree of expectation may be set for the support button image 815a. With this configuration, when a highly expected emission color is set, it is possible to more actively participate in the operation support effect.

In the twelfth embodiment, by forcibly ending the small hit when 6.5 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit game, fraudulent acts using magnets or the like become impossible (difficult). However, the method of deterring fraudulent acts using magnets or the like is not limited to this. For example, it is known that it is possible to detect whether or not the game ball is in contact with the ceiling portion in a predetermined range of the guide flow path 6755b (for example, the range where the upper opening / closing door 6755bU and the ball discharge door 6755c are provided). The sensor means may be provided, and an error may be notified when the period of contact with the sensor means is a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) or longer. When trying to guide the game ball to the distribution rotating body 6755f using a magnet or the like, it is necessary to float the game ball with respect to the induction flow path 6755bU at least when passing through the upper opening / closing door 6755bU and the ball discharge door 6755c. .. That is, the game ball easily comes into contact with the ceiling portion in the range where these are arranged. Therefore, when it is detected that the ceiling portion is in contact with the ceiling portion for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), it means that a fraudulent act using a magnet or the like is almost performed. Therefore, an error occurs in this case. By setting to notify the above, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts using magnets and the like.

<Modified example of the twelfth embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the twelfth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIG. 268. In the twelfth embodiment described above, the support button image 815a showing the item of "support" and the volume setting button image showing the item of "volume setting" for the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of the operation support effect. 815b was displayed, and it was possible to select an item (whether to participate in the operation support effect or change the volume setting) by the operation of the player. However, in the twelfth embodiment, the setting of the light amount cannot be changed during the execution of the operation support effect.

On the other hand, in this modification, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the item of "light intensity setting" (light intensity setting button 815 g) as well. That is, the item "support", the item "volume setting", and the item "light intensity" can be selected according to the operation of the player's operation button 230. As a result, not only the request of the player who wants to change the volume setting during the execution of the operation support effect but also the request of the player who wants to change the light amount setting can be satisfied. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be further improved.

FIG. 268 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during execution of the operation support effect in the modified example of the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 268, in this modification, in addition to the support button image 815a, the volume setting button image 815b, the upper button image 815c, and the lower button image 815d, they are displayed on the right side of the volume setting button image 815b. The left button image 815e having a substantially regular triangle shape facing left, the right button image 815f having a substantially regular triangle shape facing right displayed on the right side of the left button image 815e, and the horizontally long image displayed on the right side of the right button image 815f. A rectangular light amount setting button image of 815 g is displayed. The light amount setting button 815g is an item of "light amount setting" by pressing the right button RB in a state where the item of "volume setting" is selected (a state in which the volume setting image 815b emits light). Can be selected. That is, the volume setting image 815b has the appearance of being turned off, and the light amount setting image 815g has the appearance of emitting light (see FIG. 268). Further, when the left button LB is pressed with the item of "light intensity setting" selected, the item of "volume setting" is selected. On the other hand, if the left button LB or the right button RB is pressed while the "support" item is selected, the "support" item remains selected (the "light intensity setting" item is selected). Will not be done).

In this way, by configuring not only the volume setting but also the light amount setting to be changeable during the execution of the operation support effect, it is possible to fulfill the request of the player who wants to change the setting during the execution of the operation support effect. Can be done. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be further improved.

In this modified example, the item of "light intensity setting" can be selected by pressing the right button RB with the item of "volume setting" selected, but the operation content and selection for each button are configured. The correspondence with the items to be made can be arbitrarily determined. Specifically, for example, when the right button RB is pressed with the "support" item selected, the "light intensity setting" item is selected while the "light intensity setting" item is selected. When the left button LB is pressed, the item of "support" may be selected. With this configuration, the "support" item is selected regardless of whether the "volume setting" item or the "light intensity setting" item is selected (that is, the initial stage in the operation support effect). Since the selection can be made only by pressing the button 1 in the state), the convenience of the player can be further improved.

In the twelfth embodiment and its modified example, control according to the selected item is executed by performing an operation corresponding to the selected item in a state where one of the items is selected during the execution of the operation support effect. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the selection of the corresponding item may be confirmed by performing a predetermined determination operation (for example, an operation of pressing the center button CB) with any item selected. In this case, it may be configured so that it becomes impossible (difficult) to select another item after the determination operation. With this configuration, it is possible to concentrate on the items selected by the player.

In the eleventh embodiment and the twelfth embodiment, the character mode is determined by lottery every time the display condition of the character image 814 is satisfied during the execution of the operation support effect, but the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the character mode is stepped up (promoted in the order of white → blue → green → red) according to the number of operations of the player. In this case, for example, in the case of a big hit, it is possible to step up to red, but in the case of a miss, it may be configured so that it is impossible (difficult) to step up to red. Then, the predetermined number of operations in which step-up occurs in each color may be different depending on the lottery result of the special symbol and the tendency of the player's operation (participation status for the operation support effect). By adopting this configuration, the character mode with the lowest expectation is always displayed unless the operation is performed a certain number of times (for example, twice). Therefore, a player who wants to predict the expectation level from the character mode. It is possible to make the operation more positively. The condition for stepping up is not limited to the number of operations, and for example, it may be configured to draw a lottery for whether or not to step up with a probability according to the lottery result of a special symbol and the tendency of the player's operation. good. Even in this configuration, the player can be actively participated in the operation support effect. Further, in this case, the configuration may be configured to suggest in advance the susceptibility to step-up. Specifically, for example, the configuration may be suggested by the color of the character 813 imitating a bird. With this configuration, even for players who tend not to perform operations, if the character 813 with a high expectation of step-up occurrence is displayed, we will try to participate in the operation support production. Since it can be reminded, it is possible to further improve the player's willingness to participate in the operation support production.

In each of the above embodiments, the right variable winning device 65 is provided as a configuration for giving a prize ball by inserting a game ball in the case of a big hit or a small hit, but the configuration is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, it may be configured to be used for a gaming machine (so-called two-kind and one-kind two-kind type) in which a big hit is started when a gaming ball enters a specific area inside the right variable winning device 65. With this configuration, the more game balls that are passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, the more game balls will enter the right specific winning opening 65a, so the game balls will enter the specific area. It can make you think it is easy. Therefore, the player can determine the degree of expectation of a big hit from the number of game balls on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1.

In the first to fourth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, two types of specific winning openings (right specific winning opening 65a and left specific winning opening 650a) having different closing conditions are provided, depending on the number of rounds and the like. It was configured to switch the type of specific winning opening to be opened, but it is not limited to this. The configuration may be such that only the right specific winning opening 65a is provided, and the closing condition (maximum number of winnings) is switched by determining the number of rounds. With this configuration, the left variable winning device 650 can be deleted, so that the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of parts.

In the first to fourth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, by firing the game ball at the maximum firing intensity (rate of fire), the operating winning opening (operating winning opening 660 in the first to third embodiments, It is configured so that the game ball can always enter the right-operated winning opening 661 and the left-acting winning opening 662) in the fourth embodiment, and it is determined that the entry into the operating winning opening is effective only during the jackpot standby state. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in a state other than the jackpot standby state, it may be configured so that the ball cannot physically enter the operating winning opening. Specifically, for example, an electric accessory that can close the flow path for the operating winning opening is provided, and the electric accessory is provided only from the time when the jackpot standby state is reached until the game ball enters the operating winning opening. It may be configured to open things. Even in this configuration, the jackpot can be started based on the detection of the ball entering the operating winning opening in the jackpot standby state.

In each of the above embodiments, the start timing of the effect mode such as the standby state effect and the right-handed expectation suggestion effect and the update process of the mode are controlled on the voice lamp control device 113 side, but the present invention is not limited to this. not. For example, the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 may be configured to control the effect mode. As a result, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In this case, the passage detection sensor 228 may be electrically connected to the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. As a result, even if the control related to the effect mode is transplanted to another control device, the mode of the chance meter CM can be updated, the mode of the physical strength gauge LG can be updated, and the like can be accurately executed.

In the first to fourth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, a passage detection sensor 228 for detecting the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 during execution of the standby state effect is provided, and the sensor is provided. The configuration is such that the player can grasp the number of game balls on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 by changing the mode of the chance meter CM according to the detection result, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a known photographing means (for example, a video camera or the like) for photographing the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 is provided, and during the jackpot standby state, at least a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is photographed. The image or video taken by means may be displayed. As a result, the player can more accurately grasp the situation on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1.

In each of the above embodiments, by forming a zigzag-shaped flow path in which the traveling direction of the game ball is changed a plurality of times on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, when the game ball is continuously hit to the right, the jackpot is 1 The number of game balls exceeding the upper limit of winning numbers in the round round is configured to be able to flow down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 at the same time, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of forming a zigzag flow path on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1, the width of the opening / closing door 65f1 (and the right specific winning opening 65a) is simply widened to allow the game ball to pass over the opening / closing door 65f1. By increasing the distance, the number of game balls exceeding the upper limit number of winnings in the first round may be configured to be able to flow down at the same time. Further, in this case, it is not necessary that the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 at the same time when the player continuously hits the right side exceeds the upper limit number of winnings in the first round. For example, the width (path length) of the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 may be configured to be longer than the length obtained by multiplying the diameter of the game ball by the upper limit number of winnings in the first round. With this configuration, for example, when a ball is clogged and the game ball on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 cannot flow down below the game board 13, the first round is made on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 by right-handed strike. By simply reaching the maximum number of game balls in advance, in the case of the next big hit, it is possible to simultaneously enter the maximum number of game balls in the first round. It should be noted that a shielding member or the like may be provided to prevent the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 from flowing down below the game board 13 at normal times. That is, the game ball that has reached the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 may be configured to stay on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 until it becomes a big hit. With this configuration, just by hitting the game ball to the right before the big hit, it is possible to easily over-win the next big hit.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit is made, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the big hit until multiple (for example, two or three times) big hits occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a combination of probabilities (commonly known as a setting) related to a big hit lottery is provided in a plurality of stages and the setting can be changed on the game store side. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In addition, as a pachinko machine provided with a setting of a plurality of stages, a combination of jackpot probabilities (combination of a jackpot probability in a low probability state and a jackpot probability in a probabilistic state) may be one of a plurality of stages (for example, 6 stages). A typical example is one that can be set to, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, the ratio of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined when a jackpot is hit is implemented as a pachinko machine that can be changed according to the setting. May be. That is, the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player may be changed according to the setting, or the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player may be changed. More specifically, for example, the ratio at which the jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) is determined. The ratio may be changed according to the setting to change the degree of advantage for each setting. Further, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot to which a large number of time reductions (for example, 100 times) is given after the end of the jackpot can be changed according to the setting, or the jackpot to which a small number of time reductions (for example, 0 times) is given can be changed. The ratio at which is determined may be changed according to the setting. Further, the rate at which the jackpot that shifts to (or is easy to shift to) an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probable change state) after the end of the jackpot is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the disadvantageous gaming state (for example, the normal state) can be determined. ) May be changed according to the setting. In addition, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type is provided, in which the ratio determined only in a specific setting is significantly high (almost never determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, the setting is configured to be configurable in 6 steps from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set 6. In setting 6, the jackpot of 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2% in the case of a jackpot, while in other settings, the jackpot of 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. It may be configured. With this configuration, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so the player is made to pay attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot to play the game. be able to. Further, instead of or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 time reductions are given after the jackpot is completed may be configured to be higher than other settings. With this configuration, it is possible to focus on the number of times the time saving state ends and play the game. In addition to or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or an accessory inside the jackpot) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured to be provided so that the jackpot type can be easily determined by a specific setting (the ratio of determination is high). In addition, when the combination of jackpot probabilities is changed according to the setting, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability is increased as the setting is advantageous to the player, while in the probabilistic state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It may be configured to increase the jackpot probability as much as possible. This configuration is a type in which it is easy to increase the number of balls held as the number of lottery of special symbols increases (the number of prize balls to be paid out tends to be larger than the number of game balls fired), especially in the probabilistic state. It is effective in gaming machines. More specifically, for example, by applying it to a gaming machine of a type in which the probability change state continues until the next big hit is won, and the probability change state is a small hit with a high probability, the advantage of the high setting is achieved. You can improve your sex. That is, if the probability of becoming a big hit in the probable change state is low, the number of lottery until the next big hit tends to increase, so that there are many chances to win a prize ball as a small hit. Therefore, in the probable change state, it becomes easier to win more prize balls until the next big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

Further, in the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Each of the above-described embodiments and control examples may be configured by combining all or a part thereof. For example, the configuration of the pass detection sensor 228 of the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment may be applied to other embodiments. For example, by applying to the first embodiment, the gauge number of the chance meter CM during the execution of the standby state effect can be accurately linked by the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing door 65f1. More specifically, the passing number counter 223k in the sixth embodiment is also provided in the RAM 223 in the first embodiment, and the value of the passing number counter 223k is updated by the same method as in the fourth embodiment (FIG. 87). See S4211, S4212, S4219, S4220). Then, during the execution of the standby state effect, every time the value of the passing number counter 223k is updated, the mode of the chance meter CM is updated so that the gauge number corresponds to the updated counter value. As a result, the mode of the chance meter CM can be set to match the situation of the upper surface of the actual opening / closing door 65f1. For other embodiments, the configuration of the sixth embodiment can be diverted by the same method.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Characteristic A group> (Structure that tends to cause over-winning intentionally)
A specific area where the game ball can enter, a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the specific area, a specific flow path where the game ball can flow down, and the identification thereof. A game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in the flow path passes through the first position where it is easier to be guided to the specific area than it passes through the predetermined section, and the predetermined section rather than being guided to the specific area. A variable means that can be changed to a second position that facilitates, an operation means that can be operated by the player, and a game ball to the specific flow path when the operation content for the operation means becomes the first operation content. Launches a game ball at a first rate of fire that makes it easier to reach, and when the second operation content is different from the first operation content, the second launch is different from the first rate of fire. A launching means capable of launching a game ball at a speed, and when the launching means launches the game ball at the second rate of fire, it is more established than when it is launched at the first rate of fire. The variable means moves from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the determination means for determining whether the easy specific condition is satisfied and the determination that the specific condition is satisfied by the determination means. A game machine A1 comprising: a variable control means for controlling so as to be variable.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired (for example). , Patent No. 2514417).

However, with the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the game value that can be acquired is almost constant for each hit type, so it becomes like work to obtain the game value according to the hit type, and the game in the hit state. Was sometimes monotonous. That is, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines allow the player to determine the start timing of the hit state when a hit is won, but the game value that can be obtained during the hit is almost constant for each hit type. Since this is the same as other conventional gaming machines, it has been difficult to improve the interest of the player in the game during the hitting state.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, a predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the gaming ball enters a specific area where the gaming ball can enter. A first position in which a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in a specific flow path in which a game ball can flow is more likely to be guided to a specific area than passing through a predetermined section, and a predetermined section rather than being guided to a specific area. The variable means is variably configured with a second position that facilitates passage through. When the operation content for the operation means that can be operated by the player becomes the first operation content, the game ball is launched by the launching means at the first rate of fire that makes it easier for the game ball to reach the specific flow path. .. On the other hand, when the second operation content is different from the first operation content, the game ball is launched by the launching means at a second firing speed different from the first firing speed. When the game ball is launched at the second rate of fire by the launching means, it is determined by the determining means whether or not a specific condition that is more likely to be satisfied than when the game ball is launched at the first rate of fire is satisfied, and the determining means determines. Based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied, the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period.

As a result, the operating means can be operated with the expectation that a specific condition will be satisfied while the game ball is passing through the predetermined section, so that there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A1, the variable control means is such that the variable means is variable from the first position to the second position based on the fact that the first number of game balls have entered the specific area. The predetermined section is controlled, and the predetermined section is configured with a path length that allows a second number of game balls, which is larger than the first number, to flow down at the same time in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position. A gaming machine A2 characterized by being a machine.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, based on the fact that the first number of game balls have entered the specific area, the variable control means is controlled so that the variable means is variable from the first position to the second position. The predetermined section is configured with a path length that allows a second number of game balls, which is larger than the first number, to flow down at the same time in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position.

As a result, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section can be increased to a number exceeding the first number, and then the operation means can be operated in an attempt to satisfy the specific condition. Has the effect of being able to improve.

In the gaming machine A2, the launching means can launch a gaming ball at a predetermined interval or longer, and the gaming ball is continuously launched in the second direction at the predetermined interval in the predetermined section. In this state, the second number of gaming balls reach the predetermined section between the time when one gaming ball reaches the predetermined section and the time when the gaming ball passes through the predetermined section. A gaming machine A3 characterized in that a gaming ball is passed through so as to be possible.

According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2. That is, the launching means is configured to be able to launch the game ball at a time interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval. In the predetermined section, in a state where the game balls are continuously launched in the second direction at predetermined intervals, from the arrival of one game ball to the predetermined section until the game ball passes through the predetermined section. In the meantime, the game balls are configured to pass so that the second number of game balls can reach a predetermined section.

This has the effect that a player who wants to increase the number of game balls passing through a predetermined section to a number exceeding the first number can continuously shoot the game balls at predetermined intervals.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the variable means is configured to be able to guide all the gaming balls flowing down the predetermined section to the specific region when the variable means is changed to the first position. A gaming machine A4 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, when the position is changed to the first position, all the gaming balls flowing down the predetermined section are guided to a specific area. Since the variable means is configured in the above, by checking the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section, it is possible to know the number of game balls guided to the specific area when the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily understand the degree of advantage when a specific condition is satisfied.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the ball-entry means capable of entering the game ball is provided, and the discriminating means determines that the specific condition is satisfied when the game ball enters the ball-entry means. A gaming machine A5 characterized by being a pachinko machine.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, when the gaming ball enters the entry means into which the gaming ball can enter, a specific condition is satisfied by the discriminating means. Therefore, by launching the game ball aiming at the ball entry means, there is an effect that the specific condition can be easily satisfied at the player's favorite timing.

The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5 is provided with a deceleration means for decelerating the flowing speed of the gaming ball flowing down the predetermined section.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the flowing speed of the gaming ball flowing down the predetermined section is decelerated by the deceleration means, so that the gaming ball is directed toward the specific flow path. When fired continuously, it is possible to increase the number of gaming balls passing through a predetermined section. Therefore, there is an effect that the number of game balls guided to a specific area can be increased when a specific condition is satisfied.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, a display means capable of displaying the effect mode, an advantage determination means for determining the degree of advantage when the specific condition is satisfied until the specific condition is satisfied, and an advantage determination means thereof. The gaming machine A7 is characterized by comprising a suggestion effect executing means for executing the suggestion effect suggesting the degree of advantage determined by the advantage determination means in the display means.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the degree of advantage when the specific condition is satisfied is determined by the advantage determining means until the specific condition is satisfied, and the advantage is determined. Since the suggestion effect suggesting the degree of advantage determined by the determination means is executed in the display means by the suggestion effect execution means, the degree of advantage when the specific condition is satisfied by checking the suggestion effect displayed on the display means. Has the effect of making it easier to understand.

In the gaming machine A7, the advantageous discriminating means discriminates the number of gaming balls passing through the predetermined section, and the suggestion effect executing means determines the number of gaming balls determined by the advantageous discriminating means. The gaming machine A8, characterized in that the suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section is determined by the advantageous determination means. An effect suggesting the number of game balls determined by the advantageous determination means is executed as a suggestion effect by the suggestion effect execution means.

This has the effect that the player can easily know the number of game balls that enter the specific area when the specific condition is satisfied by confirming the suggestion effect.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, a specific lottery result was obtained by the entry means in which the game ball can enter, the lottery means for executing the lottery based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, and the lottery by the lottery means. Based on the above, the pachinko / pachislot means is provided with an effective state setting means for setting an effective state for valid entry to the ball entry means, and the discriminating means means that the gaming ball is transferred to the ball entry means during the effective state. The variable control means determines that the specific condition is satisfied when the ball enters, and the variable control means is the second variable control means based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied by the determination means. A gaming machine A9 characterized in that a variable game that is variable a predetermined number of times from a position to the first position is executed.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the following effects are played. That is, a lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, and based on the fact that a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery by the lottery means, it is effective to enter the ball into the entry means in which the game ball can enter. The valid state to be set is set by the valid state setting means. When the ball enters the ball entering means during the valid state, it is determined by the discriminating means that the specific condition is satisfied. Based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied by the determination means, the variable control means executes a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times.

This has the effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that a specific lottery result will be obtained by the lottery by the lottery means.

In the gaming machine A9, a plurality of positions including at least a first motion position in which the gaming ball easily enters the ball entry means and a second motion position in which the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the first motion position. The gaming machine A10 is characterized by comprising an operation means capable of operating at an operation position and an operation control means for operating the operation position of the operation means at a corresponding operation position according to an elapsed time.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it operates in a plurality of operation positions including at least a first operation position in which the game ball easily enters the ball entry means and a second operation position in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first operation position. The means are configured to be operational. The operation position of the operation means is operated by the operation control means to the operation position according to the elapsed time.

As a result, in order to satisfy the specific condition, it is necessary to launch the game ball toward the ball entry means aiming at the timing when the operation position of the operation means becomes the first operation position, so that the game ball is launched at the right time. It has the effect of giving the player the pleasure of making it.

<Characteristic B group> (Provide a jackpot that can aim for over-winning and a jackpot that cannot be aimed at)
A variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the first state, and the variable ball entry means. Based on the fact that a privilege granting means that grants a predetermined privilege based on the entry of a ball, a discrimination means that executes a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a discrimination by the discrimination means result in a specific discrimination. The variable game executing means for executing the variable game in which the variable ball-entry means is changed from the second state to the first state a predetermined number of times, the operating means that can be operated by the player, and the operating means thereof. As a type of variable game executed by the variable game execution means and a condition determination means for determining whether or not a specific condition that is likely to be satisfied when a specific operation is executed is satisfied, the determination by the determination means is used. The first variable game in which the variable game is started when the specific condition is determined to be satisfied by the condition determination means after the specific determination result is obtained, regardless of whether or not the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine B1 comprising: a second variable game in which the variable game is started, and a type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of including at least a plurality of variable games.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of hit types in which the number of times (number of rounds) of opening of the large opening where the prize ball is awarded by winning the game ball is different, and the game can be acquired. By making the values different, there are some that are trying to improve the interest of the hit (for example, Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

Further, in the conventional gaming machines, even if the number of rounds is the same, the number of gaming balls that can be won in each round is different by changing the opening pattern of the large opening in each round. Some have different degrees of advantage.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of prize balls that can be obtained is almost constant for each hit type, so that it becomes a work for obtaining a game value according to the hit type, and the winning state is in progress. In some cases, the game became monotonous. Further, since it is necessary to change the control according to the hit type during the hit state, there is a problem that the processing load during the hit state increases.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the variable entry means is variable between the first state in which the gaming ball can enter and the second state in which it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter than the first state. , A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the game ball enters the variable ball entering means. The discrimination is executed by the discriminant means based on the establishment of the discriminant condition, and the variable ball entry means is changed a predetermined number of times from the second state to the first state based on the fact that the discriminant result is a specific discriminant result. The variable game to be played is executed by the variable game execution means. The condition determination means determines whether or not a specific condition that is likely to be satisfied when a specific operation is executed for an operation means that can be operated by the player is satisfied. As a type of variable game executed by the variable game execution means, a variable game is started when it is determined by the condition determination means that a specific condition is satisfied after a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means. One type is determined by the type determining means from a plurality of games including at least a first variable game and a second variable game in which the variable game is started regardless of whether or not a specific condition is satisfied.

This has the effect that the timing at which the variable game is started can be different depending on the type of the variable game.

In the gaming machine B1, a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball in a direction corresponding to an operation on the operating means and a first position in which the gaming ball launched in the first direction by the launching means can enter. The gaming ball enters the entry means, the second entry means arranged at a position where the gaming ball launched in the second direction different from the first direction can enter, and the second entry means. The condition determination means includes a ball entry determination means for determining whether or not a ball has been hit, and the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied when a game ball enters the first ball entry means. The second variable game is based on the determination that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means by the ball entry determination means after the specific determination result is obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. The gaming machine B2, which is characterized in that it is started by.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the gaming ball is launched by the launching means in the direction corresponding to the operation with respect to the operating means, and the gaming ball launched in the first direction by the launching means enters the ball. The first ball entry means is arranged at a possible position. The second ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can enter. Whether or not the game ball has entered the second entry means is determined by the entry determination means. When the game ball enters the first ball entry means, it is determined by the condition determination means that the specific condition is satisfied. After a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means, the second variable game is started based on the determination that the game ball has entered the second entry means by the entry determination means.

As a result, since the ball entry means that is the start condition differs depending on the type of the variable game, the game ball can be launched in different directions according to the type of the variable game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be given the pleasure of changing the direction in which the game ball is launched.

In the gaming machine B2, a third entry means provided at a position where the gaming ball launched in the second direction can enter, and a first flow path through which the gaming ball launched in the second direction can flow down. A variable means capable of holding at least one gaming ball that has flowed into the first flow path, and a second position that makes it more difficult to hold the gaming ball than the first position, and the variable means thereof. The variable means is provided with a switching means for switching from the first position to the second position based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and the discrimination means includes the third ball entry. The determination is executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the means, and the second ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball that has passed through the first flow path can enter. A gaming machine B3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2. That is, a third ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction can enter. A first position where at least one game ball that has flowed into a first flow path where a game ball launched in the second direction can flow down can be held, and a second position where the game ball is less likely to be held than the first position. The variable means is variable depending on the position. The variable means is switched from the first position to the second position by the switching means based on the fact that the discrimination by the discriminating means yields a specific discriminant result. Discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third ball entering means. The second ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball that has passed through the first flow path can enter.

As a result, in order to execute the discrimination by the discrimination means, it is necessary to launch the game ball in the second direction, so that the game ball flows into the first flow path until a specific discrimination result is obtained. Can be done. Therefore, when the second variable game is determined by the type determining means, the game ball held in the first flow path can be immediately entered into the second entering means. Therefore, when the second variable game is decided, there is an effect that the second variable game can be started without the player firing the game ball.

In the gaming machine B3, the second ball entering means is a gaming ball launched in the first direction for a period until the gaming ball flowing down the first flow path enters the second ball entering means. B4 is a gaming machine B4, which is arranged at a position shorter than the period until the ball enters the variable ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B3, the period until the gaming ball flowing down the first flow path enters the second entering means is a gaming ball launched in the first direction. Since the second ball entry means is arranged at a position shorter than the period until the ball enters the variable ball entry means, when the second variable game is decided, the variable game is started immediately. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the gaming ball launched in the first direction is provided with a specific flow path through which the gaming ball can flow down, and the first state is a gaming ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in the specific flow path. However, it is easier to be guided to the variable ball entry means than to pass through the predetermined section, and in the second state, the gaming ball flowing down the predetermined section is guided to the variable ball entry means. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that it is in a state where it is easier to pass through the predetermined section than the above-mentioned machine.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first state, the game ball flowing down at least in a predetermined section in the specific flow path in which the game ball launched in the first direction can flow down is guided to the variable ball entry means rather than passing through the predetermined section. On the other hand, in the second state, it becomes easier for the game ball flowing down the predetermined section to pass through the predetermined section than to be guided to the variable milk ball means.

As a result, the more game balls that are passing through the predetermined section at the time of entering the first ball entry means, the more game balls can be guided to the variable entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property of launching a game ball in a direction.

In the gaming machine B5, the variable game executing means has a first number of games to the variable ball entry means when the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state at least first in the variable game of 1. The variable ball-entry means is controlled to be variable to the second position based on the ball entering, and the variable ball-entry means is changed to the second position in the predetermined section. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the second number of gaming balls, which is larger than the first number, is configured to have a path length that allows them to flow down at the same time.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable ball entry means is based on the fact that the first number of game balls have entered the variable ball entry means at least when the variable ball entry means is first changed to the first state in one variable game. Is controlled by the variable game executing means so as to be variable to the second position. The predetermined section is configured with a path length that allows a second number of game balls, which is larger than the first number, to flow down at the same time in a state where the variable ball entry means is changed to the second position.

As a result, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section can be increased to a number exceeding the first number, and then the operation means can be operated in an attempt to satisfy the specific condition. Has the effect of being able to improve.

In the gaming machine B6, the launching means can launch a gaming ball at a time interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval, and the gaming ball is continuously launched in the second direction at the predetermined interval in the predetermined section. In this state, the second number of gaming balls reach the predetermined section between the time when one gaming ball reaches the predetermined section and the time when the gaming ball passes through the predetermined section. A gaming machine B7 characterized in that a gaming ball is passed so as to be possible.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B6, the launching means is configured to be able to launch the gaming ball at a time interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval. In a state where the game balls are continuously launched in the second direction at predetermined intervals, between the arrival of one game ball with respect to the predetermined section and the passage of the game ball through the predetermined section, the first A predetermined section is configured so that the game balls pass so that the two game balls can reach the predetermined section.

This has the effect that a player who wants to increase the number of game balls passing through a predetermined section to a number exceeding the first number can continuously shoot the game balls at predetermined intervals.

The gaming machine B8 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7 is provided with a deceleration means for decelerating the flowing speed of the gaming ball flowing down the predetermined section.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the flowing speed of the gaming ball flowing down the predetermined section is decelerated by the deceleration means, so that the gaming ball is directed toward the specific flow path. When fired continuously, it is possible to increase the number of gaming balls passing through a predetermined section. Therefore, when a game ball enters the first ball entry means, the number of game balls guided by the variable ball entry means can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines B5 to B8, a display means capable of displaying an effect mode, a number determining means for determining the number of gaming balls passing through the predetermined section, and a gaming ball determined by the number determining means. The gaming machine B9 is provided with a suggestion effect executing means for executing a suggestion effect suggesting the number of the above-mentioned machines in the display means.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B5 to B8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of game balls passing through a predetermined section is determined by the number determination means, and a suggestion effect suggesting the number of game balls determined by the number determination means is executed by the suggestion effect execution means in the display means. ..

This has the effect that the player can easily know the number of game balls guided to the variable ball entry means when the game ball enters the first ball entry means by confirming the suggestion effect. There is.

In the gaming machine B9, during the execution of the suggestion effect, it is determined at predetermined intervals whether the number of game balls suggested by the suggestion effect and the number of game balls determined by the number determination means are different. It was determined by the difference discriminating means for discriminating and the difference discriminating means that the number of game balls suggested by the suggestion effect and the number of game balls discriminated by the number discriminating means are different. B10 is characterized by comprising a suggestion effect updating means for updating the mode of the suggestion effect to a mode suggesting the number of game balls determined by the number determination means.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, during the execution of the suggestion effect, whether or not the number of game balls suggested by the suggestion effect is different from the number of game balls determined by the number determination means is determined by the difference determination means for each predetermined period. To. Based on the fact that the difference discriminating means determines that the number of game balls suggested by the suggestion effect and the number of game balls determined by the number discriminating means are different, the mode of the suggestion effect is determined. The suggestion effect updating means is updated to suggest the number of game balls determined by the number determination means.

As a result, the mode of the suggestion effect can be updated corresponding to the number determined by the number determination means at predetermined intervals, so that when the ball is entered into the first entry means, it is guided to the variable entry means. There is an effect that the player can more easily know the number of game balls to be played.

In the game machine B2, a third ball entry means in which the game ball launched in the second direction is provided at a position where the ball can enter, and the determination condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball, and an effect mode. A display means capable of displaying, a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect based on the determination by the discriminating means in the display means, and the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. As an effect mode, when the specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means and the first variable game is determined by the type determination means, the first aspect is determined, and the discrimination by the discrimination means is described. The second variable game is determined when the discriminant result is different from the specific discriminant result, or when the discrimination by the discriminating means results in the specific discriminant result and the type determining means determines the second variable game. The gaming machine B11 is provided with a production mode determining means capable of determining a second aspect different from the first aspect.

According to the gaming machine B11, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2. That is, a third ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can enter, and the determination condition is satisfied based on the game ball entering. In the display means capable of displaying the effect mode, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means based on the determination by the discriminating means. As an effect mode of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means, when the discrimination by the discriminating means produces a specific determination result and the first variable game is determined by the type determination means, the first aspect is determined by the effect mode determining means. Is determined. On the other hand, when the discrimination by the discrimination means results in an outlier discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result, or when the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result and the second variable game is determined by the type determination means. The second aspect, which is different from the first aspect, is determined as the effect mode of the specific effect by the effect mode determining means.

As a result, when the second variable game is determined, the player can be made to think that the specific determination result has not been obtained. Therefore, even after the specific effect of the second aspect is executed, it is possible to continue firing the game ball in the second direction in order to make the discrimination by the discrimination means, so that it is noticed that the specific discrimination result is obtained. The game ball can be entered into the second entry means before it is reached. Therefore, since the player can be given the impression that the second variable game is suddenly started, there is an effect that the player can be surprised and joyful.

In the gaming machine B11, the specific effect of the second aspect executed based on the determination by the discrimination means resulting in the specific discrimination result and the determination of the second variable game by the type determination means. In the period from the end to the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means, the pseudo-specific effect in which the pseudo-specific effect indistinguishable from the specific effect of the second aspect can be executed can be executed. A gaming machine B12 characterized by comprising an execution means.

According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B11, the second variable game is executed based on the fact that the discrimination by the discriminating means yields a specific discriminating result and the type determining means determines the second variable game. During the period from the end of the specific effect of the aspect to the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means, the pseudo specific effect of the aspect that is difficult to distinguish from the specific effect of the second aspect is executed. Since it is executed by means, when the second variable game is determined by the type determining means, there is an effect that it is difficult for the player to notice that a specific determination result has been obtained.

In the game machine B12, an acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means, and the discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means. It is stored in the discrimination information storage means that can store up to a predetermined number of information, an erasing means that erases the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means from the discrimination information storage means, and the discrimination information storage means. The information number image suggesting the number of information of the discrimination information is displayed on the display means, and the discrimination by the discrimination means yields the specific discrimination result, and the type determination means causes the second. In the period from the end of the specific effect of the second aspect executed based on the determination of the variable game to the entry of the game ball into the second entry means, the pseudo The gaming machine B13 is characterized by comprising an image updating means for updating the information number image to an image corresponding to the information number having a small number of information each time a specific effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine B13, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B12. That is, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means, the discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the acquisition means. The discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the discrimination information storage means up to a predetermined number of information. The discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means is erased from the discrimination information storage means by the erasing means. The information number image suggesting the number of information of the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is displayed on the display means by the information number image display means. After the specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means and the specific effect of the second aspect executed based on the determination of the second variable game by the type determination means is completed, the second ball entry means is reached. In the period until the game ball enters the ball, the information number image is updated to the image corresponding to the information number with one less information amount by the image updating means every time the pseudo-specific effect is executed.

As a result, the number of information images are updated by the image updating means, so that the player can be made to think that the number of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is decreasing. Therefore, when the second variable game is determined by the type determination means, the game ball is seconded to the player who wants to execute the determination by the discrimination means without interruption even after a specific determination result is obtained. It has the effect of being able to continue firing in the direction.

<Characteristic C group> (Over-winning navigation is performed when a small hit is won in an advantageous game state)
A specific area where the pachinko ball can enter, a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the ball entering the specific area, a specific flow path where the pachinko ball can flow down, and the identification thereof. A gaming ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in the flow path passes through the first position where it is easier to be guided to the specific area than it passes through the predetermined section, and the predetermined section rather than being guided to the specific area. The variable means that can be changed to a second position that facilitates, a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and the variable means based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means yields a specific discrimination result. Is a variable game executing means that executes a variable game that is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period, and when the discrimination by the discrimination means results in the specific discrimination result, the variable means is said to be the same. The gaming machine C1 is provided with a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect before being variable to the first position.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a winning game advantageous to the player is given. Further, on the display device, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed in addition to the design, and the entertainment of the game is improved by executing a wide variety of entertainment effects (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886). Gazette).

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of whether or not a winning game that is advantageous to the player is subsequently given by the effect displayed on the display device. There are also things that have been done.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it has already been decided whether or not it will be advantageous to the player when the effect suggesting the degree of expectation is started, so that the content of the effect itself is the degree of advantage of the player. Does not affect. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to pay attention to the display device and play the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, a predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the gaming ball enters a specific area where the gaming ball can enter. A first position in which a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in a specific flow path in which a game ball can flow is more likely to be guided to a specific area than passing through a predetermined section, and a predetermined section rather than being guided to a specific area. The variable means is variable to the second position where it is easy to pass through. Discrimination is executed by the discriminant means based on the establishment of the discriminant condition, and the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the fact that the discriminant result is a specific discriminant result. The variable game is executed by the variable game execution means. When the discrimination by the discriminating means yields a specific discriminant result, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means before the variable means is variable to the first position.

As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the specific effect is changed to the first position by confirming whether or not the specific effect has been executed, so that there is an effect that the effect can be more noticed.

In the gaming machine C1, the specific effect executing means suggests, as the specific effect, a firing timing in which the variable means may be changed to the first position while the game ball passes through the predetermined section. The gaming machine C2, which is characterized by executing the above.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, as a specific effect, an effect suggesting a firing timing in which the variable means may be changed to the first position while the gaming ball passes through a predetermined section. Is executed by the specific effect executing means, so that there is an effect that the specific effect can be more noticed.

In the gaming machines C1 or C2, during the predetermined period, the period from when the gaming ball is launched in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged until the launched gaming ball reaches the specific flow path. A gaming machine C3 characterized in that it is shorter than the period.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the launched gaming ball is launched into the specific flow path for a predetermined period after the gaming ball is launched in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged. Since it is configured to be shorter than the period until reaching, it can be difficult to obtain a predetermined privilege unless the game ball is fired at the time when the specific effect is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the specific effect is executed.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the variable means moves from the second position to the first position based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a second discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. A second variable game executing means for executing a second variable game that is variable a specific number of times is provided, and the period during which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position in the second variable game is A gaming machine C4 characterized in that it tends to be longer than the predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are played. That is, the second variable game in which the variable means is changed a specific number of times from the second position to the first position based on the second discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result by the discrimination by the discrimination means is the first. 2 It is executed by the variable game execution means. In the second variable game, the period in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position is configured to be longer than a predetermined period.

This has the effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the second variable game will be executed.

In the gaming machine C4, the dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination by the discriminating means, and the dynamic display executing means for the variable game type, the movement of the identification information by the dynamic display executing means. The first variable game in which the period from the end of the target display until the variable means is changed to the first position is set in the first period, and the variable after the dynamic display of the identification information is completed. A type of one variable game is determined from a plurality of games including at least a second variable game in which the period until the means is changed to the first position is set to a second period shorter than the first period. The suggestion effect executing means includes a type determining means, and the suggestion effect executing means is between the time when the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display executing means is completed and the time when the variable means is changed to the first position. The gaming machine C5, characterized in that it executes the suggestion effect.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are played. That is, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination by the discrimination means. As the types of variable games, the first variable game in which the period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display execution means until the variable means is changed to the first position is set as the first period, and the first variable game. Among a plurality including at least a second variable game in which the period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information to the change of the variable means to the first position is set to the second period shorter than the first period. The type of the variable game from 1 to 1 is determined by the type determining means. The suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means between the end of the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display execution means and the time when the variable means is changed to the first position.

As a result, if the first variable game is determined, more game balls can be reached in the predetermined section than in the second variable game, so that the game is expected to be determined in the first variable game. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machine C5, the first period is a period from when the gaming ball is launched in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged until the launched gaming ball reaches the specific flow path. The second period is from the time when the game ball is launched in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged until the launched game ball reaches the specific flow path. The gaming machine C6, which is characterized in that the period is shorter than the period of.

According to the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C5. That is, the first period after the game ball is launched in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged is longer than the period until the launched game ball reaches the specific flow path. Has been done. On the other hand, the second period is shorter than the period from when the game ball is launched in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged until the launched game ball reaches the specific flow path. Has been done.

As a result, in the case of the second variable game, it becomes difficult for the game ball to reach the specific flow path, so that the effect that the first variable game can be expected to be determined more strongly can be expected. There is.

In the gaming machine C1, the dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means and the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result are being executed. As the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means, the first type determination of determining one specific effect from a plurality of including at least a first effect and a second effect different from the first effect. A second specific effect execution that executes the specific effect during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information based on the means and the discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means that is different from the specific discrimination result. As a type of the specific effect executed by the means and the second specific effect executing means, a second type that determines one specific effect from a plurality of including at least the first effect and the second effect. The first effect is provided with a determination means, and the ratio determined by the first type determination means is higher than the ratio determined by the second type determination means, and the second effect is determined. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the ratio determined by the first type determining means is lower than the ratio determined by the second type determining means.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are played. That is, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination by the discrimination means. The type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result includes at least a first effect and a second effect different from the first effect. One specific effect from the plurality is determined by the first type determining means. The specific effect is executed by the second specific effect executing means during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information based on the fact that the determination by the determination means results in a deviation determination result different from the specific determination result. As the type of the specific effect executed by the second specific effect executing means, one specific effect is determined by the second type determining means from a plurality of specific effects including at least the first effect and the second effect. The first effect is configured so that the ratio determined by the first type determining means is higher than the ratio determined by the second type determining means. On the other hand, the second effect is configured so that the ratio determined by the second type determining means is higher than the ratio determined by the second type determining means.

This has the effect that the degree of expectation that the variable game is executed can be changed according to the content of the specific effect.

In the gaming machine C7, the specific flow path is arranged during the period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result until the variable means is changed to the first position. It is shorter than the period from when the game ball is launched in the direction in which the ball is launched until the launched game ball reaches the specific flow path, and the specific flow path is in the predetermined period. The gaming machine C8 is characterized in that the period from when the gaming ball is launched in the arranged direction until the launched gaming ball reaches the specific flow path is shorter than the period.

According to the gaming machine C8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C7. That is, during the period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result until the variable means is changed to the first position, the game ball moves in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged. It is configured to be shorter than the period from when it is launched until the launched game ball reaches a specific flow path. The predetermined period is configured to be shorter than the period from when the game ball is launched in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged until the launched game ball reaches the specific flow path. There is.

As a result, the game ball cannot reach the predetermined section unless the game ball is launched toward the specific flow path during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information, so that a specific discrimination result is obtained from the content of the specific effect. It has the effect of making it possible to predict whether or not it is more serious.

In the gaming machine C7 or C8, the first type determining means is configured so that a third effect different from the first effect and the second effect can be determined at a predetermined ratio, and the second type can be determined. The gaming machine C9 is characterized in that the determining means is configured so that it is impossible to determine the third effect.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C7 or C8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the third effect, which is different from the first effect and the second effect, is determined by the first type determining means at a predetermined ratio. The second type determining means is configured so that it is impossible to determine the third effect.

As a result, when the third effect is executed, it is determined that a specific determination result has been obtained at that time, so that there is an effect that the player can be pleased.

<Characteristic D group> (By varying the length of the closing period during the jackpot, the likelihood of over-winning is variable)
A specific area where the game ball can enter, a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the specific area, a specific flow path where the game ball can flow down, and the identification thereof. A gaming ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in the flow path passes through the first position where it is easier to be guided to the specific area than it passes through the predetermined section, and the predetermined section rather than being guided to the specific area. The variable means that can be changed to a second position that facilitates, the discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the variable means based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means yields a specific discrimination result. Variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times, and first control and the variable means as control methods for the variable means during execution of the variable game. A control method of one from a plurality of control methods including at least a second control in which the number of gaming balls passing through the predetermined section is likely to be larger than that of the first control at the timing when is changed to the first position. A gaming machine D1 comprising: a control method determining means for determining.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of hit types in which the number of openings (number of rounds) of the large opening where the prize ball is awarded by winning the game ball is different, and the game can be acquired. By making the values different, there are some that are trying to improve the interest of the hit (for example, Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

Further, in the conventional gaming machines, even if the number of rounds is the same, the number of gaming balls that can be won in each round is different by making the opening pattern of the large opening different in each round. Some have different degrees of advantage.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of prize balls that can be obtained is almost constant for each hit type, so that it becomes like a work for obtaining a game value according to the hit type, and the winning state is in progress. In some cases, the game became monotonous. That is, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to improve the interest in the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, a predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the gaming ball enters a specific area where the gaming ball can enter. A first position in which a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in a specific flow path through which the game ball can flow is more likely to be guided to the specific flow path than passing through the predetermined section, and a predetermined position rather than being guided to a specific area. The variable means is variable to the second position where it is easy to pass through the section. Discrimination is executed by the discriminant means based on the establishment of the discriminant condition, and the variable means is varied a predetermined number of times from the second position to the first position based on the fact that the discriminant result is a specific discriminant result. The variable game is executed by the variable game execution means. As a control method of the variable means during execution of the variable game, a first control and a second control in which the number of game balls passing through a predetermined section at the timing when the variable means is changed to the first position tends to be larger than that of the first control. A control method is determined by the control method determining means from among a plurality of control methods including at least.

As a result, when a specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means, the game can be performed with the expectation that the variable means will be controlled by the second control. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine D1, the second control is a case where at least one of the plurality of periods in which the variable means is changed to the second position in the variable game of 1 is controlled by the first control. The gaming machine D2 characterized in that it is controlled so as to be longer than the above.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, at least one of the plurality of periods in which the variable means is changed to the second position in one variable game is the first. Since it is configured to be longer than when it is controlled by control, the second control can make more game balls reach a predetermined section. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with a stronger expectation that the variable means will be controlled by the second control.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes a dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of identification information indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and the first control is the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result. The period from the end of the dynamic display of the variable means to the variable means to the first position is controlled to be the first period, and the second control is the specific determination. Controlled so that the period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the result until the variable means is changed to the first position is a second period longer than the first period. The gaming machine D3 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D1 or D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination by the discrimination means. In the first control, the period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result until the variable means is changed to the first position is controlled to be the first period. In the second control, the period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result until the variable means is changed to the first position is the second period longer than the first period. Is controlled by.

As a result, when the game ball is continuously fired toward the specific flow path after the dynamic display of the identification information is completed, the second control can make more game balls reach the predetermined section. Therefore, there is an effect that more game balls can be put into a specific area when the variable means is changed to the first position.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the variable means is based on the fact that a first or more game balls enter the specific area while the variable means is variable to the first position. Is provided with variable control means for controlling the variable means to the second position, and the predetermined section has a second number larger than the first number in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position. The gaming machine D4, characterized in that the gaming balls are configured to have a path length that allows them to flow down at the same time.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are played. That is, the variable means is variable to the second position by the variable control means based on the fact that the first number or more of the game balls have entered the specific area while the variable means is variable to the first position. Is controlled. The predetermined section is configured with a path length that allows a second or more game balls, which are larger than the first number, to flow down at the same time in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position.

As a result, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the variable means will be changed to the first position after the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section exceeds the first number. be.

The gaming machine D4 includes an operating means that can be operated by the player, and a launching means that can launch the game ball into the gaming area at a firing speed according to the operation content of the operating means at intervals of a predetermined interval or longer. In the predetermined section, in a state where the game balls are continuously fired in the second direction at the predetermined intervals, after one game ball arrives at the predetermined section, the game ball is said to be the same. The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the gaming ball is passed so that the second number of gaming balls can reach the predetermined section before passing through the predetermined section.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D4, the launching means for launching the gaming ball into the gaming area at a time interval of a predetermined interval or more at a firing speed according to the operation content for the operating means that can be operated by the player. Fired by. In the predetermined section, in a state where the game balls are continuously launched in the second direction at predetermined intervals, from the arrival of one game ball to the predetermined section until the game ball passes through the predetermined section. In the meantime, the game balls are passed so that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section.

This has the effect that a player who wants to increase the number of game balls passing through a predetermined section to a number exceeding the first number can continuously shoot the game balls at predetermined intervals.

In the gaming machine D5, in the second control, the launching means fires a specific period, which is at least one of a plurality of periods in which the variable means is variable to the second position in the variable game of 1. The control is performed so that at least the first number or more of the game balls are controlled to have a length capable of reaching the predetermined section, and in the first control, the specific period is the launching means. The gaming machine D6 is characterized in that the gaming machine D6 is controlled so as to have a period of a length in which it is difficult to reach the predetermined number or more of the gaming balls launched by the above-mentioned predetermined section.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D5, the following effects are played. That is, in the second control, the specific period, which is at least one period among the plurality of periods in which the variable means is changed to the second position in one variable game, is at least the first number or more fired by the launching means. The length is controlled so that the game ball can reach a predetermined section. In the first control, the specific period is controlled so that the game balls launched by the launching means have a length that makes it difficult to reach the predetermined section by the first number or more.

As a result, when the variable means is controlled by the second control, there is an effect that the first number or more of the game balls can be entered into the specific area by continuously firing the game balls during the specific period. ..

The gaming machine D7 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6 is provided with a deceleration means for decelerating the flowing speed of the gaming ball flowing down the predetermined section.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the flowing speed of the gaming ball flowing down the predetermined section is decelerated by the deceleration means, so that the gaming ball is continuously directed toward the specific flow path. When fired, more game balls can be passed through a predetermined section. Therefore, there is an effect that the number of game balls guided to a specific region can be increased when the variable means is changed to the first position.

The gaming machine D8 is characterized in that the deceleration means is composed of a zigzag-shaped flow path in the gaming machine D7.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D7, since the deceleration means is composed of a zigzag-shaped flow path, the flowing direction of the gaming ball can be changed a plurality of times in a predetermined section. Therefore, there is an effect that the speed of the game ball can be reduced more reliably.

In the gaming machine D7, the deceleration means is characterized in that the dynamic frictional force between the gaming ball and the predetermined section is made higher than other points in the specific flow path.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D7, the dynamic frictional force between the gaming ball and the predetermined section is made higher than other points in the specific flow path by the deceleration means, so that the flowing of the gaming ball in the predetermined section It has the effect of being able to slow down the speed more reliably.

<Characteristic E group> (Production that suggests the degree of advantage when a big hit is started)
Based on the display means that can display the effect mode, the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination by the discrimination means, after the specific discrimination result is obtained, the specific condition is satisfied. When the execution of the privilege game is started in a predetermined period between the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the time when the specific condition is satisfied after the specific determination result is obtained. The gaming machine E1 is provided with a suggestion effect execution means for executing the suggestion effect suggesting the degree of advantage to the player in the display means.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a winning game advantageous to the player is given. Further, on the display device, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed in addition to the design, and the entertainment of the game is improved by executing a wide variety of entertainment effects (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886). Gazette).

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of whether or not a winning game that is advantageous to the player is subsequently given by the effect displayed on the display device. There are also things that have been done.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it has already been decided whether or not it will be advantageous to the player when the effect suggesting the degree of expectation is started, so that the content of the effect itself is the degree of advantage of the player. Does not affect. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to pay attention to the display device and play the game.

According to the gaming machine E1, the effect mode is displayed on the display means. The discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. After a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means, the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, which is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied. The suggestion effect that suggests to the player the degree of advantage when the execution of the privilege game is started in the predetermined period from the result of the specific determination to the establishment of the specific condition is displayed by the suggestion effect execution means. Is executed in.

This has the effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the suggestion effect.

In the gaming machine E1, an operating means that can be operated by a player, a launching means that can launch a game ball at a rate of fire according to the operation content for the operating means, and a gaming ball launched by the launching means can enter. The gaming machine E2 is provided with a ball entering means, and the specific condition is satisfied when the gaming ball enters the ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball is launched by the launching means at a rate of fire according to the operation content of the operating means that can be operated by the player. A specific condition is satisfied when the game ball enters the ball entry means on which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter.

This has the effect that the timing at which the game ball is launched can be adjusted according to the content suggested by the suggestion effect.

In the game machine E1 or E2, a specific area where the game ball can enter, a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area, and a game ball can flow down. A first position in which a specific flow path and a gaming ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in the specific flow path are more likely to be guided to the specific area than passing through the predetermined section, and more than being guided to the specific area. Also includes a variable means that can be changed to a second position that facilitates passing through the predetermined section, and the privilege game executing means places the variable means in the second position based on the satisfaction of the specific condition. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it is variable to the first position a predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 or E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the game ball enters a specific area where the game ball can enter. A first position in which a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in a specific flow path through which the game ball can flow is more likely to be guided to the specific flow path than passing through the predetermined section, and a predetermined position rather than being guided to a specific area. The variable means is variable to the second position where it is easy to pass through the section. Based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied, the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times by the privilege game executing means.

This has the effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section at the timing when the specific condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine E3, the variable means is changed based on the fact that the first number of gaming balls enter the specific area after the variable means is changed to the first position during the execution of the privilege game. The variable control means for controlling the variable from the first position to the second position is provided, and the predetermined section is larger than the first number in the state where the variable means is variable to the second position. A gaming machine E4 characterized in that a second number of gaming balls are configured to have a path length that allows them to flow down at the same time.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, during the execution of the privilege game, the variable means is changed from the first position to the second position based on the fact that the first number of game balls enter the specific area after the variable means is changed to the first position. It is controlled by a variable control means so as to be variable. The predetermined section is configured with a path length that allows a second number of game balls, which is larger than the first number, to flow down in a state in which the variable means is changed to the second position.

As a result, it is possible to expect that the specific condition is satisfied after the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section is set to exceed the first number, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. There is an effect.

The gaming machine E4 includes an operating means that can be operated by a player and a launching means that can launch a game ball at a firing speed according to the operation content for the operating means at a time interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval. Is a state in which the game balls are continuously launched toward the specific flow path at the predetermined intervals, and after one game ball arrives at the predetermined section, the game ball hits the predetermined section. The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the gaming ball is passed so that the second number of gaming balls can reach the predetermined section before passing.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball is fired by the firing means at a time interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval at a firing speed according to the operation content for the operating means that can be operated by the player. In the predetermined section, in a state where the game balls are continuously launched toward the specific flow path at predetermined intervals, the game ball passes through the predetermined section after one game ball arrives at the predetermined section. In the meantime, the game balls are made to flow down so that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section.

This has the effect that a player who wants to increase the number of game balls passing through a predetermined section to a number exceeding the first number can continuously shoot the game balls at predetermined intervals.

In any of the gaming machines E3 to E5, a number determining means for determining the number of gaming balls passing through the predetermined section is provided, and the suggestion effect executing means determines the number of gaming balls determined by the number determining means. The gaming machine E6 characterized in that the suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines E3 to E5, the following effects are played. That is, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section is determined by the number determination means. An effect suggesting the number of game balls determined by the number determination means is executed as a suggestion effect by the suggestion effect execution means.

As a result, the number of game balls guided to the specific area when the specific condition is satisfied can be easily understood by the player depending on the content of the suggestion effect, so that the number can be specified while a larger number is suggested. There is an effect that the game can be played with the expectation that the conditions will be satisfied.

In the gaming machine E6, during the execution of the suggestion effect, the effect mode update means for updating the effect mode of the suggestion effect according to the number of game balls determined by the number determination means, and the effect thereof. When updating the effect mode of the suggestion effect by the mode updating means, it is determined whether the number of game balls suggested by the suggestion effect matches the number of game balls determined by the number determination means. It is determined that the number of game balls suggested by the suggestion effect and the number of game balls determined by the number determination means match the match determination means for determining each period and the match determination means. In this case, the gaming machine E7 is provided with an update avoidance means for preventing the effect mode from being updated by the effect mode update means.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, during the execution of the suggestion effect, the effect mode of the suggestion effect is updated by the effect mode update means according to the number of game balls determined by the number determination means at predetermined periods. When the effect mode of the suggestion effect is updated by the effect mode update means, it is determined whether the number of game balls suggested by the suggestion effect matches the number of game balls determined by the number determination means. It is determined every predetermined period by means. When it is determined by the match determination means that the number of game balls suggested by the suggestion effect and the number of game balls determined by the number determination means match, the effect update means updates the effect mode. It is avoided by the update avoidance means.

As a result, the frequency with which the effect mode is updated can be reduced, so that there is an effect that the processing load required for updating the effect mode can be reduced.

In the gaming machine E6 or E7, in the predetermined section, a plurality of passage detecting means capable of detecting the passage of the game ball are arranged at a plurality of places, and the number determination means is the plurality of passage detecting means. Among them, the gaming machine E8 is characterized in that the number of the passing detecting means for detecting the passage of the gaming ball is determined as the number of the gaming balls passing through the predetermined section.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6 or E7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a plurality of passage detecting means capable of detecting the passage of the game ball are arranged at a plurality of locations in a predetermined section. Among the plurality of passage detecting means, the number of passage detecting means for detecting the passage of the game ball is determined by the number determining means as the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section.

This has the effect that the number of game balls passing through a predetermined section can be accurately determined.

<Characteristic F group> (Direction showing the degree of expectation whether it will be advantageous when hitting right)
A ball entry means arranged at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction can enter, a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, and the discrimination. Advantageous state setting means for setting an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when the game ball is launched in a second direction different from the first direction based on the specific determination result obtained by the determination by the means. The identification is performed by the display means capable of displaying the identification information, the dynamic display execution means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means in the display means, and the dynamic display execution means thereof. While the dynamic display of information is being executed, a specific effect that suggests the degree of expectation of whether or not an advantageous gaming state will occur when the game ball is launched in the second direction can be executed. A gaming machine F1 characterized by comprising an execution means.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a winning game advantageous to the player is given. Further, on the display device, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed in addition to the design, and the entertainment of the game is improved by executing a wide variety of entertainment effects (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886). Gazette).

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of whether or not a winning game that is advantageous to the player is subsequently given by the effect displayed on the display device. There are also things that have been done.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it has already been decided whether or not it will be advantageous to the player when the effect suggesting the degree of expectation is started, so that the content of the effect itself is the degree of advantage of the player. Does not affect. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to pay attention to the display device and play the game.

According to the gaming machine F1, discrimination is executed by the discriminating means based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the ball entering means arranged at a position where the gaming ball launched in the first direction can enter. .. An advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when the game ball is launched in a second direction different from the first direction based on the result of the specific determination by the discrimination means is determined by the advantageous state setting means. Set. The dynamic display of the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is executed in the display means by the dynamic display execution means. A specific effect that suggests the degree of expectation of whether or not an advantageous gaming state will occur when the gaming ball is launched in the second direction while the dynamic display of the identification information is being executed by the dynamic display executing means. Is executed by the specific effect executing means.

As a result, the player can be made to judge whether or not it is better to shoot the game ball in the second direction according to the suggestion content of the specific effect, so that the effect of being able to pay attention to the specific effect and perform the game. There is.

In the gaming machine F1, the advantageous state is such that the launch of the gaming ball in the second direction is started during a specific period during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result. It is easier for the player to be more advantageous than starting the firing of the gaming ball in the second direction after the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result is completed, and the specific effect executing means is When the specific effect is executed during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result, the specific effect is executed during the effect period including at least a part of the specific period. The gaming machine F2 featuring.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are played. That is, when it becomes an advantageous state, it is better to start launching the game ball in the second direction during a specific period during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result, the identification showing the specific discrimination result. It is more likely to be advantageous to the player than to start firing the game ball in the second direction after the dynamic display of the information is completed. When the specific effect is executed during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means during the effect period including at least a part of the specific period.

This makes it possible for the player to determine whether or not to start firing the game ball in the second direction during the effect period of the specific effect from the suggested content of the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played by paying more attention to the suggested content of the specific effect.

In the gaming machine F2, the advantageous state is characterized in that it is easier for the player to start firing the gaming ball in the second direction earlier during the specific period. Gaming machine F3.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, in an advantageous state, it is easier for the player to start launching the gaming ball in the second direction earlier during a specific period. Therefore, when the specific effect is executed, the player can be made to think whether or not to launch the game ball in the second direction as soon as possible. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can give a feeling of tension during the execution of the specific effect.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, as the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means, it is determined when the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result is executed. A first specific effect in which the ratio is high, and a second specific effect in which the ratio determined when the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result is executed is lower than that of the first specific effect. The gaming machine F4 is characterized by comprising an effect type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least.

According to the gaming machine F4, in any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, when the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result is executed as the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. The first specific effect in which the determined ratio is high, and the second specific effect in which the determined ratio is lower when the dynamic display of the identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is executed than in the first specific effect. Since one type is determined by the effect type determining means from a plurality of types including at least, whether or not the identification information indicating a specific determination result is dynamically displayed from the effect type of the specific effect. You can make the player guess. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay attention to the type of the specific effect and play the game.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, a specific area in which the game ball can enter, a privilege giving means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area, and the second method. A specific flow path provided at a position where a game ball launched in a direction can flow in, and a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in the specific flow path are in the specific area rather than passing through the predetermined section. The advantageous state setting means is provided with variable means that can be varied between a first position that is easily guided and a second position that is easier to pass through the predetermined section than being guided to the specific region, and the advantageous state setting means is said to be advantageous. As a state, the control for changing the variable means from the second position to the first position until a specific condition is satisfied is executed one or a plurality of times, and the advantageous state is the advantageous state during the specific period. Starting the launch of the gaming ball in the second direction is more likely than starting the launching of the gaming ball in the second direction after the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result is completed. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the number of gaming balls guided to the specific region is likely to increase by the time the specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the following effects are played. That is, a predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the game ball enters a specific area where the game ball can enter. A first, in which a game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in a specific flow path provided at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction can flow in is more likely to be guided to a specific area than passing through the predetermined section. The variable means is variable between a position and a second position that makes it easier to pass through a predetermined section than being guided to a specific area. As an advantageous state, the control for changing the variable means from the second position to the first position until a specific condition is satisfied is executed once or a plurality of times by the advantageous state setting means. In an advantageous state, it is better to start launching the game ball in the second direction during a specific period, and to launch the game ball in the second direction after the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result is completed. It becomes easier for more game balls to be guided to a specific area by the time the specific condition is satisfied, rather than starting.

This makes it possible for a player who wants to obtain more predetermined benefits to make a more serious decision as to whether or not to start launching a game ball in the second direction from the suggested content of the specific effect. effective.

In the gaming machine F5, the specific condition is satisfied when the number of gaming balls that have entered the specific area after the variable means is changed to the first position becomes the first number. The predetermined section is configured to have a path length that allows a second number of gaming balls, which is larger than the first number, to flow down at least simultaneously in a state where the variable means is variable to the second position. The gaming machine F6 featuring.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is configured so that the specific condition is satisfied when the number of game balls that have entered the specific area after the variable means is changed to the first position becomes the first number. The predetermined section is configured with a path length that allows a second number of game balls, which is larger than the second number, to flow down at least at the same time in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position.

This has the effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the predetermined section will be changed to the first position in a state where the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section exceeds the first number. There is.

The gaming machine F6 is provided with a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball at a time interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval, and the predetermined section is in a state where the gaming ball is continuously launched in the second direction at the predetermined interval. The second number of gaming balls can reach the predetermined section between the time when the gaming ball reaches the predetermined section and the time when the gaming ball passes through the predetermined section. A gaming machine F7 characterized by passing a gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball is fired by the firing means at a time interval equal to or longer than a predetermined interval. In the predetermined section, the game is such that the second number of game balls can reach the predetermined section between the time when one game ball reaches the predetermined section and the time when the game ball passes through the predetermined section. It is configured for the sphere to pass through.

As a result, the player who is determined to be the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result from the suggestion content of the specific effect is to shoot the game ball in the second direction at the predetermined interval which is the shortest interval. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine F7, the specific period is configured to be a period of a length capable of launching at least the second number of gaming balls when the gaming balls are continuously launched in the second direction at the predetermined intervals. The gaming machine F8, which is characterized by being a slingshot machine.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F7, at least a second number of gaming balls can be launched when the gaming balls are continuously launched in the second direction at predetermined intervals for a specific period. Since it is composed of a period of various lengths, it is possible that a second number of game balls can reach a predetermined section by launching the game balls in the second direction during a specific period. , There is an effect that it is possible to make a more serious judgment as to whether or not to launch the game ball in the second direction.

In the gaming machine F7 or F8, as the advantageous state set by the advantageous state setting means, the first advantageous state and the variable means are moved to the second position after shifting from the first advantageous state to the advantageous state. The gaming machine F9 is characterized by comprising a state determining means for determining one state from a plurality of states including at least a second advantageous state having a long period until it is changed.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F7 or F8, the advantageous state set by the advantageous state setting means is the first advantageous state and after shifting to the more advantageous state than the first advantageous state. One state is determined by the state determining means from a plurality of states including at least a second advantageous state in which the period until the variable means is changed to the second position is long.

As a result, in the second advantageous state, the number of game balls that can be launched before the variable means is changed to the second position is larger, so that more game balls are more likely to be guided to the specific region. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the second advantageous state will be determined.

In the gaming machine F9, the first advantageous state is continuous in the second direction at the predetermined interval as a period from the transition to the advantageous state until the variable means is changed to the second position. The gaming machine F10 is characterized in that, when the gaming balls are launched, a period of a length that makes it impossible to launch a number of gaming balls exceeding the first number is set.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F9, in the first advantageous state, the period from the transition to the advantageous state until the variable means is changed to the second position is in the 23rd direction. When the game balls are continuously fired with a predetermined sense, a period of a length that makes it impossible to fire more than the first number of game balls is set, so that the first advantageous state is determined. In this case, there is an effect that the game ball can be launched in the second direction to the player who wants to obtain more predetermined benefits during a specific period.

<Characteristic G group> (Make the player select a jackpot that can aim for over-winning and a jackpot that cannot aim for over-winning)
A first region through which a gaming ball can pass, a second region different from the first region, a first detecting means capable of detecting the passage of a gaming ball through the first region, and a game to the second region. A second detection means capable of detecting the passage of a sphere, a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and the first detection means after a specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. Alternatively, the gaming ball can be entered in the gaming machine provided with the privileged game executing means for executing the privileged game advantageous to the player based on the detection of the passage of the gaming ball by the second detecting means. A predetermined privilege is given based on the fact that the game ball enters the first specific area, the second specific area different from the first specific area, the first specific area, or the second specific area. The privilege-giving means, the specific flow path through which the game ball can flow, and the game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in the specific flow path are more likely to be guided to the first specific area than passing through the predetermined section. A first variable means that can be changed to a first position and a second position that makes it easier to pass through the predetermined section than being guided to the first specific area, and a game ball enters the second specific area. A second variable means that can be changed to a possible third position and a fourth position that makes it more difficult for the game ball to enter than the third position, and the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. As a type, when the passage of the gaming ball is detected by the first detection means after the specific discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means, the first variable means is the second from the second position. When the first privilege game that is variable to one position a predetermined number of times is determined and the passage of the game ball is detected by the second detection means, the second variable means moves from the fourth position to the third position. The gaming machine G1 is provided with a type determining means for determining a second privileged gaming that is variable a predetermined number of times.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a hit. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of hit types in which the number of openings (number of rounds) of the large opening where the prize ball is awarded by winning the game ball is different, and the game can be acquired. By making the values different, there are some that are trying to improve the interest of the hit (for example, Japanese Patent No. 25144417).

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, the winning state is not started only by winning the lottery result, and the winning state is obtained when one of the plurality of operating winning openings provided on the gaming board is won. Some are started. In this conventional gaming machine, different types of winning games are started according to the type of the operating winning opening that the player has won.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the hit type is determined, the amount of the game value obtained during the hit is almost a constant amount according to the hit type, and therefore the game value according to the hit type. There was a case where the game in the hit state became monotonous because it became like a work to obtain. That is, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to improve the interest in the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, a first specific region in which a gaming ball can enter and a second specific region different from the first specific region are provided. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the game ball enters the first specific area or the second specific area. A game ball flowing down at least a predetermined section in a specific flow path through which the game ball can flow is guided to a first position and a first specific area where it is easier to be guided to the first specific area than to pass through the predetermined section. The first variable means is variably configured at the second position, which makes it easier to pass through the predetermined section. The second variable means is variably configured at the third position where the game ball can enter the second specific area and the fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position. ing. As a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first detection means after the discrimination by the discrimination means gives a specific determination result, the first variable means The first privilege game, which is variable from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times, is determined by the type determining means. On the other hand, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the second detection means, the second privilege game in which the second variable means is changed from the fourth position to the third position a predetermined number of times is determined by the type determination means. To.

As a result, the type of privileged game can be different depending on whether the game ball passes through the first area or the second area, so that the area through which the game ball passes can be focused on. It has the effect of being able to do it.

The gaming machine G1 is provided with a passing means through which the gaming ball can pass and a sorting means capable of distributing the gaming ball passing through the passing means to either the first region or the second region. The gaming machine G2 featuring.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, the gaming ball that has passed through the passing means through which the gaming ball can pass is distributed to either the first region or the second region by the sorting means. Therefore, the type of award game changes according to the area to be distributed by the distribution means. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed by paying attention to the area to be distributed.

In the gaming machine G2, the state of the distribution means is transferred to the first region from at least a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discrimination means until the execution of the privilege game is started. The gaming machine G3 is characterized by comprising a distribution state switching means for switching between a first distribution state in which a game ball is distributed and a second distribution state in which a game ball is distributed to the second region at a predetermined cycle.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, the state of the distribution means is changed from at least a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means until the execution of the privilege game is started. , The first distribution state in which the game ball is distributed to the first area and the second distribution state in which the game ball is distributed to the second area are switched by the state switching means at a predetermined cycle. By confirming the distribution state of and passing through the passing means, there is an effect that the type of the privileged game preferred by the player can be determined.

The gaming machine G3 is characterized by comprising a display means capable of displaying an effect mode and an effect execution means for executing a distribution state suggestion effect suggesting a distribution state of the distribution means in the display means. Gaming machine G4.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G3, the distribution state suggestion effect suggesting the distribution state of the distribution means is executed in the display means by the effect executing means, so that the display means is confirmed. Only by this, there is an effect that the timing at which the player's favorite privilege game is determined can be easily recognized.

In the gaming machine G4, the effect executing means performs a first distribution state suggestion effect suggesting the first distribution state based on the fact that the distribution state switching means has switched to the first distribution state. Based on the first suggestion effect executing means to be executed and the switching to the second distribution state by the distribution state switching means, the second distribution state suggestion effect suggesting the second distribution state is executed. The second suggestion effect execution means is provided, and the gaming machine is provided with an advantage determination means capable of determining the degree of advantage when the gaming ball passes through the first region, and the first suggestion effect execution means is provided. The gaming machine G5 is characterized in that it can suggest the degree of advantage determined by the advantage determining means in the first distribution state suggestion effect.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the effect executing means, the first distribution state suggestion effect suggesting the first distribution state is performed by the first suggestion effect execution means based on the fact that the distribution state switching means has switched to the first distribution state. On the other hand, based on the fact that the second distribution state is switched to, the second distribution state suggestion effect suggesting the second distribution state is executed. The degree of advantage when the game ball passes through the first region is determined by the advantage determining means. In the first distribution state suggestion effect, the degree of advantage determined by the advantage determination means is suggested by the first suggestion effect execution means.

This has the effect that the timing of passing through the first region can be measured according to the degree of advantage suggested in the first suggestion effect.

In the gaming machine G5, the advantageous discriminating means discriminates the number of gaming balls passing through the predetermined section, and the first suggestion effect executing means is the gaming ball determined by the advantageous discriminating means. The gaming machine G6 is characterized in that the effect of suggesting the number of machines can be suggested in the first distribution state suggestion effect.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section is determined by the advantageous determination means. The effect of suggesting the number of game balls determined by the advantageous determination means is suggested by the first suggestion effect execution means in the first distribution state suggestion effect.

As a result, by confirming the first suggestion effect, there is an effect that the number of game balls guided to the first specific region when passing through the first region can be easily understood.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G6, the privileged game executing means is a game in which the first variable means is first changed to the first position in the first privileged game and then enters the first specific area. Based on the fact that the number of spheres is the first or more, the first variable means is changed to the second position, and in the predetermined section, the first variable means is changed to the second position. The gaming machine G7 is characterized in that, in the state, a second number of gaming balls, which is larger than the first number, is configured with a path length that allows simultaneous flow.

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines G1 to G6, the following effects are played. That is, in the first privilege game, the first variable means is based on the fact that the number of game balls that have entered the first specific area after the first variable means is first changed to the first position becomes the first number or more. It is changed to the second position by the privilege game execution means. The predetermined section is configured with a path length that allows a second number of game balls, which is larger than the first number, to flow down at the same time in a state where the first variable means is changed to the second position.

As a result, the number of game balls passing through the predetermined section can be increased to a number exceeding the first number, and then the game balls can be launched in an attempt to pass through the first region. It has the effect of improving the interest.

In the gaming machine G7, the privileged game executing means is such that the gaming ball that first enters the second specific area after the second variable means is first changed to the third position in the second privileged game is the first. A gaming machine characterized in that the second variable means is varied to the fourth position based on the number of the third or more being more than one and less than the second number. G8.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G7, the gaming ball that first enters the second specific area after the second variable means is first changed to the third position in the second privilege game is the first. Since the second variable means is changed to the fourth position by the privilege game executing means based on the fact that the number is larger than the number and the number is smaller than the second number, the second variable means is passed through the second region. Then, a third number of game balls, which is larger than the first number, can be stably entered into the second specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played with peace of mind during the execution of the second privilege game.

<Characteristic H group> (The order of the selection menu is rearranged according to the history operated by the player)
A display means capable of displaying an image, an operation means operable by a player, and an interlocking image whose mode changes according to the operation content for the operation means are displayed on the display means based on the establishment of the first condition. Based on the fact that the second condition is satisfied in the state where the interlocking image is displayed by the interlocking image display means and the interlocking image display means, the mode of the interlocking image displayed on the display means is adjusted. As the mode of the effect executing means for executing the type of effect and the mode of the interlocking image first displayed by the interlocking image display means when the first condition is satisfied, one aspect is determined from a plurality of aspects. A gaming machine H1 comprising: an aspect determining means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In this conventional gaming machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines are provided with an audio output device such as a speaker, and not only the visual effect but also the auditory effect can be executed to change the mode of the effect. By diversifying, the interest was improved (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).

However, further diversification of production is required.

In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines are configured to be able to play a musical piece as a kind of auditory effect during a predetermined period during a normal game, and the musical piece to be played within the predetermined period. Some types are configured so that the player can select them.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, as the number of songs set in the gaming machine diversifies, it becomes difficult for the player to find a favorite song from the list of selectable songs. There was a problem that it would end up.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, an interlocking image whose mode changes in conjunction with the operation content of the operating means that can be operated by the player is displayed by the interlocking image display means based on the establishment of the first condition. Is displayed. Based on the fact that the second condition is satisfied while the linked image is displayed by the linked image display means, the effect executing means executes a type of effect according to the mode of the linked image displayed on the display means. .. As an aspect of the interlocking image first displayed by the interlocking image display means when the first condition is satisfied, one aspect from a plurality of aspects is determined by the aspect determining means.

As a result, when the first condition is satisfied, the mode of the interlocking image displayed first can be diversified, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine H1, the aspect determining means determines the aspect of 1 according to at least the type of the effect previously executed by the effect executing means.

According to the gaming machine H2, since one aspect is determined by the aspect determining means according to at least the type of the effect previously executed by the effect executing means, the aspect of the interlocking image can be diversified. There is an effect.

The gaming machine H1 or H2 includes an audio data reproduction means capable of reproducing audio data and an audio output means for outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproduction means, and can be set as the interlocking image. The plurality of embodiments are composed of images of embodiments showing different music, and the effect executing means uses the audio data of the music corresponding to the aspect of the interlocking image as the effect of the audio data reproduction means. The gaming machine H3, which is characterized by being regenerated.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines H1 or H2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the voice corresponding to the voice data reproduced by the voice data reproduction means is output by the voice output means. A plurality of modes that can be set as linked images are composed of images of modes showing music different from each other. The audio data of the music corresponding to the mode of the interlocking image is reproduced by the effect executing means in the sound data reproduction means as an effect.

As a result, the visual effect and the auditory effect can be combined, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, as the mode of the interlocking image, one of the plurality of effect-compatible images showing information according to the type of the effect is specific to the effect-compatible image. The mode displayed in the mode is determined, and the interlocking image display means displays the specific mode in a predetermined order each time the operation content for the operation means becomes the first operation content. The corresponding image is variable, and the effect executing means satisfies the second condition for the effect of the type corresponding to the information shown in the effect corresponding image displayed in the specific embodiment. The gaming machine H4, which is characterized in that it is executed based on the above.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the mode of the interlocking image, the mode in which one effect-compatible image is displayed in a specific mode among a plurality of effect-compatible images showing information according to the type of effect is determined by the mode determining means. Each time the operation content for the operation means becomes the first operation content, the effect-corresponding image displayed in a specific mode is changed in a predetermined order by the interlocking image display means. An effect of a type corresponding to the information shown in the effect-corresponding image displayed in a specific mode is executed based on the fact that the second condition is satisfied by the effect execution means.

As a result, the player can easily understand the type of the effect executed by the effect executing means only by checking the information shown in the effect-compatible image displayed in a specific mode. There is an effect that the operation means can be operated so that the effect-corresponding image corresponding to the effect of the type of the person's preference is displayed in a specific mode.

In the gaming machine H4, the mode determining means is the effect-corresponding image that is changed to the specific aspect when the operation of the effect-corresponding image of 1 to be displayed in a specific aspect and the operation of the first operation content are repeated. The gaming machine H5, which is characterized in that it determines at least the order of images.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H4, one effect-compatible image to be displayed in a specific mode and an effect that is changed to a specific mode when the operation of the first operation content is repeated. Since the order of the corresponding images is determined at least by the mode determining means, the order of the effect-corresponding images that can be changed to a specific aspect can be determined in advance. Therefore, when the operating means is actually operated, there is an effect that the effect-compatible image to be displayed in a specific mode can be specified earlier.

The gaming machine H5 includes a counting means for counting the number of times the effect is executed by the effect executing means for each type of effect, and the mode determining means has a predetermined number of executions counted by the counting means. The order of the effect-corresponding images corresponding to the type of effect that satisfies the specific condition is determined in the order that can be changed to the specific mode by the operation of the first operation content less than the specific number of times. A gaming machine H6 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of times the effect is executed by the effect execution means is counted by the counting means for each type of effect. The first operation content in which the order of the effect-corresponding images corresponding to the type of effect in which the number of executions counted by the counting means satisfies a predetermined specific condition is less than or equal to the specified number of times by the mode determining means. The order is determined to be variable to a specific aspect by the operation of.

As a result, it is possible to change the effect of the type of the number of executions satisfying the specific condition to a specific mode by the number of operations less than the specific number of times, so that it is easy to select the effect of the type of the number of executions satisfying the specific condition. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine H6, the mode determining means sets the order of the effect-corresponding images corresponding to each of the first number of effects in descending order of the number of executions counted by the counting means, and the first operation of the specified number or less. The gaming machine H7 is characterized in that the order is determined to be variable in the specific embodiment by the operation of the contents.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H6, the order of the effect-compatible images corresponding to each of the first number of effects in descending order of the number of executions counted by the counting means is specified by the mode determining means. Since the order is determined to be variable to a specific mode by the operation of the first operation content below, the number of times the game has been changed to a specific mode is relatively large, and the player is also variable to the specific mode this time. It is possible to change the effect-compatible image, which is likely to be desired to be produced, into a specific mode with a small number of operations. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be further improved.

In the gaming machine H7, the mode determining means changes the order of the effect-corresponding images corresponding to each of the first number of effects to the specific mode as the number of executions counted by the counting means increases. The gaming machine H8 is characterized in that the number of operations of the first operation contents up to the above is determined to be small.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H7, the order of the effect-corresponding images corresponding to each of the first number of effects is variable to a specific mode as the number of executions counted by the counting means increases. Since it is determined by the mode determining means so that the number of operations of the first operation content is reduced until the first operation is performed, it is more likely that the player wants to change the first operation content to a specific mode. Since it can be changed to a specific mode with a smaller number of operations, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be further improved.

In any of the gaming machines H6 to H8, when the operation of the first operation content is executed within a predetermined period after the first condition is satisfied, the first condition is satisfied. The order of the effect-corresponding images displayed in a specific mode in the displayed interlocking image is changed to a specific mode by operating the first operation content a second time or more in at least the next determination by the mode determining means. The gaming machine H9 is provided with a setting means for setting so as to be determined in a variable order.

According to the gaming machine H9, when the operation of the first operation content is executed within a predetermined period after the first condition is satisfied in any of the gaming machines H6 to H8, the first condition is satisfied. The order of the effect-corresponding images displayed in a specific mode in the interlocking image first displayed from the above is a specific mode in the operation of the first operation content a second time or more in at least the next determination by the mode determining means. It is set by the setting means so as to be determined in a variable order. Regarding the effect-compatible image that has been changed from a specific mode within a predetermined period, it is unlikely that the player wants to change it to a specific mode even when the linked image is displayed next time. By setting such an effect-compatible image in an order in which the image is changed to a specific mode by a relatively large number of operations of the second or more times, there is a high possibility that the player wants to change the image to a specific mode. The images can be set in an order that is variable to a particular embodiment with a relatively small number of operations. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be further improved.

The gaming machine H10 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines H1 to H9, the second condition is satisfied when the operation content for the operating means becomes a specific operation content.

According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H9, the second condition is satisfied when the operation content for the operating means becomes a specific operating content, so that the player can use the operating means as the operating means. On the other hand, by performing an operation with a specific operation content, it is possible to execute a type of effect according to the mode of the interlocking image displayed at that time. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can select the player's favorite effect.

<Characteristic I group> (The playback position of the music is changed according to the circumstances in which the music was decided)
Based on the establishment of the first condition, the effect executing means for executing one of a plurality of predetermined effects based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition and the effect to be executed by the effect executing means are described above. Among the plurality of effects, based on the establishment of the first selection means for selecting one effect from the plurality of effects and the second condition different from the first condition as the effect to be executed by the effect execution means. A second selection means for selecting one effect from the above, a first start position set for each of the plurality of effects, and a second start position different from the first start position. Of the plurality of start positions including at least, the first start position is set as the start position of the effect selected by the first selection means, and the second start position is set as the start position of the effect selected by the second selection means. The gaming machine I1 is provided with a start position setting means for setting the start position of the machine.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In this conventional gaming machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines are provided with an audio output device such as a speaker, and not only the visual effect but also the auditory effect can be executed to change the mode of the effect. By diversifying, the interest was improved (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, one song is randomly selected from a plurality of songs preset in the gaming machine as a kind of auditory effect during a predetermined period during normal gaming. There is something that can be played back. Further, in addition to playing the music randomly selected in the predetermined period, there is also a music in which the player can select the type of the music to be played within the predetermined period.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the player may change the music to the player's favorite music without listening to the music randomly selected in a predetermined period, and the music is set in the gaming machine. There was a problem that most of the songs that were there could hardly be played.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, one of a plurality of predetermined effects is executed by the effect executing means based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition, and the effect is executed by the effect executing means. , Based on the establishment of the first condition, one effect is selected from a plurality of effects by the first selection means. On the other hand, as an effect to be executed by the effect executing means based on the establishment of the second condition different from the first condition, one effect is selected from a plurality of effects by the second selection means. By the first selection means among a plurality of start positions including at least a first start position set for each of the plurality of effects and a second start position different from the first start position. The first start position is set by the start position setting means as the start position of the selected effect. On the other hand, the second start position is set by the start position setting means as the start position of the effect selected by the second selection means.

As a result, the effect can be started from different start positions depending on whether the effect is selected by the first selection means or the effect selected by the second selection means. Has the effect of being able to improve.

In the gaming machine I1, a selection period setting for setting an operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation detection means that detects an operation on the operation means, and a selection period for selecting an effect to be executed by the effect execution means. The first selection means includes means, and the first selection means selects an effect according to the operation content for the operation means detected by the operation detection means during the selection period, and the second selection means. The gaming machine I2 is characterized in that the means is to select one effect from the plurality of effects based on the selection period being set by the selection period setting means.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the operation for the operation means that can be operated by the player is detected by the operation detection means. The selection period for selecting the effect to be executed by the effect execution means is set by the selection period setting means. The first selection means selects an effect according to the operation content for the operation means detected by the operation detection means during the selection period. Based on the selection period selected by the selection period setting means, one effect is selected by the second selection means from the plurality of effects.

As a result, the start position of the effect can be changed depending on whether or not the effect is selected by the player by performing an operation on the operation means, so that there is an effect that the effect mode can be diversified.

The game machine I1 or I2 includes an audio data reproduction means capable of reproducing audio data and an audio output means for outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproduction means, and the effect executing means is provided. The gaming machine I3 is characterized in that the voice data corresponding to any of a plurality of different songs is reproduced by the voice data reproducing means as the effect.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines I1 or I2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the voice data is reproduced by the voice data reproduction means, and the voice corresponding to the voice data reproduced by the voice data reproduction means is output by the voice output means. Audio data corresponding to any one of a plurality of different songs is reproduced by the effect executing means in the sound data reproduction means as an effect.

As a result, the playback start position of the music can be changed depending on whether the music is selected by the first selection means or the music selected by the second selection means. Has the effect of being able to improve.

In the game machine I3, the audio data is composed of a data group that becomes one musical piece by reproducing a plurality of data in a predetermined specific order, and the start position setting means is described above. When a song is selected by the first selection means, it is set so that reproduction is started from the first data among the plurality of data constituting the data group corresponding to the selected song, and the second The gaming machine I4 is characterized in that when a musical piece is selected by the selection means, the reproduction is set to start from the second data different from the first data.

According to the gaming machine I4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I3. That is, the audio data is composed of a data group that becomes one musical piece by reproducing a plurality of data in a predetermined specific order. When a song is selected by the first selection means, the start position setting means is set so that reproduction is started from the first data among a plurality of data constituting the data group corresponding to the selected song. To. On the other hand, when the music is selected by the second selection means, the start position setting means is set so that the reproduction is started from the second data different from the first data.

As a result, the playback start position of the music can be changed by simply selecting one data corresponding to the type of the selection means from the data group as the data to start playback, so that the playback start position is set. It has the effect of reducing the processing load at the time.

In the gaming machine I4, a selection period setting for setting an operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation detection means that detects an operation on the operation means, and a selection period for selecting a musical piece to be executed by the effect executing means. The first selection means includes means, and the first selection means selects one piece of music according to the operation content for the operation means detected by the operation detection means during the selection period, and the second selection means. The means selects one song from the plurality of songs based on the selection of the selection period by the selection period setting means, and the first data is in the specific order. Of these, the gaming machine I5 is characterized in that the data is set in the first order.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I4, the following effects are played. That is, the operation for the operation means that can be operated by the player is detected by the operation detection means. The selection period for selecting the music to be executed by the effect executing means is set by the selection period setting means. One piece of music corresponding to the operation content for the operation means detected by the operation detection means during the selection period is selected by the first selection means. Based on the selection period selected by the selection period setting means, one song is selected from the plurality of songs by the second selection means. The first data is composed of data set in the first order in a specific order.

As a result, the music selected by the player by operating the operation means can be started to be played from the beginning of the music, so that the player can listen carefully to the music selected voluntarily from the beginning. can. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who listens to the music can have a greater sense of satisfaction.

In the gaming machine I5, the gaming machine I6 is characterized in that the second selection means randomly selects one song from the plurality of songs.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I5, one song is randomly selected from a plurality of songs by the second selection means, so that the music set in the gaming machine is reproduced without waste. It has the effect of being able to make it.

The gaming machine I7 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine I5 or I6, the second data is composed of data including at least the most characteristic melody in the music.

According to the game machine I7, when the selection period is started because the second data is composed of the data including at least the most characteristic melody in the music in addition to the effect played by the game machine I5 or I6. In addition, there is an effect that the player can be made to decide whether or not to play another music by operating the operation means after listening to at least the most characteristic melody among the music selected by the second selection means.

In the gaming machine I3, the voice data is composed of one data which becomes one music by playing, and the plurality of start positions are relative to the voice data corresponding to each music. The gaming machine I8 characterized by having a plurality of preset playback positions.

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the audio data is composed of 1 data which becomes 1 musical piece by being reproduced. A plurality of start positions are composed of a plurality of playback positions preset for the audio data corresponding to each music.

This has the effect that the audio data can be in the simplest format.

<Characteristic J group> (Rearrange the data of the music being played according to the progress of the game)
Based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition, an effect execution means for executing one of a plurality of predetermined effects and one effect to be executed by the effect execution means are determined from the plurality of effects. An effect data group storage means that stores an effect data group that is used to execute one effect by the effect execution means and is composed of a plurality of data for each type of the plurality of effects. , The effect data group selection means for selecting the effect data group corresponding to the type of effect determined by the effect determination means from the effect data group storage means, and the effect data group selected by the effect data group selection means. The data setting means for setting the plurality of data constituting the above to be used by the effect executing means in a predetermined specific order, and the order in which the plurality of data are used according to the progress of the game. The gaming machine J1 is provided with an order-changing means that can be changed in an order different from the specific order.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In this conventional gaming machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines are provided with an audio output device such as a speaker, and not only the visual effect but also the auditory effect can be executed to change the mode of the effect. By diversifying, the interest was improved (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).

In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines are configured to be capable of playing music as a kind of auditory effect during a predetermined period during normal gaming.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that the predetermined period ends before the chorus part, which is the most characteristic part of the music, is played, and the music playback ends. there were. For this reason, there is a problem that the player who cannot hear the rust portion may feel dissatisfied.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, one of a plurality of predetermined effects is executed by the effect execution means based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition. One effect to be executed by the effect executing means is determined from a plurality of effects by the effect determining means. The effect data group, which is used to execute one effect by the effect execution means and is composed of a plurality of data, is stored by the effect data storage means for each type of the plurality of effects. The effect data group corresponding to the type of effect determined by the effect determination means is selected from the effect data group storage means by the effect data group selection means. A plurality of data constituting the effect data group selected by the effect data group selection means are set by the data setting means so as to be used by the effect execution means in a predetermined specific order. Depending on the progress of the game, the order in which the plurality of data are used is changed to a different order from the specific order by the order changing means.

This has the effect that the effect can be suitably executed.

In the gaming machine J1, the data setting means has the effect execution means in which the data of the first order in the specific order is based on the completion of the execution of the effect using the data of the last order in the specific order. A gaming machine J2 characterized in that it is set to be used by.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1, the data of the first order in the specific order is produced based on the completion of the execution of the effect using the data of the last order in the specific order. Since it is set by the data setting means so as to be used by the execution means, when the execution of the effect 1 is completed by the effect execution means, the effect can be executed again from the beginning of the effect. Therefore, even if the execution of the effect using the data in the final order is completed, it is possible to prevent the period of no effect, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machines J1 or J2, a discriminant means for executing a discriminant based on the establishment of a predetermined discriminating condition and a privileged game advantageous to the player are executed based on the discriminating result obtained by the discriminating means. The gaming machine J3 is provided with a privileged game executing means, and the effect executing means executes any one of the plurality of effects during the execution of the privileged game.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines J1 or J2, the following effects are played. That is, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the predetermined discrimination condition, and the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result. Will be done. During the execution of the privilege game, one of a plurality of effects is executed by the effect execution means.

This has the effect that the effect can be suitably executed during the execution of the privilege game.

In the gaming machine J3, the effect data group provided for each of the plurality of effect types is the first data corresponding to a specific effect mode set for each effect type, and the first data thereof. The first data is used at least once by the effect executing means until the privilege game is completed. As described above, the gaming machine J4 is characterized in that the order in which the plurality of data are used is variable.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the production data group provided for each of the plurality of production types is different from the first data corresponding to the specific production mode set for each production type and the first data. It is composed of at least the data of. The order in which the plurality of data are used is changed by the order changing means so that the first data is used at least once by the effect executing means until the privilege game is completed.

This has the effect that a specific effect mode can be executed at least once during the execution of the privilege game.

In the gaming machine J4, the order-changing means includes the plurality of data so that the first data is used by the effect executing means in a predetermined specific period in the privilege game. A gaming machine J5 characterized in that the order in which it is used is variable.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J4, a plurality of data so that the first data is used by the effect executing means in a predetermined specific period in the privilege game. Since the order in which is used is changed by the order-changing means, there is an effect that the game can be played during the execution of the privilege game as one of the pleasures of being in a specific period.

In any of the game machines J1 to J5, an audio data reproduction means capable of reproducing audio data and an audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproduction means are provided. The effect executing means causes the audio data reproduction means to reproduce any one of a plurality of predetermined songs, and the effect data group includes a plurality of sounds for reproducing one song. A game machine J6 characterized by being composed of data.

According to the game machine J6, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines J1 to J5, the voice data is reproduced by the voice data reproduction means, and the voice corresponding to the voice data reproduced by the voice data reproduction means is output as voice. Output by means. One of a plurality of predetermined musical pieces is reproduced by the effect executing means to the audio data reproducing means. The production data group is composed of a plurality of audio data for reproducing one musical piece.

As a result, it is possible to perform an auditory effect by playing the music, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine J6 is characterized in that the effect data group is composed of audio data in units of parts constituting one musical piece.

According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J6, the production data group is composed of the audio data of each part constituting one musical piece, so that the plurality of data are used by the order changing means. Even if the order is changed, there is an effect that the transition of the voice mode with less discomfort can be achieved.

In the gaming machine J7, a discriminant means for executing a discriminant based on the establishment of a predetermined discriminating condition and a privilege for executing a privileged game advantageous to the player based on a specific discriminant result obtained by the discriminant by the discriminating means. The effect executing means includes a game executing means, and the effect executing means causes the audio data reproducing means to play any one of the plurality of songs during the execution of the privilege game, and the type of the plurality of songs. The effect data group provided for each is a first data for reproducing a specific part set for each type of music and a second for reproducing a part different from the specific part. The plurality of order-variable means are such that the first data is used at least once by the effect executing means until the privilege game is completed. The gaming machine J8, characterized in that the order in which the data of the above are used is variable.

According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the discrimination is executed by the discriminant means based on the establishment of the predetermined discriminant condition, and based on the fact that the discriminant result is a specific discriminant result, the privilege game is advantageous to the player by the privilege game execution means. Will be executed. During the execution of the privilege game, one of a plurality of songs is played back by the effect executing means to the voice data reproducing means. The production data group provided for each of a plurality of types of music reproduces the first data for reproducing a specific part set for each type of music and the part different from the specific part. It is composed of at least the second data of. The order in which the plurality of data are used is changed by the order-variable means so that the first data is used at least once by the effect executing means until the privilege game is completed.

As a result, since the specific part can be played at least once until the privilege game is completed, there is an effect that the player who was looking forward to listening to the music can be satisfied. ..

The gaming machine J8 is provided with an operating means that can be operated by a player, and the effect determining means determines one musical piece from among the plurality of musical pieces according to the operation content for the operating means. The gaming machine J9.

According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J8, one song is determined by the effect determining means from among a plurality of songs according to the operation content for the operating means that can be operated by the player. , There is an effect that a specific part in the music voluntarily selected by the player can be played at least once before the end of the privileged game.

<Characteristic K group> (When ending the playback of a song, play it up to the playback position of the break and then end it)
A first effect executing means for executing the first effect based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition, and a predetermined first condition while the first effect is being executed by the first effect executing means. Based on the establishment of, the progress status determining means for determining the progress status of the first effect executed by the effect executing means and the progress status determined by the progress status determining means are predetermined. When the second condition is satisfied, the second effect executing means for executing the second effect different from the first effect and the progress state determined by the progress state determining means are the second condition. The gaming machine K1 is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing the execution of the second effect by the second effect executing means when the above conditions are not satisfied.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In this conventional gaming machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines are provided with an audio output device such as a speaker, and not only the visual effect but also the auditory effect can be executed to change the mode of the effect. By diversifying, the interest was improved (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).

In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines are configured to be capable of playing music as a kind of auditory effect during a predetermined period during normal gaming.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that the predetermined period ends during the reproduction of the chorus part, which is the most characteristic part of the music, and the chorus part is cut off halfway. .. For this reason, there is a problem that the player who cannot sufficiently listen to the rust portion may feel dissatisfied.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the first effect is executed by the first effect execution means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined execution condition, and the first effect is executed by the first effect execution means. Based on the fact that the first condition predetermined in the meantime is satisfied, the progress status of the first effect executed by the effect executing means is determined by the progress status determining means. When the progress status determined by the progress status determining means satisfies the predetermined second condition, the second effect different from the first effect is executed by the second effect executing means. When the progress status determined by the progress status determining means does not satisfy the second condition, the suppressing means suppresses the execution of the second effect by the second effect executing means.

This has the effect that the first effect can be suitably executed.

In the gaming machine K1, the suppressing means suppresses the execution of at least the second effect until the progress condition satisfies the second condition.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K1, at least the second effect is suppressed by the suppressing means until the progress condition satisfies the second condition, so that the first effect is performed. There is an effect that it can be carried out more preferably.

In the gaming machine K2, whether the progress condition satisfies the second condition based on the period in which the execution of the second effect is suppressed by the suppressing means is equal to or longer than the predetermined first period. The gaming machine K3 is provided with an execution control means for controlling the execution of the second effect to be started by the second effect execution means regardless of whether or not the second effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K2, the progress is based on the fact that the period during which the execution of the second effect is suppressed by the suppressing means is equal to or longer than the predetermined first period. Regardless of whether or not the second effect is satisfied, the execution of the second effect is controlled by the execution control means so that the second effect means starts the execution of the second effect. Therefore, the period during which the execution of the second effect is suppressed. Is too long, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the period for executing the second effect from being excessively shortened.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, a variable ball-entry means that can be changed to a first state in which the gaming ball can enter and a second state in which the gaming ball becomes more difficult to enter than the first state. The variable ball-entry means is predetermined from the second state to the first state based on the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition and the discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. The first effect executing means includes a variable game executing means for executing a variable game whose number of times is variable, and the first effect executing means executes the first effect based on the start of the variable game. The second effect executing means executes the second effect in the period from the end of the last change to the first state in the variable game of 1 until the elapse of the predetermined second period. A gaming machine K4 characterized by being a pachinko machine.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable ball entry means is configured to be variable between the first state in which the game ball can enter and the second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. The discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the variable ball entry means is changed a predetermined number of times from the second state to the first state based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means yields a specific discrimination result. The variable game is executed by the variable game execution means. The first effect is executed by the first effect execution means based on the start of the variable game. The second effect is executed by the second effect executing means in the period from the end of the change to the last first state in the variable game of 1 until the elapse of the predetermined second period.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the first effect, which was executed while the variable to the first state is executed a predetermined number of times, from being cut off halfway by the start of the second effect. be.

In the gaming machine K4, the first effect is configured to include at least a specific effect period in which a specific effect mode is executed in the effect period, and the suppression means determines the progress status. The gaming machine K5 is characterized in that it suppresses the execution of the second effect by the second effect executing means when the means determines that the specific effect period is reached.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effect period of the first effect includes at least a specific effect period in which the specific effect mode is executed. When the progress status determination means determines that the specific effect period is reached, the suppression means suppresses the execution of the second effect by the second effect execution means.

This has the effect that a specific effect mode can be executed for a longer period of time.

In the gaming machine K4 or K5, as the second effect, based on the period determination means for determining the period during which the execution of the second effect is suppressed by the suppression means and the period determined by the period determination means. The gaming machine K6 is provided with a second effect mode selection means for selecting one effect mode that ends before the second period elapses from a plurality of feasible effect modes.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K4 or K5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the period during which the execution of the second effect is suppressed by the suppressing means is determined by the period determining means. The second effect mode selection means is one effect mode that ends before the second period elapses from among a plurality of effect mode that can be executed as the second effect based on the period determined by the period determination means. Selected by.

This has the effect that the second effect can be reliably completed before the second period elapses.

In any of the game machines K1 to K6, an audio data reproduction means capable of reproducing audio data and an audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproduction means are provided. The first effect executing means executes the first effect by causing the voice data reproducing means to reproduce a predetermined song, and the suppressing means measures the predetermined song by the progress determination means. The gaming machine K7 is characterized in that it suppresses the execution of the second effect by the second effect executing means when it is determined that the specific reproduction range in the above is being reproduced.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the voice data is reproduced by the voice data reproduction means, and the voice corresponding to the voice data reproduced by the voice data reproduction means is output by the voice output means. By causing the audio data reproduction means to reproduce the predetermined music, the first effect is executed by the first effect execution means. When it is determined by the progress status determining means that a specific reproduction range in a predetermined music is being reproduced, the suppressing means suppresses the execution of the second effect by the second effect executing means.

As a result, the second effect is executed while the specific reproduction range of the music is being reproduced, and the reproduction of the specific reproduction range can be suppressed, so that the player who wants to listen to the specific reproduction range is satisfied. It has the effect of being able to make it.

The gaming machine K7 is provided with an operation means that can be operated by the player, and the first effect executing means selects one song from a plurality of predetermined songs according to the operation content for the operation means. A gaming machine K8 characterized in that it is reproduced by a voice data reproducing means.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K7, one song from a plurality of predetermined songs according to the operation content for the operating means that can be operated by the player is executed as the first effect. Since the audio data is reproduced by the means, the specific reproduction range of the music voluntarily selected by the player can be reproduced for a longer time. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who has selected the music can be more satisfied.

In the gaming machine K7 or K8, the gaming machine K9 is characterized in that the specific reproduction range includes at least a part of a rust portion in a musical piece.

According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K7 or K8, a specific playback range is configured to include at least a part of a chorus part in the music, so that it is generally the most exciting part in the music. A certain rust part can be reproduced for a longer time. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be satisfied.

<Characteristic L group> (Provide music that can be selected only by random selection)
Based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition, a predetermined specific condition is satisfied as an effect execution means for executing one of a plurality of predetermined effects and an effect to be executed by the effect execution means. Based on the fact that the execution condition is satisfied in the present state, the specific condition is satisfied as the first selection means capable of selecting one effect from the plurality of effects and the effect to be executed by the effect execution means. It is characterized by comprising a second selection means capable of selecting one effect from among the plurality of effects excluding at least a specific effect, based on the fact that the execution condition is satisfied in a state where the execution condition is not satisfied. Game machine L1 to play.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In this conventional gaming machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines are provided with an audio output device such as a speaker, and not only the visual effect but also the auditory effect can be executed to change the mode of the effect. By diversifying, the interest was improved (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).

Further, in such a conventional gaming machine, one song is selected by the player from a plurality of songs preset in the gaming machine during a predetermined period during normal gaming, and is selected by the player. There are some that are configured so that the music can be played back as a kind of auditory production. In addition, among the options that the player can select, in addition to the item indicating the name of the music to be played, there is also an item indicating that the music is randomly determined, and the needs of various players. It is configured to meet the maximum needs.

However, with such a conventional gaming machine, there is little merit that the music is randomly determined, so that most players select their favorite music, and the frequency of selecting items for which the music is randomly determined is high. There was a problem that it became low.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, one of a plurality of predetermined effects is executed by the effect execution means based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition. As an effect to be executed by the effect executing means, one effect is selected from a plurality of effects by the first selection means based on the fact that the execution condition is satisfied in a state where a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. .. On the other hand, as an effect to be executed by the effect executing means, based on the fact that the execution condition is satisfied when the specific condition is not satisfied, at least the specific effect is excluded from the plurality of effects by the second selection means. The effect of 1 is selected.

As a result, it is possible to change whether or not a specific effect is executed depending on whether or not the specific condition is satisfied, so that it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine L1, an interlocking image whose mode changes in conjunction with the operation content for the operating means based on the display means capable of displaying an image, the operating means operable by the player, and the establishment of a predetermined display condition. The first selection means is provided with an interlocking image display means for displaying the image on the display means, and the execution condition is such that the display means displays the interlocking image of a specific aspect as the specific condition. Based on the establishment, one effect is selected from the plurality of effects, and the second selection means displays the interlocking image in a mode different from the specific mode on the display means. The gaming machine L2 is characterized in that the effect corresponding to the mode of the interlocking image is selected based on the fact that the execution condition is satisfied in the state of being.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1, the following effects are played. That is, based on the establishment of a predetermined display condition, the interlocking image whose mode changes in conjunction with the operation content for the operation means is displayed on the display means by the interlocking image display means. As a specific condition, one effect is selected from a plurality of effects by the first selection means based on the fact that the execution condition is satisfied while the interlocking image of a specific mode is displayed on the display means. Based on the fact that the execution condition is satisfied in the state where the interlocking image having a mode different from the specific mode is displayed on the display means, the effect corresponding to the mode of the interlocking image is selected by the second selection means.

As a result, the player can be made to select whether to let the first selection means select the effect or the second selection means to select the effect by operating the operation means, so that the player can select the effect according to the preference of each player. There is an effect that the player can select the method of selecting the effect.

The gaming machine L2 includes an audio data reproduction means capable of reproducing audio data and an audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproduction means, and is set as the interlocking image. The plurality of modes to be obtained are composed of images of modes showing different music from each other, and the second selection means is characterized in that the music corresponding to the mode of the interlocking image is selected. Game machine L3.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines L1 or L2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the voice data is reproduced by the voice data reproduction means, and the voice corresponding to the voice data reproduced by the voice data reproduction means is output by the voice output means. A plurality of modes that can be set as linked images are composed of images of modes showing music different from each other. The music corresponding to the aspect of the interlocking image is selected by the second selection means.

As a result, the player's favorite music can be reproduced by operating the operation means to select the interlocking image of the mode showing the favorite music, so that the voice mode suitable for each player's taste can be obtained. It has the effect of being able to provide.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, there is an advantage to the player based on the discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition and the first discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. The effect setting means is provided with an advantageous setting means for setting a gaming state, and the effect executing means executes any of the plurality of effects based on the determination by the discriminating means. When the discrimination by the discrimination means results in the first discrimination result, the one selection means selects one of the plurality of effects, and the discrimination by the discrimination means determines the first discrimination result. The gaming machine L4 is characterized in that, when a different second determination result is obtained, one effect is selected from among the plurality of effects excluding at least a specific effect.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the following effects are played. That is, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the profitable gaming state advantageous to the player is set by the advantageous setting means based on the first discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. Will be done. Based on the determination by the determination means, one of the plurality of effects is executed by the effect execution means. When the discrimination by the discrimination means results in the first discrimination result, the first selection means selects one of the plurality of effects, while the discrimination by the discrimination means differs from the first discrimination result. When the second determination result is obtained, one of the plurality of effects excluding at least a specific effect is selected by the first selection means.

As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the advantageous gaming state is set when a specific effect is selected by the first selection means, so attention is paid to the type of effect selected by the first selection means. It has the effect of being able to make it.

The gaming machine L4 includes a notification effect execution means for executing a notification effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous gaming state is set, and the execution condition is satisfied at least before the notification effect is executed. A gaming machine L5 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L4, the following effects are played. That is, the notification effect for notifying whether or not the gaming state is set is executed by the notification effect execution means. The execution condition is satisfied at least before the notification effect is executed.

As a result, if a specific effect is selected by the first selection means, it is determined that the advantageous gaming state will be set before the notification effect is confirmed. Therefore, whether or not the advantageous gaming state is set can be determined at an early stage. There is an effect that the player who wants to know can play the game with the expectation that the selection of the effect is made by the first selection means.

In the gaming machine L5, when the first discrimination result or the second discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the second As a gaming state after the privileged game executed based on the determination result of the above is completed, the advantageous setting means is provided with a disadvantage setting means for setting a disadvantageous gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the advantageous gaming state. The means sets the advantageous gaming state as the gaming state after the privileged game executed based on the result of the first determination is completed, and the effect executing means is the privileged. The gaming machine L6 characterized in that the production is executed during the execution of the game.

According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the discrimination by the discriminating means results in the first discriminating result or the second discriminating result, the privileged game executing means executes the privileged game advantageous to the player. As a gaming state after the privileged game executed based on the second determination result is completed, a disadvantageous gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the advantageous gaming state is set by the disadvantage setting means. The advantageous gaming state is set by the advantageous setting means as the gaming state after the privileged game executed based on the first determination result is completed. During the execution of the privilege game, the effect is executed by the effect execution means.

As a result, when a specific effect is executed, the privileged game is executed, which is advantageous for the player, and further, the gaming state after the privileged game is completed becomes the advantageous gaming state. Is also confirmed, which has the effect of giving the player a greater sense of satisfaction.

The gaming machine L6 includes a display means capable of displaying identification information and a dynamic display execution means for executing the dynamic display of identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means in the display means, and the discrimination means is used. As a mode of dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the result of the first discrimination in the discrimination, the first aspect of the mode in which the first identification information is stopped and displayed and the second discrimination are performed. The identification information executed based on the first aspect determining means for determining either the second aspect of the aspect in which the information is stopped and displayed and the second discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. The gaming machine L7 is characterized by comprising, as a mode of dynamic display of the above, a second aspect determining means for determining the first aspect.

According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is executed in the display means by the dynamic display execution means. As a mode of dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the result of the first discrimination by the discrimination by the discrimination means, the first aspect of the mode in which the first identification information is stopped and displayed, and the second aspect of the mode. Either of the second aspect of the aspect in which the identification information is stopped and displayed is determined by the first aspect determining means. The first aspect is determined by the second aspect determining means as an aspect of the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the determination by the determining means resulting in the second determination result.

As a result, when the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in the first aspect, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish whether the determination result is the first result or the second determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed by paying attention to whether or not a specific effect is selected by the first selection means.

In the gaming machine L7, the first selection means is the first discrimination result by the discrimination by the discrimination means, and the discrimination by the discrimination means is performed rather than the dynamic display of the discrimination information is executed in the second aspect. In the case where the first determination result is obtained and the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in the first aspect, the ratio of selecting the specific effect is higher. A gaming machine L8 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L7, the discrimination by the discrimination means results in the first discrimination result, and the discrimination by the discrimination means is performed rather than the dynamic display of the discrimination information is executed in the second aspect. In the case where the first determination result is obtained and the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in the first aspect, the ratio of selecting a specific effect by the first selection means is higher, so that the identification information is in the first aspect. When the dynamic display of is executed, there is an effect that the game can be performed with a stronger expectation that a specific effect is selected by the first selection means.

<Characteristic M group> (The range of the history area is changed according to the number of accumulated history information)
For a storage means that is composed of at least a display means that can display an image, a first storage area that can store data related to a game, and a second storage area that is different from the first storage area, and the storage means thereof. The storage control means for controlling the storage of a plurality of predetermined data, and the image corresponding to at least the data stored in the first storage area and the second storage area by the storage control means are described above. As the data stored in the first storage area by the display control means that controls to be displayed on the display means and the storage control means, specific data that satisfies a predetermined specific condition among the plurality of data. As the data stored in the second storage area by the first data setting means and the storage control means, one or a plurality of data among the plurality of data different from the specific data can be set. Data stored in the first storage area by the storage control means when the number of data set by the second data setting means and the first data setting means is less than a predetermined specific number. The game is characterized by comprising additional data setting means for adding one or a plurality of data from data different from the specific data to the data set by the first data setting means. Machine M1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In this conventional gaming machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines are provided with an audio output device such as a speaker, and not only the visual effect but also the auditory effect can be executed to change the mode of the effect. By diversifying, the interest was improved (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).

However, further diversification of production is required.

In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines are configured to be able to play a musical piece as a kind of auditory effect during a predetermined period during a normal game, and the musical piece to be played within the predetermined period. Some types are configured so that the player can select them.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, as the number of songs set in the gaming machine diversifies, it becomes difficult for the player to find a favorite song from the list of selectable songs. There was a problem that it would end up.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, the storage means is composed of a first storage area that can store data related to the game and a second storage area that is different from the first storage area. It is controlled by the storage control means so that a plurality of predetermined data are stored in the storage means. The storage control means controls the display control means so that an image corresponding to at least the data stored in the first storage area and the second storage area is displayed on the display means. As the data stored in the first storage area by the storage control means, specific data satisfying a predetermined specific condition among a plurality of data is set by the first data setting means. As the data stored in the second storage area by the storage control means, one or a plurality of data among the plurality of data different from the specific data are set by the second data setting means. When the number of data set by the first data setting means is less than a predetermined specific number, one of the data different from the specific data is stored as the data stored in the first storage area by the storage control means. A plurality of data are additionally set by the additional data setting means in addition to the data set by the first data setting means.

As a result, even if the number of data set by the first data setting means is less than the specific number, the data can be added and set by the additional data setting means, so that the data can be preferably set. There is an effect.

The gaming machine M1 is characterized in that the display control means displays an image according to the order of arrangement of data stored in the first storage area and the second storage area.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, an image corresponding to the order of the data stored in the first storage area and the second storage area is displayed by the display control means. Images can be made different according to the order of arrangement. Therefore, there is an effect that the display mode can be diversified.

In the gaming machines M1 or M2, the additional data setting means additionally sets data to be stored in the first storage area so that the number of data stored in the first storage area is a specific number. The gaming machine M3 characterized by being.

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effect of the game machine M1 or M2, the data to be stored in the first storage area is the additional data setting means so that the number of data stored in the first storage area is a specific number. Even if the number of data set by the first data setting means is less than the specific number, the number of data set for the first storage area is surely set to the specific number. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the data can be set more preferably.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M3, the additional data setting means stores data to be stored in the first storage area in order from preset high-priority data among data different from the specific data. A gaming machine M4 characterized by being additionally set.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines M1 to M3, among the data different from the specific data, the first preset data having the highest priority is sequentially set by the additional data setting means. Since the data to be stored in the storage area is additionally set, when the number of data set by the first data setting means is less than the specific number, the data is set more preferably for the first storage area. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the display control means includes an operation means that can be operated by the player and an operation detection means that detects an operation on the operation means, and the display control means has the first storage area and the said. When an operation for the operation means is detected by the operation detection means while an image corresponding to at least the data stored in the second storage area is displayed, the operation content for the operation means is linked to the operation content. A gaming machine M5 characterized in that the aspect of an image is variable.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the following effects are played. That is, the operation for the operation means that can be operated by the player is detected by the operation detection means. When an operation for the operation means is detected by the operation detection means while an image corresponding to at least the data stored in the first storage area and the second storage area is displayed, it is linked to the operation content for the operation means. The mode of the image is changed by the display control means.

As a result, the display mode can be changed in conjunction with the operation content of the player's operation means, so that the operation means can be operated until the display mode is the player's favorite display mode. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to give the player the pleasure of selecting the display mode.

In the game machine M5, the display control means displays on the display means an image group composed of a plurality of images corresponding to a plurality of data stored in the first storage area and the second storage area. In the image group, the image corresponding to one of the plurality of data is displayed in the first aspect, and the other images are displayed in the second aspect different from the first aspect. The gaming machine M6 is to be displayed, and the display control means is linked to an operation content for the operation means to change an image displayed in the first aspect.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, an image group composed of a plurality of images corresponding to a plurality of data stored in the first storage area and the second storage area is displayed on the display means by the display control means. Of the plurality of data, the image corresponding to one data is displayed in the first aspect, and the other images are displayed in the second aspect different from the first aspect. The image displayed in the first aspect is varied by the display control means in conjunction with the operation content for the operation means.

As a result, the image displayed in the first aspect can be changed in conjunction with the operation content of the player's operating means, so that the player can select the image to be displayed in the first aspect. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine M6, the image corresponding to the data stored in the first storage area can be changed to the first aspect within the number of operations for the operating means within a predetermined specific number of times. The gaming machine M7 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M6, the image corresponding to the data stored in the first storage area can be changed by the number of operations for the operating means within a predetermined number of times. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player who wants to change the image corresponding to the data stored in the first storage area to the first aspect can be improved.

In the gaming machine M6 or M7, based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied while the image group is displayed, the specific effect of the aspect corresponding to the image changed to the first aspect is executed. A gaming machine M8 characterized by being provided with a specific effect executing means.

According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M6 or M7, the image changed to the first aspect based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied while the image group is displayed. Since the specific effect of the mode corresponding to the above is executed by the specific effect executing means, there is an effect that the player can select the mode of the specific effect.

The game machine M8 includes an audio data reproduction means capable of reproducing audio data and an audio output means for outputting audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproduction means, and the specific effect executing means is provided. As the specific effect, the gaming machine M9 is characterized in that the voice data for outputting the music corresponding to the image changed in the first aspect is reproduced by the voice data reproducing means.

According to the gaming machine M9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the audio data is reproduced by the audio data reproduction means. The audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproduction means is output by the audio output means. As the specific effect, the audio data for outputting the music corresponding to the image varied in the first aspect is reproduced by the specific effect executing means to the audio data reproduction means.

As a result, the player can select the music to be played, which has the effect of improving the interest of the player.

<Characteristic N group> (Select whether to match the audio mode to the actual number of rounds or the number of rounds in the production)
Based on the specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect based on the satisfaction of either the predetermined first condition or the second condition different from the first condition, and the establishment of the second condition. At least before the specific effect is executed, the suggestion effect execution means capable of executing the suggestion effect suggesting the establishment of the first condition, and the specific effect executed based on the establishment of the first condition. When the first aspect setting means for setting the first aspect and the second condition are satisfied and the suggestion effect is not executed by the suggestion effect execution means, the first aspect is the specific effect. As the aspect of the specific effect, when the second aspect setting means for setting the second aspect different from the first aspect and the suggestion effect are executed by the suggestion effect execution means when the second condition is satisfied. The gaming machine N1 comprising the third aspect setting means for setting either the first aspect and the second aspect.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In this conventional gaming machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a winning game advantageous to the player is given. In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines are provided with an audio output device such as a speaker, and not only the visual effect but also the auditory effect can be executed to change the mode of the effect. By diversifying, the interest was improved (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).

However, further diversification of production is required.

In addition, in such a conventional gaming machine, whether or not a hit game is given, and whether or not a state advantageous to the player (for example, a probable change state) is produced after the end of the hit game is produced. Some are known that can be suggested by. In this conventional gaming machine, it is possible to play a game by paying attention to whether or not an effect of a suggestion content that is advantageous to the player is executed. Further, when it is determined that the state will be advantageous to the player, the effect of the content suggesting that it will be disadvantageous to the player is executed for a predetermined period, and after the predetermined period elapses, it is advantageous to the player. There is also one that executes an effect (so-called reverse effect) that suggests that the state will be changed.

However, for a player who wants to know at an early stage whether or not to move to an advantageous state, when the reversal effect is executed, the timing of knowing the result of whether or not to move to an advantageous state is delayed. However, there is a problem that the player may feel dissatisfied.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means based on the fact that either the predetermined first condition or the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. To. Based on the establishment of the second condition, the suggestion effect suggesting the establishment of the first condition is executed by the suggestion effect execution means at least before the specific effect is executed. As an aspect of the specific effect executed based on the establishment of the first condition, the first aspect is set by the first aspect setting means. When the second condition is satisfied and the suggestion effect is not executed by the suggestion effect execution means, the second aspect setting means sets a second aspect different from the first aspect as the mode of the specific effect. When the second condition is satisfied and the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means, either the first aspect or the second aspect is set by the third aspect setting means as the mode of the specific effect. To.

As a result, when the second aspect is set by the third aspect setting means, the player can be made aware that the second condition is satisfied, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine N1, a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition and a privilege game execution that executes a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. The means and the type of the privileged game executed by the privileged game executing means include at least a first privileged game and a second privileged game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privileged game. The first condition is satisfied when the first privilege game is determined by the type determining means, and the second condition is the same. The gaming machine N2 is characterized in that it is established when the second privileged gaming is determined by the type determining means.

According to the gaming machine N2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1. That is, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result. .. As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the type determination means is selected from a plurality of types including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. The type of 1 is determined. The first condition is satisfied when the first privilege game is determined by the type determination means, while the second condition is satisfied when the second privilege game is determined by the type determination means.

As a result, when the second aspect is set by the third aspect setting means, the player can be made aware that the more advantageous second privilege game has been determined. It has the effect of being able to play games.

In the gaming machine N2, based on the determination of the first privilege game by the type determination means, the first notification effect for notifying the first advantage degree corresponding to the advantage degree of the first privilege game is executed. Based on the determination of the second privilege game by the first notification effect executing means and the type determination means, the second notification effect for notifying the second advantage degree corresponding to the advantage degree of the second privilege game. A second notification effect executing means for executing the above-mentioned, and the suggestion effect executing means is characterized in that, as the suggestion effect, an effect in a mode indistinguishable from the first notification effect is executed. Machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the fact that the first privilege game is determined by the type determination means, the first notification effect for notifying the first advantage degree corresponding to the advantage degree of the first privilege game is executed by the first notification effect execution means. Will be done. Based on the fact that the second privilege game is determined by the type determination means, the second notification effect for notifying the second advantage degree corresponding to the advantage degree of the second privilege game is executed by the second notification effect execution means. .. As the suggestion effect, an effect in which it is difficult to distinguish from the first notification effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means.

As a result, the player can be made to recognize the type of the privilege game according to the type of the notification effect to be executed, so that there is an effect that the game can be performed by paying more attention to the type of the notification effect. ..

In the game machine N2 or N3, a variable ball entry means that is variable from a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to a second state in which the game ball can enter during the execution of the privilege game, and a variable ball entry means thereof. In the second privilege game, the variable ball entry means is in the second state rather than the first privilege game. In the specific effect, the specific effect mode is executed at least once in one effect period, and in the first aspect, the execution of the specific effect is started. The gaming machine N4 is characterized in that the period from the time when the specific effect mode is executed is shorter than that of the second mode.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N2 or N3, the variable entry means is changed from the first state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the gaming ball can enter during the execution of the privilege game. Is variable. A predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means based on the fact that the game ball enters the variable ball entering means. In the second privilege game, the number of times the variable ball entry means is changed to the second state is larger than in the first privilege game. The specific effect mode is executed at least once in the effect period of one specific effect. The period from the start of execution of the specific effect to the execution of the specific effect mode is shorter in the first aspect than in the second aspect.

As a result, when the number of times the game is changed to the second state is small and the period until the privilege game ends tends to be short, the period until the specific effect mode is executed is shortened in the case of the first privilege game. Therefore, regardless of the type of the privilege game, there is an effect that a specific effect mode can be more reliably executed until the privilege game is completed.

In the game machine N4, the specific effect executing means includes a voice data reproducing means capable of reproducing the voice data and a voice output means for outputting the voice corresponding to the voice data reproduced by the voice data reproducing means. As the specific effect, the audio data reproduction means is made to reproduce the audio data corresponding to the specific music, and the specific effect mode is output when the specific reproduction range in the specific music is reproduced. The first aspect setting means is for setting the audio data corresponding to the specific music so that the reproduction is started from the first reproduction position, and the second aspect setting means. Is such that the audio data corresponding to the specific music is started from the second reproduction position where the period until the reproduction of the specific reproduction range is started is longer than that of the first reproduction position. The gaming machine N5, which is characterized in that it is set to.

According to the gaming machine N5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N4. That is, the voice data is reproduced by the voice data reproduction means, and the voice corresponding to the voice data reproduced by the voice data reproduction means is output by the voice output means. As a specific effect, audio data corresponding to a specific musical piece is reproduced by the specific effect executing means with respect to the audio data reproduction means. When a specific reproduction range in a specific music is reproduced, a specific effect mode is output. The audio data corresponding to a specific musical piece is set by the first aspect setting means so that the reproduction is started from the first reproduction position. The second mode setting is such that the audio data corresponding to a specific musical piece is started from the second playback position where the period until the playback of the specific playback range is started is longer than that of the first playback position. It is set by means.

This has the effect that a specific playback range can be played before the end of the bonus game, regardless of the type of the bonus game.

In the gaming machine N5, the gaming machine N6 is characterized in that the specific reproduction range is a reproduction range including the most characteristic melody in a musical piece.

According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N5, since the specific playback range includes the most characteristic melody in the music, the characteristic melody part that the player is likely to want to hear is displayed. There is an effect that it can be played more reliably until the privilege game is completed.

In the game machine N5 or N6, the audio data corresponding to the specific music is composed of a data group capable of reproducing one specific music by reproducing a plurality of data in a predetermined specific order. The first aspect setting means is set so that reproduction is started from the first data among the data groups constituting the audio data corresponding to the specific music. In the second aspect setting means, from the second data in the data group constituting the audio data corresponding to the specific music, the order in which the data is reproduced in the specific order is higher than that of the first data. A gaming machine N7 characterized in that it is set to start playback.

According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N5 or N6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the audio data corresponding to a specific musical piece is composed of a data group capable of reproducing one specific musical piece by reproducing a plurality of data in a predetermined specific order. Among the data groups constituting the audio data corresponding to the specific music, the first mode setting means is set so that the reproduction is started from the first data. A second mode setting means so that reproduction is started from the second data in which the order of reproduction is earlier than the first data in the specific order among the data groups constituting the audio data corresponding to the specific music. Set by.

As a result, the playback position can be changed by a simple process of selecting and playing one data in the data group, so that the playback position when starting the playback of the music can be set with a small processing load. effective.

In any of the gaming machines N2 to N7, the suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect when the execution of the privilege game is started, and the specific effect execution means is the privilege game. The gaming machine N8, characterized in that the specific effect is executed when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the above-mentioned.

According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines N2 to N7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means when the execution of the privilege game is started. The privilege game is executed by the specific effect executing means when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the privilege game.

As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish whether the first privilege game is determined or the second privilege game is determined until the specific condition is satisfied when the suggestion effect is executed, so that the specific condition is satisfied. Until this is done, there is an effect that the expectation for the second privilege game can be kept.

<Characteristic O group> (The music used during the normal game is preferentially placed in the menu position where it is easy to select)
A display means capable of displaying an image, an operation means operable by a player, and an interlocking image whose mode changes according to the operation content for the operation means are displayed on the display means based on the establishment of the first condition. The interlocking image displayed on the display means based on the interlocking image display means capable of causing the interlocking image and the second condition being satisfied while the interlocking image is displayed by the interlocking image display means. A first effect executing means for executing a first effect of a type according to an aspect, a second effect executing means for executing a second effect different from the first effect based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition, and a second effect executing means thereof. The type of the second effect executed by the second effect executing means is first displayed by the type determining means for determining the type from a plurality of types and the interlocking image display means when the first condition is satisfied. The gaming machine O1 is characterized by comprising, as an aspect of the interlocking image, an aspect setting means capable of setting an aspect according to the type of the second effect determined by the type determining means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In this conventional gaming machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines are provided with an audio output device such as a speaker, and not only the visual effect but also the auditory effect can be executed to change the mode of the effect. By diversifying, the interest was improved (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).

However, further diversification of production is required.

In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines are configured to be able to play a musical piece as a kind of auditory effect during a predetermined period during a normal game, and the musical piece to be played within the predetermined period. Some types are configured so that the player can select them.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, as the number of songs set in the gaming machine diversifies, it becomes difficult for the player to find a favorite song from the list of selectable songs. There was a problem that it would end up.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O1, based on the establishment of the first condition, the interlocking image whose mode changes in conjunction with the operation content for the operating means is displayed on the display means by the interlocking image display means. Based on the fact that the second condition is satisfied while the linked image is displayed by the linked image display means, the first effect of the type according to the mode of the linked image displayed on the display means is the first effect executing means. Is executed by. Based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition, a second effect different from the first effect is executed by the second effect executing means, and the type of the second effect executed by the second effect executing means is determined by the type determining means. Determined from multiple types. As the mode of the linked image first displayed by the linked image display means when the first condition is satisfied, the mode according to the type of the second effect determined by the type determining means can be set by the mode setting means. ing.

This has the effect that the mode of the interlocking image can be diversified.

In the gaming machine O1, the interlocking image is composed of a plurality of effect-compatible images indicating different types of the first effect, and the mode setting means is the mode of the interlocking image of 1. The display mode in which the effect-corresponding image is displayed in a specific mode is set, and the interlocking image display means is specified in a predetermined order each time the operation content for the operation means becomes the first operation content. The effect-corresponding image displayed in the above-described aspect is variable, and the effect-executing means obtains the first effect of the type indicated by the effect-compatible image displayed in the specific aspect according to the second condition. The gaming machine O2 is characterized in that it is executed based on the establishment of.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O1, the following effects are played. That is, the interlocking image is composed of a plurality of effect-compatible images showing different types of the first effect. As a mode of the interlocking image, a display mode in which one effect-corresponding image is displayed in a specific mode is set by the mode setting means. Each time the operation content for the operation means becomes the first operation content, the effect-corresponding image displayed in a specific mode by the interlocking image display means is changed in a predetermined order. The type of specific effect indicated by the effect-corresponding image displayed in the specific mode is executed by the effect executing means based on the satisfaction of the second condition.

As a result, the player who visually recognizes the effect-corresponding image that is changed to a specific mode can easily understand the type of the first effect to be executed based on the satisfaction of the second condition. Can be made to. Therefore, by operating the operating means, there is an effect that the player can select the type of the first effect of the desired type.

In the gaming machine O2, the mode setting means is the effect-corresponding image that is changed to the specific aspect when the operation of the effect-corresponding image of 1 to be displayed in a specific aspect and the operation of the first operation content are repeated. The gaming machine O3 is characterized in that the order of images is set at least.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O2, one effect-compatible image to be displayed in a specific mode and an effect-compatible image changed to a specific mode when the first operation content is repeated. Since the order of the above is set by at least the mode setting means, there is an effect that when the operating means is actually operated, the effect-corresponding image to be displayed in a specific mode can be specified earlier.

In the gaming machine O2 or O3, in the mode setting means, the effect corresponding image corresponding to the type of the second effect determined by the type determining means is specified by the operation of the first operation content within a specific number of times. The gaming machine O4 is configured so that the mode of the interlocking image can be set so as to be variable to the mode of the above.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O2 or O3, the effect corresponding image corresponding to the type of the second effect determined by the type determining means is specified by the operation of the first operation content within a specified number of times. Since the mode of the interlocking image is set by the mode setting means so as to be variable to the mode of, the effect-compatible image corresponding to the type of the second effect executed by the second effect execution means can be specified with a small number of operations. It can be varied according to the mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be enhanced.

The gaming machine O4 includes a counting means for counting the number of times of the second effect executed by the second effect executing means for each type of the second effect, and the mode setting means is counted by the counting means. The effect-corresponding image corresponding to the second effect of the type satisfying the predetermined specific condition is changed to the specific mode by the operation of the first operation content within the specified number of times. As described above, the gaming machine O5 is configured so that the mode of the interlocking image can be set.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O4, the following effects are played. That is, the number of times of the second effect executed by the second effect executing means is counted by the counting means for each type of the second effect. The effect-corresponding image corresponding to the second effect of the type in which the number of times counted by the counting means satisfies a predetermined specific condition is changed to a specific mode by the operation of the first operation content within the specified number of times. As such, the mode of the interlocking image is set by the mode setting means.

As a result, the effect-compatible image corresponding to the second effect of the type that satisfies the specific condition can be changed to a specific mode with a relatively small number of operations, which improves the convenience of the player. It has the effect of being able to improve.

In the gaming machine O5, the mode setting means is specified by the operation of the first operation content a smaller number of times as the effect corresponding image corresponding to the second effect of the type having a larger number of times counted by the counting means. The gaming machine O6 is characterized in that the mode of the interlocking image is set so as to be variable to the mode of.

According to the gaming machine O6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O5, the effect-compatible image corresponding to the second effect of the type in which the number of times counted by the counting means is large is specified by the operation of the first operation content with a small number of times. Since the mode of the interlocking image is set by the mode setting means so as to be variable to the mode of the above, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be further improved.

The gaming machine O7 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines O1 to O6, the second condition is satisfied when the operation content for the operating means becomes the second operation content.

According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines O1 to O6, the second condition is satisfied when the operation content for the operating means becomes the second operation content, so that the player can arbitrarily decide. There is an effect that the first effect can be executed by the first effect execution means at the timing of.

<Characteristic P group> (Based on the determination of a specific jackpot type, it forms a state in which a specific jackpot type can be easily determined when the next jackpot occurs).
A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a dynamic display means that dynamically displays identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means for a predetermined period, and the identification information by the dynamic display means. In the dynamic display, based on the stop display of the identification information for indicating a specific determination result, the privilege game execution means capable of executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the privilege game execution means execute the privilege game. As the type of the privileged game to be performed, one of the above-mentioned privileged game types is selected from a plurality of types including at least a first privileged game and a second privileged game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privileged game. The first state in which the second privilege game is set in the first ratio by the privilege game type setting means to be set and the privilege game type setting means, and the second privilege game in which the second privilege game is higher than the first ratio. A second state that can be set at a ratio of 2 and a state-variable means that can change the state are provided, and in the second state, the identification information for showing the specific determination result is stopped in the first state. The gaming machine P1 is characterized in that it is changed when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied between the time when it is displayed and the time when the privileged game is completed.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning, a winning that is advantageous to the player is executed. .. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired (for example). , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417). In addition, some conventional gaming machines are advantageous by replacing or in addition to the number of rounds, by changing the game state given after hitting, or by changing the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round. Some are trying to improve their interest by providing different degrees.

Further, in some conventional gaming machines, after winning a hit, the type of hit (number of rounds) is determined at the timing when the gaming ball passes through a predetermined area.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since the winning type is determined at a fixed rate by lottery, the game may become monotonous, and it is difficult to improve the player's interest in the game. There was a risk of becoming.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine P1, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means for a predetermined period. In the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means, the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game advantageous to the player based on the stop display of the identification information for indicating a specific determination result. As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, one of a plurality of types including at least one privilege game including the first privilege game and the second privilege game which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. The type of is set by the privilege game type setting means. A first state in which the second privilege game is set at the first ratio by the privilege game type setting means, and a second state in which the second privilege game can be set at a second ratio higher than the first ratio. Is variable by the state variable means. It is changed to the second state when the predetermined specific condition is satisfied between the time when the identification information for showing the specific discrimination result is stopped and displayed in the first state and the time when the privilege game is completed. ..

As a result, the second privilege game is set at a high rate in the second state, so that the game can be performed in the expectation of the second state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine P1, a gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. The state-variable means is provided when the specific condition is satisfied between the time when the identification information for showing the specific determination result is stopped and displayed in the first state until the end of the privilege game. The gaming machine P2 is characterized in that the gaming state is changed to the second state at least before the gaming state after the end of the privileged game is set by the gaming state setting means.

According to the gaming machine P2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1. That is, one game state is set by the game state setting means from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. When the specific condition is satisfied between the time when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed in the first state and the time when the privilege game is completed, at least the game after the end of the privilege game by the game state setting means. Before the state is set, it is changed to the second state by the state changing means.

As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize at different timings whether or not the game is changed to the second state and whether or not it is set to the advantageous second game state, so that the game during the execution of the privilege game is monotonous. It has the effect of preventing it from becoming.

In the gaming machines P1 or P2, the privileged game executing means executes the privileged game based on the fact that a predetermined execution condition is satisfied after the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. The predetermined execution condition includes at least a first execution condition and a second execution condition different from the first execution condition, and the state-variable means is the first. A gaming machine characterized in that it is variable to the second state based on the fact that the second execution condition is satisfied after the identification information indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed in the state. P3.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines P1 or P2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the privileged game is executed by the privileged game executing means based on the fact that the predetermined execution condition is satisfied after the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. The predetermined execution condition includes at least a first execution condition and a 22nd execution condition different from the first execution condition. Based on the fact that the second execution condition is satisfied after the identification information indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed in the first state, the state is changed to the second state by the state changing means.

As a result, the game can be performed with the expectation that the second execution condition is satisfied, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine P3, the gaming machine P4 is characterized in that the privilege game type setting means sets the second privilege game based on the establishment of the second execution condition.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine P3, the second privileged game is set by the privileged game type setting means based on the establishment of the second execution condition. It is possible to expect more strongly that the execution condition of 2 is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine P4, the predetermined execution condition is a third execution condition different from any of the first execution condition, the second execution condition, the first execution condition, and the second execution condition. In the second state, the third execution condition is more likely to be satisfied after the identification information indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed than in the first state. The gaming machine P5 is characterized in that the privilege game type setting means sets the second privilege game based on the establishment of the third execution condition.

According to the gaming machine P5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P4. That is, the predetermined execution condition includes at least a first execution condition, a second execution condition, and a third execution condition different from the first execution condition and the second execution condition. In the second state, the third execution condition is more likely to be satisfied after the identification information indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed as compared with the first state. The second privilege game is set by the privilege game type setting means based on the fact that the third execution condition is satisfied.

As a result, the game can be performed with the expectation that the third execution condition will be easily satisfied in the second state, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine P5 is characterized in that the state changing means is changed to the first state based on the satisfaction of the third execution condition in the second state.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P5, when the third execution condition is satisfied in the second state, the second state is changed from the second state to the first state, so that the second state continues for a long time and the game is played. It has the effect of suppressing excessive advantage for the person.

In any of the gaming machines P1 to P6, a first ball entry area where a game ball can enter, a second ball entry area different from the first ball entry area, the first ball entry area, and the first ball entry area. A distribution means for distributing a game ball to any of the two entry areas and distributing the game ball to the second entry area at the first ratio, and the first entry area and the first ball entry area. The third ball entry area, which is different from any of the two ball entry areas, the first position where the game ball can enter the third ball entry area, and the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. The second position is provided with a variable means that can be changed, and the privilege game type setting means moves to the first ball entry area after the identification information for showing the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. The first privilege game is set based on the entry of the game ball, the second privilege game is set based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry area, and the third entry is performed. The second privilege game is set based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball region, and the state-variable means is the second ball-entry in a state where the variable means is variable to the second position. The gaming machine P7 is characterized in that the variable means is varied to the first position based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the area.

According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines P1 to P6, the following effects are played. That is, the game ball is distributed by the distribution means to either the first ball entry area where the game ball can enter or the second ball entry area different from the first ball entry area. Game balls are distributed to the second area at the first ratio. The first position where the game ball can enter the third ball entry area, which is different from both the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area, and the first position where the game ball becomes more difficult to enter than the first position. Variable means are variably configured at two positions. While the first privilege game is set by the privilege game type setting means based on the fact that the game ball enters the first entry area after the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed. , The second privilege game is set by the privilege game type setting means based on the fact that the game ball enters the second entry area or the third entry area. Based on the fact that the game ball enters the second ball entry region in the state where the variable means is changed to the second position, the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position by the state changing means.

As a result, the player can easily check the type of the privilege game set by the privilege game type setting means and whether or not the variable means is variable to the first position by simply checking the entry area where the game ball enters. It has the effect of being able to make people understand.

In the game machine P7, the first ball entry area, the second ball entry area, and the distribution means are provided at least inside, and the ball entry means configured to allow the game ball to enter. It is possible to change between the first ball entry position where the pachinko ball can enter the ball entry means and the second ball entry position where it is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the first ball entry position. The second variable means and the second variable means are variable from the second ball entry position to the first ball entry position based on the stop display of the identification information for showing the specific discrimination result. The gaming machine P8, which comprises a variable control means for causing the pachinko machine to be operated.

According to the gaming machine P8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P7. That is, the first ball entry area, the second ball entry area, and the distribution means are provided inside the ball entry means. A second variable means is provided at the first entry position where the game ball can enter the entry means and the second entry position where it is more difficult to enter the entry means than the first entry position. It is configured to be variable. The second variable means is varied from the second entry position to the first entry position by the variable control means based on the fact that the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is set to a low index.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the ball entry means even though the determination result is not specific, so that the variable means can be changed to the first position in the normal state. Can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous.

In the gaming machine P8, a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction thereof is provided, and the ball entering means is launched in the first direction. The game ball is provided at a position where the ball can enter, and the third entry area is provided at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can enter. A gaming machine P9 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine P9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the launching means is configured to be able to launch the game ball in the first direction and the second direction different from the first direction. While the ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can enter, the third entry area is located at the position where the game ball launched in the second direction can enter. Is provided.

As a result, when a specific determination result is obtained in the state where the variable means is variable to the first position, the game is surely moved to the third entry area only by launching the game ball in the second direction. You can let the ball enter. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine P9, a first ball-entry means capable of entering the game ball launched in the first direction, a first variable position in which the game ball can enter the first ball-entry means, and the like thereof. A third variable means that can be changed to a second variable position that makes it more difficult for the game ball to enter than the first variable position, and a second ball entry means that allows the game ball launched in the second direction to enter. , A game state including at least a first game state and a second game state in which the third variable means is more likely to change to the first variable position than the first game state. The game state setting means for setting is provided, and the determination condition is when the game ball enters the first ball entry means and when the game ball enters the second ball entry means. A gaming machine P10 characterized in that it is at least established.

According to the gaming machine P10, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P9. That is, the first ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can enter. The third variable means can be changed to the first variable position where the game ball can enter the first ball entry means and the second variable position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first variable position. It is configured in. A second ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction can enter. One game by the game state setting means from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state in which the third variable means is more likely to be changed to the first variable position than the first game state. The state is set. At least the discrimination condition is satisfied depending on whether the game ball enters the first ball entry means or the game ball enters the second ball entry means.

As a result, when the second gaming state is set with the variable means variable to the first position, the variable means is maintained in the first position only by continuously firing the game ball in the first direction. , The discrimination condition can be satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the variable means from being changed to the second position after being changed to the first position and before a specific determination result is obtained.

<Characteristic Q group> (Provides a state in which one type and two types are more advantageous in terms of time reduction, and a state in which one type is more advantageous).
Based on the fact that any one of a plurality of execution conditions including at least a first execution condition and a second execution condition different from the first execution condition is satisfied, a privileged game advantageous to the player is provided. The privileged game execution means to be executed and the type of privileged game executed by the privileged game executing means include at least a first privileged game and a second privileged game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privileged game. One game from a plurality of gaming states including at least a type setting means for setting one type from a plurality of types, a first gaming state, and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state. The second privilege game is set by the type setting means when the second execution condition is satisfied rather than the first execution condition in the game state setting means capable of setting the state and at least in the second game state. Switching between a first state in which the game is more likely to be performed and a second state in which the type setting means makes it easier to set the second privilege game when the first execution condition is satisfied rather than the second execution condition. A gaming machine Q1 characterized by being provided with a state switching means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, if the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening is a winning, a winning game that is advantageous to the player is executed. be. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some of them aim to improve the interest of winning by differentiating the game values that can be acquired (for example). , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 25144417). In addition, some conventional gaming machines are advantageous by replacing or in addition to the number of rounds, by changing the game state given after hitting, or by changing the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round. Some are trying to improve their interest by providing different degrees.

Furthermore, in some conventional gaming machines, a winning game is executed even when a gaming ball enters a specific area provided on the board, in addition to the lottery based on the winning entry to the starting winning slot. There is something. In addition, among the conventional gaming machines, the ratio of advantageous winning types differs depending on whether the winning is won by a lottery based on the starting prize and the winning by entering a specific area. There are also things that are being played.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the ratio of advantageous winning types is fixed for each chance of winning, so that the game may become monotonous. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to improve the interest in the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine Q1, one of a plurality of execution conditions including at least a first execution condition and a second execution condition different from the first execution condition is satisfied. Based on this, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. As the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the game state is selected from a plurality of game states including at least the first privilege game and the second privilege game which is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. The game state of 1 is set by the setting means. At least in the second game state, when the second execution condition is satisfied rather than the first execution condition, the second privilege game is more likely to be set by the type setting means, and the second execution condition is higher than the second execution condition. When the execution condition of 1 is satisfied, the second state in which the second privilege game is easily set by the type setting means is switched by the state switching means.

As a result, in the second game state, depending on whether it is the first state or the second state, it becomes easier to set the second privilege game by satisfying the first execution condition, or the second. Since it is variable whether or not the second privilege game is easily set when the execution condition is satisfied, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine Q1 includes a specific area in which the game ball can enter, and the first execution condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area. Gaming machine Q2.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q1, the first execution condition is satisfied based on the entry of the gaming ball into the specific area, so that the gaming ball enters the specific area. There is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved because the player can easily determine whether or not the privileged game is executed only by confirming whether or not the game is played.

In the game machine Q2, the ball-entry means in which the specific area is provided inside and the game ball can enter the ball, the first position where the game ball can enter the ball-entry means, and the first position thereof. A variable means that can be changed to a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the first position, a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and discrimination by the discrimination means. Based on the result being the first determination result, the variable means is provided with a variable game executing means for executing a variable game that is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period. The gaming machine Q3 is characterized in that the second execution condition is satisfied based on the fact that the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result.

According to the gaming machine Q3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q2. That is, a specific area is provided inside the ball entry means. Variable means are variably configured in the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter the ball entry means than the first position. There is. Based on the determination result by the determination means becoming the first determination result, the variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position is executed by the variable game execution means for a predetermined period. The second execution condition is satisfied based on the fact that the discrimination result by the discrimination means becomes the second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result.

As a result, it is possible to pay attention to the discrimination result by the discrimination means and perform the game, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine Q3, the ball entry means is provided with at least a first specific area and a second specific area as the specific area inside, and the state switching means is the first state. The gaming machine Q4 is characterized in that it switches to the second state based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the second specific area.

According to the gaming machine Q4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q3. That is, at least a first specific area and a second specific area are provided as specific areas inside the ball entry means. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second specific area in the first state, the state switching means switches to the second state.

As a result, it is possible for the player to easily determine whether or not to switch to the second state only by confirming whether or not the game ball enters the second specific area, which is convenient for the player. Has the effect of being able to improve.

The gaming machine Q4 includes a distribution means for distributing the game ball that has entered the ball entry means to one of a plurality of regions including at least the first specific region and the second specific region. The type setting means sets the first privilege game based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first specific area, and the second type setting means is based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second specific area. A gaming machine Q5 characterized by setting a privileged gaming.

According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball that has entered the ball entry means is distributed by the distribution means to one of a plurality of regions including at least the first specific region and the second specific region. The first privilege game is set by the type setting means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first specific area, while the second is set by the type setting means based on the entry into the second specific area. Bonus games are set.

As a result, the player can determine the type of the privileged game to be easily executed only by confirming the type of the specific area in which the game ball has entered, so that the convenience of the player can be improved. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, the gaming ball is configured to be able to enter the ball, and the gaming ball is provided to the second entering means and the second entering means thereof, in which the third specific area is provided as the specific area inside. The type setting means is provided with a third position capable of entering a ball and a second variable means variable to a fourth position where it is more difficult to enter the second ball entry means than the third position. Set the second privilege game based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third specific area, and in the first state, the second variable means is changed to the fourth position. The gaming machine Q6 is characterized in that the second variable means is variable to the third position.

According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a third specific area is provided as a specific area inside the second ball entry means. The second variable means can be changed to a third position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a fourth position where it is more difficult to enter the second ball entry means than the third position. It is configured in. The second privilege game is set by the type setting means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the third specific area. The second variable means is changed to the fourth position to be in the first state, while the second variable means is changed to the third position to be in the second state.

This has the effect that by confirming the state of the second variable means, the player can easily understand whether the state is the first state or the second state.

In the gaming machine Q6, the second variable means is variable to the fourth position based on the fact that the gaming ball enters the second entry means in a state of being variable to the third position. A gaming machine Q7 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine Q7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q6, the gaming ball enters the second entering means while the second variable means is variable to the third position. Since the two variable means are variable to the fourth position, it is possible to prevent the state in which the second variable means is arranged at the third position from continuing for a long time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous.

In the gaming machine Q6 or Q7, the type setting means has the second discrimination result at a first ratio based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means being the second discrimination result at least in the second gaming state. The privilege game is set, and the ball entry means is configured so that the ball entered into the second specific area at a second rate lower than the first rate. A gaming machine Q8 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine Q8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q6 or Q7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least in the second gaming state, the second privilege game is set at the first ratio by the type setting means based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means becoming the second discrimination result. The ball entering means is configured so that the entered game ball enters the second specific area at a second rate lower than the first rate.

As a result, in the first state, the rate at which the second privilege game is set is higher when the second discrimination result is obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means. However, the game can be performed with the expectation that the second determination result will be obtained. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the discrimination result by the discrimination means.

In any of the gaming machines Q6 to Q8, a launching means configured to launch the gaming ball in at least a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction thereof is provided, and the ball entry means is described above. The second ball entering means is provided at a position where the gaming ball launched in the first direction can enter and the gaming ball launched in the second direction becomes difficult to enter. The game is characterized in that the game ball launched in the second direction can be entered and the game ball launched in the first direction is provided at a position where it is difficult to enter. Machine Q9.

According to the gaming machine Q9, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines Q6 to Q8, the following effects are played. That is, the launching means is configured to be capable of launching a game ball in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction. A ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can enter and the game ball launched in the second direction becomes difficult to enter. A second ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can enter and the game ball launched in the first direction becomes difficult to enter.

As a result, it is possible to easily change the type of the ball entry means for entering the ball depending on the launch direction of the game ball, which has the effect of improving the convenience of the player.

<Characteristic R group> (As a special 1 V challenge, multiple types with different V prize expectations are provided)
At the entry means where the game ball can enter, the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. A variable means that can be changed, a first flow path in which a game ball that has entered the ball entry means can flow down, a second flow path that is different from the first flow path, and the ball entry means. A distribution means for distributing the game ball that has entered the ball into any of a plurality of flow paths including at least the first flow path and the second flow path, and the distribution means to the first flow path. At a position where the distributed game balls can enter at the first ratio and the game balls distributed to the second flow path can enter at a second ratio higher than the first ratio. Based on the specific area provided and the game ball entering the specific area, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the discrimination are executed based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. A variable game in which the variable means executes a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the discrimination means and the discrimination result by the discrimination means becomes a specific discrimination result. As a type of the variable game executed by the execution means and the variable game execution means, the first variable game and the game ball that has entered the ball entry means rather than the first variable game are in the second flow path. The gaming machine R1 is characterized by comprising a second variable game that can be easily sorted, and a type setting means for setting one variable game type from a plurality of types including at least a plurality of types.

Here, the gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has an entry port that allows the ball to enter when the electric accessory is opened (or movable) in the gaming machine such as the pachinko machine. A game ball that has entered the inside of the V-winning device that is opened during a specific game (small hit game, etc.) executed based on the entry of the game ball into the V-winning device is provided in the V-winning device. A pachinko machine has been proposed that makes it possible to give a privileged game (winning game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player by passing through a specific area (winning switch, etc.), and the player's interest has been improved ( For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010741).

In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines perform an effect that suggests the degree of expectation as to whether or not the privileged game given when passing through a specific area during a specific game is an advantageous type. There are also those that are configured to be possible. In the conventional gaming machine, when it is suggested that the expectation of the privileged gaming of an advantageous type is high, the gaming can be performed with a stronger expectation of passing through a specific area.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the ratio of the gaming ball passing through the specific region when a specific game is executed is the same, so that it is suggested that the expectation is high, which is an advantageous type. However, there was a problem that it was difficult to improve the interest of the player.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine R1, the variable means is variable between the first position where the gaming ball can enter the ball entering means and the second position where the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. It is configured to be possible. One of a plurality of flow paths including at least a first flow path in which a game ball that has entered the ball entry means can flow down and a second flow path different from the first flow path. The game ball that has entered the ball entry means is distributed by the distribution means. The game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means become Uto on vacation at the first ratio, and the game balls distributed to the second flow path are in the second ratio higher than the first ratio. A specific area is provided at a position where the ball can be entered. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific area, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means. Discrimination is executed by the discriminant means based on the establishment of the discriminant condition, and the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the fact that the discriminant result by the discriminant means becomes a specific discriminant result. The variable game is executed by the variable game execution means. As a type of variable game executed by the variable game execution means, the first variable game and the second variable game in which the game ball that has entered the ball entry means is more easily distributed to the second flow path than the first variable game. And, one variable game type is set by the type setting means from a plurality of types including at least.

As a result, when the second variable game is set, the rate of entering the specific area is higher than that of the first variable game. Therefore, when the discrimination result by the discrimination means becomes a specific discrimination result, It can be strongly expected that the second variable game will be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine R1, the first variable game is configured such that it is difficult for a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means to flow into the second flow path, and the second variable game is The game ball that has entered the ball entry means is configured so that it is difficult for the game ball to flow into the first flow path, and the type setting means includes the first variable game and the second variable. One variable game from a plurality of types including at least a game and a third variable game in which a game ball that has entered the ball entry means can flow into the first flow path and the second flow path. The gaming machine R2, which is characterized in that it sets the type of.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine R1, the following effects are played. That is, in the first variable game, it becomes difficult for the game ball that has entered the ball entry means to flow into the second flow path, while in the second variable game, the game ball that has entered the ball entry means It becomes difficult to flow into the first flow path. A plurality of types including at least a first variable game, a second variable game, and a third variable game in which a game ball that has entered the ball entry means can flow into both the first flow path and the second flow path. One variable game type is set from among them by the type setting means.

As a result, the possibility that the game ball enters a specific area can be made different depending on the type of the variable game set by the type setting means, so that the effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved can be improved. be.

In the gaming machines R1 or R2, the specific region includes a first specific region provided at a position where the gaming balls distributed to the first flow path can enter at the first ratio, and the second. The gaming machine R3 is characterized in that the gaming balls distributed to the flow path are at least composed of a second specific region provided at a position where the gaming balls can be entered at the second ratio.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R1 or R2, as a specific region, the first specific region is located at a position where the gaming balls distributed to the first flow path can enter at the first ratio. On the other hand, since the second specific area is provided at the position where the game balls distributed to the second flow path can enter at the second ratio, it corresponds to the type of the distributed flow path. By confirming the specific area to be played, the player can easily grasp whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine R3, the first flow path is provided with a passing means through which the gaming ball can pass, and the privileged gaming executing means is based on the passing of the passing means by the gaming ball. A gaming machine R4 characterized by executing a privileged gaming.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R3, the privileged game is executed by the privileged game executing means based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through the passing means provided in the first flow path. There is an effect that the player's expectation for the privileged game when the game ball is distributed to the first flow path can be improved.

In the gaming machine R4, the first flow path is composed of at least a first path provided with the passing means and a second path not provided with the passing means, and the first path is configured. The gaming machine R5 is characterized in that both the gaming ball that has passed through one path and the gaming ball that has passed through the second path enter the first specific region at the first ratio.

According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first flow path is composed of at least a first path provided with a passing means and a second path not provided with a passing means. Both the game ball that has passed through the first path and the game ball that has passed through the second path are configured to enter the first specific area at a first ratio.

As a result, the game can be played with the expectation that the player will pass through the first route, which has the effect of improving the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine R5 is characterized by comprising a shielding means that makes it difficult to visually recognize whether the gaming ball flowing into the first flow path has passed the first path or the second path. ..

According to the gaming machine R6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R5, it is difficult to visually recognize whether the gaming ball flowing into the first flow path has passed the first path or the second path by the shielding means. Therefore, even if the player has passed the second route, the player can be expected to have passed the first route. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine R6, a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect indicating whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area during the execution period of the variable game based on the execution of the variable game. The specific effect executing means is described, regardless of whether or not the gaming ball that has flowed into the first flow path has passed through the passage means when the game ball has not entered the first specific area. The gaming machine R7 is characterized in that the specific effect of the effect mode indicating that the ball has not entered the specific area is executed.

According to the gaming machine R7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the execution of the variable game, a specific effect indicating whether the game ball has entered the specific area during the execution period of the variable game is executed by the specific effect execution means. When the game ball that has flowed into the first flow path does not enter the first specific area, it does not enter the specific area by the specific effect executing means regardless of whether or not it has passed through the passing means. A specific effect of the effect mode indicating that the effect is performed is executed.

As a result, it is possible to make it unknown for a longer period of time whether or not the privilege game is executed through the passing means, so that the effect that the player's expectation for the privilege game can be maintained for a longer time is obtained. be.

In the gaming machine R7, when the gaming ball that has flowed into the first flow path passes through the passing means and does not enter the first specific area, the privilege after the end of the specific effect. The gaming machine R8 comprising a second effect executing means for executing a second effect indicating that the game is executed.

According to the gaming machine R8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R7, it is specified when the gaming ball flowing into the first flow path passes through the passing means and does not enter the first specific area. After the end of the effect, the second effect indicating that the privilege game is executed is executed by the second effect execution means, so that the game ball that has flowed into the first flow path does not enter the first specific area. In that case, the player can be made to play the game in the expectation that the second effect will be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines R1 to R8, the type setting means includes the first variable game, the second variable game, and the gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means in the first flow path. The gaming machine R9 is characterized in that one variable game type is set from a plurality of types including at least a fourth variable game that cannot flow into the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine R9, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines R1 to R8, the first variable game, the second variable game, and the gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means are also in the first flow path. Since one variable game type is set by the type setting means from a plurality of types including at least a fourth variable game that cannot flow into the second flow path, the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a specific discrimination. When the result is obtained, there is an effect that the game can be performed with a strong desire that the fourth variable game is not executed.

<Characteristic S group> (Even if the game ball is distributed to the route on the V winning opening side with low time saving expectation, the game ball entered after that can enter the V winning opening with high time saving expectation)
In the entry means where the game ball can enter, the first position where the game ball can enter into the entry means, and the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. Based on the variable means that can be changed, the discrimination means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination result by the discrimination means becomes a specific discrimination result, the variable means is said from the second position. In a gaming machine having a variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable to a first position for a predetermined period, a first flow path through which the game ball that has entered the ball entry means can flow down, and a first flow path thereof. A second flow path different from the first flow path, a first specific region provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and a game ball flowing down the second flow path. The game ball has entered any one of a plurality of specific areas including at least a second specific area, the first specific area, and the second specific area provided at a position where the ball can enter. The game machine is provided with a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, until the game ball flowing into the first flow path enters the first specific area. The game is characterized in that the period between them is likely to be longer than the period until the gaming ball flowing into the second flow path enters the second specific region. Machine S1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has an entry port that allows the ball to enter when the electric accessory is opened (or movable), and the game ball enters the entry port. A game ball that has entered the inside of a V-winning device that is opened during a specific game (small hit game, etc.) executed based on the above-mentioned has a specific area (winning switch, etc.) provided in the V-winning device. A pachinko machine has been proposed that enables a player to be given a privileged game (such as a winning game) by passing through the pachinko machine, and the player's interest has been improved (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011). -010741).

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, a plurality of specific areas are provided on the board surface, and the degree of advantage of the privileged game given when the specific area is passed during the specific game depends on the type of the specific area. Some are configured to be variable.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is only one specific area in which the game ball enters in one specific game, and when the game ball advances toward a specific area having a low degree of advantage, the game is played. There was a problem that the expectation of the person was significantly lowered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine S1, the variable means is set to a first position where the gaming ball can enter the ball entering means and a second position where the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. Is variably configured. A variable game in which the variable means is biased from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period or time is executed by the variable game executing means based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a specific determination result. A first flow path and a second flow path different from the first flow path are provided at positions where the game ball that has entered the ball entry means can flow down. The first specific area is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, while the second specific area is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter. Has been done. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered any one of a plurality of specific areas including at least the first specific area and the second specific area, the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game advantageous to the player. To. The period until the game ball that has flowed into the first flow path enters the first specific area is the period until the game ball that has flowed into the second flow path enters the second specific area. It is configured to be easier to be longer than.

As a result, the period until the game ball that has flowed into the first flow path enters the first specific region can be lengthened. Therefore, when the game ball flows into the first flow path, the first It is possible to make the player expect for a longer time that the game ball enters a specific area and the privilege game is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine S1, at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game are provided as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. When the game ball enters the first specific area, the privileged game executing means executes the second privileged game at the first ratio and enters the second specific area. The gaming machine S2 is characterized in that it is configured to execute the second privilege game at a second ratio higher than the first ratio.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine S1, the following effects are played. That is, as a type of the privileged game executed by the privileged game executing means, at least a first privileged game and a second privileged game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privileged game are provided. When the game ball enters the first specific area, the second privilege game is executed at the first ratio by the privilege game execution means, while the first ratio when the ball enters the second specific area. The second privilege game is executed at a higher second rate than.

As a result, the player can be strongly expected that the game ball will flow into the second flow path, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine S1 or S2, a first distribution state in which the game ball that has entered the ball entry means is distributed to the first flow path and a second distribution state in which the game ball is distributed to the second flow path. A distribution means that is variably configured to include at least a plurality of distribution states, a distribution control means that changes the distribution state of the distribution means in a predetermined variable pattern during execution of the variable game, and the above-mentioned. The types of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means include a first period in which the distribution means is in the first distribution state and a second period in which the distribution means is in the second distribution state. The variable means is provided with a specific type setting means capable of setting a specific variable game in which the variable means is changed to the first position, and the gaming machine is provided during the first period of the specific variable game of 1. The game ball distributed to the second flow path during the second period is in the second specific area rather than the timing when the game ball distributed to the first flow path enters the first specific area. The gaming machine S3 is characterized in that the timing of entering the ball is likely to be earlier.

According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine S1 or S2, the following effects are played. That is, a plurality of distribution means including at least a first distribution state in which the game ball entering the ball entry means is distributed to the first flow path and a second distribution state in which the game ball is distributed to the second flow path. It is configured to be variable to the distribution state. During the execution of the variable game, the distribution state of the distribution means is changed by the distribution control means in a predetermined variable pattern. As a type of variable game executed by the variable game execution means, at least the variable means is included in the first period in which the distribution means is in the first distribution state and the second period in which the distribution means is in the second distribution state. A specific variable game that is variable to the first position is set by the specific type setting means. A game distributed to the second flow path during the second period rather than the timing at which the game ball distributed to the first flow path during the first period in the specific variable game 1 enters the first specific area. The timing at which the ball enters the second specific area is likely to be earlier.

As a result, when the game ball enters the ball entry means in both the first period and the second period, the first specification is performed after the result of whether or not the ball enters the second specific area is obtained. Since it becomes clear whether or not to enter the area, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused as to whether the player should pay attention to the second specific area or the first specific area. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machine S3, the gaming balls distributed to the first flow path enter the first specific region at the first ball entry ratio, and are distributed to the second flow path. The gaming machine S4 is characterized in that the gaming ball enters the second specific area at a second entry ratio lower than that of the first entry ratio.

According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine S3, the following effects are played. That is, the first flow path is configured so that the game balls distributed to the first flow path enter the first specific region at the first entry ratio. The second flow path is configured so that the game ball distributed to the second flow path enters the second specific area at a second entry rate lower than that of the first entry rate.

As a result, when the game ball enters the ball entry means in both the first period and the second period, first, whether or not the game ball enters the second specific area where the rate of entry is low. After it becomes clear, it becomes clear whether or not the game ball enters the first specific area where the rate of entering the ball is high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation that the privileged game is executed as the variable game progresses, and thus there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine S3 or S4, at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game are provided as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means. When the game ball enters the first specific area, the privileged game executing means executes the second privileged game at the first ratio and moves to the second specific area. The second privilege game is configured to be executed at a second ratio higher than the first ratio when the ball is entered, and the privilege game execution means is executing one variable game. When the game ball enters the second specific area, the second privilege game is executed at the second ratio regardless of whether or not the game ball subsequently enters the first specific area. A gaming machine S5 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines S3 or S4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as a type of the privileged game executed by the privileged game executing means, at least a first privileged game and a second privileged game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privileged game are provided. When the game ball enters the first specific area, the second privilege game is executed at the first ratio by the privilege game execution means, while the first ratio when the ball enters the second specific area. The second privilege game is executed at a higher second rate than. When a game ball enters the second specific area during the execution of the variable game of 1, the second ratio is determined by the privileged game execution means regardless of whether or not the ball subsequently enters the first specific area. The second privilege game is executed at.

As a result, when the game ball enters the ball entry means in both the first period and the second period, and the game ball enters the second specific area, the game is subsequently entered into the first specific area. Even if the ball enters, the second privilege game is executed at a high rate, so that there is an effect that the player can be relieved when the game ball enters the second specific area.

In any of the gaming machines S1 to S5, the period until the gaming ball that has flowed into the first flow path enters the first specific region is the period until the gaming ball that has flowed into the second flow path is described. The gaming machine S6 is provided with a delay means for delaying the flow speed of the gaming ball flowing into the second flow path so as to be longer than the period until the ball enters the second specific region.

According to the gaming machine S6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines S1 to S5, the period until the gaming ball flowing into the first flow path enters the first specific region flows into the second flow path. Since the flow speed of the game ball that has flowed into the second flow path is delayed by the delay means so that the period until the game ball enters the second specific area is longer, the flow speed of the game ball is surely the first. 2 The effect is that it is possible to realize the operation of clarifying whether or not the game ball enters the first specific area after it is clarified whether or not the game ball enters the specific area. be.

In any of the gaming machines S1 to S6, the privilege game executing means can execute the privilege game based on the fact that the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a second discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. A gaming machine S7 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine S7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines S1 to S6, the privileged game executing means is based on the fact that the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a second discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. Since the privilege game is executed, it is possible to pay attention to the discrimination result by the discrimination means and perform the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines S1 to S7, as a gaming state after the execution of the privileged game is completed, at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. The game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of including the game state is provided, and the first game state has a higher probability that the discrimination result by the discrimination means becomes the specific discrimination result than the second gaming state. A gaming machine S8 characterized by being low.

According to the gaming machine S8, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines S1 to S7, the following effects are played. That is, as a game state after the effect of the privilege game is completed, a game state setting means is included from at least a plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. 1 sets the game state. The first gaming state is configured so that the probability that the discrimination result by the discrimination means becomes a specific discrimination result is lower than that in the second gaming state.

As a result, in the first gaming state, it can be expected that the discrimination by the discrimination means will result in the second discrimination result, while in the second gaming state, it is expected that the discrimination by the discrimination means will result in a specific discrimination result. Can be made to. Therefore, since the game can be sharpened according to the game state, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic T group> (It is difficult to tell whether it is a small hit without V-chare)
At the entry means where the game ball can enter, the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. It is advantageous to the player based on the variable means that can be changed, the specific area provided at the position where the game ball that has entered the ball entry means can pass, and the game ball that has passed through the specific area. The variable means is predetermined based on the privilege game execution means for executing the special bonus game, the discrimination means for discriminating based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination result by the discrimination means to be a specific discrimination result. As a type of the variable game executing means for executing a variable game variable by the variable pattern of the above and the variable game executed by the variable game executing means, the gaming ball passes through the specific area between one variable pattern. The first variable game in which the variable means is changed in the first variable pattern in which at least a specific variable mode that becomes difficult is set, and the game ball is easier to pass through the specific area than the first variable pattern, and A type in which one type is set from a plurality of types including at least a second variable game in which the variable means is changed in a second variable pattern in which the specific variable mode is set between the variable patterns of 1. A gaming machine T1 characterized by comprising a setting means.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has an entry port that allows the ball to enter when the electric accessory is opened (or movable), and the game ball enters the entry port. A game ball that has entered the inside of a V-winning device that is opened during a specific game (small hit game, etc.) executed based on the above-mentioned has a specific area (winning switch, etc.) provided in the V-winning device. A pachinko machine has been proposed that enables a player to be given a privileged game (such as a winning game) by passing through the pachinko machine, and the player's interest has been improved (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011). -010741).

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, as specific types of games, a type in which a game ball can enter a specific area and a type in which it is difficult to enter a specific area are provided. There are also things that exist.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, in a specific game type in which it is difficult to enter a specific area, the operation is clearly different from the type in which the ball can be entered, so that the ball can be entered immediately. In some cases, the player could understand whether or not the ball was a difficult type. Therefore, if the player understands that it is a type that makes it difficult to enter a specific area, there is a problem that the player's motivation for the game may be lowered.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine T1, the variable means is variable between the first position where the gaming ball can enter the ball entering means and the second position where the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. It is configured to be possible. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided at a position where the game ball that has entered the ball entry means can pass, the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game advantageous to the player. A variable game in which the variable means is varied in a predetermined variable pattern based on the fact that the discrimination is executed by the discriminant means based on the establishment of the discriminant condition and the discriminant result by the discriminant means becomes a specific discriminant result is a variable game. It is executed by the means of execution. As a type of variable game executed by the variable game execution means, the variable means is changed by the first variable pattern in which at least a specific variable mode in which the game ball is difficult to pass through a specific area is set during one variable pattern. The variable means is a first variable game and a second variable pattern in which a game ball is easier to pass through a specific area than the first variable pattern and a specific variable mode is set between the first variable patterns. One type is set by the type setting means from a plurality of types including at least a variable second variable game.

As a result, since a plurality of different types of variable games can be set by the type setting means, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine T1, the second variable pattern includes the specific variable mode and the second variable mode in which the gaming ball is more likely to pass through the specific region than the specific variable mode. The gaming machine T2, characterized in that, is at least set.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T1, in the second variable pattern, the gaming ball passes through a specific variable mode during the variable pattern of 1 and a specific area rather than the specific variable mode. Since at least the second variable mode that facilitates is set, a specific variable mode is set in both the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern. Therefore, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether the pattern is the first variable pattern or the second variable pattern, so that there is an effect that the expectation for the second variable pattern can be maintained for a longer period of time.

In the gaming machine T2, the second variable pattern is characterized in that the second variable mode is set after the specific variable mode is set between the variable patterns of 1. Machine T3.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T2, in the second variable pattern, the second variable mode is set after the specific variable mode is set between the variable patterns of 1. At least until the end of a specific variable mode, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether it is the first variable pattern or the second variable pattern. Therefore, there is an effect that the expectation for the second variable pattern can be maintained for a longer time.

In any of the gaming machines T1 to T3, the variable game executing means is provided with a game value-imparting means for imparting a predetermined game value based on the ball entering the ball-entering means, and the variable game executing means is described in 1. The gaming machine T4 is characterized in that the variable game is terminated based on the fact that a specific number or more of the gaming balls have entered the ball entry means during the execution of the variable game.

According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines T1 to T3, the following effects are played. That is, a predetermined game value is given by the game value-giving means based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball-entry means. Since the execution of the variable game by the variable game execution means is terminated based on the fact that a specific number or more of the game balls have entered the ball entry means during the execution of the variable game of 1, is it the first variable pattern? , It is possible to realize a novel playability of predicting whether or not the pattern is the second variable pattern and letting the player select whether or not to allow the game ball to enter the ball entry means during the execution of a specific variable mode. can. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine T4, in the second variable pattern, after the specific variable mode is set between the variable patterns of 1, the gaming ball is more likely to pass through the specific area than the specific variable mode. The second variable mode is set, and at least during the execution of the specific variable mode, it is a game whether the gaming ball is allowed to enter the ball entering means or the ball is avoided from entering the ball entering means. The gaming machine T5 is provided with a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect of an effect mode to be selected by a person.

According to the gaming machine T5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T4. That is, in the second variable pattern, after a specific variable mode is set between the one variable pattern, a second variable mode is set in which the game ball is more likely to pass through the specific area than the specific variable mode. To. The specific effect of the effect mode, which allows the player to select whether to allow the game ball to enter the ball entry means or to avoid entering the ball entry means during at least the execution of the specific variable mode, is the specific effect execution means. Is executed by.

This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that it is sufficient to select whether to allow the game ball to enter the ball entry means or to avoid it by a specific effect, thereby realizing easy-to-understand playability. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine T5, the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect at least during the execution of the specific variable mode regardless of the type of the variable game set by the type setting means. The featured gaming machine T6.

According to the gaming machine T6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine T5, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means at least during the execution of the specific variable mode regardless of the type of the variable game set by the type setting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the type of variable game can be made difficult for the player to recognize.

In the gaming machine T5 or T6, as the effect mode of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means, at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode different from the first effect mode are included. The effect mode determining means for determining one effect mode from a plurality of items is provided, and the effect mode determining means is said to be more than the second effect mode when the first variable pattern is set by the type setting means. The ratio of determining the first effect mode is high, and when the second variable pattern is set by the type setting means, the rate of determining the second effect mode is higher than that of the first effect mode. A gaming machine T7 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine T7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T5 or T6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the effect mode of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means, the effect mode is determined from among a plurality of the first effect mode and the second effect mode of the effect mode different from the first effect mode. The production mode of 1 is determined by the means. When the first variable pattern is set by the type setting means, the ratio of determining the first effect mode is higher than the rate of determining the second effect mode by the effect mode determining means. On the other hand, when the second variable pattern is set by the type setting means, the ratio of determining the second effect mode is higher than the rate of determining the first effect mode by the effect mode determining means.

As a result, since the type of the variable game can be predicted according to the production mode of the specific effect, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines T1 to T7, the privilege game executing means executes the privilege game based on the fact that the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a second discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. A gaming machine T8 characterized in that it is configured to be possible.

According to the gaming machine T8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines T1 to T7, the privilege game is executed based on the fact that the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a second discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. Since the privileged game is executed by the means, it is possible to pay attention to the discrimination result by the discrimination means and perform the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines T1 to T8, as a gaming state after the execution of the privileged game is completed, at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. The game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of including the game state is provided, and the first game state has a higher probability that the discrimination result by the discrimination means becomes the specific discrimination result than the second gaming state. A gaming machine T9 characterized by being low.

According to the gaming machine T8, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines T1 to T8, the following effects are played. That is, as the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed, the game state setting means includes at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. 1 sets the game state. The first gaming state is configured so that the probability that the discrimination result by the discrimination means becomes a specific discrimination result is lower than that in the second gaming state.

As a result, in the first gaming state, it can be expected that the discrimination by the discrimination means will result in the second discrimination result, while in the second gaming state, it is expected that the discrimination by the discrimination means will result in a specific discrimination result. Can be made to. Therefore, since the game can be sharpened according to the game state, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic U group> (The role of the display mode displayed when the button is operated is changed according to the operation status of the player)
A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition in a predetermined effect period, and a first specific effect as a type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. , A type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a second specific effect suggesting that it is more advantageous to the player than the first specific effect, and the type determining means. As the ratio at which the second specific effect is determined, a ratio of 1 is selected according to the situation of the game from a plurality of ratios including at least a first ratio and a second ratio higher than the first ratio. A gaming machine U1 comprising: a ratio setting means for setting.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In this conventional gaming machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a winning game advantageous to the player is given. Further, on the display device, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed in addition to the design, and the entertainment of the game is improved by executing a wide variety of entertainment effects (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886 (Ab. 2003-325886).

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, an operating means that can be operated by the player is provided, and each time the operating means is operated during the execution of the hobby effect, it is suggested that the expectation level of the winning game is suggested. There are also things that can be produced.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, depending on whether the player tends to actively operate or does not operate, the suggestion effect with high expectation during one hobby effect is produced. Since the number of times the game is executed varies, there is a problem that the degree of expectation of the hobby production also varies depending on the tendency of the player's operation.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine U1, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means based on the fact that the predetermined specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined effect period. As a type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means, a plurality of types including at least a first specific effect and a second specific effect suggesting that the player is more advantageous than the first specific effect. One type is determined from among them by the type determining means. As a ratio in which the second specific effect is determined by the type determining means, a ratio setting means is used to set the ratio from a plurality of ratios including at least a first ratio and a second ratio higher than the first ratio. A ratio of 1 is set according to the situation.

As a result, the ratio at which the second specific effect is determined changes according to the situation of the game, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine U1, the gaming machine U2 is characterized in that the specific condition can be satisfied a plurality of times in the effect period of 1.

According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U1, the specific condition can be satisfied multiple times in one production period, so that the game is expected to satisfy as many specific conditions as possible. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine U3 is characterized in that the gaming machines U1 or U2 are provided with operating means that can be operated by the player, and the specific conditions are satisfied when the operating means are operated during the effect period.

According to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines U1 or U2, the specific conditions are satisfied when the operating means is operated by the player during the effect period, so that more specific effects are provided. Since the operating means can be positively operated by the player who wants to execute the game, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines U1 to U3, the establishment status determination means for determining the establishment status of the specific condition in at least one of the production periods and the information according to the determination result by the establishment status determination means are at least next. A holding means that can be held until the specific effect is executed, and the ratio setting means is one of the plurality of ratios depending on the information held by the holding means. A gaming machine U4 characterized by setting a ratio.

According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines U1 to U3, the following effects are played. That is, the establishment status of the specific condition in at least one effect period is determined by the establishment status determination means, and the information corresponding to the determination result by the establishment status determination means is retained until at least the next specific effect is executed. Is held by. According to the information held by the holding means, a ratio of 1 is set by the ratio setting means from a plurality of ratios.

As a result, the ratio at which the second specific effect is determined when the specific condition is satisfied during the current effect period can be changed according to the establishment status of the specific condition during the previous effect period. There is an effect that the ratio can be preferably set according to the tendency of the specific condition to be satisfied.

In the gaming machine U4, the establishment status determining means is configured so as to be able to at least determine whether or not the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the effect period of 1 is equal to or greater than the specified number of times, and the ratio setting. The means sets the first ratio when it is determined by the establishment status determining means that the number of times the specific condition is satisfied is equal to or more than the specified number of times, and when it is determined that the number of times is less than the specified number of times, the means said. A gaming machine U5 characterized in that a second ratio is set.

According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is determined by the establishment status determining means whether or not the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in one production period is equal to or more than the specific number of times. When it is determined by the establishment status determining means that the number of times the specific condition is satisfied is equal to or more than the specified number of times, the first ratio is set by the ratio setting means, but it is determined that the number of times is less than the specified number of times. The second ratio is set to.

As a result, when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied is relatively small, the ratio of the second specific effect being determined in the next effect period can be increased, so that the second specific effect is determined within one effect period. The number of times it is done can be made uniform. Therefore, there is an effect that a more suitable effect can be realized.

In any of the gaming machines U1 to U4, a discriminant means for executing the discriminant based on the establishment of the discriminant condition and a privileged game advantageous to the player based on the discriminating result of the discriminating means becoming a specific discriminant result. The privilege game executing means for executing the above, the suggestion effect executing means for executing the discrimination result suggestion effect indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means in the predetermined effect period based on the execution of the discrimination by the discrimination means, and the suggestion effect execution means. The type determination means has a production period of the discrimination result suggestion effect showing the specific discrimination result rather than a production period of the discrimination result suggestion effect showing a deviation discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. However, the gaming machine U5 is configured such that when the specific condition is satisfied, the ratio of determining the second specific effect is high.

According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines U1 to U4, the following effects are played. That is, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the specific discrimination result. Based on the execution of the discrimination by the discrimination means, the discrimination result suggestion effect indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means is executed by the suggestion effect execution means in a predetermined effect period. The production period of the discrimination result suggestion effect showing a specific discrimination result is longer than the production period of the discrimination result suggestion effect showing the deviation discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result, when the specific condition is satisfied, by the type determination means. It is configured so that the ratio of determining the second specific effect is high.

As a result, each time the specific condition is satisfied, the game can be performed with the expectation that the second specific effect will be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine U5, the ratio setting means has the first ratio, the second ratio, and the third ratio lower than the first ratio as the ratio at which the second specific effect is determined. , A fourth ratio lower than the second ratio, and a ratio of 1 from a plurality of ratios including at least a ratio, and the ratio setting means is the discrimination result showing the specific discrimination result. In the effect period of the suggestion effect, either the first ratio or the second ratio is set according to the situation of the game, and in the effect period of the discrimination result suggestion effect showing the deviation determination result, the said The gaming machine U6 is characterized in that any one of the third ratio and the fourth ratio can be set according to the situation of the game.

According to the gaming machine U6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the ratio in which the second specific effect is determined, the first ratio, the second ratio, the third ratio lower than the first ratio, and the fourth ratio lower than the second ratio. A ratio of 1 is set by the ratio setting means from a plurality of ratios including at least. In the production period of the discrimination result suggestion effect showing a specific discrimination result, either the first ratio or the second ratio is set according to the situation of the game by the ratio setting means, while the deviation discrimination result is set. In the effect period of the discrimination result suggestion effect shown, either the third ratio or the fourth ratio is set according to the situation of the game by the ratio setting means.

This has the effect of improving the player's expectation for the privileged game when the second specific effect is executed.

In the gaming machine U6, the ratio setting means is the effect period of the discrimination result suggestion effect indicating the specific discrimination result, and the first ratio is the case where the gaming situation is the first gaming situation. Is set, and when it is the production period of the discrimination result suggestion effect showing the specific discrimination result and the game situation is a second game situation different from the first game situation, the second game situation When it is the effect period of the discrimination result suggestion effect showing the deviation determination result and the game situation is the first gaming situation, the third ratio is set and the deviation is set. A gaming machine characterized in that the fourth ratio is set when the discrimination result is the effect period of the discrimination result suggestion effect and the game situation is the second game situation. U7.

According to the gaming machine U7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when it is the production period of the discrimination result suggestion effect showing the specific discrimination result and the game situation is the first game situation, the first ratio is set by the ratio setting means, and the specific discrimination result is set. When it is the production period of the discrimination result suggestion effect and the game situation is the second game situation different from the first game situation, the second ratio is set by the ratio setting means, and the deviation determination is made. When it is the production period of the discrimination result suggestion effect showing the result and the game situation is the first game situation, the third ratio is set by the ratio setting means, and the discrimination result suggestion effect showing the deviation judgment result is shown. When the effect period is the above and the game situation is the second game situation, the fourth ratio is set by the ratio setting means, so that there is an effect that the effect mode can be diversified.

In any of the gaming machines U5 to U7, as the effect period of the discrimination result suggestion effect, one of a plurality of periods including at least a first effect period and a second effect period longer than the first effect period. The effect period setting means for setting the period of the above is provided, and the type determination means is a third specific effect different from any of the first specific effect, the second specific effect, the first specific effect, and the second specific effect. It is configured so that one type can be determined from a plurality of types including at least the effect, and the third specific effect is the specific effect in the second effect period rather than the first effect period. The gaming machine U8, characterized in that the ratio determined when the conditions are satisfied is high.

According to the gaming machine U8, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines U5 to U7, the following effects are played. That is, as the effect period of the discrimination result suggestion effect, one period is set by the effect period setting means from a plurality of periods including at least a first effect period and a second effect period longer than the first effect period. Will be done. One type of specific effect by a type determination means from a plurality of types including at least a first specific effect, a second specific effect, and a third specific effect different from any of the first specific effect and the second specific effect. Is determined. The ratio of the third specific effect being determined when the specific condition is satisfied in the second effect period is higher than that in the first effect period.

This has the effect of increasing the expectation that the second effect period is set when the third specific effect is executed.

In the gaming machine U8, the third specific effect is when the specific condition is satisfied between the start of the second effect period and the elapse of a period equal to or less than the length of the first effect period. The gaming machine U9 is characterized in that the ratio of determination is higher than when the specific condition is satisfied in the first effect period.

According to the gaming machine U9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U8, when a specific condition is satisfied between the start of the second production period and the elapse of a period equal to or less than the length of the first production period. Since the ratio of the third specific effect to be determined is higher than that when the specific condition is satisfied in the first effect period, the execution of the third specific effect causes the discrimination result suggestion effect beyond the first effect period. It has the effect of raising expectations for the continuation of.

In the gaming machine U8 or U9, the effect period setting means sets the second effect period as the effect period of the determination result suggestion effect indicating the specific determination result higher than the first effect period. A gaming machine U10 characterized in that it is configured to be.

According to the gaming machine U10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U8 or U9, the ratio of setting the second production period is higher than the first production period as the production period of the discrimination result suggestion effect showing a specific discrimination result. Since the effect period setting means is configured so as to be, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the privileged game can be improved by executing the third specific effect.

In any of the gaming machines U8 to U10, the specific effect executing means has a period from the start of the discrimination result suggestion effect of the second effect period to the elapse of a period of the same length as the first effect period. The specific effect can be executed by the first period set between them and the second period set after a period having the same length as the first effect period has elapsed. In the type determining means, the ratio of determining the third specific effect is higher when the specific condition is satisfied in the first period than in the second period, and the type is determined. The determining means is characterized in that the third specific effect is determined in the first period at a common specific ratio, regardless of whether or not the determination result suggestion effect indicates the specific determination result. The gaming machine U11.

According to the gaming machine U11, the first period and the first effect set between the start of the determination result suggestion effect of the second effect period and the elapse of a period of the same length as the first effect period. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means in the second period set after the period having the same length as the period has elapsed. When the specific condition is satisfied in the first period, the determination ratio of the third specific effect by the type determining means is higher than in the second period. Regardless of whether or not it is a discrimination result suggestion effect indicating a specific determination result, the third specific effect is determined in the first period at a common specific ratio by the type determination means.

As a result, it becomes difficult to execute the specific effect of the type showing the discrimination result during the first period, so that there is an effect that the expectation for the specific discrimination result can be maintained until the second period.

<Characteristic V group> (Variable number of button operations according to the effect)
A specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect mode and a specific effect mode execution means for executing a specific effect mode based on the fact that a predetermined first condition is satisfied in the specific period included in the execution period of the specific effect. The specific control execution means is provided with the specific control execution means capable of executing a predetermined specific control based on the fact that the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, and the specific control execution means is the second. A game characterized in that it is configured so that it is more difficult to execute the specific control when the condition is satisfied during the specific period than when the condition is satisfied in a period different from the specific period. Machine V1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In this conventional gaming machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a winning game advantageous to the player is given. Further, on the display device, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed in addition to the design, and the entertainment of the game is improved by executing a wide variety of entertainment effects (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886 (Ab. 2003-325886).

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, an operation means that can be operated by the player is provided, and the suggestion effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the game will be a hit by operating the operation means during the execution of the hobby effect. There are also things that can be done.

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, various settings of the gaming machine can be changed by operating the operating means while the suggestion effect is not executed.

However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the setting of the gaming machine may be changed against the intention of the player due to an operation error during the execution of the suggestion effect.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine V1, the following effects are obtained. That is, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means. Based on the fact that the predetermined first condition is satisfied in the specific period included in the execution period of the specific effect, the specific effect mode execution means executes the specific effect mode. Based on the fact that the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, a predetermined specific control is executed by the specific control executing means. It is more difficult for the specific control executing means to execute the specific control when the second condition is satisfied during the specific period than when the second condition is satisfied in a period different from the specific period.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted by the specific control due to the execution of the specific control in the specific period, so that the player can concentrate on the specific production mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the specific effect can be executed more preferably.

The gaming machine V1 is provided with an operating means that can be operated by the player, and the first condition is satisfied based on the fact that the operation of the first operation content is executed for the operating means during the specific period. The second condition is characterized in that the operation of the second operation content different from the first operation content is executed for the operation means. Pachinko machine V2.

According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first condition is satisfied based on the fact that the operation of the first operation content is executed for the operation means during the specific period. The second condition is satisfied based on the fact that the operation of the second operation content different from the first operation content is executed for the operation means.

As a result, when a player who wants to display a specific effect mode during a specific period mistakenly operates the second operation content in an attempt to operate the first operation content, the player performs the operation of the second operation content. Since the execution of a specific control is restricted, there is an effect that it is possible to concentrate more on a specific effect.

In the gaming machine V2, the specific control executing means executes the specific control every time the operation of the second operation content is executed in a period different from the specific period, and the second operation is performed in the specific period. The gaming machine V3 is characterized in that the specific control is executed based on the fact that the operation of the operation content is established a predetermined specific number of times.

According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine V2, a specific control can be executed by the specific control executing means every time the operation of the second operation content is executed in a period different from the specific period. Then, since the specific control is executed by the specific control execution means based on the fact that the second operation content is established a predetermined number of times in the specific period, it is desired to intentionally execute the specific control during the specific period. It is possible to fulfill the request of the player who thinks that. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be further improved.

In the gaming machine V2 or V3, the operating means is composed of at least a first operating means and a second operating means provided adjacent to the first operating means, and the first operating means. The gaming machine V4 is characterized in that the operation of the operation content is an operation for the first operating means, and the operation of the second operating content is an operation for the second operating means.

According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines V2 or V3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the operating means is composed of at least a first operating means and a second operating means provided adjacent to the first operating means. The operation of the first operation content is an operation for the first operation means, and the operation of the second operation content is an operation for the second operation means.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the second control from being executed against the player's will when the second operating means is mistakenly operated in an attempt to operate the first operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the specific effect can be executed more preferably.

In any of the gaming machines V1 to V4, the specific control is a control for changing a predetermined setting of the gaming machine from the first setting to the second setting.

According to the gaming machine V5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines V1 to V4, when a specific control is executed, the predetermined setting of the gaming machine is changed from the first setting to the second setting. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting of the gaming machine from being changed during a specific period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be concentrated by the specific production.

In any of the gaming machines V1 to V5, a discriminant means for executing the discriminant based on the establishment of the discriminant condition and a privileged game advantageous to the player based on the discriminating result of the discriminating means becoming a specific discriminant result. A plurality of types including at least a first aspect and a second aspect different from the first aspect as the type of the special effect mode executed by the privileged game execution means for executing the above-mentioned specific effect mode execution means. The specific effect is provided with an aspect type determining means for determining one type from the inside, and the specific effect is composed of an effect for showing the discrimination result of the discriminating means, and the aspect type determining means is described. When the first condition is satisfied during the execution period of the specific effect showing a specific determination result, the ratio of determining the second aspect is higher than that of the first aspect. A gaming machine V6 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine V6, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines V1 to V5, the following effects are played. That is, the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result. To. As a type of a specific effect mode executed by the specific effect mode execution means, one type is selected by the mode type determination means from a plurality of modes including at least a first aspect and a second aspect different from the first aspect. It is determined. The specific effect is composed of an effect for showing the determination result of the determination means. When the first condition is satisfied during the execution period of the specific effect showing the specific determination result, the determination ratio of the first aspect by the aspect type determining means is higher than the determination ratio of the second aspect.

As a result, it can be expected that the second aspect is determined each time the first condition is satisfied, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine V2, when the second condition is satisfied, the allowed state in which the specific control executing means is allowed to execute the specific control, and the second condition are satisfied, in the gaming machine V2. The gaming machine V7 is provided with a state switching means for switching between a restricted state in which execution of the specific control is restricted by the specific control executing means.

According to the gaming machine V7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine V2, an allowable state in which the execution of a specific control by the specific control executing means is permitted when the second condition is satisfied during a specific period, and the second condition. When is satisfied, the restricted state in which the execution of the specific control by the specific control execution means is restricted is switched by the state switching means, so that the player who wants the specific control to be executed during the specific period. We can fulfill your request. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

The gaming machine V7 includes a limited state setting means for setting the restricted state based on the start of the specific period, and the state switching means has a third state with respect to the operating means during the restricted state. The gaming machine V8 is characterized in that it switches to the permissible state based on the operation of the operation content being executed.

According to the gaming machine V8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the restricted state is set by the restricted state setting means based on the start of the specific period. Based on the fact that the operation of the third operation content is executed for the operating means during the restricted state, the state switching means switches to the allowable state.

As a result, it is possible to easily fulfill the request of the player who dares to execute a specific control during a specific period. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be further improved.

In the gaming machine V8, the state switching means limits the operation means based on the fact that the operation means is operated with a fourth operation content different from the third operation content during the permissible state. A gaming machine V9 characterized by switching to a state.

According to the gaming machine V9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine V8, an operation of a fourth operation content different from the third operation content is executed for the operating means during the allowable state. Since the state can be switched to the restricted state by the state switching means, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be further improved.

In the gaming machine V9, the specific effect mode executing means is characterized in that the execution of the specific effect mode is restricted when the first condition is satisfied in the permissible state.

According to the gaming machine V10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine V9, when the first condition is satisfied in the allowable state, the execution of the specific effect mode by the specific effect mode executing means is restricted. Can be focused on the control of. Therefore, there is an effect that more suitable control can be realized.

In the gaming machine V10, the operation of the fourth operation content is the same as the operation of the first operation content.

According to the gaming machine V11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine V10, the operation of the fourth operation content and the operation of the first operation content are the same, so that the switching from the allowable state to the restricted state is specified. It is possible to realize the execution of the effect mode by the operation of the same operation content. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation can be further simplified.

In any of the gaming machines U8 to U10, the specific effect executing means has a period from the start of the discrimination result suggestion effect of the second effect period to the elapse of a period of the same length as the first effect period. The specific effect can be executed by the first period set between them and the second period set after a period having the same length as the first effect period has elapsed. In the type determining means, the ratio of determining the third specific effect is higher when the specific condition is satisfied in the first period than in the second period, and the type is determined. The determining means is characterized in that the third specific effect is determined in the first period at a common specific ratio, regardless of whether or not the determination result suggestion effect indicates the specific determination result. The gaming machine U11.

According to the gaming machine U11, the first period and the first effect set between the start of the determination result suggestion effect of the second effect period and the elapse of a period of the same length as the first effect period. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means in the second period set after the period having the same length as the period has elapsed. When the specific condition is satisfied in the first period, a higher ratio is determined by the type determining means than in the second period. Regardless of whether or not it is a discrimination result suggestion effect indicating a specific determination result, when the specific condition is satisfied in the first period, the third specific effect is determined at a common ratio by the type determination means.

As a result, it becomes difficult to execute the specific effect of the type showing the discrimination result during the first period, so that there is an effect that the expectation for the specific discrimination result can be maintained until the second period.

<Characteristic W group> (Structure in which the degree of expectation changes even with the same movement according to the appearance timing of the mini character)
A display means capable of displaying an effect mode, a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a discrimination result for the discrimination means to the player based on a predetermined specific discrimination result. A privilege game executing means for executing an advantageous privilege game, a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect indicating a discrimination result of the discriminating means, and a predetermined display means for the display means during execution of the specific effect. A display control means capable of displaying a specific display mode, a first timing included in the production period of the specific effect, and a first timing thereof as timings for displaying the specific display mode by the display control means. A second timing different from the timing, and a display timing determining means for determining one display timing from a plurality of including at least a plurality of timings are provided, and the second timing is a second discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. The gaming machine W1 is characterized in that the specific effect indicating the specific determination result is determined at a higher rate than the specific effect indicating the above.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In this conventional gaming machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a winning game advantageous to the player is given. Further, on the display device, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed in addition to the design, and the entertainment of the game is improved by executing a wide variety of entertainment effects (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886 (Ab. 2003-325886).

In addition, in the conventional gaming machine, apart from the hobby effect related to the variable display of the symbol, the character is made to perform a predetermined action to show a predetermined degree of expectation, etc. There are also those that are trying to improve.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, it may be difficult to understand the correspondence between the variable display of the symbol and the action of the character.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine W1, the following effects are obtained. That is, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the privilege game execution means is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes a predetermined specific discrimination result. The game is executed. A specific effect indicating the determination result by the determination means is executed by the specific effect execution means. During the execution of the specific effect, the display control means displays a predetermined specific display mode for the display means. The display timing is determined from a plurality of timings including at least a first timing included in the effect period of the specific effect and a second timing different from the first timing as the timing at which the specific display mode is displayed by the display control means. The display timing of 1 is determined by the means. The second timing is configured so that the ratio of determining the specific effect showing the specific determination result is higher than that of the specific effect showing the second determination result different from the specific determination result.

As a result, the game can be performed by paying attention to whether or not a specific display mode is displayed at the second timing, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine W1, as an effect mode during execution of the specific effect, a first effect mode and a second effect mode that can be executed after the first effect mode is completed can be at least executed as an effect mode execution means. In the second effect mode, the specific effect showing the specific determination result is executed at a higher rate than the specific effect showing the second determination result. The gaming machine W2 is characterized in that the display mode is configured so as to be able to at least suggest that the second effect mode is executed by being executed at the second timing.

According to the gaming machine W2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine W1. That is, as the effect mode during the execution of the specific effect, the first effect mode and the second effect mode that can be executed after the first effect mode is completed are configured to be at least feasible by the effect mode execution means. There is. The second effect mode is configured so that the specific effect showing the specific determination result is executed at a higher rate than the specific effect showing the second determination result. The specific display mode is configured to at least suggest that the second effect mode is executed by being executed at the second timing.

As a result, it is possible to realize the playability of playing a game by comparing a specific effect with a specific display mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine W2, the display timing determining means determines the second timing in the specific effect in which the second effect mode is executed, higher than the specific effect in which the second effect mode is not executed. The gaming machine W3, which is characterized in that it is configured as such.

According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine W2, the second timing is determined by the display timing determining means in the specific effect in which the second effect mode is executed, rather than the specific effect in which the second effect mode is not executed. Since the ratio is high, there is an effect that the display timing of a specific display mode can be expected to be the second timing more strongly.

In the gaming machine W2 or W3, the specific effect notifies the determination result of the discrimination means at the end of the first effect mode when the second effect mode is not executed by the effect mode executing means. The gaming machine W4 is characterized in that the second timing is configured to be a display timing in which the specific display mode is displayed across the start timing of the second effect mode.

According to the gaming machine W4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines W2 or W3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second effect mode is not executed by the effect mode execution means, the determination result of the discriminating means is notified by the specific effect at the end of the first effect mode. When the specific display mode is displayed at the second timing, the specific display mode is displayed across the start timing of the second effect mode.

As a result, by comparing the progress of the first effect mode with the display timing of the specific display mode, the player can determine that the second effect mode is started before the second effect mode is executed. Can be understood. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

The gaming machine W4 is characterized in that the first timing is configured at a display timing at which the display of the specific display mode ends during the execution period of the first effect mode.

According to the gaming machine W5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine W4, when the specific display mode is displayed at the first timing, the specific display mode ends during the execution period of the first effect mode. 2 It can be difficult to predict from a specific display mode whether or not the effect mode is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the expectation that the second effect mode is executed can be improved.

In any of the game machines W1 to W5, the ball entry means on which the game ball can enter, the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means, and the game ball from the first position. A variable means that can be changed to a second position that makes it difficult to enter the ball, a value-adding means that gives a predetermined value based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means, and the ball entry means. Based on the specific area provided at the position where the ball has entered and the game ball has entered the specific area, the second privilege game advantageous to the player is executed. 2. The privileged game executing means is provided with the privileged game executing means, and the privileged game executing means is characterized in that the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period as the privileged game. Machine W6.

According to the gaming machine W6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines W1 to W5, the following effects are played. That is, the variable means is variable between the first position where the game ball can enter into the ball entry means where the game ball can enter and the second position where the game ball becomes more difficult to enter than the first position. do. A predetermined valuable value is given by the value-giving means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball-entry means. A specific area is provided at a position where a game ball that has entered the ball entry means can enter. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific area, the second privilege game that is advantageous to the player can be executed by the second privilege game execution means. As a privilege game, the variable means is changed from the second place value to the first position for a predetermined period by the privilege game execution means.

As a result, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters a specific area, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine W6, the distribution means for distributing the game ball that has entered the ball entry means to either the specific area or the second area different from the specific area, and the privileged game execution means. As a type of the privileged game to be executed, the variable means is changed to the first position during a period in which the gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means is easily distributed to the specific area by the distribution means. Types of a plurality of privilege games including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game in which the variable means is changed to the first position during a period in which the distribution means is likely to be distributed to the second region. The privileged game type determining means for determining one of the types is provided, and the privileged game type determining means determines the first privileged game based on the specific determination result, and the second privileged game is determined. The gaming machine W7, characterized in that the second privileged gaming is determined based on the determination result.

According to the gaming machine W7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine W6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball that has entered the ball entry means is distributed to either a specific region or a second region different from the specific region by the distribution means. As a type of privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, the variable means is changed to the first position during a period in which the game ball that has entered the ball entry means is easily distributed to a specific area by the distribution means. One type of a plurality of privilege games including at least one privilege game and a second privilege game in which the variable means is changed to the first position during a period in which the distribution means is easily distributed to the second area. Is determined by the privilege game type determination means. The first privilege game is determined by the privilege game type determination means based on the specific determination result, while the second privilege game is determined by the privilege game type determination means based on the second determination result. It is determined.

This has the effect that the player can be strongly expected to have a specific determination result.

In the gaming machine game machine W7, the second timing is the specific effect showing the second determination result rather than the specific effect showing the deviation determination result in which the privilege game is not executed by the privilege game execution means. The gaming machine W8 is characterized in that it is configured so that the rate of determination is higher.

According to the gaming machine W8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine W7, a method of a specific effect showing a second discrimination result rather than a specific effect showing a deviation determination result in which the privilege game is not executed by the privilege game execution means. However, since the rate at which the second timing is determined increases, there is an effect that the expectation that the privilege game is executed can be improved when a specific display mode is displayed at the second timing.

In the gaming machine W8, the second privilege game executing means has a third discrimination result in which the discrimination result of the discrimination means is different from any of the specific discrimination result, the second discrimination result, and the deviation discrimination result. The second privilege game is executably configured based on the above, and the display timing determining means includes the specific effect showing the deviation determination result and the specific effect showing the third determination result. , The gaming machine W9, characterized in that the ratio for determining the second timing is common.

According to the gaming machine W9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine W8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second privilege game is executed by the second privilege game execution means based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the third discrimination result different from any of the specific discrimination result, the second discrimination result, and the deviation discrimination result. Will be done. The ratio of determining the second timing by the display timing determining means is standardized between the specific effect showing the deviation determination result and the specific effect showing the third determination result.

As a result, even when the specific display mode is not displayed at the second timing, there is an effect that the expectation for the specific effect showing the third determination result can be maintained.

<Characteristic X group> (During a small hit, a production that suggests the degree of expectation of switching to a route that is easily guided to the V winning opening, which has a high degree of time saving expectation, is executed at a timing that is not in time even if you hit it after seeing it)
At the entry means where the game ball can enter, the first position where the game ball can enter into the entry means, and the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. Variable means that can be changed,
A first flow path in which a game ball that has entered the ball entry means can flow down, a second flow path that is different from the first flow path, and a game ball that has entered the ball entry means. Is provided at a position where a pachinko ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and a distribution means for distributing the first flow path to any of a plurality of flow paths including at least the first flow path and the second flow path. A specific area, a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific area, and a discrimination for executing the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. A variable game execution in which the variable means executes a variable game in which the means and the discriminating means are variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the discriminating result of the discriminating means. Based on the means and the variable game execution means executing the variable game, the first distribution state in which the game ball that has entered the ball entry means is distributed to the first flow path, and the above-mentioned Execution of the variable game, the distribution control means for controlling the distribution means so that a plurality of distribution states including at least the second distribution state distributed to the second flow path are switched in a specific switching pattern. Among them, the gaming machine X1 is provided with a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect suggesting that the first distribution state is set.

Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has an entry port that allows the ball to enter when the electric accessory is opened (or movable), and the game ball enters the entry opening. A game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device that is opened during a specific game (small hit game, etc.) to be executed passes through a specific area (winning switch, etc.) provided in the V winning device. A pachinko machine has been proposed that enables a player to be given a privileged game (a winning game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player, and has been aimed at improving the interest of the player in the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010741).

In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines are provided with a distribution member that distributes the gaming ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device into either a specific area or a non-specific area. By paying attention to the distribution method by the distribution member, the player's interest in the game was improved.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, it is difficult to understand the state of the distribution member, and it is difficult to grasp to which region the gaming ball entered inside the V winning device is distributed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine X1, the first position where the gaming ball can enter into the entry means where the gaming ball can enter, and the first position where the gaming ball can enter more difficult than the first position. Variable means are variably configured at the second position. A first flow path and a second flow path are provided at positions where the game ball that has entered the ball entry means can flow down. The game ball that has entered the ball entry means is distributed by the distribution means to any one of a plurality of channels including at least a first channel and a second channel. A specific area is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and a privilege based on the fact that the game ball enters the specific area is a privilege advantageous to the player by the game execution means. The game is executed. Discrimination by the discriminating means is executed based on the establishment of the discriminating condition, and based on the fact that the discriminating result of the discriminating means is a specific discriminant result, the variable game executing means causes the variable means to move from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period. A variable game that is variable to the position is executed. Based on the fact that the variable game is executed by the variable game execution means, the game ball that has entered the ball entry means is distributed to the first flow path and the first distribution state in which the game ball is distributed to the first flow path. The distribution means is controlled by the distribution control means so that the second distribution state and a plurality of distribution states including at least a plurality of distribution states are switched in a predetermined switching pattern. During the execution of the variable game, the specific effect suggesting that the first distribution state is set is executed by the specific effect executing means.

As a result, it is possible to focus on whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of the specific effect, so that the player can improve the interest in the game. There is.

The gaming machine X1 includes a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball, and the specific switching pattern is such that the gaming ball launched by the launching means after the specific effect is started is in the first distribution state. The gaming machine X2 is characterized in that the length of the period for switching to the first distribution state is set so as to make it difficult to reach the ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine X2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine X1, the specific switching pattern is a means of entering the ball while the gaming ball launched by the launching means is in the first distribution state after the specific effect is started. Since the length of the period for switching to the first distribution state is set so that it becomes difficult to reach, the playability that makes it expected that the specific effect will be executed at the timing when the game ball enters is realized. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine X1 or X2, a third flow path, which is configured so that the game ball that has entered the ball entry means can flow down and is different from both the first flow path and the second flow path, and the third flow path thereof. The distribution means includes a second specific area provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the road can enter, and the distribution means uses the game ball that has entered the ball entry means as the first flow path. , The second flow path and the third flow path, and the distribution control means includes the first distribution state, the second distribution state, and the ball entry means. The distribution means is controlled so that the third distribution state in which the game ball that has entered the ball is distributed to the third flow path and the third distribution state are switched by the specific switching pattern, and the privilege game execution means. The gaming machine X3 is characterized in that the privileged game is executed based on the fact that the gaming ball enters at least one of the specific area and the second specific area.

According to the gaming machine X3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines X1 or X2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second specific region is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the third flow path into which the game ball that has entered the ball entry means can flow down. The game ball that has entered the ball entry means is distributed to either the first flow path, the second flow path, or the third flow path. The first distribution state, the second distribution state, and the third distribution state in which the game ball that has entered the ball entry means is distributed to the third flow path are switched in a specific switching pattern. The distribution means is controlled by the distribution control means. The privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the fact that the game ball enters at least one of the specific area and the second specific area.

As a result, even if the game ball does not enter the ball entry means during the execution of the specific effect, the bonus game is executed by the game ball entering during the third distribution state, so that the specific effect is executed. Even when the game ball enters the ball entry means at a timing different from that during the execution of the above, there is an effect that the player's expectation for the privileged game can be maintained.

In the gaming machine X3, as a gaming state after the privileged gaming is completed, one gaming state is selected from a plurality of including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state. The game state setting means is provided with a game state setting means to be set, and the game state setting means has a game ball entering the specific area as compared with a case where the game ball enters the second specific area and the privilege game is executed. The gaming machine X4 is characterized in that the ratio of setting the second gaming state is higher when the privileged gaming is executed.

According to the gaming machine X4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the game state after the privileged game is completed, one game state is set by the game state setting means from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous than the first game state. Is set. When the game ball enters the specific area and the privilege game is executed, the second case where the game state setting means is used is better than when the game ball enters the specific area and the privilege game is executed. The setting ratio of the game state becomes high.

This has the effect that the game ball can be expected to enter the ball entry means more strongly during the execution of the specific effect.

In the game machine X4, as the type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, the game ball enters the second specific area during the execution period of the variable game, and the privilege game is executed. In this case, one of a plurality of types including at least a first variable game type in which the first game state is set by the game state setting means and a second variable game type in which the second game state is set. The first variable game type is configured to include a variable game type determining means for determining the type of the first variable game type, so that the ratio determined by the variable game type determining means is higher than that of the second variable game type. A gaming machine X5 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine X5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as a type of variable game executed by the variable game execution means, when the game ball enters the second specific area during the execution period of the variable game and the privilege game is executed, the game state setting means. One type is determined by the variable game type determining means from a plurality of types including at least a first variable game type in which the first game state is set and a second variable game type in which the second game state is set. To. The first variable game type is configured so that the ratio determined by the variable game type determining means is higher than that of the second variable game type.

This has the effect that when the game ball enters the second specific area, it can be expected that the second variable game type will be determined.

The gaming machine X5 is provided with a second specific effect executing means for executing a second specific effect suggesting that the third variable distribution state is being executed during the execution of the variable game of the second variable game type. Characterized gaming machine X6.

According to the gaming machine X6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine X5, the second specific effect suggesting that the third distribution state is set during the execution of the variable game of the second variable game type is the second specific effect. Since it is executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to make the player recognize that when the second specific effect is executed in the third distribution state, the second variable game type is set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to strongly expect the game ball to enter the ball entry means during the execution of the second specific effect.

In the gaming machine X5 or X6, the gaming state setting means is a type of the variable game determined by the variable game type determining means when the game ball enters the specific area and the privilege game is executed. Regardless of the above, the gaming machine X7 is characterized in that the second gaming state is set as the gaming state after the privileged gaming is completed.

According to the gaming machine X7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine X5 or X6, when a gaming ball enters a specific area and a privileged game is executed, a variable gaming type determined by a variable gaming type determining means. Regardless of this, since the second game state is set by the game state setting means as the game state after the privileged game is completed, it is more likely that the game ball enters the ball entry means during the execution of the specific effect. There is an effect that the game can be played with high expectations.

In any of the gaming machines X4 to X7, the second gaming state is a gaming state in which the discrimination result of the discrimination means is more likely to be a specific discrimination result than the first gaming state. ..

According to the gaming machine X8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines X4 to X7, in the second gaming state, the discrimination result of the discrimination means is more likely to be a specific discrimination result than in the first gaming state. On the other hand, there is an effect that the player can be expected to be in the second gaming state more strongly.

The gaming machine X8 includes a first ball-entry means on which a game ball can enter and a second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means, and the discriminating means reaches the first ball-entry means. The first discriminating means that executes the discrimination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball, and the second discriminating means that executes the discrimination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means. At least, the discrimination by the first discriminating means is configured to have a lower probability of producing the specific discriminating result than the discriminating by the second discriminating means, and the first game is configured. The gaming machine X9 is characterized in that the state is configured to make it more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the second entering means than the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine X9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a first ball entry means on which a game ball can enter and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means are provided. While the determination is executed by the first discrimination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, the second determination is based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry means. The determination is performed by means. The discrimination by the first discrimination means is configured so that the probability that a specific discrimination result is obtained is lower than the discrimination by the second discrimination means. In the first gaming state, it is more difficult to allow the gaming ball to enter the second entry means than in the second gaming state.

This has the effect that when the determination by the second determination means is executed, it can be expected that the variable game is executed more strongly.

In the game machine X9, a second position that can be changed to a third position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position. The gaming machine X10 comprising variable means, wherein the first gaming state is configured such that the second variable means is less likely to be variable to the third position than the second gaming state. ..

According to the gaming machine X10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a second variable means that can be changed to a third position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position is provided. Has been done. In the first gaming state, the second variable means is less likely to be variable to the third position than in the second gaming state.

As a result, the superiority of the second gaming state can be further enhanced, so that there is an effect that the second gaming state can be expected more strongly.

<Characteristic Y group> (Small hit opening control that suppresses magnet goto without affecting normal games)
In the entry means where the game ball can enter, the first position where the game ball can enter into the entry means, and the second position where the game ball becomes more difficult to enter than the first position. The variable means is predetermined based on a variable means that can be changed, a specific area provided at a position where a game ball that has entered the ball entering means can enter, and a predetermined specific condition. Based on the variable game executing means for executing the variable game that is variable from the second position to the first position during the period, and the game ball entering the specific area during the execution period of the variable game. A privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege advantageous to the player, a discharging means for discharging the game ball that has entered the ball entering means to the outside of the ball entering means, and an execution of the variable game. The variable game is played regardless of whether or not all the gaming balls that have entered the ball entry means have been ejected by the ejection means based on the elapse of a predetermined specific period since the start of the game. A gaming machine Y1 comprising: a variable gaming ending means capable of ending.

Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has an entry port that allows the ball to enter when the electric accessory is opened (or movable), and the game ball enters the entry opening. A game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device that is opened during a specific game (small hit game, etc.) to be executed passes through a specific area (winning switch, etc.) provided in the V winning device. A pachinko machine has been proposed that enables a player to be given a privileged game (a winning game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player, and has been aimed at improving the interest of the player in the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010741).

In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines are provided with a distribution member that distributes the gaming ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device into either a specific area or a non-specific area. By paying attention to the distribution method by the distribution member, the player's interest in the game was improved.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, when the gaming ball is forcibly guided to a specific area regardless of the state of the distribution member by the fraudulent act using a magnet or the like, the fraudster There was a problem that it would be unfairly advantageous.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine Y1, the following effects are obtained. That is, the variable means is variable to a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. A specific area is provided at a position where a game ball that has entered the ball entry means can enter the ball. A variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition is executed by the variable game execution means. Based on the fact that the game ball enters a specific area during the execution period of the variable game, a predetermined privilege that is advantageous to the player is given by the privilege granting means. The game ball that has entered the ball entry means is discharged to the outside of the ball entry means by the discharge means. A variable game regardless of whether or not all the game balls that have entered the ball entry means are ejected by the ejection means based on the elapse of a predetermined specific period from the start of the variable game execution. The variable game is terminated by the termination means.

This has the effect that the variable game can be ended more preferably.

In the game machine Y1, a specific flow path through which a game ball that has entered the ball entry means can pass, a first distribution state in which the game ball that has entered the specific flow path is distributed to the specific area, and the above-mentioned A second distribution state that distributes to a second area different from the specific area, a variable distribution means, and the first distribution state and the second distribution state based on the establishment of the specific condition. And are provided with a distribution control means that controls the distribution means so that The game ball that has passed and has flowed down toward the specific area is composed of a period of a length that makes it difficult to enter the specific area during the execution period of the variable game. Characterized gaming machine Y2.

According to the gaming machine Y2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Y1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball that has entered the specific flow path through which the game ball that has entered the ball entry means can pass is distributed to the first distribution state and the second area that is different from the specific area. The second distribution state and the distribution means are variably configured. Based on the establishment of the specific condition, the distribution control means controls the distribution means so that the first distribution state and the second distribution state are switched in a predetermined specific switching pattern. During the specific period, it is difficult for the game ball that has passed through the specific flow path during the second distribution state and has flowed down toward the specific area to enter the specific area during the execution period of the variable game. It is composed of a period of length that becomes.

As a result, when the unnatural operation of flowing down to a specific area even though the ball has passed through the specific flow path during the second distribution state, it is variable before entering the specific area. The game can be ended. Therefore, there is an effect that the act of forcibly causing the game ball to flow down to a specific area due to fraudulent acts can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine Y2, during the specific period, the gaming ball that has passed through the specific flow path during the first distribution state and has flowed down toward the specific region is during the execution period of the variable game. The gaming machine Y3 is characterized in that it is configured for a period of a length that allows the ball to easily enter the specific area.

According to the gaming machine Y3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Y2, the gaming ball that has passed through the specific flow path during the first distribution state and has flowed down toward the specific area during the first distribution state is a variable game. Since it is composed of a period of length that allows the ball to easily enter a specific area during the execution period of, when the ball enters a specific area by a natural movement, the predetermined privilege is normally given. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress cheating without affecting a normal player.

In the gaming machine Y2 or Y3, the distribution means is variable to the first distribution state, thereby closing the bottom surface of the specific range in the specific flow path and allowing the game ball to pass through the specific range. The gaming machine Y4 is characterized in that the bottom surface of the specific range is opened by changing to the second distribution state, and the gaming ball that has reached the specific range is dropped toward the second region.

According to the gaming machine Y4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Y2 or Y3, the sorting means is changed to the first sorting state, so that the bottom surface of the specific range in the specific flow path is closed and the game ball is covered in the specific range. By changing the distribution means to the second distribution state, the bottom surface of the specific range is opened and the game ball that has reached the specific range is dropped toward the second area. In the case where the pachinko ball flows down to the specific area even though it has passed through the specific flow path during the second distribution state, the game ball is forcibly guided to the specific area by floating the game ball with respect to the specific flow path by a magnet or the like. It can be limited to the case where a fraudulent act is committed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress fraudulent activities without affecting the players who are playing the game normally.

The gaming machine Y4 is provided with a shielding means for shielding the gaming area so that it is difficult for the player to touch the gaming area, and the specific range is a distance to the shielding means rather than another range in the specific flow path. The gaming machine Y5 is characterized in that it is configured so as to be far away.

According to the gaming machine Y5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Y4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the gaming area is shielded by the shielding means so that it is difficult for the player to touch the gaming area. The specific range is configured to be farther from the shielding means than the other ranges in the specific flow path.

As a result, even if an attempt is made to guide the game ball with a magnet or the like, the influence of the magnetic force on the game ball can be weakened in a specific range, which makes it difficult to guide the game ball to a specific area. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress fraudulent activities.

In any of the gaming machines Y1 to Y5, a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition is provided, and the variable game execution means is based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes a specific discrimination result. The gaming machine Y6 is characterized in that the variable gaming is executed.

According to the gaming machine Y6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines Y1 to Y5, the following effects are played. That is, the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. A variable game is executed by the variable game executing means based on the fact that the discriminant result of the discriminating means becomes a specific discriminant result.

This has the effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the discrimination result of the discrimination means.

In the gaming machine Y6, as the gaming state after the granting of the predetermined privilege by the privilege granting means is completed, the first gaming state in which the discrimination result of the discrimination means is unlikely to be the specific discrimination result and the first gaming state thereof. The gaming machine Y7 is characterized by comprising a second gaming state in which the specific determination result is more likely to occur, and a gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least one.

According to the gaming machine Y7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Y6, as a gaming state after the granting of a predetermined privilege by the privilege granting means is completed, the discrimination result of the discriminating means is unlikely to be a specific discriminant result. The second gaming state is set because one gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means from among a plurality of the second gaming states that are more likely to have a specific determination result than the first gaming state. There is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation.

In the gaming machine Y7, a specific flow path through which the game ball entering the ball entry means can pass, a first distribution state in which the game ball entering the specific flow path is distributed to the specific area, and the above-mentioned A second distribution state that distributes to a second area different from the specific area, a variable distribution means, and the first distribution state and the second distribution state based on the establishment of the specific condition. The distribution control means is provided to control the distribution means so that Based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the ball, the privileged game that is advantageous to the player is executed as the predetermined privilege, and the gaming state setting means is the case where the gaming ball enters the specific area. It is configured so that the ratio of setting the second gaming state as the gaming state after the execution of the privileged game is completed is lower than that in the case of entering the second region. A gaming machine Y8 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine Y8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Y7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first distribution state in which the game ball that has entered the specific flow path into which the game ball that has entered the ball entry means is distributed to the specific area and the second area that is different from the specific area are distributed. The two distribution states and the distribution means are variably configured. Based on the establishment of the specific condition, the distribution control means controls the distribution means so that the first distribution state and the second distribution state are switched in a predetermined specific switching pattern. Based on the fact that the game ball enters at least one of the specific area and the second area, the privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege granting means as a predetermined privilege. Setting the second game state by the game state setting means as the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed when the game ball enters the second area than when the game ball enters the specific area. The ratio will be low.

This has the effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation that the game ball will enter the specific area.

A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E8, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, H1 to H10, I1 to I8, J1 to J9, K1 to K9, L1 to L8, From M1 to M9, from N1 to N8, from O1 to O7, from P1 to P10, from Q1 to Q9, from R1 to R9, from S1 to S8, from T1 to T8, from U1 to U11, from V1 to V11, from W1 to W9, from X1 to X10, from Y1. In any of Y8, the gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. The identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time, provided that the prize is won (or passed through the operating port). Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E8, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, H1 to H10, I1 to I8, J1 to J9, K1 to K9, L1 to L8, From M1 to M9, from N1 to N8, from O1 to O7, from P1 to P10, from Q1 to Q9, from R1 to R9, from S1 to S8, from T1 to T8, from U1 to U11, from V1 to V11, from W1 to W9, from X1 to X10, from Y1. In any of Y8, the gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E8, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, H1 to H10, I1 to I8, J1 to J9, K1 to K9, L1 to L8, From M1 to M9, from N1 to N8, from O1 to O7, from P1 to P10, from Q1 to Q9, from R1 to R9, from S1 to S8, from T1 to T8, from U1 to U11, from V1 to V11, from W1 to W9, from X1 to X10, from Y1. In any of Y8, the gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "
<Others>
Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, a variable display of symbols is performed on a display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. Further, on the display device, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed in addition to the design, and the entertainment of the game is improved by executing a wide variety of entertainment effects (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886 (Ab. 2003-325886).
However, there is a need for further improvement in interest.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, in the gaming machine of the technical idea 1, the display means capable of displaying the effect mode, the discrimination means for executing the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means are predetermined. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the specific determination result obtained, a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect indicating the determination result of the determination means, and the specific effect. The display control means capable of displaying a predetermined specific display mode to the display means during the execution of the effect, and the timing at which the specific display mode is displayed by the display control means are described above. The first timing included in the production period of the specific effect, a second timing different from the first timing, and a display timing determining means for determining one display timing from a plurality of including at least the first timing are provided. The two timings are configured such that the specific effect showing the specific determination result is determined at a higher rate than the specific effect showing the second determination result different from the specific determination result. It is a thing.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 can be executed in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 as an effect mode during the execution of the specific effect, the first effect mode and after the first effect mode is completed. The specific effect showing the specific discrimination result is better than the specific effect showing the second discrimination result in the second effect mode, which is provided with the effect mode executing means capable of at least performing the two effect modes. The rate of execution is high, and the specific display mode is configured to at least suggest that the second effect mode is executed by being executed at the second timing. be.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in which the display timing determining means executes the second effect mode rather than the specific effect in which the second effect mode is not executed. It is configured so that the ratio of determining the second timing in the specific effect is high.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 or 3, wherein the specific effect is the first effect mode when the second effect mode is not executed by the effect mode executing means. At the end, the discriminant result of the discriminating means is notified, and the second timing is configured at a display timing in which the specific display mode is displayed across the start timing of the second effect mode. be.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 4, wherein the first timing is a display timing at which the display of the specific display mode ends during the execution period of the first effect mode. It is what has been done.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, a display means capable of displaying an effect mode, a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a specific discrimination result in which the discrimination result is predetermined. A privilege game executing means for executing a privileged game advantageous to the player based on the determination result, a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect indicating the determination result of the determination means, and the specific effect being executed. In addition, a display control means capable of displaying a predetermined specific display mode to the display means, and an effect of the specific effect as a timing at which the specific display mode is displayed by the display control means. The second timing includes a display timing determining means for determining a display timing of 1 from a plurality of including at least a first timing included in the period and a second timing different from the first timing. The specific effect showing the specific determination result is configured to be determined at a higher rate than the specific effect showing the second determination result different from the specific determination result.
This has the effect of improving the player's interest in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the first effect mode and the first effect mode are completed as the effect modes during the execution of the specific effect. The second effect mode is provided with a second effect mode that can be executed after the process is performed, and an effect mode execution means that can at least execute the second effect mode. The rate of execution of the specific effect shown is higher, and it can be at least suggested that the second effect mode is executed by executing the specific display mode at the second timing. It is composed of.
As a result, it is possible to realize the playability of playing a game by comparing a specific effect with a specific display mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the display timing determining means is the second effect rather than the specific effect in which the second effect mode is not executed. Since the ratio of determining the second timing is high in the specific effect in which the effect mode is executed, it is more strongly expected that the display timing of the specific display mode will be the second timing. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2 or 3, the specific effect is performed when the second effect mode is not executed by the effect mode executing means. The discrimination result of the discrimination means is notified at the end of the first effect mode, and the second timing is a display timing in which the specific display mode is displayed across the start timing of the second effect mode. It is composed of.
As a result, by comparing the progress of the first effect mode with the display timing of the specific display mode, the player can determine that the second effect mode is started before the second effect mode is executed. Can be understood. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4, the first timing is a display of the specific display mode during the execution period of the first effect mode. Since it is configured at the display timing at which is finished, it is possible to make it difficult to predict from a specific display mode whether or not the second effect mode is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the expectation that the second effect mode is executed can be improved.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
223fe Press count counter (part of holding means)
223ff Operation frequency flag (part of holding means)
Special game execution means in S264 11th and 12th embodiments
Discrimination means in S305, S322 11th and 12th embodiments
S4504 First effect execution means in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments
S40406 Second effect executing means and third effect executing means in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments.
S40603 to S40608 Ratio setting means
S40609 First effect mode determining means, second effect mode determining means in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments.
S40610 First specific effect executing means and second specific effect executing means in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments.
S41203 Establishment status determination means
CB center button (operation means)

Claims (1)

A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and
In a gaming machine having a privileged game execution means for executing a privileged game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the discrimination means becoming a predetermined specific determination result.
A first effect executing means capable of executing a first effect for showing the discrimination result of the discriminating means, and a first effect executing means.
A second effect executing means for executing a second effect configured to include at least a predetermined specific aspect in a predetermined first effect period included in the execution period of the first effect.
Based on the fact that the predetermined first condition is satisfied, the first specific effect execution means for executing the first specific effect during the execution of the second effect, and the first specific effect execution means.
As the effect mode of the first specific effect executed by the first specific effect execution means, a first effect mode and a second effect mode that can suggest that it is more advantageous to the player than the first effect mode. A first effect mode determining means for determining one of a plurality of effect modes including at least,
In the second effect period, which is a period included in the execution period of the first effect and is a period after the first effect period, a third effect configured including at least the specific aspect is executed. The third production execution means to be done,
Based on the fact that the predetermined second condition is satisfied, the second specific effect execution means for executing the second specific effect during the execution of the third effect, and the second specific effect execution means.
As an effect mode of the second specific effect executed by the second specific effect execution means, a second effect mode is determined which includes at least one of the first effect mode and the second effect mode. Equipped with means for determining the mode of production,
The third effect executing means executes the first effect of the first effect when the first specific effect executed during the execution period of the first effect of 1 is the first effect mode. The third effect can be executed in the second effect period included in the period.
The gaming machine is
When the first effect for showing the specific determination result is executed, the second effect is executed by the end of the first effect, but the third effect is not executed. , A configuration in which one of a plurality of situations including at least a second situation in which both the second effect and the third effect are executed by the end of the first effect can be established.
The ratio at which the second effect mode is determined by the first effect mode determining means in the first effect in which the first effect is established in the first effect for showing the specific determination result is described above. It is higher than the ratio that the second effect mode is determined by the first effect mode determining means in the first effect that is the first effect for showing a specific determination result and the second situation is satisfied. It is a composition ,
The first effect executing means is specified to include at least a specific effect mode in which a pseudo-dynamic display mode in which a predetermined symbol is dynamically displayed and then temporarily stopped during the effect period of the first effect is executed a plurality of times. It is a configuration that can execute the first production,
The second effect and the third effect are effects that can be executed in a predetermined period before the new pseudo-dynamic display mode is executed.
The first specific effect and the second specific effect are game machines characterized in that they are effects that can suggest that the new pseudo-dynamic display mode is executed .

Images